xp7 provisioning for open systems user guide - apache …h20628.€¦ ·  ·...

636
XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide Abstract This document describes and provides instructions for using Performance Monitor, Performance Control, and Cache Residency Manager. This document is intended for system administrators and Hewlett Packard Enterprise representatives and authorized service providers who install, configure, and operate the XP7 Storage system. Part Number: 858756-001 Published: March 2016 Edition: 10

Upload: vantram

Post on 09-Apr-2018

233 views

Category:

Documents


4 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

XP7 Provisioning for Open SystemsUser Guide

AbstractThis document describes and provides instructions for using Performance Monitor, Performance Control, and Cache ResidencyManager.

This document is intended for system administrators and Hewlett Packard Enterprise representatives and authorized serviceproviders who install, configure, and operate the XP7 Storage system.

Part Number: 858756-001Published: March 2016Edition: 10

Page 2: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

© Copyright 2014, 2016 Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development LP

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for Hewlett Packard Enterprise products and servicesare set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constitutingan additional warranty. Hewlett Packard Enterprise shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.

Confidential computer software. Valid license from Hewlett Packard Enterprise required for possession, use, or copying. Consistent with FAR12.211 and 12.212, Commercial Computer Software, Computer Software Documentation, and Technical Data for Commercial Items are licensedto the U.S. Government under vendor's standard commercial license.

Links to third-party websites take you outside the Hewlett Packard Enterprise website. Hewlett Packard Enterprise has no control over and is notresponsible for information outside the Hewlett Packard Enterprise website.

Acknowledgments

Intel®, Itanium®, Pentium®, Intel Inside®, and the Intel Inside logo are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries.

Microsoft® and Windows® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Adobe® and Acrobat® are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Java® and Oracle® are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates.

UNIX® is a registered trademark of The Open Group.

Revision HistoryMay 2014Revision 1

Applies to microcode version 80-01-22-00/02 or later.

September 2014Revision 2Applies to microcode version 80-01-42-00/00 or later.

October 2014Revision 3Applies to microcode version 80-02-01-00/01or later.

December 2014Revision 4Applies to microcode version 80-02-01-00/01 or later.

January 2015Revision 5Applies to microcode version 80-02-03-00/00 or later.

April 2015Revision 6Applies to microcode version 80-02-22-00/00 or later.

June 2015Revision 7Applies to microcode version 80-02-41-00/00 or later.

September 2015Revision 8Applies to microcode version 80-03-01-00/00 or later.

December 2015Revision 9Applies to microcode version 80-03-01-00/00 or later.

March 2016Revision 10Applies to microcode version 80-04-02-00/00 or later.

Page 3: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Contents1 Introduction to provisioning................................................................................15

About provisioning..............................................................................................................................15Key terms............................................................................................................................................15Basic provisioning...............................................................................................................................16

Fixed-sized provisioning................................................................................................................16Overview of fixed-sized provisioning........................................................................................16Disadvantages..........................................................................................................................17When to use fixed-sized provisioning.......................................................................................17

Custom-sized provisioning............................................................................................................17Overview of custom-sized provisioning....................................................................................17When to use custom-sized provisioning...................................................................................18

Basic provisioning workflow...........................................................................................................18Complementary strategies..................................................................................................................19Thin Provisioning................................................................................................................................19

About Thin Provisioning.................................................................................................................19Thin Provisioning concepts............................................................................................................20When to use Thin Provisioning......................................................................................................21Thin Provisioning advantages.......................................................................................................21THP V-VOL with data direct mapping attribute.............................................................................21Thin Provisioning advantage example..........................................................................................25Thin Provisioning workflow............................................................................................................25Pool comprised of pool volumes carved from capacity virtualization-enabled parity groups........26

Smart Tiers.........................................................................................................................................28Smart Tiers....................................................................................................................................28Overview of tiers............................................................................................................................29When to use Smart Tiers...............................................................................................................29

Real Time Smart Tier..........................................................................................................................30Data retention strategies.....................................................................................................................31Requirements.....................................................................................................................................31

System requirement......................................................................................................................31Shared memory requirements..................................................................................................32

About cache management devices...............................................................................................33Calculating the number of cache management devices for THP V-VOLs...............................33Maximum capacity of cache management devices..................................................................33Calculating the number of cache management devices required by a volume that is not aTHP V-VOL..............................................................................................................................33Viewing the number of cache management devices................................................................33

2 Managing virtual storage machine resources....................................................34About virtual storage machines and virtualized resources.................................................................34Provisioning operations for resources in a virtual storage machine...................................................35Pair operations with virtual storage machine pairs.............................................................................35Program product operations for resources in a virtual storage machine............................................36Editing virtualization management settings........................................................................................36

3 Guidelines for creating a pool when capacity virtualization is enabled.............39Checking whether capacity virtualization can be enabled..................................................................39Estimating FMC capacity to be purchased.........................................................................................39

Estimating the FMC capacity ........................................................................................................39Estimating the data-size saving rate by using the HPE XP7 Gen2 FMD Compression Estimatortool (xpfmc_estimator)...................................................................................................................41Estimating the FMC capacity to expand an existing pool..............................................................42

Creating parity groups, LDEVs, and pools..........................................................................................44

Contents 3

Page 4: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Monitoring the pool capacity...............................................................................................................45Estimating FMC capacity to be added when the pool capacity is insufficient.....................................46Disabling capacity virtualization on a parity group .............................................................................46

4 Configuring resource groups.............................................................................48Resource group strategies..................................................................................................................48System configuration using resource groups.....................................................................................48Resource groups examples................................................................................................................49

Example of resource groups sharing a port..................................................................................49Example of resource groups not sharing ports..............................................................................50

Meta_resource....................................................................................................................................51Resource lock.....................................................................................................................................51User groups........................................................................................................................................51Resource group assignments.............................................................................................................51Resource group license requirements................................................................................................52Resource group rules, restrictions, and guidelines.............................................................................52Managing resource groups.................................................................................................................53

Creating resource groups..............................................................................................................53Editing resource groups.................................................................................................................53Deleting resource groups..............................................................................................................54

Using Resource Partition and other XP7 products.............................................................................55Thin Provisioning...........................................................................................................................55DKA Encryption.............................................................................................................................56LUN Manager................................................................................................................................56Performance Monitor.....................................................................................................................58Business Copy...............................................................................................................................58Fast Snap......................................................................................................................................59Continuous Access Synchronous..................................................................................................59High Availability.............................................................................................................................60Continuous Access Journal...........................................................................................................61External Storage............................................................................................................................62Open System Array Management.................................................................................................63Cache Partition..............................................................................................................................64Auto LUN.......................................................................................................................................64Volume Shredder...........................................................................................................................64Performance Control.....................................................................................................................65

5 Configuring custom-sized provisioning..............................................................66Virtual LUN functions..........................................................................................................................66Virtual LUN requirements...................................................................................................................66Virtual LUN specifications...................................................................................................................66

Virtual LUN specifications for open systems.................................................................................66CV capacity by emulation type for open systems..........................................................................67

SSID requirements.............................................................................................................................67Virtual LUN size calculations..............................................................................................................67

Calculating OPEN-V volume size (CV capacity unit is MB)..........................................................68Calculating OPEN-V volume size (CV capacity unit is blocks)......................................................68Calculating fixed-size open-systems volume size (CV capacity unit is MB)..................................69Calculating fixed-size open-systems volume size (CV capacity unit is blocks).............................69Management area capacity of an open-systems volume..............................................................70Boundary values for RAID levels...................................................................................................70Capacity of a slot...........................................................................................................................71Configuring volumes in a parity group...........................................................................................71Enabling capacity virtualization ....................................................................................................71

Disabling capacity virtualization..........................................................................................................72Configuration of interleaved parity groups..........................................................................................73

4 Contents

Page 5: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Create LDEV function.........................................................................................................................74Creating an LDEV..........................................................................................................................74Finding an LDEV ID.......................................................................................................................78Finding an LDEV SSID..................................................................................................................78Editing an LDEV SSID...................................................................................................................79Changing LDEV settings...............................................................................................................79Removing an LDEV to be registered.............................................................................................80

Blocking LDEVs..................................................................................................................................81Blocking LDEVs in a parity group.......................................................................................................82Restoring blocked LDEVs...................................................................................................................82Restoring blocked LDEVs in a parity group........................................................................................83Editing an LDEV name.......................................................................................................................84Deleting an LDEV (converting to free space).....................................................................................84Formatting LDEVs..............................................................................................................................85

About formatting LDEVs................................................................................................................86Storage system operation when LDEVs are formatted.................................................................86Quick Format function...................................................................................................................86

Quick Format specifications.....................................................................................................87Formatting a specific LDEV...........................................................................................................88Formatting all LDEVs in a parity group..........................................................................................89

Assigning an MP blade.......................................................................................................................89Assigning an MP blade to a resource............................................................................................89Changing the MP blade assigned to an LDEV..............................................................................90Changing the ALUA mode setting of LDEV...................................................................................91

6 Configuring thin provisioning.............................................................................93Thin Provisioning overview.................................................................................................................93Smart Tiers overview..........................................................................................................................93Real Time Smart Tier overview...........................................................................................................93Thin provisioning requirements...........................................................................................................93

License requirements....................................................................................................................93Pool requirements.........................................................................................................................94Pool-VOL requirements.................................................................................................................95THP V-VOL requirements..............................................................................................................97Requirements for increasing THP V-VOL capacity.......................................................................97Estimating the required capacity of pool-VOLs with System Area in the pool of the data directmapping attribute...........................................................................................................................98V-VOL page reservation requirement............................................................................................99Operating system and file system capacity...................................................................................99

Using Thin Provisioning or Smart Tiers or Real Time Smart Tier with other XP7 Storage products.100Interoperability of THP V-VOLs and pool-VOLs..........................................................................100Business Copy pair status for reclaiming zero pages.................................................................103Continuous Access Synchronous................................................................................................103High Availability...........................................................................................................................104Continuous Access Journal.........................................................................................................105Business Copy.............................................................................................................................105Auto LUN.....................................................................................................................................106Fast Snap....................................................................................................................................107Cache Partition CLPR setting......................................................................................................107Resource Partition.......................................................................................................................108

Thin Provisioning workflow...............................................................................................................108Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier.............................................................................................109

About tiered storage....................................................................................................................109Tier monitoring and data relocation.............................................................................................109Smart Pool...................................................................................................................................109

Contents 5

Page 6: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Tier monitoring and relocation cycles..........................................................................................110Auto execution mode.............................................................................................................110Manual execution mode.........................................................................................................111

Tier relocation workflow...............................................................................................................113Tier relocation rules, restrictions, and guidelines........................................................................116Buffer area of a tier......................................................................................................................119Setting external volumes for each tier.........................................................................................120Execution modes for tier relocation.............................................................................................121

Execution modes when using Remote Web Console............................................................121Viewing monitor and tier relocation information using RWC..................................................123Execution modes when using RAID Manager........................................................................124Viewing monitor and tier relocation information using RAID Manager...................................125

Relocation speed.........................................................................................................................126Monitoring modes........................................................................................................................126

Cautions when using monitoring modes................................................................................127Downloading the tier relocation log file........................................................................................128

Tier relocation log file contents...............................................................................................128Tiering policy...............................................................................................................................132

Tiering policy expansion.........................................................................................................133Tiering policy examples..........................................................................................................133Setting tiering policy on a THP V-VOL...................................................................................135Tiering policy levels................................................................................................................135Viewing the tiering policy in the performance graph..............................................................136Reserving tier capacity when setting a tiering policy..............................................................137Example of reserving tier capacity.........................................................................................138Notes on tiering policy settings..............................................................................................139Execution mode settings and tiering policy............................................................................141New page assignment tier......................................................................................................142Relocation priority..................................................................................................................144Assignment tier when pool-VOLs are deleted........................................................................145Formatted pool capacity.........................................................................................................145Used capacity, mapped capacity, and reserved capacity.......................................................146Rebalancing the usage level among parity groups................................................................146Changing the tiering policy level on a THP V-VOL................................................................147

Changing new page assignment tier of a V-VOL........................................................................147Opening the Edit Tiering Policies window...................................................................................148Changing a tiering policy.............................................................................................................148Changing relocation priority setting of a V-VOL..........................................................................149Functions overview for Real Time Smart Tier and Smart Tiers...................................................150Relocating pages whose latest I/Os frequency is suddenly high by Real Time Smart Tier.........151Smart Tiers workflow...................................................................................................................152Real Time Smart Tier workflow....................................................................................................154Smart Tiers, Real Time Smart Tier tasks and parameters..........................................................156

Task and parameter settings..................................................................................................156Display items: Setting parameters.........................................................................................157Display items: Capacity usage for each tier...........................................................................158Display items: Performance monitor statistics.......................................................................158Display items: Operation status of performance monitor/relocation.......................................158

Managing Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier.......................................................................159Changing a Thin Provisioning pool to a Smart Tiers pool......................................................159Changing monitoring and tier relocation settings...................................................................161Changing monitoring mode settings.......................................................................................161Changing relocation speed....................................................................................................162Changing buffer space for new page assignment setting......................................................163Changing buffer space for tier relocation setting....................................................................164

6 Contents

Page 7: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Viewing pool tier information.......................................................................................................164Viewing THP V-VOL tier information...........................................................................................165

Changing a Smart Tiers pool to a pool for Thin Provisioning...........................................................165Configuring a pool for Smart Tiers for use by Real Time Smart Tier................................................166Working with pools............................................................................................................................167

About pools..................................................................................................................................167About pool-VOLs.........................................................................................................................167Creating pools.............................................................................................................................168

Creating Thin Provisioning pools by selecting pool-VOLs manually......................................168Creating Thin Provisioning pools by selecting pool-VOLs automatically...............................170Creating Smart Tiers pools by selecting pool-VOLs manually...............................................173Creating Smart Tiers pools by automatically selecting pool-VOLs........................................176

Working with THP V-VOLs...............................................................................................................179About THP V-VOLs.....................................................................................................................179Relationship between a pool and THP V-VOLs..........................................................................180Protecting THP V-VOLs...............................................................................................................180Creating V-VOLs.........................................................................................................................181Editing the SSID of a THP V-VOL...............................................................................................183Changing THP V-VOL settings....................................................................................................184Removing the THP V-VOL to be registered................................................................................185Formatting LDEVs in a Windows environment............................................................................185

Monitoring capacity and performance...............................................................................................186Monitoring pool capacity..............................................................................................................186

Protecting data during pool shortages...................................................................................186Monitoring performance...............................................................................................................186

Managing I/O usage rates example.......................................................................................187Tuning with Smart Tiers...............................................................................................................187

Thresholds........................................................................................................................................188Pool utilization thresholds............................................................................................................188Pool subscription limit..................................................................................................................188

Monitoring total THP V-VOL subscription for a pool..............................................................189Changing pool thresholds............................................................................................................189Changing the pool subscription limit............................................................................................190

Working with SIMs............................................................................................................................191About SIMs..................................................................................................................................191SIM reference codes...................................................................................................................191Automatic completion of a SIM....................................................................................................193

Manually completing a SIM...............................................................................................................194Managing pools and THP V-VOLs....................................................................................................194

Viewing pool information.............................................................................................................194Viewing used pool capacity.........................................................................................................195

Viewing the used capacity for each pool................................................................................196Viewing the used capacity of a Fast Snap pool.....................................................................196

Viewing formatted pool capacity..................................................................................................197Reasons to check pool capacity.............................................................................................198

Viewing the progress of rebalancing the usage level among parity groups................................198Increasing pool capacity..............................................................................................................199Changing a pool name................................................................................................................200Recovering a blocked pool..........................................................................................................201Decrease pool capacity...............................................................................................................201

About decreasing pool capacity.............................................................................................201Decreasing pool capacity.......................................................................................................204Stopping the decrease of pool capacity.................................................................................205

Deleting a tier in a pool................................................................................................................205Deleting a pool.............................................................................................................................206

Contents 7

Page 8: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Changing external LDEV tier rank...............................................................................................207Increasing THP V-VOL capacity..................................................................................................208Changing the name of a THP V-VOL..........................................................................................209About releasing pages in a THP V-VOL......................................................................................209

Releasing pages in a THP V-VOL..........................................................................................211Stopping the release of pages in a THP V-VOL.....................................................................212

Changing full allocation settings in THP V-VOLs........................................................................213Enabling or disabling tier relocation of a THP V-VOL.................................................................213Deleting a THP V-VOL................................................................................................................214

Starting pool monitoring manually....................................................................................................215Stopping pool monitoring manually...................................................................................................216Starting tier relocation manually.......................................................................................................216Stopping tier relocation manually......................................................................................................217Creating data direct mapping attribute..............................................................................................217

Creating an external volume with data direct mapping attribute.................................................217Creating pool with data direct mapping attribute.........................................................................219Creating THP V-VOL with data direct mapping attribute.............................................................221Editing a pool with data direct mapping attribute.........................................................................222

7 Configuring access attributes..........................................................................224About access attributes....................................................................................................................224Access attribute requirements..........................................................................................................224Access attributes and permitted operations.....................................................................................225Access attribute restrictions..............................................................................................................225Access attributes work flow..............................................................................................................225Assigning an access attribute to a volume.......................................................................................226Changing an access attribute to read-only or protect.......................................................................226Changing an access attribute to read/write......................................................................................227Enabling or disabling the expiration lock..........................................................................................228Disabling an S-VOL..........................................................................................................................229Reserving volumes...........................................................................................................................230

8 Managing logical volumes...............................................................................232LUN Manager overview....................................................................................................................232

LUN Manager Function...............................................................................................................232LUN Manager operations............................................................................................................232Fibre channel operations.............................................................................................................232LUN Manager license requirements............................................................................................234LUN Manager rules, restrictions, and guidelines for managing LUNs.........................................234

Managing logical units workflow.......................................................................................................235Configuring hosts and Fibre Channel ports......................................................................................235Configuring Fibre Channel ports.......................................................................................................235

Setting the data transfer speed on a Fibre Channel port............................................................235Combination of data-transfer speed and connection type...........................................................236Setting the Fibre Channel port address.......................................................................................237Addresses for Fibre Channel ports..............................................................................................238Setting the fabric switch...............................................................................................................239Fibre Channel topology...............................................................................................................239

Example of FC-AL and point-to-point topology......................................................................240Setting the Fibre Channel topology..................................................................................................240Configuring hosts..............................................................................................................................240

Configure hosts workflow............................................................................................................241Host modes for host groups........................................................................................................241Host mode options.......................................................................................................................242

Find WWN of the host bus adapter........................................................................................245Finding a WWN on Windows.................................................................................................245

8 Contents

Page 9: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Finding a WWN on Oracle Solaris.........................................................................................246Finding a WWN on AIX, IRIX, or Sequent..............................................................................246Finding WWN for HP-UX........................................................................................................246

Creating a host group and registering hosts in the host group (in a Fibre Channelenvironment)................................................................................................................................248

Configuring LU paths........................................................................................................................250Configure LU paths workflow......................................................................................................250Defining LU paths........................................................................................................................250Setting a UUID.............................................................................................................................251

UUID requirements................................................................................................................252Correspondence table for defining devices.................................................................................253Defining alternate LU paths.........................................................................................................253

Copying all LU paths defined in a host group........................................................................253Copying all LU paths defined in an iSCSI target....................................................................254Copying selected (but not all) LU paths defined in a host group............................................254Copying selected (but not all) LU paths defined in an iSCSI target.......................................255

Managing LU paths...........................................................................................................................256Deleting LU paths........................................................................................................................256Clearing a UUID setting...............................................................................................................257Viewing LU path settings.............................................................................................................258

Releasing LUN reservation by host..................................................................................................258LUN security on ports.......................................................................................................................259

Examples of enabling and disabling LUN security on ports........................................................259Enabling LUN security on a port..................................................................................................260Disabling LUN security on a port.................................................................................................261

Setting Fibre Channel authentication................................................................................................261User authentication......................................................................................................................262

Settings for authentication of hosts........................................................................................263Settings for authentication of ports (required if performing mutual authentication)................263

Host and host group authentication.............................................................................................263Example of authenticating hosts in a Fibre Channel environment.........................................264Port settings and connection results......................................................................................266

fabric switch authentication.........................................................................................................266fabric switch settings and connection results..............................................................................268Mutual authentication of ports.....................................................................................................268Fibre Channel authentication......................................................................................................268

Enabling or disabling host authentication on a host group.....................................................268Registering host user information..........................................................................................269Changing host user information registered on a host group..................................................270Deleting host user information...............................................................................................271Registering user information for a host group (for mutual authentication).............................272Clearing user information from a host group..........................................................................273

Fibre channel port authentication................................................................................................273Setting Fibre Channel port authentication..............................................................................273

Registering user information on a Fibre Channel port.................................................................274Registering user information on a fabric switch...........................................................................275Clearing fabric switch user information.......................................................................................276Setting the fabric switch authentication mode.............................................................................276Enabling or disabling fabric switch authentication.......................................................................277

Overview for iSCSI...........................................................................................................................278Network configuration for iSCSI..................................................................................................278

Managing hosts................................................................................................................................279Changing WWN or nickname of a host bus adapter...................................................................279Changing HBA iSCSI name or nickname of a host bus adapter.................................................280Changing the name or host mode of a host group......................................................................281

Contents 9

Page 10: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Changing iSCSI target setting.....................................................................................................282Removing hosts from iSCSI targets............................................................................................283Initializing host group 0................................................................................................................284Deleting a host bus adapter from a host group...........................................................................284Deleting WWNs from the WWN table..........................................................................................285Deleting a host group..................................................................................................................286Deleting an iSCSI target..............................................................................................................286Deleting login iSCSI names.........................................................................................................287Adding a selected host to a host group.......................................................................................288Adding a host to the selected host group....................................................................................288Adding a host to the selected iSCSI target..................................................................................289Confirming communication status...............................................................................................290Setting T10 PI mode to the port...................................................................................................290

Creating iSCSI targets and registering hosts in the iSCSI target.....................................................291Editing port settings..........................................................................................................................293Adding CHAP users..........................................................................................................................294Editing CHAP users..........................................................................................................................294Removing CHAP users.....................................................................................................................295Removing target CHAP users...........................................................................................................296

9 Configuring VASA integrated storage systems...............................................297Creating LDEVs of ALU attribution...................................................................................................297Viewing LDEVs of ALUs or SLU attribution......................................................................................299Unbinding LDEVs of SLUs attribution...............................................................................................299

10 Troubleshooting.............................................................................................300Troubleshooting Virtual LUN.............................................................................................................300Troubleshooting Thin Provisioning...................................................................................................300Troubleshooting for pool usage........................................................................................................304Troubleshooting Data Retention.......................................................................................................306

Data Retention troubleshooting instructions................................................................................307Troubleshooting provisioning while using RAID Manager................................................................307

Errors when operating RAID Manager (Thin Provisioning, SSB1: 0x2e31/0xb96d)...................307Errors when operating RAID Manager (Data Retention, SSB1:2E31/B9BF/B9BD)....................309

Calling HPE technical support..........................................................................................................30911 Support and other resources.........................................................................310

Accessing Hewlett Packard Enterprise Support...............................................................................310Accessing updates............................................................................................................................310Related information...........................................................................................................................310Websites...........................................................................................................................................311Remote support................................................................................................................................311Documentation feedback..................................................................................................................311

A RAID Manager command reference...............................................................313Remote Web Console tasks and RAID Manager command list.......................................................313

B Resource Partition GUI reference...................................................................315Resource Groups window.................................................................................................................315Selected resource group window......................................................................................................316Create Resource Groups wizard......................................................................................................322

Create Resource Groups window...............................................................................................322Select Parity Groups window.......................................................................................................325Select LDEVs window.................................................................................................................327Select Ports window....................................................................................................................330Select Host Groups window........................................................................................................333Select iSCSI Targets window.......................................................................................................335

10 Contents

Page 11: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Create Resource Groups Confirmation window..........................................................................337Edit Resource Group wizard.............................................................................................................339

Edit Resource Group window......................................................................................................339Edit Resource Group Confirmation window................................................................................339

Add Resources wizard......................................................................................................................340Add Resources window...............................................................................................................340Add Resources Confirmation window.........................................................................................341

Remove Resources window.............................................................................................................343Delete Resource Groups window.....................................................................................................346Resource Group Properties window.................................................................................................346Edit Virtualization Management Settings wizard...............................................................................349

Edit Virtualization Management Settings window........................................................................349Confirmation window...................................................................................................................350

C LDEV GUI reference.......................................................................................351Parity Groups window.......................................................................................................................351Parity Groups tab: Internal or external volume.................................................................................353LDEVs tab: Internal or external volumes..........................................................................................356Logical Devices window....................................................................................................................359Create LDEVs wizard.......................................................................................................................365

Create LDEVs window.................................................................................................................365Create LDEVs confirmation window............................................................................................373

Edit LDEVs wizard............................................................................................................................376Edit LDEVs window.....................................................................................................................376Edit LDEVs confirmation window................................................................................................377

Change LDEV Settings window........................................................................................................379View SSIDs window..........................................................................................................................380Select Free Spaces window.............................................................................................................381Select Pool window...........................................................................................................................383View LDEV IDs window....................................................................................................................384View Physical Location window........................................................................................................385Edit SSIDs window...........................................................................................................................387Change SSIDs window.....................................................................................................................387Format LDEVs wizard.......................................................................................................................388

Format LDEVs window................................................................................................................389Format LDEVs confirmation window...........................................................................................389

Restore LDEVs window....................................................................................................................390Block LDEVs window........................................................................................................................391Delete LDEVs window......................................................................................................................392LDEV Properties window..................................................................................................................394ALUs / SLUs window........................................................................................................................403Unbind SLUs window........................................................................................................................404Components window........................................................................................................................404DKC: MP Blades tab.........................................................................................................................406Edit MP Blades wizard......................................................................................................................407

Edit MP Blades window...............................................................................................................408Edit MP Blades confirmation window..........................................................................................408

Assign MP Blade wizard...................................................................................................................409Assign MP Blade window............................................................................................................409Assign MP Blade confirmation window.......................................................................................410Assign MP Blade confirmation window.......................................................................................411

View Management Resource Usage window...................................................................................413D Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference.....414

Pools window....................................................................................................................................414Pools: Volume tabs...........................................................................................................................421

Contents 11

Page 12: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Create Pools wizard..........................................................................................................................433Create Pools window...................................................................................................................433Create Pools confirmation window..............................................................................................441

Expand Pool wizard..........................................................................................................................443Expand Pool window...................................................................................................................443Expand Pool confirmation window..............................................................................................444

Edit Pools wizard..............................................................................................................................445Edit Pools window.......................................................................................................................445Edit Pools confirmation window...................................................................................................449

Delete Pools wizard..........................................................................................................................451Delete Pools window...................................................................................................................451Delete Pools confirmation window..............................................................................................452

Expand V-VOLs wizard.....................................................................................................................453Expand V-VOLs window..............................................................................................................453Expand V-VOLs confirmation window.........................................................................................454

Restore Pools window......................................................................................................................456Shrink Pool window..........................................................................................................................457Stop Shrinking Pools window...........................................................................................................459Complete SIMs window....................................................................................................................460Select Pool VOLs window.................................................................................................................461Reclaim Zero Pages window............................................................................................................465Stop Reclaiming Zero Pages window...............................................................................................466Pool Property window.......................................................................................................................466View Tier Properties window.............................................................................................................469Monitor Pools window.......................................................................................................................476Stop Monitoring Pools window..........................................................................................................477Start Tier Relocation window............................................................................................................478Stop Tier Relocation window............................................................................................................479View Pool Management Status window............................................................................................480Edit External LDEV Tier Rank wizard...............................................................................................485

Edit External LDEV Tier Rank window........................................................................................485Edit External LDEV Tier Rank confirmation window....................................................................486

Edit Tiering Policies wizard...............................................................................................................487Edit Tiering Policies window........................................................................................................487Edit Tiering Policies confirmation window...................................................................................488

Change Tiering Policy window..........................................................................................................489Change Pool Configuration Pattern window.....................................................................................490

E Data Retention GUI reference.........................................................................492Data Retention window.....................................................................................................................492Error Detail dialog box......................................................................................................................494

F LUN Manager GUI reference..........................................................................495Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window........................................................................................495Port/Host Groups: Host Groups and Hosts tabs (Fibre Channel).....................................................500Port / Host Groups / iSCSI Targets: Hosts, LUNs, Host Mode Options, and CHAP Users tabs.......503Ports/iSCSI Targets: iSCSI Targets, Hosts, and CHAP Users tabs (iSCSI).....................................515Add LUN Paths wizard......................................................................................................................518

Select LDEVs window.................................................................................................................518Select Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window.................................................................................521Add LUN Paths window...............................................................................................................526Add LUN Paths confirmation window..........................................................................................528

Create Host Groups wizard..............................................................................................................531Create Host Groups window........................................................................................................531Create Host Groups confirmation window...................................................................................535

Edit Host Groups wizard...................................................................................................................536

12 Contents

Page 13: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Edit Host Groups window............................................................................................................536Edit Host Groups confirmation window.......................................................................................537

Add to Host Groups wizard (when specific host is selected)............................................................538Add to Host Groups window........................................................................................................538Add to Host Groups confirmation window...................................................................................540

Add Hosts wizard (when specific hosts group is selected)...............................................................542Add Hosts window.......................................................................................................................542Add Hosts confirmation window..................................................................................................547

Delete LUN Paths wizard..................................................................................................................549Delete LUN Paths window...........................................................................................................549Delete LUN Paths confirmation window......................................................................................550

Edit Host wizard................................................................................................................................552Edit Host window.........................................................................................................................552Edit Host confirmation window....................................................................................................553

Edit Ports wizard...............................................................................................................................555Edit Ports window........................................................................................................................555Edit Ports confirmation window...................................................................................................558

Create Alternative LUN Paths wizard...............................................................................................561Create Alternative LUN Paths window........................................................................................561Create Alternative LUN Paths confirmation window....................................................................564

Copy LUN Paths wizard....................................................................................................................568Copy LUN Paths window.............................................................................................................568Copy LUN Paths confirmation window........................................................................................573

Remove Hosts wizard.......................................................................................................................576Remove Hosts window................................................................................................................576Remove Hosts confirmation window...........................................................................................576

Edit UUIDs wizard.............................................................................................................................578Edit UUIDs window......................................................................................................................578Edit UUIDs confirmation window.................................................................................................578

Add New Host window......................................................................................................................580Change LUN IDs window..................................................................................................................581Delete Host Groups window.............................................................................................................582Delete Login WWNs window............................................................................................................583Delete UUIDs window.......................................................................................................................583Host Group Properties window.........................................................................................................584LUN Properties window....................................................................................................................585Authentication window......................................................................................................................588

Authentication window (Fibre Channel folder selected)..............................................................588Authentication window (Fibre Channel port selected).................................................................589Add New User Information (Host) window..................................................................................591Change User Information (Host) window....................................................................................592Clear Authentication information window....................................................................................592Specify Authentication Information window.................................................................................593Set Port Information.....................................................................................................................594Default Setting(User Name/Secret) window................................................................................594

Edit Command Devices wizard.........................................................................................................594Edit Command Devices window..................................................................................................595Edit Command Devices confirmation window.............................................................................596

Host-Reserved LUNs window...........................................................................................................598Release Host-Reserved LUNs wizard..............................................................................................599

Release Host-Reserved LUNs window.......................................................................................599View Login WWN Statuses window..................................................................................................600View Login iSCSI Name Statuses window.......................................................................................601CHAP User Properties window.........................................................................................................602Host Properties window....................................................................................................................603

Contents 13

Page 14: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Create iSCSI Targets wizard.............................................................................................................604Create iSCSI Targets window......................................................................................................604Create iSCSI Targets Confirm window........................................................................................608

Edit iSCSI Targets wizard.................................................................................................................610Edit iSCSI Targets window..........................................................................................................610Edit iSCSI Targets Confirm window.............................................................................................611

Add CHAP Users wizard when selected iSCSI target......................................................................613Add CHAP Users window............................................................................................................613Add CHAP Users Confirm window..............................................................................................614

Edit CHAP User wizard.....................................................................................................................615Edit CHAP User window..............................................................................................................615Edit CHAP User confirm window.................................................................................................616

iSCSI Target Properties window.......................................................................................................617Add New CHAP User window...........................................................................................................618Delete iSCSI Targets window...........................................................................................................619Delete Login iSCSI Names window..................................................................................................619Remove CHAP Users window..........................................................................................................620Remove Target CHAP Users window...............................................................................................621Remove Hosts window.....................................................................................................................622Test Communication Statuses window.............................................................................................622Edit T10 PI Mode wizard...................................................................................................................623Edit T10 PI Mode confirmation window............................................................................................624

G Warranty and regulatory information..............................................................625Warranty information.........................................................................................................................625Regulatory information......................................................................................................................625

Belarus Kazakhstan Russia marking...........................................................................................625Turkey RoHS material content declaration..................................................................................626Ukraine RoHS material content declaration................................................................................626

Glossary.............................................................................................................627Index...................................................................................................................632

14 Contents

Page 15: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

1 Introduction to provisioningProvisioning a storage system requires balancing the costs of the solution with the benefits thatthe solution provides. The following is an overview of provisioning strategies that you canimplement on the XP7 Storage to support your business.

About provisioningProvisioning is a method of managing storage system devices or volumes. Some provisioningmethods are host-based, while others use existing storage system capabilities such asconcatenated array groups. Some provisioning methods are hardware-based, and others aresoftware-based. Each technique has its particular use and benefit, for example, capacity, reliability,performance, or cost considerations, in a given storage environment. Used in the wrong scenario,each can be expensive, awkward, time consuming to configure and maintain, and can bepotentially error prone. Your support representatives are available to help you configure thehighest quality solution for your storage environment.Provisioning strategies fall into two fundamental categories:1. “Basic provisioning” (page 16) (or traditional provisioning). Basic provisioning includes logical

devices (LDEVs) and custom-sized volumes.2. “Thin Provisioning” (page 19) (or virtual provisioning). Thin provisioning includes pooling

physical storage and creating logical devices for hosts.

Key termsThe following are provisioning key terms:

DescriptionTerm

Security function used to control the access to a logical volume. Access attributes areassigned to each volume: read only, read/write, and protect.

access attributes

Customized Volume. A fixed volume that is divided into arbitrary sizes.CV (variable volume)

Security option used to allow or not allow changing of the access attribute on a volume.expiration lock

Abbreviation for fixed-sized volume.FVWith the exception of OPEN-V, FV is a logical volume of an emulation type thatconstitutes a parity group immediately after installation. The FV size varies accordingto the emulation type.

A resource group in which additional resources (other than external volumes) and theresources existing before installing Resource Partition belong.

meta_resource

In Thin Provisioning, a page is 42 MB of continuous storage allocated from a THP poolto store data written to a THP V-VOL.

page

A set of volumes that are reserved for storing Thin Provisioning or Fast Snap writedata.

pool

In Thin Provisioning, the proportion (%) of used capacity of the pool to the total poolcapacity. Each pool has its own pool threshold values for warning and depletion.

pool threshold

A volume that is reserved for storing Thin Provisioning data or Fast Snap operations.pool-VOL, pool volume

A group that is assigned one or more resources of the storage system. The resourcesthat can be assigned to the resource group are LDEV IDs, parity groups, iSCSI targets,external volumes, ports, and host group IDs.

resource group

In a thin provisioned storage system, the proportion (%) of total THP V-VOL capacityassociated with the pool versus the total capacity of the THP pool.

subscription limit

About provisioning 15

Page 16: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionTerm

You can set the percentage of THP V-VOL capacity that can be created to the totalcapacity of the pool. This can help prevent THP V-VOL blocking caused by a full pool.For example, when the subscription limit is set to 100%, the total THP V-VOL capacityis equal to the THP pool capacity.

The value of the reached maximum I/O counts that each tier can process.tier boundary

A combination of determining the appropriate storage tier and migrating the pages tothe appropriate tier.

tier relocation

A storage hierarchy of layered structures of data drives consisting of differentperformance levels, or tiers, that match data access requirements with the appropriateperformance tiers.

tiered storage

Basic provisioningSeveral basic provisioning techniques traditionally are used to manage storage volumes. Thesestrategies are useful in specific scenarios based on user needs, such as whether you use openor mainframe storage systems, or you want to manually size your volumes.Basic provisioning relies on carving up physical storage into smaller units. Custom sizing ispossible, and requires usingBasic provisioning includes:

• “Fixed-sized provisioning” (page 16)

• “Custom-sized provisioning” (page 17)

Fixed-sized provisioning

Overview of fixed-sized provisioningTwo traditional fixed-size host-based volume management methods typically are used on opensystems to organize storage space on a server. One method is the direct use of physical volumesas devices for use either as raw space or as a local file system. These are fixed-size volumeswith a fixed number of disks, and as such, each has a certain inherent physical random input/outputoperation per second (IOPS) or sequential throughput (megabytes per second) capacity. A systemadministrator manages the aggregate server workloads against them. As workloads exceed thevolume's available space or its IOPS capacity, the data is manually moved onto a larger or fastervolume (that is, more spindles), if possible.The following figure illustrates a simple fixed-size provisioning environment using individual fixedvolumes on a host:

The other method is to use a host-based Logical Volume Manager (LVM) where the plannedworkloads require either more space or IOPS capacity than the individual physical volumes can

16 Introduction to provisioning

Page 17: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

provide. LVM is the disk management feature available on UNIX-based operating systems,including Linux, that manages their logical volumes.The following illustrates a fixed-size provisioning environment using LUNs in host-managedlogical volumes:

With either method, hosts recognize the size as fixed regardless of the actual used size. Therefore,it is not necessary to expand the volume (LDEV) size in the future if the actual used size doesnot exceed the fixed size.When such a logical volume runs out of space or IOPS capacity, you can replace it with one thatwas created with even more physical volumes then copy over all of the user data. In some cases,it is best to add a second logical volume then manually relocate just part of the existing data toredistribute the workload across two such volumes. These two logical volumes would be mappedto the server using separate host paths.

DisadvantagesSome disadvantages to using fixed-sized provisioning are:

• If you use only part of the entire capacity specified by an emulation type, the rest of thecapacity is wasted.

• After creating fixed-sized volumes, typically some physical capacity will be wasted.

• In a fixed-sized environment, manual intervention can become a costly and tedious exercisewhen a larger volume size is required.

When to use fixed-sized provisioningUse fixed-sized provisioning when custom-sized provisioning is not supported.

Custom-sized provisioning

Overview of custom-sized provisioningCustom-sized (or variable-sized) provisioning has more flexibility than fixed-sized provisioningand is the traditional storage-based volume management strategy.To create custom-sized volumes on a storage system, an administrator creates volumes of thedesired size from individual array groups. These volumes are then individually mapped to anaddress composed of a control unit and logical device within the control unit.Following are three scenarios where custom-sized provisioning is an advantage:1. In fixed-sized provisioning, when several important files are located on the same volume

and one unimportant file is being accessed, users cannot access the important files becauseof logical device contention if Parallel Access Volumes or Hyper Parallel Access Volumesare not being used. If the custom-sized feature is used to divide the volume into several

Basic provisioning 17

Page 18: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

smaller volumes and I/O workload is balanced (each file is allocated to a different volume),then access contention is reduced and access performance is improved.

2. In fixed-sized provisioning, all of the volume's capacity might not be used. Unused capacityon the volume will remain inaccessible to other users. If the custom-sized feature is used,smaller volumes can be created that do not waste capacity.

3. Applications that require the capacity of many fixed-sized volumes can instead be givenfewer large volumes to relieve device addressing constraints.

The following illustrates custom-sized provisioning in an open-systems environment using standardvolumes of independent array groups:

To change the size of a volume already in use, you first create a new volume larger (if possible)than the old one, and then move the contents of the old volume to the new one. The new volumewould be remapped on the server to take the mount point of the old one, which is retired.A disadvantage is that this manual intervention can become costly and tedious and thisprovisioning strategy is appropriate only in certain scenarios.

When to use custom-sized provisioningUse custom-sized provisioning when you want to manually control and monitor your storageresources and usage scenarios.

Basic provisioning workflowThe following illustrates the basic provisioning workflow:

18 Introduction to provisioning

Page 19: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Virtual LUN software is used to configure custom-sized provisioning. For detailed information,see “Configuring custom-sized provisioning” (page 66).

Complementary strategiesFunctions related to provisioningFor the following functions, see the appropriate manuals:

• Replication: Business Copy, Continuous Access Synchronous, Continuous Access Journal

• External storage: External Storage

• Migration: Auto LUN (contact Hewlett Packard Enterprise technical support).

• Partitioning: Cache Partition (XP7 Performance for Open and Mainframe Systems UserGuide)

• Virtual storage: High Availability

Thin ProvisioningAbout Thin Provisioning

Though basic or traditional provisioning strategies can be appropriate and useful in specificscenarios, they can be expensive to set up, awkward and time consuming to configure, difficultto monitor, and error prone when maintaining storage.Although Thin Provisioning requires some additional setup steps, it is a simpler alternative to thetraditional provisioning methods. Thin Provisioning allows you to reserve virtual storage capacitybased on anticipated future capacity needs, using virtual volumes instead of physical disk capacity.Overall storage use rates might improve because you can potentially provide more virtual capacityto applications while using fewer physical disks. It can provide lower initial cost, greater efficiency,

Complementary strategies 19

Page 20: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

and storage management freedom for storage administrators. In this way, Thin Provisioningsoftware:

• Simplifies storage management

• Provides a better balance of resources and optimization of performance by default thanbasic provisioning

• Optimizes physical disk usage

• Can reduce device address requirements over traditional provisioning by providing largervolume sizes.

Thin Provisioning conceptsThin Provisioning is a volume management feature that allows storage managers and systemadministrators to efficiently plan and allocate storage to users or applications. It provides aplatform for the array to dynamically manage data and physical capacity without frequent manualinvolvement.Thin Provisioning provides three important capabilities: as-needed provisioning of storage,enhanced volume performance, and larger volume sizes.Thin Provisioning is more efficient than traditional provisioning strategies. It is implemented bycreating one or more Thin Provisioning pools (THP pools) of physical storage space using multipleLDEVs. Then, you can establish virtual THP volumes (THP V-VOLs) and associate them to theindividual THP pools. In this way, capacity to support data can be optimally assigned on demandwithin the pool.THP V-VOLs are of a user-specified logical size without any corresponding physical space. Actualphysical space allocated (in 42-MB pool page units) is automatically assigned to a THP V-VOLfrom the associated THP pool as that volume's logical space is written to over time. A new THPV-VOL does not have any pool pages assigned to it. The pages are loaned out from its associatedpool to that THP volume until the volume is reformatted or deleted. At that point, all of that volume'sassigned pages are returned to the pool's free page list. This handling of logical and physicalcapacity is called thin provisioning. In many cases, logical capacity will exceed physical capacity.Thin Provisioning also enhances volume performance. This is an automatic result of how THPV-VOLs map capacity from individual THP pools. A pool is created using from one to 1024 LDEVs(pool volumes) of physical space. Each pool volume is sectioned into 42-MB pages. Each pageis consecutively laid down on a number of RAID stripes from one pool volume. The pool's 42-MBpool pages are assigned on demand to any of the THP V-VOLs that are connected to that pool.Other pages assigned over time to that THP V-VOL randomly originate from the next free pageof some other pool volume in the pool.Setting up a Thin Provisioning environment requires a few extra steps. Similar to basicprovisioning, you still configure various array groups to a desired RAID level and create one ormore volumes (LDEVs) on each of them (see “Creating an LDEV” (page 74)). Then set up a ThinProvisioning environment by creating one or more THP pools of physical storage space that areeach a collection of some of these LDEVs (THP pool volumes). This pool structure supportscreation of Thin Provisioning virtual volumes (THP V-VOLs), where 42-MB pages of data arerandomly assigned on demand.For detailed information, see “Configuring thin provisioning” (page 93).

20 Introduction to provisioning

Page 21: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

When to use Thin ProvisioningThin Provisioning is a best fit in an open-systems environment in the following scenarios:

• Where the aggregation of storage pool capacity usage across many volumes provides thebest opportunity for performance optimization.

• For stable environments and large consistently growing files or volumes.

• Where device addressing constraints are a concern.

Thin Provisioning advantages

With Thin ProvisioningWithout Thin ProvisioningAdvantages

You can logically allocate more capacity thanis physically installed. You can purchase less

You must purchase physical disk capacity forexpected future use. The unused capacity

Reduces initial costs

capacity, reducing initial costs and you can addcapacity later by expanding the pool.

adds costs for both the storage system andsoftware products.

Some file systems take up little pool space. Formore details, see “Operating system and filesystem capacity” (page 99).

When physical capacity becomes insufficient,you can add pool capacity without serviceinterruption.

You must stop the storage system toreconfigure it.

Reducesmanagement costs

In addition, with Smart Tiers you can configurepool storage consisting of multiple types of datadrives, including SSD, SAS, and externalvolumes. This eliminates unnecessary costs.

XP7 product licenses are based on usedcapacity rather than the total defined capacity.

As the expected physical disk capacity ispurchased, the unused capacity of the storage

Reducesmanagement labor

You can allocate volumes of up to 256 TBregardless of physical disk capacity.

system also needs to be managed on thestorage system and on licensed XP7products.

and increasesavailability ofstorage volumes forreplication Smart Tiers allows you to use storage efficiently

by automatically migrating data to the mostsuitable data drive.

Effectively combines I/O patterns of manyapplications and evenly spreads the I/O activity

Because physical disk capacity is initiallypurchased and installed to meet expected

Increases theperformance

across available physical resources, preventingfuture needs, portions of the capacity may beefficiency of the datadrive bottlenecks in parity group performance.unused. I/O loads may concentrate on just a

Configuring the volumes from multiple paritysubset of the storage which might decreaseperformance. groups improves parity group performance.

This also increases storage use while reducingpower and pooling requirements (total cost ofownership).

THP V-VOL with data direct mapping attributeBy using a THP V-VOL for which the data direct mapping attribute is enabled (henceforth referredto as a THP V-VOL of the data direct mapping attribute), you can create a mapping of an externalvolume larger than 4 TB without having to change its capacity as a THP V-VOL of the localstorage system.A THP V-VOL of the data direct mapping attribute is associated with the following pool-VOLs:an external volume for which the data direct mapping attribute is enabled (henceforth referredto as an external volume of the data direct mapping attribute) and a pool-VOL with System Area.For details about estimating the capacity of pool-VOLs with system area in the pool of the datadirect mapping attribute, “Estimating the required capacity of pool-VOLs with System Area in thepool of the data direct mapping attribute” (page 98).

Thin Provisioning 21

Page 22: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

If you want to use THP V-VOLs of the data direct mapping attribute, you must enable the datadirect mapping attribute for pool-VOLs, pools, and THP V-VOLs. Follow the procedure below ifyou want to use a THP V-VOL of the data direct mapping attribute.

Procedure1. In the Add External Volumes window, add a volume of an external storage system to an

external volume group.2. In the Create LDEVs window, create an external volume of the data direct mapping attribute.3. In the Create Pools window, create a Thin Provisioning pool for which the data direct mapping

attribute is enabled (henceforth referred to as a pool of the data direct mapping attribute).Specify the following volumes as pool-VOLs:• The external volume of the data direct mapping attribute.

• One or more normal volumes or external volumes.4. In the Create LDEVs window, create a THP V-VOL of the data direct mapping attribute.

22 Introduction to provisioning

Page 23: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

5. In the Add LUN Paths window, configure a LU path to the THP V-VOL of the data directmapping attribute.

The following table shows what kind of external volumes can be added as pool-VOLs:

Data direct mapping attribute of external volumesOperation

EnabledDisabled

The volumes can be added.The volumes can be added.Add volumes to a pool of thedata direct mapping attribute

The volumes cannot be added.The volumes can be added.Add volumes to the followingpools:

• Thin Provisioning pools

• Smart Tiers pools (includingReal Time Smart Tier)

The following table shows what kind of operations can be performed when the data directmapping attribute of a Thin Provisioning pool is enabled or disabled:

RemarkData direct mapping attribute of the poolOperation

EnabledDisabled

NoneThe operation can beperformed.

The operation can beperformed.

Add an LDEV for whichthe data directmapping attribute isdisabled to the pool

NoneThe operation can beperformed.

The operation cannot beperformed.

Add an externalvolume of the datadirect mappingattribute to the pool

NoneThe operation cannot beperformed.

The operation can beperformed.

Set the depletionthreshold and thewarning threshold

Thin Provisioning 23

Page 24: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

NoneThe operation can beperformed.

The operation can beperformed.

Set subscription

NoneThe operation can beperformed.

The operation can beperformed.

Protect V-VOLs whenI/O fails to BlockedPool VOL

NoneThe operation can beperformed.

The operation can beperformed.

Protect V-VOLs whenI/O fails to Full Pool

NoneThe operation can beperformed.

The operation can beperformed.

Performing rebalancing

NoneThe sum of the reservedpages capacity and themapped capacity

The sum of the reservedpages capacity and themapped capacity

Define the usedcapacity of the pool

NoneThe sum of pool-VOLs forwhich the data directmapping attribute isdisabled.However, the licensecapacity does not includethe capacity of pool-VOLsfor which the data directmapping attribute isenabled.

The sum of the pool-VOLsDefine the licensedcapacity

NoneThe operation can beperformed.However, the capacity ofpool-VOLs with SystemArea must be reserved inadvance. For details onhow to estimate thecapacity of pool-VOLs withSystem Area.

The operation can beperformed.

Expand pool

NoneThe operation can beperformed.However, if a pool-VOL forwhich the data directmapping attribute isenabled is associated witha THP V-VOL, you cannotshrink the pool.

The operation can beperformed.

Shrink pool

You can delete a pool onlyif there is no THP V-VOLthat is associated with thepool

The operation can beperformed.

The operation can beperformed.

Delete pool

NoneYou can only create THPV-VOLs of the data directmapping attribute.

You can only create THPV-VOLs for which the datadirect mapping attribute isdisabled.

Create THP V-VOL

NoneThe operation can beperformed.

The operation can beperformed.

Implement a change toSmart Tiers (includingReal Time Smart Tierpool)

24 Introduction to provisioning

Page 25: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

The following table shows what kind of operations can be performed when the data directmapping attribute of a THP V-VOL is enabled or disabled:

Data direct mapping attribute of the THP V-VOLOperation

EnabledDisabled

The operation can be performed.The operation can be performed.Configure LU paths

The operation can be performed.The operation can be performed.Format LDEVs

The operation can be performed.The operation can be performed.Delete LDEVs

The operation cannot be performed.The operation can be performed.Expand V-VOLs

The operation cannot be performed.The operation can be performed.Reclaim zero pages

The operation cannot be performed.The operation can be performed.Execute the V-VOL fullallocation function

The operation can be performed.The operation can be performed.Protect V-VOLs when I/Ofails to Blocked Pool VOL

The operation can be performed.The operation can be performed.Protect V-VOLs when I/Ofails to Full Pool

The operation cannot be performed.The operation can be performed.Apply to LDEVs of SLUattribution

Thin Provisioning advantage exampleTo illustrate the merits of a Thin Provisioning environment, assume you have twelve LDEVs from12 RAID 1 (2D+2D) array groups assigned to a THP pool. All 48 disks contribute their IOPS andthroughput power to all THP volumes assigned to that pool. Instead, if more random read IOPShorsepower is desired for a pool, then it can be created with 32 LDEVs from 32 RAID 5 (3D+1P)array groups, thus providing 128 disks of IOPS power to that pool. Up to 1024 LDEVs can beassigned to a single pool, providing a considerable amount of I/O capability to just a few THPvolumes.

Thin Provisioning workflowThe following illustrates the Thin Provisioning workflow.

Thin Provisioning 25

Page 26: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Pool comprised of pool volumes carved from capacity virtualization-enabled paritygroups

Capacity virtualization-enabled parity groupsData on LDEVs carved from parity groups comprised of FMC drives is compressed before it isstored on to the drives. However, capacity virtualization is not enabled by default.

NOTE: If encryption is enabled for data in FMC drives, capacity virtualization cannot be enabled.

When a user enables capacity virtualization on a parity group comprised of FMC drives:

• The capacity of the parity group can expand to eight times the usable physicalcapacity ofthe parity group. A user can potentially carve out LDEVs from this expanded capacity anduse them as pool volumes to create or expand a pool. By doing so, a user can utilizetheincreased available capacity due to data being compressed on the FMC drives.

• LDEVs carved from the capacity virtualization-enabled parity groups can only be used aspool volumes to create or expand a pool. These LDEVs cannot be assigned directly to ahost and should be assigned to a single pool as pool volumes. LDEVs from a single paritygroup cannot be shared among multiple pools.

Storing data written to THP V-VOLsData written by hosts to THP V-VOLs is stored in pool volumes on a basis of a page. If poolvolumes are created from the parity group used by FMC drives, data is compressed and storedto drives. The compression ratio of data varies for each data updating or data deleting operation.Therefore, the capacity of data that can be stored fully is the capacity of the physical area of theFMC used to create the parity group. Hereafter, for a pool comprised of pool volumes assignedby capacity virtualization-enabled parity groups,the FMC capacity that corresponds to the poolcapacity reserved for writing.The purchased license of Thin Provisioning is consumed with respect to the defined pool capacity.However, if you are using a pool comprised of pool volumes assigned by capacityvirtualization-enabled parity groups, the purchased license of Thin Provisioning is used withrespect to the pool capacity reserved for writing.

Monitoring used pool capacity and used pool capacity reserved for writing

• Monitoring used pool capacityThe used pool capacity must always be monitored. As data is written to THP V-VOLs andstored on to the pool, in cases where THP V-VOLs are over-provisioned, the pool mightbecome full before the THP V-VOLs become full. Therefore, the used pool capacity mustalways be monitored. A threshold value is set for the used pool capacity. If the used poolcapacity the threshold value, a SIM is reported and a notification is sent to the user. If SIMsare reported, a user resolvesthe status of threshold exceeded by expanding the pool apacityor deleting data. For more details about the threshold values, see capacity or deleting data.

For more details about the threshold values, see “Thresholds” (page 188).

• Monitoring used pool capacity reserved for writingFor the pools consisting of pool volumes assigned by capacity virtualization-enabled paritygroups, you must monitor both of the used pool capacity and used pool capacity reservedfor writing. If the used pool capacity reserved for writing exceeds the threshold value, a SIMis output and a notification is sent to the user. The used pool capacity and the pool capacity

26 Introduction to provisioning

Page 27: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

reserved for writing are not always the same and the SIMs are independent of each other.The following conditions can occur:

◦ The used pool capacity exceeds the threshold, but the used pool capacity reserved forwriting is lower than the threshold.

◦ The used pool capacity is lower than the threshold, but the used pool capacity reservedfor writing exceeds the threshold.

◦ Both used capacities exceeds the threshold.

If SIMs are reported, you can resolve the status of the exceeded threshold by expanding thepool capacity or by deleting unwanted data.If the pool volumes are assigned from the capacity virtualization-enabled parity group are usedto create a new pool, the data savings percentage must be estimated beforehand.For a pool with a pool volume enabled with capacity virtualization, the used capacity of the pooland the used capacity of the parity group that is related to the used capacity of the pool aremonitored. The following shows the threshold values for the used capacity of the pool, whichtriggers output of SIM:

• Warning Threshold: You can set a value in the range from 1% to 100% in 1% increments.The initial value is 70%.

• Depletion Threshold: You can set a value in the range from 1% to 100% in 1% increments.The initial value is 80%.

• Prefixed Depletion Threshold: The value is set for the used capacity of the parity group. Thevalue is fixed at 90%.

The table below shows the threshold values used for setting the pool in a case shown in thefollowing figure:

Thin Provisioning 27

Page 28: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Set Capacity for PrefixedDepletionThreshold (90%)

Set Capacity for DepletionThreshold (70%)

Set Capacity for WarningThreshold (50%)Area of the pool

Not applicable700 GB500 GBVirtual area

720 GB560 GB400 GBPhysical area

Smart TiersSmart Tiers

After using Thin Provisioning software to virtualize LUs and pool storage into a thin provisioningstrategy, the array now has all the elements in place to offer automatic self-optimizing storagetiers provided by Smart Tiers. Using Smart Tiers, you can configure a storage system with multiplestorage tiers using different kinds of data drives, including SSD, SAS, and external volumes. Thiscan improve the speed and cost of performance. Smart Tiers extends and improves thefunctionality and value of Thin Provisioning. Both use pools of physical storage to define V-VOLs.Each thin provisioning pool can be configured to operate either as a THP pool or a Smart Tierspool.Automated tiering of physical storage is the next step for thin provisioned enterprise arrays.Automated tiering is the ability of the array to dynamically monitor and relocate data to the optimumtier of storage based on performance requirements. It focuses on data segments rather thanentire volumes. The functionality is entirely within the array without any mandated host levelinvolvement. Smart Tiers adds another layer to the thin provisioned environment.Using Smart Tiers you can:

• Configure physical storage into tiers consisting of multiple kinds of data drives, includingSSD, and SAS. Although host volumes are conventionally configured from a common pool,the pool is efficiently configured using multiple kinds of data drives. Placing data that needshigh performance while reducing storage costs by using high cost disks such as SSDs as

28 Introduction to provisioning

Page 29: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

efficiently as possible, resulting in data that is accessed infrequently being placed on lowercost physical storage.

• Automatically migrate small portions of host volumes to the most suitable tier according toaccess frequency. Frequently accessed data is migrated to higher speed, higher cost datadrives (for example, SSD). Infrequently accessed data is migrated to lower cost and lowerspeed data drives (for example, SAS7.2K) to use the storage efficiently.

Smart Tiers simplifies storage administration by automating and eliminating the complexities ofefficiently using tiered storage. It automatically moves data on pages in Thin Provisioning virtualvolumes to the most appropriate storage media, according to workload, to maximize servicelevels and minimize total cost of storage.Smart Tiers gives you:

• Improved storage resource usage

• Improved return on high-cost storage tiers

• Reduced storage management effort

• More automation

• Nondisruptive storage management

• Reduced costs

• Improved overall performance

Overview of tiersWhen not using Smart Tiers data is allocated to only one kind of data drive (without regard tothe workload) because the volumes are configured with only one kind of data drive. When usingSmart Tiers, frequently access data is automatically allocated to the higher-speed Smart poolvolumes and the lower speed drive to the volumes of low workload. This improves performanceand reduces costs.Smart Tiers places the host volume's data across multiple tiers of storage contained in a pool.There can be up to three tiers (high-, medium-, and low-speed layers) in a pool. Smart Tiersdetermines tier usage based on data access levels. It allocates with high I/O load to the uppertier, which contains a higher speed drive, and the page with low I/O load to the lower tier, whichcontains a lower speed drive.The following figure illustrates the basic tier concept.

When to use Smart TiersSmart Tiers is the best fit in an environment in which Thin Provisioning is a good fit.

Smart Tiers 29

Page 30: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

For detailed information, see “Configuring thin provisioning” (page 93).

Real Time Smart TierThe Real Time Smart Tier feature of Smart Tiers monitors page accesses over a set time frameand attempts to keep the most frequently accessed pages in Tier 1.The Real Time Smart Tier feature monitors a page's access frequency level real time and promotespages that suddenly became busy from a slower media to high-performance flash media, inreal-time.The Real Time Smart Tier feature can be enabled on any Smart Tiers pool as long as you haveSSD/FMD drives in Tier 1 of the pool. No special configuration beyond what is needed for RealTime Smart Tier is required.

Prompt PromotionA primary goal of Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier is to have the most frequently accesspages in Tier 1. As the workload varies in both the frequency of access and the type of access,reads or writes, the threshold for moving pages from one tier to another changes. Smart Tiersgenerates a dynamic tier range value that is used to determine which pages need to be in Tier1 and which need to be in a lower tier.The Real Time Smart Tier feature compares the recent the access frequency of each page tothe Prompt Promotion threshold to determine whether a page should be promoted to Tier 1. ThePrompt Promotion threshold is a dynamic threshold that adjusts based upon changes in workloadto make most efficient use of the SSD/FMD drives. If the recent access frequency for a pagemeets or exceeds the Prompt Promotion threshold, the page is relocated to Tier 1 without waitingfor the next Smart Tiers relocation cycle.Certain type of I/O benefit more from being served by flash media then others. To achieve thebest performance gains for certain I/O, Real Time Smart Tier gives read I/O greater weight thanwrite I/O when calculating the total access frequency for a page.

High Prioritized DemotionIn order to be certain that there is always some room for Real Time Smart Tier to do PromptPromotion of pages to Tier 1, High Prioritized Demotion is used to demote pages out of Tier 1.Pages that have the lowest IOPH are candidates for High Prioritized Demotion. Similar to PromptPromotion, High Prioritized Demotion does not wait for the current Smart Tiers cycle to end tomake relocation decisions.Page demotion is only triggered when:

• Tier 1 free capacity is depleted

• performance utilization reaches 80%Peak performance utilization is predefined for a particular media.Performance utilization of a tier is the maximum amount of I/O it can receive. The maximum I/Oload that should be targeted to a tier depends upon the media type used to make the tier. Aperformance utilization of 100% means that the tier is receiving the maximum amount of I/O itcan sustain. When performance utilization reaches about the 60% level, response time to theparticular media becomes noticeably slower. See “Tier relocation workflow” (page 113) for moreinformation on performance utilization.The following diagram shows the differences in the way pools are managed between ThinProvisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier

30 Introduction to provisioning

Page 31: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Data retention strategiesAfter provisioning your system, you can assign access attributes to open-system volumes toprotect the volume against read, write, and copy operations and to prevent users from configuringLU paths and command devices. Use the Data Retention to assign access attributes.For more information, see “Configuring access attributes” (page 224).

RequirementsSystem requirement

• The XP7 Storage hardware, microcode, and Remote Web Console essential for operatingthe storage system be installed and configured for use.

• The storage system must have parity groups installed.

• A Remote Web Console client computer.

Data retention strategies 31

Page 32: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Shared memory requirements

CAUTION:• The required shared memory must be installed by your Hewlett Packard Enterprise

representative.• Before shared memory is uninstalled, all Thin Provisioning and Smart Tiers pools must be

deleted.

If Thin Provisioning is used and the total capacity of Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and FastSnap pools is 1.1 PB or more, additional shared memory must be installed. When using ThinProvisioning, the following table shows the required shared memory capacity.

Required shared memory capacityTotal capacity of all pools

None1.1 PB or less

8 GBIf the total capacity satisfies both of following:

• More than 1.1 PB

• 3.4 PB or less

24 GBIf the total capacity satisfies both of following:

• More than 3.4 PB

• 7.9 PB or less

40 GBIf the total capacity satisfies both of following:

• More than 7.9 PB

• 12.3 PB or less

TIP: The V-VOL management area is automatically created when shared memory is added.This area is used to store information for associating pool-VOLs and THP V-VOLs.

If Smart Tiers is used in conjunction with Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Fast Snap pools,additional shared memory must be installed. When using Smart Tiers, the following table showsthe required shared memory capacity.

Required shared memory capacityTotal capacity of all pools

8 GB1.1 PB or less

16 GBIf the total capacity satisfies both of following:

• More than 1.1 PB

• 3.4 PB or less

32 GBIf the total capacity satisfies both of following:

• More than 3.4 PB

• 7.9 PB or less

48 GBIf the total capacity satisfies both of following:

• More than 7.9 PB

• 12.3 PB or less

32 Introduction to provisioning

Page 33: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

About cache management devicesCache management devices are associated with volumes (LDEVs) and used to manage caches.One volume (LDEV) requires at least one cache management device. An entire system canmanage up to 65,280 cache management devices. A THP V-VOL may require more than onecache management device. This topic describes how to calculate the number of cachemanagement devices.

Calculating the number of cache management devices for THP V-VOLsThe number of cache management devices that a THP V-VOL requires depends on the capacityof the V-VOL (capacity of the user area) and the maximum capacity of cache management device.The maximum capacity of cache management device depends on the pool attribute (internalvolume or external volume) associated with V-VOL.The following table explains the relationship between the pool attribute and the maximum capacityof cache management device.

Maximum capacity of cache management devices

Maximum capacity(in cylinders)

Maximum capacity(in blocks)

Maximum capacity(in MB)

Pool attribute

837,7601,457,702,400711,768.75Internal volume(695.08 GB)

1,117,7601,944,902,400949,659.37External volume(927.40 GB)

Use the following formula to calculate the number of cache management devices that a THPV-VOL requires. In this formula, the user-specified capacity is the user area capacity of a V-VOL.ceil(user-specified-capacity ÷ max-capacity-of-cache-management-device)The calculated value must be rounded up to the nearest whole number.

Calculating the number of cache management devices required by a volume that is not a THPV-VOL

One volume that is not a THP V-VOL requires one cache management device.

Viewing the number of cache management devicesClick Actions and select View Management Resource Usage to display the number of cachemanagement devices in the ViewManagement Resource Usagewindow. For details, see “ViewManagement Resource Usage window” (page 413).

Requirements 33

Page 34: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

2 Managing virtual storage machine resourcesThe virtual storage machine is the unit that is used to manage virtualized resources for eachstorage system. For software with multi-array virtualization functions, a virtual storage machineis created in the storage system.For example, if Online Migration is used to migrate a storage system to XP7 Storage, thevirtualized storage system is the migration source storage system. The migration source storagesystem is created in the migration target storage system.

About virtual storage machines and virtualized resourcesFor operations involving virtualized resources in a virtual storage machine, physical resourcesmust be linked to virtualized resources. For example, when you operate LDEVs in a virtual storagemachine, you must specify physical LDEV IDs (not virtual LDEV IDs) that link to resources in avirtual storage machine.The following describes the relationship between virtual storage machines and a storage system.

Virtual storage machines are created with operations involving data migration or the highavailability function. Other than those operations, a user cannot create virtual storage machinesin a storage system. For information on removing virtual storage machines, see the XP7 RAIDManager User Guide.Information on the virtualized resources of a virtual storage machine appears in Remote WebConsole with associated physical storage information. If the information on these resources isnot displayed by default, you can change the Column Settings of the table option.For information on displaying virtualized resources, see the XP7 RAID Manager User Guide.As for the information about virtualized resources, following terms appear in Remote Web Consolewindows.

DescriptionTerm

LDEVs that satisfy both of these conditions:LDEVs for which virtualization management is disabled

• The model name and serial number of the virtualstorage machine that manages a resource group with

34 Managing virtual storage machine resources

Page 35: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionTerm

LDEVs is the same as the storage system involved inthe operation.

• The values of the virtual LDEV ID and the LDEV IDare the same.

LDEVs that satisfy one of these conditions:LDEVs for which virtualization management is enabled

• The model name and serial number of the virtualstorage machine that manages a resource group withLDEVs is different than the storage system involvedin the operation.

• The model name and serial number of the virtualstorage machine that manages a resource group withLDEVs is the same as the storage system involved inthe operation. Yet, the values of the virtual LDEV IDand the LDEV ID are different.

Provisioning operations for resources in a virtual storage machineFor provisioning operations that involve virtualized resources in a virtual storage machine, youcan perform provisioning operations that specify conventional physical resources or virtualizedresources. However, provisioning operations that specify IDs of virtualized resources are limited.For details about data management operations for virtualized resources, see the XP7 RAIDManager User Guide.

Pair operations with virtual storage machine pairsSpecifying virtual IDs in pair operationsYou can perform pair operations by specifying both of the following in the HORCM_LDEVparameters of the RAID Manager configuration definition file:

• Serial number of the virtual storage machine in the Serial# parameter

• Virtual LDEV number in the CU:LDEV(LDEV#) parameterYou can perform conventional pair operations by specifying both of the following in theHORCM_LDEV parameters of the configuration definition file:

• Serial number of the physical storage system in the Serial# parameter

• Physical LDEV number in the CU:LDEV(LDEV#) parameter

CAUTION: If the following condition exists, the local copy pair operation cannot be performedby specifying virtual IDs:• Primary volume and secondary volume are defined differently for the virtual storage machine.If both of the following conditions exist, remote copy pair operations cannot be performed byspecifying virtual IDs:

• Primary volume is an LDEV of P9500, XP24000, or XP20000 Disk Array

• Secondary volume is an LDEV of XP7.

CAUTION: The High Availability pair operation that specifies the virtual ID cannot be performed.

Provisioning operations for resources in a virtual storage machine 35

Page 36: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Displaying pair informationYou can create pairs by specifying both of following in the HORCM_LDEV parameters of theRAID Manager configuration definition file:

• Serial number of the physical storage system in the Serial# parameter

• Virtual LDEV number in the CU:LDEV(LDEV#) parameterIf the pair is created under the above conditions, the following are displayed as results of executingthe pairdisplay command:

• Serial number of the virtual storage machine in the Seq# parameter

• Virtual LDEV number in the LDEV# parameterYou can create pairs by specifying both of the following in the HORCM_LDEV parameters of theconfiguration definition file:

• Serial number of the physical storage system in the Serial# parameter

• Physical LDEV number in the CU:LDEV(LDEV#) parameterIf the pair is created under the above conditions, the following are displayed as results of executingthe pairdisplay command:

• Physical serial number of the virtual storage machine in the Seq# parameter

• Physical virtual LDEV number in the LDEV# parameter

CAUTION: You can create pairs by specifying both of the following in the HORCM_LDEVparameters of the configuration definition file:• Serial number of the physical storage system in the Serial# parameter

• Physical LDEV number in the CU:LDEV(LDEV#) parameterFor pairs created under the above conditions, the device information that is recognized by theserver and the device information that results from executing the pairdisplay command aredifferent.

Program product operations for resources in a virtual storage machineFor data management operations that involve virtualized resources in a virtual storage machine,you can perform data management operations that specify conventional physical resources orvirtualized resources. However, data management operations that specify IDs of virtualizedresources are limited.For details about data management operations for virtualized resources, see the XP7 RAIDManager User Guide.

Editing virtualization management settingsThis section explains how to edit virtualization management settings.

CAUTION: If the setting of the LDEV virtualization management is canceled, Transient isdisplayed in the Virtual LDEV ID and Failed is displayed on the Status column in the Taskwindow. To resolve the transient status, perform one of following operation on LDEVs:• Resolve the cause of the failure by confirming the solution of the error message in the Task

window. Then retry the same operation by using the Edit Virtualization ManagementSettings window.

• In the Edit VirtualizationManagement Settingswindow, set Virtual Management Settingsto Disable before applying the setting to the storage system.

36 Managing virtual storage machine resources

Page 37: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Before you beginYou must have Security Administrator (View & Modify) role to perform this task.

Procedure1. In the Administration tree, select Resource Groups.2. Select the resource group that has the volume with the virtualization management settings

you want to edit.3. In the LDEVs tab, select a volume with virtualization management settings you want to edit.4. Use either of the following methods to display the Edit VirtualizationManagement Settings

window.• Click Edit Virtualization Management Settings.

• In the Settings menu, select Resource Management, and then Edit VirtualizationManagement Settings.

5. In Virtualization Management Settings, select virtualization management settings.• Enable: Virtualization management can be used. You can set an initial virtual LDEV ID

or the virtual configuration, or both.• Enable (Not Set): Virtualization management can be used. However, you cannot set

the initial virtual LDEV ID and virtual configuration.• Disable: Virtual management cannot be used.

6. If you select Enable in Virtualization Management Settings and can set a virtual LDEVID, set the starting virtual LDEV ID for Initial Virtual LDEV ID.A virtual LDEV ID that is not used in the virtual storage machine is assigned at the intervalspecified in Interval, sequentially starting from the specified virtual LDEV ID.

CAUTION: If the virtual storage machine is configured by multiple storage systems, avirtual LDEV ID that is already used in another storage system might be assigned. In sucha configuration, set the interval so that a virtual LDEV ID that is already used in anotherstorage system is not assigned.

NOTE: If the virtual storage machine is the same as the storage system, assign the virtualLDEV ID which is different from the LDEV ID of the selected LDEV. If the virtual storagemachine is the same as the storage system, and if the virtual LDEV ID which is the sameas LDEV ID of the selected LDEV must be assigned, select Disable in VirtualizationManagement Settings.

7. If you select Enable in Virtualization Management Settings, select Virtual Configuration.If you want to specify the virtual configuration of the LDEV (to make the configuration differentfrom that of the LDEV), select Specify. If you do not want to specify the virtual configurationof the LDEV (to make the configuration the same as that of the LDEV), select Not Set.1. In Emulation Type, select the virtual emulation type. For the virtual emulation type,

similar to the emulation type, set one of the emulation types that exist in the same groupof 32 volumes with LDEV IDs.

2. Select CVS Settings.3. InNumber of Concatenated LDEVs, specify the number of concatenated virtual LDEVs

with a value from 1 to 36 (decimal number).If you do not concatenate virtual LDEVs, enter 1.

Editing virtualization management settings 37

Page 38: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

4. In SSID, specify a virtual SSID with a value from 0004 to FFFE (hexadecimal number).Set a virtual SSID for each virtual LDEV address (64, 128, 256) in the virtual storagemachine.

NOTE: For the virtual configuration, the specified values are set for all selected LDEVs.

8. Click Finish.9. Enter the task name in Task Name.10. Click Apply.

The task is registered, and if the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, theTasks window appears.

38 Managing virtual storage machine resources

Page 39: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

3 Guidelines for creating a pool when capacity virtualizationis enabled

AbstractThis chapter describes how to estimate, operate, and maintain a pool that uses LDEVs carvedfrom parity groups with capacity virtualization enabled. This chapter also describes how toconfigure the environment for such a pool.

Checking whether capacity virtualization can be enabledBefore enabling capacity virtualization on a new parity group , check whether capacity virtualizationcan be used with the parity group. Capacity virtualization cannot be used on a FMC parity groupif the parity group meets any of the following conditions:

• Encryption is enabled in the parity group.

• The LDEV carved from the parity group is not used as a pool volume.

• The LDEVs carved from the parity group are used as a pool volumes in multiple pools.

• The full allocation function is enabled for all or any single the THP V-VOL associated withthe pool containing the LDEV that is carved from the parity group.

• If the THP V-VOL that is associated with the pool containing the LDEV created from theFMC parity group is used as a journal volume of a Continuous Access Journal pair, we donot recommend using it for capacity virtualization.

Estimating FMC capacity to be purchasedTo create a pool that uses LDEVs carved from capacity virtualization-enabled parity groups, youmust first estimate the required capacity. The following section describes how to estimate theamount of FMC capacity to be purchased for a net new environment or expanding an existingenvironment.

Estimating the FMC capacityWhen purchasing new FMC capacity to create a pool , estimate the capacity to be purchasedaccording to the following workflow:

Checking whether capacity virtualization can be enabled 39

Page 40: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

The steps shown in the figure are described below.

NOTE: To estimate the FMC capacity to be used for an capacity virtualization-enabled paritygroup , estimate a margin capacity in addition to the main capacity for storing data. Addapproximately 20% of the required FMC capacity as the margin capacity. Margin capacity refersto the total expected increase in FMC capacity, which includes the following:• Expected capacity increase for storing storage system management information

• Expected capacity increase for offsetting the degradation of the saving rate compared withestimated values

1. Estimate the required pool capacity.Estimate the pool capacity required for user data in the same way you estimate capacitywhen creating a pool. If you are expanding a pool, also estimate the additional capacity.

2. Estimate the data-size saving rate. Use either of the following methods:• If data will be migrated into FMC, use the HPE XP7 Gen2 FMD Compression Estimator

tool (xpfmc_estimator) to estimate the data-size saving rate. The tool output will providean estimated data-size savings rate that can be used to determine the capacity sizeneeded. However, if the saving rate is less than 20%, the margin capacity offsets theeffectiveness of saving the used capacity because you must estimate the capacity,including the margin capacity in "Required FMC capacity to be purchased" in the step3.

40 Guidelines for creating a pool when capacity virtualization is enabled

Page 41: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

In this case, we recommend using a parity group with capacity virtualization disabled,and recommend estimating the pool capacity by using the conventional method. Notethat to use the HPE XP7 Gen2 FMD Compression Estimator tool (xpfmc_estimator),you must install the tool on the server host. Please contact HDS account team to getthe HPE XP7 Gen2 FMD Compression Estimator tool (xpfmc_estimator) and instructionon how to use the tool.

• If new data is stored in FMC, or if the HPE XP7 Gen2 FMD Compression Estimator tool(xpfmc_estimator) cannot be executed in the environment, we recommend that youconsider setting the data-size saving rate to 0% and use conventional method to sizecapacity.

3. Estimate the required FMC capacity to be purchased.When there is data to be migrated to FMC, use the following formula to calculate the requiredFMC capacity to be purchased, and then purchase the FMC capacity that offers the estimatedcapacity and enable the capacity virtualization to create parity groups, LDEVs, and pools.Required FMC capacity to be purchased = Required pool capacity × (100 [%] - (Saving rate[%] - 10 [%])) × 110 [%]The values of the margins in the above formula are as follows:

• - 10 [%]: Margin representing expected increase in capacity because of degradation insaving

• × 110[%]: Margin representing expected increase in capacity because of additionalspace required to store storage system management information

NOTE: When using Smart Tiers or Real Time Smart Tier, if the tier 1 is configured of FMCdrives, use 1.2 times the calculated required pool capacity using the above formula. Use thefollowing formula to calculate the value:Required pool capacity = Required pool capacity estimated in step 1 x 120 %To prevent the depletion of assured capacity for writing due to the tier relocation, Smart Tiers orReal Time Smart Tier assigns pages to secure the 20% of the buffer area. If the capacityvirtualization is disabled, Smart Tiers or Real Time Smart Tier assigns pages without securingof 20% of the buffer area.Therefore, if the same FMC (Tier1) capacity is applied, the stored data volume with capacityvirtualization enabled is smaller than the stored data volume with capacity virtualization disabled.To prevent this from occurring, using 1.2 times the pool capacity estimated by procedure 1, datavolume at the same level when the capacity virtualization-disabled is located in FMC (tier 1).

If there is no data to be migrated, or if the HPE XP7 Gen2 FMD Compression Estimator tool(xpfmc_estimator) cannot be executed, purchase the FMC module that offers the same capacityas the necessary pool. And then, disable capacity virtualization to create parity groups, LDEVs,and pools.

Estimating the data-size saving rate by using the HPE XP7 Gen2 FMD CompressionEstimator tool (xpfmc_estimator)

The HPE XP7 Gen2 FMD Compression Estimator tool (xpfmc_estimator) can be used to sampleexisting data to estimate the savings rate. The HPE XP7 Gen2 FMD Compression Estimator tool(xpfmc_estimator) must be installed using the CLI on the server host that has access to the datayou want to sample. For details on the HPE XP7 Gen2 FMD Compression Estimator tool(xpfmc_estimator), contact HPE technical support. The following is an example of executing theHPE XP7 Gen2 FMD Compression Estimator tool (xpfmc_estimator):

Estimating FMC capacity to be purchased 41

Page 42: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

HPE recommend using the value of Saving % (Except Zero data)as the saving rate in theformula for estimating FMC capacity. The following explains the items in the execution example:

• SAMPLE: The number of data samples. In this example, the value is 3,000. To shorten thetime required for estimation, the HPE XP7 Gen2 FMD Compression Estimator tool(xpfmc_estimator) extracts samples from the target data when executed. Therefore, theresult output by the tool is an estimated value. The actual savings might vary depending onthe situation.

• Uncompressed Bytes: The data size before compression. The value is approximately 24MB in the example.

• Compressed Bytes: The data size after compression. The value is approximately 16 MBin the example.

• Saving%: The data-size saving rate after compression. The value is 34.32% in the example.

• Saving % (Except Zero data): The data-size saving rate with all zero pages excluded fromthe data before compression. The value is 32.57% in the example.

• Compression Ratio: The ratio of data size compression. In the example, the data size aftercompression is assumed to be 1, and the ratio of data size compression is 1.5.

Estimating the FMC capacity to expand an existing poolWhen purchasing additional FMC capacity to expand the pool capacity, estimate the capacity tobe purchased according to the following workflow:

42 Guidelines for creating a pool when capacity virtualization is enabled

Page 43: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

The following describes the steps shown in the figure:1. Estimate the pool capacity to be added.

Estimate the pool capacity required for the user in the same way you estimated capacitywhen creating a pool. If you are expanding a pool, also estimate the additional capacity.

2. Check the data-size saving rate.The data-size saving rate appears in the Pools window. View the saving rate by clickingPools > FMC Pool Volumes Capacity > Saving (%).

3. Estimate the required FMC capacity.Use the following formula to calculate the required FMC capacity:Required FMC capacity = Required pool capacity × (100 [%] - (Saving rate [%] - 10 [%]) )The value of the margin in the above formula is as follows:

• - 10[%]: Margin representing expected increase in capacity because of degradation insaving

Estimate the additional FMC capacity to be purchased according to the required FMC capacitycalculated using the above formula, and the free capacity assured for writing.

4. Check the free capacity assured for writing.In the Pools tab of the Pools window, check the value of FMC Pool Volumes Capacity.The free capacity reserved for writing is the difference between the Total and Used values.

5. Estimate the additional FMC capacity to be purchased.If the space calculated in step 4 is sufficient, this step is unnecessary. If the space isinsufficient, use the following formula to calculate the required FMC capacity:The required FMC capacity to be purchased = (Required FMC capacity - free capacityassured for writing in step 4) × 110[%]

Estimating FMC capacity to be purchased 43

Page 44: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Creating parity groups, LDEVs, and poolsIf you have confirmed that saving on the used capacity of the pool is effective, create paritygroups (with capacity virtualization enabled), LDEVs, and pools by following the workflow shownbelow. However, if saving on the used capacity of the pool is not effective, do not perform theoperations described in this

section.The following describes the steps in the figure:1. Check if a new FMC module is purchased.

If yes, go to step 3.If FMC is already used, go to step 2.

2. Enable the capacity virtualization function for an existing parity group. In the Edit ParityGroupswindow, enable the capacity virtualization function.

3. Use the purchased FMC capacity to create a parity group with capacity virtualization enabled.In the Create Parity Groups window, create a parity group.

4. Create LDEVs to be used as pool-VOLs.Use the Create LDEVs window to create LDEVs. HPE recommend the capacity of a singleLDEV to be 2.99 TB, which is the maximum capacity of a pool-VOL. Use the following formulato calculate the recommended valueof the total LDEV capacity to be defined for one paritygroup:

44 Guidelines for creating a pool when capacity virtualization is enabled

Page 45: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Total LDEV capacity = FMC capacity of the parity group ÷ (100 [%] - (Saving rate [%] - 10[%])) ÷ 110[%]The values of the margins in the above formula are as follows:

• - 10[%]: Margin representing the expected increase in capacity because of degradationin saving

• × 110[%]: Margin representing the expected increase in capacity for storing themanagement information of the storage system

For example, assuming that a 3.2 TB FMC is used in a 3D + 1P configuration and theestimated saving rate is 40%, the number of required LDEVs is calculated by performingthe following procedure:a. Calculate the total capacity of the LDEVs to be created.

9.6 TB ÷ (100% - (40% - 10%)) ÷ 110% = 12.5 TBb. Calculate the number of LDEVs.

If the capacity of an LDEV is 2.99 TB, 5 LDEVs are required.ceil (12.5 TB / 2.99 TB) = 5The value enclosed in ceil ( ) must be rounded up to the nearest whole number.

NOTE: If you use multiple parity groups, we recommend you configure the samebasic usable capacity virtualization rate for each parity group. Also, use the followingformula to calculate the basic usable capacity virtualization rate of the parity groups:Basic usable capacity virtualization rate of the parity groups = Total capacity of theLDEVs created from the parity groups ÷ FMC capacity of the parity groups

5. Create a pool or expand a poolAfter creating or expanding the pool, add all of the created LDEVs to the pool.

NOTE:• If any LDEVs cannot be added to the pool, this might be because data restoration for

the drive failure failed. Make sure that all of the LDEVs are registered to the pool. If anLDEV cannot be added to the pool, in the event of drive failure, the LDEV will be includedin the restoration targets when data is restored to a replacement FMC. In this situation,because the data size of the LDEV to be restored is larger than the size beforerestoration, the FMC capacity to be used for copying data might be depleted, causingdata restoration to fail.

• Add all of the LDEVs that were created from a single parity group to the same pool.

Monitoring the pool capacityIf you are monitoring pool capacity and notice that a pool has insufficient space, or if insufficientspace is reported in a related SIM report, you need to estimate the capacity to be added. Estimatethis capacity according to the following workflow:

Monitoring the pool capacity 45

Page 46: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Estimating FMC capacity to be added when the pool capacity is insufficientPerform the following workflow:

Disabling capacity virtualization on a parity groupIf you want to disable capacity virtualization on a parity group, perform the following procedure:

46 Guidelines for creating a pool when capacity virtualization is enabled

Page 47: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Procedure1. pool, use the following formulas to determine whether the pool shrink can be performed:

• Decision formula: Pool used capacity < Pool capacity after shrinking x Depletion thresholdUse the following formula to calculate the Pool capacity after shrinking:

• Pool capacity after shrinking = Pool capacity before shrinking - (Total capacity ofpool-VOLs with Expanded Space Used is Yes)

If the above decision formula is established, you can delete pool-VOLs with ExpandedSpace Used is Yes. Go to step 3.If the above decision formula is not established, you cannot delete pool-VOLs with ExpandedSpace Used is Yes. Go to step 2.

2. Expand the pool.By expanding the pool, add the capacity that is larger than the total of pool-VOLs withExpanded Space Used is Yes. For LDEVs to be added as pool-VOLs, use LDEVs withExpanded Space Used is No.

3. Shrink the pool so that all pool-VOLs in the pool are deleted.4. Format LDEVs with Expanded Space Used is Yes.5. Delete LDEVs with Expanded Space Used is Yes.

Disabling capacity virtualization on a parity group 47

Page 48: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

4 Configuring resource groupsThe Storage Administrator can divide a provisioned storage system into resource groups thatallow managing the storage system as multiple virtual private storage systems. Configuringresource groups involves creating resource groups, moving storage system resources into theresource groups, and assigning resource groups to user groups. Resource groups can be setup on both open and mainframe systems. Resource Partition software is required.

Resource group strategiesA storage system can connect to multiple hosts and be shared by multiple divisions in a companyor by multiple companies. Many storage administrators from different organizations can accessthe storage system. Managing the entire storage system can become complex and difficult.Potential problems are that private data might be accessed by other users, or a volume in oneorganization might be accidentally destroyed by a storage administrator in another organization.To avoid such problems, use Resource Partition to set up resource groups that allow you tomanage one storage system as multiple virtual private storage systems. The storage administratorin each resource group can access only their assigned resources. Resource groups prevent therisk of data leakage or data destruction by another storage administrator in another resourcegroup.Resources such as LDEVs, parity groups, iSCSI targets, external volumes, ports, or host groupscan be assigned to a resource group. These resources can be combined to flexibly compose avirtual private storage system.Resource groups should be planned and created before creating volumes. For more information,see “Configuring resource groups” (page 48)

System configuration using resource groupsConfiguring resource groups prevents the risk of data leakage or data destruction by anotherStorage Administrator in another resource group. The Storage Administrator considers and planswhich resource should be managed by which user, and then the Security Administrator createsresource groups and assigns each resource to the resource groups.A resource group is assigned one or more storage system resources. The following resourcescan be assigned to resource groups.

• LDEV IDs

• Parity groups

• External volumes

• Ports

• Host group IDs

• iSCSI target IDs

NOTE: Before you create LDEVs, the LDEV IDs can be reserved and assigned to a resourcegroup for future use. Host group numbers can also be reserved and assigned in advance becausethe number of host groups created on a single port is limited. The iSCSI targets numbers canalso be reserved and assigned in advance because the number of iSCSI targets created on asingle port is limited.

48 Configuring resource groups

Page 49: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

The following tasks provide instructions for configuring resource groups.

• “Creating resource groups” (page 53)

• “Editing resource groups” (page 53)

• “Deleting resource groups” (page 54)

Resource groups examplesThe following examples illustrate how you can configure resource groups on your storage system.

• “Example of resource groups sharing a port” (page 49)

• “Example of resource groups not sharing ports” (page 50)

Example of resource groups sharing a portIf you have a limited number of ports, you can still operate a storage system effectively by sharingports using resource groups.The following example shows the system configuration of an in-house division providing virtualprivate storage system for two divisions. Divisions A and B each use their own assigned paritygroup, but share a port between the two divisions. The shared port is managed by the systemdivision.

The Security Administrator in the system division creates resource groups for each division inthe storage system and assigns them to the respective divisions. The Storage Administrator inDivision A can manage the resource groups for Division A, but cannot access the resource groupsfor Division B. In the same manner, the Storage Administrator in Division B can manage theresource groups for Division B, but cannot access the resource groups for Division A.The Security Administrator creates a resource group for managing the common resources, andthe Storage Administrator in the system division manages the port that is shared between DivisionsA and B. The Storage Administrators in Divisions A and B cannot manage the shared portbelonging to the resource group for common resources management.

Resource groups examples 49

Page 50: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Configuration workflow for resource groups sharing a port1. The system division forms a plan about the resource group creation and assignment of the

resources.2. The Security Administrator creates resource groups. For more information, see “Creating

resource groups” (page 53).3. The Security Administrator creates user groups.

For more information, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.4. The Security Administrator assigns the resource groups to user groups.

For more information, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.5. The Storage Administrator in the system division sets a port.6. The Security Administrator assigns resources to the resource groups. For more information,

see “Editing resource groups” (page 53).7. The Security Administrator assigns each Storage Administrator to each user group.

For more information, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.

After the above procedures, the Storage Administrators in A and B divisions can manage theresource groups assigned to their own division.

Example of resource groups not sharing portsIf you assign ports to each resource group without sharing, performance can be maintained ona different port even if the bulk of I/O is issued from one side port.The following shows a system configuration example of an in-house system division providingthe virtual private storage system for two divisions. Divisions A and B each use individual assignedports and parity groups. In this example, they do not share a port.

The Security Administrator in the system division creates resource groups for each division inthe storage system and assigns them to the respective divisions. The Storage Administrator inDivision A can manage the resource groups for Division A, but cannot access the resource groups

50 Configuring resource groups

Page 51: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

for Division B. In the same manner, the Storage Administrator in Division B can manage theresource groups for Division B, but cannot access the resource groups for Division A.

Configuration workflow for resource groups not sharing a port1. The system division forms a plan about creating resource groups and the assigning resources

to the groups.2. The Security Administrator creates resource groups. For more information, see “Creating

resource groups” (page 53).3. The Security Administrator creates user groups.

For more information, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.4. The Security Administrator assigns the resource groups to user groups.

For more information, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.5. The Storage Administrator in the system division sets ports.6. The Security Administrator assigns resources to the resource groups. For more information,

see “Editing resource groups” (page 53).7. The Security Administrator assigns each Storage Administrator to each user group.

For more information, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.

After the above procedures, the Storage Administrators in A and B divisions can access theresource groups allocated to their own division.

Meta_resourceThe meta_resource is a resource group comprised of additional resources (other than externalvolumes) and the resources that exist on the storage system before the Resource Partition isinstalled. By default, existing resources initially belong to the meta_resource group to ensurecompatibility with older software when a system is upgraded to include Resource Partition.

Resource lockWhile processing a task on a resource, all of the resource groups assigned to the logged-on userare locked for exclusive access.A secondary window (such as the Report Display) or an operation from the service processor(SVP) locks all of the resource groups in the storage system.When a resource is locked, a status indicator appears on the Remote Web Console status bar.Click the Resource Locked button to view information about the locked resource.

User groupsUser groups and associated built-in roles are defined in the SVP. A user belongs to one or moreuser groups. Privileges allowed to a particular user are determined by the user group or groupsto which the user belongs.The Security Administrator assigns resource groups to user groups. A user group might alreadybe configured, or a new user group might be required for certain resources.For more information, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.

Resource group assignmentsAll resource groups are normally assigned to the Security Administrator and the Audit LogAdministrator.

Meta_resource 51

Page 52: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Each resource group has a designated Storage Administrator who can access only their assignedresources and cannot access other resources.All resource groups to which all resources in the storage system belong can be assigned to auser group. Configure this in Remote Web Console by setting All Resource Groups Assignedto Yes.A user who has All Resource Groups Assigned set to Yes can access all resources in thestorage system. For example, if a user is a Security Administrator (with View & Modify privileges)and a Storage Administrator (with View and Modify privileges) and All Resource GroupsAssigned is Yes on that user account, the user can edit the storage for all the resources.If allowing this access becomes a problem with security on the storage system, then register thefollowing two user accounts and use these different accounts for different purposes.

• A user account for a Security Administrator where All Resource Groups Assigned is setto Yes.

• A user account for a Storage Administrator who does not have all resource groups assignedand has only some of the resource groups assigned.

Resource group license requirementsUse of Resource Partition on the XP7 storage system requires the following:

• A license key for Resource Partition software. For details about the license key or productinstallation, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.

Resource group rules, restrictions, and guidelinesRules• The maximum number of resource groups that can be created on a storage system is 1023.

• A Storage Administrator with the Security Administrator (View & Modify) role can createresource groups and assign resources to resource groups.

• Resources removed from a resource group are returned to meta_resource.

• Only a Security Administrator (View & Modify) can manage the resources in assigned resourcegroups.

Restrictions• No new resources can be added to meta_resource.

• Resources cannot be deleted from meta_resource.

• LDEVs with the same pool IDs or journal IDs cannot be added to multiple resource groups.In the case of adding LDEVs that are used as pool volumes or journal volumes, add all theLDEVs that have the same pool IDs or journal IDs by using a function such as sort.

• Host groups that belong to the initiator port cannot be added to a resource group.

52 Configuring resource groups

Page 53: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Guidelines• If you are providing a virtual private storage system to different companies, you should not

share parity groups, external volumes, or pools if you want to limit the capacity that can beused by each user. When parity groups, external volumes, or pools are shared betweenmultiple users, and if one user uses too much capacity of the shared resource, the otherusers might not be able to create an LDEV.

Managing resource groupsThese topics provide information and procedures that you can use to create, edit, and deleteresource groups.

Creating resource groupsNote the following restrictions for creating a resource group:

• The maximum number of resource groups that can be created on a storage system is 1023.

• The namemeta_resource cannot be used for a user created resource group.

• Duplicate occurrences of the same name are not allowed.

• Resource group name can use alphanumeric characters, spaces, and the following symbols:! # $ % & ' ( ) + - . = @ [ ] ^ _ ` { } ~

• Characters in a resource group name are case-sensitive.

Before you beginYou must have Security Administrator (View & Modify) role to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Create Resource Groups window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On the Administration tab, select Resource Groups.2. Click Create Resource Groups.In Remote Web Console:1. In the Explorer pane, expand the Storage Systems tree, click theAdministration tab,

and then select Resource Groups.2. Click Create Resource Groups.

2. In theCreate Resource Groupswindow, enter a resource group name and select a storagesystem.

3. Add parity groups, LDEVs, iSCSI targets, ports, and host groups as follows:1. On the tab for the desired resource type, click the Add resource button.2. In the add resource window, select one or more resources, and then click OK.

4. Enter a task name or accept the default, and then click Submit.If you select View task status, the Tasks & Alerts tab opens.

Editing resource groupsNote the following restrictions for editing resource groups:

• Only resources allocated to meta_resource can be added to resource groups.

• Resources removed from a resource group are returned to meta_resource.

• No resource can be added to or removed from meta_resource.

Managing resource groups 53

Page 54: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

• The name of the meta_resource group cannot be changed or used for any resource groupother than the meta_resource group.

• Duplicate occurrences of the same name are not allowed.

• Resource group names can include alphanumeric characters, spaces, and the followingsymbols: ! # $ % & ' ( ) + - . = @ [ ] ^ _ ` { } ~

• Resource group names are case-sensitive.

• LDEVs with the same pool ID or journal ID cannot be added to multiple resource groups orpartially removed from a resource group. For example, if two LDEVs belong to the samepool, you must allocate both to the same resource group. You cannot allocate themseparately.You cannot partially remove LDEVs with the same pool ID or journal ID from a resourcegroup. If two LDEVs belong to the same pool, you cannot remove LDEV1 leave only LDEV2in the resource group.Use the sort function to sort the LDEVs by pool ID or journal ID. Then select the IDs andadd or remove them all at once.

• Host groups that belong to the initiator port cannot be added to a resource group.

• To add or delete THP pool volumes, you must first add or delete THP pools.

Before you beginYou must have Security Administrator (View & Modify) role to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Edit Resource Group window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On the Administration tab, select Resource Groups.2. Click the check box of a Resource Group Name.In Remote Web Console:1. In the Explorer pane, click theAdministration tab, and then selectResource Groups.2. Click the check box of a Resource Group Name.

2. Click Edit Resource Group.• To change the name of a resource group, enter a new identifier in Name.

• To add a resource, select the Parity Groups, LDEV IDs, Storage Ports, orHost GroupNumbers tab, and then click the add button.

• To remove a resource, select it on the Parity Groups, LDEV IDs, Storage Ports, orHost Group Numbers tab, and then click the remove button.

3. Enter a task name or accept the default, and then click Submit.If you select View task status, the Tasks & Alerts tab opens.

Deleting resource groupsThe following resource groups cannot be deleted:

• The meta_resource

• A resource group that is assigned to a user group

• A resource group that has resources assigned to it

• Resource groups included in different resource groups cannot be removed at the same time.

54 Configuring resource groups

Page 55: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Before you beginThe Security Administrator (View & Modify) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Delete Resource Groups window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On the Administration tab, select Resource Groups.2. Click the check box of a Resource Group Name.In Remote Web Console:1. In the Explorer pane, expand the Storage Systems tree, click theAdministration tab,

select Resource Groups.2. Click the check box of a Resource Group Name.

2. Click Delete Resource Groups.3. Enter a task name or accept the default, and then click Submit.

If you select View task status, the Tasks & Alerts tab opens.

Using Resource Partition and other XP7 productsTo use Resource Partition with other XP7 products, the resources that are required for theoperation must satisfy specific conditions. The following topics provide information about thespecific resource conditions that are required for using each XP7 product.

Thin ProvisioningThe following table provides information about specific Thin Provisioning conditions that mustbe observed when using Resource Partition.

ConditionOperation name

If THP V-VOLs are created, the following must be assigned to the StorageAdministrator group that is permitted to manage them.

Create LDEVs

• LDEV ID

• Pool-VOL of the pool

If THP V-VOLs are deleted, the following must be assigned to the StorageAdministrator group that is permitted to manage them.

Delete LDEVs

• LDEV ID

• Pool-VOL of the pool

Volumes to be specified as pool-VOLs must be assigned to the StorageAdministrator group permitted to manage them.

Create poolsExpand pools

All the volumes that are specified when creating a pool must belong to the sameresource group.

Pool-VOLs of the specified pool must be assigned to the Storage Administratorgroup permitted to manage them.

Edit poolsDelete pools

You can expand only the THP V-VOLs that are assigned to the StorageAdministrator group permitted to manage them.

Expand V-VOLs

You can reclaim or stop reclaiming zero pages only for the THP V-VOLs that areassigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted to manage them.

Reclaim zero pagesStop reclaiming zero pages

Using Resource Partition and other XP7 products 55

Page 56: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DKA EncryptionThe following table provides information about specific DKA Encryption conditions that must beobserved when using Resource Partition.

ConditionOperation name

When you specify a parity group and open the Edit Encryption window, thespecified parity group and LDEVs carved from the parity group must be assignedto the Storage Administrator group permitted to manage them.

Edit encryption keys

When you open the Edit Encryption window without specifying a parity group,more than one parity group and LDEVs carved from the parity group must beassigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted to manage them.

LUN ManagerThe following table provides information about specific LUN Manager conditions that must beobserved when using Resource Partition.For Fibre Channel

ConditionOperation name

When you specify host groups and open the Add LUN Paths window, thespecified host groups must be assigned to the Storage Administrator grouppermitted to manage them.

Add LUN paths

When you specify LDEVs and open the Add LUN paths window, the specifiedLDEVs must be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted to managethem.

When you specify a host group and open the Delete LUN Paths window, thespecified host group must be assigned to the Storage Administrator grouppermitted to manage them.

Delete LUN paths

When you specify LDEVs and open the Delete LUN Paths window, the specifiedLDEVs must be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted to managethem.When selecting the Delete all defined LUN paths to above LDEVs check box,the host groups of all the alternate paths in the LDEV displayed on the SelectedLUNs table must be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted tomanage them.

The specified host groups and initiator ports must be assigned to the StorageAdministrator group permitted to manage them.

Edit host groups

The specified host groups must be assigned to the Storage Administrator grouppermitted to manage them.

Add hosts

The specified host group must be assigned to the Storage Administrator grouppermitted to manage them.

Edit hosts

When you select the Apply same settings to the HBAWWN of all ports checkbox, all the host groups where the specified HBA WWNs are registered must beassigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted to manage them.

When you select theRemove hosts from all host groups containing the hostsin the storage system check box, all the host groups where the HBA WWNs

Remove hosts

displayed in the Selected Hosts table are registered must be assigned to theStorage Administrator group permitted to manage them.

The specified port must be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permittedto manage them.

Edit ports

If this port attribute is changed from Target or RCU Target to Initiator or to External,the host group of this port belongs to meta_resource.Therefore, the host group of this port is not displayed in windows.

56 Configuring resource groups

Page 57: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

ConditionOperation name

The specified host groups and all the LDEVs where the paths are set to the hostgroups must be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted to managethem.

Create alternative LUN paths

The specified host groups and the LDEVs where the paths are set must beassigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted to manage them.

Copy LUN paths

LDEVs where the specified paths are set must be assigned to the StorageAdministrator group permitted to manage them.

Edit command devices

The specified LDEV must be assigned to the Storage Administrator grouppermitted to manage them.

Edit UUIDs

The specified LDEV must be assigned to the Storage Administrator grouppermitted to manage them.

Delete UUIDs

When you open the Create Host Groups window by specifying host groups, thespecified host groups must be assigned to the Storage Administrator grouppermitted to manage them.

Create host groups

The specified host groups and all the LDEVs where the paths are set to the hostgroups must be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted to managethem.

Delete host groups

LDEVs where the specified paths are set must be assigned to you.Release Host-Reserved LUNs

For iSCSI

ConditionOperation name

When you specify host groups and open the Add LUN Paths window, thespecified iSCSI target must be assigned to the Storage Administrator grouppermitted to manage them.

Add LUN paths

When you specify LDEVs and open the Add LUN paths window, the specifiedLDEVs must be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted to managethem.

When you specify an iSCSI target and open the Delete LUN Paths window, thespecified iSCSI target must be assigned to the Storage Administrator grouppermitted to manage them.

Delete LUN paths

When you specify LDEVs and open the Delete LUN Paths window, the specifiedLDEVs must be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted to managethem.When selecting the Delete all defined LUN paths to above LDEVs check box,the iSCSI target of all the alternate paths in the LDEV displayed on the SelectedLUNs table must be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted tomanage them.

The specified iSCSI target must be assigned to the Storage Administrator grouppermitted to manage them.

Add hosts

The specified iSCSI target must be assigned to the Storage Administrator grouppermitted to manage them.

Edit hosts

When you select the Apply same settings to the HBAWWN of all ports checkbox, all the iSCSI targets where the specified HBA WWNs are registered mustbe assigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted to manage them.

The specified iSCSI target must be assigned to the Storage Administrator grouppermitted to manage them.

Remove hosts

The specified port must be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permittedto manage them.

Edit ports

Using Resource Partition and other XP7 products 57

Page 58: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

ConditionOperation name

The specified iSCSI target and all the LDEVs where the paths are set to the iSCSItarget must be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted to managethem.

Create alternative LUN paths

The specified iSCSI target and the LDEVs where the paths are set must beassigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted to manage them.

Copy LUN paths

LDEVs where the specified paths are set must be assigned to the StorageAdministrator group permitted to manage them.

Edit command devices

The specified LDEV must be assigned to the Storage Administrator grouppermitted to manage them.

Edit UUIDs

The specified LDEV must be assigned to the Storage Administrator grouppermitted to manage them.

Delete UUIDs

LDEVs where the specified paths are set must be assigned to you.Release Host-Reserved LUNs

When you open the Create iSCSI targets window by specifying iSCSI targets,the specified iSCSI targets must be assigned to the Storage Administrator grouppermitted to manage them.

Create iSCSI targets

The specified iSCSI targets and ports must be assigned to the StorageAdministrator group permitted to manage them.

Edit iSCSI targets

The specified iSCSI targets and all the LDEVs where the paths are set to theiSCSI targets must be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted tomanage them.

Delete iSCSI targets

Performance MonitorThe following table provides information about specific Performance Monitor conditions that mustbe observed when using Resource Partition.

ConditionOperation name

The specified ports must be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permittedto manage them.

Add to ports

The specified ports must be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permittedto manage them.

Add new monitored WWNs

The specified ports must be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permittedto manage them.

Edit WWNs

Business CopyThe following table provides information about specific Business Copy conditions that must beobserved when using Resource Partition.

ConditionOperation name

Both primary volume and secondary volumes must be assigned to the StorageAdministrator group permitted to manage them.

Create pairs

Primary volumes must be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permittedto manage them.

Split pairs

Suspend pairs

Resynchronize pairs

Release pairs

58 Configuring resource groups

Page 59: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Fast SnapThe following table provides information about specific Fast Snap conditions that must be observedwhen using Resource Partition.

ConditionOperation name

If LDEVs for Fast Snap are created, the following must be assigned to the StorageAdministrator group that is permitted to manage them.

Create LDEVs

• LDEV ID

• Pool VOL of the pool

If LDEVs for Fast Snap are deleted, the following must be assigned to the StorageAdministrator group that is permitted to manage them.

Delete LDEVs

• LDEV ID

• Pool VOL of the pool

Volumes that are specified when creating or expanding pools must be assignedto you.

Create poolsExpand Pool

All the volumes that are specified when creating pools must belong to the sameresource group.

Pool-VOLs of the specified pools must be assigned to you.Edit PoolsDelete Pools

Both primary volumes and secondary volumes must be assigned to you.Create pairs

Primary volumes must be assigned to you.Split pairs

Suspend pairs

Resynchronize pairs

Release pairs

Continuous Access SynchronousThe following table provides information about specific Continuous Access Synchronous conditionsthat must be observed when using Resource Partition.

ConditionOperation name

Specified ports must be assigned to the user.Edit Ports

Specified initiator ports must be assigned to the user.Add Remote Connection

Operation can be performed with no conditions.Edit Remote Connection Options

Primary volumes must be assigned to the user.Create PairsInitiator ports of remote paths that are connected with the primary volume in theremote storage must be assigned to the user.

Specified primary volumes or secondary volumes must be assigned to the user.Split Pairs

Primary volumes must be assigned to the user.Resync Pairs

Specified volumes must be assigned to the user.Delete PairsIf primary volumes are specified, the initiator ports of remote paths that areconnected with the primary volume in the remote storage must be assigned tothe user.

Primary volumes must be assigned to the user.Edit Pair Options

Using Resource Partition and other XP7 products 59

Page 60: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

ConditionOperation name

Specified initiator ports must be assigned to the user.Add Remote Paths

Specified initiator ports must be assigned to the user.Remove Remote Paths

Initiator ports of remote paths that are connected to a specified remote storagemust be assigned to the user.

Edit Remote Connection Options

Initiator ports of remote paths that are connected to a specified remote storagemust be assigned to the user.

Remove Remote Connections

Specified primary volumes or secondary volumes must be assigned to the user.Force Delete Pairs

High AvailabilityThe following table provides information about specific High Availability conditions that must beobserved when using Resource Partition.

ConditionOperation name

Specified ports must be assigned to the user.Edit Ports

Specified initiator ports must be assigned to the user.Add Remote Connection

Operation can be performed with no conditions.Edit Remote Connection Options

Primary volumes must be assigned to the user.Create PairsInitiator ports of remote paths that are connected with the primary volume in theremote storage must be assigned to the user.

Specified primary volumes or secondary volumes must be assigned to the user.Split Pairs

Primary volumes must be assigned to the user.Resync Pairs

Specified volumes must be assigned to the user.Delete PairsIf primary volumes are specified, the initiator ports of remote paths that areconnected with the primary volume in the remote storage must be assigned tothe user.

Primary volumes must be assigned to the user.Edit Pair Options

Specified initiator ports must be assigned to the user.Add Remote Paths

Specified initiator ports must be assigned to the user.Remove Remote Paths

Initiator ports of remote paths that are connected to a specified remote storagemust be assigned to the user.

Edit Remote Connection Options

Initiator ports of remote paths that are connected to a specified remote storagemust be assigned to the user.

Remove Remote Connections

Specified primary volumes or secondary volumes must be assigned to the user.Force Delete Pairs

LDEVs to be set as quorum disks must be assigned to the user.Add Quorum Disks

LDEVs to be set as quorum disks must be assigned to the user.Remove Quorum Disks

60 Configuring resource groups

Page 61: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Continuous Access JournalThe following table provides information about specific Continuous Access Journal conditionsthat must be observed when using Resource Partition.

ConditionOperation name

Specified ports must be assigned to the user.Edit Ports

Specified initiator ports must be assigned to the user.Add Remote Connection

Specified initiator ports must be assigned to the user.Add Remote Paths

All LDEVs that are specified when creating a journal must belong to the sameresource group. Volumes to be assigned to a journal must be assigned to theuser.

Create Journals

Volumes to be assigned to a journal must be assigned to the user. All volumesto be assigned to a journal must belong to a same resource group to which theexisting journal volumes belong.

Assign Journal Volumes

Journal volumes must be assigned to the user.Assign MP Blade

Operation can be performed with no conditions.Edit Remote Connection Options

Journal volumes for pair volumes and primary volumes must be assigned to theuser.

Create Pairs

Initiator ports of remote paths that are connected with the primary volume in theremote storage must be assigned to the user.

Specified primary volumes or secondary volumes must be assigned to the user.Split Pairs

All data volumes configured to a mirror must be assigned to the user.Split Mirrors

Primary volumes must be assigned to the user.Resync Pairs

All data volumes configured to a mirror must be assigned to the user.Resync Mirrors

Specified volumes or secondary volume must be assigned to the user.Delete PairsInitiator ports of remote paths that are connected with the primary volume in theremote storage must be assigned to the user.

All data volumes configured to a mirror must be assigned to the user.Delete Mirrors

Primary volumes must be assigned to the user.Edit Pair Options

Specified volumes must be assigned to the user.Force Delete Pairs

All data volumes consisting of the specified journal must be assigned to the user.Edit Journal OptionsJournal volumes must be assigned to the user.

All data volumes configuring the specified journal must be assigned to the user.Edit Mirror OptionsJournal volumes must be assigned to the user.

Journal volumes must be assigned to the user.Remove Journals

Initiator ports of remote paths that are connected to a specified remote storagemust be assigned to the user.

Edit Remote Connection Options

Specified initiator ports must be assigned to the user.Remove Remote Paths

When you move LDEVs used for journal volumes to other resource groups, youmust specify all the journal volumes of the journal to which the LDEVs belong.

Move LDEVs to other resourcegroups

Journal volumes must be assigned to the user.Assign Remote CommandDevices

Using Resource Partition and other XP7 products 61

Page 62: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

ConditionOperation name

Specified remote command devices must be assigned to the user.

Journal volumes must be assigned to the user.Release Remote CommandDevices Specified remote command devices must be assigned to the user.

External StorageThe following table provides information about specific External Storage conditions that must beobserved when using Resource Partition.

ConditionOperation name

When creating an external volume, a volume is created in the resource groupwhere the external port belongs.

Add external volumes

When you specify a path group and open the Add External Volumes window,all the ports that compose the path group must be assigned to the StorageAdministrator group permitted to manage them.

The specified external volume and all the LDEVs allocated to that external volumemust be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted to manage them.

Delete external volumes

All the external volumes belonging to the specified external storage system andall the LDEVs allocated to that external volumes must be assigned to the StorageAdministrator group permitted to manage them.

Disconnect external storagesystems

All the external volumes belonging to the specified external storage system andall the LDEVs allocated to that external volumes must be assigned to the StorageAdministrator group permitted to manage them.

Reconnect external storagesystems

The specified external volume and all the LDEVs allocated to the external volumesmust be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted to manage them.

Disconnect external volumes

The specified external volume and all the LDEVs allocated to the external volumesmust be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted to manage them.

Reconnect external volumes

The specified external volume must be assigned to the Storage Administratorgroup permitted to manage them.

Edit external volumes

The specified external volumes and all the ports of the external paths connectingthe external volumes must be assigned to the Storage Administrator grouppermitted to manage them.

Assign MP Blade

Ports of the specified external paths and all the external volumes connecting withthe external path must be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permittedto manage them.

Disconnect external paths

When you specify By Ports, all the external paths connecting with the specifiedports and all the external volumes connecting with the external paths must beassigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted to manage them.When you specify By External WWNs, all the ports of the external pathsconnecting to the specified external WWN and all the external volumes connectingwith those external paths must be assigned to the Storage Administrator grouppermitted to manage them.

Ports of the specified external paths and all the external volumes connecting withthose external paths must be assigned to the Storage Administrator grouppermitted to manage them.

Reconnect external paths

When you specify By Ports, all the external paths connecting with the specifiedports and all the external volumes connecting with the external paths must beassigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted to manage them.When you specify By External WWNs, all the ports of the external pathsconnecting to the specified external WWN and all the external volumes connecting

62 Configuring resource groups

Page 63: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

ConditionOperation name

with those external paths must be assigned to the Storage Administrator grouppermitted to manage them.

All the ports of the external paths connecting to the specified external WWN andall the external volumes connecting with the external paths must be assigned tothe Storage Administrator group permitted to manage them.

Edit external WWNs

Ports of all the external paths composing the specified path group and all theexternal volumes that belong to the path group must be assigned to the StorageAdministrator group permitted to manage them.

Edit external path configuration

Open System Array ManagementThe following table provides information about specific Open System Array Management conditionsthat must be observed when using Resource Partition.

ConditionOperation name

When you specify a parity group and open the Create LDEVs window, the paritygroup must be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted to managethem.

Create LDEVs

When you create an internal or external volumes parity groups where the LDEVbelongs and ID of the new LDEV must be assigned to the Storage Administratorgroup permitted to manage them.

When deleting an internal or external volume, the deleted LDEV and parity groupswhere the LDEV belongs must be assigned to the Storage Administrator grouppermitted to manage them.

Delete LDEVs

The specified LDEV must be assigned to the Storage Administrator grouppermitted to manage them.

Edit LDEVs

When you specify LDEVs and open the Restore LDEVs window, the specifiedLDEVs must be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted to managethem.

Restore LDEVs

When you specify a parity group and open the Restore LDEVs window, thespecified parity group and all the LDEVs in the parity group must be assigned tothe Storage Administrator group permitted to manage them.

When you specify LDEVs and open the Block LDEVs window, the specifiedLDEVs must be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted to managethem.

Block LDEVs

When you specify a parity group and open theBlock LDEVswindow, the specifiedparity group and all the LDEVs in the parity group must be assigned to the StorageAdministrator group permitted to manage them.

When you specify LDEV and open the Format LDEVs window, the specifiedLDEV must be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted to managethem.

Format LDEVs

When you specify a parity group and open the Format LDEVs window, thespecified parity group and all the LDEVs in the parity group must be assigned tothe Storage Administrator group permitted to manage them.

Using Resource Partition and other XP7 products 63

Page 64: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Cache PartitionThe following table provides information about specific Cache Partition conditions that must beobserved when using Resource Partition.

ConditionOperation name

When you specify virtual volumes, the specified LDEV must be assigned to theStorage Administrator group permitted to manage them.

Migrate parity groups

When you specify a parity group, the specified parity group must be assigned tothe Storage Administrator group permitted to manage them.

Auto LUNThe following table provides information about specific Auto LUN conditions that must be observedwhen using Resource Partition.

ConditionOperation name

The specified source volume and target volume must beassigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted tomanage them.

Migrate volumes

Volume ShredderThe following table provides information about specific Volume Shredder conditions that mustbe observed when using Resource Partition.

ConditionOperation name

When you specify LDEVs and open the Shred LDEVs window, the specifiedLDEVs must be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted to managethem.

Shred LDEVs

When you specify a parity group and open theShred LDEVswindow, the specifiedparity group and all the LDEVs in the parity group must be assigned to the StorageAdministrator group permitted to manage them.

64 Configuring resource groups

Page 65: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Performance ControlThe following table provides information about specific Performance Control conditions that mustbe observed when using Resource Partition.

ConditionsOperation name

The specified ports must be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permittedto manage them.

Set priority of ports(attribute/threshold/upper limit)

Release settings on ports by thedecrease of ports

Set priority of WWNs(attribute/upper limit)

Change WWNs and Perf Ctlnames

Add WWNs (add WWNs to PerfCtl groups)

Delete WWNs (delete WWNsfrom Perf Ctl groups)

Add Perf Ctl groups and WWNs

Delete Perf Ctl groups

Set priority of Perf Ctl groups(attribute/upper limit)

Rename Perf Ctl groups

Add WWNs

Delete WWNs

All ports must be assigned to the Storage Administrator group permitted to managethem.

Initialization

Set threshold

Using Resource Partition and other XP7 products 65

Page 66: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

5 Configuring custom-sized provisioningConfiguring custom-sized provisioning involves creating and configuring a customized volume(CV). A CV is a fixed-sized volume that is divided into arbitrary sizes. This provisioning strategyis suitable for use on both open and mainframe systems. Virtual LUN software is required toconfigure variable-sized provisioning on open systems.

Virtual LUN functionsVirtual LUN function is used to create, configure, or delete a customized volume (LDEV).The Virtual LUN function is an open systems function available in Open System Array Managementsoftware.A parity group usually consists of some fixed-sized volumes (FVs) and some free space. Thenumber of FVs is determined by the emulation type. A Virtual LUN volume usually consists of atleast one FV, one or more customized volumes (CVs), and some free space.Use the Virtual LUN function to configure variable-sized volumes that efficiently exploit the capacityof a disk. Variable-sized volumes are logical volumes that are divided into smaller than normalfixed-size volumes. This configuration is desirable when frequently accessed files are distributedacross smaller multiple logical volumes. This generally improves the data accessing performance,though file access may be delayed in some instances.The Virtual LUN function can also divide a logical volume into multiple smaller volumes to reduceunused capacity and provide a more efficient use of space for small volumes such as commanddevices. The Virtual LUN function can efficiently exploit the capacity of a disk by not wastingcapacity using larger volumes when the extra capacity is not needed.

Virtual LUN requirementsUse of Virtual LUN on the XP7 storage system to configure variable-sized volumes requires thefollowing:

• A license key for Virtual LUN. This is available in Open System Array Management, softwareand is for open systems.

For details about the license key or product installation, see the XP7 Remote Web Console UserGuide.

Virtual LUN specificationsVirtual LUN specifications for open systems

Open systemParameter

OPEN-VOPEN-3, OPEN-8, OPEN-9, OPEN-ETrack format

OPEN-VOPEN-3, OPEN-8,Emulation typeOPEN-9, OPEN-E

Depends on the track geometryDepends on the track geometryAbility to intermix emulation type

2,048 for RAID 5 (7D+1P), RAID 6(6D+2P), or RAID 6 (14D+2P)

2,048 for RAID 5 (7D+1P), RAID 6(6D+2P), or RAID 6 (14D+2P)

Maximum number of volumes(normal and Virtual LUN) perparity group 1,024 for other RAID levels1,024 for other RAID levels

65,28065,280Maximum number of volumes(normal and Virtual LUN) perstorage system

66 Configuring custom-sized provisioning

Page 67: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Open systemParameter

48,000 KB (50 cylinders)36,000 KB (+ control cylinders)Minimum size for one VirtualLUN volume

See “CV capacity by emulation type foropen systems” (page 67).

See “CV capacity by emulation type foropen systems” (page 67).

Maximum size for one VirtualLUN volume

1 MB or 1 block (512 bytes)1 MB or 1 block (512 bytes)Size increment

AnywhereAnywhereDisk location for Virtual LUNvolumes

CV capacity by emulation type for open systems

Number of controlcylinders (cyl)

Maximum CV capacityMinimum CV capacity(CYL)

Emulation type*

NoneInternal volume:3,221,159,680 KB (2.99 TB)

48,000 KB (50 cyl)OPEN-V

External volume:4,294,967,296 KB (4 TB)

5,760 KB (8 cyl)2,403,360 KB36,000 KB (50 cyl)OPEN-3

19,440 KB (27 cyl)7,175,520 KB36,000 KB (50 cyl)OPEN-8

19,440 KB (27 cyl)7,211,520 KB36,000 KB (50 cyl)OPEN-9

13,680 KB (19 cyl)14,226,480 KB36,000 KB (50 cyl)OPEN-E

*Virtual LUN operations are not available for OPEN-L volumes.

SSID requirementsThe storage system is configured with one SSID (Storage System ID) for each group of 64 or256 devices, so there are one or four SSIDs per CU image. Each SSID must be unique to eachconnected host system. SSIDs are user-specified and are assigned during storage systeminstallation in hexadecimal format, from 0004 to FEFF.The following table shows the relationship between controller emulation types and SSIDs.

Virtual LUN supportSSID requirementController emulation type

OPEN-3, OPEN-8, OPEN-9,OPEN-E, and OPEN-Vvolumes

0004 to FEFFI-2107

Virtual LUN size calculationsWhen creating a CV, you can specify the capacity of each CV. However, rounding will producedifferent values for the user-specified CV capacity and the actual entire CV capacity. To estimatethe actual capacity of a CV, use a mathematical formula. The following topics explain how tocalculate the user area capacity and the entire capacity of a CV.The capacity of a CV or an LDEV consists of two types of capacity. One type is the user areacapacity that stores the user data. The second type is the capacities of all areas that are necessaryfor an LDEV implementation including control information. The sum of these two types of capacitiesis called the entire capacity.Implemented LDEVs consume the entire capacity from the parity group capacity. Therefore, evenif the sum of user areas of multiple CVs and the user area of one CV are the same size, theremaining free space generated when multiple CVs are created may be smaller than the freespace in the parity group when one CV is created.

SSID requirements 67

Page 68: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

When using RAID Manager, the specified size of CVs is created regardless of the capacitycalculation. Therefore, even if the same capacity size (for example, 1 TB) appears, the actualcapacity size might be different between the CVs created by RAID Manager and the CVs createdby Remote Web Console.If an LDEV is created by the Create LDEVs window, depending on the specification of the offsetboundary option, the capacity of LDEV differs even if the specified value is the same. If the offsetboundary option is selected, the specified capacity of LDEV is offset by conforming to theprescribed boundary values, and an LDEV is created. For details about the prescribed boundaryvalues, see “Calculating OPEN-V volume size (CV capacity unit is MB)” (page 68), “CalculatingOPEN-V volume size (CV capacity unit is blocks)” (page 68), “Calculating fixed-size open-systemsvolume size (CV capacity unit is MB)” (page 69), or “Calculating fixed-size open-systems volumesize (CV capacity unit is blocks)” (page 69).If the offset boundary option is not selected, the capacity of the LDEV is created with the specifiedsize. In the storage system, data is managed based on a slot, and the data protection is performedbased on a parity stripe unit. For an LDEV with capacity offset by a boundary, the efficiency ofthe drive capacity is improved because the capacity of LDEV is offset by the unit of the datamanagement. If there is an emphasis on the efficiency of the drive capacity, select the OffsetBoundary option when creating LDEVs. Do not select the Offset Boundary option if you only wantthe LDEV capacity to be a specific size when creating LDEVs.

Calculating OPEN-V volume size (CV capacity unit is MB)The methods for calculating the user area capacity and the entire capacity of a CV vary dependingon the CV capacity unit that is specified when creating the CV.To calculate the user area capacity of a CV whose capacity unit is defined as megabytes:ceil(ceil(user-specified-CV-capacity * 1024 / 64) / 15) * 64 * 15

where

• the value enclosed in ceil( ) must be rounded up to the nearest whole number.

• user-specified-CV-capacity is expressed in megabytes.

• The resulting user area capacity is expressed in kilobytes.To calculate the entire capacity of a CV:ceil(user-area-capacity / boundary-value) * boundary-value / 1024

where

• the value enclosed in ceil( ) must be rounded up to the nearest whole number.

• user-area-capacity is expressed in kilobytes

• boundary value is expressed in kilobytes. The boundary value depends on volumeemulation types and RAID levels (see “Boundary values for RAID levels” (page 70)).

• The resulting entire capacity is expressed in megabytes.

Calculating OPEN-V volume size (CV capacity unit is blocks)To calculate the user area capacity of a CV whose capacity unit is defined as blocks:ceil(user-specified-CV-capacity / 2)

where

• the value enclosed in ceil( ) must be rounded up to the nearest whole number.

• user-specified-CV-capacity is expressed in blocks.

• The resulting user area capacity is expressed in kilobytes.To calculate the entire capacity of a CV:

68 Configuring custom-sized provisioning

Page 69: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

ceil(user-specified-CV-capacity / (boundary-value * 2)) * (boundary-value * 2)

where

• the value enclosed in ceil( ) must be rounded up to the nearest whole number.

• user-specified-CV-capacity is expressed in blocks.

• boundary-value is expressed in kilobytes. The boundary value depends on volumeemulation types and RAID levels (see “Boundary values for RAID levels” (page 70)).

• The resulting entire capacity is expressed in blocks. To convert the resulting entire capacityinto megabytes, divide this capacity by 2,048.

Calculating fixed-size open-systems volume size (CV capacity unit is MB)To calculate the user area capacity of a CV whose capacity unit is defined as megabytes:ceil(ceil(user-specified-CV-capacity * 1024 /capacity-of-a-slot) / 15) * capacity-of-a-slot * 15

where

• the value enclosed in ceil( ) must be rounded up to the nearest whole number.

• user-specified-CV-capacity is expressed in megabytes.

• capacity-of-a-slot is expressed in kilobytes. The capacity of a slot depends on volumeemulation types (see “Capacity of a slot” (page 71)).

• The resulting user area capacity is expressed in kilobytes.To calculate the entire capacity of a CV:ceil((user-area-capacity + management-area-capacity) /boundary-value) * boundary-value / 1024

where

• The value enclosed in ceil( ) must be rounded up to the nearest whole number.

• user-area-capacity is expressed in kilobytes.

• management-area-capacity is expressed in kilobytes. The management area capacitydepends on volume emulation types (see “Management area capacity of an open-systemsvolume” (page 70)).

• boundary-value is expressed in kilobytes. The boundary value depends on volumeemulation types and RAID levels (see “Boundary values for RAID levels” (page 70)).

• The resulting entire capacity is expressed in megabytes.

Calculating fixed-size open-systems volume size (CV capacity unit is blocks)To calculate the user area capacity of a CV whose capacity unit is defined as blocks:user-specified-CV-capacity / 2

where

• user-specified-CV-capacity is expressed in blocks.

• The resulting user area capacity is expressed in kilobytes.To calculate the entire capacity of a CV:ceil((user-specified-CV-capacity + management-area-capacity * 2)/ (boundary-value * 2)) * (boundary-value * 2)

where

• the value enclosed in ceil( ) must be rounded up to the nearest whole number.

• user-specified-CV-capacity is expressed in blocks.

Virtual LUN size calculations 69

Page 70: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

• management-area-capacity is expressed in kilobytes. The management area capacitydepends on volume emulation types (see “Management area capacity of an open-systemsvolume” (page 70)).

• boundary-value is expressed in kilobytes. The boundary value depends on volumeemulation types and RAID levels (see “Boundary values for RAID levels” (page 70)).

• The CV capacity recognized by hosts is the same as the CV capacity calculated by theabove formula.

• If block is selected as the LDEV capacity unit in the Create LDEVs window and dialogboxes, the window and dialog boxes correctly show the calculated LDEV capacity. However,if MB, GB, or TB is selected as the LDEV capacity unit in the Create LDEVs window anddialog boxes, the capacity values shown might have a margin of error due to unit conversionreasons. If you need to know the exact LDEV capacity, select block as the capacity unit.

• The resulting entire capacity is expressed in blocks. To convert the resulting entire capacityinto megabytes, divide this capacity by 2,048:

Management area capacity of an open-systems volume

Management area capacity (KB)Emulation type

NoneOPEN-V

5,760OPEN-3

19,440OPEN-8

19,440OPEN-9

13,680OPEN-E

Boundary values for RAID levelsBoundary values of external volumes are always one slot, regardless of RAID levels.

Boundary value (KB)Emulation type*

RAID 6(14D+2P)

RAID 6 (6D+2P)RAID 5 (7D+1P)RAID 5 (3D+1P)RAID 1 (2D+2D)

-2,3042,6881,152768OPEN-xx (except forOPEN-V)

7,1683,0723,5841,5361,024OPEN-V

Notes:

• xx indicates one or more numbers or letters.

• Boundary values are expressed in kilobytes.

• Boundary values of external volumes are always one kilobyte, regardless of RAID levels.

• Hyphen (-) indicates that the combination is not supported.

70 Configuring custom-sized provisioning

Page 71: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Capacity of a slot

Capacity (KB) of a slotEmulation type

48OPEN-xx (except for OPEN-V)

Notes:

• xx indicates one or more numbers or letters.

• Slot capacity is expressed in kilobytes.

Configuring volumes in a parity groupFor RAID 5 (7D+1P), RAID 6 (6D+2P), or RAID 6 (14D+2P) a maximum of 2,048 fixed-sizevolumes (FVs) and a certain amount of free space are available in one parity group. For otherRAID levels, a maximum of 1,024 FVs and a certain amount of free space are available in oneparity group. Each parity group has the same configuration, and is assigned the same FVs ofthe same size and RAID level.The Virtual LUN functions of Delete LDEVs and Create LDEVs are performed on each paritygroup. Parity groups are also separated from each other by boundary limitations. Therefore, youcannot define a volume across two or more parity groups beyond these boundaries.As the result of the Virtual LUN operations, a parity group contains FVs, CVs, and free spacesthat are delimited in logical cylinders. Sequential free spaces are combined into a single freespace.The following depicts an example of configuring volumes in a parity group:

Enabling capacity virtualization

Before you begin

• You must have the Storage Administrator role.

• Set the parity group drive type to FMC.

• The emulation type of the target parity group must be OPEN-V.

• The target parity group must be in a storage system (an internal parity group).

• The status of LDEVs in the target parity group must be Normal or Blocked.

• The capacity of the defined internal volumes must be 8 GB or more. (The capacity is equalto or greater than the minimum capacity of a pool volume.)

• If the defined internal volumes are used as pool volumes, those pool volumes belong to thesame Thin Provisioning pool or Fast Snap pool.

• The defined internal volumes must have no LUN path definitions.

• The defined internal volumes must not be used by Auto LUN.

• The defined internal volumes must not be reserved by the Data Retention.

Virtual LUN size calculations 71

Page 72: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

• The defined internal volumes must not have the Protect, Read Only, or S-VOL Disableattribute of the Data Retention.

• The encryption setting of the parity group must be disabled.

• There must not be any THP V-VOL page reserved areas.

Procedure1. Perform one of the following to display the parity group to be operated.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On the Resource tab, expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Parity Groups of the target storage system.In Remote Web Console:Perform one of the following to display the Parity Groups tab:

• To display all parity groups in the storage system, in the storage system tree, selectParity Groups, then select the Parity Groups tab.

• To display parity groups related to Internal, in the storage system tree, expand ParityGroups, select Internal, then select the Parity Groups tab.

After displaying the parity group, select the target parity group.2. Open the Edit Parity Groups window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Click Parity Groups.3. Select one or more parity groups, and then click Edit Parity Groups.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Parity Groups.3. On the Parity Groups tab, select a parity group.4. Click More Actions > Edit Parity Groups.

3. In Capacity Expansion, check Enable.

NOTE: When you enable capacity virtualization, confirm if the data reduction efficiencycan be achieved. For details, see ???.

4. Click Finish.5. In the Confirm window, confirm the settings. In Task Name, type a unique name for this

task or accept the default, then click Apply. If Go to tasks window for status is checked,the Tasks window opens.

Disabling capacity virtualizationBefore you begin• You must have the Storage Administrator role.

• Set the parity group drive type to FMC.

• You should format the parity group.

• The emulation type of the target parity group must be OPEN-V.

• The target parity group must be in a storage system (an internal parity group).

72 Configuring custom-sized provisioning

Page 73: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

• The status of LDEVs in the target parity group must be Normal or Blocked.

• The Expanded Spaced Used column for the parity group must be No.

Procedure1. Perform one of the following to display the parity group to be operated.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On the Resource tab, expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Parity Groups of the target storage system.In Remote Web Console:Perform one of the following to display the Parity Groups tab:

• To display all parity groups in the storage system, in the storage system tree, selectParity Groups, then select the Parity Groups tab.

• To display parity groups related to Internal, in the storage system tree, expand ParityGroups, select Internal, then select the Parity Groups tab.

2. Select the target parity group.3. Format the parity group.

NOTE: Before you disable the capacity virtualization on a parity group, you must formatthe parity group.

4. Open the Edit Parity Groups window.In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:

• Select one or more parity groups, and then click Edit Parity Groups.In Remote Web Console:

• Click More Actions > Edit Parity Groups.5. In the Capacity Expansion setting, check Disable.6. Click Finish.7. In the Confirm window, confirm the settings. In Task Name, type a unique name for this

task or accept the default, then click Apply. If Go to tasks window for status is checked,the Tasks window opens.

Configuration of interleaved parity groupsIf RAID configurations are RAID1 (2D+2D) or RAID5 (7D+1P), the interleaved parity group canbe created by concatenating multiple of parity groups. The following table lists the RAIDconfigurations and the number of parity groups that can be concatenated.

4 concatenating2 concatenatingRAID configuration

Not AvailableAvailableRAID1 (2D+2D)

AvailableAvailableRAID5 (7D+1P)

When concatenating parity groups, data in LDEVs that are FV or CV is allocated between theinterleaved parity groups. Therefore, loads are dispersed because of the parity groupconcatenation, and the LDEV performance is improved.The capacity of the created LDEV is managed by each of the parity groups that are in theinterleaved parity group. The maximum capacity of an LDEV is the same as the capacity of theinterleaved parity group.

Configuration of interleaved parity groups 73

Page 74: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

NOTE: Even if the parity groups are concatenated, the total capacity of the interleaved paritygroup is not large.

See the following examples:

• Creating the interleaved parity group by concatenating of parity groups of PG1-1 and PG1-2.

• Creating LDEVs in each parity group that are in the interleaved parity group.

LDEV 1 in PG1-1◦◦ LDEV 2 in PG1-2

Create LDEV functionUse the Create LDEV function to create a customized variable-sized volume. Use Virtual LUNto create an open-systems volume.The following depicts an example of creating customized volumes. First you delete FVs to createfree space. Then you can create one or more customized volumes of any size in that free space.

Creating an LDEVUse this procedure to create one or more internal or external logical volumes (LDEVs) in aselected storage system. You can create multiple LDEVs at once, for example, when you aresetting up your storage system. After the storage system is set up, you can add LDEVs as needed.Before creating an LDEV in a selected storage system, free space may need to be created.Before volumes are deleted to create free space, remove the LU paths to the open-systemvolumes. For instructions on removing LU paths, see “Deleting LU paths” (page 256).

74 Configuring custom-sized provisioning

Page 75: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.You can create LDEVs using any of the following tabs in Remote Web Console:

• Parity Groups tab when selecting Parity Groups.You can create multiple LDEVs in the specified free space by setting the necessary itemscollectively. If multiple free spaces are in one parity group, the number of free spaces appearsin Total Selected Free Space in the Parity Group Selection section on the Create LDEVswizard. Confirm the number of free spaces, and then create the LDEVs accordingly.For example, if you are creating LDEVs in parity group PG1-1 and it contains two free spaces,2 appears in Total Selected Free Space. In this case, if you specify 1 in Number of LDEVsper Free Space, and continue to create the LDEV, two LDEVs are created because oneLDEV is created for each free space.

• LDEVs tab when selecting any parity group in Parity Groups.

• LDEVs tab when selecting Logical Devices.

Procedure1. Open the Logical Devices window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click Volumes, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Logical Devices.

2. In the LDEVs pane of the Logical Devices window, click Create LDEVs.3. In the Create LDEVs window, from the Provisioning Type list, select a provisioning type

for the LDEV to be created.• If creating internal volumes, select Basic.

• If creating external volumes, select External.4. In System Type, select Open to create open system volumes.5. From the Emulation Type list, select an emulation type for the selected system type.6. If creating an internal volume, select the parity group, and then do the following:

1. From the Drive Type/RPM list in Parity Group Selection, select the drive type andRPM.

2. From the RAID level list in Parity Group Selection, select the RAID level.3. Click Select Free Spaces.4. In the Select Free Spaces window, in the Available Free Spaces table, select the free

spaces to be assigned to the volumes.Do the following, if necessary:

• - To specify the conditions and show the free space, click Filter, specify theconditions, and then click Apply.

• - To specify the unit for capacity and the number of rows to view, click Options.5. Click View Physical Location.6. In the View Physical Location window, confirm where the selected free space is

physically located, and then click Close.

Create LDEV function 75

Page 76: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

7. In the Select Free Spaces window, if the selected free spaces have no issues, clickOK.

7. Otherwise, if creating an external volume, select the external volume, and then do thefollowing:1. Click Select Free Spaces.2. In the Select Free Spaces window, in the Available Free Spaces table, select the free

space to be assigned to the volumes.Do the following, if necessary:

• - To specify the conditions and show the free space, click Filter, specify theconditions, and then click Apply.

• - To specify the unit for capacity and the number of rows to view, click Options.3. Click View Physical Location.4. In the View Physical Location window, confirm where the selected free space is

physically located, and then click Close.5. In the Select Free Spaces window, if the selected free spaces have no issues, click

OK.8. If you want to offset the specified LDEV capacity by boundary, set the Offset boundary to

ON.• If the emulation type is OPEN-V, Offset boundary is set to OFF by default.

• If the emulation type is other than OPEN-V, Offset boundary is set to ON by default.9. In LDEV Capacity, type the amount of LDEV capacity to be created and select a capacity

unit from the list.Enter the capacity within the range of figures displayed below the text box. You can enterthe number with 2 digits after decimal point. You can change the capacity unit from the list.

10. In Number of LDEVs, type the number of LDEVs to be created.• If you create internal volume, Number of LDEVs per Free Space appears.

• If you create external volume, Number of LDEVs per External Volume appears.

CAUTION: If creating LDEVs in the free space of the parity group with capacity virtualizationenabled, estimate the LDEV capacity and the number of LDEVs. For details, see ???.

11. In LDEV Name, specify a name for this LDEV.1. In Prefix, type the characters that will become the fixed characters for the beginning of

the LDEV name. The characters are case-sensitive.2. In Initial Number, type the initial number that will follow the prefix name.

12. In Format Type, select the format type for the LDEV from the list.• For an internal volume, select Normal Format, Quick Format, or No Format.

For LDEVs in the parity group with Capacity Virtualizationenabled, Quick Formatcannot be selected.If No Format is selected, format the volume after creating LDEVs.

• For an external volume, if you create the LDEV whose emulation type is the open system,select Normal Format or No Format.If the external volume can be used as it is, select No Format. The created LDEV canbe used without formatting.

76 Configuring custom-sized provisioning

Page 77: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

If the external volume needs to be formatted, select No Format and then format thevolume with the external storage system, or select Normal Format.

• If Quick Format is selected while quick formatting is in progress, host I/Os may beaffected. For details, see “Quick Format function” (page 86)

13. Click Options to show more options.14. In Initial LDEV ID, make sure that an LDEV ID is set. To confirm the used number and

unavailable number, click View LDEV IDs to open the View LDEV IDswindow.1. In Initial LDEV ID in the Create LDEVs window, click View LDEV IDs.

In the View LDEV IDs window, the matrix vertical scale represents the second-to-lastdigit of the LDEV number, and the horizontal scale represents the last digit of the LDEVnumber. The LDEV IDs table shows the available, used, and disabled LDEV IDs.In the table, used LDEV numbers appear in blue, unavailable numbers appear in gray,and unused numbers appear in white. LDEV numbers that are unavailable may bealready in use, or already assigned to another emulation group (group by 32 LDEVnumbers).

2. Click Close.15. In the Create LDEVs window, in SSID, type four digits, in hexadecimal format (0004 to

FEFF), for the SSID.16. To confirm the created SSID, click View SSIDs to open the View SSIDs dialog box.

1. In the Create LDEVs window, in Initial SSID, click View SSIDs.In the SSIDs window, the SSIDs table shows the used SSIDs.

2. Click Close.17. In the Create LDEVs window, from the MP Blade list, select a MP blade to be used by the

LDEVs.• If you assign a specific MP blade, select the ID of the MP blade.

• If you can assign any MP blade, click Auto.18. In T10 PI, select Enable or Disable.

The T10 PI attribute can be specified when creating a Basic volume of emulation typeOPEN-V.

CAUTION: The T10 PI attribute can be defined only during the initial creation of LDEVs.The defined attribute cannot be removed from LDEVs on which the T10 PI mode is alreadyset.

19. Click Add.The created LDEVs are added to the Selected LDEVs table.The Provisioning Type, System Type, Emulation Type, Parity Group Selection, LDEVCapacity, and Number of LDEVs per Free Space or Number of LDEVs per ExternalVolume fields must be set. If these required items are not registered, you cannot click Add.

20. If necessary, change the following LDEV settings:• Click Edit SSIDs to open the SSIDs window. If the new LDEV is to be created in the

CU, change SSID to be allocated to the LDEV.• Click Change LDEV Settings to open the Change LDEV Settings window.

21. If necessary, delete an LDEV from the Selected LDEVs table.Select an LDEV to delete, and then click Remove.

Create LDEV function 77

Page 78: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

22. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.To continue the operation for setting the LU path and defining a logical unit, click Next.

23. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

24. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Related tasks

• “Editing an LDEV SSID” (page 79)

• “Changing LDEV settings” (page 79)

• “Removing an LDEV to be registered” (page 80)

• “Defining LU paths” (page 250)

Finding an LDEV IDWhen creating volumes, the LDEV ID (LDKC: CU: LDEV) must be specified. Use this procedureto determine the LDEV IDs in use in the storage system so you can specify the correct LDEV.

Procedure1. Open the Logical Devices window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click Volumes, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Logical Devices.

2. In the LDEVs pane of the Logical Devices window, click Create LDEVs.3. In the Create LDEVs window, scroll down to Initial LDEV ID and click View LDEV IDs.4. In the View LDEV IDs window, review the list to confirm the LDEV IDs. The LDEV IDs table

shows the available, used, and disabled LDEV IDs.The matrix vertical scale represents the second-to-last digit of the LDEV number, and thehorizontal scale represents the last digit of the LDEV number.In the table, used LDEV numbers appear in blue, unavailable LDEV numbers appear in gray,and unused LDEV IDs appear in white. LDEV numbers that are unavailable may be alreadyin use, or already assigned to another emulation group (group by 32 LDEV numbers).

5. Click Close.The Create LDEVs window opens.

Finding an LDEV SSIDWhen creating the first volumes in a control unit, the LDEV SSIDs must be specified. Use thisprocedure to determine the SSIDs in use in the storage system so you can specify the correctSSID.

78 Configuring custom-sized provisioning

Page 79: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Procedure1. Open the Logical Devices window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click Volumes, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Logical Devices.

2. In the LDEVs pane of the Logical Devices window, click Create LDEVs.3. In the Create LDEVs window, scroll down to Initial SSIDs and click View SSIDs.4. In the SSIDs window, review the list to confirm the LDEV SSIDs. The SSIDs table shows

the SSIDs in use in the system.5. Click Close. The Create LDEVs window opens.

Editing an LDEV SSIDThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.Before registering an LDEV, you may need to edit the LDEV SSID. If the first LDEV in a CU isspecified as part of the current operation, the SSID value can be changed. If an LDEV alreadyexists in the CU, the SSID value cannot be changed.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Logical Devices window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click Volumes, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Logical Devices.

2. In the LDEVs pane of the Logical Devices window, click Create LDEVs.3. In the Create LDEVs window, click Edit SSIDs in the Selected LDEVs pane.4. In the Edit SSIDs window, review the SSIDs table.5. To change an SSID, select an LDEV, and then click Change SSIDs.6. In the Change SSIDs window, type the new SSID, and then click OK.7. In the Edit SSIDs window, click OK.8. In the Create LDEVs window, click Finish.9. In the Confirm window, click Apply.

The new SSID is registered.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Changing LDEV settingsThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.Before registering an LDEV, you may need to change the LDEV settings.

Create LDEV function 79

Page 80: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Logical Devices window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click Volumes, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Logical Devices.

2. In the LDEVs pane of the Logical Devices window, click Create LDEVs.3. In the Create LDEVs window, in the Selected LDEVs table, select an LDEV, and then click

Change LDEV Settings.4. In the Change LDEV Settings window, change the setting of LDEV Name, Initial LDEV

ID, MP Blade, or T10 PI.• If you change LDEV Name, specify the prefix characters and the initial number for this

LDEV.• If you change Initial LDEV ID, specify the number of LDKC, CU, LDEV, and Interval.

To confirm used LDEV IDs, click View LDEV IDs to confirm the used LDEV IDs in theView LDEV IDs window.

• If you change MP Blade, click the list and specify the MP blade ID. If the specific MPblade is specified, select the MP blade ID. If any MP blade is specified, click Auto.

• If you change T10 PI, select Enable or Disable.The T10 PI attribute can be changed if the following conditions are satisfied:

◦ The provisioning type is Basic.

◦ The emulation type is OPEN-V.

5. Click OK.6. Click Finish.

The Confirm window appears.7. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

8. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Removing an LDEV to be registeredIf you do not want to register an LDEV that is scheduled to be registered, you can remove it fromthe registration task.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

80 Configuring custom-sized provisioning

Page 81: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Procedure1. Open the Logical Devices window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click Volumes, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Logical Devices.

2. In the LDEVs pane of the Logical Devices window, click Create LDEVs.3. In the Selected LDEVs pane of the Create LDEVs window, select an LDEV, and then click

Remove.A message appears asking whether you want to remove the selected row or rows. If youwant to remove the row, click OK.

4. Click Finish.5. In the Confirm window, click Apply. The LDEV is removed from the registering task.

If Go to tasks window for status is checked, the Tasks window opens.

Blocking LDEVsBefore you format or shred a registered LDEV, the LDEV must be blocked.Use this procedure to block internal and external volumes from any of the following tabs:

• LDEVs tab when you make a selection from Parity Groups.

• LDEVs tab when you select Logical Devices.

• Virtual Volumes tab when you select a Pool.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the LDEVs window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click Volumes, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Logical Devices.

2. If Blocked does not appear in the Status column, use the following steps to block the LDEV.If Blocked does appear in the column, skip the remaining steps.

3. From the table, select the LDEV ID of the LDEV you want to block.4. Click More Actions and select Block LDEVs.5. Note the settings in the Confirm window and enter a unique Task Name or accept the

default, and then click Apply.If Go to tasks window for status is checked, the Tasks window opens.

Blocking LDEVs 81

Page 82: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Blocking LDEVs in a parity groupUse this procedure to block LDEVs in a parity group from one of the following tabs:

• Parity Groups tab when you select Parity Groups from the Storage Systems tree of theRemote Web Console main window.

• Parity Groups tab when you select a parity group from Parity Groups in the StorageSystems tree.

• LDEVs tab when you select Logical Devices.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Parity Groups window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click Parity Groups, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Parity Groups.

2. IfBlocked does not appear in the Status column, use the following steps to block the LDEV.If Blocked does appear in the column, skip the remaining steps.

3. In the Parity Groups window, select the Parity Group ID of the parity group with the LDEVyou want to block.You can select multiple parity groups that are listed together or separately.

4. Click More Actions and select Block LDEVs.5. Note the settings in the Confirm window and enter a unique Task Name or accept the

default and click Apply.If Go to tasks window for status is checked, the Tasks window opens.

Restoring blocked LDEVsUse this procedure to restore LDEVs from any of the following tabs:

• LDEVs tab when you make a selection from Parity Groups.

• LDEVs tab when you select Logical Devices.

• Virtual Volumes tab when you select a Pool.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

82 Configuring custom-sized provisioning

Page 83: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Procedure1. Open the Logical Devices window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click Volumes, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Logical Devices.

2. If Blocked appears in the Status column, use the following steps to block the LDEV.If Blocked does not appear in the column, skip the remaining steps.

3. In the Logical Devices window, select the LDEV ID of the LDEV you want to restore.4. Block the LDEV to be restored.

For information on blocking internal volumes, see “Blocking LDEVs” (page 81) and informationon blocking externals volumes, see the XP7 External Storage for Open and MainframeSystems User Guide.

5. Click More Actions and select Restore LDEVs.6. Note the settings in the Confirm window and enter a unique Task Name or accept the

default and click Apply.If Go to tasks window for status is checked, the Tasks window opens.

Restoring blocked LDEVs in a parity groupUse this procedure to restore blocked LDEVs in a parity group from any of the following tabs:

• Parity Groups tab when you select Parity Groups from the Storage Systems tree of theRemote Web Console main window.

• Parity Groups tab when you select a parity group from Parity Groups in the StorageSystems tree.

• LDEVs tab when you select Logical Devices.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Logical Devices window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click Parity Groups, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Parity Groups.

2. If Blocked appears in the Status column, use the following steps to block the LDEV.If Blocked does not appear in the column, skip the remaining steps.

Restoring blocked LDEVs in a parity group 83

Page 84: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

3. In the Parity Groups window, select the Parity Group ID of the parity group with the LDEVyou want to restore.You can select multiple parity groups that are listed together or separately.

4. Block the LDEV to be restored.For information on blocking internal volumes, see “Blocking LDEVs” (page 81) and informationon blocking externals volumes, see the XP7 External Storage for Open and MainframeSystems User Guide.

5. Click More Actions and select Restore LDEVs.6. Note the settings in the Confirm window and enter a unique Task Name or accept the

default and click Apply.If Go to tasks window for status is checked, the Tasks window opens.

Editing an LDEV nameUse this procedure to edit the name of a registered internal volume.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Logical Devices window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click Volumes, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Logical Devices.

2. Select the LDEV ID of the LDEV you want to edit.3. Click Edit LDEVs.4. In the Edit LDEVs window, edit the LDEV Name.5. Click Finish.

The Confirm window appears.6. In the Task Name text box, enter the task name.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols in all, except for \ / : , ; * ? " < > |. Thevalue "date-window name" is entered by default.

7. In the Confirm window, click Apply to register the setting in the task.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Deleting an LDEV (converting to free space)You can convert one or more of the LDEVs on a selected parity group into free space by deletingthe LDEVs. That free space can be used to either create one or more variable-sized volumes(CVs) using the Create LDEVs function, or left as free space for future use.

WARNING! Deleting LDEVs will erase your data. Back up your data before deleting LDEVs.

84 Configuring custom-sized provisioning

Page 85: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

An LDEV cannot be deleted successfully if it is:

• In the defined path (including the pair volumes of Continuous Access Synchronous, HighAvailability, and Continuous Access Journal).

• A pool-VOL.

• A journal volume.

• A remote command device.

• A volume security volume.

• A quorum disk used by High Availability.

• An LDEV that has the Read/Write access attribute.When you delete an LDEV, the alias information contained in the LDEV is also deleted. Therefore,if you delete an LDEV related to an alias device, you should do one of the following:

• Allocate another LDEV to the alias device, and then delete the LDEV.

• Delete the LDEV first, and then allocate another LDEV to the alias device.For information about how to delete a registered external volume, see the XP7 External Storagefor Open and Mainframe Systems User Guide.

Before you begin• The Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

• Back up your data before deleting LDEVs.

Procedure1. Open the Logical Devices window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click Volumes, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Logical Devices.

NOTE: If deleting an LDEV carved from the capacity virtualization-enabled parity group,format LDEVs in advance. By the formatting of LDEVs, the pool capacity which is assuredof writing is released from data written in the formatted LDEVs. If only deleting of LDEVs,the used capacity which is assured of writing is not decreased. The used capacity isdecreased by formatting of LDEVs.

2. Select the LDEV ID of the LDEV you want to delete.3. Click More Actions and select Delete LDEVs.

The LDEV is deleted.4. Note the settings in the Confirm window and enter a unique Task Name or accept the

default, and then click Apply.If Go to tasks window for status is checked, the Tasks window opens.

Formatting LDEVsIf you initialize LDEVs that are being used, you will need to format the LDEVs.

Formatting LDEVs 85

Page 86: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

About formatting LDEVsThe LDEV Format function, which includes Normal Format and Quick Format. These functionsformat volumes, including external volumes. Before formatting volumes, ensure that the volumesare in blocked status.The following table lists which formatting functions can be used on which LDEV types.

Corresponding volumeFormatting function

Internal volumeNormal FormatVirtual volumeExternal volume

Internal volume other than LDEV in the parity group withcapacity virtualization enabled.

Quick Format

Storage system operation when LDEVs are formattedThe storage system acts in one of two ways immediately after an LDEV is added, depending onthe default settings in the storage system.

• The storage system automatically formats the added LDEV. This is the default action.

• The storage system blocks the LDEV instead of automatically formatting it.To confirm or change the default formatting settings on the storage system, contact theadministrator. Users who have the Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role can change thesedefault formatting settings.

Quick Format functionThe Quick Format function formats internal volumes in the background. While Quick Format isrunning in the background, you can configure your system before the formatting is completed.Before using Quick Format to format internal volumes, ensure that the internal volumes are inblocked status.I/O operation from a host during Quick Format are allowed. Formatting in the background mightaffect performance.Because shared resources such as MP blades or cache paths are used during quick formatoperations, all host I/Os in a storage system may be affected.

86 Configuring custom-sized provisioning

Page 87: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Particularly, in the following cases of quick format operations, due to the load concentration ona specific component at the same time, the I/O performance of the host may decrease whileperforming of the quick format.

• In a configuration that satisfies both of these conditions, many quick formats started at thesame time.

◦ The number of modules is one or two.

◦ Configuration of CPEX (Cache Path control adapter and PCI EXpress path switch),DKA (DisK Adapter), and CHA (CHannel Adapter) are minimum in each module

• In a configuration that satisfies either one of these conditions, quick formats started.

In the multiple modules configuration, the number of CPEXs, DKAs, and CHAs that areinstalled in each module, are extremely unbalanced between modules.For example, in the multiple modules configuration, one module contains many CPEX,DKA, and CHA, and other modules contains CPEX, DKA, and CHA of the least number.

◦ In a module, numbers of CPEXs, DKAs, and CHAs that connect to CPEX (Basic) orCPEX (Option) are extremely unbalanced between CPEX (Basic) and CPEX (Option).For example, inside of one module, CPEX (Basic) is connected by many DKAs, CHAs,or other devices. However, CPEX (Option) is connected by DKAs, CHAs, or otherdevices of the least number.

For configurations such as those described above, perform the quick format operation on oneLDEV first to confirm that the I/O performance of the host does not decrease. After that, it isstrongly recommended that the number of quick format operations you perform at the same timeis increased one by one.For configurations other than those described above, it is recommended that no more than eightquick format operations are started at the same time. After eight or fewer quick formats, it isrecommended that four quick format operations are started in each increment while I/Operformance is monitored on the host.

Quick Format specifications

DescriptionItem

The internal volume must be in blocked status.Preparation for executing theQuick Format feature

Up to 72 parity groups can concurrently undergo Quick Format. There is no limit onthe number of volumes that can undergo Quick Format.

The number of parity groupsthat can undergo QuickFormat

While one Quick Format operation is in progress, another Quick Format operationcan be performed. A maximum of 72 parity groups can concurrently undergo QuickFormat.

Concurrent Quick Formatoperations

At the beginning of the Quick Format operation, preliminary processing is performedto generate management information. If a volume is undergoing preliminary processing,

Preliminary processing

the status of the volume is Preparing Quick Format. While preliminary processingis in progress, hosts cannot perform I/O access to the volume.

If a volume undergoing Quick Format is blocked, the storage system recognizes thatthe volume is undergoing Quick Format. After the volume is restored, the status ofthe volume changes to Normal (Quick Format).

Blocking and restoring ofvolumes

If all volumes in one or more parity groups undergoing Quick Format are blocked, thedisplayed number of parity groups undergoing Quick Format decreases by the numberof blocked parity groups. However, the number of parity groups that have notundergone and can undergo Quick Format does not increase. To calculate the number

Formatting LDEVs 87

Page 88: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

of parity groups that have not undergone but can undergo Quick Format, use thefollowing formula:72 - X - YWhere:X indicates the number of parity groups on which Quick Format is being performed.Y indicates the number of parity groups where all volumes are blocked during theQuick Format.

The Quick Format operation resumes when power is turned back on.Storage system is poweredoff and back on

Restrictions • Quick Format cannot be executed on LDEV in the parity group with capacityvirtualization enabled, external volumes, virtual volumes, the journal volumes ofContinuous Access Journal.

• The volume migration feature or the QuickRestore feature cannot be applied tovolumes undergoing Quick Format. When you use RAID Manager to execute thevolume migration operation or the QuickRestore operation on volumes undergoingQuick Format, EX_CMDRJE will be reported to RAID Manager. In this case, checkthe volume status.

• The prestaging feature of Cache Residency cannot be applied to volumesundergoing Quick Format.

Formatting a specific LDEVUse this procedure to perform Normal formatting on the volume.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Logical Devices window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click Volumes, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Logical Devices.

2. In the Logical Devices window, select the LDEV ID of the LDEV you want to format.3. Block the LDEV to be formatted.

For information on blocking internal volumes, see “Blocking LDEVs” (page 81) and informationon blocking external volume, see the XP7 External Storage for Open and Mainframe SystemsUser Guide.

4. Click More Actions, and select Format LDEVs.5. In the Format LDEVs window, select the format type from the Format Type list, and then

click Finish.6. Note the settings in the Confirm window, enter a unique Task Name or accept the default,

and click Apply.If Go to tasks window for status is checked, the Tasks window opens.

88 Configuring custom-sized provisioning

Page 89: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Formatting all LDEVs in a parity groupUse this procedure to perform Normal formatting on all of the volumes (LDEVs) in the paritygroup you select.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.Before you format the LDEVs in the selected parity group, make sure that all the LDEVs in theparity group have been blocked. See “Blocking LDEVs” (page 81) for blocking an internal volume.See the XP7 External Storage for Open and Mainframe Systems User Guide for blocking anexternal volume.

Procedure1. Open the Parity Groups window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click Parity Groups, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Parity Groups.

2. In the Parity Groups window, select a Parity Group ID of parity group with the LDEVs youwant to format.You can select multiple parity groups that are listed together or separately.

3. Block the LDEV to be formatted.For information on blocking internal volumes, see “Blocking LDEVs” (page 81) and informationon blocking external volumes, see the XP7 External Storage for Open and MainframeSystems User Guide.

4. Click More Actions, and select Format LDEVs.5. In the Format LDEVs window, select the format type from the Format Type list, and then

click Finish.In the Confirm window, click Next to go to the next operation.

6. Click Apply.If Go to tasks window for status is checked, the Tasks window opens.

Assigning an MP bladeAssigning an MP blade to a resource

Use this procedure to assign an MP blade to a resource (logical device, external volume, andjournal volume).

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (System Resource Management) role is required to perform this task.

Assigning an MP blade 89

Page 90: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Procedure1. Open the MP Blades window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Click Components.3. In the Components window, select the Chassis ID of the DKC that has the MP blade

settings you want to change.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Expand Components and click the DKC that has the MP blade settings you want to

change.2. In the MP Blades window, select the MP Blade ID of the MP blade with the settings you

want to change.3. Click Edit MP Blades.4. In the Edit MP Blades window, disable or enable Auto Assignment.

The default value depends on the value set for the selected MP blade.

• Select Enable if the MP blade can be automatically assigned.

• Select Disable if the MP blade cannot be automatically assigned.5. Click Finish.

The Confirm window appears.6. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

7. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Changing the MP blade assigned to an LDEV

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (System Resource Management) role is required to perform this task.

CAUTION:• Changes to the MP blade ID of an LDEV should be made during off-peak hours when the

I/O load is as low as possible. Before and after changes are made, it is recommended thatthe cache write-pending rate (%) for all CLPRs is lower than 50%. Do not change the MPblade ID when the I/O load is high -- for example: during initial copy of Business Copy,Continuous Access Synchronous, High Availability, or Continuous Access Journal.

• When you change the MP blade ID of an LDEV, you should use Performance Monitor beforeand after the change to check the load status of devices. Do not change several LDEV MPblade IDs during a short period of time. As a guideline, you can change 10% or less of thetotal number or the full workload of LDEV MP blade IDs assigned to the same MP blade IDat the same time.

• After you change the MP blade for an LDEV, wait more than 30 minutes before you try tochange the ID again for the same LDEV.

90 Configuring custom-sized provisioning

Page 91: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Procedure1. Open the Logical Devices window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click Volumes, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Logical Devices.

2. In the Logical Devices window, select the LDEV ID of the LDEV that has the MP blade youwant to change.

3. Click More Actions, and then select Assign MP Blade.4. In the Assign MP Blade window, specify the MP blade in MP Blade.5. Click Finish.

The Confirm window appears.6. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

7. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Changing the ALUA mode setting of LDEVIf LDEV is used in ALUA, the ALUA mode in LDEV must be enabled.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Logical Devices window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click Volumes, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Logical Devices.

2. Select the volume that you want to change the ALUA mode.3. ClickEdit LDEVs.4. In the Edit LDEVs window, select the ALUA Mode and click Enable or Disable.

If you choose Enable, the LDEV is used in ALUA.5. Click Finish.

The Confirm window appears.6. In the Task Name text box, enter the task name.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

Assigning an MP blade 91

Page 92: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

7. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

92 Configuring custom-sized provisioning

Page 93: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

6 Configuring thin provisioningThin provisioning technology allows you to allocate virtual storage capacity based on anticipatedfuture capacity needs, using virtual volumes instead of physical disks. Thin provisioning is anoptional provisioning strategy for both open and mainframe systems. Thin provisioning isimplemented by creating one or more Thin Provisioning pools (THP pools) of physical storagespace.

Thin Provisioning overviewThin Provisioning is an advanced thin-provisioning software product that allows you to savemoney on storage purchases and reduce storage management expenses.You can operate Thin Provisioning using both Remote Web Console software and the RAIDManager.

Smart Tiers overviewSmart Tiers is a software product that helps you reduce storage costs and increase storageperformance by supporting a volume configured with different storage media of different costand performance capabilities. This support allows you to allocate data areas with heavy I/O loadsto higher-speed media and to allocate data areas with low I/O loads to lower-speed media. Inthis way, you can make the best use of the capabilities of installed storage media. Up to threestorage tiers consisting of different types of data drives are supported in a single pool of storage.

Real Time Smart Tier overviewThe Real Time Smart Tier feature of Smart Tiers automatically promotes pages when their accessfrequency suddenly becomes high.Based on functions for Smart Tiers, Real Time Smart Tier can promote pages to Tier 1 if theirlatest access frequency suddenly becomes high. The Real Time Smart Tier feature can improveTier 1 I/O performance by reallocating Tier 2 pages if their I/O loads have increased suddenly.

Thin provisioning requirementsLicense requirements

Before you operate Thin Provisioning, the Thin Provisioning software must be installed on thestorage system.If you are using the parity group with capacity virtualization enabled, the license capacity is thetotal capacity of parity groups which are related to pools. However, if you are using the paritygroup with the capacity virtualization disabled, the license capacity is the total capacity of pools.Before you operate Smart Tiers, the Thin Provisioning and Smart Tiers software must be installedon the storage system.You will need the Smart Tiers license for the total capacity of the pool for which the tier functionis enabled.For Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, Real Time Smart Tier, Thin Provisioning MF, Smart TiersMF, and Real Time Smart Tier for Mainframe, the same license capacity as the pool capacity isrequired. If you are using a pool comprised of pool volumes from the capacity virtualization-enabledparity group, you must purchase the license for physical capacity.For Smart Tiers, Real Time Smart Tier, Smart Tiers MF, and Real Time Smart Tier for Mainframe,the same license capacity as the pool capacity is required. If you are using a pool comprised ofpool volumes from the capacity virtualization-enabled parity group, you must purchase the licensefor physical capacity.

Thin Provisioning overview 93

Page 94: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

For Real Time Smart Tier and Real Time Smart Tier for Mainframe, the same license capacityas the pool capacity is required. If you are using a pool comprised of pool volumes from thecapacity virtualization-enabled parity group, you must purchase the license for physical capacity.Before you operate Real Time Smart Tier, the Thin Provisioning, and Smart Tiers software mustbe installed on the storage system. You will need the Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tierlicenses for the total capacity of the pool with the tier function enabled.If the THP V-VOLs of Thin Provisioning or Smart Tiers are used for the primary volumes andsecondary volumes of Business Copy, Continuous Access Synchronous, Continuous AccessJournal, Auto LUN, High Availability, or Fast Snap, you will need the Business Copy, ContinuousAccess Synchronous, Continuous Access Journal, Auto LUN, High Availability, and Fast Snaplicenses for the total pool capacity in use. If you are using a pool comprised ofpool volumes fromthe capacity virtualization-enabled parity group, you must purchase the license of the capacityreserved for physical capacity.If you exceed the licensed capacity, you will be able to use the additional unlicensed capacityfor 30 days. For more information about temporary license capacity, see the XP7 Remote WebConsole User Guide.

Pool requirementsA pool is a set of volumes reserved for storing Thin Provisioning write data.

RequirementsItems

Calculate pool capacity using the following formula:Pool capacityThe capacity of the pool (MB) = Total number ofpages * 42 - 4200.4200 in the formula is the management area size of the pool-VOLwith System Area.Total Number of pages = Σ(floor(floor(pool-VOLnumber of blocks ÷ 512) ÷ 168)) for eachpool-VOL.

floor( ): Truncates the value calculated from the formula inparentheses after the decimal point.However, the upper limit of total capacity of all pools is 12.3 PBif shared memory is installed.

From 1 to 1,024 volumes (per pool).Max number of pool-VOLsA volume can be registered as a pool-VOL to one pool only.

Up to a total of 128 pools per storage system. The 128 poolsinclude following pool types:

Maximum number of pools

• Thin Provisioning (including Smart Tiers)

• Thin Provisioning MF (including Smart Tiers MF)

• Fast Snap

Pool IDs (0 to 127) are assigned as pool identifiers.

You can increase pool capacity dynamically. Increasing capacityby one or more parity groups is recommended by addingpool-VOLs.

Increasing capacity

You can reduce pool capacity by removing pool-VOLs.Reducing capacity

You can delete pools that are not associated with any THPV-VOLs.

Deleting

From 0 to 65534 (%).Subscription limitIf you do not specify a value, the subscription is set to unlimited.

94 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 95: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

RequirementsItems

Thresholds • Warning Threshold: You can set the value between 1% and100%, in 1% increments. The default is 70%.

• Depletion Threshold: You can set the value between thewarning threshold and 100%, in 1% increments. The defaultis 80%.

• Thresholds cannot be defined the pool of the data directmapping attribute.

42 MBData allocation unitThe 42-MB page corresponds to a 42-MB continuous area of theTHP V-VOL. Pages are allocated for the pool only when datahas been written to the area of the THP V-VOL.

Defined based on the media type (see Drive type for a SmartTiers tier, below). Maximum 3 tiers. If Real Time Smart Tier isused, SSD must be assigned to the first tier.

Tier(Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier)

4.0 PB (Total capacity of the tiers must be within 4.0 PBMaximum capacity of each tier(Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier)

Pool-VOL requirementsPool-VOLs make up a THP pool.

RequirementsItems

Logical volume (LDEV)Volume typeWhile pool-VOLs can coexist with other volumes in the same parity group, for bestperformance:

• pool-VOLs for a pool should not share a parity group with other volumes.

• pool-VOLs should not be located on concatenated parity groups.

Pool-VOLs cannot be used for any other purpose. For instance, you cannot specifythe following volumes as Thin Provisioning and Smart Tiers pool-VOLs:

• Volumes used by Business Copy, Auto LUN, Continuous Access Synchronous,High Availability, or Continuous Access Journal

• Volumes defined by Cache Residency

• Volumes already registered in Fast Snap, Thin Provisioning, or Smart Tiers pools

• Volumes used as Fast Snap P-VOLs or S-VOLs

• Data Retention volumes with a Protect, Read Only, or S-VOL Disable attribute

• Volumes whose LDEV status is other than Normal or Normal (Quick Format)You cannot specify volumes in blocked status or volumes in copying process.

• Command devices

• Quorum disks used by High Availability

The following volume cannot be specified as pool-VOL for Smart Tiers:

• The external volume of the data direct mapping attribute.

If pool-VOLs are LDEVs created from the parity group with capacity virtualizationenabled, these pool-VOLs must be applied to one pool.

OPEN-VEmulation type

Thin provisioning requirements 95

Page 96: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

RequirementsItems

All RAID levels of pool-VOLs can be added. Pool-VOLs of RAID 5, RAID 6, RAID 1,and the external volume can coexist in the same pool. For pool-VOLs in the samepool:

RAID level for a ThinProvisioning pool

• RAID 6 is the recommended RAID level for pool-VOLs, especially for a pool wherethe recovery time of a pool failure due to a drive failure is not acceptable.

• Pool-VOLs of the same drive type with different RAID levels can coexist in thesame pool. Note that Hewlett Packard Enterprise recommends that you use thefollowing configuration:

◦ Set one RAID level for pool-VOLs.If you register pool-VOLs with multiple RAID levels, the I/O performancedepends on the RAID levels of pool-VOLs to be registered. In that case, notethe I/O performance of the disks.

All RAID levels of pool-VOLs can be added. Pool-VOLs of RAID 5, RAID 6, RAID 1,and the external volume can coexist in the same pool.

RAID level for a Smart Tierspool

For pool-VOLs in a pool:

• RAID 6 is the recommended RAID level for pool-VOLs, especially for a pool wherethe recovery time of a pool failure due to a drive failure is not acceptable.

• Pool-VOLs of the same drive type with different RAID levels can coexist in thesame pool. Note that Hewlett Packard Enterprise recommends that you use thefollowing configuration:

◦ Set one RAID level for pool-VOLs.If you register pool-VOLs with multiple RAID levels, the I/O performancedepends on the RAID levels of pool-VOLs to be registered. In that case, notethe I/O performance of the disks.

• Because the speed of RAID 6 is slower than other RAID levels, tiers that useother RAID levels should not be placed under a tier that uses RAID 6.

SSD*, SAS15K, SAS10K, SAS7.2K, and external volumes can be used as the datadrive type. These data drive types can coexist in the same pool.

Data drive type for a ThinProvisioning pool

Cautions:

• We recommend that drives with different types do not coexist in the same pool.If multiple pool-VOLs with different drive types are registered in the same pool,the I/O performance depends on the drive type of the pool-VOL to which the pageis assigned. Therefore, if different drive types are registered in the same pool,ensure that the required I/O performance is not degraded by using less desirabledrive types.

• If multiple data drives coexist in the same pool, we recommend not using datadrives that are same types and different capacity sizes.

SAS15K, SAS10K, SAS7.2K, SSD*, and external volumes can be used as the datadrive type. These data drive types can coexist in the same pool. If Real Time SmartTier is used, SSD must be installed in advance.

Data drive type for a SmartTiers pool

Cautions:

• If multiple data drives coexist in the same pool, we recommend not using datadrives that are same types and different capacity sizes.

Internal volume: From 8 GB to 2.9 TBVolume capacityExternal volume: From 8 GB to 4 TBExternal volume of the data direct mapping attribute: From 8 GB to 256 TB

The LDEV format operation can be performed on pool-VOLs if one of these conditionsis satisfied:

LDEV format

• The THP V-VOL defined for the pool does not exist.

• All THP V-VOLs defined for the pool are blocked.

96 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 97: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

RequirementsItems

You cannot specify a volume with a path definition as a pool-VOL.Path definition

* Includes FMC, FMD, and MLC.

THP V-VOL requirements

RequirementsItems

THP V-VOL (V-VOL)Volume typeThe LDEV number is handled in the same way as for normal volumes.

OPEN-VEmulation type

Up to 63,232 per pool. Any number of available THP V-VOLs can be associated with a pool.Maximum number ofTHP V-VOLs Up to 1,023 per pool for the pool of the data direct mapping attribute.

Up to 63,232 volumes per system. If external volumes and V-VOLs are used, the total numberof external volumes and V-VOLs must be 63,232 or less.

Volume capacity from 46.87 MB to 256 TB per volume. For THP V-VOL of the data directmapping attribute, the capacity range is from 8 GB to 256 TB.

Volume capacity

• TB: 0.01 to 256 (For THP V-VOL of the data direct mapping attribute, the capacity rangeis from 0.01 TB to 256 TB)

• GB: 0.04 to 262,144 (For THP V-VOL of the data direct mapping attribute, the capacityrange is from 8 GB to 262,144 GB.)

• MB: 46.87 to 268,435,456 (For THP V-VOL of the data direct mapping attribute, the capacityrange is from 8,192 MB to 268,435,456 MB.)

• Blocks: 96,000 to 549,755,813,888 (For THP V-VOL of the data direct mapping attribute,the capacity range is from 16,777,216 block to 549,755,813,888 block.)

Total maximum volume capacity of 12.3 PB per storage system.

Available.Path definition

Available (Quick Format is not available.)LDEV formatSystem Option Mode 867 OFFWhen you perform the format operation on a THP V-VOL, the storage system releases theallocated page area in the THP V-VOL. The quick format operation cannot be performed. Ifthe LDEV format is applied to V-VOLs that are enabled for full allocation, the used capacityof the pool is not changed before the LDEV format is applied.

NOTE: System Option Mode 867 ON: When you format an LDEV on a THP V-VOL, the capacitymapped to the THP V-VOL is released to the pool as free space.

Requirements for increasing THP V-VOL capacityYou can increase THP V-VOL capacity up to 256 TB. To notify the host that the THP V-VOLcapacity has been increased, make sure host mode option 40 is enabled. Processing differs asfollows, depending on the value of host mode option 40:

• When host mode option 40 is not enabled, the host will not be notified that the THP V-VOLcapacity has been increased. Therefore, the THP V-VOL data has to be read again by thehost after the capacity is increased.

• When host mode option 40 is enabled, the host is notified that the THP V-VOL capacity hasincreased. If the operating system cannot recognize the value of capacity that was increased,the THP V-VOL data has to be read again by your storage system.

Thin provisioning requirements 97

Page 98: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

The following requirements are important when increasing the THP V-VOL capacity:

• The THP V-VOL to be increased is not shared with an XP7 product that does not allowincreasing the THP V-VOL (See “Increasing THP V-VOL capacity” (page 208)).

• The THP V-VOL is not undergoing LDEV formatting.

• The THP V-VOL is not the THP V-VOL of the data direct mapping attribute

• The capacity to be added to the THP V-VOL must be specified within the range indicatedbelow LDEV Capacity in the Expand V-VOLs window.

• The pool related to the THP V-VOLs to be increased is in any one of the following statuses:

Normal◦◦ Exceeding the subscription limit threshold

◦ In progress of pool capacity shrinking

CAUTION: When increasing THP V-VOL capacity, do not perform the following operations.When you perform these operations, do not increase THP V-VOL capacity.• Operations using Virtual LUN

• Operations using Cache Residency

• Creating THP V-VOLs

• Restoring pools

• Deleting THP V-VOLs

• Operations to increase the THP V-VOL capacity in another instance of RAID Manager

• Maintenance of your storage system

After increasing THP V-VOL capacity, refresh the display, and then confirm that the THP V-VOLis increased. If the THP V-VOL capacity is not increased, wait a while, refresh the display again,and confirm that the THP V-VOL is increased. If you perform an operation without making surethat the THP V-VOL is increased, operations from Remote Web Console may fail.If one of the following operations is being performed, the THP V-VOL capacity might not beincreased:

• Auto LUN

• Configuration change of journal used by Continuous Access Journal

• Quick Restore by Business Copy

Estimating the required capacity of pool-VOLs with System Area in the pool of thedata direct mapping attribute

If you want to expand a pool of the data direct mapping attribute, you must free up space in thepool. Make sure that the estimated capacity of free space is available before expanding the pool.Use the following mathematical formulas to estimate the capacity of free space required in thepool:

• Formula 1:Required-free-space-for-a-pool-to-be-added-of-one-external-volume-of-the-data-direct-mapping-attribute[in MB] = (ceil (pool-VOL-capacity [in MB] / 3,145,548 MB) × 4 pages × 42 MB) + ( ceil(pool-VOL-capacity [in MB] / 42 MB) - floor (pool-VOL-capacity [in MB] / 42 MB) ) × 42MB

• Formula 2:Required-capacity-of-pool-VOL-with-system-area-in-one-pool-of-a-data-direct-mapping-attribute

98 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 99: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

[in MB] = Total-of-calculated-values-by-the-Formula-1-for-each-volume + Management area(4200) [in MB] + 42 [in MB]

The (ceil) indicates the number enclosed by brackets must be rounded up to the whole number.The (floor) indicates the number enclosed by brackets must be rounded down to the wholenumber.

NOTE: A THP V-VOL with data direct mapping attribute uses the following capacities:• Mapped capacity uses multiple of 42MB in the capacity of the pool volume as well as the

capacity for one page (the area of the capacity other than multiples of 42 MB).• Control information (168 MB is used per 3,145,548 MB)

The pool-VOL with the system area contains the one page capacity and control information.

V-VOL page reservation requirementThe V-VOL full allocation is performed in a range less than the depletion threshold size of thepool. If the capacity of V-VOLs is larger than the depletion threshold size, the full allocationoperation is rejected.

NOTE: If the pool is using pool volumes assigned by parity groups with capacity virtualizationenabled, the V-VOL full allocation function cannot be defined.

The reserved page capacity for each pool can be calculated by the following formula. In theformula, the value enclosed in ceil ( ) must be rounded up to the nearest whole number.Reserved capacity for each pool [block] =ceil (CV capacity of V-VOL [block] / 86016) * 86016 + ceil (CVcapacity of V-VOL [block] /6442082304) * 4 * 86016 - Used capacity of V-VOL [block]

Operating system and file system capacityOperating systems and file systems when initializing a P-VOL will consume some Thin Provisioningpool space. Some combinations will initially take up little pool space, while other combinationswill take as much pool space as the virtual capacity of the THP V-VOL.The following table shows the effects of some combinations of operating system and file systemcapacity. For more information, contact your Hewlett Packard Enterprise representative.

Pool Capacity ConsumedMetadata WritingFile SystemOS

OWrites metadata to first block.NTFSWindows Server 2003and Windows Server2008* Small (one page)

If file update is repeated, allocatedcapacity increases when files areupdated (overwritten). Therefore, theeffectiveness of reducing the poolcapacity consumption decreases.

OWrites metadata in AllocationGroup Size intervals.

XFSLinuxDepends upon allocation group size.The amount of pool space consumedwill be approximately [THP V-VOLSize]*[42 MB/Allocation Group Size]

OWrites metadata in 128-MBincrements.

Ext2Ext3 About 33% of the size of the THP

V-VOL.

Thin provisioning requirements 99

Page 100: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Pool Capacity ConsumedMetadata WritingFile SystemOS

The default block size for these filesystems is 4 KB. This results in 33%of the THP V-VOL acquiring THP poolpages. If the file system block size ischanged to 2 KB or less then the THPV-VOL Page consumption becomes100%.

XWrites metadata in 52-MBincrements.

UFSSolarisSize of THP V-VOL.

OWrites metadata to the firstblock.

VxFSSmall (one page).

XWrites metadata in 8-MBincrements.

JFSAIXSize of THP V-VOL.If you change the Allocation GroupSize settings when you create the filesystem, the metadata can be writtento a maximum interval of 64 MB.Approximately 65% of the pool isused at the higher group size setting.

OWrites metadata to the firstblock.

JFS2Small (one page).

OWrites metadata to the firstblock.

VxFSSmall (one page).

OWrites metadata to the firstblock.

JFS (VxFs)HP-UXSmall (one page).

XWrites metadata in 10-MBincrements.

HFSSize of THP V-VOL.

Explanatory notes:O: Indicates an effective reduction of pool capacity.X: Indicates no effective reduction of pool capacity.* See “Formatting LDEVs in a Windows environment” (page 185)

Using Thin Provisioning or Smart Tiers or Real Time Smart Tier with otherXP7 Storage productsInteroperability of THP V-VOLs and pool-VOLs

THP V-VOLs and pool-VOLs can be used in conjunction with other XP7 products. The followingtable lists the operations that are permitted and not permitted.

Not permittedPermittedProduct name (Guide name)

Performing operations on THPpool-VOLs or THP V-VOLs.

Not applicableCache Residency (XP7 CachePartition User Guide)

Using a V-VOL as a Fast Snapprimary volume. The maximum total

Fast Snap (XP7 Fast Snap UserGuide)

• Using a THP V-VOL as a Fast Snapsecondary volume or pool-VOL.

number of pools per storage system• Using a Thin Provisioning or Smart

Tiers pool-VOL as a Fast Snapis 128. Fast Snap pool limits are

100 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 101: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Not permittedPermittedProduct name (Guide name)

reduced by the number of ThinProvisioning pools and Smart TiersMF pools.

primary volume, secondary volumeor pool-VOL.

• Increasing the capacity of a THPV-VOL using Fast Snap.

• Reclaiming zero pages of a V-VOLused by Fast Snap.

• Using an external volume of thedata direct mapping attribute as aFast Snap pair's primary volume,secondary volume, or pool-VOL.

• Using an LDEV with capacityvirtualization enabled as a FastSnap pair for primary volume orsecondary volume.

Performing operations on THPV-VOLs.

Data Retention (XP7 Provisioning forOpen Systems User Guide)

• Performing operations on THPpool-VOLs.

• Performing operations on anexternal volume of the data directmapping attribute.

• Performing operations on LDEVswith capacity virtualization enabled.

Using a THP V-VOL as a HighAvailability P-VOL or S-VOL.

High Availability (XP7 HighAvailability User Guide)

• Using a THP V-VOL as a quorumdisk.

• Using a pool-VOL as a HighAvailability P-VOL or S-VOL.

• Increasing the capacity of a THPV-VOL used by High Availability.

• Using an external volume of thedata direct mapping attribute as aquorum disk.

• Using a THP V-VOL of the datadirect mapping attribute as aquorum disk.

Performing operations on THPV-VOLs.

LUN Manager (XP7 Provisioning forOpen Systems User Guide)

• Performing operations on THPpool-VOLs.

LUN Security (XP7 Provisioning forOpen Systems User Guide)

• Performing operations on anexternal volume of the data directmapping attribute.

• Performing operations on LDEVswith capacity virtualization enabled.

Using a THP V-VOL as a BusinessCopy primary volume or secondaryvolume.

Business Copy (XP7 Business CopySystems User Guide)

• Using a pool-VOL as a BusinessCopy primary volume or secondaryvolume.

• Increasing the capacity of a THPV-VOL used by Business Copy.

• Reclaiming zero pages of a THPV-VOL is determined by the pairstatus. For more information, see“Business Copy pair status forreclaiming zero pages” (page 103).

Using a THP V-VOL as a ContinuousAccess Synchronous primary volumeor secondary volume.

Continuous Access Synchronous(Continuous Access SynchronousUser Guide)

• Using a pool-VOL as a ContinuousAccess Synchronous primaryvolume or secondary volume.

Using Thin Provisioning or Smart Tiers or Real Time Smart Tier with other XP7 Storage products 101

Page 102: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Not permittedPermittedProduct name (Guide name)

Increasing the capacity of THPV-VOL used as a primary or

secondary volume of a ContinuousAccess Synchronous pair.

Using a THP V-VOL as a ContinuousAccess Journal primary volume,

Continuous Access Journal (XP7Continuous Access Journal UserGuide)

• Using a THP V-VOL as a journalvolume that has a mainframeemulation type.secondary volume, or journal volume.

However, the journal volume must be• Using a THP pool-VOL as a

Continuous Access Journal journala THP V-VOL that has OPEN-Vemulation type.

volume, secondary volume, orprimary volume.

• Increasing the capacity of a THPV-VOL as a primary or secondaryvolume of a Continuous AccessJournal pair.

• Reclaiming zero pages of a THPV-VOL used by a journal volume.

• Using an external volume of thedata direct mapping attribute as ajournal volume.

• Using a THP V-VOL of the datadirect mapping attribute as a journalvolume.

Increasing the capacity of a THPV-VOL which is mapped to the External

Enabling volumes created by ExternalStorage to be used as pool-VOLs.

External Storage (XP7 ExternalStorage for Open and MainframeSystems User Guide) Storage. If you try to increase the

capacity of a THP V-VOL with theconventional LDEV operation, thecapacity of the THP V-VOL will not bechanged. In this case, remove themapping between THP V-VOL andExternal Storage, increase a capacityof the external volume used as apool-VOL, and then perform themapping between THP V-VOL and theExternal Storage again.

Performing Virtual LUN operations onvolumes that are already registered ina THP pool.

Registering Virtual LUN volumes inThin Provisioning pools.

Virtual LUN (XP7 Provisioning forOpen Systems User Guide)

Not applicablePerforming operations on THPV-VOLs and pool-VOLs.

Cache Partition (XP7 Cache PartitionUser Guide)

102 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 103: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Not permittedPermittedProduct name (Guide name)

Using a THP V-VOL as a migrationsource or a migration target.

Auto LUN (XP7 Auto LUN UserGuide)

• Using on pool-VOLs.

• Increasing the capacity of THPV-VOL used by Auto LUN.(For details, contact Hewlett Packard

Enterprise technical support.)• Reclaiming zero pages of V-VOL

used by Auto LUN.

• Performing operations on anexternal volume of the data directmapping attribute.

• Using an external volume of thedata direct mapping attribute as atarget volume.

Use on THP V-VOLs.Volume Shredder (XP7 VolumeShredder for Open and MainframeSystems User Guide)

• Using on pool-VOLs.

• Performing operations on an LDEVwhich has capacity virtualizationenabled.

• Increasing the capacity of THPV-VOL used by Volume Shredder.

• Reclaiming zero pages of V-VOLused by Volume Shredder.

Business Copy pair status for reclaiming zero pagesYou can use this table to determine whether reclaiming zero pages is possible for a particularpair status

Reclaim zero pages from RAID ManagerReclaim zero pages fromRemote Web Console

Pair status

EnabledEnabledSMPL, status of anunpaired volume

DisabledDisabledCOPY(PD)/COPY

DisabledDisabledPAIR

DisabledDisabledCOPY(SP)

DisabledDisabledPSUS(SP)/PSUS

EnabledEnabledPSUS

DisabledDisabledCOPY(RS)/COPY

DisabledDisabledCOPY(RS-R)/RCPY

DisabledDisabledPSUE

Continuous Access SynchronousYou can use Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, or Real Time Smart Tier in combination withContinuous Access Synchronous to replicate V-VOLs.The following figure illustrates the interaction when the Continuous Access Synchronous primaryvolume and secondary volume are also V-VOLs.

Using Thin Provisioning or Smart Tiers or Real Time Smart Tier with other XP7 Storage products 103

Page 104: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

ExplanationContinuous AccessSynchronous S-VOL

Continuous AccessSynchronous P-VOL

Supported.THP V-VOLsTHP V-VOLs

Supported.Normal (ordinary)volumes1

THP V-VOLs

Supported.THP V-VOLsNormal (ordinary) volumes1

Note, however, that this combination consumes the sameamount of pool capacity as the original normal volume(primary volume).

Note:1. Normal volumes include the internal volumes and external volumes that are mapped to the volumes of the external

storage system using External Storage. For more information on external volumes, see the XP7 External Storagefor Open and Mainframe Systems User Guide.

You cannot specify a Thin Provisioning or Smart Tiers pool-VOL as a primary volume or secondaryvolume.

High AvailabilityYou can use Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, or Real Time Smart Tier in combination with HighAvailability to replicate V-VOLs. The following figure illustrates the interaction when the HighAvailability primary volume and secondary volume are also V-VOLs.

ExplanationHigh Availability S-VOLHigh Availability P-VOL

Supported.THP V-VOLsTHP V-VOLs

Not supported.Normal (ordinary) volumes1THP V-VOLs

Not supported.THP V-VOLsNormal (ordinary) volumes1

Note:

104 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 105: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

ExplanationHigh Availability S-VOLHigh Availability P-VOL

1. Normal volumes include the internal volumes and external volumes that are mapped to the volumes of the externalstorage system using by External Storage. For more information on external volumes, see the XP7 External Storagefor Open and Mainframe Systems User Guide.

You cannot specify a Thin Provisioning or Smart Tiers pool-VOL as a primary volume or secondaryvolume. For more information, see the XP7 High Availability User Guide.

Continuous Access JournalYou can use Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, or Real Time Smart Tier in combination withContinuous Access Journal to replicate THP V-VOLs.

The following table lists the supported Continuous Access Journal and Thin Provisioning, SmartTiers volume combinations.

ExplanationContinuous AccessJournal journalvolume

Continuous AccessJournal S-VOL

Continuous AccessJournal P-VOL

Supported.THP V-VOL that has theOPEN-V emulationtype2

THP V-VOLsTHP V-VOLs

Supported.THP V-VOL that has theOPEN-V emulationtype2

Normal (ordinary)volumes1

THP V-VOLs

Supported.THP V-VOL that has theOPEN-V emulationtype2

THP V-VOLsNormal (ordinary)volumes1

Note, however, that this combinationconsumes the same amount of poolcapacity as the original normalvolume (primary volume).

Notes:1. Normal volumes include the internal volumes and external volumes that are mapped to the volumes of the external

storage system using External Storage. For more information on external volumes, see the XP7 External Storagefor Open and Mainframe Systems User Guide.

2. THP V-VOL that has a mainframe emulation type cannot be used.

You cannot specify a Thin Provisioning or Smart Tiers pool-VOL as a primary volume, secondaryvolume, or journal volume.

Business CopyYou can use Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, or Real Time Smart Tier in combination with BusinessCopy to replicate THP V-VOLs.

Using Thin Provisioning or Smart Tiers or Real Time Smart Tier with other XP7 Storage products 105

Page 106: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

The following table lists the interaction when the Business Copy primary volume and secondaryvolume are also THP V-VOLs.

ExplanationBusiness Copy S-VOLBusiness Copy P-VOL

Supported.THP V-VOLsTHP V-VOLs

Supported.Normal (ordinary)volumes1

THP V-VOLsThe Quick Restore function is unavailable.

Supported.THP V-VOLsNormal (ordinary) volumes1

Note, however, that this combination consumes the sameamount of pool capacity as the normal volume.The Quick Restore function is unavailable.

Note:1. Normal volumes include the internal volumes and external volumes that are mapped to the volumes of the external

storage system using External Storage. For more information on external volumes, see the XP7 External Storagefor Open and Mainframe Systems User Guide.

You cannot specify a Thin Provisioning or Smart Tiers pool-VOL as a primary volume or secondaryvolume.

Auto LUNYou can use Thin Provisioning or Smart Tiers in combination with Auto LUN to migrate THPV-VOLs.The following shows the interaction when the Auto LUN source volume and target volume arealso THP V-VOLs.

106 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 107: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

ExplanationAuto LUN target volumeAuto LUN source volume

Supported.THP V-VOLsTHP V-VOLs

Supported.Normal (ordinary)volumes*

THP V-VOLs

Supported.THP V-VOLsNormal (ordinary) volumes*Note, however, that this combination consumes the sameamount of pool capacity as the normal volume.

*Normal volumes include the internal volumes and external volumes that are mapped to the volumes of the externalstorage system by External Storage. For more information on external volumes, see the XP7 External Storage forOpen and Mainframe Systems User Guide.

You cannot specify a Thin Provisioning or Smart Tiers pool-VOL as an Auto LUN source volumeand target volume.If you specify the THP V-VOL as the source volume, you must not specify the THP V-VOL thatuses the same pool of the source volume.For details about the migration of THP V-VOLs used in the following pairs, see XP7 Auto LUNUser Guide.

• Business Copy

• Continuous Access Journal

Fast SnapWhen using Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, or Real Time Smart Tier and Fast Snap in a storagesystem, note the following:

• Pools for Thin Provisioning (including Smart Tiers) cannot be used in conjunction with FastSnap. The pool for Fast Snap cannot be used in conjunction with Thin Provisioning.

• Up to 128 pools in total can be used for Thin Provisioning (including Smart Tiers) and FastSnap.

• A pool-VOL cannot be shared with Thin Provisioning (including Smart Tiers) and Fast Snap.

Cache Partition CLPR settingIf THP V-VOL and pool-VOLs related to the same pool are assigned to CLPR, Hewlett PackardEnterprise recommends assigning THP V-VOL and pool-VOLs in the same pool to the sameCLPR.For detailed information about CLPRs, see the XP7 Cache Partition User Guide.

Using Thin Provisioning or Smart Tiers or Real Time Smart Tier with other XP7 Storage products 107

Page 108: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Resource PartitionSee “Resource group rules, restrictions, and guidelines” (page 52) for the conditions of resourcesthat are necessary in the operation of other Hewlett Packard Enterprise software and theprecautions required when using Resource Partition.

Thin Provisioning workflowThe following diagram shows the steps for a Storage Administrator to follow in setting up ThinProvisioning on a storage system.Use Remote Web Console or RAID Manager to create pools and THP V-VOLs.

CAUTION: If you delete a pool, its pool-VOLs (LDEVs) will be blocked. Blocked volumes mustbe formatted before use.

CAUTION: If the V-VOL data is migrated through the host, unallocated areas of the volumemay be copied as well. The used capacity of the pool increases after the data migration becausethe areas that were unallocated before the data migration have become allocated areas due tomigration.To migrate the V-VOL data:1. Copy all data of V-VOLs from the source to the target.2. Perform the operation to reclaim zero pages.

Perform this procedure for each V-VOL. When data migration is done on a file-by-file basis,perform the operation to reclaim zero pages if necessary.

To restore the backup data:1. Restore the V-VOL data.2. Perform the operation to reclaim zero pages.Perform the above procedure for each V-VOL.

108 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 109: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart TierAbout tiered storage

In a tiered storage environment, storage tiers can be configured to accommodate differentcategories of data. A tier is a group of storage media (pool volumes) in a THP pool. Tiers aredetermined by a single storage media type. A storage tier can be one type of data drive, includingSSD, SAS, or external volumes. Media of high-speed performance make up the upper tiers.Media of low-speed response become the lower tiers. Up to a maximum of three tiers can coexistin each Smart Tiers pool.Categories of data may be based on levels of protection needed, performance requirements,frequency of use, and other considerations. Using different types of storage tiers helps reducestorage costs and improve performance.Because assigning data to particular media may be an ongoing and complex activity, Smart Tierssoftware automatically manages the process based on user-defined policies.As an example of the additional implementation of tiered storage, tier 1 data (such asmission-critical or recently accessed data) might be stored on expensive and high-quality mediasuch as double-parity RAIDs (redundant arrays of independent disks). Tier 2 data (such asfinancial or seldom-used data) might be stored on less expensive storage media.

Tier monitoring and data relocationSmart Tiers uses tiers to manage data storage. It classifies the specified drives in the pool intotiers (storage hierarchy). Up to three tiers can be defined in a pool depending on the processingcapacity of the data drives. Tiering allocates more frequently accessed data to the upper tier andless frequently accessed data, stored for a long period of time, to the lower tier.

Smart PoolWith Smart Tiers, you can enable the Smart Pool option for an existing pool. The default is toallow tier relocation for each THP V-VOL. Only the THP V-VOLs for which tier relocation isenabled are subject to calculation of the tier range value, and tier relocation will be performedon them. If tier relocation is disabled for all THP V-VOLs in a pool, tier relocation is not performed.The following figure illustrates the relationship between Smart Pool and tier relocation.

Example of adding a tierIf the added pool-VOLs is a different media type, then a new tier is created in the pool. The tieris added to the appropriate position according to its performance. The following figure illustratesthe process of adding a tier.

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 109

Page 110: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Example of deleting a tierIf a tier no longer has any pool-VOLs when you delete them, the tier is deleted from the pool.The following figure illustrates deleting a tier.

Tier monitoring and relocation cyclesPerformance monitoring and tier relocation can be set to execute in one of two execution modes:Auto and Manual. You can set up execution modes, or switch between modes by using eitherRemote Web Console or RAID Manager.In Auto execution mode, monitoring and relocation are continuous and automatically scheduled.In Manual execution mode, the following operations are initiated manually.

• Start monitoring

• Stop monitoring and recalculate tier range values

• Start relocation

• Stop relocationIn both execution modes, relocation of data is automatically determined based on monitoringresults. The settings for these execution modes can be changed nondisruptively while the poolis in use.

Auto execution modeAuto execution mode performs monitoring and tier relocation based on information collected bymonitoring at a specified constant frequency: from 0.5, 1, 2, 4, or 8 hours. All Auto executionmode cycle frequencies have a starting point at midnight (00:00). For example, if you select a 1hour monitoring period, the starting times would be 00:00, 01:00, 02:00, 03:00, and so on.As shown in the following table, the 24-hour monitoring cycle allows you to specify the times ofday to start and stop performance monitoring. The 24-hour monitoring cycle does not have tostart at midnight. Tier relocation begins at the end of each cycle. For more information, see “EditPools window” (page 445).

Finish TimesStart TimesMonitoring cycle (hours)

0.5 hours after the start time0.5 hours from 00:00 AM. For example00:00, 00:30, and 01:00

0.5

1 hour after the start time1 hour from 00:00 AM. For example 00:00,01:00, and 02:00

1

2 hours after the start time2 hours from 00:00 AM. For example00:00, 02:00, and 04:00

2

4 hours after the start time4 hours from 00:00 AM. For example00:00, 04:00, and 08:00

4

8 hours after the start time8 hours from 00:00 AM. For example00:00, 08:00, and 16:00

8

Specified timeSpecified time24 (monitoring time period canbe specified)

If the setting of the monitoring cycle is changed, performance monitoring begins at the new starttime. The collection of monitoring information and tier relocation operations already in progressare not interrupted when the setting is changed.

110 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 111: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Example 1: If the monitoring cycle is changed from 1 hour to 4 hours at 01:30 AM, the collectionof monitoring information and tier relocation in progress at 01:30 AM continues. At 02:00 AM and03:00 AM, however, monitoring information is not collected and tier relocation is not performed.From 04:00 AM, the collection of monitoring information and tier relocation operations are startedagain. These operations are then performed at 4-hour intervals.Example 2: If the monitoring cycle is changed from 4 hours to 1 hour at 01:30 AM, the collectionof monitoring information and tier relocation in progress at 01:30 AM continues. From 04:00 AM,the collection of monitoring information and tier relocation operations are started again. Theseoperations are then performed at 1-hour intervals.

In auto execution mode, the collection of monitoring data and tier relocation operations areperformed in parallel in the next cycle. Data from these parallel processes are stored in twoseparate fields.

• Data while monitoring is in progress in the next cycle.

• Fixed monitoring information used in the tier relocation.

Manual execution modeYou can start and stop performance monitoring and tier relocation at any time. You should keepthe duration of performance monitoring to less than 7 days (168 hours). If performance monitoringexceeds 7 days, then monitoring stops automatically.Manual execution mode starts and ends monitoring and relocation at the time the command isissued. You can use scripts, which provide flexibility to control monitoring and relocation tasksbased on a schedule for each day of the week.In manual execution mode, the next monitoring cycle can be started with the collection ofmonitoring data and tier relocation operations performed in parallel. Data from these parallelprocesses are stored in two separate fields.

• Data while monitoring is in progress in the next cycle.

• Fixed monitoring information used in the tier relocation.The following figure illustrates the collection of monitoring data to tier relocation workflow inmanual execution mode.

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 111

Page 112: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Case 1: If the second collection of the monitoring information is finished during the first tierrelocation, the latest monitoring information is the second collection. In that case, the first collectionof monitoring information is referenced only after the first tier relocation has completed.

Case 2: When tier relocation is performed with the first collection of monitoring information, thesecond collection of monitoring information can be performed. However, the third collectioncannot be started. Because only two fields are used store collected monitoring information, thethird collection cannot be overwritten.In that case, the third collection of the monitoring information is started after the first tier relocationis stopped or tier relocation has completed.

112 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 113: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

The collection of the monitoring information is not started under these conditions as well:

• When the second tier relocation is performed, the fourth collection of monitoring informationcannot be started.

• When the third tier relocation is performed, the fifth collection of monitoring informationcannot be started.

If such conditions exist, two cycles of monitoring information cannot be collected continuouslywhile tier relocation is performed.The following figure illustrates the third collection of monitoring information while tier relocationis performed.

Tier relocation workflowThe following shows the flow of allocating new pages and migrating them to the appropriate tier.The combination of determining the appropriate storage tier and migrating the pages to theappropriate tier is referred to as tier relocation.

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 113

Page 114: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Explanation of the relocation flow:1. Allocate pages and map them to THP V-VOLs

Pages are allocated and mapped to THP V-VOLs on an on-demand basis. Page allocationoccurs when a write is performed to an area of any THP V-VOL that does not already havea page mapped to that location. Normally, a free page is selected for allocation from anupper tier with a free page. If the capacity of the upper tier is insufficient for the allocation,the pages are allocated to the nearest lower tier. A THP V-VOL set to a tier policy is assigneda new page that is based on the tier policy setting. The relative tier for new page allocationscan be specified during operations to create and edit LDEVs. If the capacity of all the tiersis insufficient, an error message is sent to the host.

2. Gather I/O load information of each pagePerformance monitoring gathers monitoring information of each page in a pool to determinethe physical I/O load per page in a pool. I/Os associated with page relocation, however, arenot counted.

3. Create frequency distribution graphThe frequency distribution graph, which shows the relationship between I/O counts (I/O load)and capacity (total number of pages), is created.You can use the View Tier Properties window to view this graph. The vertical scale of thegraph indicates ranges of I/Os per hour and the horizontal scale indicates a capacity thatreceived the I/O level. Note that the horizontal scale is accumulative.

CAUTION: When the number of I/Os is counted, the number of I/Os satisfied by cachehits are not counted. Therefore, the number of I/Os counted by Performance Monitoring isdifferent from the number of I/Os from the host. The number of I/Os per hour is shown inthe graph. If the monitoring time is less than an hour, the number of I/Os shown in the graphmight be higher than the actual number of I/Os.

Monitoring mode settings of Period or Continuous influences the values shown on theperformance graph. Period mode will report the most recent completed monitor cycle I/Odata on the performance graph. Continuous mode will report a weighted average of I/O datathat uses recent monitor cycle data, along with historical data on the performance graph.

114 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 115: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

4. Determine the tier range valuesThe page is allocated to the appropriate tier according to performance monitoring information.The tier is determined as follows.a. Determine the tier boundary

The tier range value of a tier is calculated using the frequency distribution graph. Thisacts as a boundary value that separates tiersThe pages of higher I/O load are allocated to the upper tier in sequence. Tier range isdefined as the lowest I/Os per hour (IOPH) value at which the total number of storedpages matches the capacity of the target tier (less some buffer percentage) or the IOPHvalue that will reach the maximum I/O load that the tier should process. The maximumI/O load that should be targeted to a tier is the limit performance value, and the rate ofI/O to the limit performance value of a tier is called the performance utilization percent.If the performance utilization percent shows 100%, this indicates that the target I/O loadto a tier is beyond the forecasted limit performance value.

CAUTION: The limit performance value is proportional to the capacity of the poolvolumes used in the tier. The total capacity of the parity group should be used for a poolto further improve the limit performance.

b. Determine the tier delta valuesThe tier range values are set as the lower limit boundary of each tier. The delta valuesare set above and below the tier boundaries (+10 to 20%) to prevent pages from beingmigrated unnecessarily. If all pages subject to tier relocation can be contained in theupper tier, both the tier range value (lower limit) and the delta value will be zero.

c. Determine the target tier of a page for relocation.The IOPH recorded for the page is compared against the tier range value to determinethe tier to which the page moves.

5. Migrate the pagesThe pages move to the appropriate tier. After migration, the page usage rates are averagedout in all tiers. I/Os which occur in the page migration are not monitored.

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 115

Page 116: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Related references

• “Monitoring modes” (page 126)

Tier relocation rules, restrictions, and guidelines

Rules

• Performance monitoring, using both Auto and Manual execution modes, observes the pagesthat were allocated to THP V-VOLs prior to the start of the monitoring cycle and the newpages allocated during the monitoring cycle. Pages that are not allocated during performancemonitoring are not candidates for tier relocation.

• Tier relocation can be performed concurrently on up to eight pools. If more than eight poolsare specified, relocation of the ninth pool starts after relocation of any of the first eight poolshas completed.

• If Auto execution mode is specified, performance monitoring may stop about one minutebefore to one minute after the beginning of the next monitor cycle start time.

• The amount of relocation varies per cycle. In some cases, the cycle may end before allrelocation can be handled. If tier relocation doesn't finish completely within the cycle,relocation to appropriate pages is executed in the next cycle.

• Calculating the tier range values will be influenced by the capacity allocated to THP V-VOLswith relocation disabled and the buffer reserve percentages.

• While a pool-VOL is being deleted, tier relocation is not performed. After the pool-VOLdeletion is completed, tier relocation starts.

• Frequency distribution is unavailable when there is no data provided by performancemonitoring.

• While the frequency distribution graph is being created or the tier range values are beingcalculated, the frequency distribution graph is not available. The time required for determiningthe tier range values varies depending on the number of THP V-VOLs and total capacity.The maximum time is about 20 minutes.

• To balance the usage levels of all parity groups, rebalancing may be performed after severaltier relocation operations. If rebalancing is in progress, the next cycle of tier relocation mightbe delayed.For details on rebalancing, see “Rebalancing the usage level among parity groups” (page 146).

Performance monitoring or tier relocation conditionsThe status of data collection, fixed monitoring, and tier relocation operations are described in thefollowing table. The latest fixed monitoring information is referenced when tiers are relocated.

SolutionsTier relocationoperations

Status of fixedmonitoringinformation used intier relocation

Status of datacollection inprogress

Monitoringinformation orexecutionconditions

Unnecessary. After thepages are allocated,

Tiers of the pagesare not relocated.

No monitoringinformation on pages.

Pages are notmonitored.

Unallocated pages.

monitoring andrelocation are performedautomatically.

Unnecessary. After thepages are allocated,

Tiers of the pagesare not relocated.

Only monitoringinformation on pagesis invalid.

Monitoring on pagesis reset.

Zero data isdiscarded during datamonitoring. monitoring and

116 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 117: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

SolutionsTier relocationoperations

Status of fixedmonitoringinformation used intier relocation

Status of datacollection inprogress

Monitoringinformation orexecutionconditions

relocation are performedautomatically.

N/AIf the tier relocationsetting is being

Monitoring informationon the volume is valid.

Volume ismonitored.

V-VOL settings do notallow tier relocation.

disabled at theperformancemonitoring finishtime, tiers of thevolume are notrelocated.

N/ATier relocation ofthe volume issuspended.

Only monitoringinformation on thevolume is invalid.

Volume is notmonitored.

When V-VOLs aredeleted

Collect the monitoringinformation again ifnecessary.1

Suspended.Monitoring informationcollected beforesuspension is valid.

Suspended.When executionmode is changed toManual from Auto orvice versa.

Collect the monitoringinformation again ifnecessary.1

Tier relocation issuspended bypowering OFF andis resumed afterpowering ON.

Monitoring informationcollected during theprevious cycle iscontinuously valid.

Monitoring issuspended bypowering OFF andis not resumed evenafter powering ON.1

When the powerswitch is power ON orOFF.

Collect the monitoringinformation again ifnecessary.1

Tier relocation tovolumes issuspended.

Monitoring informationis invalid and thevolumes need to bemonitored.

The monitoringinformation of thevolume is notcollected at the

• When Auto LUN isperformed.

• When QuickRestore of present moment. InBusiness Copy isperformed.

the next monitoringperiod, themonitoringinformation will becollected.

Collect the monitoringinformation again ifnecessary.1

Tier relocation tovolumes issuspended.

No effect on the fixedmonitoring information.The monitoringinformation collected

Monitoringinformation iscontinuouslycollected

S-VOL of followingprogram productswhen the initial copyoperation isperformed: during the previous

cycle continues to bevalid.

continuously, but themonitoring of thevolumes is reset.2• Continuous

AccessSynchronous

• High Availability

• ContinuousAccess Journal

Relocate tiers again.1Suspended.Fixed monitoringinformation is invalid

Continued.• When the numberof tiers increases

because of theby addingpool-VOLs. discarding of the

monitoring information.• When the

pool-VOLs of theIf the monitoring modeis set to the continuous

tiers are switched mode, weighted data

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 117

Page 118: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

SolutionsTier relocationoperations

Status of fixedmonitoringinformation used intier relocation

Status of datacollection inprogress

Monitoringinformation orexecutionconditions

calculated by using themonitoring information

by addingpool-VOLs.3

in past periods is alsodiscarded.• When tier rank of

the external LDEVis changed.

N/ADeleting thepool-VOL stops the

Monitoring informationis invalid temporarily.

Continued.When pool-VOLs aredeleted.

tier relocation. TheThe monitoringprocess resumesinformation isafter the pool-VOLis deleted.

calculated again afterdeleting of pool-VOLs.4

After recovering thefaulty area, relocate tiersagain.1

Suspended.No effect on the fixedmonitoring information.The monitoringinformation collected

Continued.When a cache isblocked.

during the previouscycle continues to bevalid.

After recovering thefaulty area, relocate tiersagain.1

Suspended.No effect on the fixedmonitoring information.The monitoringinformation collected

Continued.When an LDEV isblocked. (Pool-VOLor V-VOL)

during the previouscycle continues to bevalid.

Add pool-VOLs, thencollect monitoring

Suspended.No effect on the fixedmonitoring information.

Continued.When the depletionthreshold of the pool

information and relocatetiers again.1

The monitoringinformation collectedduring the previous

is nearly exceededduring relocation.

cycle continues to bevalid.

Unnecessary. Therelocation is performed

Suspended.The monitoringinformation collected

At the end time ofexecution cycle,

When executionmode is Auto and the

automatically in the nextcycle.

before monitoringperformance stops isvalid.

data monitoringstops.

execution cycle endsduring tier relocation.

Collect the monitoringinformation again ifnecessary.1

Continued.The monitoringinformation collectedbefore suspension isvalid.

Suspended.When executionmode is Manual andand 7 days elapseafter monitoringstarts.

Notes:1. The execution mode is Auto or the script is written in manual execution mode, information is monitored again

and tiers are relocated automatically.2. All pages of the S-VOLs are not allocated, and the monitoring information of the volume is reset. After the page

is allocated to the new page, the monitoring information is collected.3. Example: Pool-VOLs of SAS15K are added to the following configuration 1

• Configuration 1 (before change): Tier 1 is SSD, Tier 2 is SAS10K, and Tier 3 is SAS7.2K.

• Configuration 2 (after change): Tier 1 is SSD, Tier 2 is SAS15K, and Tier 3 is SAS10K and SAS7.2K.

4. The monitoring information status is changed from invalid (INV) to calculating (PND). After completion of calculating,the monitor information status is changed from calculating (PND) to valid (VAL).

118 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 119: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Buffer area of a tierSmart Tiers uses buffer percentages to reserve pages for new page assignments and allow thetier relocation process. Areas necessary for processing these operations are distributedcorresponding to settings used by Smart Tiers. The following describes how processing takesplace to handle the buffer percentages.Buffer space: The following table shows the default rates (rate to capacity of a tier) of bufferspace used for tier relocation and new page assignments, listed by drive type.

Totalbuffer area for new pageassignment

buffer area for tierrelocation

Drive type

2%0%2%SSD

10%8%2%Non-SSD

New page assignment: New pages are assigned based on a number of optional settings. Pagesare then assigned to the next lower tier, leaving a buffer area (2% per tier by default) for tierrelocation. Once 98% of capacity of all tiers is assigned, the remaining 2% of the buffer spaceis assigned from the upper tier. The buffer space for tier relocation is 2% in all tiers.The following illustrates the workflow of a new page assignment.

For a pool comprised of pool volumes from parity groups with capacity virtualization enabled,the capacity of the parity group equivalent to 20% of the tier of FMC is used as the compressionbuffer area. When free space other than the tier of FMC is not available, pages are assigned tothis buffer area just before the capacity depletes.

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 119

Page 120: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Setting external volumes for each tierIf you use external volumes as pool-VOLs, you can put the external volumes in tiers by settingthe External LDEV Tier Rank for the external volumes. The External LDEV Tier Rank consistsof the following three types: High, Middle, and Low. The following examples describe how tiersmay be configured:

Example 1: When configuring tiers by using external volumes onlyTier 1: External volumes (High)Tier 2: External volumes (Middle)Tier 3: External volumes (Low)

Example 2: When configuring tiers by combining internal volumes and external volumesTier 1: Internal volumes (SSD)Tier 2: External volumes (High)Tier 3: External volumes (Low)You can set the External LDEV Tier Rank when creating the pool, changing the pool capacity,or setting theEdit External LDEV Tier Rankwindow. The following table explains the performancepriority (from the top) of data drives.

Data drive typePriority

SSD1

SAS 15K rpm2

SAS 10K rpm3

SAS 7.2K rpm4

External volume* (High)5

External volume* (Middle)6

External volume* (Low)7

*Displays as External Storage in the Drive Type/RPM.

Reserved pages for relocation operation: A small percentage of pages, normally 2, are reservedper tier to allow relocation to operate. These are the buffer spaces for tier relocation.

120 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 121: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Tier relocation workflow: Tier relocation is performed taking advantage of the buffer spaceallocated for tier relocation, as mentioned above. Tier relocation is also performed to secure thespace reserved in each tier for new page assignment. The area is called the buffer space fornew page assignments. When tier relocation is performed, Smart Tiers reserves buffer spacesfor relocation and new page assignment.During relocation, a tier may temporarily be assigned over 98% of capacity as well, or well underthe allowance for the buffer areas.

Execution modes for tier relocation

Execution modes when using Remote Web ConsoleSmart Tiers performs tier relocations using one of two execution modes: Auto and Manual. Youcan switch between modes by using Remote Web Console.

Auto execution modeIn Auto execution mode, the system automatically and periodically collects monitoring data andperforms tier relocation. You can select an Auto execution cycle of 0.5, 1, 2, 4, or 8 hours, or aspecified time.The following illustrates tier relocation processing in a 2-hour Auto execution mode:

Manual execution modeIn Manual execution mode, you can manually collect monitoring data and relocate a tier. Youcan issue commands to manually:1. Start monitoring.2. Stop monitoring.3. Perform tier relocation.The following illustrates tier relocation processing in Manual execution mode:

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 121

Page 122: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Notes on performing monitoring

• You can collect the monitoring data even while performing the relocation.

• After stopping the monitoring, the tier range is automatically calculated.

• The latest available monitoring information, which is collected just before the relocation isperformed, is used for the relocation processing.

• When the relocation is performed, the status of the monitor information must be valid.

122 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 123: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Viewing monitor and tier relocation information using RWCInformation is displayed on the following items in the GUI windows:

DetailsWindowsField

Displays the status of pool monitoring.Monitoring Status • Pools window• In Progress: The monitoring is being

performed.• Pool Volumes tab

• View Pool Management Statuswindow • During Computation: The calculating is

being processed.Other than these cases, a hyphen (-) isdisplayed.

Displays the latest monitoring data.Recent Monitor Data • Pools window• If the monitoring data exists, the

monitoring period of time is displayed.Example: 2010/11/15 00:00 -2010/11/15 23:59

• Pool Volumes tab

• If the monitoring data is being obtained,only the starting time is displayed.Example: 2010/11/15 00:00 -

• If the latest monitoring data does notexist, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays the pool management task beingperformed to the pool.

Pool Management Task • Pools window

• Pool Volumes tab• Waiting for Relocation: The tier

relocation process is being waited.

• Relocating: The tier relocation processis being performed.

For details about the relocation progressrate, check the tier relocation log.

Displays the status of the poolmanagement task being performed, each

ViewPoolManagement StatuswindowPool Management Task(Status/Progress)

V-VOL progress ratio in the pool and itsaverage.

• Waiting for Relocation: The tierrelocation process is being waited.

• Relocating: The tier relocation processis being performed.

For details about the relocation progressrate, check the tier relocation log.

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 123

Page 124: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DetailsWindowsField

Displays the status of the tier relocationprocessing.

Relocation Result • Pools window

• Pool Volumes tab• In Progress: The status of Pool

Management Task is Waiting forRelocation or Relocating.

• View Pool Management Statuswindow

• Completed: The tier relocationoperation is not in progress, or the tierrelocation is complete.

• Uncompleted (n% relocated): The tierrelocation is suspended at the indicatedpercentage progression.

• -: The pool is not a Smart Tiers orSmart Tiers MF pool.

Displays the tier relocation speed settings.Relocation Speed • Pools window• 1(Slowest)• View Pool Management Status

window • 2(Slower)• Create Pools window • 3(Standard)• Edit Pools window • 4(Faster)• Start Tier Relocation window • 5(Fastest)• Stop Tier Relocation window

Displays the relocation priority.Relocation Priority • Pool Volumes tab• Prioritized: The priority is set to V-VOL.• View Pool Management Status

window • Blank: The priority is not set to V-VOL.

• -: V-VOL is not the Smart Tiers V-VOLor the tier relocation function isdisabled.

The performance graph for the availablemonitor information is displayed in theView Tier Properties window.

View Tier Properties windowPerformance Graph

Related references

• “Tier relocation log file contents” (page 128)

Execution modes when using RAID Manager

Manual execution modeIn Manual execution mode, you can manually collect monitoring data and relocate a tier. Youcan execute commands to do the following:1. Start monitoring.2. Stop monitoring.3. Perform tier relocation.The following illustrates tier relocation processing when in Manual execution mode:

124 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 125: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Notes on performing monitoring

• You can collect the monitoring data even while performing the relocation.

• After stopping the monitoring, the tier range is automatically calculated.

• The latest available monitoring information, which is collected just before the relocation isperformed, is used for the relocation processing.

• When the relocation is performed, the status of the monitor information must be valid.

Viewing monitor and tier relocation information using RAID ManagerIf the raidcom get thp_pool command is executed with the -key opt option specified, themonitoring information and tier relocation information are displayed. For details about the raidcomget thp_pool command, see the XP7 RAID Manager Reference Guide. Items are displayedas follows:

• STSThis item displays the operational status of the performance monitor and the tier relocation.

◦ STP: The performance monitor and the tier relocation are stopped.

◦ RLC: The performance monitor is stopped. The tier relocation is operating.

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 125

Page 126: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

◦ MON: The performance monitor is operating. The tier relocation is stopped.

◦ RLM: The performance monitor and the tier relocation are operating.

• DATThis item displays the status of the monitor information.

◦ VAL: Valid.

◦ INV: Invalid.

◦ PND: Being calculated.

• R(%)This item displays the progress percentage of tier relocation.0 to 99: Shows one of the following statuses.

◦ When the value of STS is RLC or RLM: Relocation is in progress.

◦ When the value of STS is STP or MON: Relocation is suspended at the indicatedpercentage progression.

100: Shows if the relocation operation is not in progress, or the relocation is complete.

Relocation speedRelocation speed: The page relocation speed can be set to 1(Slowest), 2(Slower), 3(Standard),4(Faster), and 5(Fastest). The default is 3(Standard). If you want to perform tier relocation athigh speed, use the 5(Fastest) setting. If you set a speed that is slower than 3(Standard), theload to data drives is low when tier relocation is performed.Based on the number of the parity groups that constitute a pool, this function adjusts the numberof V-VOLs for which tier relocation can be performed at one time. Tier relocation can be performedon as many as 32 V-VOLs in a storage system at once.After changing the setting, the relocation speed does not change and the data drive load maynot change in the following cases:

• The number of parity groups is very few.

• The number of V-VOLs associated with the pool is very few.

• Tier relocations are being performed on the multiple pools.

Monitoring modesWhen you create or edit a pool, specify the Smart Tiers monitoring mode. The monitoring modeis either the period mode or the continuous mode. If you change the mode from the one to theother while performing the monitoring, the changed setting becomes effective when the nextmonitoring will starts.

Period modePeriod mode is the default setting. If Period mode is enabled, tier range values and pagerelocations are determined based solely on the monitoring data from the last complete cycle.Relocation is performed according to any changes in I/O loads. However, if the I/O loads varygreatly, relocation may not finish in one cycle.

Continuous modeIf Continuous Mode is enabled, by weighting the latest monitoring information and the collectedmonitoring information in the past cycles, the weighted average efficiency is calculated. By

126 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 127: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

performing the tier relocation based on the weighted average efficiency, even if a temporarydecrease or an increase of the I/O load occurs, unnecessary relocation can be avoided.

Cautions when using monitoring modes

• If Continuous mode is used, best practice is to collect monitoring information using thefollowing execution modes:

◦ Auto execution mode

◦ Manual execution mode with collecting the periodic monitoring information by defininga script using RAID Manager

If the Manual execution mode is used without scripts, the Continuous monitoring mode canbe set. However, in this case, unexpected results may be calculated because the weightedaverage efficiency is calculated based on very different duration (short and long) periodsinformation obtained in the past cycles.

• When the monitoring mode is set to Continuous, the frequency distributions are displayedfor each pool and V-VOL calculated by using the monitor value on which the weightedcalculation is done.These calculated values are the predictive values for the next cycle after successfullyrelocating all pages. Therefore, these values may differ from an actual monitoring resultwhen they appear.In Performance Utilization of each tier, regardless of the type of the monitoring modesetting, the monitor values which were already collected in the current cycle are displayed.If you switch the monitoring mode from Period to Continuous or from Continuous to Period,the current cycle's monitoring data that is being collected is not discarded. However, thedata calculated by using past monitor cycle information on which the weighted calculationis done will be reset.

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 127

Page 128: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Downloading the tier relocation log fileYou can download the log file that contains the results of past tier relocations. See “Tier relocationlog file contents” (page 128) for information about the contents of the log.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Export Tier Relocation Log window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.3. Click More Actions > Export Tier Relocation Log.In Remote Web Console:Use one of these methods given below:

• Select Pools in the Storage Systems tree. In the Pools tab, click More Actions andselect Export Tier Relocation Log.

• From the Actions menu, select Pool > Export Tier Relocation Log.2. In the dialog box, specify a folder for the log file you download and click Save.

If you change the file name from the default, make sure the file name is appended with the.tsv extension before saving the file.

Tier relocation log file contentsIn every cycle in which tier relocation is performed, information about each pool and V-VOL isexported to the tier relocation log. The time required to incorporate the latest tier relocation resultsmay be approximately 30 minutes. The tier relocation log file is tab-delimited and contains thefollowing information.

DescriptionType ofinformation

Does eachV-VOLoutput the loginformation?

Does each pooloutput the loginformation?

Item

ID of each cycle of a tier relocation.CommonYesYesCycle IDA common ID is allocated to pool logsand V-VOL logs that are collected in onecycle.

Version number of the tier relocation logformat.

CommonYesYesLog Format Version

Serial number of the storage system.CommonYesYesDKC Serial Number

Following log types are displayed.CommonYesYesLog TypePOOL: Log information of each pool.V-VOL: Log information of each V-VOL.

LDEV ID of a V-VOL exported to a log.CommonYesNoLDEV ID

Pool ID of a pool exported to a log.CommonYesYesPool ID

The number of V-VOLs to be processedwhen tier relocation is performed.

CommonNoYesNum of V-VOLs

128 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 129: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionType ofinformation

Does eachV-VOLoutput the loginformation?

Does each pooloutput the loginformation?

Item

Value of the tiering policy. Values fromAll(0) to Level31(31) can be displayed.

Tier relocationresult

YesNoTiering Policy

Total pages of tier 1.Capacityinformation

NoYesTier1 Total

Total pages of tier 2.Capacityinformation

NoYesTier2 Total

Total pages of tier 3.Capacityinformation

NoYesTier3 Total

Pages assigned to tier 1 at the start oftier relocation.

Capacityinformation

YesYesTier1 Used

Pages assigned to tier 2 at the start oftier relocation.

Capacityinformation

YesYesTier2 Used

Pages assigned to tier 3 at the start oftier relocation.

Capacityinformation

YesYesTier3 Used

Starting date of the tier relocation.CommonYes1YesStart RelocationDate

Starting time of the tier relocation.CommonYes1YesStart RelocationTime

Ending date of the tier relocation.CommonYes1YesEnd RelocationDate

Ending time of the tier relocation.CommonYes1YesEnd RelocationTime

Statuses of a tier relocation.Tier relocationresult

Yes1YesResult StatusNormal End: A tier relocation endednormally.Suspend: A tier relocation suspended.

If the Result Status is Suspend, one offollowing reasons is displayed.

Tier relocationresult

Yes1YesDetail Status

Monitor discarded: Suspended due tothe discard of monitoring data.2

End of cycle: Suspended due toincomplete tier relocation during amonitoring cycle.End of cycle: Suspended due toincomplete tier relocation during amonitoring cycle.Requested by user: Suspended due torequest by a user.Threshold exceeded: Suspendedbecause the used capacity of poolsreaches a threshold due to a tierrelocation. When the used capacity of apool reaches the depletion threshold, thisreason is logged.FMC threshold exceeded: Suspendedbecause the used capacity of thephysical capacity in the capacityvirtualization-enabled FMC parity grouppool reached its full capacity.

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 129

Page 130: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionType ofinformation

Does eachV-VOLoutput the loginformation?

Does each pooloutput the loginformation?

Item

Cache blocked: Suspended because acache memory is blocked.Volume blocked: Suspended becausean LDEV which is pool-VOL or V-VOL isblocked.The tier management changed(Auto/Manual): Suspended because thetier management mode is changed fromAuto to Manual, or Manual to Auto.Other reasons: Suspended for reasonsother than the above, such as:

• A V-VOL was specified as thesecondary volume of the ContinuousAccess Synchronous pair and aninitial copy operation was performed.

• A V-VOL was specified as thesecondary volume of the HighAvailability device pair and an initialcopy operation was performed

• A V-VOL was specified as thesecondary volume of the ContinuousAccess Journal pair, and an initialcopy operation was performed.

Progress percentage rate at the time tierrelocation ends or is suspended.

Tier relocationresult

YesYesCompleted Rate(%)

IOPH (I/O per hour) remediation rate atthe time tier relocation ends or issuspended.

Tier relocationresult

YesYesRemediation Rate(%)

The remediation rate = ((Total IOPH ofpages after the promotion1) / (Total IOPHof all pages to be performed ofpromotion1)) * 100

1: Promotion is the page migration froma lower to higher tier.

Number of pages that are planned tomove from the tier 1 to tier 2.

Tier relocationYesYesPlannedTier1->Tier2

Number of pages that are planned tomove from the tier 1 to tier 3.

Tier relocationYesYesPlannedTier1->Tier3

Number of pages that are planned tomove from the tier 2 to tier 1.

Tier relocationYesYesPlannedTier2->Tier1

Number of pages that are planned tomove from the tier 2 to tier 3.

Tier relocationYesYesPlannedTier2->Tier3

Number of pages that are planned tomove from the tier 3 to tier 1.

Tier relocationYesYesPlannedTier3->Tier1

Number of pages that are planned tomove from the tier 3 to tier 2.

Tier relocationYesYesPlannedTier3->Tier2

Number of pages that are moved fromthe tier 1 to tier 2.

Tier relocationYesYesMoved Tier1->Tier2

Number of pages that are moved fromthe tier 1 to tier 3.

Tier relocationYesYesMoved Tier1->Tier3

130 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 131: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionType ofinformation

Does eachV-VOLoutput the loginformation?

Does each pooloutput the loginformation?

Item

Number of pages that are moved fromthe tier 2 to tier 1.

Tier relocationYesYesMoved Tier2->Tier1

Number of pages that are moved fromthe tier 2 to tier 3.

Tier relocationYesYesMoved Tier2->Tier3

Number of pages that are moved fromthe tier 3 to tier 1.

Tier relocationYesYesMoved Tier3->Tier1

Number of pages that are moved fromthe tier 3 to tier 2.

Tier relocationYesYesMoved Tier3->Tier2

IOPHs of all pools or V-VOLs.Monitoring resultYesYesIOPH

Percentage of IOPH for tier 1.Monitoring resultYesYesIOPH Tier1 (%)

Percentage of IOPH for tier 2.Monitoring resultYesYesIOPH Tier2 (%)

Percentage of IOPH for tier 3.Monitoring resultYesYesIOPH Tier3 (%)

Performance utilization of tier 1. Theperformance utilization is the current I/O

Monitoring resultNoYesPerformance UtilTier1 (%)

percentage based on the maximumperformance of tier 1.

Performance utilization of tier 2. Theperformance utilization is the current I/O

Monitoring resultNoYesPerformance UtilTier2 (%)

percentage based on the maximumperformance of tier 2.

Performance utilization of tier 3. Theperformance utilization is the current I/O

Monitoring resultNoYesPerformance UtilTier3 (%)

percentage based on the maximumperformance of tier 3.

Lower limit in a range for tier 1.Monitoring resultYesNoTier1 Low Range

Higher limit in a range for tier 2.Monitoring resultYesNoTier2 High Range

Lower limit in a range for tier 2.Monitoring resultYesNoTier2 Low Range

Higher limit in a range for tier 3.Monitoring resultYesNoTier3 High Range

Number of pages processed in anoperation to reclaim zero pages.

Tier relocationYesYesReclaim Zero PageNum

Number of a tiering policy that does notconform to the current tier configuration.

Monitoring resultNoYesNon CompliantTiering PolicyNumber A non-compliant policy prevents tier

relocation.

Number of pages moved from tier 2 totier 1 by Real Time Smart Tier while

Tier relocationYesYesRealtime MovedTier2->Tier1(Unplanned) performing the tier relocation by Smart

Tiers. However, the pages migration isnot planned by Smart Tiers.

Number of pages moved from tier 3 totier 1 by Real Time Smart Tier while

Tier relocationYesYesRealtime MovedTier3->Tier1(Unplanned) performing the tier relocation by Smart

Tiers. However, the pages migration isnot planned by Smart Tiers.

Number of pages moved from tier 2 totier 1 by Real Time Smart Tier while

Tier relocationYesYesRealtime MovedTier2->Tier1(Planned) performing the tier relocation by Smart

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 131

Page 132: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionType ofinformation

Does eachV-VOLoutput the loginformation?

Does each pooloutput the loginformation?

Item

Tiers. The pages migration is planned bySmart Tiers.

Number of pages moved from tier 3 totier 1 by Real Time Smart Tier while

Tier relocationYesYesRealtime MovedTier3->Tier1(Planned) performing the tier relocation by Smart

Tiers. The pages migration is planned bySmart Tiers.

Number of pages moved from tier 1 totier 2 by Real Time Smart Tier while

Tier relocationYesYesRealtime MovedTier1->Tier2

performing the tier relocation for SmartTiers.

Number of pages moved from tier 1 totier 3 by Real Time Smart Tier while

Tier relocationYesYesRealtime MovedTier1->Tier3

performing the tier relocation for SmartTiers.

In the total pages moved from tier 2 totier 1 by Real Time Smart Tier, the

Tier relocationYesYesRealtime MovedTier2->Tier1 (NonCompliant) number of migrated pages that do not

conform to the plan of Smart Tiers pagemigration.

In the total pages moved from tier 3 totier 1 by Real Time Smart Tier, the

Tier relocationYesYesRealtime MovedTier3->Tier1 (NonCompliant) number of migrated pages that do not

conform to the plan of Smart Tiers pagemigration.

In the total pages moved from tier 1 totier 2 by Real Time Smart Tier, the

Tier relocationYesYesRealtime MovedTier1->Tier2 (NonCompliant) number of migrated pages that do not

conform to the plan of Smart Tiers pagemigration.

In the total pages moved from tier 1 totier 3 by Real Time Smart Tier, the

Tier relocationYesYesRealtime MovedTier1->Tier3 (NonCompliant) number of migrated pages that do not

conform to the plan of Smart Tiers pagemigration.

Notes1. If the log file is lfv2 (Log Format Version 2) or later, the log file information of each V-VOL appears. If the log file is lfv 1, a

hyphen appears.2. When deleting pool-VOLs, ex-valid monitor information are discarded, so that the tier relocation is interrupted. After completion

of the pool-VOLs deleting, the tier determination calculation performs again and completes. Processed by this way, thevalid monitor information are re-created.

Tiering policyThe tiering policy function is used to assign a specific storage tier to a specific THP V-VOL. Atiering policy specifies subset of tiers that is available to a given set of THP V-VOLs.Tier relocation changes the location of previously stored data. It is performed in conformance tothe tiering policy. If a THP V-VOL is initially allocated to a low-speed tier and the tiering policy ischanged to a high-speed tier, relocation is performed in the next cycle.For example, if you set the tiering policy level on a V-VOL(THP V-VOL) to a tier with a high I/Ospeed, the data is always stored on the high-speed tier when relocating tiers. When you use thatV-VOL(THP V-VOL), regardless of the actual size of the I/O load, you can always get high-speedresponses. See “Tiering policy expansion” (page 133).

132 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 133: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

When you create the THP V-VOL, you can designate one of six existing tiering policies and defineup to 26 new tiering policies. See “Tiering policy expansion” (page 133) and “Setting tiering policyon a THP V-VOL” (page 135).Use the Edit LDEVs window to change the tiering policy settings. When tier relocation occurs,the related tiering policy set for the THP V-VOL is used to relocate data to the desired tier ortiers.The tiering policy does not own pool capacity. Rather, pool capacity is shared among tiers. Pagesare allocated in order of priority from upper to lower tiers in a tiering policy. When you specify anew allocation tier, pages are allocated starting from the tier that you specify.The tier range, frequency distribution, and used capacity are displayed per tiering policy: existingtier level All(0), Level1(1) through Level5(5) and Level6(6) to Level31(31).

Tiering policy expansionIn the current release, the tiering policy concept has been expanded to provide new options:

• Custom policies. You can define up to 26 new policies (Level6(6) - Level31(31)) in additionto the existing six (All(0), Level1(1), Level2(2), Level3(3), Level4(4), and Level5(5)). See“Setting tiering policy on a THP V-VOL” (page 135).A custom policy can be set for a THP V-VOL when it is created and changed, if necessary,after creation.

NOTE: Custom policies cannot be renamed.

• Smart Tiers performs relocation while calculating page allocation based on the tiering policysetting of all THP V-VOLs that have the same tiering policy in each pool.

• Max(%) and Min(%) parameters. When a tiering policy is created, 4 types of parameterscan be set: Tier1 Max and Tier 1 Min, Tier 3 Max and Tier 3 Min. Each parameter setting isa ratio that corresponds to the total capacity of the allocated area of THP V-VOLs that havethe same tiering policy set for a pool. See “Tiering policy examples” (page 133).Tier1 and Tier3 parameter settings can also limit the capacity for all volumes in a configurationthat contain multiple THP V-VOLs that have the same intended use. These settings canprevent conditions such as the following from occurring.

◦ Excess allocation of SSD capacity for unimportant applications.

◦ Degradation in average response time for high performance operations.

Tiering policy examplesThe following figure shows the parameter settings Tier1 Max=40%, Tier1 Min=20%, Tier3Max=40%, and Tier3 Min=20% for a THP V-VOL with a Level6(6) setting when the initial mappedcapacity is 100GB.

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 133

Page 134: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

The following figure shows an example of data allocation when the default tiering policy levelAll(0) is specified. Pages in the THP V-VOL are relocated to any tier.

The following figure shows an example of data allocation when setting the tiering policy toLevel1(1) (see Level1(1) in “Tiering policy levels” (page 135)). In this case, pages in the THPV-VOL are relocated to tier 1, and are not relocated to other tiers.

134 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 135: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Setting tiering policy on a THP V-VOLThe setting of a tiering policy for a THP V-VOL is optional. If one is not selected, the default isthe All(0) tiering policy level. The available levels are listed in “Tiering policy levels” (page 135).THP V-VOLs of different tiering policies can coexist in one pool. If you specify the level of thetiering policy, THP V-VOLs with the policy are grouped together.

• All(0) is the default policy. In this case, data is stored to all of the tiers.

• When a tier is added to the pool after setting the tiering policy on a THP V-VOL, the THPV-VOL is relocated according to the new tier lineup.For example, if you set the tiering policy to level 5, the data is always allocated to the tier ofthe low I/O speed. If the pool has two tiers, data is stored in tier 2. If a new tier is added, thenumber of tiers becomes three and if the new tier is the lowest tier, relocation will beperformed to move data into tier 3.

For more information about tiering policy and groups, see “Tiering policy levels” (page 135).

Tiering policy levels

Note3 tier pool2 tier pool1 tier poolTiering policy

Default Tiering PolicyAll 3 tiersBoth tiersSingle TierAll(0)

Data is located to the Top Tier. Any overflow movesto the next lower tier.

Tier 1Tier 1Same asAll(0)

Level1(1)

Data is located to the Top Tier after Level1(1)assignments are processed. Any overflow moves tothe next lower tier.

Tier 1 andTier 2See note

Same asAll(0)

Same asAll(0)

Level2(2)

Data is located to the Middle Tier. Any overflowmoves to the top tier.

Tier 2See note

Same asAll(0)

Same asAll(0)

Level3(3)

Data is located to the Middle Tier after Level3(3)assignments are processed. Any overflow moves tothe next lower tier.

Tier 2 andTier 3See note

Same asAll(0)

Same asAll(0)

Level4(4)

Data is located to the bottom tier. Any overflow movesto the next higher tier.

Tier 3See note

Tier 2Same asAll(0)

Level5(5)

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 135

Page 136: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Note3 tier pool2 tier pool1 tier poolTiering policy

Dependson usersetting

Dependson usersetting

Same asAll(0)

From Level6(6) toLevel31(31)

For example:If additional capacity is added to the pool and the capacity defines a new Tier 1 or new Tier 2, the THP V-VOLs witha Level 5(5) assignment will not physically move but Level 5(5) will be associated with Tier 3.If additional capacity is added to the pool and the capacity defines a new Tier 3, the THP V-VOLs with a Level 5(5)assignment will physically move to the new Tier 3 and Level 5(5) will be associated with Tier 3.

Viewing the tiering policy in the performance graphYou can view the frequency distribution graph of the pool by selecting either the level of thetiering policy or the entire pool on the performance graph in the View Tier Properties window.The following table shows how tiering policy is shown in the performance graph. How the graphappears depends on the number of tiers set in a pool and tiering policy level selected whenviewing the performance graph.

V-VOL displayed in the performance graphTiering policyselected withperformance graph

In the performance graph, you can display a frequency distribution of a THP V-VOL, set toall tiers.

All(0)

In the performance graph, you can display the frequency distribution of a THP V-VOL setto level 1.

Level 1(1)

In the performance graph, you can display the frequency distribution of a THP V-VOL setto level 2.

Level 2(2)

In the performance graph, you can display the frequency distribution of a THP V-VOL setto level 3.

Level 3(3)

In the performance graph, you can display the frequency distribution of a THP V-VOL setto level 4.

Level 4(4)

In the performance graph, you can display the frequency distribution of a THP V-VOL setto level 5.

Level 5(5)

In the performance graph, you can display the frequency distribution of a THP V-VOL setto custom policy.

From Level6(6) toLevel31(31)

136 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 137: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Reserving tier capacity when setting a tiering policyIf you set the tiering policy of a THP V-VOL, the THP V-VOL used capacity and the I/Operformance limitation are reserved from the tier. The reserved limit performance per page iscalculated as follows:The reserved limit performance per page = (The performance limit of the tier) ÷(The number of pages in the tier).A THP V-VOL without a tiering policy setting uses the unreserved area in the pool.

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 137

Page 138: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Example of reserving tier capacityThe reservation priority depends on the level of tiering policy. The following figure illustrates thereservation priority. Tiers are reserved in order of priority from (1) to (7) in the figure. If thepool-VOL capacity is deficient when you reserve a tier, the nearest tier of your specified tier isallocated. If you specify two tiers like level 2 or level 4 of the tiering policy, first of all the uppertier is reserved. At this time, if the capacity of the pool-VOL assigned to the upper tier is deficient,the lower tier defined by the tiering policy is reserved automatically. For example, in case of level2 in the diagram below, tier 1 is reserved first. If the capacity of tier 1 is deficient at this point, tier2 is reserved automatically. For details, see “Notes on tiering policy settings” (page 139).

Reserved tierTiering policyTier reservationpriority

Tier 1Level1(1)1

Tier 2Level3(3)2

Tier 3Level5(5)3

138 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 139: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Reserved tierTiering policyTier reservationpriority

The custom policy whose number is small is prioritized.From Level6(6) to Level31(31)From 4 to 29Tier 1: From Level6(6) to Level31(31), each of theTier1 Min values are reserved.Tier 2: From Level6(6) to Level31(31), each of valuesthat deducted the total value of Tier1 Max and Tier3Max from 100(%) are reserved.Tier 3: From Level6(6) to Level31(31), each of theTier3 Min values are reserved.

All tiersAll(0)30

Tier 1 and Tier 2Level2(2)

Tier 2 and Tier 3Level4(4)

Tier 1: From Level6(6) to Level31(31), each of theTier1 Max values are reserved.

From Level6(6) to Level31(31)

Tier 3: From Level6(6) to Level31(31), each of theTier3 Max values are reserved.

Notes on tiering policy settings

• If Auto is set as the execution mode, tier relocation is performed based on the monitoringcycle. Therefore, when the tiering policy setting is changed, tier relocation will automatically

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 139

Page 140: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

implement the tiering policy at the end of the current monitoring cycle. See Example 1 in“Execution mode settings and tiering policy” (page 141).

• If Manual is set as the execution mode, you must manually perform monitoring, issue amonitor stop, and then start relocation (see Example 2, Case 1, in “Execution mode settingsand tiering policy” (page 141)). If you change the tiering policy settings while obtainingmonitoring data, the monitoring data is used for the next tier relocation (see Example 2,Case 2, in “Execution mode settings and tiering policy” (page 141)). Therefore, you do notneed to perform new monitoring.

• If a capacity shortage exists in the tier being set, a message may appear in the View TierPropertywindow that the page allocation cannot be completed according to the tiering policyspecified for the V-VOL. Should that occur, the page allocation in the entire pool -- includingthe tier that defines the tiering policy -- might not be optimized.

NOTE: The message that page allocation cannot be completed according to the tieringpolicy does not appear when these tiering policies are set:

◦ All(0)

◦ In a 2-tier configuration, Level2(2), Level3(3), or Level4(4) which is equivalent to All(0)

When a capacity shortage exists in a tier, you can revise the setting of the tiering policy orthe configuration of tiers. If the capacity of one tier is fully exhausted, the migrating pagesare assigned to the next tier according to the tiering policy.

◦ Level1(1): When tier 1 is full, the remaining pages are allocated to tier 2. If tier 2 is full,the remaining pages are allocated to tier 3.

◦ Level3(3): When tier 2 is full, the remaining pages are allocated to tier 1. If tier 1 is full,the remaining pages are allocated to tier 3.

◦ Level5(5): When tier 3 is full, the remaining pages are allocated to tier 2. If tier 2 is full,the remaining pages are allocated to tier 1.

◦ Level2(2), Level4(4), and from Level6(6) to Level31(31): When the specified tier is full,the unallocated pages are kept in the prior tier or they are allocated to the tier that hasfree space.

• If a performance shortage exists in the tier being set, pages may not be allocated inconformance to the tiering policy specified for the V-VOL. In that case, pages are allocatedaccording to the performance ratio of each tier.As shown in the following table, allocation capacity considerations are based on the tieringpolicy.

Allocation capacity considerationsTiering Policy

Tier range and I/O performanceAll(0), Level2(2), or Level4(4)

Tier rangeLevel1(1), Level3(3), or Level5(5)

First phase: Tier range.From Level6(6) to Level31(31)

140 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 141: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Allocation capacity considerationsTiering Policy

Allocation capacities in each tier.

◦ Tier1: The setting value(%) in Tier1 Min.

◦ Tier2: The value deducted Tier1 Max(%) and Tier3 Max(%) from100(%).

◦ Tier3: The setting value(%) in Tier3 Min.

Second phase: Tier range and I/O performance.Capacities deducted from the mapped capacities of the first phase fromthe total used capacity, are mapped to each tier.

Execution mode settings and tiering policyThe follow depicts how tier relocation is performed after changing the tiering policy setting whileAuto execution mode is used.

The following depicts two cases of how tier relocation is performed after changing the tieringpolicy setting while Manual execution mode is used.

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 141

Page 142: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

New page assignment tierIf you set the new page assignment tier value, when a new page is needed by a THP V-VOL thepage is taken from the specified tier aligned with the new page assignment tier value. You canset this function by using Remote Web Console. In addition, this function becomes effective justafter setting. The following table lists setting values:

DescriptionSetting value

The new page is assigned from the higher tier of tiers set in the tiering policy.High

The new page is assigned from the middle tier of tiers set in the tiering policy.Middle

The new page is assigned from the lower tier of tiers set in the tiering policy.Low

The following tables show the tiers to which new pages are preferentially assigned.

NoteWhen specifyingLow

When specifyingMiddle

When specifyingHigh

Tiering Policy

If you set Low, tier 2 is givena priority over tier 1.

From tier 2 to 1From tier 1 to 2From tier 1 to 2All

Assignment sequenceswhen High, Middle, and Loware same.

From tier 1 to 2From tier 1 to 2From tier 1 to 2Level 1

142 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 143: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

NoteWhen specifyingLow

When specifyingMiddle

When specifyingHigh

Tiering Policy

Every assignment sequenceis the same as when All is

From tier 2 to 1From tier 1 to 2From tier 1 to 2Level 2

specified as the tieringpolicy.

Every assignment sequenceis the same as when All is

From tier 2 to 1From tier 1 to 2From tier 1 to 2Level 3

specified as the tieringpolicy.

Every assignment sequenceis the same as when All is

From tier 2 to 1From tier 1 to 2From tier 1 to 2Level 4

specified as the tieringpolicy.

Assignment sequenceswhen High, Middle, and Loware same.

From tier 2 to 1From tier 2 to 1From tier 2 to 1Level 5

Order of new page allocationConditionNumber

Same as Level1(1)T1 MIN = 100%1

Same as Level5(5)T1 MAX = 0%2

Same as All(0)T1 MAX > 0%3

NoteWhen specifyingLow

When specifyingMiddle

When specifyingHigh

Tiering policy

Specifying High, Middle orLow to the assignmentsequence is effective.

From tier 3, 2, to 1.From tier 2, 3, to 1.From tier 1, 2, to 3.All

Assignment sequenceswhen High, Middle, and Loware same.

From tier 1, 2, to 3.From tier 1, 2, to 3.From tier 1, 2, to 3.Level 1

If you set Low, tier 2 is givena priority over tier 1.

From tier 2, 1, to 3.From tier 1, 2, to 3.From tier 1, 2, to 3.Level 2

Assignment sequenceswhen High, Middle, and Loware same.

From the 2, 3, to 1From tier 2, 3, to 1From tier 2, 3, to 1Level 3

If you set Low, tier 3 is givenpriority over tier 2.

From tier 3, 2, to 1From tier 2, 3, to 1From tier 2, 3, to 1Level 4

Assignment sequenceswhen High, Middle, and Loware same.

From tier 3, 2, to 1From tier 3, 2, to 1From tier 3, 2, to 1Level 5

Order of new page allocationConditionNumber

Same as Level1(1)T1 MIN = 100%1

Same as Level5(5)T3 MIN = 100%2

Same as Level2(2)T1 MAX > 0% and T3 MAX = 0%3

Same as Level3(3)T1 MAX = 0% and T3 MAX = 0%4

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 143

Page 144: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Order of new page allocationConditionNumber

Same as Level4(4)T1 MAX = 0% and T3 MAX > 0%5

Same as All(0)T1 MAX > 0% and T3 MAX > 0%6

Relocation priorityIf you use the relocation priority function, you can set the selection priority of a THP V-VOL whenperforming relocation. With this setting, a prioritized THP V-VOL can be relocated earlier duringa relocation cycle. You can set this function by using Remote Web Console. The function isactivated after the monitoring data is collected.

• If no relocation priority is set for all THP V-VOLs, the general order of THP V-VOL selectionis to select the next THP V-VOL in LDEV number order after the last THP V-VOL that fullyperformed relocation. This selection order persists across relocation cycles.

• If one or more THP V-VOLs is assigned a relocation priority, the prioritized THP V-VOLs areoperated upon in the early portion of the relocation cycle, before others in the general orderof THP V-VOL selection.

• If V-VOL is not given priority for relocation:For example, if LDEVs of LDEV IDs with LDEV#1, LDEV#2, LDEV#3, LDEV#4, and LDEV#5are not given priority for relocation, LDEVs are relocated with the following sequences. Inthis example, three LDEVs are relocated in each period, but the number of LDEVs to relocatemay change by the relocation cycle or the data size.

Relocatingsequence ofLDEV#5 in eachcycle

Relocatingsequence ofLDEV#4 ineach cycle

Relocatingsequence ofLDEV#3 in eachcycle

Relocatingsequence ofLDEV#2 in eachcycle

Relocatingsequence ofLDEV#1 ineach cycle

Relocatingcycle

UnperformedUnperformed3rd2nd1stT1

2nd1stUnperformedUnperformed3rdT2

Unperformed3rd2nd1stUnperformedT3

1stUnperformedUnperformed3rd2ndT4

• If V-VOL is given priority for relocation:For example, if LDEVs of LDEV IDs with LDEV#3 and LDEV#4 are set priority for relocationfrom LDEV#1 to LDEV#5, LDEVs are relocated with the following sequences. In this example,three LDEVs are relocated in each period, but the number of LDEVs to relocate may changeby the relocation cycle or data size.

Relocatingsequence ofLDEV#5 in eachcycle

Relocatingsequence ofLDEV#4 ineach cycle

Relocatingsequence ofLDEV#3 in eachcycle

Relocatingsequence ofLDEV#2 in eachcycle

Relocatingsequence ofLDEV#1 ineach cycle

Relocatingcycle

Unperformed2nd1stUnperformed3rdT1

Unperformed2nd1st3rdUnperformedT2

3rd2nd1stUnperformedUnperformedT3

Unperformed2nd1stUnperformed3rdT4

144 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 145: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Assignment tier when pool-VOLs are deletedWhen you delete pool-VOLs, the pages allocated to the pool-VOLs are moved to other pool-VOLs.The following table shows the tier numbers to which pages are allocated before and afterpool-VOLs are deleted. This operation does not depend on the tiering policy or the settings ofnewly assigned tiers. Relocate tiers after deleting pool-VOLs.The following table describes page allocation in a 3-tier configuration.

DescriptionOrder in which pages areallocated to tiers

Tier of deleted pool-VOLs

If there is free space in Tier 1, pages areallocated to Tier 1.

Tier 1, Tier 2, and Tier 3Tier 1

If there is no free space in Tier 1, pages areallocated to Tier 2.If there is no free space in Tier 1 and Tier 2,pages are allocated to Tier 3.

If there is free space in Tier 2, the pages areallocated to Tier 2.

Tier 2, Tier 1, and Tier 3Tier 2

If there is no free space in Tier 2, pages areallocated to Tier 1.If there is no free space in Tier 1 and Tier 2,pages are allocated to Tier 3.

If there is free space in Tier 3, pages areallocated to Tier 3.

Tier 3, Tier 2, and Tier 1Tier 3

If there is no free space in Tier 3, pages areallocated to Tier 2.If there is no free space in Tier 2 and Tier 3,pages are allocated to Tier 1.

The following table describes page allocation in a 2-tier configuration.

DescriptionOrder in which pages areallocated to tiers

Tier of deleted pool-VOLs

If there is free space in Tier 1, pages areallocated to Tier 1.

Tier 1 and Tier 2Tier 1

If there is no free space in Tier 1, pages areallocated to Tier 2.

If there is free space in Tier 2, pages areallocated to Tier 2.

Tier 2 and Tier 1Tier 2

If there is no free space in Tier 2, pages areallocated to Tier 1.

Formatted pool capacityThe formatted pool capacity equals the capacity of the initialized free space and the reservedcapacity of a pool, but not the capacity of all free space and reserved capacity of the pool. Thefree space of the pool is monitored by a storage system. Space is formatted automatically ifneeded. You can confirm the formatted pool capacity in the View Pool Management Statuswindow (see “View Pool Management Status window” (page 480)). Dependent on the load of thestorage system, the format speed of free space and reserved capacity of the pool is adjusted.For the pool with pool-VOLs that are enabled with capacity virtualization, the formatted poolcapacity is not the parity group capacity. Instead, it is the pool capacity.

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 145

Page 146: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

New pages are allocated, then initialized, during data write operations to the V-VOL. If a significantnumber of new pages are allocated, initialization might be delayed as a result of conflicts betweendata write and new page initialization processes. Such conflicts could occur, for example, whenyou create a file system of new THP V-VOLs from the host. You can initialize the free space ofa pool in advance to prevent delays in data write operations.If you want to change the method of performing the function to format the free space of a pool,contact Hewlett Packard Enterprise technical support.

Used capacity, mapped capacity, and reserved capacityThe used capacity is the total capacity of pages that are assigned and reserved for each V-VOL.The mapped capacity is the total of pages which contain user data and control information ofeach V-VOL. The reserved capacity is the total of pages reserved in each V-VOL for which thefull allocation function is enabled.

Rebalancing the usage level among parity groupsIf multiple parity groups that contain LDEVs used as pool volumes exist, rebalancing can improvebiased usage rates in parity groups. Rebalancing is performed as if each parity group were asingle pool volumes. After rebalancing, the usage rates of LDEVs in a parity group may not bebalanced, but the usage rate in the entire pool is balanced.The usage level among parity groups is automatically rebalanced when these operations are inprogress:

NOTE: In pools comprised of pool volumes assigned by parity groups with capacity virtualizationenabled, the rebalancing operation is performed with consideration of the parity group's usedcapacity. Therefore, after performing the rebalancing operation, the capacity of the pool volumesmay not be reduced.

• Expanding pool capacity

• Shrinking pool capacity

• Reclaiming zero pages

• Reclaiming zero pages in a page release request issued by the host with the Write Samecommand, for example.

• Performing tier relocationsIf you expand the pool capacity, Thin Provisioning moves data to the added space on a per-pagebasis. When the data is moved, the usage rate among parity groups of the pool volumes isrebalanced.

146 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 147: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Host I/O performance may decrease when data is moved. If you do not want to have the usagelevel of parity groups automatically balanced, call the Hewlett Packard Enterprise technicalsupport.You can see the rebalancing progress of the usage level among parity groups in the View PoolManagement Status window (see “View Pool Management Status window” (page 480)). ThinProvisioning automatically stops balancing the usage levels among parity groups if the cachememory is not redundant or the pool usage rate reaches up to the threshold.

Changing the tiering policy level on a THP V-VOLUse this procedure to change the tiering policy level on a THP V-VOL.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Logical Devices window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click Volumes, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Logical Devices.

2. In the LDEVs pane of the Logical Devices window, select the LDEV ID of the LDEV withthe tiering policy you want to change.

3. Click Edit LDEVs.4. In the Edit LDEVs window, click Tiering Policy, and then select a tiering policy.5. Click Finish.

The Confirm window appears.6. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

7. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Changing new page assignment tier of a V-VOLUse this procedure to change the new page assignment tier of a V-VOL.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 147

Page 148: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Procedure1. Open the Logical Devices window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click Volumes, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Logical Devices.

2. In the LDEVs pane of the Logical Devices window, select an LDEV ID.3. Click More Actions, and then select Edit LDEVs.4. In the Edit LDEVs window, select New Page Assignment Tier, and select the new page

assignment tier you want to use.5. Click Finish.

The Confirm window appears.6. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

7. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Opening the Edit Tiering Policies windowFollow these steps to open the Edit Tiering Policies window.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Edit Tiering Policies window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. In the Pools window, click Edit Tiering Policies.

Changing a tiering policyUse this procedure to change a tiering policy.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

148 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 149: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Procedure1. Open the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. In the Pools window, click Edit Tiering Policies.3. In the Edit Tiering Policies window, select the tiering policy that you want to change and

click Change.4. Change the tiering policy, and click OK.5. Return to the Edit Tiering Policies window.

Each tiering policy value is needed in order to meet the conditions described in the followingtable.

6. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

7. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

8. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

ExplanationItem

Satisfy either one of following:Equal to Tier1 MinBigger than Tier1 Min

Tier1 Max

Satisfy either one of following:Equal to Tier1 MaxSmaller than Tier1 Max

Tier1 Min*

Satisfy either one of following:Equal to Tier3 MinBigger than Tier3 Min

Tier3 Max

SSDSatisfy either one of following:Equal to Tier3 MaxSmaller than Tier3 Max

Tier3 Min*

* The sum of Tier1 Min and Tier3 Min must be 100 (%) or less.

Changing relocation priority setting of a V-VOLUse this procedure to change the relocation priority setting of a V-VOL.

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 149

Page 150: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (System Resource Management) role is required to perform this task.The Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Logical Devices window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click Volumes, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Logical Devices.

2. In the Logical Deviceswindow, select the LDEV ID of the volume with the relocation priorityyou want to change.

3. Click Edit LDEVs.4. In the Edit LDEVs window, select the Relocation Priority and click Default or Prioritize.

If you choose Prioritize, the LDEV is relocated preferentially.5. Click Finish.

The Confirm window appears.6. In the Task Name text box, enter the task name.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

7. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Functions overview for Real Time Smart Tier and Smart TiersTier management is performed by both Real Time Smart Tier and Smart Tiers. The differencesin supported functionality are included in the table below.

Smart TiersReal Time Smart TierFunctionsCategory

SupportedSupportedAssigning new pages to the writedata of the host

Initial page allocation

N/ASupportedMonitoring tiers based on thespecified cycle time

Monitoring of performance

SupportedSupportedPromoting pages to the tierwhich is determined by the

Tier relocation

scheduled performancemonitoring

N/ASupportedPromoting pages from the tier 2or 3 to tier 1, the pages wherethe latest access frequency issuddenly high

N/ASupportedTo maintain capacity in the tier1, demoting pages from the tier1 to tier 2 or 3, the pages wherethe latest access frequency islow

150 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 151: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

The following diagram shows the differences between the functions of Thin Provisioning, SmartTiers, and Real Time Smart Tier.

Relocating pages whose latest I/Os frequency is suddenly high by Real Time SmartTier

The Real Time Smart Tier feature identifies the frequently accessed pages by counting thenumber of I/Os to specific pages. Pages that are accessed many times are promoted to tier 1.Pages where the latest access frequency is low are allocated to lower tiers.

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 151

Page 152: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Smart Tiers workflowThe following diagram shows the flow of work for a Storage Administrator to set up Smart Tierson the storage system.As shown in the diagram, Remote Web Console and RAID Manager have different workflows.The details about how to set up Smart Tiers using Remote Web Console are covered insubsequent topics. For details about how to set up Smart Tiers using RAID Manager, see theXP7 RAID Manager Reference Guide and XP7 RAID Manager User Guide. Use Remote WebConsole to create pools and THP V-VOLs.

152 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 153: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

• In RAID Manager, when creating a pool, you cannot enable the Smart Pool option and cannotregister multiple media as pool-VOLs. Before making tiers, enable the Smart Pool option.

• Enabling the Smart Pool option from RAID Manager automatically sets Tier ManagementtoManual. To change Tier Management toAuto, you must do this in Remote Web Console.If you delete a pool, its pool-VOLs (LDEVs) will be blocked. If they are blocked, format them

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 153

Page 154: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

• before using them.

Real Time Smart Tier workflowThe Real Time Smart Tier feature of Smart Tiers can be set up using either Remote Web Consoleor RAID Manager.The following diagram shows the workflow for a Storage Administrator to set up Real Time SmartTier on the storage system. As shown in the diagram, Remote Web Console and RAID Managerhave different workflows. The details about how to set up Real Time Smart Tier using RemoteWeb Console are covered in subsequent topics. For details about how to set up Real Time SmartTier using RAID Manager, see the XP7 RAID Manager Reference Guide and XP7 RAID ManagerUser Guide. Use Remote Web Console to create pools and THP V-VOLs.

154 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 155: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

• In RAID Manager, when creating a pool, you cannot enable Smart Pool and cannot registermultiple media as pool-VOLs. Before making tiers, enable Smart Pool.

• Enabling Smart Pool from RAID Manager automatically sets Tier Management to Manual.To change Tier Management to Auto, you must do this in Remote Web Console.

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 155

Page 156: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

NOTE: If you delete a pool, its pool-VOLs (LDEVs) will be blocked. If they are blocked, formatthem before reusing them.

Smart Tiers, Real Time Smart Tier tasks and parametersThe following topics list the Smart Tiers, Real Time Smart Tier tasks and parameter settings andindicate whether the tasks can be performed or the parameters can be set in Remote WebConsole (GUI) or RAID Manager, or both.

Task and parameter settings

RAIDManager

GUIItem

YYCreateCreateTHP pool(Setting item) YYPool Name

YYThreshold

N1YSmart Pool: Enable/Disable

N1YReal Time Smart Tier: Enable/Disable

NYTier Management: Auto mode

NYTier Management: Manual mode

NY3Rate of space for new page assignment

NYBuffer Space for Tier relocation

NYCycle Time

NYMonitoring Period

NYMonitoring Mode

NYExternal LDEV Tier Rank

NYRelocation speed

YYDelete

YYChange SettingsChange Settings(Setting item) Y2YPool Name

YYThreshold

YYSmart Pool: Enable/Disable

YYReal Time Smart Tier: Enable/Disable

YYTier Management: Auto to Manual

NYTier Management: Manual to Auto

Y3Y3Buffer Space for New page assignment

YYBuffer Space for Tier relocation

NYCycle Time

NYMonitoring Period

YYMonitoring Mode

NYExternal LDEV Tier Rank

156 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 157: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

RAIDManager

GUIItem

NYRelocation speed

YYAdd pool-VOLsTHP pool

YYDelete pool-VOLs

YYRestore Pools

YYMonitoring start/end

YYTier relocation start/stop

YYCreateCreateTHP V-VOL(Setting item) YYTHP V-VOL Name

NNSmart Pool relocation: Disable

NYTiering Policy

NYNew page assignment tier

NYRelocation priority

YYExpand

YYReclaim zero pages

YYDelete

YYChange SettingsChange Settings(Setting item) YYTier relocation: Enable/Disable

YYTiering Policy

NYNew page assignment tier

NYRelocation priority

NYDownload relocation logRelocation log

Notes:1. Set to Disable if the pool is created by RAID Manager.2. You can rename a pool when adding pool-VOLs to it.3. Hewlett Packard Enterprise recommends that you specify 0% for SSD and 8% for other drives.

Display items: Setting parameters

RAID ManagerGUIOutput informationCategoryNo.

YYSmart Pool: DisableTHP pool1

YYReal Time Smart Tier: Enable/Disable2

YYTier Management mode: Auto/Manual3

YYRate of space for new page assignment4

NY*Cycle Time5

NY*Monitoring Period6

YYMonitoring Mode7

NYExternal LDEV Tier Rank8

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 157

Page 158: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

RAID ManagerGUIOutput informationCategoryNo.

NYRelocation speed9

YYTier relocation: Enable/DisableTHP V-VOL10

YYTiering Policy11

NYNew page assignment tier12

NYRelocation priority13*You can view this item only in the Auto execution mode.

Display items: Capacity usage for each tier

RAID ManagerGUIOutput informationCategoryNo.

YYCapacity for each tier (Total)THP pool1

YYCapacity for each tier (Usage)2

YYCapacity for each tier (Usage)THP V-VOL3

Display items: Performance monitor statistics

RAID ManagerGUIOutput informationCategoryNo.

NY1Frequency distributionTHP pool1

Y2Y1Tier range2

YYPerformance utilization3

NYMonitoring Period starting time4

NYMonitoring Period ending time5

NYFrequency distributionTHP V-VOL6

NYTier range7

NYMonitoring Period starting time8

NYMonitoring Period ending time9

Notes:1. You can select either each level of the tiering policy or the entire pool. If you set other than All(0), the tier range

is not displayed when you select the entire pool.2. The tier range when the tiering policy All(0) is selected is displayed.

Display items: Operation status of performance monitor/relocation

RAID ManagerGUIOutput informationCategoryNo.

YYMonitor operation status: Stopped/OperatingTHP pool1

YYPerformance monitor information:Valid/Invalid/Calculating

2

YYRelocation status: Relocating/Stopped3

YYRelocation progress: 0 to 100%4

158 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 159: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Managing Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier

Changing a Thin Provisioning pool to a Smart Tiers poolUse this procedure to change a Thin Provisioning pool to a pool for Smart Tiers.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

NOTE: To change the pool of Smart Tiers or Real Time Smart Tier to the pool of the data directmapping attribute, operate as follows:1. In the operation target pool, open the Edit Pools window, then select Enable from the Smart

Pool field.2. Apply the setting to the storage system.3. In the operation target pool, open the Edit Pools window, then select Enable from the Data

Direct Mapping field.4. Apply the setting to the storage system.

Procedure1. Open the Edit Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right click THP Pools then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. From the Pools table, click the row of a pool you want to change to the Smart Tiers or RealTime Smart Tier setting.

3. Perform one of the following to display the Edit Pools window.- Click More Actions and select Edit Pools.- Click Actions > Pool > Edit Pools to open the window.

4. Check Smart Pool.5. Select Enable from the Smart Pool field.6. If Real Time Smart Tier is used, select the Real Time Smart Tier check box. If there is no

pool volume whose drive type is SSD, the check box cannot be selected.7. Select the Tier Management check box.8. In the Tier Management field, select Auto or Manual.

Normally Auto should be set.When you select Auto, monitoring and tier relocation can be automatically executed.When you select Manual, monitoring and tier relocation can be executed with the RAIDManager commands or the Pools window.When you change the setting of Auto to Manual while monitoring and tier relocation isexecuting, it is cancelled.

9. From the Cycle Time list, select the cycle of performance monitoring and tier relocation.

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 159

Page 160: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

NOTE:• When you change the Cycle Time while performance monitoring and tier relocation

are being executed, the setting becomes effective for the next cycle after the currentcycle is complete.When you select 24 Hours (default):Monitoring and tier relocation is performed once a day. In the Monitoring Period field,specify the time of starting and ending of monitoring in 00:00 to 23:59 (default value).

• If you specify the starting time later than the ending time, the monitoring continues untilthe time when you specify as the ending time on the next day. Anytime that is not in thespecified range of the monitor period is not monitored.

• You can view the information gathered by monitoring with Remote Web Console andRAID Manager.

• When you change the time range of performance monitoring, the setting becomeseffective from the next cycle after the cycle that is executing is complete.When you select any of 0.5 Hours, 1 Hour, 2 Hours, 4 Hours or 8 Hours:Performance monitoring is performed every duration you selected starting at 00:00.You cannot specify the monitoring period.

10. Select the Monitoring Mode check box.11. From the Monitoring Mode options, select Period Mode or Continuous Mode.

If you want to perform tier relocation using the monitor results from the prior cycle, selectPeriod Mode. If you want to perform tier relocation weighted to the past period monitoringresult, select Continuous Mode.

12. Select the speed to use for page relocation in Relocation speed. You can set the speedto: 1(Slowest), 2(Slower), 3(Standard), 4(Faster), or 5(Fastest). The default is 3(Standard).If the speed specified is slower than 3(Standard), the data drive load is low when tierrelocation is performed.

13. Select the Buffer Space for New page assignment check box.14. In the Buffer Space for New page assignment text box, enter an integer value from 0 to

50 as the percentage (%) to set for each tier.15. Select the Buffer Space for Tier relocation check box.16. In the Buffer Space for Tier relocation text box, enter an integer value from 2 to 40 as the

percentage (%) to set for each tier.17. Click Finish.

The Confirm window appears.18. In the Task Name text box, enter the task name.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols in all, except for \ / : , ; * ? " < > |. Thevalue "date-window name" is entered by default.

19. In the Confirm window, click Apply to register the setting in the task.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

160 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 161: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Changing monitoring and tier relocation settingsYou can change the following monitoring and tier relocation settings of Smart Tiers pools:

• Automatic or manual execution of monitoring and tier relocation

• Cycle time of monitoring and tier relocation

• Time period of monitoring

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right click THP Pools, then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. From the Pools table, click the row of a pool you want to change to the Smart Tiers or RealTime Smart Tier setting.

3. Perform one of the following to display the Edit Pools window.- Click More Actions and select Edit Pools.- Click Actions > Pool > Edit Pools to open the window.

4. Click Options for Smart Pool.5. Select the Tier Management check box.6. In Tier Management, select Auto or Manual.

Normally Auto should be set to allow relocation to be automatically executed.When you selectManual, monitoring, tier relocation can be executed with the RAID Managercommands or from the Pools window.When you change the setting from Auto to Manual during performance monitoring and tierrelocation is executing, the operation is cancelled and is not performed since then.

7. If Auto is selected from the Cycle Time list, select the cycle of performance monitoring andtier relocation.

8. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

9. In the Task Name text box, enter the task name.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols in all, except for \ / : , ; * ? " < > |. Thevalue "date-window name" is entered by default.

10. In the Confirm window, click Apply to register the setting in the task.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Changing monitoring mode settings

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 161

Page 162: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Procedure1. Open the Edit Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right click THP Pools and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. In the Pools tab, click the row of a pool for which you want to change the Smart setting.3. Perform one of the following to display the Edit Pools window.

- Click More Actions and select Edit Pools.- Click Actions > Pool > Edit Pools to open the window.

4. Click Options for Smart Pool.5. Click the Monitoring Mode check box.6. Select Period Mode or Continuous Mode.

If you want to perform tier relocation using the monitor results from the prior cycle, selectPeriod Mode. If you want to perform tier relocation weighted to the past period monitoringresult, select Continuous Mode.

7. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

8. In the Task Name text box, enter the task name.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols in all, except for \ / : , ; * ? " < > |. Thevalue "date-window name" is entered by default.

9. In the Confirm window, click Apply to register the setting in the task.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Changing relocation speedUse this procedure to change the relocation speed.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Edit Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right click THP Pools and select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. In the THP Pools table, click the row of a pool you want to change to the Smart or RealTime Smart Tier setting.

3. Perform one of the following to display the Edit Pools window.- Click More Actions and select Edit Pools.

162 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 163: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

- Click Actions > Pool > Edit Pools to open the window.4. In the Edit Pools window, expand Options for Smart Pool.5. Use the Relocation Speed option to set the speed for page relocation to 1(Slowest),

2(Slower), 3(Standard), 4(Faster), and 5(Fastest).The default is 3(Standard). If you want to perform tier relocation at high speed, set 5(Fastest).If the speed specified is slower than 3(Standard), the data drive load is low when tierrelocation is performed.

6. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

7. In the Task Name text box, enter the task name.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols in all, except for \ / : , ; * ? " < > |. Thevalue "date-window name" is entered by default.

8. In the Confirm window, click Apply to register the setting in the task.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Changing buffer space for new page assignment setting

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Edit Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right click THP Pools and select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. In the Pools table, click the row of a pool you want to change to the Smart or Real TimeSmart Tier setting.

3. Perform one of the following to display the Edit Pools window.- Click More Actions and select Edit Pools.- Click Actions > Pool > Edit Pools to open the window.

4. Select Options for Smart Pool.5. Select the Buffer Space for New page assignment check box.6. In the Buffer Space for New page assignment text box, enter an integer value from 0 to

50 as the percentage (%) to set for each tier.7. Click Finish.

The Confirm window appears.8. In the Task Name text box, enter the task name.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols in all, except for \ / : , ; * ? " < > |. Thevalue "date-window name" is entered by default.

9. In the Confirm window, click Apply to register the setting in the task.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier 163

Page 164: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Changing buffer space for tier relocation settingUse this procedure to change the buffer space for tier relocation.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Edit Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right click THP Pools and select the System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. In the THP Pools table, click the row of a pool you want to change to the Smart or RealTime Smart Tier setting and click Edit Pool.

3. Perform one of the following to display the Edit Pools window.- Click More Actions and select Edit Pools.- Click Actions > Pool > Edit Pools to open the window.

4. In the Edit Pools window, expand Options for Smart Pool.5. Select the Buffer Space for Tier relocation check box.6. In the Buffer Space for Tier relocation text box, enter an integer value from 2 to 40 as the

percentage (%) to set for each tier.7. Click Finish.

The Confirm window appears.8. In the Task Name text box, enter the task name.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols in all, except for \ / : , ; * ? " < > |. Thevalue "date-window name" is entered by default.

9. In the Confirm window, click Apply to register the setting in the task.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Viewing pool tier information

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Monitor Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. In the Pools window, select a pool with the properties you want to view.

164 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 165: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

3. Click More Actions, and then select View Tier Properties.

Viewing THP V-VOL tier information

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. In the Pools window, select a pool with properties you want to view.3. Click More Actions, and then select View Tier Properties.

Changing a Smart Tiers pool to a pool for Thin ProvisioningYou can use this procedure to change a Smart Tiers pool to a Thin Provisioning pool. However,you cannot change the pool status of Smart Tiers to disable in the following cases:

• Tier relocation is being executed manually.

• Pool-VOLs are being deleted.

• Zero pages are being reclaimed.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Edit Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. In the Pools tab, select a pool to be changed from a pool for Smart Tiers to a pool for ThinProvisioning.

3. Click More Actions and select Edit Pools.4. In the Edit Pools window, check Smart Pool.5. Select Disable and click OK in the warning message.6. Click Finish.

The Confirm window appears.

Changing a Smart Tiers pool to a pool for Thin Provisioning 165

Page 166: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

7. In the Task Name text box, enter the task name.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols in all, except for \ / : , ; * ? " < > |. Thevalue "date-window name" is entered by default.

8. In the Confirm window, click Apply to register the setting in the task.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Configuring a pool for Smart Tiers for use by Real Time Smart TierUse this procedure to turn on the Real Time Smart Tier feature on a Smart Tiers pool that includesSSD drives.You can change a Smart Tiers pool to use Real Time Smart Tier. However, you cannot changethe pool status of to disable in the following cases:

• Tier relocation is being executed manually.

• Pool-VOLs are being deleted.

• Zero pages are being reclaimed.

Before you begin• The Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

• Pool volumes whose drive type is SSD are installed.

Procedure1. Perform one of the following to display the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:• On the Resource tab, expand the Storage Systems tree. Right click THP Pools of the

target storage system, then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:• In the Storage Systems tree on the left pane of the main window, select Pools.

2. From the Pools table on right, click the row of the pool you want to change.3. Perform one of following to display the Edit Pools window.

1. Click More Actions and select Edit Pools.2. Click Actions > Pool > Edit Pools to open the window.

4. Check Real Time Smart Tier to ON.If there is no pool volume whose drive type is SSD, the check box cannot be selected.

5. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

6. In the Task Name text box, enter the task name.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols in all, except for \ / : , ; * ? " < > |. Thevalue "date-window name" is entered by default.

7. In the Confirm window, click Apply to register the setting in the task. If the Go to taskswindow for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

166 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 167: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Working with poolsAbout pools

Thin Provisioning requires the use of pools. A pool consists of more than one pool-VOL. Pagesin the pool are assigned to store user data and control information. Four pages on a THP V-VOLare required for the control information.A storage system supports up to 128 pools, each of which can contain up to 1024 pool-VOLsand 63,232 THP V-VOLs per pool. The pool for Thin Provisioning cannot be used in conjunctionwith other pools.The 128-pool maximum per storage system applies to the total number of Thin Provisioning poolsand Smart Tiers pools. The pool for Thin Provisioning or Smart Tiers cannot be used in conjunctionwith other pools.A pool number must be assigned to a pool. Multiple THP V-VOLs can be related to one pool.The total pool capacity combines the capacity of all the registered Thin Provisioning pool-VOLsassigned to the pool. Pool capacity is calculated using the following formulas:

• capacity of the pool (MB) = total number of pages * 42 - 42004200 in the formula is the management area size of the pool-VOL with System Area.

• total number of pages = Σ(floor(floor(pool-VOL number of blocks ÷ 512) ÷ 168))for each pool-VOL

where

• floor( ) means to truncate the part of the formula within the parentheses after the decimalpoint.

About pool-VOLsPool-VOLs are grouped together to create a pool. When a new pool is created, the availablepool-VOLs are selected in the Select Pool VOLs window and added to the Selected PoolVolumes table. Every pool must have a pool-VOL with System Area.When adding a volume to the pool for which Smart Pool is enabled, note the following:

• Up to three different drives types/RPM are allowed between all the pool-VOLs to be added.

• Volumes to be added to the same pool must have the same RAID level across all the samedrive type/RPM pool-VOLs.For example, you cannot add a volume whose drive type/RPM is SAS/15k and whose RAIDlevel is 5 (3D+1P) when a volume whose drive type/RPM is also SAS/15k but whose RAIDlevel is 5 (7D+1P) is already in the pool

• Up to three values are allowed for Drive Type/RPM for the volume.If you increase the pool capacity by adding a pool-VOL, a portion of the existing data in the poolautomatically migrates from an older pool-VOL to the newly added pool-VOL, balancing theusage levels of all the pool-VOLs. If you do not want to automate balancing of the usage levelsof pool-VOLs, call Hewlett Packard Enterprise technical support for assistance.Thin Provisioning does not automatically balance the usage levels among pool-VOLs if the cachememory is not redundant or if the pool usage reaches up to the threshold.The pool-VOLs contained in a pool can be added or deleted. Removing a pool-VOL does notdelete the pool or any related THP V-VOLs. You must delete all THP V-VOLs related to the poolbefore the pool can be deleted. When the pool is deleted, all data in the pool is also deleted.

Working with pools 167

Page 168: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Creating poolsThe following procedure tells how to create a pool. This procedure is for setting up ThinProvisioning, but optional steps are shown for setting up Smart Tiers if you chose to add tiers toyour storage system.Before you beginBefore creating a pool, you must install the proper amount of shared memory, and you musthave a V-VOL management area in shared memory. When shared memory is added, the V-VOLmanagement area is automatically created. To add shared memory, contact your Hewlett PackardEnterprise representative.One pool-VOL with system area is defined for a pool. The priority of the pool-VOL with systemarea is assigned according to the data drive type. The available capacity of the pool-VOL withsystem area is deducted from the management area capacity. The management area capacitystores the management information of program products that use the pool. If Thin Provisioning,Smart Tiers, or Fast Snap is used on an open system, 4.2 GB are used as the management areain the pool-VOL with system area.When the pool is created, a pool-VOL with system area is assigned the priority shown in thefollowing table.

Data drive typePriority

SAS7.2K1

SAS10K2

SAS15K3

SSD4

External volume5

If multiple pool-VOLs of the same data drive type exist, the priority of each is determined by theinternal index of the storage system.

Creating Thin Provisioning pools by selecting pool-VOLs manuallyYou can use Remote Web Console to create a Thin Provisioning pool with manually selectedpool-VOLs.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Create Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools and then select System GUI.3. In the Pools window, click Create Pools.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.3. Click Create Pools.

2. From thePool Type list, select Thin Provisioning.3. From the System Type list, select Open.

168 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 169: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

4. From the Smart Pool field, select Disable.You cannot select Enable if the storage system has only external volumes with the CacheMode set toDisable.

5. From the Pool Volume Selection field, select Manual.6. Follow the steps below to select pool-VOLs.

1. From the Drive Type/RPM list, select a data drive type and RPM.2. From the RAID Level list, select RAID level.

If you select External Storage from the Drive Type/RPM list, a hyphen (-) appears andyou cannot select the RAID level.

3. Click Select Pool VOLs.The Select Pool VOLs window appears.

4. In the Available Pool Volumes table, select the pool-VOL row to be associated with apool, then click Add.You can select a value other than Middle from External LDEV Tier Rank and clickAdd to set another tier rank for an external volume.The selected pool-VOL is registered in the Selected Pool Volumes table. Up to 1,024volumes can be added to a pool.If LDEVs in the parity group with capacity virtualization enabled are used as poolvolumes, these LDEVs can be assigned to only one pool. LDEVs in one parity groupwith capacity virtualization enabled cannot be assigned to multiple pools as pool volumes.We recommend that LDEVs of the two types do not coexist in a single pool. One typeof LDEV belongs to the capacity virtualization-enabled parity group and another typeof LDEV belongs to the capacity virtualization-disabled parity group.For details about adding LDEVs to parity groups with capacity virtualization enabled,see ???

TIP: Perform the following steps if necessary:• Click Filter to open the menu, specify the filtering conditions, and click Apply.

• Click Select All Pages to select all pool-VOLs in the table. To cancel the selection,click Select All Pages again.

• Click Options to specify the volumes or the number of rows to be displayed.

5. Click OK.The information in the Selected Pool Volumes table is applied to Total Selected PoolVolumes and Total Selected Capacity.

7. Enter the name in the Pool Name text box.8. Click Options.9. In the Initial Pool ID text box, type the number of the initial pool ID, from 0 to 127.

When you specify a pool ID that was previously registered, the smallest available ID isdisplayed by default instead of the value you entered. If a pool ID unavailable, no numberis displayed.

Working with pools 169

Page 170: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

10. In the Subscription Limit text box, enter an integer value from 0 to 65534 as the subscriptionrate (%) for the pool.If no number is entered, the subscription rate is set to unlimited.

CAUTION: If you are using the pool comprised of pool volumes assigned by capacityvirtualization-enabled parity groups, you can create a THP V-VOL with a capacity largerthan the pool capacity and writing is assured even if the subscription limit is defined to 100% or less. In this case, the free area of the pool must be monitored.This is not a requirement for monitoring the free area of the pool but if you want to specifythe pool subscription limit, specify a value lower than the value calculated by the followingformula:100 % * ( Pool physical capacity / Pool capacity )

11. In the Warning Threshold text box, enter an integer value from 1 to 100 as the rate (%) forthe pool. The default value is 70%.

12. In the Depletion Threshold text box, enter an integer value from 1 to 100 as the rate (%)for the pool. The default value is 80%.Enter a value that is equal to or greater than the value of the Warning Threshold.

13. In Protect V-VOLswhen I/O fails to Blocked Pool VOL, select Yes orNo. If Yes is selected,when the pool-VOL is blocked, THP V-VOL is protected from reading and writing requests.And at the same instant, the access attribute of the THP V-VOL is changed to the Protectattribute.

14. In Protect V-VOLs when I/O fails to Full Pool, select Yes or No. If Yes is selected, whenthe pool usage reaches the full size, THP V-VOL is protected from reading and writingrequests. And at the same instant, the access attribute of the THP V-VOL is changed to theProtect attribute.

15. Click Add.The created pool is added to the Selected Pools table. If invalid values are set, an errormessage appears.The Pool Type, Pool Volume Selection, and Pool Name must be set. If the required itemsare not entered or selected, you cannot click Add.If you select a row and click Detail, the Pool Properties window appears. If you select arow and click Remove, the message appears asking whether you want to remove theselected row or rows. If you want to remove the row, click OK.

16. Click Next.The Create LDEVs window appears. Go to “Creating V-VOLs” (page 181) to create LDEVs.If Subscription Limit of the created pool is set to 0%, the Create LDEVs window does notappear.

17. Click Finish and the Confirmation window appears.18. Check the settings in the Confirmation window, and then enter the task name in Task

Name.Select the pool radio button and then click Details. The Pool Properties window appears.

19. Click ApplyThe tasks are registered. If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, theTasks window appears.

Creating Thin Provisioning pools by selecting pool-VOLs automaticallyYou can use Remote Web Console to create a Thin Provisioning pool with automatically selectedpool-VOLs.

170 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 171: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Create Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools and then select System GUI.3. In the Pools window, click Create Pools.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.3. Click Create Pools.

2. In the Create Pool window, select Thin Provisioning from the Pool Type list.3. From the System Type list, select Open.4. From the Smart Pool field, select Disable.5. From the Pool Volume Selection field, select Auto.

NOTE: This field is not displayed with LDEVs in the parity group with capacity virtualizationenabled.

6. Follow the steps below to select pool-VOLs.1. From the Resource Group list, select the resource group name of the pool-VOL.2. From the Performance list, select the performance of the pool.3. In the Total Capacity list, specify the capacity of the pool

Values are displayed in Total Pool Volumes and Total Capacity. These values aregreater than the specified value of the pool capacity. If you change the pool configuration,perform steps d, e, and f.

4. Click Change Pool Configuration.The Change Pool Configuration Pattern window appears. You can change the poolconfiguration that is automatically selected.

5. From the Pool Configuration Patterns table, select the pool configuration row. Thenclick Select

Working with pools 171

Page 172: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

NOTE:• You can select the pool configuration on a parity group basis.

• The priority of the pool configuration is determined by these conditions:Priority 1: There is no free space in the parity group and one LDEV exists in thegroup.Priority 2: There is no free space in the parity group and multiple LDEVs exist inthe group.Priority 3: There is free space in the parity group and multiple LDEVs exist in thegroup.

• The following items are not displayed in the Pool Configuration Patterns table:Parity groups with LDEVs that cannot be used as pool-VOLs.Pool configuration patterns that contain more than 1,024 LDEVs.

6. Click OK.The information in the Pool Configuration Patterns table is applied to Total PoolVolumes and Total Capacity.

7. Enter the name in the Pool Name text box.8. Click Options.9. In the Initial Pool ID text box, type the number of the initial pool ID, from 0 to 127.

When you specify a pool ID that was previously registered, the smallest available ID isdisplayed by default instead of the value you entered. If a pool ID unavailable, no numberis displayed.

10. In the Subscription Limit text box, enter an integer value from 0 to 65534 as the subscriptionrate (%) for the pool.If no number is entered, the subscription rate is set to unlimited.

11. In the Warning Threshold text box, enter an integer value from 1 to 100 as the rate (%) forthe pool. The default value is 70%.

12. In the Depletion Threshold text box, enter an integer value from 1 to 100 as the rate (%)for the pool. The default value is 80%.Enter a value that is equal to or greater than the value of the Warning Threshold.

13. In Protect V-VOLswhen I/O fails to Blocked Pool VOL, select Yes orNo. If Yes is selected,when the pool-VOL is blocked, THP V-VOL is protected from reading and writing requests.At the same instant, the access attribute of the THP V-VOL is changed to the Protect attribute.

14. In Protect V-VOLs when I/O fails to Full Pool, select Yes or No. If Yes is selected, whenthe pool usage reaches the full size, THP V-VOL is protected from reading and writingrequests. At the same instant, the access attribute of the THP V-VOL is changed to theProtect attribute.

15. Click Add.The created pool is added to the Selected Pools table. If invalid values are set, an errormessage appears.If an item that must be set is not entered or selected, you cannot click Add.The Pool Type, Pool Volume Selection, and Pool Name must be set. If the required itemsare not entered or selected, you cannot click AddIf you select a row and click Detail, the Pool Properties window appears. If you select arow and click Remove, the message appears asking whether you want to remove theselected row or rows. If you want to remove the row, click OK.

172 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 173: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

16. Click Next.The Create LDEVs window appears. Go to “Creating V-VOLs” (page 181) to create LDEVs.If Subscription Limit of the created pool is set to 0%, the Create LDEVs window does notappear.Click Finish and the Confirmation window appears.

17. Check the settings in the Confirmation window, and then enter the task name in TaskName.Select the pool radio button and then click Details. The Pool Properties window appears.

18. Click ApplyThe tasks are registered. If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, theTasks window appears.

Creating Smart Tiers pools by selecting pool-VOLs manuallyYou can use this procedure to create pool-VOLs manually. These pools can be used by SmartTiers and by Real Time Smart Tier.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

NOTE: For creating the pool for Real Time Smart Tier, LDEVs whose drive type is SSD mustbe created in advance.

Procedure1. Open the Create Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools and then select System GUI.3. In the Pools window, click Create Pools.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.3. Click Create Pools.

2. In the Create Pool window, select Thin Provisioning from the Pool Type list.In the Create Pools window, select Thin Provisioning from the Pool Type list.

3. From the System Type list, select Open.4. From the Smart Pool field, select Enable.5. If the pool is to be used by Real Time Smart Tier, select the check box for Real Time Smart

Tier.

NOTE: To use Real Time Smart Tier, pool volumes whose drive type is SSD must beinstalled in advance. If there are no pool volumes whose drive type is SSD, this check boxcannot be selected.

6. From the Pool Volume Selection field, select Manual.7. Follow the steps below to select pool-VOLs:

1. In the Drive Type/RPM list, make sure Mixable is selected.2. In the RAID Level list, make sure Mixable is selected.

Working with pools 173

Page 174: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

3. Click Select Pool VOLs.The Select Pool VOLs window appears.

4. In the Available Pool Volumes table, select the pool-VOL row to be associated with apool, and then click Add.The selected pool-VOL is registered in the Selected Pool Volumes table. Up to 1,024volumes can be added to a pool.If LDEVs in the parity group with capacity virtualization enabled are used as pool-VOLs,these LDEVs can be assigned to one pool. LDEVs in one parity group with capacityvirtualization enabled cannot be assigned to multiple pools as pool-VOLs. We recommendthat LDEVs of the two types do not coexist in one pool. One type of LDEV belongs tothe capacity virtualization-enabled parity group and another type of LDEV belongs tothe capacity virtualization-disabled parity group.You can add volumes with the same Drive Type/RPM and different RAID Levels. Forexample, you can add a volume that has an SAS/15K Drive Type/RPM and a 5(3D+1P)RAID Level to the same pool with a volume that has an SAS/15K Drive Type/RPM anda 5(7D+1P) RAID Level.

NOTE: You can select a value other than Middle from External LDEV Tier Rankand click Add to set another tier rank for an external volume.

TIP: Perform the following steps if necessary:• Click Filter to open the menu, specify the filtering conditions, then Apply.

• Click Select All Pages to select all pool-VOLs in the table. To cancel the selection,click Select All Pages again.

• Click Options to specify the volumes or the number of rows to be displayed.

5. Click OK.The information in the Selected Pool Volumes table is applied to Total Selected PoolVolumes and Total Selected Capacity.

8. Enter the name in the Pool Name text box.9. Click Options.10. In the Initial Pool ID text box, type the number of the initial pool ID, from 0 to 127.

When you specify a pool ID that was previously registered, the smallest available ID isdisplayed by default instead of the value you entered. If a pool ID unavailable, no numberis displayed.

11. In the Subscription Limit text box, enter an integer value from 0 to 65534 as the subscriptionrate (%) for the pool.If no number is entered, the subscription rate is set to unlimited.

12. In the Warning Threshold text box, enter an integer value from 1 to 100 as the rate (%) forthe pool. The default value is 70%.

13. In the Depletion Threshold text box, enter an integer value from 1 to 100 as the rate (%)for the pool. The default value is 80%.Enter a value that is equal to or greater than the value of the Warning Threshold.

14. In Protect V-VOLswhen I/O fails to Blocked Pool VOL, select Yes orNo. If Yes is selected,when the pool-VOL is blocked, THP V-VOL is protected from reading and writing requests.And at the same instant, the access attribute of the THP V-VOL is changed to the Protectattribute.

174 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 175: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

15. In Protect V-VOLs when I/O fails to Full Pool, select Yes or No. If Yes is selected, whenthe pool usage reaches the full size, THP V-VOL is protected from reading and writingrequests. And at the same instant, the access attribute of the THP V-VOL is changed to theProtect attribute.

16. Configure Smart Tiers with the following steps.From the Tier Management option, select Auto or Manual.1. The selection is usually Auto which allows performance monitoring and tier relocation

to be performed automatically.If you select Manual, use the RAID Manager or Remote Web Console to manuallyperform performance monitoring and tier relocation.

2. From the Cycle Time option, select the cycle for performance monitoring and tierrelocation.When you select 24 Hours (default value):Performance monitoring and tier relocation is performed once a day.In the Monitoring Period field, set the time to start and end performance monitoring.The default value is 00:00 to 23:59.Set one or more hours between the starting and ending times. If you specify a startingtime that is later than the ending time, the performance monitoring continues until theending time on the next day.You can view the information gathered by performance monitoring with Remote WebConsole or the RAID Manager.When you select 0.5 Hours, 1 Hour, 2 Hours, 4 Hours, 8 Hours:Performance monitoring is performed every hour that is selected, starting at 00:00.You cannot set a specific time to start performance monitoring.

CAUTION: When Auto is set, all the V-VOL pages may not be completely migrated inone cycle. In the next cycle, migration starts by updating information for the last processedV-VOL. At that point, the collection of performance monitoring information is switched to thecurrent cycle.

17. From the Monitoring Mode option, select Period Mode or Continuous Mode.If you perform tier relocation in a specified cycle, Period Mode is selected by default. If youperform tier relocation weighted to the monitoring result of the past period, selectContinuousMode

18. From theRelocation Speed option, select the page relocation speed to use when performingrelocation.You can set the speed to: 1(Slowest), 2(Slower), 3(Standard), 4(Faster), and 5(Fastest).The default is 3(Standard). If you want to perform tier relocation at high speed, use the5(Fastest) setting. If the speed specified is slower than 3(Standard), the data drive load islow when tier relocation is performed.

19. In the Buffer Space for New page assignment text box, enter an integer value from 0 to50 as the percentage (%) for each tier.A default value depends on the data drive type of the pool-VOL in each tier. The defaultvalue of SSD is 0%. The default value of a type other than SSD is 8%.

20. In the Buffer Space for Tier relocation text box, enter an integer value from2 to 40 as thepercentage (%) to set for each tier.The default value is 2%.

Working with pools 175

Page 176: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

21. Click Add.The created pool is added to the Selected Pools table. If invalid values are set, an errormessage appears. If Detail is clicked when you select a row, the Pool Property windowappearsThe Pool Type, Smart Pool,Pool Volume Selection, and Pool Name must be set. If therequired items are not registered, you cannot click Add.If you select a row and click Detail, the Pool Properties window appears. If you select arow and click Remove, the message appears asking whether you want to remove theselected row or rows. If you want to remove the row, click OK.

22. Click Next.The Create LDEVs window appears. Go to “Creating V-VOLs” (page 181) to create LDEVs.If Subscription Limit of the created pool is set to 0%, the Create LDEVs window does notappear.Click Finish and the Confirmation window appears.

23. Check the settings in the Confirmation window, and then enter the task name in TaskName.Select the pool radio button and then click Details. The Pool Properties window appears.

24. Click ApplyThe tasks are registered. If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, theTasks window appears.

Creating Smart Tiers pools by automatically selecting pool-VOLsYou can use this procedure to create pool-VOLs automatically. These pools can be used bySmart Tiers and by Real Time Smart Tier.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

NOTE: For creating the pool for Real Time Smart Tier, LDEVs whose drive type is SSD mustbe created in advance.

Procedure1. Open the Create Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools and then select System GUI.3. In the Pools window, click Create Pools.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.3. Click Create Pools.

2. From the Pool Type list, select Thin Provisioning.3. From the System Type list, select Open.4. From the Smart Pool field, select Enable.5. If the pool is to be used by Real Time Smart Tier, select the check box for Real Time Smart

Tier.

176 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 177: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

NOTE: To use Real Time Smart Tier, pool volumes whose drive type is SSD must beinstalled in advance. If there are no pool volumes whose drive type is SSD, this check boxcannot be selected.

6. From the Pool Volume Selection field, select Auto.

NOTE: This field is not displayed with LDEVs in the parity group with capacity virtualizationenabled.

7. Follow the steps below to select pool-VOLs:1. From the Resource Group list, select the resource group name of the pool.2. From the Performance list, select the performance of the pool.3. In the Total Capacity list, specify the capacity of the pool.

Values are displayed in Total Pool Volumes and Total Capacity. These values aregreater than the specified value of the pool capacity. If you change the pool configuration,perform steps d, e, and f.

4. Click Change Pool Configuration.The Change Pool Configuration Pattern window appears. You can change the poolconfiguration that is automatically selected.

5. From the Pool Configuration Patterns table, select the pool configuration row. Thenclick Select.

NOTE:• You can select the pool configuration on a parity group basis.

• The priority of the pool configuration is determined by these conditions:Priority 1: There is no free space in the parity group and one LDEV exists in thegroup.Priority 2: There is no free space in the parity group and multiple LDEVs exist inthe group.Priority 3: There is free space in the parity group and multiple LDEVs exist in thegroup.

• If the check box for Real Time Smart Tier is selected, only the pool configurationsthat contain LDEVs created by SSD are displayed.

• The following items are not displayed in the Pool Configuration Patterns table:Parity groups with LDEVs that cannot be used as pool-VOLs.Pool configuration patterns that contain more than 1,024 LDEVs.

6. Click OK.The information in the Pool Configuration Patterns table is applied to Total PoolVolumes and Total Capacity.

8. Enter the name in the Pool Name text box.9. Click Options.10. In the Initial Pool ID text box, type the number of the initial pool ID, from 0 to 127.

When you specify a pool ID that was previously registered, the smallest available ID isdisplayed by default instead of the value you entered. If a pool ID unavailable, no numberis displayed.

Working with pools 177

Page 178: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

11. In the Subscription Limit text box, enter an integer value from 0 to 65534 as the subscriptionrate (%) for the pool.If no number is entered, the subscription rate is set to unlimited.

12. In the Warning Threshold text box, enter an integer value from 1 to 100 as the rate (%) forthe pool. The default value is 70%.

13. In the Depletion Threshold text box, enter an integer value from 1 to 100 as the rate (%)for the pool. The default value is 80%.Enter a value that is equal to or greater than the value of the Warning Threshold.

14. In Protect V-VOLswhen I/O fails to Blocked Pool VOL, select Yes orNo. If Yes is selected,when the pool-VOL is blocked, THP V-VOL is protected from reading and writing requests.And at the same instant, the access attribute of the THP V-VOLis changed to the Protectattribute.

15. In Protect V-VOLs when I/O fails to Full Pool, select Yes or No. If Yes is selected, whenthe pool usage reaches the full size, THP V-VOL is protected from reading and writingrequests. And at the same instant, the access attribute of the THP V-VOL is changed to theProtect attribute.

16. Configure Smart Tiers with the following steps.From the Tier Management option, select Auto or Manual.1. The selection is usually Auto which allows performance monitoring and tier relocation

to be performed automatically.If you select Manual, use the RAID Manager or Remote Web Console to manuallyperform performance monitoring and tier relocation.

2. From the Cycle Time option, select the cycle for performance monitoring and tierrelocation.When you select 24 Hours (default value):Performance monitoring and tier relocation is performed once a day.In the Monitoring Period field, set the time to start and end performance monitoring.The default value is 00:00 to 23:59.Set one or more hours between the starting and ending times. If you specify a startingtime that is later than the ending time, the performance monitoring continues until theending time on the next day.You can view the information gathered by performance monitoring with Remote WebConsole or the RAID Manager.When you select 0.5 Hours, 1 Hour, 2 Hours, 4 Hours, 8 Hours:Performance monitoring is performed every hour that is selected, starting at 00:00.You cannot set a specific time to start performance monitoring.

CAUTION: When Auto is set, all the V-VOL pages may not be completely migrated inone cycle. In the next cycle, migration starts by updating information for the last processedV-VOL. At that point, the collection of performance monitoring information is switched to thecurrent cycle.

17. From the Monitoring Mode option, select Period Mode or Continuous Mode.If you perform tier relocation in a specified cycle or you do not need to specify theMonitoringMode option, select Period Mode. If you perform tier relocation weighted to the monitoringresult of the past period, select Continuous Mode

178 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 179: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

18. From theRelocation Speed option, select the page relocation speed to use when performingrelocation.You can set the speed to: 1(Slowest), 2(Slower), 3(Standard), 4(Faster), and 5(Fastest).The default is 3(Standard). If you want to perform tier relocation at high speed, use the5(Fastest) setting. If the speed specified is slower than 3(Standard), the data drive load islow when tier relocation is performed.

19. In the Buffer Space for New page assignment text box, enter an integer value from 0 to50 as the percentage (%) for each tier.A default value depends on the data drive type of the pool-VOL in each tier. The defaultvalue of SSD is 0%. The default value of a type other than SSD is 8%.

20. In the Buffer Space for Tier relocation text box, enter an integer value from2 to 40 as thepercentage (%) to set for each tier.The default value is 2%.

21. Click Add.The created pool is added to the Selected Pools table. If invalid values are set, an errormessage appears. If Detail is clicked when you select a row, the Pool Property windowappears.The Pool Type, Smart Pool,Pool Volume Selection, and Pool Name must be set. If therequired items are not registered, you cannot click Add.If you select a row and click Detail, the Pool Properties window appears. If you select arow and click Remove, the message appears asking whether you want to remove theselected row or rows. If you want to remove the row, click OK.

22. Click Next.The Create LDEVs window appears. Go to “Creating V-VOLs” (page 181) to create LDEVs.If Subscription Limit of the created pool is set to 0%, the Create LDEVs window does notappear.Click Finish and the Confirmation window appears.

23. Check the settings in the Confirmation window, and then enter the task name in TaskName.Select the pool radio button and then click Details. The Pool Properties window appears.

24. Click ApplyThe tasks are registered. If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, theTasks window appears.

Working with THP V-VOLsAbout THP V-VOLs

Thin Provisioning requires the use of THP V-VOLs, which are virtual volumes with no physicalmemory space. In Thin Provisioning, multiple THP V-VOLs can be created.A THP V-VOL is a volume in a thin provisioning storage system. It is the virtual volume from aTHP pool. Data in the THP pool is used via a THP V-VOL. A THP V-VOL is a virtual LU to somehosts.On open systems, OPEN-V is the only supported emulation type on a THP V-VOL. You candefine multiple THP V-VOLs and assign them to a Thin Provisioning pool.

Working with THP V-VOLs 179

Page 180: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Relationship between a pool and THP V-VOLsBefore you can use Thin Provisioning, a THP V-VOL and a pool are required. Thin Provisioninguses the pool volumes in a pool through the THP V-VOLs.The following figure shows the relationship between a pool and THP V-VOLs.

Protecting THP V-VOLsWhen problems occur in the pool or pool volumes, you can use the protecting function of THPV-VOL to protect the THP V-VOL using the pool from read and write requests, and change theaccess attribute of the THP V-VOL to the Protect attribute.For example, of a pool comprised ofpool volumes assigned by parity groups with capacity virtualization enabled, when the capacityreserved for writing data is depleted, the access attribute of the THP V-VOL changes to theProtect attribute. The function to protect from reading and writing of THP V-VOL when the poolusage reaches the full size is displayed in the window as Protect V-VOLs when I/O fails toBlocked Pool VOL. The function to protect from reading and writing of THP V-VOL when thepool-VOL is blocked is the window as Protect V-VOLs when I/O fails to Blocked Pool VOL.For details about setting items, see “Create Pools window” (page 433).To use the protecting function of THP V-VOL, the following must be satisfied:

• Data Retention must be installed.

• Pool types must be Thin Provisioning or Smart Tiers.When the access attribute of V-VOL was changed to Protect, if you change the access attributeother than Protect, see “Configuring access attributes” (page 224). The setting by the THP V-VOLprotection function has no connection to the access attribute status of THP V-VOL. For example,even if you disabled the THP V-VOL protection function to the pool while the Protect attributewas being enabled on THP V-VOL, the Protect attribute would still be enabled on THP V-VOL.

180 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 181: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

If you uninstall the Data Retention, the V-VOL protection function setting remains set in the pool.In this case, if the Data Retention is installed again, settings made before the Data Retentionwas uninstalled would be reactivated in the pool.

CAUTION: If you use the protecting function of THP V-VOL, you cannot simultaneously usethe following host mode options. You cannot use the protecting function of THP V-VOL for V-VOLsassociated with the host group for which one or both of following host mode options are enabled.Host mode option 63Host mode option 73

Creating V-VOLsYou can create a THP V-VOL from any of the following tabs:

• The LDEVs tab, which appears when Logical Devices is selected.

• The Pools tab, which appears when Pools is selected.

• The Virtual Volumes tab, which appears when a pool in Pools is selected.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Click Create LDEVs.

The Create LDEVs window appears.2. From the Provisioning Type list, confirm Thin Provisioning is selected.

If not, select Thin Provisioning from the list.3. In the System Type option, select a system type.

To create open system volumes, select Open.4. From the Emulation Type list, confirm OPEN-V is selected.5. From the Smart Pool field, select Enable when you create the V-VOL for Smart Tiers, and

select Disable when you do not create one.If no pool is set to Enable in Smart Tiers, Disable is fixed.

NOTE: You cannot specify the TSE Attribute option when selecting Open in the SystemType option.

6. If the pool is to be used by Real Time Smart Tier, select the check box for Real Time SmartTier.

NOTE: To use Real Time Smart Tier, pool volumes whose drive type is SSD must beinstalled in advance. If there are no pool volumes whose drive type is SSD, this check boxcannot be selected.

7. Select the pool according to the following steps.1. From the Drive Type/RPM list in Pool Selection, select the data drive type and RPM.2. From the RAID level list, select the RAID level.3. Click Select Pool.

The Select Pool window appears.4. In the Available Pools table, select a pool.

Working with THP V-VOLs 181

Page 182: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

NOTE: You can specify a pool when creating THP V-VOLs if the pool has a statusof one of the following:• Normal status

• Exceeded Threshold status

• In progress of pool capacity shrinkingYou can select only one pool. When Enable is selected in step 6, the Smart Tiers-poolsappear, and when Disable is selected, only the non-Smart Tiers-pools appear.Perform the following if necessary:

• Click Filter to open the menu, specify the filtering, and then Apply.

• Click Options to specify the units of pools or the number of rows to be displayed.

5. Click OK.The Select Pool window closes. The selected pool name appears in Selected PoolName (ID), and the total capacity of the selected pool appears in Selected PoolCapacity.

8. If you want to offset the specified LDEV capacity by boundary, change the default Offsetboundary from OFF to ON.If block is specified as the unit of the LDEV capacity, this option is disabled.

9. In the LDEV Capacity text box, enter the THP V-VOL capacity to be created.You can enter the capacity within the range of figures displayed below the text box. You canenter the number with 2 digits after decimal point. You can change the capacity unit fromthe list.

10. In the Number of LDEVs text box, enter the number of LDEVs to be created.You can enter the number of LDEVs within a range of the figures displayed below the textbox.

11. In the LDEV Name text box, enter the THP V-VOL name.In the Prefix text box, enter the alphanumeric characters, which are fixed characters of thehead of the THP V-VOL name. The characters are case-sensitive.In the Initial Number text box, type the initial number following the prefix name, which canbe up to 9 digits.You can enter up to the 32 characters including the initial number.

12. Click Option.13. In the Initial LDEV ID field, make sure that LDEV ID is set.

To confirm the used number and unavailable number, click View LDEV IDs to display theView LDEV IDs window.In the table, used LDEV numbers appear in blue, unavailable numbers appear in gray, andunused numbers appear in white. LDEV numbers that are unavailable may be already inuse, or already assigned to another emulation group (group by 32 LDEV numbers).

14. In the Initial SSID text box, type the 4-digit SSID of a hexadecimal number (0004 to FFFE).To confirm the created SSID, click View SSID to display the View SSID windows.

15. From the Cache Partition list, select CLPR.16. From the MP Blade list, select a MP blade.

Select a MP blade to be used by the LDEVs. If you assign a specific MP blade, select theID of the MP blade. If you can assign any MP blade, click Auto.

182 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 183: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

17. From the Full Allocation field, select Enable or Disable. To reserve pages in the pool thatare the same size as the LDEV capacity, select Enable.

18. From the Tiering Policy field, select the tiering policy to be used by the LDEVs. If you assigna specific tiering policy, select any policy. All(0) is selected by default. You can change alevel from Level1(1) to Level5(5) or from Level6(6) to Level31(31). You can specify thefunction when the Smart Pool is enabled.

19. From the New Page Assignment Tier list, select a new page assignment tier. You canselect from levels High, Middle, and Low.You can specify the function when the Smart Pool is enabled.

20. In the Relocation Priority option, select a priority.To relocate the LDEV preferentially, set Prioritize. You can select Default or Prioritize.You can specify this function when the Smart Pool is enabled.

21. In T10 PI, select Enable or Disable.

CAUTION: The T10 PI attribute can be defined only during the initial creation of LDEVs.The defined attribute cannot be removed from LDEVs on which the T10 PI mode is alreadyset.

The T10 PI attribute can be specified when the emulation type is OPEN-V.22. If necessary, change the settings of the V-VOLs.

You can change the following settings:

• Editing SSIDClick Edit SSIDs to open the Edit SSIDs window.

• Changing the LDEV settingsClick Change LDEV Settings to open the Change LDEV Settings window.

23. If necessary, delete a row from the Selected LDEVs table.Select a row to be deleted, then click Remove.

24. Click Add.The created V-VOLs are added to the right Selected LDEVs table. If invalid values are set,an error message appears.The Provisioning Type, System Type, Emulation Type, Pool Selection,Drive Type/RPM,RAID Level, LDEV Capacity, and Number of LDEVs field must be set. If these requireditems are not registered, you cannot click Add.

25. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.To continue the operation for setting the LU path and define LUN, click Next.

26. In the Task Name in the text box, enter the task name.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols in all, except for \ / : , ; * ? " < > |."yymmdd-window name" is entered as a default.

27. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Editing the SSID of a THP V-VOLBefore registering a THP V-VOL, you might need to use this procedure to edit the SSID of theTHP V-VOL. The SSID is a hexadecimal value.

Working with THP V-VOLs 183

Page 184: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Create LDEVs window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. On the Pools tab, click Create LDEVs.3. In the Selected LDEVs table of the Create LDEVs window, click Edit SSIDs.

The Edit SSIDs window opens. The SSIDs table shows the SSID existing and to be added.4. If you want to change the SSID, select the appropriate LDEV, and then click Change SSIDs.5. In the Change SSIDs window, type the new SSID in hexadecimal format, and then click

OK.6. In the Edit SSIDs window, click OK.7. Click Finish.

The Confirm window appears.8. In the Task Name text box, enter the task name.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols in all, except for \ / : , ; * ? " < > |. Thevalue "date-window name" is entered by default.

9. In the Confirm window, click Apply to register the setting in the task.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Changing THP V-VOL settingsBefore registering a THP V-VOL, you may need to change the THP V-VOL settings.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. On the Pools tab, click Create LDEVs.3. In the Selected LDEVs table of the Create LDEVs window, select an LDEV, and then click

Change LDEV Settings.

184 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 185: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

4. In the Change LDEV Settings window, you can change the setting of LDEV Name, InitialLDEV ID, MP Blade, or T10 PI.• If you change LDEV Name, specify the prefix characters and the initial number for this

LDEV.• If you change Initial LDEV ID, specify the number of LDKC, CU, DEV, and Interval. To

check used LDEVs, click View LDEV IDs to confirm the used LDEVs.• If you change MP Blade, click the list and specify the MP blade ID. If the specific MP

blade is specified, select the MP blade ID. If any MP blade is specified, click Auto.• If you change T10 PI, select Enable or Disable.

The T10 PI attribute can be changed if the emulation type is OPEN-V.

5. Change the settings, then click OK.6. In the Create LDEVs window, click Finish.7. In the Confirm window, click Apply.

If Go to tasks window for status is checked, the Tasks window opens.

Removing the THP V-VOL to be registeredIf you do not want to register the THP V-VOL, you can remove it from the registering task.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Create LDEVs window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. On the Pools tab, click Create LDEVs.3. In the Selected LDEVs table of the Create LDEVs window, select the LDEV, then click

Remove.The message appears asking whether you want to remove the selected row or rows. If youwant to remove the row. Click OK.

4. Click Finish.5. In the Confirm window, click Apply.

The LDEV is removed.If Go to tasks window for status is checked, the Tasks window opens.

Formatting LDEVs in a Windows environmentIn a Windows environment, both Normal Format or Quick Format are commonly used. In thisenvironment, Quick Format consumes less thin provisioning pool capacities than Normal Format.On Windows Server 2008, using Normal Format issues Write commands to the overall volume(for example, overall "D" drive). When Write commands are issued, pages corresponding to theoverall volume are allocated, therefore, pool capacities corresponding to the ones of the overall

Working with THP V-VOLs 185

Page 186: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

volume are consumed. In this case, the thin provisioning advantage of reducing capacities islost.Quick Format issues Write commands only to management information (for example, indexinformation). Therefore, pages corresponding to the management information areas are allocated,but the capacities are smaller than the ones consumed by Normal Format.

Monitoring capacity and performanceMonitoring pool capacity

The storage system monitors the pool's free capacity in accordance with threshold values definedwhen you create pools. If the pool capacity reaches the threshold values, warnings are issuedas SIMs and as SNMP traps to the open-systems host.You can provision a larger virtual capacity beyond the pool capacity by using THP V-VOLs ofThin Provisioning or Smart Tiers. However, when the pool's free capacity is depleted, you canlose access to THP V-VOLs that require more pool capacity. For example, if the pool usage rateis 100% due to increased write operations, then I/O is not accepted and I/O will be stopped fora THP V-VOL that failed to receive needed pool capacity. Therefore, you should carefully monitorthe pool usage or pool free capacity, as well as the level of provisioned virtual capacity.

Protecting data during pool shortagesTo protect data from reading and writing to the THP V-VOL when the pool is full, you can applyaccess attributes to a volume. To do this, you need to enable the use of the Data Retention, byinsuring the license is installed and using system option mode 729. This protection method appliesa Protect attribute to the THP V-VOL to protect volumes against write operations when the poolis full. See “Assigning an access attribute to a volume” (page 226) for more details.The Protect attribute is applied to the THP V-VOL and is used in conjunction with other HewlettPackard Enterprise software products. When the Protect attribute is applied to the THP V-VOL,Permitted appears in the S-VOL field and 0 day appears in the Validation field of the DataRetention window. However, when the Protect attribute is added to the THP V-VOL with theS-VOL unacceptable attribute available in Data Retention, Not Permitted appears in the S-VOLfield in the Data Retention window.

Monitoring performanceYou can monitor system performance using Performance Monitor. For more information, see theXP7 Performance for Open and Mainframe Systems User Guide.You can monitor information on pools and THP V-VOLs using RAID Manager. For moreinformation, see the XP7 RAID Manager User Guide.The following activities help you to monitor and control performance of the THP V-VOL. Collectingmonitor information and subsequent tuning may increase throughput and the operating rates.

• Collecting monitor information.Collecting the following monitor information helps you determine the pool load (including theaccess frequency, and the access load upon data drives) and THP V-VOL load (includingthe access frequency). You can then use this monitor information to tune the appropriateallocation.

◦ Access frequency of THP V-VOL, read hit rates, and write hit rates (using PerformanceMonitor)

◦ Usage rates of parity groups of pools (using Performance Monitor)

◦ Pool usage (using Remote Web Console)

186 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 187: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

◦ THP V-VOL usage (using Remote Web Console)

◦ Smart Tiers performance monitoring of pool storage

• Possible tuning actions (without Smart Tiers).The following techniques using Business Copy or XP7 Tiered Storage Manager XP7 SmartManager for Mainframe will move a THP V-VOL.

◦ The THP V-VOL is copied using Business Copy from a pool with an I/O bottleneck. Formore information, see the XP7 Business Copy User Guide.

◦ Business Copy copies a THP V-VOL with a high I/O load to a pool with a lower accesslevel to adjust the pool load.

Managing I/O usage rates exampleThe following figure illustrates an example of managing I/O usage rates.

Tuning with Smart TiersIf Smart Tiers is active on your storage system, you can monitor access frequency andperformance use, and while Smart Tiers automatically relocates data to the most suitable datadrive (tier). You can configure monitoring to be automatic or manual. In both cases, relocationof the data is automatically determined based on monitoring.For details, see “Smart Tiers and Real Time Smart Tier” (page 109)

Monitoring capacity and performance 187

Page 188: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

ThresholdsPool utilization thresholds

Thin Provisioning monitors pool capacity using thresholds. A threshold is the proportion (%) ofthe used capacity of the pool to the total capacity of the pool or the used capacity of the paritygroup that is related to the used capacity of the pool. Each pool has its own pool threshold values.

• Warning Threshold: Set the value between 1% and 100%, in 1% increments. The default is70%.

• Depletion Threshold: Set the value between 1% and 100%, in 1% increments. The defaultis 80%. The depletion threshold must be higher than the Warning threshold

If either threshold is exceeded by the used capacity of the pool, a warning is issued in the formof SIMs (Service Information Messages) to Remote Web Console and SNMP (Simple NetworkManagement Protocol) traps to the open-systems host. For more information on SNMP trapsand the SNMP Manager, see the XP7 SNMP Agent User Guide. See “Working with SIMs”(page 191) for more information about SIMs.The following figure illustrates a total pool capacity of 1,000 GB, Warning Threshold of 50%, andDepletion Threshold of 80%. If the used capacity of the pool is larger than 50% (500 GB) of thetotal pool capacity, a SIM and an SNMP trap are reported. If the used capacity of the poolincreases and exceeds the Depletion Threshold (80%), a SIM and an SNMP trap are reportedagain.

Note that in this scenario, if the actual pool usage percentage is 50.1%, only 50% appears onthe Remote Web Console window because the capacity amount is truncated after the decimalpoint. If the threshold is set to 50%, a SIM and an SNMP trap are reported even though the poolusage percentage appearing on the screen does not indicate an exceeded threshold.

Pool subscription limitThe value of using subscription limit is to manage the maximum amount of over-provisioning thatis acceptable for a pool. By managing the pool subscription limit, you can control the potentialdemand for storing data that might exceed the pool capacity.

NOTE: For pools comprised of pool volumes from capacity virtualization-enabled, the poolsubscription limit is related to the pool usage. However, the pool subscription limit is not relatedto the parity group capacity. The free area of the pool must be monitored even if the subscriptionlimit is defined to 100%. If you do not want to monitor the free area of the pool, specify thesubscription limit conforming to the following formula:.Pool capacity / Pool capacity which is reserved for data writing * Subscription limit = 100% .For example, if 100 TB of the pool capacity and 80 TB of the pool capacity reserved for datawriting exist, specify 80% as the subscription limit

The subscription limit is the ratio (%) of the total THP V-VOL capacity that has been configuredto the total capacity of the pool. When the subscription limit is set, you cannot configure anotherTHP V-VOL if the new THP V-VOL capacity would cause the subscription limit to be exceeded.

188 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 189: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

The subscription limit includes pages required to store user data and control information. Thetotal capacity of THP V-VOLs that are created from the pool is smaller than the subscription limitcapacity. The formula used to calculate the required pages for one THP V-VOL includes thecontrol information. To determine the total pages required in a pool, multiply the number ofcalculated pages by the number of THP V-VOLs. The value enclosed in ceil( ) must be roundedup to the nearest whole number. The number of pages for the THP V-VOL including the controlinformation equals:Number of pages for the

THP V-VOL including the control information = ceil((OneTHP V-VOL capacity (MB) + ceil(OneTHP V-VOL capacity (MB) / 3,145,548 (MB)) * 4 (Pages) * 42 (MB)) / 42

(MB))

For example, if the pool capacity is 100 GB and the subscription limit is 150%, you can configureup to a total of 150 GB of capacity to the THP V-VOLs related to the pool.The following figure depicts setting the subscription limit of pool capacity.

Monitoring total THP V-VOL subscription for a poolYou can configure the Subscription Limit of total THP V-VOL capacity to pool capacity. Thisprevents a new THP V-VOL capacity that exceeds the configured subscription limit from beingallocated and is associated with the pool. If you specify more than 100% as the SubscriptionLimit or the subscription limit is not set, you must monitor the free capacity of the pool becauseit is possible that writes to the THP V-VOLs may exceed pool capacity. For details about theSubscription Limit, see “Create Pools window” (page 433).The used value displayed on the cell for Current in the Subscription (%) is truncated after thedecimal point of the calculated value. Therefore, the actual percentage of THP V-VOL assignedto the pool may be larger than the value displayed on the window. If you create a new THP V-VOLof the same size as the existing THP V-VOL, the larger size of capacity which is displayed onthe Current cell is necessary.For example, if 3 GB V-VOL is related to an 11.89 GB pool, the capacity (%) is calculated asfollows:(( ceil(3,072 (MB) / 3,145,548 (MB)) * 4 (Pages) * 42 (MB)) +3,072 (MB)) / 12,175.36 (MB)) * 100 = 26.61....(%)

In this case, 26 (%) is displayed on the cell for Current in the Subscription (%). If you create anew V-VOL of the same size as the existing V-VOL, 27 (%) or more remaining capacity isnecessary.

Changing pool thresholdsUse this procedure to change the threshold of a pool.

Thresholds 189

Page 190: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Edit Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. From the Pools table, select the pool with the threshold you want to change.3. Click More Actions, and then select Edit Pools.4. In the Edit Pools window, check Warning Threshold or Depletion Threshold.5. Type the threshold values in the text box.

The threshold value can be within the range of values indicated below the text box. TheDepletion Threshold value can be equal to or greater than the Warning Threshold.

6. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

7. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

8. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Changing the pool subscription limitUse this procedure to change the pool subscription limit.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Edit Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. From the Pools table, select the pool with the threshold you want to change.3. Click More Actions, and then select Edit Pools.

190 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 191: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

4. In the Edit Pools window, check Subscription Limit, then type the subscription limitpercentage.If the subscription limit is blank, then it is disabled, and any number of THP V-VOLs can becreated regardless of the pool free capacity.

5. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

CAUTION: If you are using the pool comprised of pool volumes assigned by capacityvirtualization-enabled parity groups, you can create a THP V-VOL with a capacity largerthan the pool capacity and writing is assured even if the subscription limit is defined to 100% or less. In this case, the free area of the pool must be monitored.This is not a requirement for monitoring the free area of the pool but if you want to specifythe pool subscription limit, specify a value lower than the value calculated by the followingformula:100 % * ( Pool physical capacity / Pool capacity )

6. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

7. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Working with SIMsAbout SIMs

Thin Provisioning and Smart Tiers provide Service Information Messages (SIMs) to report thestatus of the THP V-VOLs and pools. The SIM level is Moderate. If an event associated with apool occurs, a SIM and an SNMP trap are reported.An example of a SIM condition is if the actual pool usage rate is 50.2%, but only 50% is displayedbecause the capacity amount is truncated after the decimal point. If the threshold is set to 50%,a SIM and an SNMP trap are reported, even though the pool usage rate displayed on the GUIdoes not indicate the threshold is exceeded.

SIM reference codesThe following table provides information about SIM reference codes associated with ThinProvisioning or Smart Tiers.

Types of reportsThresholds orValues

EventSIM Code(XXX =hexadecimalpool numberand SIM level)

Does it needoperations bythe operator?

Does it needcompletionoperations fromRemote WebConsole ?

Is thereportnotified tothe host?

NoYesYes1% to 100% (in 1%increments).

Thin Provisioning poolusage level (Used

620xxx(Moderate)

Default: 70%(1%))exceeded theWarning Threshold

NoYesYes100%Thin ProvisioningPool is full

622xxx(Moderate)

Working with SIMs 191

Page 192: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Types of reportsThresholds orValues

EventSIM Code(XXX =hexadecimalpool numberand SIM level)

Does it needoperations bythe operator?

Does it needcompletionoperations fromRemote WebConsole ?

Is thereportnotified tothe host?

YesNoYesNot applicableError occurred in thinProvisioning pool

623xxx(Moderate)

YesYesYesNot applicableNo space in theshared memory

624000(Moderate)

NoYesYesHighest poolthreshold of ThinProvisioning

Thin ProvisioningPool usage level(Used (1%))continues

625000(Moderate)

to exceed the highestpool threshold. SOM734 must be enabled.

NoYesYes1% to 100% (in 1%increments).

Thin ProvisioningPool usage level

626XXX(Moderate)

Default: 80%(Used (1%))exceeded theDepletion Threshold

YesNoYesNot applicablePool-VOL is blocked627XXX(Moderate)

YesYesYesNot applicableProtect attribute ofData Retention is set

628000(Service)

NoYesYes1 % to 100 % (in 1%increments). Default:70 %

The Thin Provisioningpool usage levelexceeded the

629 xxx(Moderate)

Warning Threshold.This SIM is reportedif the ThinProvisioning poolcontains one or moreLDEVs in the paritygroup with thecapacity virtualizationis enabled.

NoYesYes100%Thin Provisioning poolis full. This SIM is

62Axxx(Moderate)

reported if the ThinProvisioning poolcontains one or moreLDEVs in the paritygroup with thecapacity virtualizationis enabled.

NoYesYesHighest poolthreshold of ThinProvisioning

Thin Provisioning poolusage level continuesto exceed the highest

62B000(Moderate)

pool threshold. SOM734 must be enabled.This SIM is reportedif the ThinProvisioning poolcontains one or moreLDEVs in the paritygroup on which thewith the capacityvirtualization isenabled.

192 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 193: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Types of reportsThresholds orValues

EventSIM Code(XXX =hexadecimalpool numberand SIM level)

Does it needoperations bythe operator?

Does it needcompletionoperations fromRemote WebConsole ?

Is thereportnotified tothe host?

NoYesYes1% to 100% (in 1%increments). Default:80 %

Thin Provisioning poolusage level exceededthe Depletion

62Cxxx(Moderate)

Threshold. This SIMis reported if the ThinProvisioning poolcontains one or moreLDEVs in the paritygroup with thecapacity virtualizationis enabled.

NoYesYes90%Thin Provisioning poolusage level exceeded

62Dxxx(Moderate)

the Prefixed DepletionThreshold. This SIMis reported if the ThinProvisioning poolcontains one or moreLDEVs in the paritygroup with thecapacity virtualizationis enabled.

Automatic completion of a SIMSome SIMs are completed automatically when you resolve the problem that caused the SIM.SOM 734 must be enabled for automatic completion of a SIM. Automatic completion of a SIMremoves it from the system with no additional manual intervention. After the SIM is automaticallycompleted, the status of the SIM changes to completed.The following SIMs are automatically completed when you resolve the problem causing the SIM.

• SIMs 620xxx, 625000, 626xxx, 629xxx, 62B000, and 62Dxxx are automatically completedif you increase pool capacity by adding pool-VOLs because the condition that caused theSIM removed.

• SIMs are automatically completed in the following cases:

SIM 620xxxIf the usage level (Used (%)) of THP pool number xxx falls below the warning threshold,SIM is automatically completed.

◦ SIM 625000If the usage level (Used (%)) of each THP pool in all pools of the storage system fallsbelow the depletion threshold, SIM is automatically completed.

◦ SIM 626xxxIf the usage level (Used (%)) of THP pool number xxx falls below the depletion threshold,SIM is automatically completed.

◦ SIM 629xxxIf the physical capacity (Used (%)) of THP pool number xxx falls below the warningthreshold, SIM is automatically completed.

Working with SIMs 193

Page 194: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

◦ SIM 62B000If the physical capacity (Used (%)) of each THP pool in all pools of the storage systemfalls below the depletion threshold, SIM is automatically completed.

◦ SIM 62CxxxIf the physical capacity (Used (%)) of each THP pool in all pools of the storage systemfalls below the depletion threshold, SIM is automatically completed.

◦ SIM 62DxxxIf the physical capacity (Used (%)) of THP pool number xxx falls below the depletionthreshold, SIM is automatically completed.

Manually completing a SIMSome SIMs must be manually completed to clear them from the system. After the trouble thatcaused the SIM is solved, you can manually complete the SIM. After manually completing a SIM,the status of the SIM changes to completed. If you complete the SIM before the underlyingcause is solved, the SIM may reoccur.

Before you begin• The Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

• Perform the troubleshooting associated with the issued SIM. For details about troubleshooting,see “Troubleshooting Thin Provisioning” (page 300).

Procedure1. Open the Complete SIMs window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. On the Pools tab, click More Actions, and then select Complete SIMs.3. Click Finish.

The Confirm window appears.4. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

5. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.You can check whether a SIM completes successfully in the Remote Web Console mainwindow.

Managing pools and THP V-VOLsViewing pool information

Follow these steps to view pool information.

194 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 195: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. View the pool information.

For details about the window for pool information, see “Pools window” (page 414) and “Pools:Volume tabs” (page 421).

Viewing used pool capacityThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform these tasks.

Managing pools and THP V-VOLs 195

Page 196: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Viewing the used capacity for each pool

Procedure1. Open the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. View the used pool capacity of pools as they appear on the Used column in the Pools tab.

For details about the window for pool information, see “Pools window” (page 414).

Viewing the used capacity of a Fast Snap pool

Procedure1. Open the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

196 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 197: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

2. Review the Used Pool Capacity of pools listed in the Pools table.

Viewing formatted pool capacityUse this procedure to view the formatted pool capacity.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. From the Pools table, click the row of a pool with the free pool capacity you want to check.3. Click More Actions to select View Pool Management Status.

The View Pool Management Status window appears.

Managing pools and THP V-VOLs 197

Page 198: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Reasons to check pool capacityFollowing are cases that the free space of the pool is not formatted. In those cases, the freespace of the pool may not increase:

• Pools other than the selected pool are being formatted.

• The pool usage level reaches up to the warning threshold or the depletion threshold.

• The selected pool is blocked.

• I/O loads to the storage system are high.

• The cache memory is blocked.

• Pool-VOLs in the selected pool are blocked.

• Pool-VOLs which are external volumes in the selected pool are blocked.

• Correction access executes to the pool-VOL in the selected pool.

NOTE: Following are cases that the formatted pool capacity may decrease:• New pages are being allocated.

• LDEV format is being performed on the pool-VOL.

• Correction copy is being executed.

Viewing the progress of rebalancing the usage level among parity groupsUse this procedure to view the progress of rebalancing the usage level among parity groups ofa pool.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. From the Pools table, click the row of a pool with you want to check the progress ofrebalancing the usage level among parity groups.

3. Click More Actions to select View Pool Management Status.The View Pool Management Status window appears.

NOTE: Following are cases that the progress ratio may not increase:• The usage level is being rebalanced among the parity groups in pools other than the

selected pool.• Tier relocation is performed.

198 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 199: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Increasing pool capacityAdding the pool-VOL to the pool created for Thin Provisioning or Smart Tiers increases the poolcapacity. The amount of pool capacity registered in the pool represents the pool capacity. Youneed to check the pool free capacity to determine if additional pool capacity is required. Youcannot increase the pool capacity while it is being shrunk.

Notes on using Smart Tiers

• When pool volumes with the available monitoring information are added in a pool, tierrelocation is performed. When availablepool volumes without available monitoring informationare added in a pool, the page usage rate is averaged out in a tier.

• If the pool volumes are added, the tier relocation being performed stops.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. From the Pools table, select the pool with the capacity you want to increase. You cannotincrease pool capacity for multiple pools.

3. Click Expand Pool.4. In the Expand Pool window, select the pool-VOL.

1. Click Select Pool VOLs.2. In the Select Pool VOLs window, from the Available Pool Volumes table, select the

pool-VOL you want to assign, and then click Add.The selected pool-VOLs are registered in the Selected Pool Volumes table.Up to 1024 volumes can be added including the volumes already in the pool. You canuse the Filter option to choose volumes by parameter.For details about adding of LDEVs carved from capacity virtualization-enabled paritygroups, see “Guidelines for creating a pool when capacity virtualization is enabled”(page 39).

Managing pools and THP V-VOLs 199

Page 200: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

NOTE: If necessary, perform the following steps:• From Filter option, select ON to filter the rows.

• Click Select All Pages to select pool-VOLs in the table. To cancel the selection,click Select All Pages again.

• Click Options to specify the unit of volumes or the number of rows to be viewed.

• To set the tier rank of an external volume to a value other than Middle, select atier rank from External LDEV Tier Rank, then click Add.

• For a pool, you can add volumes whose Drive Type/RPM settings are the sameand whose RAID Levels are different. For example, you can add the followingvolumes to the same pool:Volume whose Drive Type/RPM is SAS/15K and whose RAID Level is 5 (3D+1P)Volume whose Drive Type/RPM is SAS/15K and whose RAID Level is 5 (7D+1P)

• When assigning pool with THP V-VOL enabled with full allocation, LDEVs cannotbe added in the parity group with capacity virtualization enabled.

3. Click OK.The Select Pool VOLs window closes. The number of the selected pool volumesappears in Total Selected Pool Volumes, and the total capacity of the selectedpool-VOL appears in Total Selected Capacity.

5. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

6. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

7. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Changing a pool nameUse this procedure to change a pool name.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. From the Pools table, select the pool with the name you want to change.3. Click More Actions, and then select Edit Pools.4. In the Edit Pools window, in Pool Name, specify a name for this pool.

200 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 201: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

1. In Prefix, type the characters that will become the fixed characters for the beginning ofthe pool name. The characters are case-sensitive.

2. In Initial Number, type the initial number that will follow the prefix name.5. Click Finish.

The Confirm window appears.6. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

7. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Recovering a blocked poolYou can perform failure recovery of a blocked pool. Ordinarily, you should not need to use thisprocedure. A recovered pool can be used, but the former data is lost.The recovery time for pools varies depending on pool usage or THP V-VOL usage. Allow roughly20 minutes of recovery time for every 100 TB of pool or THP V-VOL usage. Recovery time mayvary depending on the workload of the storage system at the time of recovery.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. On the Pools tab, select the pool to be recovered.3. Click More Actions, and then select Restore Pools.4. In the Confirm window, confirm the settings.5. Enter a unique Task Name or accept the default.

If Go to tasks window for status is checked, the Tasks window opens.

Decrease pool capacity

About decreasing pool capacityYou can decrease pool capacity by deleting pool volumes.When a pool volume is removed from a pool, all the used pages in the pool volume are movedto other pool volumes.For the pool that owns THP V-VOL with a disabled data direct mapping attribute, if pool volumeis released after the pool shrinking, the released pool volumes (LDEVs) will be blocked. If thepool volumes (LDEVs) are blocked, format them before using them.If the blocked pool volume is an external volume, use Normal Format when formatting the volume.

Managing pools and THP V-VOLs 201

Page 202: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

If the pool volume being deleted is the external volume and is disconnected during deletion,reconnect the external volume and then retry deleting the pool volume.You can decrease pool capacity for up to eight tasks at the same time. Do not execute a RAIDManager command to also decrease the capacity of the pool whose capacity is already in theprocess of being decreased.You cannot decrease pool capacity while doing any of the following to a pool.

• Creating the pool.

• Deleting the pool.

• Increasing the pool.

• Decreasing the pool.

• Recovering the pool.

• Stopping decreasing the pool.

• Changing the threshold.

• Reclaiming zero pages.

• Creating THP V-VOLs.

• Increasing THP V-VOL capacity.If the shrink pool operation has abnormally ended, it might be caused by one of the following:

• Maintenance of a cache memory is performed while the pool capacity is being reduced.

• Errors occur on a cache memory while the pool capacity is being reduced.

• The I/Os load to THP V-VOLs related to the pool is too high.

• THP V-VOLs related to the pool are being blocked.If the shrink pool operation has abnormally ended, perform the one of the following operations:

• Restore a cache memory, and then perform the shrink pool operation again.

• When the I/Os load to THP V-VOLs related to the pool is too low, perform the shrink pooloperation again.

• Delete or format THP V-VOLs related to the pool, and then perform the shrink pool operationagain.

NOTE: You cannot perform the following operations on a pool while the pool volume capacityis in the process of shrinking. Wait until shrinking completes or stop the shrinking process.• Expand Pool

• Shrink Pools

• Edit Pools

• Restore Pools

If you delete the pool volume with the pool's system area, the used capacity and the managementarea will move to other pool volumes. If you delete the pool volume with system area, a differentsystem area pool volume will be assigned automatically according to the priority shown in thefollowing table. A pool must include one or more pool volumes.

Data drive typePriority

SAS7.2K1

SAS10K2

202 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 203: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Data drive typePriority

SAS15K3

SSD4

External volume5

If multiple pool volumes of the same data drive type exist, the priority of each is determined byinternal index of the storage system.If pool capacity is decreased soon after creating a pool or adding a pool volume, processing maytake a while to complete.

Notes on using Thin ProvisioningYou cannot delete a pool volume under these conditions.

• If the pool volume is deleted, the total of the used pool capacity exceeds the pool threshold.

• If the pool volume is deleted, the subscription rate of the total THP V-VOL capacity includingthe control information exceeds the subscription limit. For details about the formula used tocalculate the required pages for one THP V-VOL including the control information, see “Poolsubscription limit” (page 188).

• If the pool volume with system area is deleted, more than 4.2 GB of free space is necessaryin the pool.

• In case that pool volumes assigned by the capacity virtualization-enabled parity group isdeleted, the pool volumes cannot be deleted if the used capacity reserved for writing (afterdeleted of pool volumes) may have exceeded of the threshold due to deleting pool volumes.The used capacity reserved for data-writing (after deleting pool volumes)is calculated asfollows:Used capacity reserved for data-writing (after deleting pool volumes) = Used capacity reservedfordata-writing (before deleting pool volumes)+ Total used capacity of pool volumes to bedeleted * FMC saving ratioThe used capacity reserved for data-writing (after deleting pool volumes) is larger than theused capacity reserved for data-writing (before deleting pool volumes).Because data storedin pool volumes belonging to the capacity virtualization-enabled parity group is migrated inthe following parity groups due to the shrinking of pool:

◦ Parity group with capacity virtualization is not supported (For instance, SAS drives)

◦ Parity group with capacity virtualizationis disabled

Notes on using Smart Tiers

• You cannot delete a pool volume under these conditions.

If the pool volume is deleted, the total of the used pool capacity of the pool-VOL exceedsthe pool threshold.

◦ If the pool volume is deleted, the subscription rate of the total THP V-VOL capacityincluding the control information exceeds the subscription limit. For details about the

Managing pools and THP V-VOLs 203

Page 204: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

formula used to calculate the required pages for one THP V-VOL including the controlinformation, see “Pool subscription limit” (page 188).

◦ If the pool volume with system area is deleted, more than 4.2 GB of free space isnecessary in the pool.

• When the pool volume is deleted, the pages contained in the deleted pool volume transferto anotherpool volume in the same tier. If the used capacity in the tier exceeds Rate of FreeSpace Newly Allocated to, the overflowing pages transfer to another tier.

• When pool volumes in the tier are empty, the appropriate tier is deleted.

• Deleting the pool volume stops the tier relocation. The process resumes after the pool volumeis deleted.

Notes on using Fast SnapYou cannot delete a pool volume under these conditions.

• If the pool volume is deleted, the used capacity of the pool volume exceeds the pool threshold.

• If the pool volume with system area is deleted, more than 4.2 GB of free space is necessaryin the pool.

Decreasing pool capacityUse this procedure to decrease pool capacity.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. Select the pool that contains the pool-VOLs to be deleted.3. From the Pool volumes, select the pool-VOL to be deleted.

You cannot delete pool-VOLs unless Shrinkable is applied.4. Click Shrink Pool.

The Shrink Pool window opens.The details of Before Shrinking and After Shrinking, including the pool capacity, the usedpool capacity and the free pool capacity, appears in Prediction of Shrinking.

5. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

6. In theTask Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

7. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

204 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 205: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Stopping the decrease of pool capacityUse this procedure to stop the decrease of pool capacity.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. From the Pools, select the pool with the capacity you want to stop decreasing.3. Click Stop Shrinking Pools.4. Click Finish.

The Confirm window appears.5. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

6. Click Apply.If Go to tasks window for status is selected, the Tasks window opens.

Deleting a tier in a poolYou must delete all the pool-VOLs in the tier to be deleted. When pool-VOLs in the tier are empty,the appropriate tier is deleted.If you delete a pool, its pool-VOLs (LDEVs) will be blocked. If they are blocked, format thembefore using them.You cannot delete the pool-VOL when:

• Creating the pool.

• Deleting the pool.

• Increasing the pool capacity.

• Decreasing the pool capacity.

• Restoring the pool.

• Stopping decreasing the pool capacity.

• Changing the threshold.

• Initializing the pool capacity.

• Changing the external LDEV tier rank.Notes on deleting a tier in a pool

Managing pools and THP V-VOLs 205

Page 206: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

You cannot delete a pool-VOL under these conditions.

• The used capacity of the pool-VOL would exceed the pool threshold if the pool-VOL weredeleted.

• The subscription rate of the total V-VOL capacity including the control information wouldexceed the subscription limit if the pool-VOL were deleted. For details about the formulaused to calculate the required pages for one THP V-VOL including the control information,see “Pool subscription limit” (page 188).

• The pool-VOL with system area has less than 4.2 GB of free space. There must be 4.2 GBof free space in the pool in order to delete the pool-VOL with system area.

Deleting the pool-VOL stops the tier relocation. The process resumes after the pool-VOL isdeleted.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. Select the pool that contains the pool-VOLs to be deleted.3. Select the Pool volumes tab and select all the pool-VOLs contained in the tier to be deleted.

You cannot delete a pool-VOL unless Shrinkable has been applied.4. Click Shrink Pool.5. In the Shrink Pool window, verify the changes.

The details of Before Shrinking and After Shrinking, including the pool capacity, the usedpool capacity and the free pool capacity, appears in Prediction of Shrinking.

6. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

7. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

8. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Deleting a poolFor the pool that owns THP V-VOL with a disabled data direct mapping attribute, if pool-VOL isreleased after the pool shrinking, the released pool-VOLs (LDEVs) will be blocked.If the pool-VOLs are blocked, they must be formatted before they can be reused. If the blockedpool-VOL is an external volume, select Normal Format when formatting the volume. You candelete a pool only when all of the THP V-VOLs have been deleted.

206 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 207: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. From the Pools table, select the pool to be deleted.3. Click More Actions, and then select Delete Pools.

The Delete Pools window opens.You cannot delete a pool if the pool usage is not 0%, or a pool for which THP V-VOLs areassigned.

4. Click Finish.The Confirm window opens.To continue with the shredding operation and delete volume data, click Next. For detailsabout the shredding operation, see the XP7 Volume Shredder for Open and MainframeSystems User Guide.If the pool is blocked, you might not be able to perform shredding operations.

5. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

6. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

NOTE: When the pool-VOLs of a pool are empty, the appropriate tier is deleted.

Changing external LDEV tier rankUse this procedure to change the tier rank of an external LDEV.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

Managing pools and THP V-VOLs 207

Page 208: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

2. From the Pool volumes table, select the pool-VOL that has the external LDEV tier rank youwant to change.You cannot change the external LDEV tier rank of a pool-VOL if External Volume is notdisplayed in the Drive Type/RPM column.

3. Click More Actions and select Edit External LDEV Tier Rank.4. From the Selected Pool volumes table, select the pool-VOL with the external LDEV tier

rank you want to change.5. Click Change and select the tier rank.6. Click Finish.

The Confirm window appears.7. In the Task Name text box, enter the task name.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols in all, except for \ / : , ; * ? " < > |."date-window name" is entered by default.

8. In the Confirm window, click Apply to register the setting in the task.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Increasing THP V-VOL capacityUse this procedure to increase the capacity of a THP V-VOL.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. Select the pool associated with the THP V-VOL that has the capacity that you want toincrease.

3. Select the Virtual Volumes tab.4. From the table, select the THP V-VOL with the capacity you want to increase.5. Click Expand V-VOLs.

The Expand V-VOLs window opens. If the THP V-VOL is selected from the LDEV table inthe Logical Devices window, click More Actions, and then click Expand V-VOLs.

6. Select Specify total capacity or Specify additional capacity.7. If you want to offset the specified LDEV capacity by boundary, change the default Offset

boundary from OFF to ON.8. In Capacity, type the capacity amount.

Enter the LDEV capacity to two decimal places within the range of values indicated belowthe text box.

9. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

208 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 209: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

10. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

11. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Changing the name of a THP V-VOLUse this procedure to change the name of a THP V-VOL.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Edit LDEVs window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. In the Pools window, click the link of the Pool Name associated with the THP V-VOL youwant to rename.

3. Select the Virtual Volumes tab, click More Actions, and then Edit LDEVs.4. Check LDEV Name and change the LDEV name, if necessary.

1. In Prefix, type the characters that will become the fixed characters for the beginning ofthe LDEV name. The characters are case-sensitive.

2. In Initial Number, type the initial number that will follow the prefix name.5. Click Finish.

The Confirm window appears.6. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

7. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

About releasing pages in a THP V-VOLReleasing pages in a THP V-VOL frees up pool capacity. When a page in the THP V-VOL containszero data, the free capacity of a pool increases after the pages are released. You can performthe operation to reclaim zero pages on each V-VOL and monitor progress. For details, see “ViewPool Management Status window” (page 480). If you stop the operation to reclaim zero pages,the zero pages that have been reclaimed cannot be restored.Logically, there is no difference between a page with just zero data and the area of a THP V-VOLwithout a page allotted. Both are effectively identical. However, the former uses pool capacityand the latter does not.

Managing pools and THP V-VOLs 209

Page 210: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Zero pages can be reclaimed when all the following conditions are satisfied:

• The THP V-VOL is not used in conjunction with another XP7 product which does not supportreclaiming zero pages.See “Using Thin Provisioning or Smart Tiers or Real Time Smart Tier with other XP7 Storageproducts” (page 100).

• LDEV formatting is not being performed on the THP V-VOL.

• The THP V-VOL is not blocked.

• The THP V-VOL is not the THP V-VOL of the data direct mapping attribute.

• The THP V-VOL is associated with a pool.

• The pool associated with the THP V-VOL is not blocked, or is full and blocked.

• The LUN path is not defined between THP V-VOL and the host group enabled with hostmode option 97.

Pages that include control cylinders are not processed when releasing pages in a THP V-VOL.Pages that include file system metadata cannot be reclaimed. Refer to “Operating system andfile system capacity” (page 99) for a table of the Pool Capacity Consumed by the file system.While releasing pages from a THP V-VOL, performance of the host I/O to the THP V-VOL maytemporarily decrease due to scanning for non-zero data.If you stop an operation to reclaim zero pages in mid-stream, the pages that have been releasedwill remain as free pool capacity.After an operation to reclaim zero pages, Thin Provisioning automatically balances usage levelsamong parity groups in the pool. This rebalancing is performed on parity groups related to thepool. If you do not want automatic balancing of the usage levels of parity groups, call HewlettPackard Enterprise technical support to change your configuration.

NOTE: If an operation to reclaim zero pages performs on pools comprised of pool volumesassigned by parity groups with capacity virtualization enabled, the capacity reserved for writingdata may not be reduced in comparison with the reduced pool capacity.

Thin Provisioning does not automatically balance the usage levels among parity groups if thecache memory is not redundant or if the pool usage reaches the threshold.If all the tracks that belong to a page assigned to a THP V-VOL have no records written, you canreclaim the page and return it to the pool's available capacity.

CAUTION: In the following cases, an operation of the reclaim zero pages stops and THPV-VOL pages might not be released.• The pool-VOL accessed by the target THP V-VOL is blocked.

• The pool associated with the target THP V-VOL is blocked while the operation to reclaimzero pages is in progress.

• Cache memory failure occurs while the operation to reclaim zero pages is in progress.

• While the operation to reclaim zero pages is in progress, the initial copy operation of theContinuous Access Synchronous pair, the Continuous Access Journal pair, the HighAvailability pair, or the Business Copy pair is performed on the THP V-VOL.

• The LUN path is defined between THP V-VOL and the host group enabled with host modeoption 97 while the operation to reclaim zero pages is in progress.

210 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 211: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Releasing pages in a THP V-VOLYou can reclaim pages in a THP V-VOL to free pool capacity. If a page assigned to a THP V-VOLcontains only zero binary data, you can reclaim the page by performing the operation to releasezero pages. Reclaiming the page decreases the used capacity of the pool. Before releasingpages in a THP V-VOL, see “About releasing pages in a THP V-VOL” (page 209). If the operationto release zero pages is performed on V-VOLs enabled for full allocation, the used capacity ofthe pool is not changed before the operation to release zero pages is performed.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the LDEVs window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Logical Devices.

2. From the table, select the LDEV ID of the volume with the pages you want to release.3. Click More Actions, and then select Reclaim Zero Pages.

The Reclaim Zero Pages window opens.You cannot release pages in a THP V-VOL when the THP V-VOL is not in a normal statusor the THP V-VOL is in the process of reclaiming zero pages.

4. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

5. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

Managing pools and THP V-VOLs 211

Page 212: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

6. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.After the operation to reclaim zero pages is complete, refresh the display to update the PageStatus. If the Page Status is not immediately updated, wait a while, then refresh the displayagain.

NOTE: Completed is displayed as the Page Status even when no pages can bereclaimed.

If you have started the reclaiming zero pages operation, and the storage system is poweredoff the reclaiming zero pages operation will not automatically continue after the storagesystem restarts.In any of the following cases, the reclaiming zero pages will stop, and THP V-VOL pageswill not be released:

• LDEV formatting was performed while reclaiming zero pages.

• The pool-VOL that is being accessed by the target THP V-VOL was blocked.

• The pool associated with the target THP V-VOL was blocked while reclaiming zeropages.

• Cache memory failure occurred while reclaiming zero pages.

• The THP V-VOL was deleted when zero pages were reclaimed.

• The initial copy operation between the Continuous Access Synchronous pair or theContinuous Access Journal pair was performed on the THP V-VOL in which zero pageswere being reclaimed.

Stopping the release of pages in a THP V-VOLUse this procedure to stop the release of pages in a THP V-VOL.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. Select the pool associated with the THP V-VOL with pages you want to stop from beingreleased.

3. Select the Virtual Volumes tab.4. From the table, select the THP V-VOL with pages you want to stop from being released.5. Click More Actions, and then select Stop Reclaiming Zero Pages.

The Stop Reclaiming Zero Pages window opens.You cannot stop releasing the pages in a THP V-VOL in which zero pages are not beingreclaimed.

212 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 213: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

6. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

7. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

8. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Changing full allocation settings in THP V-VOLsYou can use the procedure in this section to change full allocation settings in THP V-VOLs.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. On the Pools tab, click the link of the Pool Name associated with the volume that hassettings that you want to change.

3. Select the Virtual Volumes tab, click More Actions, then Edit LDEVs.The Edit LDEVs window opens.

4. In the Edit LDEVs window, check Full Allocation and select Enable or Disable.• Enable: All pages of a THP V-VOL are allocated to the current pool.

• Disable: All pages of a THP V-VOL might not be allocated to the current pool.

TIP: If the pool of THP V-VOL contains LDEV enabled with capacity virtualization inthe parity group, the item of Enable is inactive.

5. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

6. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

7. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Enabling or disabling tier relocation of a THP V-VOLYou can enable or disable tier relocation of individual THP V-VOLs or on all THP V-VOLs.

Managing pools and THP V-VOLs 213

Page 214: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

THP V-VOLs on which tier relocation is disabled are excluded from the targets for the tier rangecalculation, and are not reflected in the performance information of pools. If tier relocation isdisabled on all THP V-VOLs in a pool, performance information of a pool is unavailable in theView Tier Properties window.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Edit LDEVs window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. On the Pools tab, click the link of the Pool Name associated with the THP V-VOL you wantto rename.

3. Click the Virtual Volumes tab, select an LDEV ID, click More Actions, and then select EditLDEVs.

4. In the Edit LDEVs window, check tier relocation and select Enable or Disable.Enable allows tier relocation to be performed to the THP V-VOL.Disable does not allow tier relocation to be performed on the THP V-VOL in the case ofboth automatic and manual tier relocation.

5. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

6. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

7. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Deleting a THP V-VOLUse this procedure to delete a THP V-VOL.

CAUTION: The following operations must be performed before deleting the THP V-VOL withthe data direct mapping attribute:1. Using the Block LDEVs window, delete the Block THP V-VOL with the data direct mapping

attribute.2. Using the Disconnect External Storage Systems window or the Disconnect External Volumes

window, disconnect the THP V-VOL that has the data direct mapping attribute from theexternal volume that has the data direct mapping attribute assigned with the THP V-VOL.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.You cannot delete a THP V-VOL if the status is online.

214 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 215: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Procedure1. Open the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. Select the associated row with the THP V-VOL to be deleted.3. Select the Virtual Volumes tab.4. From the table, select the THP V-VOL to be deleted.

Do the following, if necessary.

• In the Filter option, select ON to filter the rows.

• Click Select All Pages to select all THP V-VOLs in the list.

• Click Options to specify the unit of volumes or the number of rows to view.5. Click More Actions, and then select Delete LDEVs.

The Delete LDEVs window opens.6. Click Finish.

The Confirm window appears.7. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

8. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Starting pool monitoring manuallyUse this procedure to start pool monitoring manually.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Monitor Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. On the Pools tab, click the row of a pool you want to start monitoring.3. Click More Actions, and then select Monitor Pools.

Starting pool monitoring manually 215

Page 216: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

4. In the Task Name text box of the Monitor Pools window, enter the task name.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols in all, except for \ / : , ; * ? " < > |."date-window name" is entered by default.

5. Click Apply to register the setting in the task.If Go to tasks window for status is selected, the Tasks window opens.

Stopping pool monitoring manuallyUse this procedure to stop pool monitoring manually.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. From the Pools table, click the row of a pool you want to stop monitoring.3. Click More Actions to select Stop Monitoring Pools.4. In the Task Name text box of the Stop Monitoring Pools window, enter the task name.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols in all, except for \ / : , ; * ? " < > |."date-window name" is entered by default.

5. Click Apply to register the setting in the task.If Go to tasks window for status is selected, the Tasks window opens.

Starting tier relocation manuallyUse this procedure to start tier relocation manually.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. On the Pools tab, click the row of a pool you want to start monitoring.3. Click More Actions and select Start Tier Relocation.

216 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 217: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

4. In the Task Name text box of the Start Tier Relocation window, enter the task name.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols in all, except for \ / : , ; * ? " < > |."date-window name" is entered by default.

5. In the Start Tier Relocation window, click Apply to register the setting in the task.If Go to tasks window for status is selected, the Tasks window opens.

Stopping tier relocation manuallyUse this procedure to stop tier relocation manually.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. From the Pools, click the row of a pool you want to start monitoring.3. Click More Actions to select Stop Tier Relocation.

The Stop Tier Relocation window appears.4. In the Task Name text box of the Stop Tier Relocation window, enter the task name.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols in all, except for \ / : , ; * ? " < > |."date-window name" is entered by default.

5. In the Stop Tier Relocation window, click Apply to register the setting in the task.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Creating data direct mapping attributeCreating an external volume with data direct mapping attribute

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Logical Devices window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click Volumes, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Logical Devices.

Stopping tier relocation manually 217

Page 218: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

2. In the LDEVs pane of the Logical Devices window, click Create LDEVs.3. In the Create LDEVs window, from the Provisioning Type list, select External as a

provisioning type for the LDEV to be created.4. In System Type, select Open to create open system volumes5. In Data Direct Mapping, select Enable.6. From the Emulation Type list, confirm that OPEN-V is being selected.7. Click Select Free Spaces.8. In the Select Free Spaces window, in the Available Free Spaces table, select the free

space to be assigned to the volumes. Do the following, if necessary:• To specify the conditions and show the free space, click Filter, specify the conditions,

and then click Apply.• To specify the unit for capacity and the number of rows to view, click Options.

9. Click View Physical Location.10. In the View Physical Location window, confirm where the selected free space is physically

located, and then click Close.11. In the Select Free Spaces window, if the selected free spaces have no issues, click OK.12. In the Number of LDEVs per External Volume, confirm that 1 is displayed.13. In LDEV Name, specify a name for this LDEV.

1. In Prefix, type the characters that will become the fixed characters for the beginning ofthe LDEV name. The characters are case-sensitive.

2. In Initial Number, type the initial number that will follow the prefix name.14. In Format Type, select the format type for the LDEV from the list.

For an external volume, if you create the LDEV whose emulation type is the open system,select Normal Format or No Format.If the external volume can be used as it is, select No Format. The created LDEV can beused without formatting.If the external volume needs to be formatted, select No Format and then format the volumewith the external storage system, or select Normal Format.

15. Click Options to show more options.16. In Initial LDEV ID, make sure that an LDEV ID is set. To confirm the used number and

unavailable number, click View LDEV IDs to open the View LDEV IDs window.1. In Initial LDEV IDin theCreate LDEVswindow, click View LDEV IDs. In the View LDEV

IDs window, the matrix vertical scale represents the second-to-last digit of the LDEVnumber, and the horizontal scale represents the last digit of the LDEV number. TheLDEV IDs table shows the available, used, and disabled LDEV IDs. In the table, usedLDEV numbers appear in blue, unavailable numbers appear in gray, and unusednumbers appear in white. LDEV numbers that are unavailable may be already in use,or already assigned to another emulation group (group by 32 LDEV numbers).

2. Click Close.17. In the Create LDEVs window, in SSID, type four digits, in hexadecimal format (0004 to

FEFF), for the SSID.18. To confirm the created SSID, click View SSIDs to open the View SSIDs dialog box.

1. In the Create LDEVs window, in Initial SSID, click View SSIDs. In the SSIDs window,the SSIDstable shows the used SSIDs.

2. Click Close.

218 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 219: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

19. In the Create LDEVs window, from the MP Blade list, select a MP blade to be used by theLDEVs.• If you assign a specific MP blade, select the ID of the MP blade.

• If you can assign any MP blade, click Auto.20. Click Add.

The created LDEVs are added to the Selected LDEVs table.If these required items are not registered, you cannot click Add.

21. If necessary, change the following LDEV settings:1. Click Edit SSIDs to open the SSIDs window. If the new LDEV is to be created in the

CU, change SSID to be allocated to the LDEV.2. Click Change LDEV Settings to open the Change LDEV Settings window.

22. If necessary, delete an LDEV from the Selected LDEVs table. Select an LDEV to delete,and then click Remove.

23. Click Finish. The Confirm window appears.To continue the operation for setting the LU path and defining a logical unit, click Next.

24. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

25. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Creating pool with data direct mapping attribute

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Create Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools and then select System GUI.3. In the Pools window, click Create Pools.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.3. Click Create Pools.

2. From thePool Type list, select Thin Provisioning.3. From the System Type list, select Open.4. From the Smart Pool field, select Disable.

You cannot select Enable if the storage system has only external volumes with the CacheMode set toDisable.

5. From the Data Direct Mapping field, select Enable.6. Follow the steps below to select pool-VOLs.

1. From the Drive Type/RPM list, select a data drive type and RPM.

Creating data direct mapping attribute 219

Page 220: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

2. From the RAID Level list, select RAID level.If you select External Storage from the Drive Type/RPM list, a hyphen (-) appears andyou cannot select the RAID level.

3. Click Select Pool VOLs.The Select Pool VOLs window appears.

4. In the Available Pool Volumes table, select the pool-VOL row to be associated with apool, then click Add.Select one or more volumes to use as pool-VOLs with system area. For the attribute ofthe volume, which can be used as the pool-VOLs with system area, a hyphen(-) appearsin the Attribute column. In addition, the external volume of the data direct mappingattribute can be selected as an option. For the attribute of the external volume of thedata direct mapping attribute, Data Direct Mapping appears in the Attribute column.After creating the pool, you can also add the external volume of the data direct mappingattribute.You can select a value other than Middle from External LDEV Tier Rank and clickAdd to set another tier rank for an external volume.The selected pool-VOL is registered in the Selected Pool Volumes table. Up to 1,024volumes can be added to a pool.If LDEVs in a capacity virtualization-enabled parity group are used as pool-VOLs, theseLDEVs can be assigned to only one pool. LDEVs in a capacity virtualization- enabledparity group cannot be assigned to multiple pools as pool-VOLs.

TIP: Perform the following steps if necessary:• Click Filter to open the menu, specify the filtering conditions, and click Apply.

• Click Select All Pages to select all pool-VOLs in the table. To cancel the selection,click Select All Pages again.

• Click Options to specify the volumes or the number of rows to be displayed.

5. Click OK.The information in the Selected Pool Volumes table is applied to Total Selected PoolVolumes and Total Selected Capacity.

7. Enter the name in the Pool Name text box.8. Click Options.9. In theInitial Pool ID text box, type the number of the initial pool ID, from 0 to 127. When you

specify a pool ID that was previously registered, the smallest available ID is displayed bydefault instead of the value you entered. If a pool ID unavailable, no number is displayed.

10. In the Subscription Limit text box, enter an integer value from 0 to 65534 as the subscriptionrate (%) for the pool.If no number is entered, the subscription rate is set to unlimited.

11. In Protect V-VOLswhen I/O fails to Blocked Pool VOL, select Yes orNo. If Yes is selected,when the pool-VOL is blocked, THP V-VOL is protected from reading and writing requests.And at the same instant, the access attribute of the THP V-VOL is changed to the Protectattribute.

12. In Protect V-VOLs when I/O fails to Full Pool, select Yes or No. If Yes is selected, whenthe pool usage reaches the full size, THP V-VOL is protected from reading and writingrequests. And at the same instant, the access attribute of the THP V-VOL is changed to theProtect attribute.

220 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 221: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

13. Click Add.The created pool is added to the Selected Pools table. If invalid values are set, an errormessage appears.The Pool Type, Pool Volume Selection, and Pool Name must be set. If the required itemsare not entered or selected, you cannot click Add.If you select a row and click Detail, the Pool Properties window appears. If you select arow and click Remove, the message appears asking whether you want to remove theselected row or rows. If you want to remove the row, click OK.

14. Click Next.The Create LDEVs window appears.If Subscription Limit of the created pool is set to 0%, the Create LDEVs window does notappear.

15. Click Finish and the Confirmation window appears.16. Check the settings in the Confirmation window, and then enter the task name in Task

Name. Select the pool radio button and then click Details. The Pool Properties windowappears.

17. Click ApplyThe tasks are registered. If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, theTasks window appears.

Creating THP V-VOL with data direct mapping attribute

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Logical Devices window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click Volumes, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Logical Devices.

2. In the LDEVs pane of the Logical Devices window, click Create LDEVs.3. In the Create LDEVs window, from the Provisioning Type list, select Thin Provisioning.4. In the System Type option, select Open.5. From the Data Direct Mapping field, select Enable.6. From theEmulation Type list, confirm OPEN-V is selected.7. From the Smart Pool field, select Disable.8. From the Available Volumes table, select LDEV.9. In the LDEV Name text box, enter the THP V-VOL name.

In the Prefix text box, enter the alphanumeric characters, which are fixed characters of thehead of the THP V-VOL name. The characters are case-sensitive.In the Initial Number text box, type the initial number following the prefix name, which canbe up to 9 digits.You can enter up to the 32 characters including the initial number.

Creating data direct mapping attribute 221

Page 222: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

10. Click Option.11. In the Initial LDEV ID field, make sure that LDEV ID is set.

To confirm the used number and unavailable number, click View LDEV IDs to display theView LDEV IDs window.In the table, used LDEV numbers appear in blue, unavailable numbers appear in gray, andunused numbers appear in white. LDEV numbers that are unavailable may be already inuse, or already assigned to another emulation group (group by 32 LDEV numbers).

12. In the Initial SSID text box, type the 4-digit SSID of a hexadecimal number (0004 to FFFE).To confirm the created SSID, click View SSID to display the View SSID windows.

13. From the Cache Partition list, select CLPR.14. From the MP Blade list, select a MP blade.

Select a MP blade to be used by the LDEVs. If you assign a specific MP blade, select theID of the MP blade. If you can assign any MP blade, click Auto.

15. If necessary, change the settings of the V-VOLs.You can change the following settings:

• Editing SSID: Click Edit SSIDs to open the Edit SSIDs window.

• Changing the LDEV settings: Click Change LDEV Settings to open the Change LDEVSettings window.

16. If necessary, delete a row from the Selected LDEVs table.Select a row to be deleted, then click Remove.

17. Click Add.The created V-VOLs are added to the right Selected LDEVs table. If invalid values are set,an error message appears: TheProvisioning Type, System Type, Emulation Type, PoolSelection, Drive Type/RPM, RAID Level, LDEV Capacity, and Number of LDEVs fieldmust be set. If these required items are not registered, you cannot click Add.

18. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears. To continue the operation for setting the LU path and defineLUN, click Next.

19. In the Task Name in the text box, enter the task name.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols in all, except for \ / : , ; * ? " < > |."yymmdd-window name" is entered as a default.

20. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Editing a pool with data direct mapping attribute

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

222 Configuring thin provisioning

Page 223: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

NOTE: To change the pool of the data direct mapping attribute to the pool of Smart Tiers orReal Time Smart Tier, operate as follows:1. In the operation target pool, open the Edit Pools window, then select Disable from the Data

Direct Mapping field.2. Apply the setting to the storage system.3. In the operation target pool, open the Edit Poolswindow, then select Enable from the Smart

Pool field.4. Apply the setting to the storage system.

Procedure1. Open the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click THP Pools, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Pools.

2. From the Pools table, click the row of a pool you want to change to the data direct mappingattribute.

3. Perform one of the following to display the Edit Pools window.• Click More Actions and select Edit Pools.

• Click Actions > Pool > Edit Pools to open the window.4. Select the Data Direct Mapping check box.5. Select Enable or Disable.6. Click Finish.

The Confirm window opens.7. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

Creating data direct mapping attribute 223

Page 224: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

7 Configuring access attributesAfter provisioning your system, you can assign access attributes to open-system volumes toprotect the volume against read, write, and copy operations and to prevent users from configuringLU paths and command devices. Data Retention software is required to assign access attributesto volumes.

About access attributesOpen-systems volumes, by default, are subject to read and write operations by open-systemshosts. With open-system volumes in this default condition, data might be damaged or lost if anopen-systems host performs erroneous write operations. In addition, confidential data onopen-systems volumes might be stolen if a malicious operator performs read operations onopen-systems hosts.Therefore, it is recommended that you change the default read and write conditions by assigningan access attribute to each logical volume. Access attributes can be set to read/write, read-only,or protect.By assigning access attributes, you can:

• Protect a volume against both read and write operations of all hosts.

• Protect a volume against write operations of all hosts, but allow read operations.

• Protect a volume against erroneous copy operations, but allow other write operations.

• Prevent other users from configuring LU paths and command devices.One of the following access attributes can be assigned to each logical volume:

• Read/writeIf a logical volume has the read/write attribute, open-systems hosts can perform both readand write operations on the logical volume.You can use replication software to copy data to logical volumes that have read/write attribute.However, if necessary, you can prevent copying data to logical volumes that have read/writeattribute.All open-systems volumes have the read/write attribute by default.

• Read-onlyIf a logical volume has the read-only access attribute, open-systems hosts can perform readoperations but cannot perform write operations on the logical volume.

• ProtectIf a logical volume has the protect access attribute, open-systems hosts cannot access thelogical volume. Open-systems hosts cannot perform either read nor write operations on thelogical volume.

Access attribute requirementsTo assign access attributes, the Data Retention software must be installed.The Data Retention software performs on the secondary window of Remote Web Console. Fordetails about the setting for the secondary window, see the XP7 Remote Web Console UserGuide.

224 Configuring access attributes

Page 225: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Access attributes and permitted operations

Specified as S-VOLSpecified as P-VOLWrite Operationsfrom Hosts

Read Operationsfrom Hosts

Access Attribute

YesYesYesYesRead/Write

NoDepends on the replicationsoftware

NoYesRead-only

NoDepends on the replicationsoftware

NoNoProtect

NoYesYesYesRead/Write andS-VOL disable

Access attribute restrictionsSome restrictions apply when you use the following XP7 products or functions on a volume thathas an access attribute assigned to it.

Virtual LUN• You cannot convert into spaces volumes that do not have the read/write attribute.

• You cannot initialize customized volumes that do not have the read/write attribute.

RAID Manager• You can use RAID Manager to make some Data Retention settings. You can view some of

the RAID Manager settings in the Data Retention user interface.• When viewing the Data Retention window, another user might be using RAID Manager to

change an access attribute of a volume. If the RAID Manager user changes an accessattribute of a volume when you are viewing the Data Retention window, you will be unableto change the access attribute of the volume by using Data Retention. If you attempt tochange the access attribute of the volume by using the Data Retention, an error occurs. Ifthe error occurs, refresh the display, then retry changing the access attribute of the volume.

Automatically started softwareIf any software that can start automatically is enabled, you must do one of the following:

• Perform Data Retention operations when the program is not running.

• Cancel the setting of the program start time.Some software is likely to start automatically at the time specified by the user. For example, if an Auto LUN user or a Performance Monitoring user specifies the time for starting the monitor,the monitor will automatically start at the specified time.

Access attributes work flowAccess attribute workflow includes the following steps:1. “Changing an access attribute to read-only or protect” (page 226)2. “Changing an access attribute to read/write” (page 227)3. “Enabling or disabling the expiration lock” (page 228)4. “Disabling an S-VOL” (page 229)5. “Reserving volumes” (page 230)

Access attributes and permitted operations 225

Page 226: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Assigning an access attribute to a volumeIf you want to protect volumes against both read and write operations from hosts, change theaccess attribute to protect. To protect volumes against write operations from hosts and allowread operations, change the access attribute to read-only. In both ways, if you set the attributeto a volume using the GUI, S-VOL Disable is automatically set to prevent data in a volume frombeing overwritten by replication software. If you use RAID Manager to set the attribute to a volume,you can select whether the S-VOL Disable is set or not. If you set the Protect attribute to thevolume when the Thin Provisioning pool is full, the S-VOL Disable is not set to the volume.After you change an access attribute to read-only or protect, the access attribute cannot bechanged to read/write for a certain period of time. You can specify the length of this period (calledRetention Term) when changing the access attribute to read-only or protect. The retention termcan be extended but cannot be shortened.During the retention term

• Read-only access can be changed to protect or protect can be changed to read-only.

• If you need to change an access attribute to read/write, you must ask the maintenancepersonnel to do so.

After the retention term is over

• The access attribute can be changed to read/write.

• The access attribute remains read-only or protect until changed back to read/write.

Changing an access attribute to read-only or protectWhen changing an access attribute to read-only or protect, observe the following:

• Remote Web Console secondary windows must be defined for use in advance. SelectModifyfrom theData Retention secondary window to set access attributes and prevent other usersor programs from changing storage system settings. When you close the secondary window,Modifymode is released. For more information on Remote Web Console secondary windowsand Modify mode, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.

• Do not assign an access attribute to a volume if any job is manipulating data on the volume.If you assign an access attribute to such a volume, the job will possibly end abnormally.

• The emulation type of the volume must be one of the following:OPEN-3, OPEN-8, OPEN-9, OPEN-E, OPEN-K, OPEN-L, OPEN-V

• The volume must not be one of the following:

Volumes that do not exist◦◦ Volumes that are configured as command devices

◦ Continuous Access Synchronous secondary volumes*

◦ Continuous Access Journal secondary volumes* or journal volumes

◦ Business Copy secondary volumes*

◦ Fast Snap secondary volumes*

◦ Pool volume

◦ Fast Snap virtual volume

◦ Volume assigned by the capacity virtualization-enabled parity group

226 Configuring access attributes

Page 227: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

*Note: The access attribute of secondary volumes may be changed depending on the pairstatus.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Data Retention window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click the target storage system, and then select Other Functions.3. In Remote Web Console, click Actions > Other Function > Data Retention.In Remote Web Console: In the main window click Actions > Other Function > DataRetention.

2. Click to change to Modify mode.3. Select an LDKC number in the LDKC list, select a group that the CU belongs in the CU

Group list, then click a CU in the tree.4. Right-click a volume whose access attribute you want to change. You may select multiple

volumes.5. Click Attribute, and then select Read Only or Protect.

6. In the Term Setting dialog box, specify the retention term. During this period, the accessattribute cannot be changed to read/write. You can enter the number of years and days, orselect Unlimited. The retention term can be extended but cannot be shortened.• years: Specify the number of years within the range of 0 to 60. One year is counted as

365 days, whether the year is a leap year.• days: Specify the number of days within the range of 0 to 21900.For example, if 10 years 5 days or 0 years 3655 days is specified, the access attribute ofthe volume cannot be changed to read/write in the next 3,655 days.

7. Click OK to close the dialog box.8. In the Data Retention window, click Apply to apply the setting.

To extend the retention term later, open the Data Retention window, right-click the volume,and then select Retention Term.

Changing an access attribute to read/writeBefore changing the access attribute from read-only or protect to read/write, considering thefollowing:

• Remote Web Console secondary windows must be defined for use in advance. SelectModifyfrom theData Retention secondary window to set access attributes and prevent other usersor programs from changing storage system settings. When you close the secondary window,

Changing an access attribute to read/write 227

Page 228: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Modifymode is released. For more information on Remote Web Console secondary windowsand Modify mode, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.

• Do not assign an access attribute to a volume if any job is manipulating data on the volume.If you assign an access attribute to such a volume, the job will possibly end abnormally.

• Make sure that the retention term is expired. If expired, the Retention Term column in theData Retention window shows 0. To change the access attribute to read/write within theretention term, contact Hewlett Packard Enterprise technical support.

• Make sure that Expiration Lock indicatesDisable > Enable. If it indicates Enable >Disable,changing to read/write is restricted by an administrator for some reason. Contact theadministrator of your system to ask if you can change the access attribute. For details, seethe XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Data Retention window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click the target storage system, and then select Other Functions.3. In Remote Web Console, click Actions > Other Function > Data Retention.In Remote Web Console: In the main window click Actions > Other Function > DataRetention.

2. Click to change to Modify mode.3. Select an LDKC number in the LDKC list, select a group in which the CU belongs in the CU

Group list, then click a CU in the tree.4. Right-click a volume for which you want to change access attributes. You may select multiple

volumes, select Attribute, then click Read/Write.5. Click Apply to apply the setting.

Related tasks• “Enabling or disabling the expiration lock” (page 228)

Enabling or disabling the expiration lockThe expiration lock provides enhanced volume protection. Enabling the expiration lock ensuresthat read-only volumes and protect volumes cannot be changed to read/write volumes, evenafter the retention term ends. Disabling the expiration lock changes the access attribute toread/write after the retention term ends. This setting applies to all volumes in the storage systemwith the read-only and protect attribute.Remote Web Console secondary windows must be defined for use in advance. When you selectModify from the Data Retention secondary window to enable or disable the expiration lock,other users or programs are prevented from changing storage system settings. When you closethe secondary window,Modifymode is released. For more information on Remote Web Consolesecondary windows and Modify mode, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

228 Configuring access attributes

Page 229: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Procedure1. Open the Data Retention window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click the target storage system, and then select Other Functions.3. In Remote Web Console, click Actions > Other Function > Data Retention.In Remote Web Console: In the main window click Actions > Other Function > DataRetention.

2. Click to change to Modify mode.3. In the Data Retention window, verify which button appears beside Expiration Lock.

• If Disable > Enable appears, go to the next step.

• If Enable > Disable appears, expiration lock is already enabled. You do not need tofollow the rest of this procedure because attempts to change access attribute to read/writeare already prohibited.

4. Click Disable > Enable. A confirmation message appears.5. Click OK. The button changes to Enable > Disable, and the expiration lock is enabled.

When the expiration lock is enabled, the access attributes of volumes cannot be changedto read/write even after the retention term ends.To disable the expiration lock, click Enable > Disable. The access attribute can then bechanged to read/write after the retention term ends.

Disabling an S-VOLAssigning a read-only or protect attribute is one of the ways to prevent data in a volume frombeing overwritten by replication software. Volumes having the read-only or protect attribute arenot only protected against these copy operations, but are also protected against any other formof write operations.To protect a volume only from copy operations, you must ensure that the volume has the read/writeattribute then assign the S-VOL Disable attribute to the volume. This setting prohibits the volumefrom being used as a secondary volume for copy operations.Remote Web Console secondary windows must be defined for use in advance. When you selectModify from theData Retention secondary window to disable an S-VOL, other users or programsare prevented from changing storage system settings. When you close the secondary window,Modify mode is released. For more information on Remote Web Console secondary windowsand Modify mode, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.

Before you begin• The Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

• The volume is other than the volume assigned by the capacity virtualization-enabled paritygroup

Disabling an S-VOL 229

Page 230: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Procedure1. Open the Data Retention window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click the target storage system, and then select Other Functions.In Remote Web Console: In the main window click Actions > Other Function > DataRetention.

2. Click to change to Modify mode.3. Select an LDKC number in the LDKC list, select a group that the CU belongs in the CU

Group list, and then click a CU in the tree.4. Right-click a volume for which the S-VOL column shows Enable. You may select multiple

volumes.5. Select S-VOL > Disable.6. Click Apply to apply the setting.

To use a volume as an S-VOL, ensure that the volume has the read/write attribute thenassign the S-VOL Enable attribute to the volume.

Reserving volumesBy default, all Remote Web Console users with proper permissions can make LU path settingsand command device settings. If you perform the following procedure in Remote Web Console,all users, including yourself, will not be allowed to make LU path settings and command devicesettings on the specified volume. RAID Manager users can still make LU path settings andcommand device settings on the volume.Remote Web Console secondary windows must be defined for use in advance. When you selectModify from theData Retention secondary window to disable an S-VOL, other users or programsare prevented from changing storage system settings. When you close the secondary window,Modify mode is released. For more information on Remote Web Console secondary windowsand Modify mode, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.

Before you begin• The Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

• The volume is other than the volume assigned by the capacity virtualization-enabled paritygroup

Procedure1. Open the Data Retention window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click the target storage system, and then select Other Functions.In Remote Web Console: In the main window click Actions > Other Function > DataRetention.

2. Click to change to Modify mode.3. In the Data Retention window, select an LDKC number in the LDKC list, select a group that

the CU belongs in the CU Group list, and then click a CU in the tree.

230 Configuring access attributes

Page 231: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

4. Select a volume where the Reserved column contains a hyphen. You may select multiplevolumes.

5. Right-click the selected volume or volumes, and then select Reserved > Set.6. Click Apply to apply the setting.

To permit users to make LU path settings and command device settings on a volume, followthe steps above and select Reserved > Release. Then call Hewlett Packard Enterprisetechnical support to ask for SVP settings.

Reserving volumes 231

Page 232: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

8 Managing logical volumesAfter provisioning your system, you can begin to manage open-system logical volumes. Managinglogical volumes includes tasks such as configuring hosts and ports, configuring LU paths, settingLUN security on ports, and setting up Fibre Channel authentication. LUN Manager is requiredto manage logical volumes.

LUN Manager overviewLUN Manager Function

Fibre security control and host group (Fibre Channel interface), or iSCSI security control andtarget (iSCSI interface).

• The Fibre security control function controls the access from specific hosts or specificcommands.

• The host group function also enables the storage system to make a suitable response toeach host connected, even within the same port, by grouping connected hosts within a portand setting the logical unit mapping and the host connection mode for each host group. Upto 255 host groups on a port basis can be set.

• The iSCSI security function controls the access from specified hosts or specific commands.

• The iSCSI target function enables the storage system to respond to each connected host,even within the same port, by grouping the connected hosts within a port and setting LUsand the host option mode for each group. Up to 255 iSCSI targets can be set for one port.Authentication can be performed for each target by using the CHAP authenticationconcurrently.

LUN Manager operationsThe XP7 Storage can be connected to open-system server hosts of different platforms (forexample, UNIX servers and PC servers). To configure a system that includes open-system hostsand the XP7 Storage, use LUN Manager to configure logical volumes and ports.One of the important tasks when configuring logical volumes is to define I/O paths from hosts tological volumes. When paths are defined, the hosts can send commands and data to the logicalvolumes and also can receive data from the logical volumes.After the system begins operating, you might need to modify the system configuration. Forexample, if hosts or disks are added, you will need to add new I/O paths. You can modify thesystem configuration with LUN Manager when the system is running. You do not need to restartthe system when modifying the system configuration.

Fibre channel operationsAfter open-system hosts and the storage system are physically connected by cables, hubs, andso on, use LUN Manager to establish I/O paths between the hosts and the logical volumes. Thisdefines which host can access which logical volume. Logical volumes that can be accessed byopen-system hosts are referred to as logical units (LUs). The paths between the open-systemhosts and the LUs are referred to as LU paths.Before defining LU paths, you must classify server hosts by host groups. For example, if Linuxhosts and Windows hosts are connected to the storage system, you must create one host groupfor the Linux hosts and another host group for the Windows hosts. Then, you must register thehost bus adapters of the Linux hosts in the Linux host group. You must also register the host busadapters of the Windows hosts in the windows host group.A host group can contain only those hosts that are connected to the same port, and cannotcontain hosts that are connected to different ports. For example, if two Windows hosts are

232 Managing logical volumes

Page 233: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

connected to port 1A and three Windows hosts are connected to port 1B, you cannot register allfive Windows hosts in one host group. You must register the first two Windows hosts in one hostgroup, and then register the remaining three Windows hosts in another host group.After server hosts are classified into host groups, you associate the host groups with logicalvolumes. The following figure illustrates LU paths configuration in a fibre channel environment.The figure shows host group hg-lnx associated with three logical volumes (00:00:00, 00:00:01,and 00:00:02). LU paths are defined between the two hosts in the hg-lnx group and the threelogical volumes.

You can define paths between a single server host and multiple LUs. The figure shows that eachof the two hosts in the host group hg-lnx can access the three LUs.You can also define paths between multiple server hosts and a single LU. The figure shows thatthe LU identified by the LDKC:CU:LDEV number 00:00:00 is accessible from the two hosts thatbelong to the hg-lnx host group.The figure also shows that the LUs associated with the hg-lnx host group are addressed bynumbers 0000 to 0002. The address number of an LU is referred to as a LUN (logical unit number).When software manipulates LUs, the software use LUNs to specify the LUs to be manipulated.You can add, change, and delete LU paths when the system is in operation. For example, if newdisks or server hosts are added to your storage system, you can add new LU paths. If an existingserver host is to be replaced, you can delete the LU paths that correspond to the host beforereplacing the host. You do not need to restart the system when you add, change, or delete LUpaths.If a hardware failure (such as a CHA failure) occurs, there is a chance that some LU paths aredisabled and some I/O operations are stopped. To avoid such a situation, you can define alternateLU paths; if one LU path fails, the alternate path takes over the host I/O. For information, see“Defining LU paths” (page 250) and “Defining alternate LU paths” (page 253).

LUN Manager overview 233

Page 234: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

LUN Manager license requirementsUse of LUN Manager on the XP7 Storage requires the following:

• A license key for LUN Manager software.

LUN Manager rules, restrictions, and guidelines for managing LUNs

Rules

• In a Fibre Channel environment, up to 2,048 LU paths can be defined for one host groupand up to 2,048 LU paths can be defined for one port.

• In an iSCSI environment, up to 2,048 LU paths can be defined for one iSCSI target and upto 2,048 LU paths can be defined for one port.

• Up to 255 host groups can be created for one Fibre Channel port.

• Up to 255 iSCSI targets can be created for one iSCSI port.

• In one LDEV of the ALU attribute, you can define the LU path to only one host group.

• In one LDEV of the ALU attribute, you can define the LU path to only one iSCSI target.

Restrictions

• You cannot define an LU path to journal volumes.

• You cannot define an LU path to pool volumes.

• When using of iSCSI. you cannot define an LU path to multi-platform volumes.

• When defining LU paths, you must not use RAID Manager and Remote Web Console at thesame time. If both programs are used simultaneously, operations may not be performed inthe expected order and the storage configuration might be defined incorrectly.

• You cannot define an LU path to the external volume of the data direct mapping attribute.

• If an LDEV of the ALU attribute is binding to LDEVs with the SLU attribute, the LU pathcannot be removed.

• You cannot define an LU path to an LDEV created from an capacity virtualization enabledparity group.

Guidelines

• If you attempt to apply many settings in the LUN Manager windows, the SVP might be unableto continue processing. Therefore, you should make no more than approximately 1,000settings. Note that many settings are likely to be made when defining alternate paths (see“Defining alternate LU paths” (page 253)), even though only two commands are required fordefining alternate paths.

• Do not perform the following when host I/O is in progress and hosts are in reserved status(mounted):

◦ Remove LU paths (see “Deleting LU paths” (page 256))

◦ Disable LUN security on a port (see “Disabling LUN security on a port” (page 261))

◦ Change the data transfer speed for Fibre channel ports

◦ Change AL-PAs or loop IDs

◦ Change settings of fabric switches

◦ Change the topology

234 Managing logical volumes

Page 235: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

◦ Change the host modes

◦ Remove host groups

◦ Remove iSCSI targets

◦ Setting command devices

Managing logical units workflow1. Configure Fibre Channel ports.2. Configure hosts.3. Configure LU paths.4. Enable LUN security.5. Set Fibre Channel authentication.6. Manage hosts.

Configuring hosts and Fibre Channel portsWhen provisioning your system, configure hosts and Fibre Channel ports using LUN Manager.You can manage hosts, modify the host configuration, and modify the port configuration whenthe system is in operation.

• “Configuring Fibre Channel ports” (page 235)

• “Configuring hosts” (page 240)

Configuring Fibre Channel portsSetting the data transfer speed on a Fibre Channel port

As system operation continues, you might notice that a large amount of data is transferred atsome ports, but a small amount of data is transferred at other ports. You can optimize systemperformance on a Fibre Channel port by setting a faster data transfer speed on ports where alarger amount of data is transferred, and setting a slower data transfer speed on ports where asmaller amount of data is transferred.

NOTE: In Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) networks, the port speed is fixed at 10 Gbpsand cannot be changed.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Ports/Host Groups window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. In the Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window, click the Ports tab.3. Select the desired port, and then click Edit Ports.

Managing logical units workflow 235

Page 236: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

4. In the Edit Ports window, select the Port Speed check box, and then select the desiredport speed.Select the speed of the Fibre Channel port in the unit of Gbps (Gigabit per second). If Autois selected, the storage system automatically sets the speed to 2, 4, 8, or 16 Gbps.

CAUTION: Observe the following cautions when setting speed on a Fibre Channel port:• If the host bus adapters (HBAs) and switches support 2 Gbps, use the fixed speed of

2 Gbps for the channel adapter for Fibre Channel (CHF) or channel board for FibreChannel (CHB(FC)) port speed. If they support 4, 8, or 16 Gbps, use 4, 8, or 16 Gbpsfor the CHF or CHB(FC) port speed, respectively.

• If the Auto Negotiation setting is required, some links might not be up when the serveris restarted. Check the channel lamp. If it is flashing, disconnect the cable, and thenreconnect it to recover from the link-down state.

• If the CHF or CHB(FC) port speed is set to Auto, some equipment might not be ableto transfer data at the maximum speed.

• When you start a storage system, HBA, or switch, check the host speed appearing inthe Port list. If the transfer speed is different from the maximum speed, select themaximum speed from the list on the right, or disconnect, and then reconnect the cable.

• The available port speed which is specified in Port Speed is limited due to thecombination of the type of the fibre channel port and the topology which is specified inConnection Type.

5. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

6. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value <date>-<window name> is entered by default.

7. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Related references

• “Combination of data-transfer speed and connection type” (page 236)

Combination of data-transfer speed and connection typeThe available port speed which is specified in Port Speed is limited due to the combination ofthe type of fibre channel port and the topology which is specified in Connection Type. For thefeasible combinations, see following tables.When 8 Gbps fibre channel ports are installed in the storage system, combinations betweendata-transfer speeds and connection types are as follows:

Port SpeedConnectionType

Auto16 Gbps8 Gbps4 Gbps2 Gbps

AvailableNot AvailableAvailableAvailableAvailableFC-AL(Default)

AvailableNot AvailableAvailableAvailableAvailableP-to-P

236 Managing logical volumes

Page 237: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

When 16 Gbps fibre channel ports are installed in the storage system, combinations betweendata-transfer speeds and connection types are as follows:

Port SpeedConnectionType

Auto16 Gbps8 Gbps4 Gbps2 Gbps

Available *1Not AvailableAvailableAvailableNot AvailableFC-AL

Available (Default*2)

Not AvailableAvailableAvailableNot AvailableP-to-P

*1: If this combination is specified, the maximum transfer speed which is automatically specifiedis 8 Gbps.*2: If this default value is set, the item of Fabric is set to ON automatically.

Setting the Fibre Channel port addressWhen configuring your storage system, set addresses for Fibre Channel ports. When addressingFibre Channel ports, use AL-PA (arbitrated-loop physical address) or loop IDs as the addresses.

NOTE: In FCoE networks, you do not need to set the address of a Fibre Channel port.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Ports/Host Groups window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. In the Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window, click the Ports tab.3. Select the desired port, and then click Edit Ports.4. In the Edit Ports window, select the Address (Loop ID) check box, and then select the

address.5. Click Finish.

The Confirm window appears.6. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

7. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Configuring Fibre Channel ports 237

Page 238: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Related references

• “Addresses for Fibre Channel ports” (page 238)

Addresses for Fibre Channel portsThe following addresses are available for setting Fibre Channel ports.

Loop ID(120~125)

AL-PALoop ID(90~119)

AL-PALoop ID(60~89)

AL-PALoop ID(30~59

AL-PALoop ID(0~29)

AL-PA

120109049607630B40EF

1210F9147617531B31E8

122089246627432B22E4

123049345637333B13E2

124029443647234AE4E1

12501953C657135AD5E0

--963A666E36AC6DC

--9739676D37AB7DA

--9836686C38AA8D9

--9935696B39A99D6

--10034706A40A710D5

--10133716941A611D4

--10232726742A512D3

--10331736643A313D2

--1042E7465449F14D1

--1052D7563459E15CE

--1062C765C469D16CD

--1072B775A479B17CC

--1082A7859489818CB

--109297956499719CA

--110278055509020C9

--111268154518F21C7

--112258253528822C6

--113238352538423C5

--1141F8451548224C3

--1151E854E558125BC

--1161D864D568026BA

--1171B874C577C27B9

--11818884B587A28B6

--11917894A597929B5

238 Managing logical volumes

Page 239: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Setting the fabric switchWhen you configure your storage system, specify whether the hosts and the storage system areconnected via a fabric switch.

NOTE: In FCoE networks, Fabric is fixed to ON. Therefore, you do not need to set Fabric.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Ports/Host Groups window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. In the Ports/Host Groups/ISCSI Targets window, click the Ports tab.3. Select the desired port, and then click Edit Ports.4. Select a check box of Fabric, and select ON if you set the fabric switch. If you do not set

the fabric switch, select OFF.5. Click Finish.

The Confirm window appears.6. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

7. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Fibre Channel topologyThe term Fibre Channel topology indicates how devices are connected to each other. Fibrechannel provides the following types of topology:

• Fabric: Uses a fabric switch to connect a large number of devices (up to 16 million) together.

• FC-AL (Fibre Channel-Arbitrated Loop): A shared interface that can connect up to 126devices (AL-ports) together.

• Point-to-point: The simplest fibre topology connects two devices directly together.When configuring your storage system, use the LUN Manager window to specify whether thehosts and the storage system are connected using a fabric switch.If a fabric switch is used, specify FC-AL or point-to-point in the LUN Manager window. If a fabricswitch is used, consult the documentation for the fabric switch to learn whether FC-AL orpoint-to-point should be used. Some fabric switches require you to specify point-to-point to getthe system running.If no fabric switch is used, specify FC-AL.The combination of the topology which is specified inConnection Type and the port speed whichis specified in Port Speed is restricted. For details, see “Combination of data-transfer speed andconnection type” (page 236).

Configuring Fibre Channel ports 239

Page 240: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

In FCoE networks, Connection Type is fixed to P-to-P. Therefore, you do not need to setConnection Type.

Example of FC-AL and point-to-point topology

Setting the Fibre Channel topologyProcedure1. Open the Ports/Host Groups window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. In the window, click the Ports tab.3. Select the desired port, and then click Edit Ports.4. Under Connection Type, select FC-AL or P-to-P.5. Click Finish.

The Confirm window opens.6. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value <date>-<window name> is entered by default.

7. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Configuring hostsYou can configure hosts in your storage system. You can also modify the host configuration withLUN Manager when the system is in operation.Read the following topics concerning host modes before configuring hosts:

• “Host modes for host groups” (page 241)

• “Host mode options” (page 242)

240 Managing logical volumes

Page 241: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Configuring hosts includes the following tasks:

• “Find WWN of the host bus adapter” (page 245)

• “Creating a host group and registering hosts in the host group (in a Fibre Channelenvironment)” (page 248))

Configure hosts workflow1. Determine the host modes and host mode options you will use.2. Determine the WWN of the host bus adapters that you will use.3. Create host groups.4. Register host groups.

Host modes for host groupsThe following table lists the host modes that are available for use on the XP7 Storage. Carefullyreview and determine which host modes you will need to use when configuring your system andobserve the cautions concerning using certain host modes. Host modes and host mode optionsmust be set on the port before the host is connected. If you change host modes or host modeoptions after the host is connected, the host (server) will not recognize it.

When to select this modeHost mode

When registering Red Hat Linux server hosts or IRIX server hosts in the host group00 Standard

When registering VMware server hosts in the host group101 VMware

When registering OpenVMS server hosts in the host group05 OpenVMS

When registering Tru64 server hosts in the host group07 Tru64

When registering HP-UX server hosts in the host group08 Hewlett PackardEnterprise

When registering Solaris server hosts in the host group09 Solaris

When registering NetWare server hosts in the host group0A NetWare

When registering Windows server hosts in the host group20C Windows

When registering AIX server hosts in the host group0F AIX

When registering VMware server hosts in the host group. If the virtual host on VMwarerecognizes LUs by the Raw Device Mapping (RDM) method, set the host mode relatedto OS of the virtual host.

21 VMware Extension

When registering Windows server hosts in the host group.2C Windows Extension

Notes:1. There are no functional differences between host mode 01 and 21. When you first connect a host, it is

recommended that you set host mode 21.2. There are no functional differences between host mode 0C and 2C. When you first connect a host, it is

recommended that you set host mode 2C.

Configuring hosts 241

Page 242: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Host mode optionsThe following table lists host mode options that are available to use for configuring hosts on theXP7 Storage.

When to select this optionHost mode optionsNo.

When VERITAS Database Edition/Advanced Cluster for Real ApplicationClusters or VERITAS Cluster Server 4.0 or later (I/O fencing function) isused.

VERITAS Database Edition/Advanced Cluster

2

When all of the following conditions are satisfied:TPRLO6

• The host mode 0C Windows or 2C Windows Extension is used.

• The Emulex host bus adapter is used.

• The mini-port driver is used.

• TPRLO=2 is specified for the mini-port driver parameter of the host busadapter.

When all of the following conditions are satisfied:Automatic recognition functionof LUN

7

• The host mode 00 Standard or 09 Solaris is used.

• SUN StorEdge SAN Foundation Software Version 4.2 or higher is used.

• You want to automate recognition of increase and decrease of deviceswhen genuine SUN HBA is connected.

When all of the following conditions are satisfied:No display for ghost LUN12

• The host mode 08 HP is used.

• You want to suppress creation of device files for devices to which pathsare not defined.

When you want to be informed by SIM (service information message) thatthe number of link failures detected between ports exceeds the threshold.

SIM report at link failure113

When all of the following conditions are satisfied:TruCluster with ContinuousAccess Synchronous function

14

• The host mode 07 Tru64 is used.

• You want to use TruCluster to set a cluster to each of primary volumeand secondary volume for Continuous Access Synchronous or ContinuousAccess Journal.

When all of the following conditions are satisfied:HACMP15

• The host mode 0F AIX is used.

• HACMP 5.1 Version 5.1.0.4 or later, HACMP4.5 Version 4.5.0.13 or later,or HACMP5.2 or later is used.

When Veritas Cluster Server is used.Veritas Cluster Server22

When you want to shorten the recovery time on the host side if the datatransfer failed

REC Command Support 123

When one of the following conditions are satisfied:Support SPC-3 behavior onPersistent Reservation

25

• Using Windows Server Failover Clustering (WSFC)

• Using Microsoft Failover Cluster (MSFC)

• Using Symantec Cluster Server, also known as Veritas Cluster Server(VCS)

• Using a configuration other than above with the PERSISTENT RESERVEOUT (Service Action=REGISTER AND IGNORE EXISTING KEY)command, change the status response from Reservation-Conflict toGood-Status when there is not a registered key to be deleted

242 Managing logical volumes

Page 243: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

When to select this optionHost mode optionsNo.

When all of the following conditions are satisfied:Set/Report Device Identifierenable

33

• Host mode 05 OpenVMS2 or 08 HP is used.

• You want to enable commands to assign a nickname of the device.

• You want to set UUID to identify a logical volume from the host.

When you want to control the following ranges per host group when receivingTarget Reset:

Change the nexus specified inthe SCSI Target Reset

39

• Range of job resetting.

• Range of UAs (Unit Attentions) defined.

When all of the following conditions are satisfied:V-VOL expansion40

• The host mode 0C Windows or 2C Windows Extension is used.

• You want to automate recognition of the THP V-VOL capacity afterincreasing the THP V-VOL capacity.

When you want to execute commands to recognize the device preferentially.Prioritized device recognitioncommand

41

When the command queue is full in the XP7 storage system connecting withthe HP-UX host, and if you want to respond Queue Full, instead of Busy,from the storage system to the host.

Queue Full Response43

When you want to adjust the number of buffer-to-buffer credits (BBCs) tocontrol the transfer data size by the Fibre Channel, for example when the

BB Credit Set Up Option149

distance between MCU and RCU of the Continuous Access Synchronous (or High Availability) pair is long (approximately 100 kilometers) and thePoint-to-Point topology is used.Use the combination of this host mode option and the host mode option 50.

When you want to adjust the number of buffer-to-buffer credits (BBCs) tocontrol the transfer data size by the Fibre Channel, for example when the

BB Credit Set Up Option250

distance between MCU and RCU of the Continuous Access Synchronous (or High Availability) pair is long (approximately 100 kilometers) and thePoint-to-Point topology is used.Use the combination of this host mode option and the host mode option 49.

If you want to adjust the response time of the host I/O, for example whenthe distance between MCU and RCU of the Continuous Access Synchronous

Round Trip Set Up Option351

( or High Availability) pair is long (approximately 100 kilometers) and thePoint-to-Point topology is used.Use the combination of this host mode option and the host mode option 65.

When the VAAI (vStorage API for Array Integration) function of VMwareESX/ESXi 4.1 is used.

(VAAI) Support Option for theEXTENDED COPY command

54

When HP-UX 11.31 is used, and when you want to prevent adding or deletingof LUN0.

LUN0 Change Guard60

When you connect the storage system to VMware ESXi 5.0 or later and usethe VAAI function for T10.

(VAAI) Support Option forvStorage APIs based on T10standards

63

When the OPEN Fibre Channel port configuration applies to following:Change of the ED_TOV value67

• The topology is the Fibre Channel direct connection.

• The port type is Target or RCU Target.

When using the Page Reclamation function from the environment which isbeing connected to the Linux host.

Support Page Reclamation forLinux

68

Configuring hosts 243

Page 244: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

When to select this optionHost mode optionsNo.

When you want to change the unit attention (UA) from NOT READY to MEDIUMERROR during the pool-VOLs blockade.

Change the Unit Attention forBlocked Pool-VOLs

71

When using General Parallel File System (GPFS) in the XP7 Storageconnecting to the AIX host.

AIX GPFS Support72

When using following functions provided by Windows Server 2012 (WS2012)from the environment which is being connected to the WS2012.

Support Option for WS201273

• Thin Provisioning function

• Offload Data Transfer (ODX) function

When all of following conditions are satisfied:The non-preferred path option78

• High Availability is used in the configuration with the data centers (Metroconfiguration).

• Hitachi Dynamic Link Manager is used as the alternative path software.

• The host group is on the non-optimized path of Hitachi Dynamic LinkManager.

• The performance deterioration of I/O responses can be avoided withoutI/O using the non-optimized path of Hitachi Dynamic Link Manager.

By using the iSCSI interface, if the storage system connects with the hostof which OS is not supported of the Multi Text function. For instance,

Multi Text OFF80

connecting the storage system and the host of RHEL5.0 which does notsupport the MultiText-function.

In the environment by iSCSI connection, the delay replying of the DelayedAcknowledgment function which is located on the upper layer is restrained

NOP-In Suppress Mode81

by sending NOP-IN of executing of sense commands such as Inquiry, Testunit ready, or Mode sense. However, select this option when connecting thestorage system and the host which is not necessary of the NOP-IN sending.However, when connecting the storage system and the host which does notneed of the NOP-IN sending, select this option.For instance:

• When connecting the storage system and the Open Enterprise Server ofNovell Co., Ltd.

• When connecting the storage system and winBoot/i of emBoot Co., Ltd..

Select this option when the CHAP authentication is performed at the time ofthe discovery login In the iSCSI connection environment.

Discovery CHAP Mode82

For instance: When the CHAP authentication is performed at the time of thediscovery login in the iSCSI environment of the VMware host and storagesystem

When configuring alternate paths in the environment of connecting theVMware host and storage system: If waiting of replying of the target

Report iSCSI Full Portal ListMode

83

information from the host option mode 83 enabled port other than ports ofdiscovery login, select this host mode option.When both of the following are satisfied, select this host mode option:

• Configuring alternate paths in the environment of connecting the VMwarehost and storage system

• Waiting for replying of the target information from the ports other thanports of discovery login

When you want to control the following ranges per host group when receivingLU Reset:

Change the nexus specified inthe SCSI Logical Unit Reset

96

• Range of job resetting.

• Range of UAs (Unit Attentions) defined.

244 Managing logical volumes

Page 245: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

When to select this optionHost mode optionsNo.

When connecting to NAS Platform.Proprietary ANCHORcommand support

97

When all of the following conditions are satisfied:(HA) Standard InquiryExpansion for XP7 CVAE

102

• The OS of the host is Windows or AIX, and the MPIO function is used.

• HA (High Availability) is used.

• XP7 CVAE ( XP7 Command View Advanced Edition is used.

Notes:1. Configure these host mode options only when requested to do so.2. Set the UUID when you set host mode option 33 and host mode 05 openvms is used.3. Set the host mode option 51 for both ports on the local and remote storage systems.4. This host mode option does not support channel packages for 8FC16 and 16FE10. If these channel packages

are used, do not set the host mode option 51.

Find WWN of the host bus adapterBefore physically attaching the storage system to hosts, some preparation work needs to beperformed. When configuring a Fibre Channel environment, first verify that the fibre adaptersand the Fibre Channel device drivers are installed on the open-system hosts. Next, find the WorldWide Name (WWN) of the host bus adapter that is used in each open-system host.The WWN is a unique identifier for a host bus adapter in an open-system host, consisting of 16hexadecimal digits. The following topics describe how to find the WWN of a host on differentoperating systems. It is best to make a record of the WWNs of the hosts in your storage system,because you will need to enter these WWNs in LUN Manager dialog boxes to specify the hostsused in your storage system.

• “Finding a WWN on Windows” (page 245)

• “Finding a WWN on Oracle Solaris” (page 246)

• “Finding a WWN on AIX, IRIX, or Sequent” (page 246)

• “Finding WWN for HP-UX” (page 246)

Finding a WWN on WindowsHewlett Packard Enterprise supports the Emulex Fibre Channel adapter in a Windowsenvironment, and will support other adapters in the future. For further information on Fibre Channeladapter support, or when using a Fibre Channel adapter other than Emulex, contact the HewlettPackard Enterprise technical support for instructions on finding the WWN.Before attempting to acquire the WWN of the Emulex adapter, confirm whether the driver installedin the Windows 2000 or Windows Server 2003 environment is an Emulex port driver or an Emulexmini-port driver, and then follow the driver instructions.

Procedure1. Verify that the Fibre Channel adapters and the Fibre Channel device drivers are installed.2. Log on to the Windows 2000 host with administrator access.3. Go to the LightPulse Utility to open the LightPulse Utility window. If you do not have a

shortcut to the utility:1. Go to the Start menu, select Find and choose the Files and Folders option.2. On the Find dialog box, in Named type lputilnt.exe, and from the Look in list,

choose the data drive that contains the Emulex mini-port driver.3. Choose Find Now to search for the LightPulse utility.

If you still cannot find the LightPulse utility, contact Emulex technical support.

Configuring hosts 245

Page 246: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

4. Select lputilnt.exe from the Find: Files named list, and then press Enter.4. On the LightPulse Utility window, verify that any installed adapters appear in the tree.5. In the Category list, choose the Configuration Data option.6. In the Region list, choose the 16 World-Wide Name option. The WWN of the selected

adapter appears in the list on the right of the window.

Finding a WWN on Oracle SolarisHewlett Packard Enterprise supports the JNI Fibre Channel adapter in an Oracle Solarisenvironment. This document will be updated as needed to cover future adapter-specific informationas those adapters are supported. For further information on Fibre Channel adapter support, orif using a Fibre Channel adapter other than JNI, contact Hewlett Packard Enterprise technicalsupport for instructions for finding the WWN.

Procedure1. Verify that the Fibre Channel adapters and the Fibre Channel device drivers are installed.2. Log on to the Oracle Solaris host with root access.3. Type dmesg |grep Fibre to list the installed Fibre Channel devices and their WWNs.4. Verify that the Fibre Channel adapters listed are correct, and record the listed WWNs.

The following is an example of finding a WWN on Oracle Solaris.

# dmesg |grep Fibre <- Enter the dmesg command.:fcaw1: JNI Fibre Channel Adapter model FCWfcaw1: Fibre Channel WWN: 200000e0694011a4 <- Record the WWN.fcaw2: JNI Fibre Channel Adapter model FCWfcaw2: Fibre Channel WWN: 200000e06940121e <- Record the WWN.#

Finding a WWN on AIX, IRIX, or SequentTo find the WWN in an IBM AIX, SGI Irix, or Sequent environment, use the fabric switch that isconnected to the host. The method of finding the WWN of the connected server on each portusing the fabric switch depends on the type of switch. For instructions on finding the WWN, seethe manual of the corresponding switch.

Finding WWN for HP-UXYou can find the WWN in an HP-UX environment.

Procedure1. Verify that the Fibre Channel adapters and the Fibre Channel device drivers are installed.2. Log in to the HP-UX host with root access.3. At the command line prompt, type:

/usr/sbin/ioscan -fnC lan

This will list the attached Fibre Channel devices and their device file names. Record theFibre Channel device file name (for example, /dev/fcms0).

NOTE: When the A5158 Fibre Channel adapter is used, at the command line prompt,enter /usr/sbin/ioscan -fnC fc for the device name.

246 Managing logical volumes

Page 247: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

4. Use the fcmsutil command along with the Fibre Channel device name to list the WWNfor that Fibre Channel device. For example, to list the WWN for the device with the devicefile name /dev/fcms0, type:/opt/fcms/bin/fcmsutil /dev/fcms0

Record the Fibre Channel device file name (for example, /dev/td0).

NOTE: When using the A5158 Fibre Channel adapter, list the WWN for the device withthe device file name as follows:/opt/fcms/bin/fcmsutil <device file name>

5. Record the WWN and repeat the above steps for each Fibre Channel device that you wantto use.

Result

# /usr/sbin/ioscan -fnC lan <- 1Class I H/W Path Driver S/W State H/W TypeDescription==============================================================lan 0 8/0.5 fcT1_cntl CLAIMED INTERFACE HPFibre Channel Mass Storage Cntl

/dev/fcms0 <-2lan 4 8/4.5 fcT1_cntl CLAIMED INTERFACE HPFibre Channel Mass Storage Cntl

/dev/fcms4 <-2lan 5 8/8.5 fcT1_cntl CLAIMED INTERFACE HPFibre Channel Mass Storage Cntl

/dev/fcms5 <-2lan 6 8/12.5 fcT1_cntl CLAIMED INTERFACE HPFibre Channel Mass Storage Cntl

/dev/fcms6 <-2lan 1 10/8/1/0 btlan4 CLAIMED INTERFACEPCI(10110009) -- Built-in #1lan 2 10/8/2/0 btlan4 CLAIMED INTERFACEPCI(10110009) -- Built-in #2lan 3 10/12/6 lan2 CLAIMED INTERFACEBuilt-in LAN

/dev/diag/lan3 /dev/ether3 /dev/lan3## fcmsutil /dev/fcms0 <-3

Local N_Port_ID is = 0x000001N_Port Node World Wide Name = 0x10000060B0C08294

N_Port Port World Wide Name = 0x10000060B0C08294 <- 4Topology = IN_LOOP

Speed = 1062500000 (bps)HPA of card = 0xFFB40000EIM of card = 0xFFFA000DDriver state = READY

Number of EDB's in use = 0Number of OIB's in use = 0

Number of Active Outbound Exchanges = 1Number of Active Login Sessions = 2

#1: Enter the ioscan.2: Device name3: Enter the fcmsutil command.4: Record the WWN.

Configuring hosts 247

Page 248: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Creating a host group and registering hosts in the host group (in a Fibre Channelenvironment)

After discovering the WWNs of the host bus adapters, you create a host group and register hostsin the host groups in a Fibre Channel environment.You can connect multiple server hosts of different platforms to one port of your XP7 storagesystem. When configuring your storage system, you should group server hosts connected to thestorage system by host groups. For example, if HP-UX hosts and Windows hosts are connectedto a port, create one host group for HP-UX hosts and create another host group for Windowshosts. Then register HP-UX hosts to the corresponding host group and register Windows hoststo the other host group.

NOTE: The above example relates to configurations in which all HP-UX hosts are on the samecluster.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.Before you can set LU paths, you must register the hosts in host groups. For example, if HP-UXhosts and Windows hosts are connected to a port, register HP-UX hosts and Windows hostsseparately in two different host groups.When registering a host, you must also specify the WWN of the host bus adapters.When registering hosts in multiple host groups, set the security switch (LUN security) to enabled,and then specify the WWN of the host bus adapter.When registering a host, you can assign a nickname to the host bus adapter. If you assign anickname, you can easily identify each host bus adapter in the LUN Manager window. AlthoughWWNs are also used to identify each host bus adapter, the nickname that you assign will bemore helpful because you can name host bus adapters after the host installation site or for thehost owners.

Procedure1. Open the Create Host Groups window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. Click Create Host Groups.3. In the Create Host Groups window, enter the host group name in the Host Group Name

box.• It is convenient if you name each host group after the host platform.

• A host group name can consist of up to 32 ASCII characters (letters, numerals, andsymbols). However, you cannot use the following symbols for host group names: \ / : ,; * ? " < > |

• You cannot use space characters for the first and the last characters in host groupnames.

• Host group names are case-sensitive. For example, the host group names wnt andWnt represent different host groups.

248 Managing logical volumes

Page 249: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

4. Select the resource group in which a host group is created.If you select Any, ports to which you may add host groups within all ports assigned to a userare displayed in the Available Ports list. If you select other than Any, ports to which youmay add host groups within the ports assigned to the selected resource group are displayedin the Available Ports list.

5. Select a host mode from theHost Mode list. When selecting a host mode, you must considerthe platform and some other factors.

6. Select hosts to be registered in a host group.If the desired host has ever been connected with a cable to another port in the storagesystem, select the desired host bus adapter from the Available Hosts list.If there is no host to be registered, skip this step and move to the next step. Otherwise, ahost group with no host would be created.If the desired host has never been connected via a cable to any port in the storage system,perform the following steps:1. Click Add New Host under the Available Hosts list.

The Add New Host dialog box opens.2. Enter the desired WWN in the HBA WWN box.3. If necessary, enter a nickname for the host bus adapter in the Host Name box.4. Click OK to close the Add New Host dialog box.5. Select the desired host bus adapter from the Available Hosts list.

7. Select the port to which you want to add the host group. For details about host modes, see“Host modes for host groups” (page 241).If you select multiple ports, you may add the same host group to multiple ports by oneoperation.

8. If necessary, clickOption and select host mode options. For details about host mode options,see “Host mode options” (page 242).

NOTE: When you click Option, the dialog box expands to display the list of host modeoptions. The Mode No. column indicates option numbers. Select an option you want tospecify and click Enable.

9. Click Add to add the host group.By repeating steps from 2 to 8, you can create multiple host groups.If you select a row and click Detail, the Host Group Properties window appears. If youselect a row and click Remove, the message appears asking whether you want to removethe selected row or rows. If you want to remove the row, click OK.

10. Click Finish to display the Confirm window.To continue to add LUN paths, click Next.

11. Confirm the settings and enter the task name in the Task Name box.A task name can consist of up to 32 ASCII characters (letters, numerals, and symbols). Tasknames are case-sensitive. (date) - (task name) is input by default.If you select a row and click Detail, the Host Group Properties window appears.

12. Click Apply in the Confirm window.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Configuring hosts 249

Page 250: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Configuring LU pathsWhen provisioning your storage system, and after configuring ports, hosts, and host groups, youmust configure Fibre Channel or iSCSI target LU paths. LUN Manager is required for these tasks.You can also modify the LU paths configuration when the system is in operation.

Configure LU paths workflow• Define LU paths.

• Set a UUID, if desired.

• Define alternate LU paths.

Defining LU pathsIn a Fibre Channel or iSCSI environment, you must define LU paths and associate host groupsor iSCSI targets with logical volumes. For example, if you associate a host group or an iSCSItarget consisting of three hosts with logical volumes, LU paths are defined between the threehosts and the logical volumes.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Add LUN Paths window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Select the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.3. Click Add LUN Paths.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets and select the target host group or iSCSI

target.3. Click Add LUN Paths.

2. In the Add LUN Paths window, select the desired LDEVs from the Available LDEVs table,and then click Add.Selected LDEVs are listed in the Selected LDEVs table.

3. Click Next.4. Select the desired host groups or iSCSI targets from the Available Host Groups table, and

then click Add.Selected host groups or iSCSI targets are listed in the Selected Host Groups table.

5. Click Next.6. Confirm the defined LU paths.

• To change the LU path settings, click Change LUN IDs and type the LUN ID that youwant to change.

• To change the LDEV name, click Change LDEV Settings. In the Change LDEVSettings window, change the LDEV name.

7. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

250 Managing logical volumes

Page 251: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

8. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

9. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Setting a UUIDYou can set an arbitrary ID to identify a logical volume from the host using LUN Manager whenhost mode option 33 is set to on. The ID is referred to as the UUID (user-definable LUN identifier)and is typically composed of a Prefix and an Initial Number.Note the following when setting a UUID:

• If host mode 05 OpenVMS is used, the host mode option 33 is set to ON, LUs that do nothave UUID settings are inaccessible.

• If host mode 05 OpenVMS is used with host mode option 33 set to OFF, LUs that haveUUID settings are inaccessible.

The following rules apply to setting a UUID:

• These characters cannot be used for UUID: \ / : , ; * ? " < > |

• A space character cannot be used as the first or the last character of a UUID.

• UUID is case-sensitive. For example, Abc and abc are different UUIDs.To keep track of device information, create a correspondence table similar to the example in“Correspondence table for defining devices” (page 253).

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.Before editing UUID settings, review the information on “UUID requirements” (page 252).

Procedure1. Open the Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Expand the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. In the Host Groups pane, click the link of the Port ID of the host group.3. Click the link of a Host Group Name.4. Click the LUNs tab.5. Select one or more logical units to which volumes are assigned (if a volume is assigned to

an LU, the columns on the right of the LUN column are not empty).When multiple LUs are selected, the same UUID is set to all selected LUs.

6. Click More Actions, and then select Edit UUIDs.7. In the Edit UUIDs window, in Prefix, type the UUID.

If a UUID is already specified, you can change it. The UUID before changing appears inUUID in the Edit UUIDs window. However, if multiple LUs, or N/As are selected, the Prefixbox is blank.

Configuring LU paths 251

Page 252: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

For an OpenVMS server host, enter a UUID composed of a Prefix and an Initial Number.The Prefix may include up to 5 digits, from 1 to 32767, and the Initial Number may includeup to 5 digits, from 0 to 32767.For a server host other than OpenVMS, enter a UUID composed of a Prefix and an InitialNumber. The Prefix may include up to 64 ASCII characters (letters, numerals and symbols)and the Initial Number may include up to 9 digits.When changing the server host OS from HP-UX to Open VMS, or from Open VMS to HP-UX,the same UUID cannot be used continuously. Clear the UUID setting (see “Clearing a UUIDsetting” (page 257)), and then set the proper UUID for a server host.

8. To sequentially number the UUIDs, type the first digit in the Initial Number box. The followingrules apply to the Initial Number:1: Up to 9 numbers are added (1, 2, 3, ... 9).08: Up to 92 numbers are added (08, 09, 10, ... 99).If the host mode is set to OpenVMS, the numbers are as follows:8, 9, 10, ... 9923: Up to 77 numbers are added (23, 24, 25, ... 99).

9. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

10. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

11. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

UUID requirementsA UUID (user-definable LUN identifier) is typically composed of a Prefix and an Initial Number.The following rules apply to defining a UUID:

• These characters cannot be used for a UUID: \ / : , ; * ? " < > |

• A space character cannot be used as the first or the last character of a UUID.

• UUIDs are case-sensitive. For example, Abc and abc are different UUIDs.Also note the following when defining a UUID:

• If host mode 05 OpenVMS is used with host mode option 33 set to ON, LUs that do not haveUUID settings are inaccessible.

• If host mode 05 OpenVMS is used with host mode option 33 set to OFF, LUs that have UUIDsettings are inaccessible.

• For an OpenVMS server host, the Prefix can include up to 5 digits, from 1 to 32767, andthe Initial Number can include up to 5 digits, from 0 to 32767.

• For a server host other than OpenVMS, the Prefix can include up to 64 ASCII characters(letters, numerals and symbols) and the Initial Number can include up to 9 digits.

252 Managing logical volumes

Page 253: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Correspondence table for defining devicesWhen configuring the storage system, you will need definition information about devices set byLUN Manager, for example, LUs, LDKC:CU:LDEV, or UUID. A correspondence table similar tothe example below is useful and recommended when collecting this information.

OpenVMS device filename

UUIDLDKC:CU:LDEVLUPort

$1$dga14814800:00:300000BR

$1$dga14914900:00:310001BR

.....

.....

.....

Defining alternate LU pathsThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.You may want to define alternate LU paths so that if one LU path fails, you will be able to switchto its alternate path.To create an alternate LU path, copy the original LU path from one port to another. For example,if you want to define an alternate for the LU path from the CL1-A port to logical volume 00:00:01,copy the LU path from the CL1-A port to another port.Use one of these methods to copy LU paths:

• Copy all the LU paths defined in a host group or an iSCSI target

• Copy one or more (but not all) LU paths defined in a host group or an iSCSI targetBefore taking the following steps:

• See “LUN Manager rules, restrictions, and guidelines for managing LUNs” (page 234) forimportant information.

• To define alternate paths when LUN security is disabled, you must redefine the LU path.

Copying all LU paths defined in a host groupUse this procedure to copy all LU paths defined in a host group.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Expand the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Expand the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. In the Host Groups pane, select the Port ID of a host group.3. Click More Actions and select Create Alternative LUN Paths.

Configuring LU paths 253

Page 254: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

4. In the Create Alternative LUN Paths window, select the copy destination port from theAvailable Ports table, and then click Add.The selected ports appear in the Selected Ports table.

5. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

6. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

7. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Copying all LU paths defined in an iSCSI targetUse this procedure to copy all LU paths defined in a host group.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Expand the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Expand the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. In the iSCSI Targets pane, select the Port ID of a iSCSI target.3. Click More Actions and select Create Alternative LUN Paths.4. In the Create Alternative LUN Paths window, select the copy destination port from the

Selected Ports table, and then click Add.The selected ports appear in the Selected Ports table.

5. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

6. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

7. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Copying selected (but not all) LU paths defined in a host groupYou can use this procedure to copy the LU paths associated with a selected host group.

254 Managing logical volumes

Page 255: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Procedure1. Open the Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Expand the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports / Hosts Groups / iSCSI Targets.

2. In the Host Groups pane, click the link of the Port ID of the host group.3. Click the link of a Host Group Name.4. Click LUNs tab.5. Select one or more logical units to which volumes are assigned (if a volume is assigned to

a logical unit, the columns on the right of the LUN column are not empty).6. Select Copy LUN Paths.7. In the Copy LUN Paths window, select the host group to which you want to paste paths

from the Available Host Groups table, and then click Add.The selected host groups appear in the Selected Host Groups table.

8. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

9. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

10. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Copying selected (but not all) LU paths defined in an iSCSI targetYou can use this procedure to copy the LU paths associated with a selected host group.

Procedure1. Open the Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Expand the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports / Hosts Groups / iSCSI Targets.

2. In the iSCSI Targets pane, click the link of the Port ID of the iSCSI target.3. Click the link of a iSCSI target.4. Click LUNs tab.5. Select one or more logical units to which volumes are assigned (if a volume is assigned to

a logical unit, the columns on the right of the LUN column are not empty).6. Select Copy LUN Paths.

Configuring LU paths 255

Page 256: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

7. In the Copy LUN Paths window, select the iSCSI target to which you want to paste pathsfrom the Available iSCSI Targets table, and then click Add.The selected host groups appear in the Selected iSCSI Targets table.

8. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

9. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

10. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Managing LU pathsYou can modify the LU paths configuration with LUN Manager when the system is in operation,but not when host I/O is in progress. Managing LU paths includes the following tasks:

• “Deleting LU paths” (page 256)

• “Clearing a UUID setting” (page 257)

• “Viewing LU path settings” (page 258)

Deleting LU paths

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

CAUTION: Do not delete LU paths when host I/O is in progress.

Procedure1. Open the Ports/Host Groups window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Expand the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. Click the link of a host group.3. Select the LUNs tab.4. Select the LU path you want to delete.

CAUTION: When an LDEV is selected andDelete LUNPaths is performed, all LUN pathsof the selected LDEV are deleted by default.

5. Click More Actions and select Delete LUN Paths.

256 Managing logical volumes

Page 257: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

6. In the Delete LUN Paths window, confirm that the LU paths that you want to delete arelisted in Selected LUN Paths.If LU paths that you do not want to delete are listed, select the LU path you do not want todelete, and then click Remove from Delete process.

CAUTION: When an LDEV is selected andDelete LUNPaths is performed, all LUN pathsof the selected LDEV are deleted by default.

7. If necessary, check the Delete all defined LUN paths to above LDEVs check box. Whenchecked, all additional LU paths on the selected LDEVs will be deleted.

8. Click Finish to open the Confirm window.If you want to start shredding operations to delete the data of the volume, click Next. Fordetailed information about shredding operations, see the XP7 Volume Shredder for Openand Mainframe Systems User Guide.

9. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

10. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

11. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.If you delete many paths at one time, the deletion process may take time and the dialog boxmay seem to hang temporarily.

Clearing a UUID settingYou can clear the UUID setting that has been set to identify a logical volume from the host.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Logical Devices window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click Volumes, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Logical Devices.

2. In the LDEVs pane of the Logical Devices window, click Create LDEVs.3. Select the LDEVs with the UUID setting you want to clear.4. Select Delete UUIDs. The Delete UUIDs window opens.5. Click Finish.

The Confirm window appears.6. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

Managing LU paths 257

Page 258: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

7. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Viewing LU path settings

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Expand the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:• Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.

2. Click the link of a host group or iSCSI target.3. Select the LUNs tab.4. Select a LUN ID to open the LUN Properties window.

Releasing LUN reservation by hostThe following explains how to release forcibly a LUN reservation by a host.

Before you beginYou must have the Storage Administrator (System Resource Management) role to perform thistask.

CAUTION: If you perform the releasing a LUN reservation by a host, the host which is connectedto LDEV by LUN path is affected.

Procedure1. Open the Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Expand the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. Click the link of a Host Group Name.3. Select the LUNs tab.4. Click More Actions, and then click View Host-Reserved LUNs.5. In the Host-Reserved LUNs window, select a LUN, and then click Release Host-Reserved

LUNs.6. Confirm the settings and enter a unique Task Name.

A task name can consist of up to 32 ASCII characters (letters, numerals, and symbols). Tasknames are case-sensitive. (date) - (task name) is input by default.

258 Managing logical volumes

Page 259: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

7. Click Apply.If Go to tasks window for status is checked, the Tasks window opens.

LUN security on portsTo protect mission-critical data in your storage system from illegal access, apply security policiesto logical volumes. Use LUN Manager to enable LUN security on ports to safeguard LUs fromillegal access.If LUN security is enabled on ports, host groups affect which host can access which LUs. Hostscan access only the LUs associated with the host group to which the hosts belong. Hosts cannotaccess LUs associated with other host groups. For example, hosts in the hp-ux host groupcannot access LUs associated with the windows host group. Also, hosts in the windows hostgroup cannot access LUs associated with the hp-ux host group.

Examples of enabling and disabling LUN security on ports

Enabling LUN securityIn the following example, LUN security is enabled on port CL1-A. The two hosts in the hg-lnxhost group can access only three LUs (00:00:00, 00:00:01, and 00:00:02). The two hosts in thehg-hpux host group can access only two LUs (00:02:01 and 00:02:02). The two hosts in thehg-solar host group can access only two LUs (00:01:05 and 00:01:06).

Disabling LUN securityTypically, you do not need to disable LUN security on ports. For example, if LUN security isdisabled on a port, the connected hosts can access only the LUs associated with host group 0,and cannot access LUs associated with any other host group.

LUN security on ports 259

Page 260: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Host group 0 is the only host group reserved, by default, for each port. If you use the LUNManager window to view a list of host groups in a port, host group 0, indicated by the number00, usually appears at the top of the list.The default name of host group 0 consists of the port name, a hyphen, and the number 00. Forexample, the default name of host group 0 for port 1A is 1A-G00. However, you can change thedefault name of the host group 0.LUN security is disabled, by default, on each port. When you configure your storage system, youmust enable LUN security on each port to which hosts are connected.

Enabling LUN security on a port

Before you beginOn of the following roles is required to perform this task:

• Storage Administrator (System Resource Management)

• Storage Administrator (Provisioning)To protect mission-critical data in your storage system from illegal access, secure the logicalvolumes in the storage system. Use LUN Manager to secure LUs from illegal access by enablingLUN security on ports.By default, LUN security is disabled on each port. When registering hosts in multiple host groups,you must enable LUN security (set the switch to enabled). When you change LUN security fromdisabled to enabled, you must specify the WWN of the host bus adapter.

CAUTION: It is best to enable LUN security on each port when configuring your storage system.Although you can enable LUN security on a port when host I/O is in progress, I/O is rejected witha security guard after enabling.

Procedure1. Open the Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Expand the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. In the Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window, click the Ports tab.3. Select the desired port, and then click Edit Ports.4. Select the Port Security check box, and then select Enable.

260 Managing logical volumes

Page 261: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

5. Click Finish. A message appears, confirming whether to switch the LUN security. ClickingOK opens the Confirm window.

6. In the Confirm window, confirm the settings, in Task Name type a unique name for this taskor accept the default, and then click Apply.If Go to tasks window for status is checked, the Tasks window opens.

Disabling LUN security on a port

Before you beginOn of the following roles is required to perform this task:

• Storage Administrator (System Resource Management)

• Storage Administrator (Provisioning)

CAUTION: Do not disable LUN security on a port when host I/O is in progress.

Procedure1. Open the Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. In the Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window, click the Ports tab.3. Select the desired port, and then click Edit Ports.4. Select the Port Security check box, and then select Disable.5. Click Finish. If disabling LUN security, a message appears, indicating that only host group

0 (the group whose number is 00) is to be enabled. Clicking OK opens the Confirm window.6. In the Confirm window, confirm the settings, in Task Name type a unique name for this task

or accept the default, and then click Apply.If Go to tasks window for status is checked, the Tasks window opens.

Setting Fibre Channel authenticationWhen configuring a Fibre Channel environment, use the Authentication window to set userauthentication on host groups, Fibre Channel ports, and fabric switches of the storage system.

NOTE: Authentication operations are performed in a Remote Web Console secondary window.For more information about enabling and using secondary windows, see the XP7 Remote WebConsole User Guide.

The hosts to be connected must be configured for authentication by host groups (and forauthentication of host groups by the host, if required). For details on how to configure the hostfor CHAP authentication, see the documentation of the operating system and Fibre Channeldriver in your environment.

NOTE: In FCoE networks, user authentication is not supported.

Setting Fibre Channel authentication 261

Page 262: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

The following topics provide information for managing user authentication on host groups, FibreChannel ports, and fabric switches:

• “User authentication” (page 262)

• “Fibre Channel authentication” (page 268)

• “Fibre channel port authentication” (page 273)

• “Setting Fibre Channel port authentication” (page 273)

• “Registering user information on a Fibre Channel port” (page 274)

• “Registering user information on a fabric switch” (page 275)

• “Clearing fabric switch user information” (page 276)

• “Setting the fabric switch authentication mode” (page 276)

• “Enabling or disabling fabric switch authentication” (page 277)

User authenticationWhen configuring a Fibre Channel environment, use LUN Manager to set user authenticationfor ports between the XP7 storage system and hosts. In a Fibre Channel environment, the portsand hosts use Null DH-CHAP or CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol with aNull Diffie-Hellmann algorithm) as the authentication method.User authentication is performed in a Fibre Channel environment in three phases:1. A host group of the storage system authenticates a host that attempts to connect

(authentication of hosts).2. The host authenticates the connection-target host group of the storage system (authentication

of host groups).

CAUTION: Because the host bus adapters at present do not support this function, thisauthentication phase is unusable in the Fibre Channel environment.

3. A target port of the storage system authenticates a fabric switch that attempts to connect(authentication of fabric switches).

The storage system performs user authentication by host groups. Therefore, the host groupsand hosts need to have their own user information for performing user authentication.When a host attempts to connect to the storage system, the authentication of hosts phase starts.In this phase, first it is determined whether the host group requires authentication of the host. Ifit does not, the host connects to the storage system without authentication. If it does, authenticationis performed for the host, and when the host is authenticated successfully, processing goes onto the next phase.After successful authentication of the host, if the host requires user authentication for the hostgroup that is the connection target, the authentication of host groups phase starts. In this way,the host groups and hosts authenticate with each other, that is, mutual authentication. In theauthentication of host groups phase, if the host does not require user authentication for the hostgroup, the host connects to the storage system without authentication of the host group.The settings for authentication of host groups are needed only when you want to perform mutualauthentication. The following topics explain the settings required for user authentication.

• “Settings for authentication of hosts” (page 263)

• “Settings for authentication of ports (required if performing mutual authentication)” (page 263)

262 Managing logical volumes

Page 263: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Settings for authentication of hostsOn the storage system, use LUN Manager to specify whether to authenticate hosts on each hostgroup.On a host group that performs authentication, register user information (group name, user name,and secret) of the hosts that are allowed to connect to the host group. A secret is a passwordused in CHAP authentication. When registering user information, you can also specify whetherto enable or disable authentication on a host basis.On hosts, configure the operating system and Fibre Channel host bus adapter driver forauthentication by host groups with CHAP. You need to specify the user name and secret of thehost used for CHAP. For details, see the documentation of the operating system and FibreChannel host bus adapter driver in your environment.

Settings for authentication of ports (required if performing mutual authentication)On the storage system, use LUN Manager to specify user information (user name and secret)of each host group.On hosts, configure the operating system and Fibre Channel host bus adapter driver forauthenticating host groups with CHAP. You need to specify the user name and secret of the hostgroup that is the connection target. For details, see the documentation of the operating systemand Fibre Channel host bus adapter driver in your environment.

Host and host group authenticationWhen a host attempts to connect to the storage system, the connection of the authentication ofthe host differ depending on the host group settings.The following diagram illustrates the flow of authentication of hosts in a fibre channel environment.The connection uses cases are detailed below the diagram.

Setting Fibre Channel authentication 263

Page 264: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Authenticating hosts (Cases A, B, and C)The following cases describe the examples of performing authentication of host groupsCase A - The user information of the host is registered on the host group, andauthentication of the host is enabled.The host group authenticates the user information sent from the host. If authentication of thehost is successful, either of the following occurs:

• When the host is configured for mutual authentication, authentication of the host group isperformed.

• When the host is not configured for mutual authentication, the host connects to the storagesystem.

If the host is not configured for authentication by host groups with CHAP, the authentication failsand the host cannot connect to the storage system.Case B - The user information of the host is registered on the host group, but authenticationof the host is disabled.The host group does not perform authentication of the host. The host will connect to the storagesystem without authentication regardless of whether the host is configured for authentication byhost groups with CHAP.Case C - The user information of the host is not registered on the host group.Regardless of the setting on the host, the host group performs authentication of the host, butresults in failure. The host cannot connect to the storage system.

Not authenticating hosts (Case D)Case D is an example of connecting via a host group that does not perform authentication ofhosts. The host will connect to the storage system without authentication of the host regardlessof whether the host is configured for authentication by host groups with CHAP. In this case,though you need not register user information of the host on the host group, you can register it.You should register user information of all the hosts to be connected to a host group that performsauthentication of hosts. To allow a specific host to connect to such a host group withoutauthentication, configure the host group and the host as follows.On the host group: Register the user information of the host you want to allow to connect withoutauthentication, and then disable the authentication setting of the host.

Example of authenticating hosts in a Fibre Channel environmentFollowing is an example of authentication of hosts in a Fibre Channel environment. In this figure,WWNs of host bus adapters (HBAs) are abbreviated, such as A, B, and so on.

264 Managing logical volumes

Page 265: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

In the example, host group 1 performs authentication of hosts, and host group 2 does not.The user information of host A is registered on the host group 1, and the authentication settingis enabled. Therefore, if the authentication of the host is successful, host A can connect to thestorage system (or, the processing goes on to the authentication of the host group). As aprecondition of successful authentication, host A should be configured for authentication by hostgroups with CHAP.The user information of host B is also registered on the host group 1, but the authenticationsetting is disabled. Therefore, host B can connect to the storage system without authentication.The user information of host C is not registered on the host group 1. Therefore, when host Ctries to connect to the storage system, the authentication fails and the connection request isdenied regardless of the setting on host C.Host D is attached to the host group 2 that does not perform authentication of hosts. Therefore,host D can connect to the storage system without authentication.During authentication of hosts, the connection is determined depending on the combination ofthe following host group settings:

• Setting of the host group in the Port tree: enable ( ) or disable ( )

• Whether the user information of the host that attempts to connect is registered on the hostgroup

Setting Fibre Channel authentication 265

Page 266: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Port settings and connection resultsThe following table shows the relationships between host group settings and the connectionresults in authentication of hosts. Unless otherwise noted, connection results are as describedregardless of whether the host is configured for authentication by ports with CHAP.

Connection resultsHost settingsPort settings

User informationof host

Authentication athost group

Connected if the authentication of the hostsucceeded

RegisteredRegisteredEnabled

Failed to be authenticated and cannot beconnected

Not registeredRegisteredEnabled

Failed to be authenticated and cannot beconnected

RegisteredNot registeredEnabled

Connected without authentication of the host------DisabledIf a host is configured for authentication byports with CHAP, authentication of the hostwill fail. To allow such a host to connect to theport without authentication, do not configureit for authentication by ports with CHAP.

---: This item does not affect the connection results, or cannot be specified.

fabric switch authenticationWhen a host attempts to connect to the storage system, the connection results of theauthentication of the fabric switch differs depending on the fabric switch setting related to eachport.The following figure illustrates the flow of authentication between fabric switch settings and theconnection results. The setting of fabric switch authentication is independent from the setting ofhost authentication. The connection use cases are detailed below the diagram.

266 Managing logical volumes

Page 267: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Authenticating fabric switches by ports (Cases A, B, and C)

• If the user information of the fabric switch is registered on the port, and authentication of thefabric switch is enabled (Case A)Each port authenticates the fabric switch. If the authentication of the fabric switch endssuccessfully, either of the following actions occurs:

◦ When the fabric switch is configured for mutual authentication, processing continues toauthentication of the port.

◦ When the fabric switch is not configured for mutual authentication, the fabric switchconnects to the storage system.

If the fabric switch of the port is not configured for authentication with CHAP, the authenticationfails and the fabric switch cannot connect to the storage system.

• If the user information of the fabric switch is registered on the port, but authentication of thefabric switch is disabled (Case B)Each port does not perform authentication of the fabric switch. The fabric switch connectsto the storage system without authentication regardless of whether the fabric switch isconfigured for authentication with CHAP.

• If the user information of the fabric switch is not registered on the port (Case C)Regardless of the setting on the fabric switch, the port performs authentication of the fabricswitch, but results in failure. The fabric switch cannot connect to the storage system.

Not authenticating fabric switches by ports (Case D)The fabric switch connects to the storage system without authentication of the host regardlessof whether the fabric switch is configured for authentication with CHAP. In this case, though youneed not register the user information of the fabric switch on the port, you can register it.

Setting Fibre Channel authentication 267

Page 268: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

During authentication of hosts, the connection result is determined depending on the combinationof the following port settings:

• Setting of the port in the Port tree: enable ( ) or disable ( )

• Whether the user information of the fabric switch that attempts to connect is registered onthe port

fabric switch settings and connection resultsThe following table shows the relationship between the combinations of port settings and theconnection results in authentication of fabric switches. Unless otherwise noted, connection resultsare as described regardless of whether the host is configured for authentication by fabric switcheswith CHAP.

Connection resultsfabric switchsettings

Port Settings

User information offabric switch

Authentication atfabric switch

Connected if the authentication of the fabric switchsucceeded

RegisteredRegisteredEnabled

Failed to be authenticated and cannot beconnected

Not registeredRegisteredEnabled

Failed to be authenticated and cannot beconnected

RegisteredNot registeredEnabled

Connected without authentication of the fabricswitch

------Disabled

If a fabric switch is configured for authenticationby ports with CHAP, authentication of the host willfail. To allow such a fabric switch to connect to theport without authentication, do not configure it forauthentication by ports with CHAP.

---: This item does not affect the connection results, or cannot be specified.

Mutual authentication of portsIf mutual authentication is required, when authentication of a host is successful, the host in returnauthenticates the port. In authentication of ports, when user information (user name and secret)specified on the port side matches with that stored on the host, the host allows the host groupto connect.

Fibre Channel authentication

Enabling or disabling host authentication on a host groupYou can specify whether to authenticate hosts on each host group. Change the user authenticationsettings of host groups to enable or disable authentication of hosts. By default, user authenticationis disabled.Remote Web Console secondary windows must be defined for use in advance. When you selectModify from the Authentication secondary window to enable or disable host authentication,other users or programs are prevented from changing storage system settings. When you closethe secondary window,Modifymode is released. For more information on Remote Web Consolesecondary windows and Modify mode, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.

268 Managing logical volumes

Page 269: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Procedure1. Open the Authentication window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, expand the Storage Systems tree, right-click the target storage

system, and then select Other Functions.2. On the menu bar, select Actions, Port/Host Group, and then Authentication.In Remote Web Console:On the menu bar, select Actions, Port/Host Group, and thenAuthentication.

2. In the Authentication window, click to change to Modify mode.3. In the Port tree, double-click the Storage System folder.

If the storage system contains any Fibre Channel adapters, the Fibre folder appears belowthe Storage System folder.

4. Double-click the Fibre folder and Fibre Channel port icon under the Fibre folder.When you double-click the Fibre folder, the Fibre Channel ports contained in the storagesystem appear as icons. If you double-click the fibre channel ports, host groups appear asicons. On the right of each icon appears the host group name.

indicates the host group authenticates hosts. This is the default.

indicates the host group does not authenticate hosts.

5. Right-click a host group that appears with and select Authentication:Disable > Enable.The host group icon changes to , and the port name appears in blue.

6. Click Apply in the Authentication window. A message appears asking whether to applythe settings to the storage system.

7. Click OK to close the message. The settings are applied to the storage system.

To return the host group setting to , perform the same operation, except select theAuthentication:Enable > Disable menu in step 4.

Registering host user informationOn a host group that performs authentication of hosts, register user information of all hosts thatyou allow to connect.You should register user information of all the hosts to be connected to a host group that performsauthentication of hosts. To allow a specific host to connect to such a host group withoutauthentication, configure the host group and the host as follows.Remote Web Console secondary windows must be defined for use in advance. When you selectModify from theAuthentication secondary window to register host user information, other usersor programs are prevented from changing storage system settings. When you close the secondarywindow, Modify mode is released. For more information on Remote Web Console secondarywindows and Modify mode, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.On the host: It does not matter if you configure the host for authentication by ports with CHAP,or not.

Setting Fibre Channel authentication 269

Page 270: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Procedure1. Open the Authentication window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, expand the Storage Systems tree, right-click the target storage

system, and then select Other Functions.2. On the menu bar, select Actions, Port/Host Group, and then Authentication.In Remote Web Console:On the menu bar, select Actions, Port/Host Group, and thenAuthentication.

2. In the Authentication window, click to change to Modify mode.3. In the Port tree, select a port or host group on which you want to register user information

of a host.The user information of hosts currently registered on the selected port or host group appearsin theAuthentication Information (Host) list below theAuthentication Information (Target)list.

You can register user information of a host even if the port status is . In this case, however,the registered user information of a host is ignored.

4. Right-click any point in the Authentication Information (Host) list and select Add NewUser Information. TheAdd New User Information (Host) dialog box opens.

5. In this dialog box, specify the following user information of the host you want to allowconnection.• Group Name: Specify the group name of host bus adapter. Select one from the list. In

the list, all the group names of host bus adapters connected to the selected port by thecable appear.

• User Name: Specify the WWN of the host bus adapter with 16 characters. You can usehexadecimal characters in a user name.

• Secret: Specify the secret (that is, a password used in CHAP authentication) between12 to 32 characters.You can use alphanumeric characters, spaces, and the following symbols in a secret:. - + @ _ = : [ ] , ~

• Re-enter Secret: Specify the secret, again, for confirmation.

• Protocol: Specify the protocol used in the user authentication. This protocol is fixed toCHAP.

6. Click OK to close the Add New User Information (Host) dialog box. The specified userinformation of the host is added in blue in the Authentication Information (Host) list of theAuthentication window.

7. Click Apply in the Authentication window. A message appears asking whether to applythe settings to the storage system.

8. Click OK to close the message. The settings are applied to the storage system.

Changing host user information registered on a host groupYou can change the registered user name or secret of a host, and enable and disableauthentication settings after registration.Remote Web Console secondary windows must be defined for use in advance. When you selectModify from theAuthentication secondary window to change host user information, other usersor programs are prevented from changing storage system settings. When you close the secondarywindow, Modify mode is released. For more information on Remote Web Console secondarywindows and Modify mode, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.

270 Managing logical volumes

Page 271: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

You cannot change the WWN when you change user information.

Procedure1. Open the Authentication window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, expand the Storage Systems tree, right-click the target storage

system, and then select Other Functions.2. On the menu bar, select Actions, Port/Host Group, and then Authentication.In Remote Web Console:On the menu bar, select Actions, Port/Host Group, and thenAuthentication.

2. In the Authentication window, click to change to Modify mode.3. In the Port tree, expand the Fibre folder and select a port or host group on which the user

information you want to change is registered.All the user information of the hosts registered on the selected port or host group appearsin the Authentication Information (Host) list below the Authentication Information(Target).

4. In the User Information (Host) list, right-click a user information item that you want tochange and selectChange User Information. TheChange User Information (Host) dialogbox opens.

5. Change the user information of the host in theChange User Information (Host) dialog box.You can change the specifications of User Name, and Secret.

6. Click OK to close the Change User Information (Host) dialog box. The user informationof the host is changed in blue in the Authentication Information (Host) list of theAuthentication window.

7. Click Apply in the Authentication window. A message appears asking whether to applythe settings to the storage system.

8. Click OK to close the message. The settings are applied to the storage system.

Deleting host user informationYou can delete registered user information from a host group.Remote Web Console secondary windows must be defined for use in advance. When you selectModify from the Authentication secondary window to delete host user information, other usersor programs are prevented from changing storage system settings. When you close the secondarywindow, Modify mode is released. For more information on Remote Web Console secondarywindows and Modify mode, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.

Procedure1. Open the Authentication window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, expand the Storage Systems tree, right-click the target storage

system, and then select Other Functions.2. On the menu bar, select Actions, Port/Host Group, and then Authentication.In Remote Web Console:On the menu bar, select Actions, Port/Host Group, and thenAuthentication.

2. In the Authentication window, click to change to Modify mode.

Setting Fibre Channel authentication 271

Page 272: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

3. In the Port tree, expand the Fibre folder and select a port or host group on which the userinformation you want to delete is registered.The user information of hosts currently registered on the selected port or host group appearsin the Authentication Information (Host) list below the Authentication Information(Target).

4. In the Authentication Information (Host) list, right-click a user information item that youwant to delete.

5. SelectDelete User Information. TheDelete Authentication Information dialog box opensasking whether to delete the selected host user information.

6. Click OK to close the message.7. Click Apply in the Authentication window. A message appears asking whether to apply

the setting to the storage system.8. Click OK to close the message. The setting is applied to the storage system.

Registering user information for a host group (for mutual authentication)You can perform mutual authentication by specifying user information for host groups on thestorage system ports. Specify unique user information for each host group. You can change thespecified user information for host groups in the same way you initially specify it.Remote Web Console secondary windows must be defined for use in advance. When you selectModify from the Authentication secondary window to register user information, other users orprograms are prevented from changing storage system settings. When you close the secondarywindow, Modify mode is released. For more information on Remote Web Console secondarywindows and Modify mode, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.

Procedure1. Open the Authentication window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, expand the Storage Systems tree, right-click the target storage

system, and then select Other Functions.2. On the menu bar, select Actions, Port/Host Group, and then Authentication.In Remote Web Console:On the menu bar, select Actions, Port/Host Group, and thenAuthentication.

2. In the Authentication window, click to change to Modify mode.3. In the Port tree, select a port or host group whose user information you want to specify.

The currently registered user information of the selected port or host group appears in theAuthentication Information (Target) list.

4. Right-click any point in the Authentication Information (Target) list and select SpecifyAuthentication information.

5. In the Specify Authentication Information dialog box, specify the user information of theport or host group selected in the Port tree.• Port Name: The port name of the selected port appears. You cannot change the port

name.• User Name: Specify the user name of the host group with 16 characters. You can use

specified hexadecimal characters. User names are not case-sensitive.• Secret: Specify the secret (that is, a password used in CHAP authentication) between

12 to 32 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, spaces, and the followingsymbols in a user name: . - + @ _ = : / [ ] , ~

• Re-enter Secret: Specify the secret, again, for confirmation.

272 Managing logical volumes

Page 273: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

6. Click OK to close the Specify Authentication Information dialog box. The specified userinformation of the port appears in blue in theAuthentication Information (Target) list ofthe Authentication window.

7. Click Apply in the Authentication window. A message appears asking whether to applythe settings to the storage system.

8. Click OK to close the message. The settings are applied to the storage system.

Clearing user information from a host groupYou can clear user information from a host group.Remote Web Console secondary windows must be defined for use in advance. When you selectModify from the Authentication secondary window to clear user information from a host group,other users or programs are prevented from changing storage system settings. When you closethe secondary window,Modifymode is released. For more information on Remote Web Consolesecondary windows and Modify mode, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.

Procedure1. Open the Authentication window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, expand the Storage Systems tree, right-click the target storage

system, and then select Other Functions.2. On the menu bar, select Actions, Port/Host Group, and then Authentication.In Remote Web Console:On the menu bar, select Actions, Port/Host Group, and thenAuthentication.

2. In the Authentication window, click to change to Modify mode.3. In the Port tree, expand the Fibre folder and select a port or host group whose user

information you want to clear.The currently registered user information of the port or host group appears in theAuthentication Information (Target).

4. Right-click any point in the Authentication Information (Target) list and select ClearAuthentication information. The Clear Authentication Information dialog box opensasking whether to clear the user information of the selected host group.

5. Click OK to close the Clear Authentication Information dialog box. The user informationof the selected host group disappears from the Authentication Information (Target) list.

6. Click Apply in the Authentication window. A message appears asking whether to applythe setting to the storage system.

7. Click OK to close the message. The setting is applied to the storage system.

Fibre channel port authentication

Setting Fibre Channel port authenticationYou can perform user authentication in a Fibre Channel environment by specifying authenticationinformation on the Fibre Channel ports of the storage system.Remote Web Console secondary windows must be defined for use in advance. When you selectModify from the Authentication secondary window to set port information, other users orprograms are prevented from changing storage system settings. When you close the secondarywindow, Modify mode is released. For more information on Remote Web Console secondarywindows and Modify mode, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.

Setting Fibre Channel authentication 273

Page 274: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Procedure1. Open the Authentication window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, expand the Storage Systems tree, right-click the target storage

system, and then select Other Functions.2. On the menu bar, select Actions, Port/Host Group, and then Authentication.In Remote Web Console:On the menu bar, select Actions, Port/Host Group, and thenAuthentication.

2. In the Authentication window, click to change to Modify mode.3. In the Port tree, double-click the Storage System folder.

If the storage system contains any Fibre Channel adapters, the Fibre folder appears belowthe Storage System folder. Information about the port appears in the Port Information listof the Authentication window.

4. Right-click any point in the Port Information list and select Set Port Information.5. In the Set Port Information dialog box, specify the port information.

• Time out: Specify the period of time from when authentication fails to when the nextauthentication session is ended. This period of time is between 15 to 60 seconds. Theinitial value of the Time out is 45 seconds.

• Refusal Interval: Specify the interval from when connection to a port fails to when thenext authentication session starts, with up to 60 minutes. The initial value of the RefusalInterval is 3 minutes.

• Refusal Frequency: Specify the number of times of authentication allowable forconnection to a port with up to 10 times. The initial value of the Refusal Frequency is3 times.

6. Click OK to close the Set Port Information dialog box.7. Click Apply in the Authentication window. A message appears asking whether to apply

the settings to the storage system.8. Click OK to close the message. The settings are applied to the storage system.

Registering user information on a Fibre Channel portYou can perform user authentication in a Fibre Channel environment by registering userinformation on the Fibre Channel ports of the storage system.Remote Web Console secondary windows must be defined for use in advance. When you selectModify from the Authentication secondary window to register user information, other users orprograms are prevented from changing storage system settings. When you close the secondarywindow, Modify mode is released. For more information on Remote Web Console secondarywindows and Modify mode, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.

Procedure1. Open the Authentication window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, expand the Storage Systems tree, right-click the target storage

system, and then select Other Functions.2. On the menu bar, select Actions, Port/Host Group, and then Authentication.In Remote Web Console:On the menu bar, select Actions, Port/Host Group, and thenAuthentication.

2. In the Authentication window, click to change to Modify mode.

274 Managing logical volumes

Page 275: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

3. In the Port tree, double-click the Storage System folder.If the storage system contains any Fibre Channel adapters, the Fibre folder appears belowthe Storage System folder.

4. In the Port tree, double-click the Fibre folder. Information about the port appears in the treeof the Authentication window.

5. Right-click any icon of port in the Port tree and select Default Setting(User Name/Secret).6. In the Default Setting(User Name/Secret) dialog box, specify the user information.

• User Name: Specify the user name of Fibre Channel with 16 characters. You can usehexadecimal characters in a user name. User names are not case-sensitive.

• Secret: Specify the secret (that is, a password used in CHAP authentication) between12 to 32 characters.You can use alphanumeric characters, spaces, and the following symbols in a secret:. - + @ _ = : / [ ] , ~

• Re-enter Secret: Specify the secret, again, for confirmation.7. Click OK to close the Default Setting(User Name/Secret) dialog box.8. Click Apply in the Authentication window. A message appears asking whether to apply

the setting to the storage system.9. Click OK to close the message. The setting is applied to the storage system.

Registering user information on a fabric switchYou can perform user authentication in a Fibre Channel environment by registering userinformation on the fabric switch of the storage system.Remote Web Console secondary windows must be defined for use in advance. When you selectModify from the Authentication secondary window to specify authentication information, otherusers or programs are prevented from changing storage system settings. When you close thesecondary window, Modify mode is released. For more information on Remote Web Consolesecondary windows and Modify mode, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.

Procedure1. Open the Authentication window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, expand the Storage Systems tree, right-click the target storage

system, and then select Other Functions.2. On the menu bar, select Actions, Port/Host Group, and then Authentication.In Remote Web Console:On the menu bar, select Actions, Port/Host Group, and thenAuthentication.

2. In the Authentication window, click to change to Modify mode.3. In the Port tree, double-click the Storage System folder.

If the storage system contains any Fibre Channel adapters, the Fibre folder appears belowthe Storage System folder.

4. In the Port tree, double-click the Fibre folder. Information about the fabric switch appearsin the Fabric Switch Information list below the Port Information list.

5. Right-click any point in the Fabric Switch Information list and select Specify UserInformation.

Setting Fibre Channel authentication 275

Page 276: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

6. In the Specify Authentication Information dialog box, specify the user information of thehost you want to allow connection.• User Name: Specify the user name of the fabric switch with up to 16 characters.

You can use hexadecimal characters in a user name. User names are not case-sensitive.

• Secret: Specify the secret (that is, a password used in CHAP authentication) between12 to 32 characters.You can use alphanumeric characters, spaces, and the following symbols in a secret:. - + @ _ = : / [ ] , ~

• Re-enter Secret: Specify the secret, again, for confirmation.7. Click OK to close the Specify Authentication Information dialog box.8. Click Apply in the Authentication window. A message appears asking whether to apply

the settings to the storage system.9. Click OK to close the message. The settings are applied to the storage system.

Clearing fabric switch user informationYou can clear the specified user information of a fabric switch from the storage system.Remote Web Console secondary windows must be defined for use in advance. When you selectModify from the Authentication secondary window to clear authentication information, otherusers or programs are prevented from changing storage system settings. When you close thesecondary window, Modify mode is released. For more information on Remote Web Consolesecondary windows and Modify mode, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.

Procedure1. Open the Authentication window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, expand the Storage Systems tree, right-click the target storage

system, and then select Other Functions.2. On the menu bar, select Actions, Port/Host Group, and then Authentication.In Remote Web Console:On the menu bar, select Actions, Port/Host Group, and thenAuthentication.

2. In the Authentication window, click to change to Modify mode.3. In the Port tree, double-click the Storage System folder.

If the storage system contains any Fibre Channel adapters, the Fibre folder appears belowthe Storage System folder.

4. In the Port tree, double-click the Fibre folder. Information about the fabric switch appearsin the Fabric Switch Information list below the Port Information list.

5. Right-click any point in the Fabric Switch Information list and select Clear AuthenticationInformation. The Clear Authentication Information dialog box opens asking whether toclear the user information of the selected fabric switch.

6. Click OK to close the Clear Authentication Information dialog box.7. Click Apply in the Authentication window. A message appears asking whether to apply

the settings to the storage system.8. Click OK to close the message. The settings are applied to the storage system.

Setting the fabric switch authentication modeYou can specify the authentication mode of a fabric switch.

276 Managing logical volumes

Page 277: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Remote Web Console secondary windows must be defined for use in advance. When you selectModify from theAuthentication secondary window to set the fabric switch authentication mode,other users or programs are prevented from changing storage system settings. When you closethe secondary window,Modifymode is released. For more information on Remote Web Consolesecondary windows and Modify mode, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.

Procedure1. Open the Authentication window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, expand the Storage Systems tree, right-click the target storage

system, and then select Other Functions.2. On the menu bar, select Actions, Port/Host Group, and then Authentication.In Remote Web Console:On the menu bar, select Actions, Port/Host Group, and thenAuthentication.

2. In the Authentication window, click to change to Modify mode.3. In the Port tree, double-click the Storage System folder.

If the storage system contains any Fibre Channel adapters, the Fibre folder appears belowthe Storage System folder.

4. In the Port tree, double-click the Fibre folder. Information about the fabric switch appearsin the Fabric Switch Information list below the Port Information list.

5. Right-click any point in the Fabric Switch Information list and selectAuthenticationMode:unidirectional > bi-directional.

6. Click Apply in the Authentication window. A message appears asking whether to applythe settings to the storage system.

7. Click OK to close the message. The settings are applied to the storage system.8. To return the Fibre Channel setting, perform the same operation, except that you must select

the Authentication Mode: bi-directional > unidirectional menu in step 4.

Enabling or disabling fabric switch authenticationBy default, the fabric switch authentication is disabled. To enable fabric switches to authenticatehosts, enable the user authentication settings of fabric switches.Remote Web Console secondary windows must be defined for use in advance. When you selectModify from the Authentication secondary window to enable or disable fabric switchauthentication, other users or programs are prevented from changing storage system settings.When you close the secondary window, Modify mode is released. For more information onRemote Web Console secondary windows andModifymode, see the XP7 Remote Web ConsoleUser Guide.

Procedure1. Open the Authentication window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, expand the Storage Systems tree, right-click the target storage

system, and then select Other Functions.2. On the menu bar, select Actions, Port/Host Group, and then Authentication.In Remote Web Console:On the menu bar, select Actions, Port/Host Group, and thenAuthentication.

2. In the Authentication window, click to change to Modify mode.

Setting Fibre Channel authentication 277

Page 278: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

3. In the Port tree, double-click the Storage System folder.If the storage system contains any Fibre Channel adapters, the Fibre folder appears belowthe Storage System folder.

4. In the Port tree, double-click the Fibre folder. Information about the fabric switch appearsin the Fabric Switch Information list below the Port Information list.

5. Right-click any point in the Fabric Switch Information list and selectAuthentication:Disable> Enable.

6. Click Apply in the Authentication window. A message appears asking whether to applythe settings to the storage system.

7. Click OK to close the message. The settings are applied to the storage system.To return the fabric switch setting so that the switch cannot authenticate hosts, perform thesame operation, except select the Authentication:Enable > Disable menu in step 4.

Overview for iSCSIAn iSCSI (Internet SCSI) is a protocol for sending and receiving a SCSI command through anIP network. iSCSI transfers data in block units. An IP-SAN that uses an existing Ethernet can beconstructed by using iSCSI. In the network for iSCSI,LUN Manager manages access pathsbetween hosts and volumes, for each port in your storage system. LUN Manager has the followingfeatures:

• Connecting multiple hosts to an portWith LUN Manager, you can connect more than one host to a port on your storage system.When setting up host connections in LUN Manager, for each host you specify the settingsfor host mode, volume, and iSCSI target. Each host can access a volume simulating adedicated port to the host even if that host shares the port with other hosts.

• Mapping volumes to hostsWith LUN Manager, you can map or assign volumes to the hosts on your network. You havecomplete flexibility to share or restrict volume access among the hosts.

• Network securityWith LUN Manager, you can enable or disable CHAP (Challenge Handshake AuthenticationProtocol), a security protocol that requires users to enter a secret for access.

Network configuration for iSCSIAn iSCSI makes it possible to construct an IP-SAN by connecting many hosts and storagesystems at a low cost. However, iSCSI greatly increases the I/O workload of the network andthe storage system. When using iSCSI, it is very important that you configure the network so thatthe workload among the network, port, controller, and drive is properly distributed.Even though the LAN switches and NICs are the same, there are some important differenceswhen you use iSCSI, particularly regarding the LAN connection. You need to focus particularattention to the following:

• The shared memory must be installed with 16 GB or more in advance. For the installationabout the shared memory, contact the Hewlett Packard Enterprise technical support.

• iSCSI consumes almost all of the available Ethernet bandwidth, unlike a conventional LANconnection. This can significantly degrade the performance of both the iSCSI traffic and theLAN. Therefore, it is very important that you separate the iSCSI IP-SAN and the office LAN.

• Host I/O load will affect the iSCSI response time. In general, the greater the I/O traffic is,the lower the iSCSI performance.

278 Managing logical volumes

Page 279: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

• You need to have a failover path between host and iSCSI, so that you can update thefirmware without stopping the system.

• If the Delayed Ack of the host setting is enabled in the iSCSI connection configuration, thehost I/O delaying occurs and it might significantly affect the performance. To avoid the hostI/O delaying, disable the Delayed Ack of the host.

The following figure shows LU paths configuration in a Fibre Channel environment. The figureshows the iSCSI target 00 associated with three logical volumes (00:00:00, 00:00:01, and00:00:02). LU paths are defined between the two hosts in the iSCSI target 00 and the threelogical volumes.

You can define paths between a single server host and multiple LUs. The figure shows that eachof the two hosts in the iSCSI target 00 can access the three LUs.You can also define paths between multiple server hosts and a single LU. The figure shows thatthe LU identified by the LDKC:CU:LDEV number 00:00:00 is accessible from the two hosts thatbelong to the iSCSI target 00.

Managing hostsChanging WWN or nickname of a host bus adapter

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.In Fibre Channel environments, host bus adapters can be identified by WWNs or nicknames.

Managing hosts 279

Page 280: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Procedure1. Open the Edit Host Groups window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. Select the Hosts tab, and then click the Port ID of the HBA WWN or Host Name you wantto change.

3. Click Edit Host.1. To change the WWN, select the HBA WWN check box, and then type a new WWN.2. To change the nickname, select aHost Name check box, and then type a new nickname.If you check Apply same settings to the HBA WWN in all ports, new settings affect otherports. For example, if the same host bus adapter (the same WWN) is located below portsCL1-A and CL2-A in the tree, when you select the host bus adapter (or the WWN) frombelow one of the ports and change the nickname to hba1, the host bus adapter below theother port will also be renamed hba1.However, new settings will not affect any port if:

• The resulting nickname is already used as the nickname of a host bus adapter connectedto the port.

• The resulting WWN exists in the port.4. Click Finish.

The Confirm window appears.5. In the Task Name text box, enter the task name.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

6. Click Apply.IfApply same settings to the HBAWWN in all ports is checked, a dialog box opens listingthe host bus adapter to be changed. Confirm the changes and click OK. Otherwise, clickCancel.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Changing HBA iSCSI name or nickname of a host bus adapter

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.In iSCSI environments, host bus adapters can be identified by HBA iSCSI names or nicknames.

280 Managing logical volumes

Page 281: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Procedure1. Open the Edit Host Groups window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. Select the Hosts tab, and then click the Port ID of the HBA iSCSI Name or Host Nameyou want to change.

3. Click Edit Host.1. To change the HBA iSCSI name, select the HBA iSCSI Name check box, and then

type a new iSCSI name.2. To change the nickname, select aHost Name check box, and then type a new nickname.If you check Apply same settings to the HBA iSCSI Name in all ports, new settings affectother ports. For example, if the same host bus adapter (the same iSCSI Name) is locatedbelow ports CL1-A and CL2-A in the tree, when you select the host bus adapter (or the iSCSIName) from below one of the ports and change the nickname to hba1, the host bus adapterbelow the other port will also be renamed hba1.However, new settings will not affect any port if:

• The resulting nickname is already used as the nickname of a host bus adapter connectedto the port.

• The resulting iSCSI name exists in the port.4. Click Finish.

The Confirm window appears.5. In the Task Name text box, enter the task name.

You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

6. Click Apply.IfApply same settings to the HBAWWN in all ports is checked, a dialog box opens listingthe host bus adapter to be changed. Confirm the changes and click OK. Otherwise, clickCancel.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Changing the name or host mode of a host groupUse LUN Manager to change the name or host mode of a host group. You can change only thehost mode option of the host group for the initiator port. You cannot use this procedure on thehost group for the external port.

CAUTION: Before changing the host mode of a host group, you should back up data on theport to which the host group belongs. Setting host mode should not be destructive, but dataintegrity cannot be guaranteed without a backup.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Managing hosts 281

Page 282: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Procedure1. Open the Edit Host Groups window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. On the Host Groups tab, select the Port ID of the host group you want to change.3. Click More Actions and then click Edit Host Groups.

1. To change the name of the host group, select the Host Group Name check box, andthen type a new host group name.

2. To change the host mode, select aHost ModeOption check box, and then click Enable.For detailed information about host mode options, see “Host mode options” (page 242).

4. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

5. In the Task Name text box, enter the task name.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

6. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Changing iSCSI target settingUse LUN Manager to change the name or host mode of a iSCSI target. You can change onlythe host mode option of the host group for the initiator port. You cannot use this procedure onthe host group for the external port.

CAUTION:• Before changing the host mode of an iSCSI target, you should back up data on the port to

which the iSCSI target belongs. Setting host mode should not be destructive, but data integritycannot be guaranteed without a backup.

• When a secret is changed two times or more for the same iSCSI target successively, performthe next change after waiting for the completion of the task that has been applied. If thesecret is changed without waiting for the completion of the task that has been applied, theuser name which you expected to be changed can not be incorporated.

Before you beginTo perform this task, following roles are required:

• Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role

• Security Administrator (View and Modify) role

282 Managing logical volumes

Page 283: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Procedure1. Open the Edit Host Groups window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. On the iSCSI Targets tab, select the Port ID of the iSCSI target you want to change.3. Click More Actions and then click Edit iSCSI Targets.

1. To change the name of the iSCSI target, select the iSCSI Target check box, and thentype a new iSCSI target name.

2. To change the host mode, select aHost ModeOption check box, and then click Enable.For detailed information about host mode options.

4. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

5. In the Task Name text box, enter the task name.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

6. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Removing hosts from iSCSI targets

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Edit Host Groups window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. Select hosts in the Hosts tab.3. Display the Remove Hosts window by performing one of the following:

• Click Remove Hosts.

• Click Remove Hosts (iSCSI).• Click More Actions, then select Remove Hosts(iSCSI).• From the Actions menu, select Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI, then Remove Hosts.

4. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

Managing hosts 283

Page 284: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

5. In the Task Name text box, enter the task name.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

6. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Initializing host group 0Use this procedure to set host group 0 (zero) to its initial state. This removes all the WWNs fromhost group 0 and also removes all the LU paths related to host group 0. The procedure alsochanges the host mode of host group 0 to Standard and initializes the host group name. Forexample, if you initialize host group 0 for the port CL1-A, the name of host group 0 will changeto 1A-G00.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Port/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Expand the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. Click the link of a host group.3. Select the Host Groups tab.4. Select the host group 0 which is displayed as host group (00).5. Click More Actions and select Delete Host Groups.6. Confirm the settings and enter the task name in the Task Name box.

A task name can consist of up to 32 ASCII characters (letters, numerals, and symbols). Tasknames are case-sensitive. (date) - (task name) is input by default.

7. Click Apply in the Delete Host Groups window.A message appears, asking whether to delete it.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

8. Click OK to close the message.

Deleting a host bus adapter from a host group

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

284 Managing logical volumes

Page 285: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Procedure1. Open the Port/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Expand the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. Click the link of a host group.3. Select a host bus adapter.4. Click More Actions and Remove Hosts.5. If necessary, check Remove selected hosts from all host groups containing the hosts

in the storage system in the Remove Hosts window.If the option is checked, the selected hosts are removed from all host groups containing thehosts in the storage system.

6. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

7. In the Task Name text box, enter the task name.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

8. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Deleting WWNs from the WWN tableIf you disconnect a host that has been connected with a cable to your storage system, the WWNof the host remains listed in the Login WWNs tab. Use this procedure to delete WWNs of a hostthat is no longer connected to your storage system from the WWN list.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Port/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Expand the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. Select the Login WWNs tab.To confirm the statuses of WWNs, click View Login WWN Statuses window.

3. In the Login WWNs tab, select the WWNs you want to delete.4. Click Delete Login WWNs.

Managing hosts 285

Page 286: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

5. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

6. In the Task Name text box, enter the task name.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

7. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Deleting a host groupUse LUN Manager to delete a host group.If host group 0 (zero) is deleted, all WWNs that belong to host group 0 are deleted and all LUpaths that correspond to host group 0 are deleted. The host mode of host group 0 becomesStandard, and the host group name is initialized. To remove all the WWNs and LU paths fromhost group 0, you must initialize host group 0. For details, see “Initializing host group 0” (page 284).

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Port/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Expand the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. Select the Host Groups tab, or select a port from the tree then select the Host Groups tab.3. Select a host group that you want to delete.4. Select Delete Host Groups.5. In the Delete Host Groups window, confirm the settings, in Task Name type a unique name

or accept the default, and then click Apply.If Go to tasks window for status is checked, the Tasks window opens.

6. Click OK to close the message.

Deleting an iSCSI target

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

CAUTION: This task cannot be performed if corresponding with following:• Host I/O processing is being performed.

• Hosts are not reserved (mounted) in the iSCSI target.

286 Managing logical volumes

Page 287: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Procedure1. Open the Port/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Expand the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. Select the iSCSI target that you want to delete.3. Display the Delete iSCSI Targets window by performing one of the following:

• Click More Actions, then select Delete iSCSI Targets.

• From theActionsmenu, select Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI, thenDelete iSCSI Targets.4. In the Delete iSCSI Targets window, confirm the settings, in Task Name, type a unique

name for this task or accept the default, then click Apply.If Go to tasks window for status is checked, the Tasks window opens.

5. Click OK to close a message.

Deleting login iSCSI names

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

NOTE: If you disconnect a host that has been connected through a cable to your storagesystem, the iSCSI name for the host will remain in the Login WWNs/iSCSI Names tab. Use theDelete Login WWNs window to delete from the Login WWNs/iSCSI Names tab. A login iSCSIname for a host that is no longer connected to your storage system.

Procedure1. Open the Edit Host Groups window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. Select theLogin WWNs/iSCSI Names tab. To confirm the statuses of iSCSI names, clickView Login iSCSI Name Statuses window.

3. Select the iSCSI names you want to delete.4. Display the Delete Login iSCSI Names window by performing one of the following

• Click Delete Login iSCSI Names.

• From the Actions menu, select Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI, thenDelete Login iSCSINames.

5. In the Delete Login iSCSI Names window, confirm the settings, in Task Name, type aunique name for this task or accept the default, then click Apply.

6. Click OK to close a message.

Managing hosts 287

Page 288: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Adding a selected host to a host group

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Port/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Expand the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. Select the Hosts tab, or select a port from the tree then select the Hosts tab.3. Select a host that you want to add.4. Select Add to Host groups.5. Select the desired host groups from theAvailable Host Groups table, and then click Add.

Selected host groups are listed in the Selected Host Groups table.If you select a row and click Detail, the Host Group Properties window appears.

6. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

7. In the Add to Host groups window, confirm the settings, in Task Name type a unique namefor this task or accept the default, and then click Apply.If Go to tasks window for status is checked, the Tasks window opens.

8. Click OK to close the message.

Adding a host to the selected host group

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Port/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Expand the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. Select the Host Groups tab.3. Select the host group for the host you want to add.4. Select Add to Hosts.5. Select the desired host from the Available Hosts table, and then click Add.

Selected host groups are listed in the Selected Hosts table.

288 Managing logical volumes

Page 289: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

If the desired host has never been connected with a cable to any port in the storage system,perform the following steps:1. Click Add New Host under the Available Hosts list.

The Add New Host dialog box opens.2. Enter the desired WWN in the HBA WWN box.3. If necessary, enter a nickname for the host bus adapter in the Host Name box.4. Click OK to close the Add New Host dialog box.5. Select the desired host bus adapter from the Available Hosts list.

6. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

7. In the Add to Host groups window, confirm the settings, in Task Name type a unique namefor this task or accept the default, and then click Apply.If Go to tasks window for status is checked, the Tasks window opens.

8. Click OK to close the message.

Adding a host to the selected iSCSI target

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Port/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Expand the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. Select the Host tab.3. Select the iSCSI target for the host you want to add.4. Select Add to Hosts.5. Select the desired host from the Available Hosts table, and then click Add.

Selected iSCSI targets are listed in the Selected Hosts table.If the desired host has never been connected with a cable to any port in the storage system,perform the following steps:1. Click Add New Host under the Available Hosts list.

The Add New Host dialog box opens.2. Enter the desired HBA iSCSI name in the HBA iSCSI Name box.3. If necessary, enter a nickname for the host bus adapter in the Host Name box.4. Click OK to close the Add New Host dialog box.5. Select the desired host bus adapter from the Available Hosts list.

6. Click Finish.The Confirm window appears.

Managing hosts 289

Page 290: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

7. In the Add to Host groups window, confirm the settings, in Task Name type a unique namefor this task or accept the default, and then click Apply.If Go to tasks window for status is checked, the Tasks window opens.

8. Click OK to close the message.

Confirming communication status

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. From the Remote Web Console, click Actions, Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI, and then

Authentication to open the Test Communication Statuses window.2. Select the port ID from Local Port ID (From).3. In IP Address (To), selectIPv4 or IPv6 then specify the IP address.4. Click Test.5. In the Communication Statuses table, confirm the result.6. Click Close.

Setting T10 PI mode to the port

Before you begin

• The Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

• Access to the Fibre Channel Board port is required

• The port speed must be 16 Gbps

CAUTION: If you change the T10 PI mode of one port, the T10 PI mode of the other port pairedwith changed port also needs to be changed. You must verify the mode of each port in the pairbefore changing T10 PI mode. Make sure the ports in each pair are the same in the resourcegroup. The following shows pairs of port IDs.If you change the setting on one of the ports in the pair, the setting on the other port in the pairwill also be changed:

• Port IDs 1x and 3x (where x is a letter from A to R). For example, 1A and 3A can be pairedwith each other.

• Port IDs 2x and 4x (where x is a letter from A to R). For example, 2B and 4B can be pairedwith each other.

NOTE: If the T10 PI mode is enabled between the path of the target port and LDEV, you cannotdisable The T10 PI mode of the port.

290 Managing logical volumes

Page 291: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Procedure1. Open the Port/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Expand the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. Select the Ports tab.3. Select the desired port.

To collectively change the T10 PI mode of ports, do not intermix ports with enabled ordisabled T10 PI modes.

4. Click Edit Ports.5. Click OK on the message window.6. Select Enable or Disable on the Edit T10 PI Mode window.7. Click Finish. The Confirm window appears.8. In the Confirm window, confirm the settings. In the Task Name, type a unique name for this

task or accept the default, then click Apply. If Go to tasks window for status is checked,the Tasks window opens.

Creating iSCSI targets and registering hosts in the iSCSI targetBefore you begin• The Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

• The Security Administrator (View and Modify) role is required to perform this task.

• The shared memory must be installed with 16 GB or more in advance. For the installationabout the shared memory, contact the Hewlett Packard Enterprise technical support.

Procedure1. Open the Port/Host Groups window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Expand the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. Enter the iSCSI alias in the iSCSI Target Alias box. If the Use Default Name checkbox isselected, the iSCSI target alias is input by default.

3. Enter the iSCSI target name in theiSCSI Target Name box. Select the format from iqn oreui. If theUse DefaultName check box is selected, the iSCSI target name is input by default.

4. Select the resource group in which an iSCSI target is created. If you select Any, ports towhich you can add iSCSI targets within all ports assigned to a user are displayed in theAvailable Ports list. If you select other than Any, ports to which you can add iSCSI targetswithin the ports assigned to the selected resource group are displayed in the AvailablePorts list.

Creating iSCSI targets and registering hosts in the iSCSI target 291

Page 292: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

5. Select a host mode from theHost Mode list. When selecting a host mode, you must considerthe platform and some other factors.

6. If necessary, click Host Mode Options and select host mode options.When you click Host Mode Options, the dialog box expands to display the list of host modeoptions. The Mode No. column indicates option numbers. Select an option you want tospecify and click Enable.

7. Select hosts to be registered in an iSCSI target. If the desired host has ever been connectedwith a cable to another port in the storage system, select the desired host bus adapter fromthe Available Hosts list. If there is no host to be registered, skip this step and move to thenext step. Otherwise, an iSCSI target with no host would be created. If the desired host hasnever been connected through a cable to any port in the storage system, perform the followingsteps:1. Click Add New Host under the Available Hosts list. The Add New Host dialog box

opens.2. Select the format from iqn or eui.3. Enter the desired HBA iSCSI name in the HBA iSCSI Name box.4. If necessary, enter a nickname for the host bus adapter in the Host Name box.5. Click OK to close the Add New Host dialog box.6. Select the desired host bus adapter from the Available Hosts list.

8. Select the port to which you want to add the iSCSI target. If you select multiple ports, youcan add the same iSCSI target to multiple ports by one operation.

9. Select CHAP, None, or Comply with Host Setting in the Authentication Method list. IfCHAP is selected, specify following:• Mutual CHAP: SelectEnable orDisable. IfEnable is selected, the mutual authentication

mode is performed. If Disable is selected, the unidirectional authentication mode isperformed.

• User Name: If Disable is selected in Mutual CHAP, this item is optionally specified. IfEnable is selected in Mutual CHAP, this item must be specified.

• Secret andRe-enter Secret: IfDisable is selected inMutual CHAP, this item is optionallyspecified. If Enable is selected in Mutual CHAP, this item must be specified.

10. Select CHAP users to be registered in an iSCSI target. If the CHAP user has ever beenconnected with a cable to another port in the storage system, select the desired host busadapter from the Available CHAP Users list. If there is no host to be registered, skip thisstep and move to the step 11. Otherwise, an iSCSI target with no CHAP user would becreated. If the desired CHAP user has never been connected through a cable to any port inthe storage system, perform the following steps:1. ClickAdd NewCHAPUser under theAvailable CHAPUsers list. TheAdd NewCHAP

User dialog box opens.2. Specify an user name, and secret.3. Click OK to close the Add New CHAP User dialog box.4. Select the desired CHAP user from the Available CHAP Userslist.

11. Click Add to add the iSCSI target. By repeating steps from 2 to 10, you can create multipleiSCSI targets. If you select a row and click Detail, the iSCSI Target Properties windowappears. If you select a row and click Remove, a message appears asking whether youwant to remove the selected row or rows. To remove the row, click OK.

12. Click Finish to display the Confirm window. To continue to add LUN paths, click Next.13. Confirm the settings and enter the task name in the Task Name box. A task name can

consist of up to 32 ASCII characters (letters, numerals, and symbols). Task names arecase-sensitive. (date) - (task name) is input by default. If you select a row and click Detail,the iSCSI Target Properties window appears.

292 Managing logical volumes

Page 293: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

14. Click Apply in the Confirm window. If the Go to tasks window for status check box isselected, the Tasks window appears.

Editing port settingsBefore you begin• The Storage Administrator (System Resource Management and Provisioning) role is required

to perform this task.• The Security Administrator (View and Modify) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Port/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Expand the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. Select the Ports tab.3. Select the desired port.4. Display the Edit Ports window by performing one of the following:

• Click Edit Ports.

• From the Actions menu, select Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets, then Edit Ports.5. Select the check box to change the option and specify values. Items that can be changed

are as follows:• IPv4 Settings: Specifies IP Address, Subnet Mask, orDefault Gateway.

• IPv6 Mode: Specifies enable or disable of this mode.

• IPv6 Settings: Specifies Link Local Address, Global Address, or Default Gatewayif IPv6 Mode is selected to Enable.

• Port Security: Specifies enable or disable.

• Port Speed: Specifies the data transfer speed.

• TCP Port Number: Specifies the TCP port number.

• Selective ACK: Specifies enable or disable.

• Delayed ACK: Specifies enable or disable.

• Maximum Window Size: Specifies the size of the maximum window.

• Ethernet MTU Size: Specifies the MTU size.

• Keep Alive Timer: Specifies the keep alive timer.

• VLAN Tagging Mode: Specifies enable or disable.

• iSNS Server: Specifies enable or disable. If this option is selected to Enable, specifyIP Address or TCP Port Number.

• CHAP User Name: Specifies the CHAP user name.

• Secret and Re-enter Secret: Specifies the secret which is used for host authentication.

Editing port settings 293

Page 294: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

6. Click Finish. A message appears, confirming whether to switch the LUN security. ClickingOK opens the Confirm window.

7. In the Confirm window, confirm the settings, in Task Name type a unique name for this taskor accept the default, then click Apply. If Go to tasks window for status is checked, theTasks window opens.

Adding CHAP usersBefore you begin• The Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

• The Security Administrator (View and Modify) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Port/Host Groups window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Expand the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. Select the iSCSI target to register CHAP users.3. Display the Add CHAP Users window by performing one of the following:

• Click More Actions, select Add CHAP Users.

• From the Actions menu, select Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI, Authentication, then AddCHAP Users.

4. In the Available CHAP Users table, select the CHAP user row. Click Add. he selectedCHAP user registered in the Selected CHAP Users table. If the CHAP user does not exist,perform following to register a new CHAP user:1. Click Add New CHAP User under the Available CHAP Users table. The Add New

CHAP User dialog box opens.2. Specify User Name and Secret.3. Click OK to close the Add New CHAP Userdialog box.

5. Click Finish to display the Confirm window.6. Confirm the settings and enter the task name in the Task Name box. A task name can

consist of up to 32 ASCII characters (letters, numerals, and symbols). Task names arecase-sensitive. (date) - (task name) is input by default.

7. Click Apply in the Confirm window. If the Go to tasks window for status check box isselected, the Tasks window appears.

Editing CHAP usersBefore you begin• The Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

• The Security Administrator (View and Modify) role is required to perform this task.

294 Managing logical volumes

Page 295: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Procedure1. Open the Port/Host Groups window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Expand the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. Select the CHAP users.3. Display theEdit CHAP Users window by performing one of the following:

• Click Edit CHAP Users.

• From the Actions menu, select Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI, Authentication, then EditCHAP Users.

4. Specify User Name and Secret.5. Click Finish to display the Confirm window.6. Confirm the settings and enter the task name in the Task Name box. A task name can

consist of up to 32 ASCII characters (letters, numerals, and symbols). Task names arecase-sensitive. (date) - (task name) is input by default.

7. Click Apply in the Confirm window. If the Go to tasks window for status check box isselected, the Tasks window appears.

Removing CHAP usersBefore you begin• The Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

• The Security Administrator (View and Modify) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Port/Host Groups window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Expand the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. Select the CHAP users.3. Display theRemove CHAP Users window by performing one of the following:

• Click Remove CHAP Users.

• From the Actions menu, select Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI, Authentication, thenRemove CHAP Users.

4. Specify User Name and Secret.5. Click Finish to display the Remove CHAP Users window.

Removing CHAP users 295

Page 296: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

6. Confirm the settings and enter the task name in the Task Name box. A task name canconsist of up to 32 ASCII characters (letters, numerals, and symbols). Task names arecase-sensitive. (date) - (task name) is input by default.

7. Click Apply in the Confirm window. If the Go to tasks window for status check box isselected, the Tasks window appears.

Removing target CHAP usersBefore you begin• The Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

• The Security Administrator (View and Modify) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Port/Host Groups window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Expand the target host group and click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets.

2. Select the iSCSI target.3. Display theRemove Target CHAP Users window by performing one of the following:

• Click More Actions, Remove Target CHAP Users.

• From the Actions menu, select Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI, Authentication, thenRemove Target CHAP Users.

4. Confirm the settings and enter the task name in the Task Name box. A task name canconsist of up to 32 ASCII characters (letters, numerals, and symbols). Task names arecase-sensitive. (date) - (task name) is input by default.

5. Click Apply in the Confirm window. If the Go to tasks window for status check box isselected, the Tasks window appears.

296 Managing logical volumes

Page 297: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

9 Configuring VASA integrated storage systemsStorage systems can be integrated with an ESXi host or VMware® vCenter Server by XP StorageProvider for VMware vCenter, which is called the VASA provider. Snapshot or replication functionsare used in these storage systems that are configured with the procedures in this section.Do not operate LDEVs of the SLU or ALU attribute from Remote Web Console or RAID Manager.If you must operate LDEVs of the SLU or ALU attribute, contact Hewlett Packard Enterprisetechnical support.In accordance with instructions from our company, if you must perform the configuration changeoperation for LDEVs of the SLU or ALU attribute from Remote Web Console or RAID Manager,shut down associated virtual machines in advance. If the virtual machine is shut down, LDEVsof the SLU or ALU attribute related to the virtual machine are unbound automatically.If virtual machines cannot be shut down, unbind LDEVs of SLU attribute from LDEVs of ALUattribute related to the virtual machines by Remote Web Console, then perform the configurationchange operation. For the procedure about the unbinding of LDEVs of the SLU attribution, see“Unbinding LDEVs of SLUs attribution” (page 299). While the running of the virtual machine, ifyou complete the configuration change operation without performing of the unbinding of LDEVsof the SLU attribution, contact the storage administrator.For information on setting up and operating VMware virtualization servers, see the XP7 CommandView Advanced Edition Administrator Guide.For information on installing, deploying, and configuring XP Storage Provider for VMware vCenterusing the vSphere APIs for Storage Awareness (VASA), see the Hewlett Packard Enterprise XPStorage Provider forVMware vCenter Deployment Guide.

Creating LDEVs of ALU attributionUse this procedure to create LDEVs of ALU attribution.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Pools window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right click Parity Groups, select System GUI, and then click Create LDEVs.In Remote Web Console:• Click Actions > Logical Device > Create LDEVs

2. In the Create LDEVs window, from the Provisioning Type list, select an ALU.3. In Number of LDEVs, type the number of LDEVs to be created.4. In LDEV Name, specify a name for this LDEV.

1. In Prefix, type the characters that will become the fixed characters for the beginning ofthe LDEV name. The characters are case sensitive.

2. In Initial Number, type the initial number that will follow the prefix name.5. Click Options to show more options.6. In Initial LDEV ID, make sure that an LDEV ID is set. To confirm the used number and

unavailable number, click View LDEV IDs to open the View LDEV IDs window.

Creating LDEVs of ALU attribution 297

Page 298: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

1. In Initial LDEV ID in the Create LDEVs window, click View LDEV IDs.In the View LDEV IDs window, the matrix vertical scale represents the second-to-lastdigit of the LDEV number, and the horizontal scale represents the last digit of the LDEVnumber. The LDEV IDs table shows the available, used, and disabled LDEV IDs.In the table, used LDEV numbers appear in blue, unavailable numbers appear in gray,and unused numbers appear in white. LDEV numbers that are unavailable may bealready in use, or already assigned to another emulation group (group by 32 LDEVnumbers).

2. Click Close7. In SSID, type four digits, in hexadecimal format (0004 to FEFF), for the SSID.8. To confirm the created SSID, click View SSIDs to open the View SSIDs.

1. In the Create LDEVs window, in Initial SSID, click View SSIDs. In the SSIDs window,the SSIDs table shows the used SSIDs.

2. Click Close.The Create LDEVs window appears.

9. In the Cache Partition list, select CLPR.10. From the MP Blade list, select an MP blade to be used by the LDEVs.

• If you assign a specific MP blade, select the ID of the MP blade.

• If you can assign any MP blade, click Auto.11. Click Add.

The created LDEVs are added to the Selected LDEVs table.The Provisioning Type and Number of LDEVs must be set. If these required items arenot registered, you cannot click Add.

12. If necessary, change the following LDEV settings:• Click Edit SSIDs to open the SSIDs window. If the new LDEV is to be created in the

CU, change SSID to be allocated to the LDEV.• Click Change LDEV Settings to open the Change LDEV Settings window.

13. If necessary, delete an LDEV from the Selected LDEVs table.Select an LDEV to delete, and then click Remove.

14. Click Finish.The Confirm window opens.To continue the operation for setting the LU path and defining a logical unit, click Next. Fordetails about how to set the LU path, see the XP7 Command View Advanced Edition UserGuide.

15. In the Task Name text box, type a unique name for the task or accept the default.You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters and symbols, with the exception of: \ / : , ; * ? " <> |. The value "date-window name" is entered by default.

16. Click Apply.If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Related tasks• “Removing an LDEV to be registered” (page 80)

• “Changing LDEV settings” (page 79)

• “Editing an LDEV SSID” (page 79)

298 Configuring VASA integrated storage systems

Page 299: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Viewing LDEVs of ALUs or SLU attributionUse this procedure to the view the ALUs or SLUs of the storage system. The procedure can beperformed on an ESXi host or vCenter Server as well.

Before you beginThe Storage Administrator (Provisioning) role is required to perform this task.

Procedure1. Open the Logical Devices window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click Volumes, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Select Logical Devices.

2. In the LDEVs pane, click More Actions > View ALUs/SLUs.

Unbinding LDEVs of SLUs attributionUse this procedure to unbind SLUs from ALUs. The procedure can be performed on an ESXihost or vCenter Server.

Procedure1. Open the Logical Devices window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click Volumes, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Select Logical Devices.

2. In the LDEVs pane, select LDEV IDs of the ALU provisioning type.3. Click More Actions > Unbind SLUs.

If the Go to tasks window for status check box is selected, the Tasks window appears.

Viewing LDEVs of ALUs or SLU attribution 299

Page 300: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

10 TroubleshootingThe information in this chapter can help you troubleshoot problems when provisioning a storagesystem.If a failure occurs and a message appears, see the XP7 Remote Web Console Messages forfurther instructions.For problems and solutions related to using XP7 Command View Advanced Edition, see the XP7Remote Web Console User Guide.

Troubleshooting Virtual LUNIf a failure occurs while you are operating, see the XP7 Remote Web Console Messages.For the problems and solutions regarding the Remote Web Console, see the XP7 Remote WebConsole User Guide.

Troubleshooting Thin ProvisioningThe following table provides troubleshooting instructions for Thin Provisioning.

Causes and SolutionsProblems

Causes:Cannot create a THP V-VOL.

• Usage of the pool has reached to 100%.

• Something in the storage system is blocked.

• The available capacity of THP V-VOL is restricted due to the valueof Subscription-Limit set for the pool.

Solutions:

• Add some pool-VOLs to the pool. See “Increasing pool capacity”(page 199).

• Perform the operation to reclaim zero pages in order to releasepages in which zero data are stored. See “About releasing pagesin a THP V-VOL” (page 209).

• Adjust the value of Subscription Limit for the pool. See “Changingthe pool subscription limit” (page 190).

• Ask Hewlett Packard Enterprise technical support to solve theproblem.

Causes:Cannot add a pool-VOL.

• 1,024 pool-VOLs are already defined in the pool.

• The pool-VOL does not fill the requirements for a pool-VOL.

• Something in the storage system is blocked.

300 Troubleshooting

Page 301: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Causes and SolutionsProblems

Solution:

• Change the setting of the LDEV to satisfy the requirement of thePool-VOL. See “Pool-VOL requirements” (page 95).

Causes:

• A failure occurred in data drives greater than the parity groupredundancy. The redundancy of the parity group depends on thenumber of the blocked PDEVs (data drives). For example:

◦ When the parity group configuration is 3D +1P and failures occurin two or more drives, the failures are considered to haveoccurred in data drives beyond the parity group redundancy.

◦ When the parity group configuration is 6D+2P and failures occurin three or more drives, the failures are considered to haveoccurred in data drives beyond the parity group redundancy.

Solutions:

• Ask Hewlett Packard Enterprise technical support to solve theproblem.

A pool-VOL is blocked. SIM code 627xxx isreported.

Solutions:

• Ask Hewlett Packard Enterprise technical support to solve theproblem.

A pool is blocked.

Causes:A pool cannot be restored.

• Processing takes time, because something in the storage systemis blocked.

• Usage of the pool has reached to 100%.

Solutions:

• After waiting for a while, click refresh the display, and check thepool status.

• Add some pool-VOLs to the pool to increase the capacity of thepool. See “Increasing pool capacity” (page 199)).

• Perform the operation to reclaim zero pages in order to releasepages in which zero data are stored. See “About releasing pagesin a THP V-VOL” (page 209).

• Ask Hewlett Packard Enterprise technical support to solve theproblem.

Causes:A pool cannot be deleted.

• The pool usage is not 0.

• External volumes are removed from the pool before you delete thepool.

• THP V-VOLs have not been deleted.

Solutions:

• Confirm that the pool usage is 0 after the THP V-VOLs are deleted,and that you can delete the pool.

• Ask Hewlett Packard Enterprise technical support to solve theproblem.

Causes:A failure occurs to the application formonitoring the volumes installed in a host. • Free space of the pool is insufficient.

• Some areas in the storage system are blocked.

Troubleshooting Thin Provisioning 301

Page 302: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Causes and SolutionsProblems

Solutions:

• Check the free space of the pool and increase the capacity of thepool. See “Increasing pool capacity” (page 199).

• Perform the operation to reclaim zero pages in order to releasepages in which zero data are stored. See “About releasing pagesin a THP V-VOL” (page 209).

• Ask Hewlett Packard Enterprise technical support to solve theproblem.

Causes:When the host computer tries to access theport, error occurs and the host cannot accessthe port. • Free space of the pool is insufficient.

• Some areas in the storage system are blocked.

Solutions:

• Check the free space of the pool and increase the capacity of thepool. See “Increasing pool capacity” (page 199).

• Perform the operation to reclaim zero pages in order to releasepages in which zero data are stored. See “About releasing pagesin a THP V-VOL” (page 209).

• Ask Hewlett Packard Enterprise technical support to solve theproblem.

Causes:When you are operating Remote WebConsole, a timeout occurs frequently. • The load on the Remote Web Console computer is too heavy, so

that it cannot respond to the SVP.

• The period of time until when time-out occurs is set too short.

Solutions:

• Wait for a while, then try the operation again.

• Verify the setting of the environment parameter of Remote WebConsole RMI time-out period. For information about how to set theRMI time-out period, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.

See “Troubleshooting provisioning while using RAID Manager”(page 307) and identify the cause.

THP V-VOL capacity cannot be increased.

Solutions:

• After refreshing the display, confirm whether the processing forincreasing THP V-VOL capacity meets the conditions described in“Requirements for increasing THP V-VOL capacity” (page 97).

• Retry the operation after 10 minutes or so.

• Ask Hewlett Packard Enterprise technical support to solve theproblem.

302 Troubleshooting

Page 303: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Causes and SolutionsProblems

Causes:

• Zero pages in the THP V-VOL cannot be reclaimed from RemoteWeb Console because the THP V-VOL does not meet conditionsfor releasing pages in a THP V-VOL.

Solutions:

• Make sure that the THP V-VOL meets the conditions described in“Releasing pages in a THP V-VOL” (page 211).

Cannot reclaim zero pages in a THP V-VOL.

Causes:

• Pages of the THP V-VOL are not released because the process ofreclaiming zero pages was interrupted.

Solutions:

• Make sure that the THP V-VOL meets the conditions described in“Releasing pages in a THP V-VOL” (page 211).

The THP V-VOL cannot be released if theprocess to reclaim zero pages in the THPV-VOL is interrupted.

Causes:Cannot release the Protection attribute ofthe THP V-VOLs. • The pool is full.

• The pool-VOL is blocked.

• The pool-VOL that is an external volume is blocked.

Solutions:

• Add pool-VOLs to the pool to increase the free space in the pool.See “Increasing pool capacity” (page 199).

• Perform the reclaiming zero pages operation to release pages inwhich zero data are stored. See “Releasing pages in a THP V-VOL”(page 211).

• Contact Hewlett Packard Enterprise technical support to restorethe pool-VOL.

• If the blocked pool-VOL is an external volume, verify the status ofthe path blockade and the external storage system.

• After performing above solutions, release the Protect attribute (DataRetention) of the THP V-VOL. For information about Data Retention,see the XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide.

Causes:

• Usage of the pool has reached 100%.

Solutions:

SIM code 622xxx was issued.

• Add pool-VOLs to the pool to increase the free space in the pool.See “Increasing pool capacity” (page 199).

• Perform the operation to reclaim zero pages in order to releasepages in which zero data are stored. See “About releasing pagesin a THP V-VOL” (page 209).

The Protect attribute of Data Retention might have been set to THPV-VOLs. After performing above solutions, release the Protect attributeof the THP V-VOLs.

Causes:

• The pools and THP V-VOLs configuration, of which the size is morethan the supported capacity, is created.

Solutions:

SIM code 624000 was issued.

• Remove pools that are not used.

• Remove THP V-VOLs that are not used.

Troubleshooting Thin Provisioning 303

Page 304: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Causes and SolutionsProblems

• Remove Fast Snap pairs that are not used.

• Shrink pools capacities.

Causes:Formatted pool capacity displayed in theView Pool Management Status windowdoes not increase. • Another pool is being formatted.

• The pool usage level reaches up to the threshold.

• The pool is blocked.

• I/O loads to the storage system are high.

• The cache memory is blocked.

• Pool-VOLs are blocked.

• Pool-VOLs which are external volumes are blocked.

Solutions:

• Confirm the display again after waiting for a while.

• Add pool-VOLs to the pool to increase the free space in the pool.See “Increasing pool capacity” (page 199).

• Perform the operation to reclaim zero pages in order to releasepages in which zero data are stored. See “About releasing pagesin a THP V-VOL” (page 209).

• Confirm the display again after decreasing I/O loads of the storagesystem.

• Contact Hewlett Packard Enterprise technical support to restorethe cache memory.

• Contact Hewlett Packard Enterprise technical support to restorethe pool-VOL.

• If the blocked pool-VOL is an external volume, confirm following:

◦ Path blockage

◦ Status of the storage system

If you are unable to solve a problem using the above suggestions, or if you encounter a problemnot listed, please contact Hewlett Packard Enterprise technical support.If an error occurs during the operations, the error code and error message appear in the errormessage dialog box. For more information about error messages, see the XP7 Remote WebConsole Messages.

Troubleshooting for pool usageThe following table provides troubleshooting instructions for pool usage.

Causes and SolutionsReported SIMCapacity Virtualization

Causes:620xxx, 625000, or 626xxxDisabled

• Too many THP V-VOLs areassociated with a pool, or too muchdata is stored in a pool.

• Capacity of the pool is insufficient.

• The threshold of the pool is too low.

304 Troubleshooting

Page 305: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Causes and SolutionsReported SIMCapacity Virtualization

Solutions:

• Add some pool-VOLs to increasethe capacity of the pool. See“Increasing pool capacity” (page 199)

• Perform the operation to reclaimzero pages in order to releasepages where zero data are stored.See “About releasing pages in aTHP V-VOL” (page 209)

• Set a larger value to the thresholdof the pool. See “Changing poolthresholds” (page 189)

After correcting the causes of SIM620xxx or 620xxx and 626xxx, youneed to complete the SIMs. See“Manually completing a SIM” (page 194)If you do not complete the SIMs, nonew SIM will occur even if the usagelevel increases and again exceeds thethreshold (target SIM codes are 620xxxand 626xxx).SIMs 620xxx, 625000, and 626xxx areautomatically completed if you increasepool capacity by adding pool- VOLsbecause the condition that caused theSIM is removed.

NOTE: You need free volumes toadd as pool-VOLs. If there are no freevolumes, create new volumes or askHPE technical support to add drives.Therefore, it may take time to solve theproblem.

Causes:629xxx, 62B000, or 62DxxxEnabled

• Too many THP V-VOLs areassociated with a pool, or too muchdata is stored in a pool.

• Capacity of the pool is insufficient.

• The threshold of the pool is too low.Solutions:

• Increase the pool capacity of theadded pool-VOLs. Add new paritygroups with the capacityvirtualization enabled, and createLDEVs. Add these LDEVs to thepool as pool-VOLs.

After correcting the causes of 629xxx,62B000, 62Cxxx, or 62Dxxx, you needto complete the SIMs. See “Manuallycompleting a SIM” (page 194)If you do not complete the SIMs, nonew SIM will occur even if the usagelevel increases and again exceeds thethreshold (target 629xxx, 62B000,62Cxxx, or 62Dxxx). SIMs 629xxx,62B000, or 62Dxxx are automaticallycompleted if you increase pool capacityby adding pool- VOLs because thecondition that caused the SIM isremoved.

Troubleshooting for pool usage 305

Page 306: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Causes and SolutionsReported SIMCapacity Virtualization

NOTE: You need free volumes toadd as pool-VOLs. If there are no freevolumes, create new volumes or askHPE technical support to add drives.Therefore, it may take time to solve theproblem.

Causes:622xxxEnabled

• Too many THP V-VOLs areassociated with a pool, or too muchdata is stored in a pool.

• Capacity of the pool is insufficient.

• The threshold of the pool is too low.Solutions:

• If 629xxx, 62B000, or 62Dxxx arereported, perform solutions of SIMsin advance.

• Add pool-VOLs to the pool toincrease the free space in the pool.See “Increasing pool capacity”(page 199)

Causes:62AxxxEnabled

• Too many THP V-VOLs areassociated with a pool, or too muchdata is stored in a pool.

• Capacity of the pool is insufficient.Solutions:

• Increase the pool capacity of theadded pool-VOLs. Add new paritygroups with the capacityvirtualization enabled, and createLDEVs. Add these LDEVs to thepool as pool-VOLs. You need tocomplete the SIMs. See “Manuallycompleting a SIM” (page 194)

NOTE: You need free volumes toadd as pool-VOLs. If there are no freevolumes, create new volumes or askHPE technical support to add drives.Therefore, it may take time to solve theproblem.

Troubleshooting Data RetentionIf an error occurs with Data Retention, the Error Detail dialog box appears. The Error Detaildialog box displays error locations and error messages.The Error Detail dialog box does not display Remote Web Console error messages. To findinformation about Remote Web Console errors and solutions, see the XP7 Remote Web ConsoleUser Guide.

306 Troubleshooting

Page 307: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Data Retention troubleshooting instructionsThe following table provides troubleshooting instructions for Data Retention.

Probable Causes and SolutionsProblems

You have been making changes in the Data Retention window, but thechanges have not been applied to the storage system. Apply the changesfirst, and then perform the extension lock operation.

The Disable/ Enable or theEnable/Disablebutton on the DataRetention window is unavailable.

You can find the changes by:Nothing happens when you click thebutton.

• scrolling the current list up and down.

• selecting another CU from the tree and then scrolling the list up and down.

Open-systems hosts cannot read fromor write to a volume.

• The volume is protected by the read-only attribute. Write failure is reportedas an error message.

• The volume is protected by the Protect attribute. Read (or write) failureis reported as an error message.

Mainframe hosts cannot read from orwrite to a volume.

• The volume is protected by the read-only attribute. Write failure is reportedas a Write Inhibit condition.

• The volume is protected by the Protect attribute. Read (or write) failureis reported as a cc=3 condition.

The number of days inRetention Term is calculated based on the operatingtime of the storage system. Therefore, the number of days in RetentionTerm might not decrease.

The number of days in RetentionTerm does not decrease

Troubleshooting provisioning while using RAID ManagerIf an error occurs while operating Data Retention or Thin Provisioning while using RAID Manager,you might identify the cause of the error by referring to the log appearing on the RAID Managerwindow or the RAID Manager operation log file.The RAID Manager operation log file is stored in the following directory./HORCM/log*/curlog/horcmlog_HOST/horcm.log

where

• * is the instance number.

• HOST is the host name.The following is an example of a log entry in the RAID Manager window.

Errors when operating RAID Manager (Thin Provisioning, SSB1: 0x2e31/0xb96d)

SolutionsError ContentsError Code(SSB2)

Specify the volume of which the attribute of thedata direct mapping is disabled.

Because the specified volume was beingenabled for the attribute of the data directmapping, the operation was rejected.

0x2c3a

Perform user authentication.The command cannot be executed becauseuser authentication is not performed.

0x9100

Ask Hewlett Packard Enterprise technicalsupport to solve the problem.

Error occurred when increasing THP V-VOLcapacity operation.

0xb900/ 0xb901/0xaf28

Troubleshooting provisioning while using RAID Manager 307

Page 308: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

SolutionsError ContentsError Code(SSB2)

Increase the THP V-VOL capacity after finishingoperations on your storage system, such as

The operation was rejected because theconfiguration was being changed by SVP or

0xb902

the Virtual LUN operation or a maintenanceRemote Web Console, or because the THPoperation. See Caution in “Requirements forincreasing THP V-VOL capacity” (page 97).

V-VOL capacity was going to be increased byanother instance of the RAID Manager.

Increase the THP V-VOL capacity after thespecified volume is placed online with the OSwhich supports EAV.

The operation was rejected because thespecified volume is placed online with the OSwhich does not support EAV (ExtendedAddress Volume).

0xaf22

Specify a capacity so that the pool reservationrate will not be exceeded.

The operation was rejected because the totalTHP V-VOL capacity exceeded the pool

0xaf24

reservation rate after the capacity wasincreased.

Check the emulation type of the specified THPV-VOL.

The operation to increase capacity cannot beperformed on the specified THP V-VOL.

0xaf25

Specify a capacity so that the maximumnumber of cache management devices will notbe exceeded.

The operation was rejected because of lack ofcache management devices due to increasedcapacity.

0xaf26

Makes sure that the volume is a THP V-VOL.Because the specified volume was not a THPV-VOL, the operation was rejected.

0xaf29

To increase capacity, specify the correctcapacity that does not exceed the value

Because the specified capacities are invalid orexceeded the value immediately below LDEV

0xaf2a

immediately below LDEV Capacity in theCapacity in the Expand Virtual Volumeswindow, the operation was rejected. Expand Virtual Volumes window. See the

conditions for increasing THP V-VOL capacityin “Requirements for increasing THP V-VOLcapacity” (page 97).

Re-execute the operation after a brief interval.Because the specified volume operation wasnot finished, the operation was rejected.

0xaf2b

Confirm the value immediately below LDEVCapacity in the Expand Virtual Volumeswindow.

Because the shared memory capacity is notenough to increase the specified capacity, theoperation was rejected.

0xaf2c

Wait until formatting of the specified volume isfinished, or see “Using Thin Provisioning or

Because the specified THP V-VOL was usedby other software or was being formatted, theoperation was rejected.

0xaf2e

Smart Tiers or Real Time Smart Tier with otherXP7 Storage products” (page 100) and confirmwhether the THP V-VOL is used with softwarein which that the THP V-VOL capacity cannotbe increased.

Re-execute the operation after the journalvolume configuration is changed.

Because the configuration of journal volumesis being changed, the specified THP V-VOLcapacity cannot be expanded.

0xaf2f

Re-execute the raidcom extend ldevcommand without specifying the -cylinderoption.

Because the raidcom extend ldevcommand was executed with specifying the-cylinder option to the THP V-VOL for theopen system, the operation was rejected.

0x0b2b

Increase the pool capacity and perform theoperation again.

The operation was rejected.Because the pages capacity is sure to beexceeded of the depletion threshold if the

0xaf60

specified pages capacity is reserved in thepool.

308 Troubleshooting

Page 309: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Errors when operating RAID Manager (Data Retention, SSB1:2E31/B9BF/B9BD)

DescriptionError Code (SSB2)

The command cannot be executed because user authentication is not performed.9100

The setting failed because the specified volume does not exist.B9BD

The specified volume is a command device.B9C2

The command was rejected due to one of the following reasons:B9C4

• The specified volume is a virtual volume.

• The specified volume is a pool volume.

• The specified volume is an secondary volume of Continuous Access Journal.

• The specified volume is a journal volume.

• The specified volume is a primary volume or secondary volume of Business Copy.

• The consumed capacity exceeded the licensed capacity.

• The access attribute cannot be changed because the data retention term is set.

• The specified volume is a command device.

• The specified volume is in the PAIR or COPY status.

• The specified volume does not exist.

• The S-VOL Disable attribute is set to the specified volume.

• The reserve function cannot be canceled using RAID Manager.

• The specified volume is a quorum disk for High Availability, so that the requested settingof Data Retention cannot be performed.

• The specified volume in a capacity virtualization enabled parity group.

Data Retention is not installed.B9C7

The consumed capacity exceeded the licensed capacity.B9C9

The command was rejected due to one of the following reasons:B9CA

• Fewer days are set as the data retention term.

• More than 60 years are set as the data retention term.

• An interface other than Java updated the settings while Data Retention was in the processof changing them. A conflict occurred between Java and the other interface.

The retention term cannot be set because the access attribute is read/write.B9CB

Calling HPE technical supportIf you need to call Hewlett Packard Enterprise technical support, make sure you provide as muchinformation about the problem as possible, including the following:

• The circumstances surrounding the error or failure.

• The exact content of any error messages displayed on the host systems.

• The exact content of any error messages displayed by XP7 Command View AdvancedEdition or Remote Web Console.

• The Remote Web Console configuration information (use the Dump Tool).

• The service information messages (SIMs), including reference codes and severity levels,displayed by XP7 Command View Advanced Edition or Remote Web Console.

Calling HPE technical support 309

Page 310: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

11 Support and other resourcesAccessing Hewlett Packard Enterprise Support

• For live assistance, go to the Contact Hewlett Packard Enterprise Worldwide website:www.hpe.com/assistance

• To access documentation and support services, go to the Hewlett Packard Enterprise SupportCenter website:www.hpe.com/support/hpesc

Information to collect• Technical support registration number (if applicable)

• Product name, model or version, and serial number

• Operating system name and version

• Firmware version

• Error messages

• Product-specific reports and logs

• Add-on products or components

• Third-party products or components

Accessing updates• Some software products provide a mechanism for accessing software updates through the

product interface. Review your product documentation to identify the recommended softwareupdate method.

• To download product updates, go to either of the following:

Hewlett Packard Enterprise Support Center Get connected with updates page:www.hpe.com/support/e-updates

◦ Software Depot website:www.hpe.com/support/softwaredepot

• To view and update your entitlements, and to link your contracts and warranties with yourprofile, go to the Hewlett Packard Enterprise Support Center More Information on Accessto Support Materials page:www.hpe.com/support/AccessToSupportMaterials

IMPORTANT: Access to some updates might require product entitlement when accessedthrough the Hewlett Packard Enterprise Support Center. You must have an HP Passportset up with relevant entitlements.

Related informationThe following documents and websites provide related information:

• XP7 Continuous Access Journal for Mainframe Systems User Guide

• XP7 Continuous Access Synchronous for Mainframe Systems User Guide

310 Support and other resources

Page 311: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

• XP7 Continuous Access Synchronous User Guide

• XP7 External Storage for Open and Mainframe Systems User Guide

• XP7 for Compatible FlashCopy Mirroring User Guide

• XP7 Provisioning for Mainframe Systems User Guide

• XP7 RAID Manager User Guide

• XP7 Remote Web Console Messages

• XP7 RemoteWeb Console User GuideYou can find these documents at:

• Hewlett Packard Enterprise Support Center website (Manuals page):www.hpe.com/support/manuals

Click Storage >Disk Storage System > XP Storage, and then select your Storage System.

• Hewlett Packard Enterprise Information Library website:www.hpe.com/info/enterprise/docs

Under Products and Solutions, click HP XP Storage. Then, click XP7 Storage under HPXP Storage.

Websites

LinkWebsite

www.hpe.com/info/enterprise/docsHewlett Packard Enterprise Information Library

www.hpe.com/support/hpescHewlett Packard Enterprise Support Center

www.hpe.com/assistanceContact Hewlett Packard Enterprise Worldwide

www.hpe.com/support/e-updatesSubscription Service/Support Alerts

www.hpe.com/support/softwaredepotSoftware Depot

www.hpe.com/info/insightremotesupport/docsInsight Remote Support

www.hpe.com/info/hpux-serviceguard-docsServiceguard Solutions for HP-UX

www.hpe.com/storage/spockSingle Point of Connectivity Knowledge (SPOCK) Storagecompatibility matrix

www.hpe.com/storage/whitepapersStorage white papers and analyst reports

Remote supportRemote support is available with supported devices as part of your warranty or contractual supportagreement. It provides intelligent event diagnosis, and automatic, secure submission of hardwareevent notifications to Hewlett Packard Enterprise, which will initiate a fast and accurate resolutionbased on your product’s service level. Hewlett Packard Enterprise strongly recommends thatyou register your device for remote support.For more information and device support details, go to the following website:www.hpe.com/info/insightremotesupport/docs

Documentation feedbackHewlett Packard Enterprise is committed to providing documentation that meets your needs. Tohelp us improve the documentation, send any errors, suggestions, or comments to Documentation

Websites 311

Page 312: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Feedback ([email protected]). When submitting your feedback, include the documenttitle, part number, edition, and publication date located on the front cover of the document. Foronline help content, include the product name, product version, help edition, and publication datelocated on the legal notices page.

312 Support and other resources

Page 313: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

A RAID Manager command referenceThis appendix provides information on Remote Web Console tasks and corresponding RAIDManager commands used in provisioning.

Remote Web Console tasks and RAID Manager command listThe following lists actions (tasks) that can be performed in the Remote Web Console GUI, andthe corresponding commands that can be issued in RAID Manager.

RAID Manager commandAction nameItem

raidcom add ldevCreate LDEVsLogical Device

raidcom delete ldevDelete LDEVs

raidcom modify ldevEdit LDEVs

raidcom initialize ldevFormat LDEVs

raidcom modify ldevBlock LDEVs

raidcom modify ldevRestore LDEVs

raidcom modify ldevAssign MP Blade

raidcom add lunAdd LUN Paths

raidcom delete lunDelete LUN Paths

raidcom extend ldevExpand V-VOLs

raidcom modify ldevReclaim Zero Pages

raidcom initialize ldevShredding

raidcom add host_grpCreate Host GroupsPort/Host Group/iSCSITarget (Fibre Channel)

raidcom delete host_grpDelete Host Groups

raidcom modify host_grpEdit Host Groups

raidcom add hba_wwnAdd Hosts

raidcom add hba_wwnAdd to Host Groups

raidcom delete hba_wwnRemove Hosts

raidcom add hba_wwnEdit Host

raidcom add lunCreate Alternate LUN Paths

raidcom modify portEdit Ports

raidcom add thp_poolCreate PoolsPool

raidcom add thp_poolExpand Pool

raidcom delete poolShrink pools

raidcom delete poolDelete Pools

raidcom modify poolEdit Pools

raidcom monitor poolMonitor Pools

raidcom monitor poolStop Monitoring Pools

raidcom reallocate poolStart Tier Relocation

Remote Web Console tasks and RAID Manager command list 313

Page 314: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

RAID Manager commandAction nameItem

raidcom reallocate poolStop Tier Relocation

raidcom modify poolRestore Pools

raidcom get thp_poolView Tier Properties

raidcom disconnect external_grpDisconnect External VolumesExternal Storage

raidcom check_ext_storageReconnect External Volumes

raidcom add host_grpCreate iSCSI TargetsPort/Host Group/iSCSI(iSCSI)

raidcom delete host_grpDelete iSCSI Targets

raidcom modify host_grpEdit iSCSI Targets

raidcom add hba_iscsiAdd Hosts

raidcom delete hba_iscsiRemove Hosts

raidcom set hba_iscsiEdit Host

raidcom add chap_userAdd CHAP Users

raidcom delete chap_userRemove CHAP Users

raidcom set chap_userEdit CHAP User

raidcom add lunCreate Alternate LUN Paths

raidcom modify portEdit Ports

314 RAID Manager command reference

Page 315: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

B Resource Partition GUI referenceThis appendix describes the Resource Partition windows, wizards, and dialog boxes used whenconfiguring resource groups.

Resource Groups windowUse this window to create or delete resource groups, and to view, edit, or export informationabout resource groups. You must have correct user permissions to perform tasks on resourcegroups.

Summary and buttons

DescriptionItem

The number of resource groups configured in your storage system. The maximum allowedis 1024.

Number of ResourceGroups

Opens the Create Resource Group window, where you can create one or more newresource groups. The results will appear in this window.

Create Resource Groups

Opens the Edit Resource Group window, where you can edit the name of a selectedresource group.

Edit Resource Group

Opens theDelete Resource Groupswindow, where you can delete one or more resourcegroups selected in this window.

Delete Resource Groups

Opens a window where you can export configuration information listed in the table to afile that can be used for multiple purposes, such as for backup or reporting.

Export

Resource Groups window 315

Page 316: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Resource Groups tab

DescriptionItem

Name of a resource group.Resource Group Name

Identifier of a resource group.Resource Group ID1

Number of user groups where the resource group is assigned.Number of User Groups

Number of parity groups that are assigned to the resource group.Number of Parity Groups

Number of LDEVs that are assigned to the resource group.Number of LDEVs

Number of ports that are assigned to the resource group.Number of Ports

Number of host groups that are assigned to the resource group.Number of Host Groups

Number of iSCSI targets that are assigned to the resource group.Number of iSCSI Targets

Model name and serial number of the virtual storage machine assigned to the resourcegroup.

Virtual Storage Machine1

Note:1. This item does not appear in the window by default. To display this item, change the Column Settings of the

table option.

Selected resource group windowThis window opens when you select a resource group in the Resource Groups window. Itprovides information about parity groups, LDEVs, ports, and host groups in the selected resourcegroup.

Summary

DescriptionItem

Number of parity groups that are assigned to the resource group.Number of Parity Groups

Number of LDEVs that are assigned to the resource group.Number of LDEVs

Number of ports that are assigned to the resource group.Number of Ports

Number of host groups that are assigned to the resource group.Number of Host Groups

Number of iSCSI targets that are assigned to the resource group.Number of iSCSI Targets

Model name and serial number of the virtual storage machine assigned to the resourcegroup.

Virtual Storage Machine

316 Resource Partition GUI reference

Page 317: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Parity Groups tab

DescriptionItem

Identifiers of parity groups that are already defined.Parity Group ID

Capacity of each parity group.Capacity

Number of LDEVs in each parity group.Number of LDEVs

Opens the Add Resources window, where you can add one or more resources to theresource group.

Add Resources

Opens the Remove Resources window, where you can remove one or more resourcesfrom the resource group.

Remove Resources

Opens a window where you can export configuration information listed in the table to afile that can be used for multiple purposes, such as backup or reporting.

Export

Selected resource group window 317

Page 318: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

LDEVs tab

DescriptionItem

LDEV identifiers.LDEV IDSome undefined LDEV IDs may appear. A hyphen appearing in the LDEV name indicatesthe LDEV is undefined.

LDEV name.LDEV Name

Parity group identifier in which the LDEV belongs.Parity Group ID

Pool name and identifier in which the LDEV belongs.Pool Name (ID)

Capacity of each LDEV.Capacity

Provisioning type of each volume.Provisioning Type

• Basic: Internal volume

• THP: V-VOLs of Thin Provisioning or Thin Provisioning MF

• External: External volume

• External MF: Migration volume

• Snapshot: Fast Snap volume

• ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.

318 Resource Partition GUI reference

Page 319: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Attribute of the volume indicating how the LDEV is being used.Attribute

• Command Device: Command device.

• Remote Command Device.

• JNL VOL: Journal volume.

• Pool VOL: Pool volume. The number in parentheses is the pool identifier.

• Quorum Disk: Quorum disk for High Availability.

• TSE: TSE-VOL.

• Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.

• ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.

• SLU: LDEV of the SLU attribution.

• Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

Journal identifier when the attribute is JNL VOL. A hyphen indicates the attribute is otherthan JNL VOL.

Journal ID

Information about the virtual storage machine.Virtual Storage Machine1

• LDEV ID1: Virtual LDEV ID. If a Virtual LDEV ID is not assigned to LDEV, this columnis blank. If the setting of the LDEV virtualization management is canceled, Transientis displayed. Failed is displayed on the Status column in the Task window.To resolve the transient status, perform one of following operation to LDEVs:

◦ Resolve the cause of the failure by confirming the solution of the error message inthe Task window. Then retry the same operation by using the Edit VirtualizationManagement Settings window.

◦ In the Edit Virtualization Management Settings window, set Virtual ManagementSettings to Disable and apply the setting to the storage system.

• Device Name1: Virtual device name, which is a combination of the virtual emulationtype, virtual LUSE volume number, and the virtual CVS attribute. Values of the virtualemulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, and virtual CVS attribute appear onlyfor items that have been set. This column is blank when the virtual emulation type,virtual LUSE volume number, and virtual CVS attribute are not set. If the virtual CVSattribute is set, CVS is attached as the suffix to the device name.

• SSID1: Virtual SSID. If Virtual SSID is not set for LDEV, this column is blank.

• Attribute1: Virtual LDEV attribute. If the attribute is not set for LDEV, this column isblank.

Opens the Add Resources window, where you can add one or more resources to theresource group.

Add Resources

Opens the Remove Resources window, where you can remove one or more resourcesfrom the resource group.

Remove Resources

Opens the Edit Virtualization Management Settings window where you can set themulti-array virtualization function, and edit the virtual LDEV ID or the virtual LDEVinformation.

Edit VirtualizationManagement Settings

Opens the Assign HA Reserves window where you can set the attribute of the HighAvailability secondary volume for the selected LDEV. For details, see XP7 High AvailabilityUser Guide.

Assign HA Reserves1

Opens the Release HA Reserves window where you can remove the attribute of theHigh Availability secondary volume from the selected LDEV. For details, see XP7 HighAvailability User Guide.

Release HA Reserves1

Selected resource group window 319

Page 320: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Opens a window where you can export configuration information listed in the table to afile that can be used for multiple purposes, such as backup or reporting.

Export1

Notes:1. Normal volumes include the internal volumes and external volumes that are mapped to the volumes of the external

storage system by using External Storage. For more information on external volumes, see the XP7 ExternalStorage for Open and Mainframe Systems User Guide.

Ports tab

DescriptionItem

Identifiers of the ports that are already mounted.Port ID

Attribute of the port indicating I/O flow.Attribute

• Initiator: Issues I/O commands to a target port when I/O is executed between storagesystems with Continuous Access Synchronous, and so on.

• Target: Receives I/O commands from a host.

• RCU Target: Receives I/O commands from an initiator when I/O is executed betweenstorage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, and so on.

• External: Issues I/O commands to a target port of an external storage system withExternal Storage.

320 Resource Partition GUI reference

Page 321: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Opens the Add Resources window, where you can add one or more resources to theresource group.

Add Resources

Opens the Remove Resources window, where you can remove one or more resourcesfrom the resource group.

Remove Resources

Opens a window where you can export configuration information listed in the table to afile that can be used for multiple purposes, such as backup or reporting.

Export

Host Groups/iSCSI Targets tab

DescriptionItem

Port identifiers.Port ID

Type of Ports.Type

• Fibre: Fibre Channel Ports

• iSCSI: iSCSI ports

Name and identifier of each host group or iSCSI target alias that uses a port.Host Group Name/iSCSITarget Alias Some undefined host groups or iSCSI targets can appear. If a host group or an iSCSI

target is not defined, a blank space appears.

Selected resource group window 321

Page 322: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Host Group ID or iSCSI Target ID.Host Group ID/ iSCSITarget ID1

iSCSI target name. A hyphen appears if the row of the host group.iSCSI Target Name

Name and identifier of each host group that uses a port.Host Group NameSome undefined host groups may appear. If a host group is not defined, the host nameis blank.

Identifier of a resource group.Resource Group ID1

Opens the Add Resources window, where you can add one or more resources to aresource group.

Add Resources

Opens the Remove Resources window, where you can remove one or more resourcesfrom a resource group.

Remove Resources

Opens a window where you can export configuration information listed in the table to afile that can be used for multiple purposes, such as backup or reporting.

Export

Note:1. This item does not appear in the window by default. To display this item, change the Column Settings of the

table option.

Create Resource Groups wizardCreate Resource Groups window

Use this window to designate the parity groups, LDEVs, ports, and host groups, if any, that willmake up a resource group.

322 Resource Partition GUI reference

Page 323: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Setting fields

DescriptionItem

Type a unique name for this resource group. the following rules apply:Resource Group Name*

• meta_resource cannot be set as a resource group name.

• Names must be unique, and multiple occurrences of the same resource groupname are not allowed in one storage system.

• Resource names are case-sensitive.

• Usable characters are alphanumeric, spaces, and symbols (! # $ % & ' ( ) + - . =@ [ ] ^ _ ` { } ~)

Opens the Select Parity Groupswindow, where you select one or more parity groupsto be assigned to the resource group.

Select Parity Groups

Opens the Select iSCSI Targets window where you select one or more iSCSI Targetsto be assigned to the resource group.

Select iSCSI Targets

Opens theSelect LDEVswindow, where you select one or more LDEVs to be assignedto the resource group.

Select LDEVs

Opens the Select Ports window, where you select one or more ports to be assignedto the resource group.

Select Ports

Opens the Select Host Groups window, where you select one or more host groupsto be assigned to the resource group.

Select Host Groups

Adds your settings to the Selected Resource Groups table.Add

* Item requires configuration.

Create Resource Groups wizard 323

Page 324: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected Resource Groups table

DescriptionItem

Name and identifier of each resource group.Resource Group Name (ID)A hyphen indicates the ID number is not assigned before setting a resource group.

Number of parity groups to be assigned to the resource group.Number of Parity Groups

Number of LDEVs to be assigned to the resource group.Number of LDEVs

Number of ports to be assigned to the resource group.Number of Ports

Number of host groups to be assigned to the resource group.Number of Host Groups

Number of iSCSI targets to be assigned to the resource group.Number of iSCSI Targets

Opens the Resource Group Property window, where you can view details of theselected resource group.

Detail

Removes a selected resource group.Remove

324 Resource Partition GUI reference

Page 325: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Select Parity Groups window

Available Parity Groups table

DescriptionItem

Parity group identifiers.Parity Group ID

Capacity of each parity group.Capacity

Create Resource Groups wizard 325

Page 326: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Number of LDEVs in each parity group.Number of LDEVs

Adds one or more parity groups selected in the Available Parity Groups table to theSelected Parity Groups table.

Add

Removes one or more selected parity groups from the Selected Parity Groups tableand relocates the parity groups to the Available Parity Groups table.

Remove

Selected Parity Groups table

DescriptionItem

Parity group identifiers.Parity Group ID

Capacity of each parity group.Capacity

Number of LDEVs in each parity group.Number of LDEVs

326 Resource Partition GUI reference

Page 327: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Select LDEVs window

Available LDEVs table

DescriptionItem

LDEV identifiers.LDEV ID

Create Resource Groups wizard 327

Page 328: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

LDEV IDs may appear for undefined LDEVs. A hyphen appearing in columns to theright of the LDEV ID and LDEV name (for example, Parity Group ID, Pool Name ID,Capacity, and so on) indicates the LDEV is undefined.

LDEV names.LDEV Name

Parity group identifier where the LDEV belongs.Parity Group ID

Pool name and identifier where the LDEV belongs.Pool Name (ID)

Capacity of each LDEV.Capacity

Provisioning type of each volume.Provisioning Type

• Basic: Internal volume

• THP: V-VOLs of Thin Provisioning or Thin Provisioning MF

• External: External volume

• External MF: Migration volume

• Snapshot: Fast Snap volume

• ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.

Attribute of the volume indicating how the LDEV is used.Attribute

• Command Device: Command device

• Remote Command Device: Remote command device

• JNL VOL: Journal volume

• Pool VOL: Pool volume. The number in parentheses shows the pool ID.

• Quorum Disk: Quorum disk for High Availability.

• TSE: TSE-VOL

• ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.

• SLU: LDEV of the SLU attribution.

• Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.

• Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined

Journal identifier when the attribute is JNL VOL. A hyphen indicates the attribute isother than JNL VOL.

Journal ID

Adds one or more LDEVs selected in the Available LDEVs table to the SelectedLDEVs table.

Add

Removes one or more selected LDEVs from the Selected LDEVs table and relocatesthe LDEVs to the Available LDEVs table.

Remove

328 Resource Partition GUI reference

Page 329: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected LDEVs table

DescriptionItem

LDEV identifiers.LDEV IDSome undefined LDEV IDs might appear. A hyphen in the LDEV name indicates theLDEV is undefined.

LDEV names.LDEV Name

Parity group identifier where the LDEV belongs.Parity Group ID

Pool name and identifier where the LDEV belongs.Pool Name (ID)

Capacity of each LDEV.Capacity

Displays the type of each volume.Provisioning Type

• Basic: Internal volume

• THP: V-VOLs of Thin Provisioning

• External: External volume

• External MF: Migration volume

• Snapshot: Fast Snap volume

• ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.

Attribute of the volume indicating how the LDEV is being used.Attribute

• Command Device: Command device.

• Remote Command Device.

• JNL VOL: Journal volume.

• Pool VOL: Pool volume. The number in parentheses is the pool identifier.

• Quorum Disk: Quorum disk for High Availability.

• TSE: TSE-VOL.

• ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.

Create Resource Groups wizard 329

Page 330: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

• SLU: LDEV of the SLU attribution.

• Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.

• Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

Journal identifier when the attribute is JNL VOL. A hyphen indicates the attribute isother than JNL VOL.

Journal ID

Select Ports window

330 Resource Partition GUI reference

Page 331: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Available Ports table

DescriptionItem

Port identifier.Port ID

Attribute of the port indicating I/O flow.Attribute

• Initiator: Issues I/O commands to a target port when I/O is executed betweenstorage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, and so on.

• Target: Receives I/O commands from a host.

• RCU Target: Receives I/O commands from an initiator when I/O is executedbetween storage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, and so on.

• External: Issues I/O commands to a target port of an external storage system withExternal Storage.

• HTP: Use this port when the external volume is mapped to the local storage system.Specify this port to the external storage system.

• FNP: Use this port when the external volume is mapped to the local storage system.Specify this port to the local storage system.

Adds one or more ports selected in the Available Ports table to the Selected Portstable.

Add

Removes one or more selected ports from the Selected Ports table and relocatesthe ports to the Available Ports table.

Remove

Create Resource Groups wizard 331

Page 332: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected Ports table

DescriptionItem

Port identifier.Port ID

Attribute of the port indicating I/O flow.Attribute

• Initiator: Issues I/O commands to a target port when I/O is executed betweenstorage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, and so on.

• Target: Receives I/O commands from a host.

• RCU Target: Receives I/O commands from an initiator when I/O is executedbetween storage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, and so on.

• External: Issues I/O commands to a target port of an external storage system withExternal Storage.

• HTP: Use this port when the external volume is mapped to the local storage system.Specify this port to the external storage system.

• FNP: Use this port when the external volume is mapped to the local storage system.Specify this port to the local storage system.

332 Resource Partition GUI reference

Page 333: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Select Host Groups window

Create Resource Groups wizard 333

Page 334: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Available Host Groups table

DescriptionItem

Port identifiers.Port ID

Name and identifier of each host group that uses a port.Host Group NameSome undefined host groups might appear. If a host group is not defined, the hostname is blank.

Adds one or more host groups selected in the Available Host Groups table to theSelected Host Groups table.

Add

Removes one or more selected host groups from the Selected Host Groups tableand relocates the host groups to the Available Host Groups table.

Remove

334 Resource Partition GUI reference

Page 335: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected Host Groups table

DescriptionItem

Port identifiers.Port ID

Name and identifier of each host group that uses a port.Host Group NameSome undefined host groups may appear. If a host group is not defined, the hostname is blank.

Select iSCSI Targets window

Create Resource Groups wizard 335

Page 336: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Available iSCSI Targets table

This table lists iSCSI targets that are assigned to each user.

DescriptionItem

Port identifiers.Port ID

Name and identifier of each iSCSI target alias that usesa port.

iSCSI Target Alias

Some undefined iSCSI targets may appear. If an iSCSItarget is not defined, the blank appears.

iSCSI target name. If an iSCSI target is not defined, theblank appears.

iSCSI Target Name

Adds one or more iSCSI targets selected in theAvailableiSCSI Targets table to the Selected iSCSI Targets table.

Add

Removes one or more selected host groups from theSelected iSCSI Targets table and relocates the iSCSItargets to the Available iSCSI Targets table.

Remove

336 Resource Partition GUI reference

Page 337: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected iSCSI Targets table

DescriptionItem

Port identifiers.Port ID

Name and identifier of each iSCSI target alias that usesa port.

iSCSI Target Alias

Some undefined iSCSI targets may appear. If an iSCSItarget is not defined, the blank appears.

iSCSI target name. If an iSCSI target is not defined, theblank appears.

iSCSI Target Name

Create Resource Groups Confirmation windowConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

Create Resource Groups wizard 337

Page 338: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Name and identifier of each resource group.Resource Group Name (ID)

Number of parity groups to be assigned to the resource group.Number of Parity Groups

Number of LDEVs to be assigned to the resource group.Number of LDEVs

Number of ports to be assigned to the resource group.Number of Ports

Number of host groups to be assigned to the resource group.Number of Host Groups

Opens the Resource Group Property window, where you can view the details of theselected resource group.

Detail

338 Resource Partition GUI reference

Page 339: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Edit Resource Group wizardEdit Resource Group window

DescriptionItem

Type the name of the resource group after editing.Resource Group Name

• meta_resource cannot be set as a name.

• Duplicate occurrences of the same resource group name are not allowed in onestorage system.

• Names are case-sensitive.

• Usable characters are alphanumeric, spaces, and symbols (! # $ % & ' ( ) + - . =@ [ ] ^ _ ` { } ~)

Edit Resource Group Confirmation windowConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

Edit Resource Group wizard 339

Page 340: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected Resource Group tab

DescriptionItem

Name and identifier of the edited resource group.Resource Group Name (ID)

Number of parity groups that are assigned to the resource group.Number of Parity Groups

Number of LDEVs that are assigned to the resource group.Number of LDEVs

Number of ports that are assigned to the resource group.Number of Ports

Number of host groups that are assigned to the resource group.Number of Host Groups

Number of host groups that are assigned to the resource group.Number of iSCSI Targets

Opens the Resource Group Property window, where you can view the details of theselected resource group.

Detail

Add Resources wizardAdd Resources window

DescriptionItem

Opens the Select Parity Group window, where you can select one or more paritygroups to be added to the resource group.

Select Parity Groups

Opens the Select LDEVs window, where you can select one or more LDEVs to beadded to the resource group.

Select LDEVs

Opens the Select Ports window, where you can select one or more ports to be addedto the resource group.

Select Ports

340 Resource Partition GUI reference

Page 341: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Opens the Select Host groupwindow, where you can select one or more host groupsto be added to the resource group.

Select Host Groups

Opens the Select iSCSI Targets window where you can select one or more host groupsto be added to the resource group.

Select iSCSI Targets

Add Resources Confirmation windowConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

Selected Resource Group table

DescriptionItem

Name and identifier of the resource group to be added to the storage system.Resource Group Name (ID)

Selected Parity Groups table

DescriptionItem

One or more parity group identifiers to be added to the resource group.Parity Group ID

Capacity of each parity group.Capacity

Number of LDEVs in each parity group.Number of LDEVs

Total number of selected parity groups.Total

Add Resources wizard 341

Page 342: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected LDEVs table

DescriptionItem

The identifiers of the LDEVs to be added to a resource group.LDEV IDSome undefined LDEV IDs may appear. A hyphen in the LDEV name indicates theLDEV is undefined.

LDEV names.LDEV Name

Parity group identifier where the LDEV belongs.Parity Group ID

Pool name and identifier where the LDEV belongs.Pool Name (ID)

Capacity of the LDEV.Capacity

Provisioning type of the volume.Provisioning Type

• Basic: Internal volume

• THP : V-VOLs of Thin Provisioning.

• External: External volume

• External MF: Migration volume

• Snapshot: Fast Snap volume

• ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.

Attribute of the volume indicating how the LDEV is being used.Attribute

• Command Device: Command device

• Remote Command Device

• JNL VOL: Journal volume

• Pool VOL: Pool volume. The number in parentheses is the pool identifier.

• Quorum Disk: Quorum disk for High Availability

• TSE: TSE-VOL

• ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.

• SLU: LDEV of the SLU attribution.

• Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.

• Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined

Journal identifier appears when the attribute is JNL VOL. A hyphen indicates theattribute is other than JNL VOL.

Journal ID

Total number of selected LDEVs.Total

Selected Ports table

DescriptionItem

Port identifiers to be added to a resource group.Port ID

Attribute of the port indicating I/O flow.Attribute

• Initiator: Issues I/O commands to a target port when I/O is executed betweenstorage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, and so on.

• Target: Receives I/O commands from a host.

342 Resource Partition GUI reference

Page 343: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

• RCU Target: Receives I/O commands from an initiator when I/O is executedbetween storage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, and so on.

• External: Issues I/O commands to a target port of an external storage system withExternal Storage.

Total number of selected ports.Total

Selected Host Groups table

DescriptionItem

Port identifiers that are used by the host group.Port ID

Name and identifier of each host group to be added to a resource group.Host Group NameSome undefined host groups might appear. If a group is not defined, the host nameis blank.

Total number of selected host groups.Total

Selected iSCSI Targets table

DescriptionItem

Port identifiers that are used by the host group.Port ID

iSCSI Target Alias.iSCSI Target AliasName and identifier of each iSCSI target alias to be added to a resource group.Some undefined iSCSI targets can appear. If an iSCSI target is not defined, the targetname is blank.

iSCSI target name. If an iSCSI target is not defined, the target name is blank.iSCSI Target Name

Remove Resources window

Remove Resources window 343

Page 344: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected Resource Group table

DescriptionItem

Name and identifier of each resource group whose resources are deleted.Resource Group Name (ID)

Selected Parity Groups table (when deleting parity groups)

DescriptionItem

Identifier of each parity group to be deleted from the resource group.Parity Group ID

Capacity of each parity group.Capacity

Number of LDEVs in the parity group.Number of LDEVs

Total number of parity groups.Total

Selected LDEVs table (when deleting LDEVs)

DescriptionItem

LDEV identifiers to be deleted from a resource group.LDEV IDSome undefined LDEV IDs may appear. A hyphen in the LDEV name indicates theLDEV is undefined.

LDEV names to be deleted from the resource group.LDEV Name

Parity group ID where the LDEV belongs.Parity Group ID

Pool name where the LDEV belongs.Pool Name (ID)

Capacity of each LDEV.Capacity

Provisioning type of each volume.Provisioning Type

• Basic: Internal volume

• THP: V-VOLs of Thin Provisioning or Thin Provisioning MF

• External: External volume

• External MF: Migration volume

• Snapshot: Fast Snap volume

• ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.

Attribute of the volume indicating how the LDEV is being used.Attribute

• Command Device: Command device.

• Remote Command Device.

• JNL VOL: Journal volume.

• Pool VOL: Pool volume. The number in parentheses is the pool identifier.

• Quorum Disk: Quorum disk for High Availability.

• TSE: TSE-VOL.

• ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.

• SLU: LDEV of the SLU attribution.

• Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.

• Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

344 Resource Partition GUI reference

Page 345: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Journal ID when the attribute is JNL VOL. A hyphen indicates the attribute is otherthan JNL VOL.

Journal ID

Total number of selected LDEVs.Total

Selected Ports table (when deleting ports)

DescriptionItem

Port IDs that are to be deleted from the resource group.Port ID

Attribute of the port indicating I/O flow.Attribute

• Initiator: Issues I/O commands to a target port when I/O is executed betweenstorage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, and so on.

• Target: Receives I/O commands from a host.

• RCU Target: Receives I/O commands from an initiator when I/O is executedbetween storage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, and so on.

• External: Issues I/O commands to a target port of an external storage system withExternal Storage.

• HTP: Use this port when the external volume is mapped to the local storage system.Specify this port to the external storage system.

• FNP: Use this port when the external volume is mapped to the local storage system.Specify this port to the local storage system.

Total number of selected ports.Total

Selected Host Groups table (when deleting Host Groups)

DescriptionItem

Port IDs that are used by the host group.Port ID

Name and ID of each host group name to be deleted from the resource group.Host Group NameSome undefined host group names may appear. If a host group is not defined, thehost name is blank.

Total number of selected host groups.Total

Selected iSCSI Targets table (when deleting iSCSI Targets)

DescriptionItem

Port IDs that are used by the host group.Port ID

Name and ID of each iSCSI target alias to be deleted from the resource group.iSCSI Target AliasSome undefined iSCSI targets may appear. If an iSCSI target is not defined, the targetalias is blank.

iSCSI target name. If an iSCSI target is not defined, the target name is blank.iSCSI Target Name

Remove Resources window 345

Page 346: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Delete Resource Groups window

Selected Resource Groups table

DescriptionItem

Name and ID of each resource group name to be deleted.Resource Group Name (ID)

Resource Group Properties window

346 Resource Partition GUI reference

Page 347: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Resource Group Properties table

DescriptionItem

Name and ID of a resource group name.Resource Group Name (ID)

Number of parity groups that are assigned to the resource group.Number of Parity Groups

Number of LDEVs that are assigned to the resource group.Number of LDEVs

Number of ports that are assigned to the resource group.Number of Ports

Number of host groups that are assigned to the resource group.Number of Host Groups

Number of iSCSI targets that are assigned to the resource group.Number of iSCSI Targets

Model name and serial number of the virtual storage machine assigned to the resourcegroup.

Virtual Storage Machine

Parity Groups table

DescriptionItem

Parity group IDs.Parity Group ID

Capacity of each parity group.Capacity

Number of LDEVs in each parity group.Number of LDEVs

Displays the attribute of the parity group.Attribute-: Parity group in which the attribute is not defined.

Total number of selected parity groups.Total

LDEVs table

DescriptionItem

LDEV IDs.LDEV IDSome undefined LDEV IDs may appear. A hyphen in the LDEV name indicates theLDEV is undefined.

LDEV names.LDEV Name

Parity group ID where the LDEV belongs.Parity Group ID

Pool name and ID where the LDEV belongs.Pool Name (ID)

Capacity of the LDEV.Capacity

Provisioning type of the volume.Provisioning Type

• Basic: Internal volume

• THP: V-VOLs of Thin Provisioning.

• External: External volume

• External MF: Migration volume

• Snapshot: Fast Snap volume

• ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.

Attribute of the volume indicating how the LDEV is being used.Attribute

• Command Device: Command device.

• Remote Command Device.

Resource Group Properties window 347

Page 348: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

• JNL VOL: Journal volume.

• Pool VOL: Pool volume. The number in parentheses is the pool identifier.

• Quorum Disk: Quorum disk for High Availability.

• TSE: TSE-VOL.

• ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.

• SLU: LDEV of the SLU attribution.

• Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.

• Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

Journal ID when the attribute is JNL VOL. A hyphen indicates the attribute is otherthan JNL VOL.

Journal ID

Information about the virtual storage machine.Virtual Storage Machine

• LDEV ID: Virtual LDEV ID. If a Virtual LDEV ID is not assigned to LDEV, this columnis blank.

• Device Name: Virtual device name, which is a combination of the virtual emulationtype, virtual LUSE volume number, and the virtual CVS attribute. Values of thevirtual emulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, and virtual CVS attributeappear only for items that have been set. This column is blank when the virtualemulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, and virtual CVS attribute are not set.If the virtual CVS attribute is set, CVS is attached as the suffix to the device name.

• SSID: Virtual SSID. If Virtual SSID is not set for LDEV, this column is blank.

• Attribute: Virtual LDEV attribute. If the attribute is not set for LDEV, this column isblank.

Total number of selected volumes.Total

Ports table

DescriptionItem

Port IDs.Port Name

Displays the attribute of each port. Initiator, Target, RCU Target, External, HTP, orFNP is displayed.

Attribute

Total number of selected ports.Total

Host Groups table

DescriptionItem

Port IDs that are used by the host group.Port ID

Name and ID of each host group.Host Group NameSome undefined host group names may appear. If a host group is not defined, thehost group is blank.

Total number of selected host groups.Total

348 Resource Partition GUI reference

Page 349: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

iSCSI Targets table

DescriptionItem

Port IDs that are used by the host group.Port ID

iSCSI target alias.iSCSI Target AliasiSCSI target alias and identifier of each iSCSI target.Some undefined iSCSI targets may appear. If an iSCSI target is not defined, the targetalias is blank.

iSCSI target name. If an iSCSI target is not defined, the target name is blank.iSCSI Target Name

Edit Virtualization Management Settings wizardEdit Virtualization Management Settings window

Setting fields

DescriptionItem

Select one from the following options.Virtual Management Settings

• Enable: Virtualization management can be used. You can set a initial virtual LDEVID or the virtual configuration, or the both.

• Enable (Not Set): Virtualization management can be used. However, you cannotset the initial virtual LDEV ID and the virtual configuration.

• Disable: Virtual management cannot be used.

Specify the virtual LDEV identifier of the volume.Initial Virtual LDEV ID

• LDKC: LDKC number is displayed.

• CU: Select the CU number between 00 and FE.

• DEV: Select the device number between 00 and FF.

• Interval: Specify the interval between 0 and 255.If the virtual storage machine is the same as the storage system, assign the virtualLDEV ID which is different from the LDEV ID of the selected LDEV. If the virtualstorage machine is the same as the storage system, and if the virtual LDEV IDwhich is the same as LDEV ID of the selected LDEV must be assigned, selectDisable in Virtualization Management Settings.Caution: To specify multiple virtual LDEV IDs, specify the interval for setting virtualLDEV IDs in Interval. If virtual storage machines that span multiple storage systemsare configured, do not allocate any virtual LDEV ID that is already used in otherstorage system.

This item is selectable only when the Enable is selected in the Virtual Management.

Select either one from the following alternatives.Virtual Configuration

• Specify: Virtual configuration can be specified and set.

• Not Set: Virtual configuration cannot be set (the configuration is same as LDEV).

For virtual configuration, the specified value is set to all the selected LDEVs.This item is selectable only when the Enable is selected in the Virtual Management.

Select the virtual emulation type. For the virtual emulation type, like the emulationtype, set one of the emulation types that exist in the same group of 32 volumes withLDEV IDs.

Emulation Type

This item is selectable only when the Specify is selected in the Virtual Configuration.

Edit Virtualization Management Settings wizard 349

Page 350: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Select either one from the following alternatives.CVS Settings

• Enable: CVS settings can be used.

• Disable: CVS Settings cannot be used.

This item is selectable only when the Specify is selected in the Virtual Configuration.

Specify the decimal number of concatenated LDEVs between 1 and 36. If you do notconcatenate virtual LDEVs, specify 1.

Number of ConcatenatedLDEVs

This item is selectable only when the Specify is selected in the Virtual Configuration.

Specify the hexadecimal SSID between 0004 and FFFE. Specify a virtual SSID foreach virtual LDEV address (64, 128, 256) in the virtual storage machine.

SSID

This item is selectable only when the Specify is selected in the Virtual Configuration.

Confirmation window

Selected LDEVs table

DescriptionItem

Displays LDEV identifier of the volume.LDEV ID

Displays the following information about the virtual storage machine to which the LDEVbelongs:

Virtual Storage Machine

• Model / Serial Number: Displays the model and serial number of the virtual storagemachine to which the volume belongs.

• LDEV ID: Displays the virtual LDEV identifier.

• Device Name: Displays the virtual device name of the volume.

• SSID: Displays the virtual SSID.

350 Resource Partition GUI reference

Page 351: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

C LDEV GUI referenceThis appendix describes the windows, wizards, and dialog boxes used when creating LDEVs.

Parity Groups windowUse this window to view information about parity groups. Only the parity groups assigned to thelogged-on user are available.

Summary

DescriptionItem

Capacity • Internal: Capacity of all of the parity groups in the internal volume.

Free1: Free space capacity of the internal volume. The expanded capacityappears when existing parity groups with capacity virtualization isenabled.

◦ Total2: Total capacity of the internal volume. The expanded capacityappears when existing parity groups with capacity virtualization isenabled.

• External: Capacity of all of the parity groups in the external volume.

◦ Free1: Free space capacity of the external volume.

◦ Total2: Total capacity of the external volume.

Notes:1. The control information used by the storage system, such as control cylinders, is not included in the Free capacity.2. The total capacity of the LDEVs and the Free capacity is displayed in the Total.

Parity Groups window 351

Page 352: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Parity Groups tab

DescriptionItem

Parity group identifier of the parity group in the storage system.Parity Group ID

Status of each LDEV in the parity group.LDEV Status

Normal: Normal status.

Blocked: Host cannot access a blocked volume.

Warning: Problem occurs in the volume.

Formatting: Volume is being formatted.

Preparing Quick Format: Volume is being prepared for quick formatting.

Quick Formatting: Volume is being quick-formatted.

Correction Access: Access attribute is being corrected.

Copying: Data in the volume is being copied.

Read Only: Data cannot be written on a read-only volume.

Shredding: Volume is being shredded.

Hyphen (-): Any status other than the above.

RAID level. An asterisk "*" indicates that the parity group to which the LDEVbelongs is interleaved (concatenated). Either RAID level of the parity groupappears.

RAID Level

Emulation type of each parity group.Base Emulation Type

Capacity • Free: Capacity of the free space of each parity group. The expanded capacityappears when existing parity groups with capacity virtualization is enabled.The control information used by the storage system, such as controlcylinders, is not included in the Free capacity.

• Total: The total capacity of the LDEVs and Free capacity is displayed in theTotal. The expanded capacity appears when existing parity groups withcapacity virtualization is enabled.

Capacity assured for writing data in the parity group.Physical Capacity

Number of LDEVs • Unallocated: Number of unallocated LDEVs in each parity group.

• Total: Total number of LDEVs in each parity group.

Drive type and rpm in use on this LDEV.Drive Type/RPM

Encryption information:Encryption

• Enable: encrypted parity group

• Disable: non-encrypted parity group

If the parity group in which the encryption setting is not defined, a hyphen (-)is displayed.

Displays the information about the capacity virtualization of the parity group.Enabled: The capacity virtualization of the parity group is enabled.

Capacity Virtualization

Disabled: The capacity virtualization of the parity group is disabled.Hyphen (-): The parity group with the capacity virtualization is not supported.

352 LDEV GUI reference

Page 353: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays the information that LDEV is allocated in the virtual area or the physicalarea. If the capacity virtualization is enabled, LDEVs are initially allocated in

Expanded Space Used

the physical area, then LDEVs are allocated in the expanded area. This itemdisplays whether the LDEV area is allocated in the expanded or physical area.Yes: LDEV is allocated in the expanded area.No: LDEV is allocated in the physical area.

Displays the attribute of the parity group.AttributeHyphen (-): The parity group in which the attribute is not defined.

Resource group name and ID of which this parity group is a member.Resource Group Name (ID)

Model name and serial number of the virtual storage machine that has theparity group.

Virtual Storage Machine*

Opens the Create LDEVs window.Create LDEVs

Opens the Format LDEVs window.Format LDEVs

Opens the Edit Encryption window.Edit Encryption

Opens the Shred LDEVs window.Shred LDEVs*

Opens the Edit Parity Groups window.Edit Parity Groups*

Opens the Block LDEVs window.Block LDEVs*

Opens the Restore LDEVs window.Restore LDEVs*

Opens a window where you can export configuration information listed in thetable to a file that can be used for multiple purposes, such as backup orreporting.

Export

* Available when you click More Actions.

Parity Groups tab: Internal or external volumeUse this window to view information about the parity groups in the internal (or external) volume.Only the parity groups assigned to the logged-on user are available.

Parity Groups tab: Internal or external volume 353

Page 354: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Summary

DescriptionItem

Capacity • Free: The free space capacity of the internal or external volume. Theexpanded capacity appears when existing parity groups with capacityvirtualization is enabled. The control information used by the storage system,such as control cylinders, is not included in the Free capacity.

• Total: The total capacity of the LDEVs and Free capacity is displayed in theTotal. The expanded capacity appears when existing parity groups withcapacity virtualization is enabled.

Parity Groups tab

DescriptionItem

The parity group identifiers of the parity groups in the storage system.Parity Group ID

The icons indicate the LDEV status.LDEV Status

Normal: Normal status.

Blocked: Host cannot access a blocked volume.

Warning: Problem occurs in the volume.

Formatting: Volume is being formatted.

Preparing Quick Format: Volume is being prepared for quick formatting.

Quick Formatting: Volume is being quick-formatted.

Correction Access: Access attribute is being corrected.

354 LDEV GUI reference

Page 355: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Copying: Data in the volume is being copied.

Read Only: Data cannot be written on a read-only volume.

Shredding: Volume is being shredded.

Hyphen (-): Any status other than the above.

RAID level. An asterisk "*" indicates that the parity group to which the LDEVbelongs is interleaved (concatenated). Either RAID level of the parity groupappears.

RAID Level

Emulation type.Base Emulation Type

Capacity • Free: Capacity of the free space. The expanded capacity appears whenexisting parity groups with capacity virtualization is enabled. The controlinformation used by the storage system such as control cylinders is notincluded in the displayed capacity.

• Total: The total capacity of the LDEVs and the "Capacity - Free" capacityis displayed. The expanded capacity appears when existing parity groupswith capacity virtualization is enabled.

Capacity assured for writing data in the parity group.Physical Capacity

Number of LDEVs • Unallocated: Number of unallocated LDEVs.

• Total: Total number of LDEVs.

Drive type and rpm in use on this LDEV.Drive Type/RPM

Encryption information:Encryption

• Enable: encrypted parity group

• Disable: non-encrypted parity group

If the parity group in which the encryption setting is not defined, a hyphen (-)is displayed.

Displays the information about the capacity virtualization of the parity group.Capacity VirtualizationEnabled: The capacity virtualization of the parity group is enabled.Disabled: The capacity virtualization of the parity group is disabled.Hyphen (-): The parity group with the capacity virtualization is not supported.

Displays the information that LDEV is allocated in the expanded area or thephysical area. If the capacity virtualization is enabled, LDEVs are initiallyallocated in the physical area, then LDEVs are allocated in the expanded area.

Expanded Space Used1

This item displays whether the LDEV area is allocated in the expanded orphysical area.Yes: LDEV is allocated in the expanded area.No: LDEV is allocated in the physical area.

Displays the attribute of the parity group.AttributeHyphen (-): The parity group in which the attribute is not defined.

Resource group name and ID of which this parity group is a member.Resource Group Name (ID)

Model name and serial number of the virtual storage machine having the paritygroup.

Virtual Storage Machine*

Opens the Create LDEVs window.Create LDEVs

Opens the Format LDEVs window.Format LDEVs

Parity Groups tab: Internal or external volume 355

Page 356: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Opens the Edit Encryption window.Edit Encryption

Opens the Shred LDEVs window.Shred LDEVs*

Opens the Edit Parity Groups window.Edit Parity Groups*

Opens the Block LDEVs window.Block LDEVs*

Opens the Restore LDEVs window.Restore LDEVs*

Opens a window where you can export configuration information listed in thetable to a file that can be used for multiple purposes, such as backup orreporting.

Export

*Available when you click More Actions.

LDEVs tab: Internal or external volumesUse this window to view information about the LDEVs assigned to parity groups in an internal orexternal volume. Only the parity groups assigned to the logged-on user are available.

Summary

DescriptionItem

Current status of the LDEV.LDEV Status

Normal: Normal status.

Blocked: Host cannot access a blocked volume.

Warning: Problem occurs in the volume.

356 LDEV GUI reference

Page 357: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Formatting: Volume is being formatted.

Preparing Quick Format: Volume is being prepared for quick formatting.

Quick Formatting: Volume is being quick-formatted.

Correction Access: Access attribute is being corrected.

Copying: Data in the volume is being copied.

Read Only: Data cannot be written on a read-only volume.

Shredding: Volume is being shredded.

Hyphen (-): Any status other than the above.

RAID level. An asterisk "*" indicates that the parity group to which the LDEVbelongs is interleaved (concatenated).

RAID Level

Capacity • Free: Capacity of the free space. The expanded capacity appears whenexisting parity groups with capacity virtualization is enabled.The control information used by the storage system, such as controlcylinders, is not included in the Free capacity.

• Total: The total capacity of the LDEVs and the "Capacity - Free" capacityis displayed in the Total. The expanded capacity appears when existingparity groups with capacity virtualization is enabled.

Drive type and rpm in use on this LDEV.Drive Type/RPM

Interleaved (concatenated) parity groups.Interleaved Parity Groups

Displays information about the capacity virtualization of the parity group thatis created of LDEVs.

Capacity Virtualization

Enabled: The capacity virtualization of the parity group is enabled.Disabled: The capacity virtualization of the parity group is disabled.Hyphen (-): The parity group with the capacity virtualization is not supported.

Displays the information that LDEV is allocated in the virtual area or the physicalarea. If the capacity virtualization is enabled, LDEVs are initially allocated inthe physical area, then LDEVs are allocated in the expanded area.

Expanded Space Used

This item displays whether the LDEV area is allocated in the expanded orphysical area.Yes: LDEV is allocated in the expanded area.No: LDEV is allocated in the physical area.

Number of LDEVs • Unallocated: Number of unallocated LDEVs.

• Total: Total number of LDEVs.

LDEVs tab

DescriptionItem

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

LDEV name.LDEV Name

LDEV status.Status

Normal: Normal status.

LDEVs tab: Internal or external volumes 357

Page 358: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Blocked: Host cannot access a blocked volume.

Warning: Problem occurs in the volume.

Formatting: Volume is being formatted.

Preparing Quick Format: Volume is being prepared for quick formatting.

Quick Formatting: Volume is being quick-formatted.

Correction Access: Access attribute is being corrected.

Copying: Data in the volume is being copied.

Read Only: Data cannot be written on a read-only volume.

Shredding: Volume is being shredded.

Hyphen (-): Any status other than the above.

Emulation type.Emulation Type

Capacity of the selected LDEV.Capacity

Attribute of the volume indicating how the LDEV is being used.Attribute

• Command Device: The volume is a command device.

• Remote Command Device: The volume is a remote command device.

• JNL VOL: The volume is a journal volume.

• Pool VOL: The volume is a pool volume. The number in the parenthesis indicates thepool identifier.

• Quorum Disk: Quorum disk for High Availability.

• Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.

• Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined

Displays the information that LDEV is allocated in the expanded area or the physical area.If the capacity virtualization is enabled, LDEVs are initially allocated in the physical area,then LDEVs are allocated in the expanded area.

Expanded Space Used

This item displays whether the LDEV area is allocated in the expanded or physical area.Yes: LDEV is allocated in the expanded area.No: LDEV is allocated in the physical area.

Resource group name and identifier of the LDEV.Resource Group Name(ID)

Information about the virtual storage machine.Virtual StorageMachine1

• Model / Serial Number1: Model name and serial number of the virtual storage machinethat has LDEV.

• LDEV ID1: Virtual LDEV ID. If a Virtual LDEV ID is not assigned to the LDEV, this columnis blank.

• Device Name1: Virtual device name, which is a combination of the virtual emulationtype, virtual LUSE volume number, and the virtual CVS attribute. Values of the virtualemulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, and virtual CVS attribute appear only foritems that have been set. This column is blank when the virtual emulation type, virtualLUSE volume number, and virtual CVS attribute are not set. If the virtual CVS attributeis set, CVS is attached as the suffix to the device name.

• SSID1: Virtual SSID. If Virtual SSID is not set for LDEV, this column is blank.

• Attribute1: Virtual LDEV attribute. If the attribute is not set for LDEV, this column is blank.

358 LDEV GUI reference

Page 359: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Opens the Create LDEVs window.Create LDEVs

Opens the Edit LDEVs window.Edit LDEVs

Opens the Format LDEVs window.Format LDEVs

Opens the Delete LDEVs window.Delete LDEVs2

Opens the Shred LDEVs window.Shred LDEVs2

Opens the Block LDEVs window.Block LDEVs2

Opens the Restore LDEVs window.Restore LDEVs2

Opens a window where you can export configuration information listed in the table to a filethat can be used for multiple purposes, such as backup or reporting.

Export

Notes:1. Does not appear by default. To display this item, change the Column Settings of the table option.2. Available when you click More Actions.

Logical Devices windowUse this window to view information about logical devices. Only the LDEVs assigned to thelogged-on user are available.

Logical Devices window 359

Page 360: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Summary

DescriptionItem

Number of LDEVs • Open Allocated: Number of allocated LDEVs for open system.

• Open Unallocated: Number of unallocated LDEVs for open system.

• Open Reserved: Number of reserved LDEVs for the open system.

• Open V-VOLs: Number of allocated V-VOLs for the open system.

• Mainframe Allocated: Number of allocated LDEVs for the mainframe system.

• Mainframe Reserved: Number of reserved LDEVs for the mainframe system.

• Mainframe V-VOLs: Number of allocated V-VOLs for the mainframe system.

Total number of LDEVs.Total Number of LDEVs

Formatting n %: Displays the percentage of the progress of formattingprocessing.

Format/Shredding Task Status

Preparing Quick Format n %: Displays the percentage of the progress of thepreparing quick format processing.Shredding n %: Displays the percentage of the progress of the shreddingprocessing.Blank: Displays a blank when formatting or shredding does not perform. If theinformation cannot be obtained, for example being changed of the storagesystem configuration, a blank is displayed.

Open the View Migration Plans window. For details, see the XP7 Auto LUNUser Guide.

View Migration Plans*

Open the View Histories window. For details, see the XP7 Auto LUN UserGuide.

View Histories*

*Available when you select Auto LUN.

LDEVs tab

DescriptionItem

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

LDEV name.LDEV Name

LDEV status.Status

Normal: Normal status.

Blocked: Host cannot access a blocked volume.

Warning: Problem occurs in the volume.

Formatting: Volume is being formatted.

Preparing Quick Format: Volume is being prepared for quick formatting.

Quick Formatting: Volume is being quick-formatted.

Correction Access: Access attribute is being corrected.

Copying: Data in the volume is being copied.

Read Only: Data cannot be written on a read-only volume.

Shredding: Volume is being shredded.

360 LDEV GUI reference

Page 361: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Hyphen (-): Any status other than the above.

Displays the V-VOL management task being performed on a Thin Provisioning, ThinProvisioning MF, Smart Tiers, or a Smart Tiers MF V-VOL.

V-VOL ManagementTask1

• Reclaiming Zero Pages: The process is in progress.

• Waiting for Zero Page Reclaiming: The process has been waited.

• Blank: The V-VOL management task can be performed on the volume, but the task isnot currently in process.

• Hyphen(-): The V-VOL management task cannot be performed on the volume.

LDEV capacity.Capacity

Number of paths set for the LDEV.Number of paths

Emulation type.Emulation Type

Provisioning type to be assigned to the LDEV.Provisioning Type

• Basic: Internal volume.

• THP: THP V-VOL

• External: External volume.

• External MF: Migration volume.

• Snapshot: Fast Snap volume.

• ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.

Attribute of the volume indicating how the LDEV is being used.Attribute

• Command Device: Volume is a command device.

• Remote Command Device: Volume is a remote command device.

• JNL VOL: Volume is a journal volume.

• Pool VOL: Volume is a pool volume. The number in parentheses shows the poolidentifier.

• Quorum Disk: Quorum disk for High Availability.

• TSE: TSE-VOL

• ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.

• SLU: LDEV of the SLU attribution.

• Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.

• Hyphen (-): Volume other than the above.

Displays the access attribute of the LDEV.Access Attribute1

Pool name (pool identifier).Pool Name (ID)

Parity group identifier.Parity Group ID

RAID level. An asterisk (*) indicates that the parity group that the LDEV belong to isinterleaved (concatenated).

RAID Level

MP blade identifier.MP Blade ID1,2

Encryption information:Encryption1

• Enable: Encryption setting of a parity group in which the LDEV is placed is enabled. Orthe virtual volume associated with the pool whose pool-VOLs are enabled of theencryption setting.

• Disable: Encryption setting of a parity group (or a pool) in which the LDEV is placed isdisabled. Or the virtual volume associated with the pool whose pool-VOLs are disabledof the encryption setting.

Logical Devices window 361

Page 362: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

• Mixed: Pool-VOLs with enabled encryption settings and pool-VOLs with disabledencryption settings are intermixed in the pool in which the LDEV is placed.Caution: The data encryption is not ensured in the pool that has the Mixed encryptionsetting. To manage the data encryption securely, use the pool with an encryption settingof Enabled or Disabled.

• Hyphen(-): External volume or migration volume. As for THP V-VOL of Thin Provisioning, the pool-VOL in the pool of which THP V-VOL belongs is an external volume, or thepool of which THP V-VOL belongs is being blocked.

Displays the information that LDEV is allocated in the expanded area or the physical area.If the capacity virtualization is enabled, LDEVs are initially allocated in the physical area,then LDEVs are allocated in the expanded area.

Expanded Space Used

This item displays whether the LDEV area is allocated in the expanded or physical area.Yes: LDEV is allocated in the expanded area.No: LDEV is allocated in the physical area.

Information about the ALUA mode.ALUA ModeEnabled: LDEV can be used in ALUA.Disabled: LDEV cannot be used in ALUA.

The LDEV's T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled).T10 PI1

Information about the external storage system.External StorageSystem1

If LDEV is the THP V-VOL of the data direct mapping attribure, the information about theexternal storage system to which LDEV is being mapped appears.

• Vender/Model/Serial Number: The information about these items of the external storagesystem is displayed. A hyphen(-) appears if an external storage system is not mappedto LDEV.

• Path Group ID: The information about this item of the external storage system isdisplayed. If the link of the path group id is clicked, the Mapped Volumes tab appears.A hyphen(-) appears if an external storage system is not mapped to LDEV.

Information about the data direct mapping.Data Direct Mapping1

• LDEV ID: LDEV ID of the pool-VOL in the pool of the data direct mapping attribute, orLDEV ID of the THP V-VOL of the data direct mapping attribute. If the link of LDEV IDis clicked, the LDEV Properties window appears. If the data direct mapping attribute isdisabled, a hyphen (-) is displayed. If THP V-VOL of the data direct mapping attributeis not created in the pool of the data direct mapping attribute, this field is blank.

• Parity Group ID: Parity Group ID of the pool-VOL in the pool the data direct mappingattribute. If the data direct mapping attribute is disabled, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Resource group name and ID of which this LDEV is a member.Resource Group Name(ID)1

Information about the virtual storage machine.Virtual StorageMachine1

• Model / Serial Number1: Model name and serial number of the virtual storage machinethat has the LDEV.

• LDEV ID1: Virtual LDEV ID. If a Virtual LDEV ID is not assigned to LDEV, this columnis blank.

• Device Name1: Virtual device name, which is a combination of the virtual emulationtype, virtual LUSE volume number, and the virtual CVS attribute. Values of the virtualemulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, and virtual CVS attribute appear only foritems that have been set. This column is blank when the virtual emulation type, virtualLUSE volume number, and virtual CVS attribute are not set. If the virtual CVS attributeis set, CVS is attached as the suffix to the device name.

• SSID1: Virtual SSID. If Virtual SSID is not set for LDEV, this column is blank.

• Attribute1: Virtual LDEV attribute. If the attribute is not set for LDEV, this column is blank.

362 LDEV GUI reference

Page 363: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Opens the Create LDEVs window.Create LDEVs

Opens the LUN Paths window.Add LUN Paths

Opens the Edit LDEVs window.Edit LDEVs

Opens the Format LDEVs window.Format LDEVs3

Opens the Delete LDEVs window.Delete LDEVs3

Opens the Shred LDEVs window.Shred LDEVs3

Opens the Delete LUN Paths window.Delete LUN Paths3

Opens the Edit Command Devices windowEdit Command Device3

Opens the Block LDEVs window.Block LDEVs3

Opens the Restore LDEVs window.Restore LDEVs3

Opens the Assign MP Blade window.Assign MP Blade3

Opens the Delete UUIDs window.Delete UUIDs3

Opens the Reclaim Zero Pages window.Reclaim Zero Pages3

Opens the Stop Reclaiming Zero Pages window.Stop Reclaiming ZeroPages3

Opens the Expand V-VOLs window.Expand V-VOLs3

Opens the View Tier Properties window.View Tier Properties3

Opens the Migrate Volumes window. For details, see XP7 Auto LUN User Guide.Migrate Volumes3

Force Delete Pairs 3• Cnt Ac-S Pairs: Opens the Force Delete Pairs (Cnt Ac-S Pairs) window. For details see

the XP7 Continuous Access Synchronous User Guide.

• Cnt Ac-J Pairs: Opens the Force Delete Pairs (Cnt Ac-J Pairs) window. For details seethe XP7 Continuous Access Journal User Guide.

• HA Pairs: Opens the Force Delete Pairs (HA Pairs) window. For details see the XP7High Availability User Guide.

Opens the ALUs / SLUs window.ALUs/SLUs3

Opens the Unbind SLUs window.Unbind SLUs3

Opens a window where you can export configuration information listed in the table to a filethat can be used for multiple purposes, such as backup or reporting.

Export3

Notes:1. Does not appear by default. To display this item, change the Column Settings of the table option.2. If an MP blade is blocked due to a failure, the processing to be performed by the MP blade where the failure

occurred is taken over by another normal MP blade. See the following two tables.3. Available when you click More Actions.

MP blade priorities after takeover (1)

Priority assumed by MP blades after takeoverMP bladeblocked byfailure 7th6th5th4th3rd2nd1st

MPB 3MPB 2MPB 1MPB 7MPB 6MPB 5MPB 4MPB 0

MPB 4MPB 3MPB 2MPB 0MPB 7MPB 6MPB 5MPB 1

Logical Devices window 363

Page 364: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Priority assumed by MP blades after takeoverMP bladeblocked byfailure 7th6th5th4th3rd2nd1st

MPB 5MPB 4MPB 3MPB 1MPB 0MPB 7MPB 6MPB 2

MPB 6MPB 5MPB 4MPB 2MPB 1MPB 0MPB 7MPB 3

MPB 7MPB 6MPB 5MPB 3MPB 2MPB 1MPB 0MPB 4

MPB 0MPB 7MPB 6MPB 4MPB 3MPB 2MPB 1MPB 5

MPB 1MPB 0MPB 7MPB 5MPB 4MPB 3MPB 2MPB 6

MPB 2MPB 1MPB 0MPB 6MPB 5MPB 4MPB 3MPB 7

MPB 11MPB 10MPB 9MPB 15MPB 14MPB 13MPB 12MPB 8

MPB 12MPB 11MPB 10MPB 8MPB 15MPB 14MPB 13MPB 9

MPB 13MPB 12MPB 11MPB 9MPB 8MPB 15MPB 14MPB 10

MPB 14MPB 13MPB 12MPB 10MPB 9MPB 8MPB 15MPB 11

MPB 15MPB 14MPB 13MPB 11MPB 10MPB 9MPB 8MPB 12

MPB 8MPB 15MPB 14MPB 12MPB 11MPB 10MPB 9MPB 13

MPB 9MPB 8MPB 15MPB 13MPB 12MPB 11MPB 10MPB 14

MPB 10MPB 9MPB 8MPB 14MPB 13MPB 12MPB 11MPB 15

MP blade priorities after takeover (2)

Priority assumed by MP blades after takeoverMP bladeblockedby failure 15th14th13th12th11th10th9th8th

MPB 11MPB 10MPB 9MPB 8MPB 15MPB 14MPB 13MPB 12MPB 0

MPB 12MPB 11MPB 10MPB 9MPB 8MPB 15MPB 14MPB 13MPB 1

MPB 13MPB 12MPB 11MPB 10MPB 9MPB 8MPB 15MPB 14MPB 2

MPB 14MPB 13MPB 12MPB 11MPB 10MPB 9MPB 8MPB 15MPB 3

MPB 15MPB 14MPB 13MPB 12MPB 11MPB 10MPB 9MPB 8MPB 4

MPB 8MPB 15MPB 14MPB 13MPB 12MPB 11MPB 10MPB 9MPB 5

MPB 9MPB 8MPB 15MPB 14MPB 13MPB 12MPB 11MPB 10MPB 6

MPB 10MPB 9MPB 8MPB 15MPB 14MPB 13MPB 12MPB 11MPB 7

MPB 3MPB 2MPB 1MPB 0MPB 7MPB 6MPB 5MPB 4MPB 8

MPB 4MPB 3MPB 2MPB 1MPB 0MPB 7MPB 6MPB 5MPB 9

MPB 5MPB 4MPB 3MPB 2MPB 1MPB 0MPB 7MPB 6MPB 10

MPB 6MPB 5MPB 4MPB 3MPB 2MPB 1MPB 0MPB 7MPB 11

MPB 7MPB 6MPB 5MPB 4MPB 3MPB 2MPB 1MPB 0MPB 12

MPB 0MPB 7MPB 6MPB 5MPB 4MPB 3MPB 2MPB 1MPB 13

MPB 1MPB 0MPB 7MPB 6MPB 5MPB 4MPB 3MPB 2MPB 14

MPB 2MPB 1MPB 0MPB 7MPB 6MPB 5MPB 4MPB 3MPB 15

364 LDEV GUI reference

Page 365: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Create LDEVs wizardUse this window to create and provision LDEVs. You can create multiple LDEVs at once whensetting up your storage system.

Create LDEVs window

Create LDEVs wizard 365

Page 366: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Setting fields

DescriptionItem

Select the type of LDEV.Provisioning Type

• Basic: Internal volume.

• Thin Provisioning: THP V-VOL.

• External: External volume.

• Snapshot: Fast Snap volume.

• ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.

Select the system of LDEV.System Type

• Open: Volume for open system.

• Mainframe: Volume of mainframe system.

Select Enable or Disable for the data direct mapping attribute. This itemcan be selected if the Provisioning Type is Thin Provisioning or External,

Data Direct Mapping

and if the System Type is Open. If the Provisioning Type is External andthe external volume of the data direct mapping attribute is not existed,you cannot select Enable.

• Enable: The data direct mapping attribute is enabled.

• Disable: The data direct mapping attribute is disabled.

Select the LDEV emulation.Emulation Type

• For open system, OPEN-V is default.

• For mainframe system, 3390 is default.

Note: The emulation type might differ depending on the configuration.

366 LDEV GUI reference

Page 367: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Select Enable or Disable of using Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF.Smart Pool

• Enable: The pool for Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF is displayed inthe Select Pool window.

• Disable: The pool for Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF is displayed inthe Select Pool window.

The sets to be enabled for Real Time Smart Tier. To check on this itemboth of the following are required:

Real Time Smart Tier

• The Smart Pool option is enabled.

• Pool volumes whose drive type is SSDs are installed.

Select whether to create TSE-VOL or not.TSE Attribute

• Enable: TSE-VOL is created.

• Disable: TSE-VOL is not created.

If all the following conditions are satisfied, you can specify this item:

• Selected Mainframe in the System Type

• Selected Disable in the Smart Pool field

Select the parity group to which the LDEV is assigned.Parity Group Selection, Pool Selection, orExternal Volume Selection • Parity Group Selection: Displayed when you create internal volumes.

• Pool Selection: Displayed when you create THP V-VOLs. If the DataDirect Mapping is set to Enable, this item is not displayed.

• External Volume Selection: Displayed when you create externalvolumes.

Select the data drive type and RPM.Drive Type/RPM

• Any: All types of disk drives and RPMs that can be contained in thesystem.

• SSD(FMC): Flash memory compressed.Specify when creating LDEV in the parity-group with capacityvirtualization enabled.

• SSD(FMD): Flash memory drive.

• SSD(MLC): SSD of the multi-level cell.

• External Storage: External storage system.

• Mixed: Mixes the data drive type.

Select the RAID level. External Storage is selected from the DriveType/RPM field, a hyphen (-) appears.

RAID Level

Displays the Select Free Spaces window.Select Free Spaces

Displays the Select Pool window.Select Pool

Displays the number of the selected free spaces.Total Selected Free Spaces

Displays the total capacity of the free spaces.Total Selected Free Space Capacity

Displays the selected pool name and ID.Selected Pool Name (ID)

Displays the selected pool capacity.Selected Pool Capacity

Create LDEVs wizard 367

Page 368: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

LDEV Capacity • Offset boundary:

If you want to offset the specified LDEV capacity by boundary, setthe Offset boundary to ON.

◦ If the emulation type is OPEN-V, Offset boundary is set to OFF bydefault.

◦ If the emulation type is other than OPEN-V, Offset boundary is setto ON by default.

• Input area: Specify the LDEV capacity to create in a free space, apool, or an external volume.

Detailed calculation of the LDEV capacity differs depending on thespecification of the unit. If the Data Direct Mapping is set to enable, thisitem is not displayed.If creating of LDEVs carved from the capacity virtualization-enabled paritygroups, estimate the LDEV capacity. For details, see “Guidelines forcreating a pool when capacity virtualization is enabled” (page 39)

Specify the number of LDEVs to create in a free space, pool, or theexternal volume.

Number of LDEVs per Free Space,Number of LDEVs, or Number of LDEVsper External Volume If the Provisioning Type is set to Thin Provisioning and the Data Direct

Mapping is set to enable, this item is not displayed. If the ProvisioningType is set to External and the Data Direct Mapping is set to enable, 1is displayed in the Number of LDEVs per External Volume.If creating of LDEVs carved from the capacity virtualization-enabled paritygroups, estimate the LDEV capacity. For details, see “Guidelines forcreating a pool when capacity virtualization is enabled” (page 39)

Select available volumes. This item is displayed when the ProvisioningType is Thin Provisioning and the data direct mapping is Enable. Followingitems are displayed:

Available Volumes

• LDEV ID

• LDEV Name

• Parity Group ID

• Capacity: The capacity of LDEV

• Vender/Model/Serial Number

• Pool Name (ID)

• Subscription Current (%): The percentage of the current subscriptionof the pool

• Subscription Limit (%): The percentage of the limit subscription of thepool

• Capacity: The capacity of the pool

LDEV name. Specify the prefix characters and the initial number.LDEV Name

• Prefix: A fixed character string.

• Initial Number: The initial number of the LDEV name.Specify the prefix characters and the initial number according to theexamples below. You can specify up to 32 characters total.Example:

◦ 1: Up to 9 numbers are added (1, 2, 3... 9).

◦ 08: Up to 92 numbers are added (08, 09, 10... 99).

368 LDEV GUI reference

Page 369: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

◦ 23: Up to 77 numbers are added (23, 24, 25... 99).

◦ 098: Up to 902 numbers are added (098, 099, 100... 999).

Specify the format type. This appears when an internal or external volumeis used.

Format Type

• Quick Format: Quick formatting is the default format type. You cannotselect this when the provisioning type is the external volume or theLDEV created from the parity group with capacity virtualizationenabled..

• Write to Control Blocks: You can select this option when the externalmainframe volume is created. This is default when selecting theexternal volume of the mainframe system.

• Normal Format: Normal formatting.

• No Format: Volumes are not formatted.

Specify the LDEV ID. LDKC is fixed to 00. Default of CU and DEV is00:00.

Initial LDEV ID

For creating multiple LDEVs, select the interval of the assigned LDEVID from the Interval list.

Displays the View LDEV IDs windows.View LDEV IDs

Specify the SSID. The default is 0004.Initial SSIDWhen creating multiple LDEVs, specify the beginning number setting tothe LDEV.

Displays the View SSIDs window.View SSIDs

Cache logical partition number, displayed as ID:CLPR.CLPR

Specify the MP blade you want to assign to the LDEV.MP BladeYou can select an ID from MPB0 to MPB7. If automatic assignment isenabled for one or more MPs, you can also select Auto.If Auto is enabled, the default is Auto. If Auto is disabled, the default isthe lowest number of the MP blade.

Select Enable to reserve pages in a pool that is associated with LDEVs.The default is Disable.

Full Allocation

• Enable : full allocation is performed.

• Disable : full allocation is performed.

You can select Enable if all of following are satisfied:

• The sum of the mapped capacity and the reserved capacity is sameor less than the depletion threshold.

• The specified pool is not in the shrink processing of the pool capacity.

• The LDEV emulation type is OPEN-V or 3390-A.

• The data direct mapping attribute is disabled.

Tiering Policy: All(0) is selected by default. You can change a level fromLevel1(1) to Level5(5) or from Level6(6) to Level31(31).

Tiering Policy

You can specify this function when the Smart Pool option is enabled.

Specify the new page assignment tier you want to assign to the LDEV.Middle is selected by default. You can select from the levels of High,

New Page Assignment Tier

Create LDEVs wizard 369

Page 370: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Middle, and Low. You can specify this function when the Smart Pooloption is enabled.

Specify this option if the LDEV is to be relocated preferentially. You canselect Default or Prioritize.

Relocation Priority

You can specify this function when the Smart Pool is enabled.

Specify the LDEV's T10 PI attribute (Enabled or Disabled).T10 PIThis item can be specified if the Provisioning Type is Basic, ThinProvisioning, or Snapshot.

Adds the LDEVs that have settings specified in the setting field is addedto the Selected LDEVs table.

Add

The items that can be set in this window depend on the type of volume you are creating. Thefollowing table lists the items that can be set according to volume type.

LDEV of theALUattribution

Snapshotvolume

Externalvolume

V-VOL formainframesystem

V-VOL foropensystem

Internalvolume

Item

RequiredRequiredRequiredRequiredRequiredRequiredProvisioning Type

N/ARequiredRequiredRequiredRequiredRequiredSystem Type

N/AN/AOptionalDisabledOptionalN/AData Direct Mapping

N/ARequiredRequiredRequiredRequiredRequiredEmulation Type

N/AN/AN/ARequiredRequiredN/ASmart Pool

N/AN/AN/AN/AOptionalN/AReal Time Smart Tier

N/AN/AN/ARequiredDisabledN/ATSE Attribute

N/AN/ADisabledRequiredRequiredRequiredDrive Type/RPM

N/AN/ADisabledRequiredRequiredRequiredRAID Level

N/AN/ARequiredN/AN/ARequiredSelect Free Spaces

N/AN/AN/ARequiredRequiredN/ASelect Pool

N/AOptionalOptionalN/AOptionalOptionalOffset boundary

N/ARequiredRequiredRequiredRequiredRequiredLDEV Capacity

N/AN/AN/AN/AN/ARequiredNumber of LDEVs per FreeSpace

RequiredRequiredN/ARequiredRequiredN/ANumber of LDEVs

N/AN/ARequiredN/AN/AN/ANumber of LDEVs perExternal Volume

N/AN/AOptionalN/AOptionalN/AAvailable Volumes

OptionalOptionalOptionalOptionalOptionalOptionalLDEV Name

N/AN/ARequiredN/AN/ARequiredFormat Type

OptionalOptionalOptionalOptionalOptionalOptionalInitial LDEV ID

OptionalOptionalOptionalOptionalOptionalOptionalView LDEV IDs

OptionalOptionalOptionalOptionalOptionalOptionalInitial SSID

370 LDEV GUI reference

Page 371: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

LDEV of theALUattribution

Snapshotvolume

Externalvolume

V-VOL formainframesystem

V-VOL foropensystem

Internalvolume

Item

OptionalOptionalOptionalOptionalOptionalOptionalView SSIDs

OptionalOptionalN/AOptionalOptionalN/ACLPR

OptionalOptionalOptionalOptionalOptionalOptionalMP Blade

N/AN/AN/AOptionalOptionalN/AFull Allocation

N/AN/AN/AOptionalOptionalN/ATiering Policy

N/AN/AN/AOptionalOptionalN/ANew Page Assignment Tier

N/AN/AN/AOptionalOptionalN/ARelocation Priority

N/AOptionalN/ADisabledOptionalOptionalT10 PI

Selected LDEVs table

DescriptionItem

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

LDEV name, including the combination of prefix characters and the initialnumber.

LDEV Name

Parity group identifier.Parity Group ID

Pool name and pool identifier.Pool Name (ID)

Information about the data direct mapping.Data Direct Mapping

• LDEV ID: LDEV ID of the pool-VOL in the pool of the data directmapping attribute, or LDEV ID of the THP V-VOL of the data direct

Create LDEVs wizard 371

Page 372: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

mapping attribute. If the the data direct mapping attribute is disabled,a hyphen (-) is displayed.

• Parity Group ID: Parity Group ID of the pool-VOL in the pool the datadirect mapping attribute. If the the data direct mapping attribute isdisabled, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Drive type and rpm in use on this LDEV.Drive Type/RPM

RAID level. An asterisk "*" indicates that the parity group to which theLDEV belongs is interleaved (concatenated).

RAID Level

Emulation type.Emulation Type

LDEV capacity.Capacity

Format type.Format Type

Storage system identifier in hexadecimal format.SSID

Cache logical partition number, displayed as ID:CLPR.CLPRFor detailed information about CLPRs, see the XP7 Cache Partition UserGuide.

MP blade identifier. If Auto is selected, the ID is automatically assigned.MP Blade ID

Indicates whether Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF is enabled or disabled.Smart Pool

• Enabled: The LDEV is for Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF.

• Disabled: The LDEV is not for Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF.

Displays the status of the setting for the full allocation in a pool associatedwith the V-VOL.

Full Allocation

• Enable: Full allocation of all THP V-VOL pages is performed.

• Disable: Full allocation of all THP V-VOL pages is not performed.

Indicates whether Real Time Smart Tier is enabled or disabled.Real Time Smart TierEnabled: The LDEV is for Real Time Smart Tier or Real Time Smart Tierfor Mainframe.Disable: The LDEV is for Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF.Hyphen (-): The LDEV is for Thin Provisioning or Thin Provisioning MF.

The tiering policy name and ID for the LDEV.Tiering Policy

Displays the new page assignment tier for the LDEV.New Page Assignment Tier

Displays the relocation priority assigned to the LDEV.Relocation Priority

Displays the attribute of the LDEV.Attribute

• TSE: TSE-VOL

• ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution

• Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.

• Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

Displays information about the capacity virtualization of the parity groupthat is created of LDEVs.

Capacity Virtualization

Enabled: The capacity virtualization of the parity group is enabled.Disabled: The capacity virtualization of the parity group is disabled.Hyphen (-): The parity group with the capacity virtualization is notsupported.

372 LDEV GUI reference

Page 373: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays the LDEV's T10 PI attribute information (Enabled or Disabled).T10 PI

Encryption information:Encryption

• Enable: Encryption setting of a parity group in which the LDEV isplaced is enabled. Or the virtual volume associated with the poolwhose pool-VOLs are enabled of the encryption setting.

• Disable: Encryption setting of a parity group (or a pool) in which theLDEV is placed is disabled. Or the virtual volume associated with thepool whose pool-VOLs are disabled of the encryption setting.

• Mixed: Pool-VOLs with enabled encryption settings and pool-VOLswith disabled encryption settings are intermixed in the pool in whichthe LDEV is placed.Caution: The data encryption is not ensured in the pool that has theMixed encryption setting. To manage the data encryption securely,use the pool with an encryption setting of Enabled or Disabled.

• Hyphen(-): External volume or migration volume. As for THP V-VOLof Thin Provisioning , the pool-VOL in the pool of which THP V-VOLbelongs is an external volume, or the pool of which THP V-VOLbelongs is being blocked.

Resource group name and ID of which this LDEV is a member.Resource Group Name (ID)

Displays the information about the virtual storage machine.Virtual Storage Machine

• Model / Serial Number: The model name and serial number of thevirtual storage machine having the LDEV.

• Attribute: Virtual LDEV attribute. If the attribute is not set for LDEV,this column is blank.

Opens the Edit SSIDs window.Edit SSIDs

Opens the Change LDEV Settings window.Change LDEV Settings

Removes the added LDEV.Remove

Create LDEVs confirmation window

NOTE: If multiple tasks that are connected in one wizard are executed, this window shows allconfigured items of tasks. To show information of configured items other than this topic, clickBack to display related setting windows, and then click Help.

Create LDEVs wizard 373

Page 374: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected LDEVs table

DescriptionItem

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

LDEV name, including the combination of prefix characters and the initialnumber.

LDEV Name

Information about the data direct mapping.Data Direct Mapping

• LDEV ID: LDEV ID of the pool-VOL in the pool of the data directmapping attribute, or LDEV ID of the THP V-VOL of the data directmapping attribute. If the data direct mapping attribute is disabled, ahyphen (-) is displayed.

• Parity Group ID: Parity Group ID of the pool-VOL in the pool the datadirect mapping attribute. If the data direct mapping attribute is disabled,a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Parity group identifier.Parity Group ID

Drive type and rpm in use on this LDEV.Drive Type/RPM

Pool name (pool identifier).Pool Name (ID)

RAID level. An asterisk "*" indicates that the parity group to which theLDEV belongs is interleaved (concatenated).

RAID Level

Emulation type.Emulation Type

LDEV capacity.Capacity

Type of LDEV.Provisioning Type

• Basic: Internal volume.

• THP: THP V-VOL.

• External: External volume.

• Snapshot: Fast Snap volume.

• ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.

Format type.Format Type

Storage system identifier in hexadecimal format.SSID

374 LDEV GUI reference

Page 375: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Cache logical partition number, in ID:CLPR format.CLPRFor detailed information about CLPRs, see the XP7 Cache Partition UserGuide.

MP blade identifier. If Auto is selected, the ID is automatically assigned.MP Blade ID

Displays whether Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF is enabled or disabled.Smart PoolEnable: The LDEV for Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF is displayed.Disable: The LDEV for Thin Provisioning or Thin Provisioning MF isdisplayed.

Indicates whether Real Time Smart Tier is enabled or disabled.Real Time Smart TierEnabled: The LDEV is for Real Time Smart Tier or Real Time Smart Tierfor Mainframe.Disable: The LDEV is for Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF.Hyphen (-): The LDEV is for Thin Provisioning or Thin Provisioning MF.

Displays the status of the setting for the full allocation in a pool associatedwith the V-VOL.

Full Allocation

• Enable: Full allocation of all THP V-VOL pages is performed.

• Disable: Full allocation of all THP V-VOL pages is not performed.

Displaying the tiering policy name and ID for the LDEV.Tiering Policy

Displays the new page assignment tier for the LDEV.New Page Assignment Tier

Relocation priority assigned to the LDEV.Relocation Priority

Displays the attribute of the LDEV.AttributeTSE: TSE-VOL.ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.Hyphen (-): Volume in which attribute is not defined.

Encryption information:Encryption

• Enable: Encryption setting of a parity group in which the LDEV isplaced is enabled. Or the virtual volume associated with the poolwhose pool-VOLs are enabled of the encryption setting.

• Disable: Encryption setting of a parity group (or a pool) in which theLDEV is placed is disabled. Or the virtual volume associated with thepool whose pool-VOLs are disabled of the encryption setting.

• Mixed: Pool-VOLs with enabled encryption settings and pool-VOLswith disabled encryption settings are intermixed in the pool in whichthe LDEV is placed.Caution: The data encryption is not ensured in the pool that has theMixed encryption setting. To manage the data encryption securely,use the pool with an encryption setting of Enabled or Disabled.

• Hyphen(-): External volume or migration volume. As for THP V-VOLof Thin Provisioning , the pool-VOL in the pool of which THP V-VOLbelongs is an external volume, or the pool of which THP V-VOLbelongs is being blocked.

Displays information about the capacity virtualization of the parity groupthat is created of LDEVs

Capacity Virtualization

Enabled: The capacity virtualization of the parity group is enabled.Disabled: The capacity virtualization of the parity group is disabled.Hyphen (-): The parity group with capacity virtualization is not supported.

Create LDEVs wizard 375

Page 376: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays the LDEV's T10 PI attribute information (Enabled or Disabled).T10 PI

Resource group name and ID of which this LDEV is a member.Resource Group Name (ID)

Resource group name and ID of which this LDEV is a member.Resource Group Name (ID)

Displays the information about the virtual storage machine.Virtual Storage Machine

• Model / Serial Number: The model name and serial number of thevirtual storage machine having the LDEV.

• Attribute: Virtual LDEV attribute. If the attribute is not set for LDEV,this column is blank.

Edit LDEVs wizardUse this window to change the LDEV name.

Edit LDEVs windowUse this window to edit LDEV properties.

DescriptionItem

Specify the LDEV name, using up to 32 characters.LDEV Name

• Prefix: Fixed character string.

• Initial Number: Initial number.

Specify the prefix characters and the initial number according to these examples.

376 LDEV GUI reference

Page 377: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Example:

• 1: Up to 9 numbers are added (1, 2, 3 ... 9)

• 08: Up to 92 numbers are added (08, 09, 10 ... 99)

• 23: Up to 77 numbers are added (23, 24, 25 ... 99)

• 098: Up to 902 numbers are added (098, 099, 100 ... 999)

Select Enable to allocate all pages of LDEVs on the current pool. The defaultis Disable. If LDEVs are satisfied of all following conditions, you can selectEnable.

Full Allocation

• All LDEVs are V-VOLs of Thin Provisioning or Thin Provisioning MF.

• The sum of the mapped capacity and the reserved capacity is same or lessthan the depletion threshold.

• The specified pool is not in the shrink processing of the pool capacity.

• The LDEV emulation type is OPEN-V or 3390-A.

• The status of LDEV is Normal.

• The data direct mapping attribute is disabled.

Specify the tiering policy for the LDEV. For details about the setting. You canspecify this function only when the V-VOLs using Smart Tiers or Smart TiersMF are available.

Tiering Policy

Specify the new page assignment tier you want to assign to the LDEV. Middleis set by default. You can select from High, Middle, or Low.

New Page Assignment Tier

You can specify this function only when the V-VOLs that use Smart Tiers orSmart Tiers MF are available.

Specify Enable or Disable for the performing of the tier relocation. You canspecify this function only when the V-VOLs using Smart Tiers or Smart TiersMF are available.

Tier Relocation

Specify the relocation priority assigned to the LDEV. You can set this functionunder the following conditions:

Relocation Priority

• When there are V-VOLs where Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF is enabled.

• When the tier relocation is enabled.

Specify Enable or Disable for using of the ALUA mode.ALUA Mode

Edit LDEVs confirmation windowConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

Edit LDEVs wizard 377

Page 378: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

LDEV name, including the combination of prefix characters and the initialnumber.

LDEV Name

Parity group identifier.Parity Group ID

Pool name and pool identifier.Pool Name (ID)

Emulation type.Emulation Type

LDEV capacity.Capacity

Type of LDEV.Provisioning Type

• Basic: Internal volume.

• THP: THP V-VOL.

• External: External volume.

• Snapshot: Fast Snap volume.

• ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.

Displays the status of the setting for the full allocation in a pool associatedwith the V-VOL.

Full Allocation

• Enable: Full allocation is performed.

• Disable: Full allocation is not performed.

• Hyphen (-): LDEVs other than V-VOLs for Thin Provisioning or ThinProvisioning MF.

Tiering policy. A hyphen is displayed for volumes other than Smart Tiersor Smart Tiers MF volumes.

Tiering Policy

378 LDEV GUI reference

Page 379: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays the new page assignment tier for the LDEV. A hyphen (-) isdisplayed for volumes other than Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF volumes.

New Page Assignment Tier

Displays whether tier relocation is enabled or disabled. A hyphen (-) isdisplayed for volumes other than Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF volumes.

Tier Relocation

Displays the relocation priority assigned to the LDEV. A hyphen isdisplayed if the LDEV is the one of following:

Relocation Priority

• LDEV other than Smart Tiers.

• LDEV other than Smart Tiers MF.

• The tier relocation of LDEV is set to disabled.

Information about the ALUA mode.ALUA ModeEnabled: LDEV can be used in ALUA.Disabled: LDEV cannot be used in ALUA.

Change LDEV Settings windowUse this window to edit one or more LDEV properties.

DescriptionItem

Specify the LDEV name, using up to 32 characters.LDEV Name

• Prefix: Fixed character string.

• Initial Number: Initial number.Specify the initial number according to these examples.

Change LDEV Settings window 379

Page 380: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Examples:

◦ 1: Up to 9 numbers are added (1, 2, 3 ... 9)

◦ 08: Up to 92 numbers are added (08, 09, 10 ... 99)

◦ 23: Up to 77 numbers are added (23, 24, 25 ... 99)

◦ 098: Up to 902 numbers are added (098, 099, 100 ... 999)

Specify the LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.Assigns the ID at a certain interval starting with the ID you specify.

Initial LDEV ID

• LDKC: Specify the LDKC number. It is fixed to 00.

• CU: Specify the CU number.

• DEV: Specify the LDEV number.

• Interval: Specify the interval of the assigned LDEV ID.

• View LDEV IDs: Opens the View LDEV IDs window.

Select the MP blade you want to assign to the LDEV.MP BladeSelect any ID or Auto.Select an ID from MPB0 to MPB7. If automatic assignment is enabled for oneor more MPs, you can also select Auto.

Specify the LDEV's T10 PI attribute (Enabled or Disabled). This item can bespecified if the Provisioning Type is Basic, Thin Provisioning, or Snapshot.

T10 PI

View SSIDs windowUse this window to view storage system identifier information.

380 LDEV GUI reference

Page 381: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

LDKC number.LDKC

Control unit number.CU

The range of LDEVs that can be allocated to the SSID. Each LDEV group(divided by LDEV boundary) has a unique SSID.

LDEV Boundary

Storage system identifier in hexadecimal format.SSID

Select Free Spaces windowUse this window to view information about available free space slots in the parity group. Onlythe free spaces in the parity groups assigned to the logged-on user are available.

Select Free Spaces window 381

Page 382: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Parity group identifier.Parity Group ID

Sequence number for identifying free space in the parity group.Free Space No.

RAID level. An asterisk "*" indicates that the parity group to which the LDEV belongs isinterleaved (concatenated).

RAID Level

Capacity of free space.Capacity

Emulation type of the parity group.Base Emulation Type

Drive type and rpm in use on this LDEV.Drive Type/ RPM

Encryption information.Encryption

• Enable: encrypted parity group

• Disable: non-encrypted parity group

If the parity group in which the encryption setting is not defined, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays information about the capacity virtualization of the parity groupCapacity VirtualizationEnabled: The capacity virtualization of the parity group is enabled.Disabled: The capacity virtualization of the parity group is disabled.Hyphen (-): The parity group with the capacity virtualization is not supported.

Opens the View Physical Location window.View Physical Location

382 LDEV GUI reference

Page 383: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Select Pool window

Available Pools table

DescriptionItem

Displays the pool name and pool ID.Pool Name (ID)

Displays the RAID level.RAID Level

Displays information about the pool capacity.Capacity

• Total: Total capacity of pool. As for the pool using pool volumes assignedby the capacity virtualization-enabled parity groups, the writeable capacitymay be smaller than the displayed capacity.

• Used: Sum of the mapped capacity and reserved capacity.The displayed value of Used might be larger than the displayed value ofTotal due to following reason:

◦ Used displays the sum of the mapped capacity and reserved capacity,which are rounded up on each page.

◦ The mapped capacity of THP V-VOL includes the capacity of the controlinformation (uses a maximum of 168 MB per 3,145,548 MB).

◦ THP V-VOL with data direct mapping attribute includes the controlinformation (168 MB is used per 3,145,548 MB) and capacity for onepage.

• Used (%): Percentage of the sum of the mapped capacity and the reservedcapacity of a pool. The Used (%) field displays the value which is truncatedafter the decimal point of the actual value.

Displays the data drive type and RPM. When the volume is the external volume,Drive Type displays External Storage and the value of the external LDEV tierrank.

Drive Type/RPM

Select Pool window 383

Page 384: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Encryption information:Encryption

• Enable: Encryption setting of a parity group in which the LDEV is placed isenabled. Or the virtual volume associated with the pool whose pool-VOLsare enabled of the encryption setting.

• Disable: Encryption setting of a parity group (or a pool) in which the LDEVis placed is disabled. Or the virtual volume associated with the pool whosepool-VOLs are disabled of the encryption setting.

• Mixed: In the pool, pool-VOLs of which encryption settings are enabled anddisabled are intermixed.This status appears when two or more of following are specified aspool-VOLs:

◦ Volume encryption setting is enabled.

◦ Volume encryption setting is disabled.

◦ External volume

Caution: The data encryption is not ensured in the pool that has the Mixedencryption setting. To manage the data encryption securely, use the poolwith an encryption setting of Enabled or Disabled.

• Hyphen(-): Pool is created by external volumes. Or pool is being blocked.

Displays the pool threshold.User-Defined Threshold (%)

• Warning: Warning threshold is displayed.

• Depletion: Depletion threshold is displayed.

Displays Auto or Manual according to the Tier Management setting when SmartTiers or Smart Tiers MF is enabled. Displays Manual for pools other than Smart

Tier Management

Tiers or Smart Tiers MF which are available for monitoring. For other pools, ahyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays information about subscription of the pool.Subscription (%)

• Current: Percentage of the total V-VOL capacity assigned to the pool andthe V-VOL capacity to be created.

• Limit: Percentage of the subscription limit of the pool.

Displays the Pool Properties window when selecting a row and clicking thisbutton

Detail

View LDEV IDs windowUse this window to view available, used, and disabled LDEV IDs in matrix format. The verticalscale in the matrix represents the second-to-last digit of the LDEV number, and the horizontalscale represents the last digit of the LDEV number.In the matrix, cells of used LDEV numbers display in blue, unselectable in gray, and unused inwhite. The LDEV numbers corresponding to any one of the following conditions cannot bespecified:• LDEV is already in use.• LDEV is already assigned to another emulation group (grouped every 32 LDEVs).• LDEV is not assigned to the user.• If the following values are not identical when a mainframe volume or multi-platform volume

is created:

◦ LDEV ID and the virtual LDEV ID

◦ Model/serial numbers of the virtual storage machine and the storage system

384 LDEV GUI reference

Page 385: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Summary

DescriptionItem

Emulation type selected in the Create LDEVs window.Usage of selected emulation type

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV IDsLDKC: Indicates the LDKC number.CU: Indicates the CU number.

Emulation groups and types for mainframe systems

D-type (Overseas PCM) emulation typeEmulation group

3390-3, 3390-A, 3390-3A, 3390-3B, 3390-3C, 3390-9, 3390-9A, 3390-9B,3390-9C, 3390-L, 3390-LA, 3390-LB, 3390-LC, 3390-M, 3390-MA, 3390-MB,3390-MC, 3390-V

Group 1

Emulation groups and types for open systems

D-type (Overseas PCM) emulation typeEmulation group

OPEN-3, OPEN-8, OPEN-9, OPEN-EGroup 4

NoneGroup 5

OPEN-VGroup 6

View Physical Location windowUse this window to view information about the physical location of where free spaces and LDEVSare assigned in a parity group.

View Physical Location window 385

Page 386: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Parity Group Property table

DescriptionItem

Parity group identifier. For an interleaved parity group, all parity groups thatare contained in the interleaved parity group are shown.

Parity Group ID

RAID level. An asterisk "*" indicates that the parity group to which the LDEVbelongs is interleaved (concatenated).

RAID Level

Free capacity and total capacity of the parity group. The control informationused by the storage system, such as control cylinders, is not included in the

Capacity (Free/Total)

Free capacity. The total capacity of the LDEVs and Free capacity is displayedin the Total.

Capacity assured for writing data in the parity group.Physical Capacity

Drive type and rpm in use on this LDEV.Drive Type/ RPM

For external volumes, vendor name, model name, and serial number appear.For internal volumes, -/-/- appears.

Vendor/Model/Serial Number

Resource group name and ID of which this parity group is a member.Resource Group Name (ID)

Physical Location table

DescriptionItem

Location where the free spaces and LDEVs are assigned.Physical Location No.

Free space number. The hyphenation appears for volumes other than freespaces.

Free Space No.

LDEV identifier. A hyphen (-) appears for other than LDEV IDs.LDEV ID

LDEV name. A hyphen (-) appears for volumes other than LDEVs.LDEV Name

Emulation type. A hyphen (-) appears for volumes other than LDEVs.Emulation Type

386 LDEV GUI reference

Page 387: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Capacity of the LDEV.Capacity

Number of paths set for the LDEV. A hyphen (-) appears for volumes otherthan LDEVs.

Number of Paths

Edit SSIDs windowUse this window to select a storage system identifier whose properties can be changed.

DescriptionItem

LDKC number.LDKC

Control unit number.CU

The range of LDEVs that can be allocated to the SSID. Each LDEV group(divided by LDEV boundary) has a unique SSID.

LDEV Boundary

Storage system identifier in hexadecimal format.SSID

Indicates whether the storage system identifier is can be changed.SSID Changeable

• Yes: The SSID can be changed. The SSID was assigned when creatingLDEVs but has not yet been registered (unused).

• No: The SSID can not be changed. The SSID has been registered (used)and cannot be changed.

• Hyphen (-): The SSID is not assigned.

Select a row and click to open the Change SSID window.Change SSIDs

Change SSIDs windowUse this window to change the SSID.

Edit SSIDs window 387

Page 388: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Specify the initial storage system identifier in hexadecimal format. The defaultis 0004 if none is specified.

Initial SSID

Format LDEVs wizardUse this window to format LDEVs. LDEVs must be formatted before you can use the storagespace.

388 LDEV GUI reference

Page 389: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Format LDEVs window

DescriptionItem

Select the type of formatting to be used on this LDEV.Format Type

• Quick Format (default): Select this to perform quick-formatting. This optionis available only for formatting an internal volume.

• Write to Control Blocks: Select this when the provisioning type is for amainframe external volume. The management area of external volumes formainframe systems will be overwritten. This is the default option for anexternal volume.

• Normal Format: Select this to perform normal-formatting. This option isavailable for formatting an internal volume, or an external volume whoseemulation type is OPEN.

Number of selected parity groups.Number of Selected Parity Groups

Format LDEVs confirmation windowConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

Format LDEVs wizard 389

Page 390: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

LDEV name.LDEV Name

Parity group identifier.Parity Group ID

Pool name and pool identifier.Pool Name (ID)

Emulation type.Emulation Type

LDEV capacity.Capacity

Provisioning type to be assigned to the LDEV.Provisioning Type

• Basic: Internal volume.

• THP: THP V-VOL.

• External: External volume.

• Snapshot: Fast Snap volume.

• ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.

Displays the attribute of the LDEV.AttributeCommand Device: Command device.TSE: TSE-VOL.ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.SLU: LDEV of the SLU attribution.Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

How the LDEV will be formatted.Format Type

• Quick Format: Quick-formatting is performed.

• Normal Format: Normal formatting is performed.

• Write to Control Blocks: The management area of external volumesfor mainframe systems is overwritten.

Restore LDEVs windowUse this window to recover blocked LDEVs.

390 LDEV GUI reference

Page 391: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

LDEV name.LDEV Name

Parity group identifier.Parity Group ID

Pool name and pool identifier.Pool Name (ID)

Emulation type.Emulation Type

LDEV capacity.Capacity

Provisioning type assigned to the LDEV.Provisioning Type

• Basic: Internal volume.

• THP: THP V-VOL.

• External: External volume.

• Snapshot: Fast Snap volume.

• ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.

Displays the attribute of the LDEV.AttributeCommand Device: Command device.Remote Command Device: Remote command device.JNL VOL: Journal volume.Quorum Disk: Quorum disk for High Availability.TSE: TSE-VOL.ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.SLU: LDEV of the SLU attribution.Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

Block LDEVs windowUse this window to block specific LDEVs. The data on the LDEV cannot be accessed when theLDEV is blocked.

Block LDEVs window 391

Page 392: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

LDEV name.LDEV Name

Parity group identifier.Parity Group ID

Pool name and pool identifier.Pool Name (ID)

Emulation type.Emulation Type

LDEV capacity.Capacity

Provisioning type assigned to the LDEV.Provisioning Type

• Basic: Internal volume.

• THP: THP V-VOL.

• External: External volume.

• Snapshot: Fast Snap volume.

• ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.

Displays the attribute of the LDEV.AttributeCommand Device: Command device.Remote Command Device: Remote command device.TSE: TSE-VOL.ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.SLU: LDEV of the SLU attribution.Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

Delete LDEVs windowUse the window to delete an LDEV from a parity group.

392 LDEV GUI reference

Page 393: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

LDEV name.LDEV Name

Parity group identifier.Parity Group ID

Pool name and pool identifier.Pool Name (ID)

Emulation type.Emulation Type

LDEV capacity.Capacity

Provisioning type assigned to the LDEV.Provisioning Type

• Basic: Internal volume.

• THP: THP V-VOL.

• External: External volume.

• Snapshot: Fast Snap volume.

• ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.

Displays the attribute of the LDEV.AttributeCommand Device: Command device.TSE: TSE-VOL.ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.SLU: LDEV of the SLU attribution.Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

Displays information about the capacity virtualization of the parity groupthat is created of LDEVs.

Capacity Virtualization

Enabled: The capacity virtualization of the parity group is enabled.Disabled: The capacity virtualization of the parity group is disabled.Hyphen (-): The parity group with the capacity virtualizationis notsupported.

Displays the information that LDEV is allocated in the expanded area orthe physical area. If the capacity virtualization is enabled, LDEVs are

Expanded Space Used

initially allocated in the physical area, then LDEVs are allocated in the

Delete LDEVs window 393

Page 394: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

expanded area. This item displays whether the LDEV area is allocatedin the expanded or physical area.Yes: LDEV is allocated in the expanded area.No: LDEV is allocated in the physical area.

LDEV Properties windowUse this window to view properties assigned to a selected LDEV.

LDEV Properties table

DescriptionItem

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Displays the LDEV name.LDEV Name

Displays the emulation type.Emulation Type

394 LDEV GUI reference

Page 395: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays the LDEV capacity.Capacity

Information about the virtual storage machine.Virtual Storage Machine

• Model / Serial Number: Model name and serial number of the virtualstorage machine that has LDEV.

• LDEV ID: Virtual LDEV ID. If a Virtual LDEV ID is not assigned toLDEV, this column is blank.

• Device Name: Virtual device name, which is a combination of thevirtual emulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, and the virtualCVS attribute. Values of the virtual emulation type, virtual LUSEvolume number, and virtual CVS attribute appear only for items thathave been set. This column is blank when the virtual emulation type,virtual LUSE volume number, and virtual CVS attribute are not set. Ifthe virtual CVS attribute is set, CVS is attached as the suffix to thedevice name.

• SSID: Virtual SSID. If Virtual SSID is not set for LDEV, this column isblank.

Basic tabLDEV basic information is displayed in the Basic Properties, LUNs, and Hosts.

Basic Properties table

DescriptionItem

Parity Group • ID: Displays the parity group ID.

• Interleaved Parity Groups: Displays the interleaved parity groups.

• RAID Level: Displays the RAID level of parity group. The asterisk (*)indicates the parity group is the interleaved parity group.

• Drive Type/RPM: Displays the data drive type and RPM.

• Encryption: Displays the encryption setting (enable or disable). If theparity group in which the encryption setting is not defined, a hyphen(-) is displayed.

• Capacity Virtualization: Displays the capacity virtualization setting(enable or disable). If the parity group with capacity virtualizationsetting is not defined, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Name (ID): Displays the pool name and ID.PoolRAID Level: Displays the RAID level of pool.Type: Displays the data drive type of pool.Encryption: The encryption information of the pool.

• Enabled: Pool which is created by pool-VOLs whose encryptionsettings are enabled.

• Disable: Pool which is created by pool-VOLs whose encryption settingsare disabled.

• Mixed: In the pool, pool-VOLs of which encryption settings are enabledand disabled are intermixed.This status appears when two or more of following are specified aspool-VOLs:

◦ Volume encryption setting is enabled.

◦ Volume encryption setting is disabled.

◦ External volume

LDEV Properties window 395

Page 396: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Caution: The data encryption is not ensured in the pool that has theMixed encryption setting. To manage the data encryption securely,use the pool with an encryption setting of Enabled or Disabled.

• Hyphen(-): Pool is created by external volumes. Or pool is beingblocked.

Display the type of LDEV.Provisioning Type

• Basic: Internal volume.

• THP: THP V-VOL.

• External: External volume.

• External MF: Migration volume.

• Snapshot: Fast Snap volume.

• ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.

Displays the LDEV status.Status

• Normal: Normal status.

• Blocked: Host cannot access blocked volumes.

• Warning: Problem occurs in the volumes.

• Formatting: Volumes are being formatted.

• Preparing Quick Format: Volumes are being prepared for quickformatting.

• Quick Formatting: Volumes are being quick-formatted.

• Correction Access: Access attribute is being corrected.

• Copying: Data in the volumes are being copied.

• Read Only: Data cannot be written on the Read Only volumes.

• Shredding: Volumes are being shredded.

Displays the attribute of the LDEV.Attribute

• Command Device: Command device.

• Remote Command Device: Remote command device.

• JNL VOL: Journal volume.

• Pool VOL: Pool volume. The number in parentheses shows the poolID.

• Quorum Disk: Quorum disk for High Availability.

• TSE: TSE-VOL.

• ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.

• SLU: LDEV of the SLU attribution.

• Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.

• Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

Command Device Attribute • Security: Displays the setting (Enable or Disable) of Command DeviceSecurity.

• User Authentication: Displays the setting (Enable or Disable) of userauthentication.

• Device Group Definition: Displays the setting (Enable or Disable) ofDevice Group Definition.

Displays the number of paths of the selected LDEV.Number of Paths

Displays the UUID.UUID

396 LDEV GUI reference

Page 397: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays the ID and name of the CLPR in ID:CLPR format.CLPR

Displays the access attribute of the LDEV.Access Attribute

Displays the SSID.SSID

Displays the cache mode.Cache Mode

Displays the V-VOL management task being performed on a ThinProvisioning, Thin Provisioning MF, Smart Tiers, or a Smart Tiers MFV-VOL.

V-VOL Management Task

Displays the current MP blade ID.Current MP Blade ID

Displays the current MP blade name.Current MP Blade Name

Displays the assigned MP blade ID.Assigned MP Blade ID

Displays the assigned MP blade name.Assigned MP Blade Name

Information about the ALUA mode.ALUA ModeEnabled: LDEV can be used in ALUA.Disabled: LDEV cannot be used in ALUA.

Displays the LDEV's T10 PI attribute information (Enabled or Disabled).T10 PI

Information about the external storage system.External Storage SystemIf LDEV is the THP V-VOL of the data direct mapping attribure, theinformation about the external storage system to which LDEV is beingmapped appears.

• Vendor/Model/Serial Number: The information about these items ofthe external storage system is displayed. A hyphen(-) appears if anexternal storage system is not mapped to LDEV.

• Path Group ID: The information about this item of the external storagesystem is displayed. If the link of the path group id is clicked, theMapped Volumes tab appears. A hyphen(-) appears if an externalstorage system is not mapped to LDEV.

Information about the data direct mapping.Data Direct Mapping

• LDEV ID: LDEV ID of the pool-VOL in the pool of the data directmapping attribute, or LDEV ID of the THP V-VOL of the data directmapping attribute. If the link of LDEV ID is clicked, the LDEV Propertieswindow appears. If the the data direct mapping attribute is disabled,a hyphen (-) is displayed. If THP V-VOL of the data direct mappingattribute is not created in the pool of the data direct mapping attribute,this field is blank.

• Parity Group ID: Parity Group ID of the pool-VOL in the pool the datadirect mapping attribute. If the the data direct mapping attribute isdisabled, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays the resource group name and ID of the LDEV. The ID is providedin parentheses.

Resource Group Name (ID)

Displays the status of the setting for the full allocation with V-VOLs forThin Provisioning or Thin Provisioning MF.

Full Allocation

• Enabled: Full allocation is performed.

• Disabled: Full allocation is not performed.

• Hyphen (-): LDEVs other than V-VOLs for Thin Provisioning or ThinProvisioning MF.

Displays the tiering policy name and ID.Tiering Policy

LDEV Properties window 397

Page 398: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays the new page assignment tier.New page Assignment Tier

Displays the tier relocation setting.Tier Relocation

Displays the relocation priority setting.Relocation Priority

Displays the information that LDEV is allocated in the expanded area orthe physical area. If the capacity virtualization is enabled, LDEVs are

Expanded Space Used

initially allocated in the physical area, then LDEVs are allocated in theexpanded area. This item displays whether the LDEV area is allocatedin the expanded or physical area.Yes: LDEV is allocated in the expanded area.No: LDEV is allocated in the physical area.

Displays the virtual LDEV attribute. If the attribute is not set for LDEV,this column is blank.

Virtual Attribute

LUNs tableThis table is not displayed if the path is not set.

DescriptionItem

Port name.Port ID

Host group name or iSCSI target alias.Host Group Name / iSCSI Target Alias

iSCSI target name.iSCSI Target Name

Identifier of the logical unit.LUN ID

Asymmetric access states of the port. When using of iSCSI, a hyphen(-) appears.

Asymmetric Access States

Active/Optimized: Access from the host preferentially is performed onthe port.Active/Non-Optimized: When disabled of the port of Active/Optimized,the access from the host is performed on the port.

Hosts tableThis table provides information about the host that can view LDEVs. This table is not availableif the WWN is not registered in the host to which the path is set.

DescriptionItem

Types of ports:

• Fibre: Fibre Channel ports.

iSCSI: iSCSI ports.

Type

HBA WWN or iSCSI name.HBA WWN / iSCSI Name

Host name.Host Name

Replication TabInformation about the volume of the local replication pair is displayed in the Replication Properties,BC Pairs, FS Pairs, Cnt Ac-S Pairs, Cnt Ac-J Pairs, and HA Pairs tables.

398 LDEV GUI reference

Page 399: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

For details about each item, see the following:• XP7 Business Copy User Guide• XP7 Business Copy for Mainframe Systems User Guide• XP7 Fast Snap User Guide• XP7 for Compatible FlashCopy Mirroring User Guide• XP7 Continuous Access Synchronous User Guide• XP7 Continuous Access Synchronous for Mainframe User Guide• XP7 Continuous Access Journal User Guide• XP7 Continuous Access Journal for Mainframe Systems User Guide• XP7 High Availability User Guide

Replication table

DescriptionItem

Local Replication • Business Copy L1: Displays the status of the Business Copy L1 pair.

• Business Copy L2: Displays the status of the Business Copy L2 pair.

• Fast Snap: Displays the status of the Fast Snap pair.

• Business Copy for Mainframe: Displays the status of the BusinessCopy MF pair.

• Compatible FlashCopy: Displays the status of the CompatibleFlashCopy relationship.

• Compatible Software for IBM FlashCopy SE: Displays the status ofthe Compatible Software for IBM FlashCopy SE relationship.

Remote Replication • Continuous Access Synchronous: Displays the status of theContinuous Access Synchronous pair.

• Continuous Access Journal: Displays the status of the ContinuousAccess Journal pair.

• Continuous Access Synchronous for Mainframe: Displays the statusof the Continuous Access Synchronous MF pair.

• Continuous Access Journal for Mainframe: Displays the status of theContinuous Access Journal MF pair.

• High Availability: Displays the status of the High Availability pair.

BC Pairs table

DescriptionItem

Primary Volume • LDEV ID: Displays LDEV ID of the primary volume.

• LDEV Name: Displays LDEV name of the primary volume.

• Emulation Type: Displays emulation type of the primary volume.

• Capacity: Displays capacity of the primary volume.

• CLPR: Displays CLPR ID of the primary volume.

Displays copy type of the pair.Copy Type

Displays the pair status.Status

LDEV Properties window 399

Page 400: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Secondary Volume • LDEV ID: Displays LDEV ID of the secondary volume.

• LDEV Name: Displays LDEV name of the secondary volume.

• Emulation Type: Displays emulation type of the secondary volume.

• Capacity: Displays capacity of the secondary volume.

• CLPR: Displays CLPR ID of the secondary volume.

Displays the pace of copying of the pair.Copy Pace

Displays the consistency group number of the pair.CTG ID

Displays the mirror unit number of the pair.Mirror Unit

Displays the View Pair Properties window.Detail

FS Pairs table

DescriptionItem

Primary Volume • LDEV ID: Displays LDEV ID of the primary volume.

• LDEV Name: Displays LDEV name of the primary volume.

• Emulation Type: Displays emulation type of the primary volume.

• Capacity: Displays capacity of the primary volume.

• CLPR: Displays CLPR ID of the primary volume.

Displays the snapshot group name.Snapshot GroupInformation is shown for this item only if you have configured a snapshotgroup for the FS pair.

Displays the pair status.Status

Displays the date and time when you created the pair to store snapshot.Snapshot Date

Secondary Volume • LDEV ID: Displays LDEV ID of the secondary volume.

• LDEV Name: Displays LDEV name of the secondary volume.

• Capacity: Displays capacity of the secondary volume.

• CLPR: Displays CLPR ID of the secondary volume.

Displays pool name and identification number.Pool Name (ID)

Displays the consistency group identification number.CTG ID

Displays the mirror unit number of the pair.Mirror Unit

Displays the View Pair Properties window.Detail

Cnt Ac-S Pairs table

DescriptionItem

Displays the copy type of the pairCopy Type

• Cnt Ac-S: Continuous Access Synchronous pair

• Cnt Ac-S MF: Continuous Access Synchronous MF pair

Displays whether the volume is a primary or secondary volume.Pair Position

Displays the pair status.Status

400 LDEV GUI reference

Page 401: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Remote Storage System • Model / Serial Number: Displays the model and serial number of theremote storage system.

• Remote Storage System - SSID: Displays the SSID of the remotestorage system.

• Remote Storage System - LDEV ID: Displays LDEV ID of the remotestorage system.

• Remote Storage System - Port ID, Host Group ID, LUN ID: DisplaysPort ID, Host Group ID, and LUN ID of the remote storage system.

• Host Group ID / iSCSI Target ID: Displays Host Group ID or iSCSITarget ID of the remote storage system.

LUN ID: Displays LUN ID of the remote storage system.

Displays the path group ID.Path Group ID

Displays the update type.Update Type

Displays the consistency group ID.CTG ID

Displays whether the consistency group is shared by multiple local andremote storage systems.

CTG Utilization

Displays the preserve mirror status.Preserve Mirror Status

Displays the fence level.Fence Level

Displays whether the host I/O time stamp is transferred from P-VOL toS-VOL.

Host I/O Time Stamp Transfer

Displays the View Pair Properties window.Detail

Cnt Ac-J Pairs table

DescriptionItem

Displays the copy type of the pairCopy Type

• Cnt Ac-J: Continuous Access Journal pair

• Cnt Ac-J MF: Continuous Access Journal MF pair

Displays the journal ID.Journal ID

Displays the pair 1 information.Pair 1

• Pair Position: Displays whether the volume is a primary or secondaryvolume.

• Mirror ID: Displays the mirror ID.

• Status: Displays the pair status.

• Remote Storage System: Displays the information about the remotestorage system.

◦ Model / Serial Number: Displays the model and serial number ofthe remote storage system.

◦ LDEV ID: Displays LDEV ID of the remote storage system.

◦ Port ID, Host Group ID, LUN ID: Displays Port ID, Host Group ID,and LUN ID of the remote storage system.

◦ Host Group ID / iSCSI Target ID: Displays Host Group ID or iSCSITarget ID of the remote storage system.

LDEV Properties window 401

Page 402: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

◦ LUN ID: Displays LUN ID of the remote storage system.

◦ Journal ID: Displays journal ID of the remote storage system.

• Path Group ID: Displays the path group ID.

• CTG ID: Displays the consistency group ID.

• Error Level: Displays the error level.

Displays the pair 2 information.Pair 2

• Pair Position: Displays whether the volume is a primary or secondaryvolume.

• Mirror ID: Displays the mirror ID.

• Status: Displays the pair status.

• Remote Storage System: Displays the information about the remotestorage system.

◦ Model / Serial Number: Displays the model and serial number ofthe remote storage system.

◦ LDEV ID: Displays LDEV ID of the remote storage system.

◦ Port ID, Host Group ID, LUN ID: Displays Port ID, Host Group ID,and LUN ID of the remote storage system.

◦ Host Group ID / iSCSI Target ID: Displays Host Group ID or iSCSITarget ID of the remote storage system.

◦ LUN ID: Displays LUN ID of the remote storage system.

◦ Journal ID: Displays journal ID of the remote storage system.

• Path Group ID: Displays the path group ID.

• CTG ID: Displays the consistency group ID.

• Error Level: Displays the error level.

Displays the View Pair Properties window.Detail

HA Pairs table

DescriptionItem

Displays whether the volume is a primary or secondary volume.Pair Position

Displays the pair status.Status

Remote Storage System • Model / Serial Number: Displays the model and serial number of theremote storage system.

• LDEV ID: Displays LDEV ID of the remote storage system.

• Port ID, Host Group ID, LUN ID: Displays Port ID, Host Group ID, andLUN ID of the remote storage system.

Displays the path group ID.Path Group ID

Displays the quorum disk ID.Quorum Disk ID

Displays the mirror ID.Mirror ID

402 LDEV GUI reference

Page 403: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays the consistency group ID.CTG ID

Displays the View Pair Properties window.Detail

ALUs / SLUs window

Administrative Logical Unit tab

DescriptionItem

ALU attribution identifier of an LDEV. In the VASAenvironment, If ALU ID is not assigned, a ? appears.

ALU ID

LDEV identifier, a combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Name of the LDEV.LDEV Name.

Subsidiary Logical Unit tab

DescriptionItem

SLU attribution identifier of an LDEV. In the VASAenvironment, If ALU ID is not assigned, a ? appears.

SLU ID

LDEV identifier, a combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Name of the LDEV.LDEV Name.

Provisioning type to be assigned to the LDEV.Provisioning TypeTHP: THP V-VOLSnapshot: Fast Snap volume.

ALUs / SLUs window 403

Page 404: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Unbind SLUs window

Selected ALUs

DescriptionItem

LDEV identifier, a combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

ALU attribution identifier of an LDEV.ALU ID

Name of the LDEV.LDEV Name

Components windowUse this window to view information about the controller chassis components in the storagesystem.

404 LDEV GUI reference

Page 405: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Summary

DescriptionItem

Number of controller chassisNumber of Controller Chassis

High Temperature ModeHigh Temperature Mode

• Enabled (16-40 degrees C ): High Temperature mode is enabled

• Disabled (16-32 degrees C ): High Temperature mode is disabled

Power ConsumptionPower ConsumptionIn the following cases, the power consumption value might temporarily displayslower:

• When starting the storage system

• After replacing a part of the storage system

• When updating the microcode or after updating the microcode

Opens the Edit Temperature Mode windowEdit High Temperature Mode

Opens the View Temperature Monitor windowView Temperature Monitor

Components window 405

Page 406: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Components tab

DescriptionItem

Chassis identifier of the storage system.Chassis ID

Chassis type.Chassis Type

Temperature of the cluster.Temperature (degrees C)

• Cluster 1: Temperature of the cluster 1.

• Cluster 2: Temperature of the cluster 2.

Opens a window where you can export configuration information listed in thetable to a file that can be used for multiple purposes, such as backup orreporting.

Export

DKC: MP Blades tabUse this window to view information about MP blades in the storage system.

Summary

DescriptionItem

Number of MP blades assigned to this component.Number of MP Blades

406 LDEV GUI reference

Page 407: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

MP Blades tab

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the MP blade.MP Blade ID

Name of the MP blade.MP Blade Name

Status of the MP blade.Status

Normal: Available.

Warning: The MP blade is partially blocked.

Blocked: The MP blade is blocked.

Failed: The MP blade is in abnormal status.

Cluster number of the MP blade.Cluster

Indicates whether the MP blade is automatically assigned to resources.Auto AssignmentEnabled: The MP blade is automatically assigned to resources (logical devices,external volumes, and journal volumes).Disabled: The MP blade is not automatically assigned to resources.

Opens the Edit MP Blades window.Edit MP Blades

Opens a window where you can export configuration information listed in thetable to a file that can be used for multiple purposes, such as backup orreporting.

Export

Edit MP Blades wizardUse this wizard to enable or disable the storage system to automatically assign the load ofresources controlled by the selected MP blades.

Edit MP Blades wizard 407

Page 408: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Edit MP Blades window

DescriptionItem

Specify whether to automatically assign an MP blade to resources (logicaldevices, external volumes, and journal volumes).

Auto Assignment

• Enable: Resources will be automatically assigned to the specified MP blade.

• Disable: Resources will not be automatically assigned to the specified MPblade.

Edit MP Blades confirmation windowConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

408 LDEV GUI reference

Page 409: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

MP blade identifier.MP Blade ID

Cluster number of the MP blade.Cluster

Indicates whether automatic assignment of MP blades is in use.Auto Assignment

• Enabled: An MP blade is automatically assigned to resources (logicaldevices, external volumes, and journal volumes).

• Disabled: An MP blade is not automatically assigned to resources.

Assign MP Blade wizardUse this wizard to assign a MP blade that will control selected resources.

Assign MP Blade windowUse this window to select a MP blade to assign to an LDEV.

Assign MP Blade wizard 409

Page 410: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Change the MP blade assigned to the LDEV.MP BladeMP-blade-ID: The selected MP blade is assigned to the LDEV.

Assign MP Blade confirmation windowConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

DescriptionItem

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

LDEV name.LDEV Name

Parity group identifier.Parity Group ID

Pool name and pool identifier.Pool Name (ID)

Emulation type.Emulation Type

410 LDEV GUI reference

Page 411: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

LDEV capacity.Capacity

Provisioning type to be assigned to the LDEV.Provisioning Type

• Basic: Internal volume.

• THP: THP V-VOL.

• External: External volume.

• External MF: Migration volume.

• Snapshot: Fast Snap volume.

Displays the attribute of the LDEV.AttributeCommand Device: Command device.Remote Command Device: Remote command device.JNL VOL: Journal volume.Pool VOL: Pool volume. The number in parentheses shows the pool ID.Quorum Disk: Quorum disk for High Availability.TSE: TSE-VOL.ALU: LDEV of the ALU attribution.SLU: LDEV of the SLU attribution.Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

MP blade identifier to be set.MP Blade ID

Assign MP Blade confirmation window

Edit Parity Groups wizardUse this wizard to edit parity groups.

Edit Parity Groups windowUse this window to edit the capacity virtualization of selected parity groups.

DescriptionItem

Specify the capacity virtualization in a parity group. If theparity group with capacity virtualization is selected, this

Capacity Virtualization

Assign MP Blade wizard 411

Page 412: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

item can be specified. Enabled: Capacity virtualization isenabled. Disabled: Capacity virtualization is disabled.

Edit Parity Groups confirmation windowUse this window to confirm the capacity virtualization setting of selected parity groups.

DescriptionItem

Displays the parity group ID.Parity Group ID

Displays the RAID level.RAID Level

Displays the drive type code.Drive Type-Code

Displays the drive type and RPM.Drive Type/RPM

Displays the capacity virtualization setting for the paritygroup. Enabled: Capacity virtualization is enabled.Disabled: Capacity virtualization is disabled.

Capacity Virtualization

NOTE: If multiple tasks that are connected in one wizard are executed, this window shows allconfigured items of tasks. To show information of other configured items, click Back to displayrelated setting windows, then click Help.

412 LDEV GUI reference

Page 413: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

View Management Resource Usage window

Management Resource Usage table

DescriptionItem

The current number and maximum allowed number of cache managementdevices in the storage system are displayed.

Number of Cache Management Devices

View Management Resource Usage window 413

Page 414: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

D Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time SmartTier GUI reference

The Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier windows, wizards, and dialogboxes are described in the following topics.

Pools window

Summary

DescriptionItem

Displays information about the pool capacity.Pool Capacity1

• Used/Total

THP: Displays the pool capacity (the sum of the used capacity and reservedcapacity, and the total pool capacity) of Thin Provisioning and Smart Tiers.

◦ Mainframe THP: Displays the pool capacity (the used capacity and the totalpool capacity) of Thin Provisioning MF and Smart Tiers MF.

◦ FS: Displays the pool capacity (the used capacity and the total pool capacity)of Fast Snap.

414 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 415: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

For each value, if the Estimated Configurable capacity is zero, is displayedin the cell.

• Estimated Configurable2

◦ THP: Displays the estimated pool capacity of Thin Provisioning and Smart Tiers.

◦ Mainframe THP: Displays the estimated pool capacity of Thin Provisioning MFand Smart Tiers MF.

◦ FS: Displays the remaining physical pool capacity that is configurable for FastSnap.

Displays information about the THP V-VOL capacity.V-VOL Capacity1

• Allocated/Total

THP: In the Allocated field, total capacity of the Thin Provisioning and SmartTiers THP V-VOLs to which LU paths are allocated is displayed. In the Total

◦field, total capacity of the Thin Provisioning and Smart Tiers THP V-VOLs isdisplayed.

◦ Mainframe THP: In each of the Allocated and Total fields, total capacity of theThin Provisioning MF and Smart Tiers MF THP V-VOLs is displayed.

For each value, if the Estimated Configurable capacity is zero, is displayedin the cell.

• Estimated Configurable2

◦ THP: Displays the THP V-VOL estimated configurable capacity of ThinProvisioning and Smart Tiers.

◦ Mainframe THP: Displays the THP V-VOL estimated configurable capacity ofThin Provisioning MF and Smart Tiers MF.

Displays information about available licensed capacity.Licensed Capacity (Used /Licensed) • THP: Displays the licensed capacity of Thin Provisioning. Used displays the total

capacity of pools for Thin Provisioning and Smart Tiers.

• Mainframe THP: Displays the licensed capacity of Thin Provisioning MF. Useddisplays the total capacity of pools for Thin Provisioning MF and Smart Tiers MF.

• FS: Displays the licensed capacity of the Fast Snap.

Caution: In the Licensed Capacity(Used/Licensed) field, the total capacity of thesystem is displayed. The total capacity of the system includes capacities of LDEVsassigned to each user and resources other than LDEVs. Therefore, the value displayedas the "Used" Licensed Capacity (Used/ Licensed) might differ from the value of the"Total" Pool Capacity.

Displays the total number of pools for Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers Real Time SmartTier, and Fast Snap.

Number of Pools

Displays the Edit Tiering Policies window.Edit Tiering Policies

Notes:1. The total value of the Total cells under Capacity of each pool type in the Pools tab window and the total Used

capacity of the Pool Capacity in the Summary table are almost same, but small differences might occur.The capacity used by the THP MF volume is different from the capacity used by the THP volume. If the pool-VOLor THP V-VOL for Thin Provisioning or Thin Provisioning MF is created, the estimated configurable pool capacityand estimated configurable V-VOL capacity for both THP and THP MF change. The estimated capacity is calculatedbased on the configuration of current pools and THP V-VOL, and remaining capacity of the shared memory.

2. The estimated configurable capacity of Thin Provisioning or Thin Provisioning MF is the estimate of the THPV-VOL capacity or the pool capacity that can be created by using the remaining capacity of the shared memoryafter deduction of the capacity of the shared memory used by the current pool and THP V-VOL. The values of

Pools window 415

Page 416: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

the Estimated Configurable Pool Capacity and the Estimated Configurable V-VOL Capacity can be usedonly as a guide, but are not guaranteed to create pools and THP V-VOLs having the estimated configurablecapacity. If the pool-VOL or THP V-VOL for Thin Provisioning or Thin Provisioning MF is created or deleted, theestimated configurable pool capacity and estimated configurable V-VOL capacity for both Thin Provisioning andThin Provisioning MF change.

Pools tab

DescriptionItem

Displays the pool name. Clicking the pool name takes you to the poolinformation window in the lower hierarchy.

Pool Name

Displays pool ID.Pool ID1

Displays information about the pool status.Status

Normal: Pool is in a normal status.

Warning: Pool-VOL in the pool is blocked, or the pool is being shrunk.

Exceeded Threshold: Used capacity of the pool exceeds the pool threshold.

Shrinking: Pool-VOL is being reduced.

Blocked: Pool is full, or an error occurred in the pool, indicating that the poolis blocked. If the pool is in both Warning and Blocked status, only Blocked isdisplayed.

Displays the number of pool-VOLs associated with the pool.Number of Pool VOLs

Displays the number of V-VOLs associated with the pool.Number of V-VOLsFor a Fast Snap pool, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays the number of primary volumes of the Fast Snap pairs. If a pool isother than the Fast Snap pool, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Number of Primary VOLs

Displays RAID level. If multiple RAID levels exist in a pool, this field indicatesthat RAID levels are mixed. If all pool-VOLs are external volumes, a hyphen(-) is displayed.

RAID level

Displays information about the pool capacity.Capacity

• Total: Total capacity of pool. As for the pool comprised of pool- volumesassigned by the capacity virtualization-enabled parity groups, the writeablecapacity may be smaller than the displayed capacity.Using Option, you can select unit of capacity.

◦ One block means 512 bytes and one page means 42 megabytes in apool capacity of Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, or Fast Snap.

◦ One slot means 58 kilobytes and one page means 38 megabytes in apool capacity of Thin Provisioning MF or Smart Tiers MF.

• Reserved: Displays the reserved page capacity of the pool.The displayed value of Reserved might be larger than the displayed valueof Total due to following reasons:

◦ Reserved displays the sum of the used V-VOL capacity and the reservedpage capacity that is rounded up on each page.

◦ If the emulation type is 3390-A, the mapped capacity of V-VOL includesthe capacity of control cylinders (7 Cyl is required per 1,113 Cyl).

416 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 417: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

◦ The mapped capacity of V-VOL for Thin Provisioning MF includes thecapacity of control information (168 MB is required per 3,145,548 MB).

◦ The mapped capacity of THP V-VOL includes the capacity of the controlinformation (Requires a maximum of 168 MB per 3,145,548 MB).

• Used: Sum of the mapped capacity and reserved capacity.The displayed value of Used might be larger than the displayed value ofTotal due to following reason:

◦ Used displays the sum of the mapped capacity and reserved capacity,which are rounded up on each page.

◦ The mapped capacity of THP V-VOL includes the capacity of the controlinformation (uses a maximum of 168 MB per 3,145,548 MB).

◦ THP V-VOL with data direct mapping attribute includes the controlinformation (168 MB is used per 3,145,548 MB) and capacity for onepage.

• Used (%): On a pool capacity basis, percentages of the sum of the mappedcapacity and the reserved page capacity.Used (%) displays the value which is truncated after the decimal point ofthe actual value.

For the pool of Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Fast Snap, a hyphen (-) isdisplayed if the unit of capacity is changed into Cylinder.

For a pool containing pool volumes that support capacity virtualization, thisitem displays the capacity assured for writing. If the capacity virtualization isnot supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Physical Capacity1

• Total: Displays the total pool capacity assured for writing.

• Used: Displays the used capacity of the pool. The used capacity is thecapacity deducted from the free capacity assured for writing from the totalpool capacity assured for writing. For the pool comprised of pool volumesassigned by the capacity virtualization-enabled parity groups, thecompressed data capacity is included in the used capacity.

• Used (%): Displays the percentage of the pool used capacity against thetotal capacity assured for writing

For a pool containing pool volumes that support the capacity virtualization, thisitem displays the percentage of the total capacity with respect to the capacityassured for writing.

Capacity Expansion Rate (%)1

If the capacity virtualization is not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

For FMC pool volumes used in the pool, this item displays the capacityguaranteed for writing. If the pool does not include FMC pool volumes, a hyphen(-) is displayed.

Physical FMC Pool VolumesCapacity 1

• Total: Displays the total capacity of FMC pool volumes for which writing isassured.

• Used: Displays the used capacity of FMC pool volumes after they arecompressed.

Displays the capacity of FMC pool volumes used in the pool. If the pool doesnot include FMC pool volumes, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

FMC Pool Volumes Capacity1

• Total: Displays the total capacity of FMC pool volumes. • Used: Displaysthe used capacity of FMC pool volumes.

• Saving: Displays the capacity reduced by data compression.

Pools window 417

Page 418: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

• Saving (%): Displays the percentage of the capacity reduced by datacompression with respect to the used capacity before the data compression.

• Capacity Expansion Rate (%): Displays the percentage of the total capacityof FMC pool volumes with respect to the total capacity of FMC pool volumesassured for writing.

Displays information about the threshold of a pool.User-Defined Threshold (%)

• Warning: Warning threshold.

• Depletion: Depletion threshold.

For a Fast Snap pool, a hyphen (-) is displayed for Depletion.

Displays information about subscription of the pool.Subscription (%)

• Current: Percentage of the total V-VOL capacity assigned to the pool.

• Limit: Percentage of the subscription limit of the pool.

For a Fast Snap pool, a hyphen (-) is displayed for Current and Limit.

Displays the pool type.Pool TypeFor a Thin Provisioning pool, THP is displayed.For a Smart Tiers pool, Smart is displayed.For a Thin Provisioning MF pool, Mainframe THP is displayed.For a Smart Tiers MF pool, Mainframe Smart is displayed.For a pool being used for Real Time Smart Tier, Smart(Real Time Smart Tier)is displayed.For a pool being used for Real Time Smart Tier for Mainframe, MainframeSmart(Real Time Smart Tier) is displayed.For a pool of the data direct mapping attribute, THP (data direct mapping) isdisplayed.For a Fast Snap pool, FS is displayed.

Displays the data drive type and RPM of the pool. If multiple drive types orRPMs exist in a pool, this field indicates that drive types or RPMs are mixed.

Drive Type/RPM

When the volume is the external volume,Drive Type displaysExternal Storageand the value of the external LDEV tier rank.

Encryption: The encryption information of the pool.Encryption

• Enabled: Pool which is created by pool-VOLs whose encryption settingsare enabled.

• Disable: Pool which is created by pool-VOLs whose encryption settings aredisabled.

• Mixed: In the pool, pool-VOLs of which encryption settings are enabled anddisabled are intermixed.This status appears when two or more of following are specified aspool-VOLs:

◦ Volume encryption setting is enabled.

◦ Volume encryption setting is disabled.

◦ External volume

Caution: The data encryption is not ensured in the pool that has the Mixedencryption setting. To manage the data encryption securely, use the poolwith an encryption setting of Enabled or Disabled.

• Hyphen(-): Pool is created by external volumes. Or pool is being blocked.

418 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 419: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays whether Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF is enabled or disabled. If it isenabled Auto or Manual is displayed. If it is disabled, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Tier Management

For a Fast Snap pool, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays whether the pool-VOL can be removed. While the pool is being shrunk,a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Shrinkable

Displays the monitoring mode that is set for the pool. If the continuous modeis enabled, Continuous Mode is displayed. If the period mode is enabled, Period

Monitoring Mode

Mode is displayed. If Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF is disabled, a hyphen (-)is displayed.

Displays the status of pool monitoring.Monitoring Status

• In Progress: The monitoring is being performed.

• During Computation: The calculating is being processed.

Other than these cases, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays the latest monitoring data.Recent Monitor Data

• If the monitoring data exists, the monitoring period of time is displayed.Example: 2010/11/15 00:00 - 2010/11/15 23:59

• If the monitoring data is being obtained, only the starting time is displayed.Example: 2010/11/15 00:00 -

• If the latest monitoring data does not exist, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays the pool management task being performed to the pool.Pool Management Task

• Waiting for Rebalance: The rebalance process is being waited.

• Rebalancing: The rebalance process is being performed.

• Waiting for Relocation: The tier relocation process is being waited.

• Relocating: The tier relocation process is being performed.

• Waiting for Shrink: The pool shrinking process is being waited.

• Shrinking: The pool shrinking process is being performed.

• Blank: The pool management task is not being performed to the pool.

For details about the tier relocation, see the tier relocation log file.

Displays the status of the tier relocation processing.Relocation ResultIn Progress: The status of Pool Management Task is Waiting forRelocation or Relocating.Completed: The tier relocation operation is not in progress, or the tier relocationis complete.Uncompleted (n% relocated): The tier relocation is suspended at the indicatedpercentage progression.Hyphen (-): The pool is not a Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF pool.

Displays the tier relocation speed: 1(Slowest), 2(Slower), 3(Standard), 4(Faster),or 5(Fastest).

Relocation Speed

Displays whether the protect function for THP V-VOL is being enabled ordisabled. If the setting is enabled, when the pool-VOL is blocked, THP V-VOL

Protect V-VOLs when I/O fails toBlocked Pool VOL

is protected from reading and writing requests. And at the same instant, theaccess attribute of the THP V-VOL is changed to the Protect attribute.A hyphen appears if the pool corresponds with one of following:

• Data Retention is not installed.

• Pool type is other than THP or Smart.

Pools window 419

Page 420: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays whether the protect function for THP V-VOL is being enabled ordisabled. If the setting is enabled, when the pool usage reaches the full size,

Protect V-VOLs when I/O fails to FullPool

THP V-VOL is protected from reading and writing requests. And at the sameinstant, the access attribute of the THP V-VOL is changed to the Protectattribute.A hyphen appears if the pool corresponds with one of following:

• Data Retention is not installed.

• Pool type is other than THP or Smart.

Displays the Create Pools window.Create Pools

Displays the Create LDEVs window.Create LDEVs

Displays the Expand Pool window.Expand Pool

Displays the Delete Pools window.Delete Pools2

Displays the Restore Pools window.Restore Pools2

Displays the Edit Pools window.Edit Pools2

Displays the Monitor Pools window.Monitor Pools2

Displays the Stop Monitoring Pools window.Stop Monitoring Pools2

Displays the Start Tier Relocation window.Start Tier Relocation2

Displays the Stop Tier Relocation window.Stop Tier Relocation2

Displays the Complete SIMs window.Complete SIMs2

Displays the View Tier Properties window. This window can be viewed onlyfor the pools for which Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF is enabled.

View Tier Properties2

Displays the View Pool Management Status window.View Pool Management Status2

Displays the window to download the result of the tier relocation.Export Tier Relocation Log2

Displays the window for outputting table information.Export2

Notes:1. Does not appear by default. To display this item, change the Column Settings of the table option.2. Available when you click More Actions.

420 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 421: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Pools: Volume tabs

Summary

DescriptionItem

Displays information about the pool status.Status

• Normal: Pool is in a normal status.

• Warning: Pool-VOL in the pool is blocked, or the pool is being shrunk.

• Exceeded Threshold: Percentages of the sum of the mapped capacityof the pool and the reserved capacity of the pool exceed the pool threshold.

• Shrinking: Pool-VOL is being reduced.

• Blocked: The pool is full, or an error occurred in the pool, indicatingthat the pool is blocked. If the pool is in both Warning and Blocked status,only Blocked is displayed.

Displays the pool name and pool ID.Pool Name (ID)

Displays the LDEV ID and LDEV name of the pool-VOL which includes thepool management area.

Pool VOL with System Area (Name)

Displays the pool type.Pool TypeFor a Thin Provisioning pool, THP is displayed.For a Smart Tiers pool, Smart is displayed.For a Thin Provisioning MF pool, Mainframe THP is displayed.For a Smart Tiers MF pool, Mainframe Smart is displayed.

Pools: Volume tabs 421

Page 422: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

For a pool being used for Real Time Smart Tier, Smart(Real Time Smart Tier)is displayed.For a pool being used for Real Time Smart Tier for Mainframe, MainframeSmart(Real Time Smart Tier) is displayed.For a pool of the data direct mapping attribute, THP (data direct mapping) isdisplayed.For a Fast Snap pool, FS is displayed.

Displays RAID level. If multiple RAID levels exist in a pool, this field indicatesthat RAID levels are mixed. If all pool-VOLs are external volumes, a hyphen(-) is displayed.

RAID Level

Displays the data drive type and RPM of the pool. If multiple drive types orRPMs exist in a pool, this field indicates that drive types or RPMs are mixed.

Drive Type/RPM

When the volume is the external volume, Drive Type displays ExternalStorage and the value of the external LDEV tier rank.

Encryption: The encryption information of the pool.Encryption

• Enabled: Pool which is created by pool-VOLs whose encryption settingsare enabled.

• Disable: Pool which is created by pool-VOLs whose encryption settingsare disabled.

• Mixed: In the pool, pool-VOLs of which encryption settings are enabledand disabled are intermixed.This status appears when two or more of following are specified aspool-VOLs:

◦ Volume encryption setting is enabled.

◦ Volume encryption setting is disabled.

◦ External volume

Caution: The data encryption is not ensured in the pool that has the Mixedencryption setting. To manage the data encryption securely, use the poolwith an encryption setting of Enabled or Disabled.

• Hyphen(-): Pool is created by external volumes. Or pool is being blocked.

Displays information about the capacity virtualization of the parity group thatis created of LDEVs.

Capacity Virtualization1

Enabled: The capacity virtualization of the parity group is enabled.Disabled: The capacity virtualization of the parity group is disabled.Hyphen (-): The parity group with the capacity virtualization is not supported.

Displays the information that LDEV is allocated in the expanded area or thephysical area. If the capacity virtualization is enabled, LDEVs are initially

Expanded Space Used1

allocated in the physical area, then LDEVs are allocated in the expandedarea. This item displays whether the LDEV area is allocated in the expandedor physical area.Yes: LDEV is allocated in the expanded area.No: LDEV is allocated in the physical area.

For a configuration of external volumes, cache mode is displayed as enabledor disabled. For the configuration of external volumes, whose cache modes

Cache Mode

are enabled and disabled, Mixed is displayed. For other configurations, ahyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays whether the protect function for THP V-VOL is being enabled ordisabled. If the setting is enabled, when the pool-VOL is blocked, THP V-VOL

Protect V-VOLs when I/O fails toBlocked Pool VOL

422 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 423: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

is protected from reading and writing requests. And at the same instant, theaccess attribute of the THP V-VOL is changed to the Protect attribute.A hyphen appears if the pool corresponds with one of following:

• Data Retention is not installed.

• Pool type is other than THP or Smart.

Displays whether the protect function for THP V-VOL is being enabled ordisabled. If the setting is enabled, when the pool usage reaches the full size,

Protect V-VOLs when I/O fails to FullPool

THP V-VOL is protected from reading and writing requests. And at the sameinstant, the access attribute of the THP V-VOL is changed to the Protectattribute.A hyphen appears if the pool corresponds with one of following:

• Data Retention is not installed.

• Pool type is other than THP or Smart.

Displays the number of pool-VOLs set for the pool, and the maximum numberof pool-VOLs that can be set for the pool.

Number of Pool VOLs

Displays the number of V-VOLs associated with the pool, and the maximumnumber of V-VOLs that can be associated with the pool.

Number of V-VOLs

As for the pool with the data direct mapping attribute, a hyphen (-) appearsfor the maximum number of V-VOLs which can associate with the pool.For a Fast Snap, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays the number of primary volumes of the Fast Snap pairs. When theapplicable volume does not exist, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Number of Primary VOLs

Displays the sum of the mapped capacity and reserved capacity for the pool,and the total capacity of the pool. If the pool consists of multiple pool-VOLs,the sum of its capacities is displayed in the Total field.

Pool Capacity (Used/Total)

Used capacity assured for writing data in the pool and the total capacityassured for writing data in the pool. If the capacity virtualization is notsupported, a hyphen(-) is displayed.

Physical Pool Capacity (Used/Total)

As for the pool comprised of pool volumes assigned by the capacityvirtualization-enabled parity groups, the writable capacity may be smaller thanthe displayed capacity.

Displays the sum of the mapped capacity and the reserved capacity for virtualvolumes, and the total capacity of virtual volumes. For a Fast Snap pool, ahyphen (-) is displayed along with the used and total V-VOL capacity.

V-VOL Capacity (Used/Total)

Displays the subscription (Rate of total V-VOL capacity associated with a poolto the pool capacity/Subscription that is set).

Subscription (Current/Limit)

For a Fast Snap, a hyphen (-) is displayed for Current or Limit.

Displays the user-defined threshold (Warning/Depletion).User-Defined Threshold(Warning/Depletion) For a Fast Snap, a hyphen (-) is displayed for Depletion.

If Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF is enabled, Auto or Manual is displayed. IfSmart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF is disabled, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Tier Management

For a Fast Snap, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays the cycle of performance monitoring and tier relocation. If SmartTiers or Smart Tiers MF is disabled, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Cycle Time

Displays the time of starting and ending of performance monitoring. If SmartTiers or Smart Tiers MF is disabled, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Monitoring Period

Pools: Volume tabs 423

Page 424: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays the monitoring mode that is set for the pool. If the continuous modeis enabled, Continuous Mode is displayed. If the period mode is enabled,

Monitoring Mode

Period Mode is displayed. If Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF is disabled, ahyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays the status of pool monitoring.Monitoring StatusIf the monitoring is being performed, In Progress is displayed. A hyphen (-)is displayed other than this case.

Displays the latest monitoring data.Recent Monitor Data

• If the monitoring data exists, the monitoring period of time is displayed.Example: 2010/11/15 00:00 - 2010/11/15 23:59

• If the monitoring data is being obtained, only the starting time is displayed.Example: 2010/11/15 00:00 -

• If the latest monitoring data does not exist, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays the pool management task being performed to the pool.Pool Management Task

• Waiting for Rebalance: The rebalance process is being waited.

• Rebalancing: The rebalance process is being performed.

• Waiting for Relocation: The tier relocation process is being waited.

• Relocating: The tier relocation process is being performed.

• Waiting for Shrink: The pool shrinking process is being waited.

• Shrinking: The pool shrinking process is being performed.

• Blank:The pool management task is not being performed to the pool.

For details about the tier relocation, see the tier relocation log file.

Displays the status of the tier relocation processing.Relocation ResultIn Progress: The status of Pool Management Task is Waiting forRelocation or Relocating.Completed: The tier relocation operation is not in progress, or the tier relocationis complete.Uncompleted (n% relocated): The tier relocation is suspended at the indicatedpercentage progression.Hyphen (-): The pool is not a Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF pool.

Displays the tier relocation speed: 1(Slowest), 2(Slower), 3(Standard),4(Faster), or 5(Fastest).

Relocation Speed

Pool Volumes tabOnly the LDEVs assigned to the logged-on user are available.

424 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 425: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Displays the LDEV name.LDEV Name

Displays the following information about the pool-VOL status.Status

• Normal: Pool-VOL is in the normal status.

• Shrinking: Pool-VOL is being reduced.

• Blocked: Pool-VOL is blocked.

Displays the parity group ID.Parity Group ID

Displays the pool capacity.Capacity

• Usable: The usable capacity in the pool-VOL that is offset on the basis ofthe page appears. For the pool-VOL with system area, the displayed capacitydoes not include the capacity of the management area.

• Mapped: The mapped capacity in the pool-VOL that is offset on the basisof the page appears.

For the pool of Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, Real Time Smart Tier, and FastSnap, a hyphen (-) is displayed if the unit of capacity is changed to Cylinder.

Displays the RAID level.RAID Level

Displays the emulation type.Emulation Type

Displays the data drive type and RPM. When the volume is the external volume,Drive Type displays External Storage and the value of the external LDEV tierrank.

Drive Type/RPM

Pools: Volume tabs 425

Page 426: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays the tier ID. For a Thin Provisioning, Thin Provisioning MF, or a FastSnap pool, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Tier ID

Displays the type of the LDEV.Provisioning Type

• Basic: Internal volume.

• External: External volume.

Attribute of the volume indicating how the LDEV is being used.AttributeData Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

For the external volume, this item is displayed as enabled or disabled. If theLDEV is not an external volume, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Cache Mode

Displays whether the pool-VOL can be removed while the pool is being shrunk,a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Shrinkable

Displays the information about parity group encryption.Encryption1

• Enable: Encryption setting of a parity group in which the LDEV is placed isenabled. Or the pool-VOL which is enabled of the encryption setting.

• Disable: Encryption setting of a parity group (or a pool) in which the LDEVis placed is disabled. Or the pool-VOL which is enabled of the encryptionsetting.

• Mixed: Pool-VOLs with enabled encryption settings and pool-VOLs withdisabled encryption settings are intermixed in the pool in which the LDEVis placed.Caution: The data encryption is not ensured in the pool that has the Mixedencryption setting. To manage the data encryption securely, use the poolwith an encryption setting of Enabled or Disabled.

• Hyphen(-): External volume.

Displays information about the capacity virtualization of the parity groupcomprised of LDEVs.

Capacity Virtualization1

Enabled: The capacity virtualization of the parity group is enabled.Disabled: The capacity virtualization of the parity group is disabled.Hyphen (-): The parity group with capacity virtualization is not supported.

Displays the information that LDEV is allocated in the expanded area or thephysical area. If the capacity virtualization is enabled, LDEVs are initiallyallocated in the physical area, then LDEVs are allocated in the expanded area.

Expanded Space Used 1

This item displays whether the LDEV area is allocated in the expanded orphysical area.Yes: LDEV is allocated in the expandedarea.No: LDEV is allocated in the physical area.

Displays LDEV ID of pool-VOL in the pool of the data direct mapping attribute.If the link of LDEV ID is clicked, the LDEV Properties window appears.

Data Direct Mapped LDEV

A hyphen (-) appears if the data direct mapping attribute is disabled. If THPV-VOL with data direct mapping attribute is not created in the pool of the datadirect mapping attribute, this item is blank.

Displays the resource group names and IDs of the LDEV. The ID is providedin parentheses.

Resource Group Name (ID)

Displays the Expand Pool window.Expand Pool

Displays the Shrink Pool window.Shrink Pool

Displays the Stop Shrinking Pools window.Stop Shrinking Pools

426 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 427: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays the Edit External LDEV Tier Rank window. You cannot operate thepool other than the pool of Thin Provisioning, Thin Provisioning MF, Smart

Edit External LDEV Tier Rank2

Tiers, Smart Tiers MF, Real Time Smart Tier, or Real Time Smart Tier forMainframe.

Displays the Edit External Volumes window. If the volume type of the specifiedpool-VOL is other than the external volume, you cannot operate this button.

Edit External Volumes2

For details, see XP7 External Storage for Open and Mainframe Systems UserGuide.

Displays the window for outputting table information.Export2

Notes:1. This item does not appear in the window by default. To display this item, change the Column Settings of the

table option.2. Appears when you click More Actions.

Virtual Volumes tabThis tab is displayed unless you select a Fast Snap pool.

DescriptionItem

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Displays the LDEV name.LDEV Name

Pools: Volume tabs 427

Page 428: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Status• Normal: Normal status.

• Blocked: Host cannot access a blocked volume.

• Warning: Problem occurs in the volume.

• Formatting: Volume is being formatted.

• Preparing Quick Format: Volume is being prepared for quick formatting.

• Quick Formatting: Volume is being quick-formatted.

• Correction Access: Access attribute is being corrected.

• Copying: Data in the volume is being copied.

• Read Only: Data cannot be written to a read-only volume.

• Shredding: Volume is being shredded.

• Hyphen (-): Any status other than the above.

Displays the emulation type.Emulation Type

Displays information about the V-VOL capacity.Capacity

• Total: Displays the V-VOL capacity.

• Reserved: Displays the reserved capacity of the V-VOL.The displayed value of Reserved might be larger than the displayed valueof Total due to following reasons:

◦ Reserved displays the reserved capacity that is rounded up on eachpage.

◦ If the emulation type is 3390-A, the mapped capacity of V-VOL includesthe capacity of control cylinders (7 Cyl is required per 1,113 Cyl).

◦ The mapped capacity of V-VOL for Thin Provisioning includes the capacityof control information (168 MB is required per 3,145,548 MB).

• Used: Displays the sum of the mapped capacity and the reserved capacity.The displayed value of Used might be larger than the displayed value ofTotal due to following reasons:

◦ Used displays the sum of the mapped capacity and the reserved capacitythat is rounded up on each page.

◦ If the emulation type is 3390-A, the mapped capacity of V-VOL includesthe capacity of control cylinders (7 Cyl is required per 1,113 Cyl).

◦ The mapped capacity of THP V-VOL includes the capacity of the controlinformation (uses a maximum of 168 MB per 3,145,548 MB).

◦ THP V-VOL of the data direct mapping attribute includes the controlinformation (168 MB is used per 3,145,548 MB) and the capacity for onepage.If used capacity is referenced during I/O or copy processing by softwaresuch as Business Copy or Continuous Access Journal, the used capacitydisplayed might be different from the actual capacity even if the fullallocation is enabled on the V-VOL. This is caused by a gap between

428 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 429: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

the times that information is gathered about the mapped capacity andthe reserved capacity.

• Used(%): For the entire capacity of V-VOL, this item displays percentagesof the sum of the mapped capacity and the reserved capacity.Used(%) is obtained by dividing the total of the user data and controlinformation by the user area capacity. For an LDEV such as a TSE-VOL,where the ratio of the control information is high relative to the user area,Used(%) may exceed 100 %.

Displays information about the mapped capacity of a V-VOL.Used Capacity

• Tier1: Displays the used capacity of tier 1.A hyphen (-) is displayed if the logical volume is a not a V-VOL of SmartTiers or Smart Tiers MF.

• Tier2: Displays the used capacity of tier 2.A hyphen (-) is displayed if tier 2 does not exist or if the logical volume is anot a V-VOL of Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF.

• Tier3: Displays the used capacity of tier 3.A hyphen (-) is displayed if tier 3 does not exist or if the logical volume is anot a V-VOL of Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF.

The reserved page capacity is not included in the used capacity for each tierof the V-VOL. Therefore, the Used value in the Capacity column might notcorrespond with the Used Capacity value.

Displays the number of alternate paths. A hyphen(-) is displayed for the ThinProvisioning MF or Smart Tiers MF V-VOL.

Number of Paths

Displays the CLPR ID.CLPR

Displays the status of the setting for the full allocation in a pool associated withthe V-VOL.

Full Allocation

• Enable: Pages are reserved.

• Disable: Pages are not reserved.

Displays the tiering policy name and ID.Tiering Policy

• All(0): The policy of which all tiers in the pool are used.

• Level1(1) - Level5(5): One of the policy from Level1 to Level5 is set toV-VOL.

• Level6(6) - Level31(31): The tiering policy of the user definition is set toV-VOL

• Hyphen (-): V-VOL is not the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF V-VOL.

Displays the new page assignment tier.New Page Assignment Tier

• High: High is set to V-VOL.

• Middle: Middle is set to V-VOL.

• Low: Low is set to V-VOL.

• Hyphen (-): V-VOL is not the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF V-VOL.

Displays whether tier relocation is set to enabled or disabled. If the Smart Tiersor Smart Tiers MF V-VOL is not used, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Tier Relocation

Pools: Volume tabs 429

Page 430: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays the relocation priority.Relocation Priority

• Prioritized: The priority is set to V-VOL.

• Blank: The priority is not set to V-VOL.

• Hyphen (-): V-VOL is not the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF V-VOL or thetier relocation function is disabled.

Displays the pool management task being performed to the pool.Pool Management Task

• Waiting for Rebalance: The rebalance process is being waited.

• Rebalancing: The rebalance process is being performed.

• Waiting for Relocation: The tier relocation process is being waited.

• Relocating: The tier relocation process is being performed.

• Waiting for Shrink: The pool shrinking process is being waited.

• Shrinking: The pool shrinking process is being performed.

• Blank:The pool management task is not being performed to the pool.

Displays the V-VOL management task being performed to V-VOL.V-VOL Management Task

• Reclaiming Zero Pages: The zero page reclaiming processing is beingperformed.

• Waiting for Zero Page Reclaiming: The zero page reclaiming processing isbeing waited.

• Blank:The V-VOL management task is not being performed to V-VOL.

Displays the attribute of the LDEV.Attribute

• TSE: TSE-VOL.

• Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.

• Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

Displays the access attribute of the LDEV.Access Attribute1

Displays the LDEV's T10 PI attribute information (Enabled or Disabled).T10 PI1

Displays LDEV ID of pool-VOL in the pool of the data direct mapping attribute.If the link of LDEV ID is clicked, the LDEV Properties window appears.

Data Direct Mapped LDEV1

A hyphen (-) appears if the data direct mapping attribute is disabled.

Displays the resource group names and IDs of the LDEV. The ID is providedin parentheses.

Resource Group Name (ID)

Information about the virtual storage machine.Virtual Storage Machine1

• Model / Serial Number1: Model name and serial number of the virtual storagemachine that has the LDEV.

• LDEV ID1: Virtual LDEV ID. If a Virtual LDEV ID is not assigned to LDEV,this column is blank.

• Device Name1: Virtual device name, which is a combination of the virtualemulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, and the virtual CVS attribute.Values of the virtual emulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, and virtualCVS attribute appear only for items that have been set. This column is blankwhen the virtual emulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, and virtualCVS attribute are not set. If the virtual CVS attribute is set, CVS is attachedas the suffix to the device name.

• SSID1: Virtual SSID. If Virtual SSID is not set for LDEV, this column is blank.

• Attribute1: Virtual LDEV attribute. If the attribute is not set for the LDEV, thiscolumn is blank.

Displays the Create LDEV window.Create LDEVs

430 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 431: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays the Add LUN Paths window. If Mainframe THP or Smart is displayedin the Pool Type, you cannot select this item.

Add LUN Paths

Displays the Expand V-VOLs window.Expand V-VOLs

Displays the Format LDEVs window.Format LDEVs2

Displays the Delete LDEVs window.Delete LDEVs2

Displays the Shred LDEVs window.Shred LDEVs2

Displays the Delete LUN Paths window.Delete LUN Paths2

Displays the Block LDEVs window.Block LDEVs2

Displays the Restore LDEVs window.Restore LDEVs2

Displays the Edit LDEVs window.Edit LDEVs2

Displays the Reclaim Zero Pages window.Reclaim Zero Pages2

Displays the Stop Reclaiming Zero Pages window.Stop Reclaiming Zero Pages2

Displays the View Tier Properties window. This window can open only for apool for which Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF is enabled.

View Tier Properties2

Opens the Assign MP Blade window.Assign MP Blade

Opens the Delete UUIDs window.Delete UUIDs

Force Delete Pairs • Cnt Ac-S Pairs: Opens the Force Delete Pairs (Cnt Ac-S Pairs) window. Fordetails see the XP7 Continuous Access Synchronous User Guide or XP7Continuous Access Synchronous for Mainframe User Guide.

• Cnt Ac-J Pairs: Opens the Force Delete Pairs (Cnt Ac-J Pairs) window. Fordetails see the XP7 Continuous Access Journal User Guide or XP7Continuous Access Journal for Mainframe Systems User Guide.

• HA Pairs: Opens the Force Delete Pairs (HA Pairs) window. For details seethe XP7 High Availability User Guide.

Displays the ALUs / SLUs window.View ALUs / SLUs2

Displays the window for outputting table information.Export2

Notes:1. Does not appear by default. To display this item, change the Column Settings of the table option.2. Available when you click More Actions.

Primary Volumes tabIf you select a Fast Snap pool, this tab is displayed.

Pools: Volume tabs 431

Page 432: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays the combination of the LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV IDClicking LDEV ID opens the LDEV Properties window.

Displays the LDEV name.LDEV Name

Status• Normal: Normal status.

• Blocked: Host cannot access a blocked volume.

• Warning: Problem occurs in the volume.

• Formatting: Volume is being formatted.

• Preparing Quick Format: Volume is being prepared for quick formatting.

• Quick Formatting: Volume is being quick-formatted.

• Correction Access: Access attribute is being corrected.

• Copying: Data in the volume is being copied.

• Read Only: Data cannot be written to a read-only volume.

• Shredding: Volume is being shredded.

• Hyphen (-): Any status other than the above.

Displays the used pool capacity.Used Pool Capacity

Displays the pool usage level.Pool Usage(%)

Displays the number of alternate paths.Number of Paths

432 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 433: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays the CLPR. Displays in ID:CLPR form.CLPR

Displays the pool management task being performed to the pool.Pool Management Task

• Waiting for Rebalance: The rebalance process is being waited.

• Rebalancing: The rebalance process is being performed.

• Waiting for Relocation: The tier relocation process is being waited.

• Relocating: The tier relocation process is being performed.

• Waiting for Shrink: The pool shrinking process is being waited.

• Shrinking: The pool shrinking process is being performed.

• Blank:The pool management task is not being performed to the pool.

Displays the information about parity group encryption.Encryption1

• Enable: Encryption setting of a parity group in which the LDEV is placed isenabled. Or the pool-VOL which is enabled of the encryption setting.

• Disable: Encryption setting of a parity group (or a pool) in which the LDEVis placed is disabled. Or the pool-VOL which is enabled of the encryptionsetting.

• Mixed: Pool-VOLs with enabled encryption settings and pool-VOLs withdisabled encryption settings are intermixed in the pool in which the LDEVis placed.Caution: The data encryption is not ensured in the pool that has the Mixedencryption setting. To manage the data encryption securely, use the poolwith an encryption setting of Enabled or Disabled.

• Hyphen(-): External volume.

Information about the virtual storage machine.Virtual Storage Machine1

• Model / Serial Number1: Model name and serial number of the virtual storagemachine that has the LDEV.

• LDEV ID1: Virtual LDEV ID. If a Virtual LDEV ID is not assigned to LDEV,this column is blank.

• Device Name1: Virtual device name, which is a combination of the virtualemulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, and the virtual CVS attribute.Values of the virtual emulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, and virtualCVS attribute appear only for items that have been set. This column is blankwhen the virtual emulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, and virtualCVS attribute are not set. If the virtual CVS attribute is set, CVS is attachedas the suffix to the device name.

• SSID1: Virtual SSID. If Virtual SSID is not set for LDEV, this column is blank.

Displays the window for outputting table information.Export

Notes:1. Does not appear by default. To display this item, change the Column Settings of the table option.2. Available when you click More Actions.

Create Pools wizardCreate Pools window

Use this window to create new pools for Thin Provisioning, Fast Snap.

Create Pools wizard 433

Page 434: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

When selecting pool-VOL manually

When selecting pool-VOL automatically

434 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 435: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Setting fields

DescriptionItem

Select the pool type.*Pool TypeFor Fast Snap, select Fast Snap.For the following software, select Thin Provisioning.

• Thin Provisioning

• Smart Tiers

• Thin Provisioning MF

• Smart Tiers MF

• Real Time Smart Tier

• Real Time Smart Tier for Mainframe

Select the system type.*System TypeIf you select Fast Snap, only Open is displayed.

If Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF is enabled, Auto or Manual for performancemonitoring and tier relocation is displayed. If Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF isdisabled, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

*Smart Pool

When the following conditions are satisfied, this check box can be selected:Real Time Smart Tier

• Smart Pool is enabled.

• Pool volumes whose drive type is SSD are installed.

If this check box is selected, Real Time Smart Tier can be used.

Select Enable or Disable for the data direct mapping attribute. This item canbe selected if following are specified:

Data Direct Mapping

• Pool Type: Thin Provisioning

• System Type: Open

• Smart Pool: Disable

Create Pools wizard 435

Page 436: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Select the mode of the pool-VOL setting from Auto or Manual. If Enable isselected in Data Direct Mapping, Manual is selected automatically.

*Pool Volume Selection

Select the data drive type and RPM of the pool-VOL. When the volume iscreated by Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, or Real Time Smart Tier, Mixable

*Drive Type/RPM

appears. When the volume is the external volume,Drive Type displaysExternalStorage. This item is displayed when you select Manual as your Pool VolumeSelection.

Select the RAID level of the pool-VOL. This item is displayed when you selectManual as your Pool Volume Selection.

*RAID Level

Mixable appears in the case of Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, or Real TimeSmart Tier. A hyphen (-) appears when External Storage is selected in theDrive Type/RPM list.

Opens the Select Pool VOLs window. Selecting a pool-VOL is mandatory.This item is displayed when you select Manual as your Pool Volume Selection.

*Select Pool VOLs

Displays the total number of the selected pool-VOLs. This item is displayedwhen you select Manual as your Pool Volume Selection.

Total Selected Pool Volumes

Displays the total capacity of the selected pool-VOLs. This item is displayedwhen you select Manual as your Pool Volume Selection.

Total Selected Capacity

This item is displayed when you select Auto as your Pool Volume Selection.Resource GroupSelect the resource group name of the pool.

This item is displayed when you select Auto as your Pool Volume Selection.PerformanceSelect the performance of the pool.

This item is displayed when you select Auto as your Pool Volume Selection.Total CapacitySpecify the total capacity of the pool.

This item is displayed when you select Auto as your Pool Volume Selection.Change Pool ConfigurationOpens the Change Pool Configuration Pattern window. You can change thepool configuration that is automatically selected. For details, see “Change PoolConfiguration Pattern window” (page 490).

This item is displayed when you select Auto as your Pool Volume Selection.Total Pool VolumesDisplays the total number of pool-VOLs.

This item is displayed when you select Auto as your Pool Volume Selection.Total CapacityDisplays the capacity of the pool created by the selected pool configuration.

Set the pool name. You can enter up to 32 case-sensitive and alphanumericcharacters.

*Pool Name

The smallest available number is entered in the text box as a default. No numberappears in the text box if no available pool ID exists.

Initial Pool ID

If you specify the pool ID which is used already, the minimum pool ID after thatthe specified pool ID is automatically set.

Set the subscription limit of the pool from 0 to 65534 (%).Subscription LimitIf this is blank, the subscription is set to unlimited.When creating a Fast Snap pool, this setting is not necessary.

Set the threshold between 1 and 100%. The default value is 70%.Warning ThresholdFor Fast Snap: Set the threshold between 20% and 95%. The default value is80%. If Enable is selected in Data Direct Mapping, 100 % is specifiedautomatically.

436 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 437: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Set the threshold between 1% and 100%. The default value is 80%.Depletion ThresholdWhen creating a Fast Snap pool, this setting is not necessary. If Enable isselected in Data Direct Mapping, 100 % is specified automatically.

This item can be set if following conditions are satisfied:Protect V-VOLs when I/O fails toBlocked Pool VOL • Thin Provisioning is selected in Pool Type.

• Open is selected in System Type.

• Data Retention must be installed.

Select Yes or No in the protect function for THP V-VOL. If this function isenabled, when the pool-VOL is blocked, THP V-VOL is protected from readingand writing requests, and, at the same time, the access attribute of the THPV-VOL is changed to the Protect attribute.

This item can be set if following are satisfied:Protect V-VOLs when I/O fails to FullPool • Thin Provisioning is selected in Pool Type.

• Open is selected in System Type.

• Data Retention must be installed.

Select Yes or No in the protect function for THP V-VOL. If this function isenabled, when the pool usage reaches the full size, THP V-VOL is protectedfrom reading and writing requests, and, at the same time, the access attributeof the THP V-VOL is changed to the Protect attribute.

Select Auto or Manual of performance monitoring and tier relocation.Tier Management

• Cycle TimeSelect the cycle of performance monitoring and tier relocation.

• Monitoring PeriodWhen 24 Hours is selected in the Cycle Time list, specify the time zone from00:00 to 23:59 (default value), in which performance monitoring is to beperformed. Take one or more hours between the starting time and the endingtime. If you specify the starting time later than the ending time, theperformance monitoring continues until the time when you specify as theending time on the next day.

This function can be set when the Smart Pool is enabled.

Specifies the monitoring mode, If you perform the tier relocation weighted tothe past period monitoring result, select Continuous Mode. If you perform the

Monitoring Mode

tier relocation on the specified cycle, select Period Mode. You can specify thisfunction when the Smart Pool feature is enabled.

Specifies the page relocation speed. You can set the speed to: 1(Slowest),2(Slower), 3(Standard), 4(Faster), or 5(Fastest). The default is 3(Standard). If

Relocation speed

the speed specified is slower than 3(Standard), the data drive load is low whentier relocation is performed.

You can set this function when the Smart Pool feature is enabled.Buffer Space for New pageassignment Tier 1: Enter an integer value from 0 to 50 as the percentage (%) to set for tier

1. A default value depends on the data drive type of pool-VOL in tier 1. Thedefault value of SSD is 0%. The default value other than SSD is 8%.Tier 2: Enter an integer value from 0 to 50 as the percentage (%) to set for tier2. A default value depends on the data drive type of pool-VOL in tier 2.Tier 3: Enter an integer value from 0 to 50 as the percentage (%) to set for tier3. A default value depends on the data drive type of pool-VOL in tier 3.

You can set this function when the Smart Pool feature is enabled.Buffer Space for Tier relocationTier 1: Enter an integer value from 2 to 40 as the percentage (%) to set for tier1. A default value is 2%.

Create Pools wizard 437

Page 438: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Tier 2: Enter an integer value from 2 to 40 as the percentage (%) to set for tier2. A default value is 2%.Tier 3: Enter an integer value from 2 to 40 as the percentage (%) to set for tier3. A default value is 2%.

When you click Add, the configured information is added to the right side ofthe Selected Pools table.

Add

*Items with asterisks require configuration.

Selected Pools table

DescriptionItem

Displays the pool name and pool ID.Pool Name (ID)

Displays RAID level of the pool. If multiple RAID levels exist in a pool, this fieldindicates that RAID levels are mixed. If all pool-VOLs are external volumes, ahyphen (-) is displayed.

RAID Level

Displays the total capacity of the created pool.CapacityFor open systems, the displayed capacity is approximately 4.1 GB (capacityof the management area) less than the total capacity of the selected poolvolumes.For mainframe systems, the displayed capacity is approximately 3.7 GB(capacity of the management area) less than the total capacity of the selectedpool volumes.As for the pool comprised of pool volumes assigned by the capacityvirtualization-enabled parity groups, the writable capacity may be smaller thanthe displayed capacity.

Displays the pool type.Pool TypeFor a Thin Provisioning pool, THP is displayed.

438 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 439: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

For a Smart Tiers pool, Smart is displayed.For a Thin Provisioning MF pool, Mainframe THP is displayed.For a Smart Tiers MF pool, Mainframe Smart is displayed.For a pool being used for Real Time Smart Tier, Smart(Real Time Smart Tier)is displayed.For a pool being used for Real Time Smart Tier for Mainframe, MainframeSmart(Real Time Smart Tier) is displayed.For a pool of the data direct mapping attribute, THP (data direct mapping) isdisplayed.For a Fast Snap pool, FS is displayed.

Displays the data drive type and RPM. If multiple drive types or RPMs exist ina pool, this field indicates Mixed. When the volume is the external volume,

Drive Type/RPM

Drive Type displays External Storage and the value of the external LDEV tierrank.

Encryption: The encryption information of the pool.Encryption

• Enabled: Pool which is created by pool-VOLs whose encryption settingsare enabled.

• Disable: Pool which is created by pool-VOLs whose encryption settings aredisabled.

• Mixed: In the pool, pool-VOLs of which encryption settings are enabled anddisabled are intermixed.This status appears when two or more of following are specified aspool-VOLs:

◦ Volume encryption setting is enabled.

◦ Volume encryption setting is disabled.

◦ External volume

Caution: The data encryption is not ensured in the pool that has the Mixedencryption setting. To manage the data encryption securely, use the poolwith an encryption setting of Enabled or Disabled.

• Hyphen(-): Pool which is created by external volumes.

Displays the pool threshold.User-Defined Threshold (%)

• Warning: Warning threshold is displayed.

• Depletion: Depletion threshold is displayed.

For a Fast Snap pool, a hyphen (-) is displayed for Depletion.

Displays subscription limit of the pool.Subscription Limit (%)For Fast Snap pool, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays whether the protect function for THP V-VOL is being enabled ordisabled. If the setting is enabled, when the pool-VOL is blocked, THP V-VOL

Protect V-VOLs when I/O fails toBlocked Pool VOL

is protected from reading and writing requests. And at the same instant, theaccess attribute of the THP V-VOL is changed to the Protect attribute.A hyphen appears if the pool corresponds with one of following:

• Data Retention is not installed.

• Pool type is the type other than THP or Smart.

Displays whether the protect function for THP V-VOL is being enabled ordisabled. If the setting is enabled, when the pool usage reaches the full size,

Protect V-VOLs when I/O fails to FullPool

THP V-VOL is protected from reading and writing requests. And at the same

Create Pools wizard 439

Page 440: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

instant, the access attribute of the THP V-VOL is changed to the Protectattribute.A hyphen appears if the pool corresponds with one of following:

• Data Retention is not installed.

• Pool type is the type other than THP or Smart.

Displays the number of pool-VOLs.Number of Pool VOLs

If Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF is enabled, Auto or Manual for performancemonitoring and tier relocation is displayed. If Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF isdisabled, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Tier Management

Displays the cycle of performance monitoring and tier relocation. If Smart Tiersor Smart Tiers MF is disabled, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Cycle Time

Displays the time zone of performance monitoring when 24 Hours is selectedas the Cycle Time. If Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF is disabled, a hyphen (-)is displayed.

Monitoring Period

If the continuous mode is enabled, Continuous Mode is displayed. If the periodmode is enabled, Period Mode is displayed.

Monitoring Mode

Displays the page relocation speed: 1(Slowest), 2(Slower), 3(Standard),4(Faster), or 5(Fastest). If Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF is disabled, a hyphen(-) is displayed.

Relocation speed

Displays the information of the buffer space for new page assignment to eachtier.

Buffer Space for New pageassignment (%)

Tier 1: If you make the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function available, thebuffer space for new page assignment to tier 1 is displayed. If you make theSmart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function unavailable, a hyphen (-) is displayed.Tier 2: If you make the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function available, andtier 2 exists, the buffer space for new page assignment to tier 2 is displayed.If you make the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function unavailable, or tier 2does not exist, a hyphen (-) is displayed.Tier 3: If you make the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function available, andtier 3 exists, the buffer space for new page assignment to tier 3 is displayed.If you make the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function unavailable, or tier 3does not exist, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays the information of the buffer space for tier relocation to each tier.Buffer Space for Tier relocation (%)Tier 1: If you make the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function available, thebuffer space for tier relocation to tier 1 is displayed. If you make the SmartTiers or Smart Tiers MF function unavailable, a hyphen (-) is displayed.Tier 2: If you make the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function available, andtier 2 exists, the buffer space for tier relocation to tier 2 is displayed. If youmake the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function unavailable, or tier 2 doesnot exist, a hyphen (-) is displayed.Tier 3: If you make the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function available, andtier 3 exists, the buffer space for tier relocation to tier 3 is displayed. If youmake the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function unavailable, or tier 3 doesnot exist, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays the Pool Properties window when a row is selected, and shows theerror window when a row is not selected or multiple rows are selected.

Detail

Deletes the pool selected in the Selected Pools window.RemoveDisplays the error window when a row is not selected.

Next Task OptionClick Next to go to the task setting window.

440 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 441: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Create Pools confirmation windowConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

NOTE: If multiple tasks that are connected in one wizard are executed, this window shows allconfigured items of tasks. To show information of configured items other than this topic, clickBack to display related setting windows, and then click Help.

DescriptionItem

Displays the pool name and pool ID.Pool Name (ID)

Displays the RAID level. If multiple RAID levels exist in a pool, this field indicatesthat RAID levels are mixed. If all pool-VOLs are external volumes, a hyphen(-) is displayed.

RAID Level

Displays the pool capacity.Capacity

Displays the pool type.Pool TypeFor a Thin Provisioning pool, THP is displayed.For a Smart Tiers pool, Smart is displayed.For a Thin Provisioning MF pool, Mainframe THP is displayed.For a Smart Tiers MF pool, Mainframe Smart is displayed.For a pool being used for Real Time Smart Tier, Smart(Real Time Smart Tier)is displayed.For a pool being used for Real Time Smart Tier for Mainframe, MainframeSmart(Real Time Smart Tier) is displayed.For a pool of the data direct mapping attribute, THP (data direct mapping) isdisplayed.For a Fast Snap pool, FS is displayed.

Displays the data drive type and RPM. If multiple drive types or RPMs exist ina pool, this field indicates that drive types or RPMs are mixed. When the volume

Drive Type/RPM

Create Pools wizard 441

Page 442: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

is the external volume, Drive Type displays External Storage and the valueof the external LDEV tier rank.

Encryption: The encryption information of the pool.Encryption

• Enabled: Pool which is created by pool-VOLs whose encryption settingsare enabled.

• Disable: Pool which is created by pool-VOLs whose encryption settings aredisabled.

• Mixed: In the pool, pool-VOLs of which encryption settings are enabled anddisabled are intermixed.This status appears when two or more of following are specified aspool-VOLs:

◦ Volume encryption setting is enabled.

◦ Volume encryption setting is disabled.

◦ External volume

Caution: The data encryption is not ensured in the pool that has the Mixedencryption setting. To manage the data encryption securely, use the poolwith an encryption setting of Enabled or Disabled.

• Hyphen(-): Pool is created by external volumes.

Displays the pool threshold.User-Defined Threshold (%)

• Warning: Warning threshold is displayed.

• Depletion: Depletion threshold is displayed.

For a Fast Snap pool, a hyphen (-) is displayed for Depletion.

Displays the subscription limit.Subscription Limit (%)For Fast Snap pool, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays whether the protect function for THP V-VOL is being enabled ordisabled. If the setting is enabled, when the pool-VOL is blocked, THP V-VOL

Protect V-VOLs when I/O fails toBlocked Pool VOL

is protected from reading and writing requests. And at the same instant, theaccess attribute of the THP V-VOL is changed to the Protect attribute.A hyphen appears if the pool corresponds with one of the following:

• Data Retention is not installed.

• Pool type is other than THP or Smart.

Displays whether the protect function for THP V-VOL is being enabled ordisabled. If the setting is enabled when the pool usage reaches the full size,

Protect V-VOLs when I/O fails to FullPool

THP V-VOL is protected from reading and writing requests. At the same instant,the access attribute of the THP V-VOL is changed to the Protect attribute.A hyphen appears under these conditions:

• Data Retention is not installed.

• Pool type is other than THP or Smart.

Displays the number of pool-VOLs.Number of Pool VOLs

If Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF is enabled, Auto or Manual for performancemonitoring and tier relocation is displayed. If Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF isdisabled, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Tier Management

Displays the cycle of performance monitoring and tier relocation. If Smart Tiersor Smart Tiers MF is disabled, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Cycle Time

442 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 443: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays the time zone of performance monitoring when 24 Hours is selectedas the Cycle Time. If Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF is disabled, a hyphen (-)is displayed.

Monitoring Period

If the continuous mode is enabled, Continuous Mode is displayed. If the periodmode is enabled, Period Mode is displayed.

Monitoring Mode

Displays the page relocation speed: 1(Slowest), 2(Slower), 3(Standard),4(Faster), or 5(Fastest). If Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF is disabled, a hyphen(-) is displayed.

Relocation speed

Displays the information of the buffer space for new page assignment to eachtier.

Buffer Space for New pageassignment (%)

Tier 1: If you make the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function available, thebuffer space for new page assignment to tier 1 is displayed. If you make theSmart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function unavailable, a hyphen (-) is displayed.Tier 2: If you make the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function available, andtier 2 exists, the buffer space for new page assignment to tier 2 is displayed.If you make the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function unavailable, or tier 2does not exist, a hyphen (-) is displayed.Tier 3: If you make the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function available, andtier 3 exists, the buffer space for new page assignment to tier 3 is displayed.If you make the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function unavailable, or tier 3does not exist, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays the information of the buffer space for tier relocation to each tier.Buffer Space for Tier relocation (%)Tier 1: If you make the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function available, thebuffer space for tier relocation to tier 1 is displayed. If you make the SmartTiers or Smart Tiers MF function unavailable, a hyphen (-) is displayed.Tier 2: If you make the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function available, andtier 2 exists, the buffer space for tier relocation to tier 2 is displayed. If youmake the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function unavailable, or tier 2 doesnot exist, a hyphen (-) is displayed.Tier 3: If you make the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function available, andtier 3 exists, the buffer space for tier relocation to tier 3 is displayed. If youmake the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function unavailable, or tier 3 doesnot exist, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays the Pool Properties window when a row is selected, and shows theerror window when a row is not selected or multiple rows are selected.

Detail

Expand Pool wizardExpand Pool window

Use this window to add LDEVs to a pool to expand the pool to increase pool capacity.

Expand Pool wizard 443

Page 444: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

The Drive Type/RPM of the selected pool or Mixable is displayed. When thevolume is the external volume, Drive Type displays External Storage.

Drive Type/RPM

Set the RAID level of the selected pool. If the level is not set, Mixable appears.If External Storage is selected in the Drive Type/RPM field, a hyphen (-) isdisplayed.

RAID Level

Opens the Select Pool VOLs window.Select Pool VOLs

Total number of the pool-VOLs selected for this pool.Total Selected Pool Volumes

Total capacity of the pool-VOLs selected for this pool.Total Selected Capacity

Expand Pool confirmation windowConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

444 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 445: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected Pool table

DescriptionItem

Displays the pool name and pool ID.Pool Name (ID)

Selected Pool Volumes table

DescriptionItem

Displays LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Displays the LDEV name.LDEV Name

Displays the pool-VOL capacity.Capacity

Displays the parity group ID.Parity Group ID

Displays RAID level. If a pool-VOL is an external volume, a hyphen (-) isdisplayed.

RAID Level

Displays the data drive type and RPM. When the volume is the external volume,Drive Type displays External Storage and the value of the external LDEV tierrank.

Drive Type/RPM

Displays the emulation type.Emulation Type

For the external volume, this item is displayed as enabled or disabled. If theLDEV is not an external volume, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Cache Mode

Attribute of the volume indicating how the LDEV is being used.AttributeData Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

Displays information about the capacity virtualization of the parity group thatis created of LDEVs

Capacity Virtualization

Enabled: The capacity virtualization of the parity group is enabled.Disabled: The capacity virtualization of the parity group is disabled.Hyphen (-): The parity group with the capacity virtualization is not supported.

Edit Pools wizardEdit Pools window

CAUTION: In one pool, if the setting operations are performed with two times or more to editmany setting items, wait until the primary task applies then perform the secondary operation. Ifthe secondary operation is performed while being applying of the primary task, the primary taskis canceled and the secondary task is applied to the storage system.

Edit Pools wizard 445

Page 446: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Select the check box, then Enable or Disable when using or not using SmartTiers or Smart Tiers MF.

Smart Pool

In Fast Snap, you cannot change the setting of this function.If TSE-VOL is assigned to the selected pool, the pool cannot be changed fromDisable to Enable.

Select the check box if you are using Real Time Smart Tier. If pool volumeswhose drive type is SSD are installed, this check box can be selected.

Real Time Smart Tier

In Fast Snap, you cannot change the setting of this function.

Specifies the performance monitoring, tier relocation, edit buffer space for newpage assignment, and buffer space for tier relocation if Smart Pool is set toEnable.

Options for Smart Pool

In Fast Snap, you cannot change the setting of this function.Select the Tier Management check box, and then set the tier management,the cycle time, and the monitoring period.

• Tier Management: Select Auto or Manual.

• Cycle Time: When selecting Auto in the Tier Management option, selectthe cycle of performance monitoring and tier relocation from the Cycle Timelist.

• Monitoring Period: When selecting 24 Hours in the Cycle Time list, specifythe time of starting and ending of performance monitoring in 00:00 to 23:59(default value). Take one or more hours between the starting time and the

446 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 447: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

ending time. If you specify the starting time later than the ending time, theperformance monitoring continues until the time when you specify as theending time on the next day.

Select the Monitoring Mode check box, and then set the monitoring mode.Monitoring Mode: Specify the monitoring mode. If you perform the tier relocationweighted to the past period monitoring result, select Continuous Mode. If youperform the tier relocation on the specified cycle, select Period Mode.Select the Relocation Speed check box. Then set the tier relocation speed.Relocation Speed: Specify the page relocation speed when tier relocation isperformed. You can set the speed to: 1(Slowest), 2(Slower), 3(Standard),4(Faster), or 5(Fastest).Select the Buffer Space for New page assignment check box, and then set thebuffer space for new page assignment.Buffer Space for New page assignment: Enter an integer value from 0 to 50as the percentage (%) to set for tier 1, tier 2, and tier 3. If there is no tier, youcannot set this item.Select the Buffer Space for Tier relocation check box, and then set the bufferspace for tier relocation.Buffer Space for Tier relocation: Enter an integer value from 2 to 40 as thepercentage (%) to set for tier 1, tier 2, and tier 3.If the check box is not selected, you cannot set this item. You must set all itemsif you change the pool setting from Thin Provisioning (or Thin Provisioning MF)to Smart Tiers (or Smart Tiers MF) or Real Time Smart Tier (or Real TimeSmart Tier for Mainframe).If the check box is selected, you cannot collapse the Options for Smart Poolfield.

Select the check box, then select Enable or Disable for the data direct mappingattribute. This item can be enabled if the pool type is Thin Provisioning and the

Data Direct Mapping

multi tier function is disabled. However, depending on the selected pool, theEnable or Disable cannot be selected. See following:

• Case both of Enable and Disable are inactive if one of following is satisfied:

Smart Pool is set to Enable.◦◦ Fast Snap pool is selected.

◦ Thin Provisioning for Mainframe pool is selected.

◦ Smart Tiers for Mainframe pool is selected.

• Case of Enable is inactive: In the selected pool, THP V-VOL which is notrelated to LDEV of the data direct mapping, is created.

• Case of Disable is inactive: In the selected pool, LDEV of the data directmapping exists.

Select the Subscription Limit check box, and then enter the subscription limit(%). In Fast Snap, you cannot change the setting of this function.

Subscription Limit

• If this field is blank, the subscription is set to be unlimited.

• For an open system, use blank or a value in the following range:(Total V-VOL capacity including the control information / pool capacity) *100(%) +1 to 65534(%)

• For a mainframe system, use blank or a value in the following range:(Total V-VOL capacity / pool capacity) * 100(%) +1 to 65534(%)

Edit Pools wizard 447

Page 448: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

• For the open system, when the current subscription setting is unlimited andthe value calculated by the following formula exceeds 65534, you cannotconfigure the subscription limit.((Total V-VOL capacity including the control information / pool capacity) *100)

• For the mainframe system, when the current subscription setting is unlimitedand the value calculated by the following formula exceeds 65534, you cannotconfigure the subscription limit.((Total V-VOL capacity / pool capacity) * 100)

• If the check box is not selected, the subscription limit is disabled.

Select the Pool Name check box, and then enter the pool name.Pool Name

• Prefix: Enter the alphanumeric characters, which are fixed characters of thehead of the pool name. The characters are case-sensitive.

• Initial Number: Enter the initial number following the prefix name, which canbe entered up to 9 digits.*

• You can enter up to the 32 characters including the initial number. The initialnumber must be 9 or less digits.

*When a pool is selected, the pool name appears in the Prefix text box bydefault. When multiple pools are selected, the initial number from the set numberto the maximum number of the digit number is automatically set.Example:

• When 1 is set in the Initial Number field, number 1 to 9 is automatically givento the pool name.

• When 08 is set in the Initial Number field, number 08 to 99 is automaticallygiven to the pool name.

• When 098 is set in the Initial Number field, number 098 to 999 isautomatically given to the pool name.

Select the check box, and then enter a threshold. The minimum threshold isthe sum of the mapped capacity rates, reserved capacity rates, and one percent(1%). The maximum threshold is 100%.

Warning Threshold

For Fast Snap, you cannot change the setting of this function:Check Warning Threshold and enter a threshold.You cannot set this item if the result of the following calculation exceeds 95:(used-pool-capacity/pool-capacity) * 100 (%)

Select the check box, and then enter a threshold. The minimum threshold isthe sum of the mapped capacity rates, reserved capacity rates, and one percent(1%). The maximum threshold is 100%.

Depletion Threshold

If you change the Fast Snap pool, you cannot set this item.

Select the check box, and then select Yes or No in the protect function for THPV-VOL. If this function is enabled, when the pool-VOL is blocked, THP V-VOL

Protect V-VOLs when I/O fails toBlocked Pool VOL

is protected from reading and writing requests. And at the same instant, theaccess attribute of the THP V-VOL is changed to the Protect attribute.However, if one of following is applicable, this check box goes inactive:

• Data Retention is not installed.

• Mainframe pools are selected.

Select the check box, and then select Yes or No in the protect function for THPV-VOL. If this function is enabled, when the pool usage reaches the full size,

Protect V-VOLs when I/O fails to FullPool

THP V-VOL is protected from reading and writing requests. And at the sameinstant, the access attribute of the THP V-VOL is changed to the Protectattribute.

448 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 449: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

However, if one of following is applicable, this check box goes inactive:

• Data Retention is not installed.

• Mainframe pools are selected.

CAUTION: If you want to change multiple parameters for a pool two or more times, wait untilthe current task finishes, and then change the next settings. If you attempt to change settingsbefore the current task finishes, only the settings in the next task will be applied, so the resultmight be different from what you expected.

Edit Pools confirmation windowConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

DescriptionItem

Displays the pool name and pool ID.Pool Name (ID)

Displays the RAID level. If multiple RAID levels exist in a pool, this field indicatesthat RAID levels are mixed. If all pool-VOLs are external volumes, a hyphen(-) is displayed.

RAID Level

Displays the pool capacity.Capacity

Displays the pool type.Pool TypeFor a Thin Provisioning pool, THP is displayed.For a Smart Tiers pool, Smart is displayed.For a Thin Provisioning MF pool, Mainframe THP is displayed.For a Smart Tiers MF pool, Mainframe Smart is displayed.For a pool being used for Real Time Smart Tier, Smart(Real Time Smart Tier)is displayed.For a pool being used for Real Time Smart Tier for Mainframe, MainframeSmart(Real Time Smart Tier) is displayed.For a pool of the data direct mapping attribute, THP (data direct mapping) isdisplayed.For a Fast Snap pool, FS is displayed.

Displays the data drive type and RPMs. If multiple drive types or RPMs existin a pool, this field indicates Mixed. When the volume is the external volume,

Drive Type/RPM

Drive Type displays External Storage and the value of the external LDEV tierrank. If all pool-VOLs are external volumes, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays the pool threshold.User-Defined Threshold (%)

• Warning: Warning threshold is displayed.

• Depletion: Depletion threshold is displayed.

For a Fast Snap pool, a hyphen (-) is displayed for Depletion.

Displays the subscription limit.Subscription Limit (%)For Fast Snap pool, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays whether the protect function for THP V-VOL is being enabled ordisabled. If the setting is enabled, when the pool-VOL is blocked, THP V-VOL

Protect V-VOLs when I/O fails toBlocked Pool VOL

is protected from reading and writing requests. And at the same instant, theaccess attribute of the THP V-VOL is changed to the Protect attribute.

Edit Pools wizard 449

Page 450: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

A hyphen appears if the pool corresponds with one of the following:

• Data Retention is not installed.

• Pool type is other than THP or Smart.

Displays whether the protect function for THP V-VOL is being enabled ordisabled. If the setting is enabled, when the pool usage reaches the full size,

Protect V-VOLs when I/O fails to FullPool

THP V-VOL is protected from reading and writing requests. And at the sameinstant, the access attribute of the THP V-VOL is changed to the Protectattribute.A hyphen appears if the pool corresponds with one of the following:

• Data Retention is not installed.

• Pool type is other than THP or Smart.

Displays the number of pool-VOLs.Number of Pool VOLs

If Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF is enabled, Auto or Manual for performancemonitoring and tier relocation is displayed. If Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF isdisabled, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Tier Management

Displays the cycle of performance monitoring and tier relocation. If Smart Tiersor Smart Tiers MF is disabled, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Cycle Time

Displays the time zone of performance monitoring when 24 Hours is selectedas the Cycle Time. If Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF is disabled, a hyphen (-)is displayed.

Monitoring Period

If the continuous mode is enabled, Continuous Mode is displayed. If the periodmode is enabled, Period Mode is displayed.

Monitoring Mode

Displays the page relocation speed: 1(Slowest), 2(Slower), 3(Standard),4(Faster), or 5(Fastest). If Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF is disabled, a hyphen(-) is displayed.

Relocation speed

Displays the information of the buffer space for new page assignment to eachtier.

Buffer Space for New pageassignment (%)

Tier 1: If you make the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function available, thebuffer space for new page assignment to tier 1 is displayed. If you make theSmart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function unavailable, a hyphen (-) is displayed.Tier 2: If you make the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function available, andtier 2 exists, the buffer space for new page assignment to tier 2 is displayed.If you make the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function unavailable, or tier 2does not exist, a hyphen (-) is displayed.Tier 3: If you make the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function available, andtier 3 exists, the buffer space for new page assignment to tier 3 is displayed.If you make the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function unavailable, or tier 3does not exist, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays the information of the buffer space for tier relocation to each tier.Buffer Space for Tier relocation (%)Tier 1: If you make the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function available, thebuffer space for tier relocation to tier 1 is displayed. If you make the SmartTiers or Smart Tiers MF function unavailable, a hyphen (-) is displayed.Tier 2: If you make the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function available, andtier 2 exists, the buffer space for tier relocation to tier 2 is displayed. If youmake the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function unavailable, or tier 2 doesnot exist, a hyphen (-) is displayed.Tier 3: If you make the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function available, andtier 3 exists, the buffer space for tier relocation to tier 3 is displayed. If youmake the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF function unavailable, or tier 3 doesnot exist, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

450 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 451: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Delete Pools wizardDelete Pools window

DescriptionItem

Displays the pool name and pool ID.Pool Name (ID)

Displays the RAID level.RAID LevelIf multiple RAID levels exist in a pool, this field indicates that RAID levels aremixed. If all pool-VOLs are external volumes, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays the pool capacity.Capacity

Displays the pool type.Pool TypeFor a Thin Provisioning pool, THP is displayed.For a Smart Tiers pool, Smart is displayed.For a Thin Provisioning MF pool, Mainframe THP is displayed.For a Smart Tiers MF pool, Mainframe Smart is displayed.For a pool being used for Real Time Smart Tier, Smart(Real Time Smart Tier)is displayed.For a pool being used for Real Time Smart Tier for Mainframe, MainframeSmart(Real Time Smart Tier) is displayed.For a pool of the data direct mapping attribute, THP (data direct mapping) isdisplayed.For a Fast Snap pool, FS is displayed.

Displays the data drive type and RPM of the pool. If multiple drive types orRPMs exist in a pool, this field indicates that drive types or RPMs are mixed.

Drive Type/RPM

When the volume is the external volume,Drive Type displaysExternal Storageand the value of the external LDEV tier rank.

Displays the pool threshold.User-Defined Threshold (%)

• Warning: Warning threshold is displayed.

• Depletion: Depletion threshold is displayed.

For a Fast Snap pool, a hyphen (-) is displayed for Depletion.

Delete Pools wizard 451

Page 452: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays the number of pool-VOLs.Number of Pool VOLs

Displays the Pool Properties window when a row is selected, and shows theerror window when a row is not selected or multiple rows are selected.

Detail

Next Task OptionClick Next to go to the task setting window.

Delete Pools confirmation windowConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

NOTE: If multiple tasks that are connected in one wizard are executed, this window shows allconfigured items of tasks. To show information of configured items other than this topic, clickBack to display related setting windows, and then click Help.

DescriptionItem

Displays the pool name and pool ID.Pool Name (ID)

Displays the RAID level.RAID LevelIf multiple RAID levels exist in a pool, this field indicates that RAID levels aremixed. If all pool-VOLs are external volumes, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays the pool capacity.Capacity

Displays the pool type.Pool TypeFor a Thin Provisioning pool, THP is displayed.For a Smart Tiers pool, Smart is displayed.For a Thin Provisioning MF pool, Mainframe THP is displayed.For a Smart Tiers MF pool, Mainframe Smart is displayed.

452 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 453: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

For a pool being used for Real Time Smart Tier, Smart(Real Time Smart Tier)is displayed.For a pool being used for Real Time Smart Tier for Mainframe, MainframeSmart(Real Time Smart Tier) is displayed.For a pool of the data direct mapping attribute, THP (data direct mapping) isdisplayed.For a Fast Snap pool, FS is displayed.

Displays the data drive type and RPM. If multiple drive types or RPMs exist ina pool, this field indicates that drive types or RPMs are mixed. When the volume

Drive Type/RPM

is the external volume, Drive Type displays External Storage and the valueof the external LDEV tier rank.

Displays the pool threshold.User-Defined Threshold (%)

• Warning: Warning threshold is displayed.

• Depletion: Depletion threshold is displayed.

For a Fast Snap pool, a hyphen (-) is displayed for Depletion.

Displays the number of pool-VOLs.Number of Pool VOLs

Displays the Pool Properties window when a row is selected, and shows theerror window when a row is not selected or multiple rows are selected.

Detail

NOTE: Information in this topic assumes that only a single task is executed. If multiple tasksare executed, this window displays all configuration items. To check information of a configurationitem, click Back to return to each configuration window, and then click Help.

Expand V-VOLs wizardExpand V-VOLs window

Use this wizard to expand the V-VOLs to the defined final capacity of the virtual volumes.

Expand V-VOLs wizard 453

Page 454: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Select this check box when you specify the total capacity of V-VOL.Specify total capacity

Select this check box when you specify the additional capacity of V-VOL.Specify additional capacity

Select this check box if you want to offset the specified LDEV capacity byboundary.

Offset boundary

Specify the V-VOL (LDEV) capacity within the range of values indicated belowthe text box.

Text Box

Expand V-VOLs confirmation windowConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

454 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 455: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Displays the LDEV name.LDEV Name

Displays the pool name and pool ID.Pool Name (ID)

Displays the emulation type.Emulation Type

Displays the capacity of the LDEV.Capacity

• Current: Displays the capacity before expanding the volume.

• Assigned: Displays the capacity that is derived by the current valuesubtracted from the final value. The value might not be exact because thesize is displayed with two decimal places.

• Final: Displays the capacity after expanding the volume.

Displays the LDEV type. In this case, THP is displayed.Provisioning Type

Displays the attribute of the LDEV.AttributeCommand Device: Command device.TSE: TSE-VOL.Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

Displays the status of the setting for the full allocation in a pool associated withthe V-VOL.

Full Allocation

• Enable: Full allocation of all THP V-VOL pages is performed.

• Disable: Full allocation of all THP V-VOL pages is not performed.

Expand V-VOLs wizard 455

Page 456: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Restore Pools window

DescriptionItem

Displays the pool name and pool ID.Pool Name (ID)

Displays the RAID level.RAID LevelIf multiple RAID levels exist in a pool, this field indicates that RAID levels aremixed. If all pool-VOLs are external volumes, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays the pool capacity. If the pool is blocked and pool-VOLs that belongto the pool cannot be identified, 0 is displayed.

Capacity

Displays the pool type.Pool TypeFor a Thin Provisioning pool, THP is displayed.For a Smart Tiers pool, Smart is displayed.For a Thin Provisioning MF pool, Mainframe THP is displayed.For a Smart Tiers MF pool, Mainframe Smart is displayed.For a pool being used for Real Time Smart Tier, Smart(Real Time Smart Tier)is displayed.For a pool being used for Real Time Smart Tier for Mainframe, MainframeSmart(Real Time Smart Tier) is displayed.For a pool of the data direct mapping attribute, THP (data direct mapping) isdisplayed.For a Fast Snap pool, FS is displayed.

Displays the data drive type and RPM. If multiple drive types or RPMs exist ina pool, this field indicates that drive types or RPMs are mixed. When the volume

Drive Type/RPM

is the external volume, Drive Type displays External Storage and the valueof the external LDEV tier rank.

Displays the pool threshold.User-Defined Threshold (%)

• Warning: Warning threshold is displayed.

• Depletion: Depletion threshold is displayed.

For a Fast Snap pool, a hyphen (-) is displayed for Depletion.

Displays the number of pool-VOLs.Number of Pool VOLsIf the pool is blocked and pool-VOLs that belong to the pool cannot be identified,0 is displayed.

456 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 457: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Shrink Pool window

Estimated Result of Shrinking table

DescriptionItem

Displays the pool name and pool ID.Pool Name (ID)

Displays the pool threshold.User-Defined Threshold (%)

• Warning: Warning threshold is displayed.

• Depletion: Depletion threshold is displayed.

For a Fast Snap pool, a hyphen (-) is displayed for Depletion.

Displays the capacity before and after shrinking.Capacity(Used/Total)As for the pool comprised of pool volumes assigned by the capacityvirtualization-enabled parity groups, the writable capacity may be smaller thanthe displayed capacity.

• Before Shrinking: Displays the sum of the mapped capacity and the reservedpage capacity, the total capacity before shrinking the pool, and the poolusage rates.

• After Shrinking: Displays the sum of the mapped capacity and the reservedpage capacity, the total capacity after shrinking the pool, and the pool usagerates.

Displays the capacity before and after shrinking.Physical Capacity (Used/Total)

• Before Shrinking: For the pool of containing the pool- VOL which supportsthe capacity virtualization, this item displays the total capacity, the usedcapacity, and the usage percentages. The capacity is the capacity reserved

Shrink Pool window 457

Page 458: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

for writing data in the pool. If the capacity virtualization is not supported, ahyphen (-) appears.

• After Shrinking: For the pool comprised of pool volumes supporting capacityvirtualization, this item displays the total capacity, the used capacity, andthe usage percentages. The capacity is the capacity reserved for writingdata in the pool. If the capacity virtualization is not supported, a hyphen (-)appears.

Selected Pool Volumes table

DescriptionItem

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Displays the LDEV name.LDEV Name

Displays the parity group ID.Parity Group ID

Displays the emulation type.Emulation Type

Displays the pool-VOL capacity.Capacity

Attribute of the volume indicating how the LDEV is being used. Pool VOL: LDEVwith pool-VOL Data Direct Mapping: LDEV with data direct mapping attribute.Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

Attribute

Displays the information about the Accelerated Compression of the parity groupwhich is created of LDEVs.

Accelerated Compression

Enabled: The Accelerated Compression of the parity group is enabled.Disabled: The Accelerated Compression of the parity group is disabled.Hyphen (-): The parity group of which the Accelerated Compression is notsupported.

Displays the information that LDEV is allocated on the virtual area or thephysical area. If the Accelerated Compression is enabled, LDEVs are initially

Virtualization Space Used

allocated on the physical area, then LDEVs are allocated on the virtual area.This item displays whether the area of which LDEV is allocated is the virtualarea or the physical area.Yes: LDEV is allocated in the virtual area.No: LDEV is allocated in the physical area.

458 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 459: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Stop Shrinking Pools window

DescriptionItem

Displays the pool name and pool ID.Pool Name (ID)

Displays the RAID level.RAID LevelIf multiple RAID levels exist in a pool, this field indicates that RAID levels aremixed. If all pool-VOLs are external volumes, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays the pool capacity.Capacity

Displays the pool type.Pool TypeFor a Thin Provisioning pool, THP is displayed.For a Smart Tiers pool, Smart is displayed.For a Thin Provisioning MF pool, Mainframe THP is displayed.For a Smart Tiers MF pool, Mainframe Smart is displayed.For a pool being used for Real Time Smart Tier, Smart(Real Time Smart Tier)is displayed.For a pool being used for Real Time Smart Tier for Mainframe, MainframeSmart(Real Time Smart Tier) is displayed.For a pool of the data direct mapping attribute, THP (data direct mapping) isdisplayed.For a Fast Snap pool, FS is displayed.

Displays the data drive type and RPM. If multiple drive types or RPMs exist ina pool, this field indicates that drive types or RPMs are mixed. When the volume

Drive Type/RPM

is the external volume, Drive Type displays External Storage and the valueof the external LDEV tier rank.

Stop Shrinking Pools window 459

Page 460: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays the pool threshold.User-Defined Threshold (%)

• Warning: Warning threshold is displayed.

• Depletion: Depletion threshold is displayed.

For a Fast Snap pool, a hyphen (-) is displayed for Depletion.

Displays the number of pool-VOLs.Number of Pool VOLs

Displays the Pool Properties window when a row is selected, and shows theerror window when a row is not selected or multiple rows are selected.

Detail

Complete SIMs window

DescriptionItem

Confirm the settings, type a unique task name or accept the default, and thenclick Apply.

Task Name

A task name is case-sensitive and can be up to 32 ASCII letters, numbers, andsymbols. The default is <date>-<window-name>.

460 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 461: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Select Pool VOLs windowUse this window to add pool-VOLs to a pool. Up to 1024 volumes can be added including thevolumes already in the pool. Only the LDEVs assigned to the logged-on user are available.• Up to three different drive types of pool-VOLs can be registered in the same pool.

Available Pool Volumes table

Select Pool VOLs window 461

Page 462: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Only the LDEVs assigned to the user are displayed.

DescriptionItem

Displays the LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Displays the LDEV name.LDEV Name

Displays the pool-VOL capacity.Capacity

Displays the parity group ID.Parity Group ID

Displays the RAID level. If an LDEV is an external volume, a hyphen (-) isdisplayed.

RAID Level

Displays the data drive type and RPM. When the volume is the external volume,Drive Type displays External Storage.

Drive Type/RPM

Displays the emulation type.Emulation Type

Displays the type of the LDEV.Provisioning TypeBasic: Internal volume.External: External volume.

Attribute of the volume indicating how the LDEV is being used.AttributeData Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

For the external volume, the item is displayed as enabled or disabled. If theLDEV is not an external volume, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Cache Mode

Displays the information about parity group encryption.Encryption

• Enable: Encryption setting of a parity group in which the LDEV is placed isenabled. Or the pool-VOL which is enabled of the encryption setting.

• Disable: Encryption setting of a parity group (or a pool) in which the LDEVis placed is disabled. Or the pool-VOL which is enabled of the encryptionsetting.

• Mixed: Pool-VOLs with enabled encryption settings and pool-VOLs withdisabled encryption settings are intermixed in the pool in which the LDEVis placed.Caution: The data encryption is not ensured in the pool that has the Mixedencryption setting. To manage the data encryption securely, use the poolwith an encryption setting of Enabled or Disabled.

• Hyphen(-):External volume.

Displays information about the capacity virtualization of the parity group thatis created of LDEVs.

Capacity Virtualization

Enabled: The capacity virtualization of the parity group is enabled.Disabled: The capacity virtualization of the parity group is disabled.Hyphen (-): The parity group with the capacity virtualization is not supported.

Displays the resource group names and IDs of the LDEV. The ID is providedin parentheses.

Resource Group Name (ID)

External LDEV Tier RankSpecify the tier rank of the external volume. If there is no external volume in the Available PoolVolumes table or Selected Pool Volumes table, you cannot select this option.

462 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 463: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

AddWhen you select a row in theAvailable Pool Volumes table and clickAdd, the selected pool-VOLis added to the Selected Pool Volumes table.

NOTE: Up to 1,024 volumes can be added including the volumes already in the pool.When adding a volume to the pool for which Smart Pool is enabled, note the following:For a pool, you can add volumes whose Drive Type/RPM settings are the same and whoseRAID Levels are different. For example, you can add the following volumes to the same pool:• Volume whose Drive Type/RPM is SAS/15K and whose RAID Level is 5 (3D+1P)• Volume whose Drive Type/RPM is SAS/15K and whose RAID Level is 5 (7D+1P)

NOTE: For details about adding LDEVs carved from the capacity virtualization-enabled paritygroups, see “Guidelines for creating a pool when capacity virtualization is enabled” (page 39).

RemoveWhen you select a row in Selected Pool Volumes table and clickRemove, the selected pool-VOLis removed from the Selected Pool Volumes table.

Selected Pool Volumes table

DescriptionItem

Displays the LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Displays the LDEV name.LDEV Name

Displays the pool-VOL capacity.Capacity

Displays the parity group ID.Parity Group ID

Displays the RAID level. If an LDEV is an external volume, a hyphen (-) isdisplayed.

RAID Level

Select Pool VOLs window 463

Page 464: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays the data drive type and RPM. When the volume is the external volume,Drive Type displays External Storage.

Drive Type/RPM

Displays the tier rank of the external volume. If the volume is not an externalvolume, a hyphen(-) is displayed.

External LDEV Tier Rank

Displays the emulation type.Emulation Type

Displays the type of the LDEV.Provisioning TypeBasic: Internal volume.External: External volume.

Attribute of the volume indicating how the LDEV is being used.AttributeData Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

For the external volume, this item is displayed as enabled or disabled. If theLDEV is not an external volume, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Cache Mode

Displays the information about parity group encryption.Encryption

• Enable: Encryption setting of a parity group in which the LDEV is placed isenabled. Or the pool-VOL which is enabled of the encryption setting.

• Disable: Encryption setting of a parity group (or a pool) in which the LDEVis placed is disabled. Or the pool-VOL which is enabled of the encryptionsetting.

• Mixed: Pool-VOLs with enabled encryption settings and pool-VOLs withdisabled encryption settings are intermixed in the pool in which the LDEVis placed.Caution: The data encryption is not ensured in the pool that has the Mixedencryption setting. To manage the data encryption securely, use the poolwith an encryption setting of Enabled or Disabled.

• Hyphen(-):External volume.

Displays information about thecapacity virtualization of the parity group that iscreated of LDEVs.

Capacity Virtualization

Enabled: The capacity virtualization of the parity group is enabled.Disabled: The capacity virtualization of the parity group is disabled.Hyphen (-): The parity group with the capacity virtualization is not supported.

Displays the resource group names and IDs of the LDEV. The ID is providedin parentheses.

Resource Group Name (ID)

464 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 465: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Reclaim Zero Pages window

DescriptionItem

Displays the LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Displays the LDEV name.LDEV Name

Displays the pool name and pool ID.Pool Name (ID)

Displays the emulation type.Emulation Type

Displays the capacity.Capacity

Displays the LDEV type. In this case, THP is displayed.Provisioning Type

Displays the attribute of the LDEV.AttributeCommand Device: Command device.Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

Reclaim Zero Pages window 465

Page 466: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Stop Reclaiming Zero Pages window

DescriptionItem

Displays the LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Displays the LDEV name.LDEV Name

Displays the pool name and pool ID.Pool Name (ID)

Displays the emulation type.Emulation Type

Displays the capacity.Capacity

Displays the LDEV type. In this case, THP is displayed.Provisioning Type

Displays the attribute of the LDEV.AttributeCommand Device: Command device.Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

Pool Property windowUse this window to view and change pool properties. Only the LDEVs assigned to the logged-onuser are available.

466 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 467: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Pool Properties table

DescriptionItem

Displays the pool name and pool ID.Pool Name (ID)

Displays the pool type.Pool TypeFor a Thin Provisioning pool, THP is displayed.For a Smart Tiers pool, Smart is displayed.For a Thin Provisioning MF pool, Mainframe THP is displayed.For a Smart Tiers MF pool, Mainframe Smart is displayed.For a pool being used for Real Time Smart Tier, Smart(Real Time Smart Tier)is displayed.For a pool being used for Real Time Smart Tier for Mainframe, MainframeSmart(Real Time Smart Tier) is displayed.For a pool of the data direct mapping attribute, THP (data direct mapping) isdisplayed.For a Fast Snap pool, FS is displayed.

Displays the pool capacity.CapacityAs for the pool comprised of pool volumes assigned by the capacityvirtualization-enabled parity groups, the writable capacity may be smaller thanthe displayed capacity.

Displays the user-defined threshold (Warning/Depletion).User-Defined Threshold(Warning/Depletion)

Displays the subscription limit.Subscription LimitFor a Fast Snap pool, a hyphen (-) is displayed for Current or Limit.

Displays the RAID level. If multiple RAID levels exist in a pool, this field indicatesthat RAID levels are mixed. If all pool-VOLs are external volumes, a hyphen(-) is displayed.

RAID Level

Displays the encryption information of the pool:Encryption

• Enable: Pool comprised of pool volumes with encryption settings are enabled.

• Disable: Pool comprised of pool volumes with encryption settings aredisabled.

Pool Property window 467

Page 468: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

• Mixed: In the pool, pool-VOLs of which encryption settings are enabled anddisabled are intermixed.This status appears when two or more of following are specified aspool-VOLs:

◦ Volume encryption setting is enabled.

◦ Volume encryption setting is disabled.

◦ External volume

Caution: The data encryption is not ensured in the pool that has the Mixedencryption setting. To manage the data encryption securely, use the poolwith an encryption setting of Enabled or Disabled.

• Hyphen(-): Pool is created by external volumes. Or pool is being blocked.

Displays LDEV ID and LDEV name of the pool-VOL which includes the systemarea. If you open this window from the Selected Pools table in the CreatePool window, a hyphen(-) is displayed.

Pool VOL with System Area (Name)

Pool Volumes tableOnly the LDEVs assigned to the user are displayed.

DescriptionItem

Displays the LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Displays the LDEV name.LDEV Name

Displays the pool volumes capacity. If you open this window from the SelectedPools table in the Create Pool window, the LDEV capacity selected in theSelect Pool VOLs window is displayed.

Capacity

Displays the parity group ID.Parity Group ID

Displays the RAID level. If a pool-VOL is an external volume, a hyphen (-) isdisplayed.

RAID Level

Displays the tier ID. A hyphen (-) is displayed when selecting the pool for ThinProvisioning, Thin Provisioning MF, or Fast Snap.

Drive Type/RPM

Displays the tier ID. A hyphen (-) is displayed when you select a ThinProvisioning, Thin Provisioning MF or Fast Snap pool.

Tier ID

Displays the emulation type.Emulation Type

Displays the type of the LDEV.Provisioning TypeBasic: Internal volume.External: External volume.

Attribute of the volume indicating how the LDEV is being used.AttributeData Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

For the external volume, this item is displayed as enabled or disabled. If theLDEV is not an external volume, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Cache Mode

468 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 469: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays the information about parity group encryption:Encryption

• Enable: Encryption setting of a parity group in which the LDEV is placed isenabled. Or the pool-VOL which is enabled of the encryption setting.

• Disable: Encryption setting of a parity group (or a pool) in which the LDEVis placed is disabled. Or the pool-VOL which is enabled of the encryptionsetting.

• Mixed: Pool-VOLs with enabled encryption settings and pool-VOLs withdisabled encryption settings are intermixed in the pool in which the LDEVis placed.Caution: The data encryption is not ensured in the pool that has the Mixedencryption setting. To manage the data encryption securely, use the poolwith an encryption setting of Enabled or Disabled.

• Hyphen(-):External volume.

Displays information about the capacity virtualization of the parity group thatis created of LDEVs.

Capacity Virtualization

Enabled: The capacity virtualization of the parity group is enabled.Disabled: The capacity virtualization of the parity group is disabled.Hyphen (-): The parity group with the capacity virtualization is not supported.

Displays the resource group names and IDs of the LDEV. The ID is providedin parentheses.

Resource Group Name (ID)

View Tier Properties windowThis window shows tier properties and a performance graph.When the pool name (pool ID) appears in the graph banner, you are looking a pool information.When the LDEV name (LDEV ID) appears in the graph banner, you are looking at V-VOLinformation.

View Tier Properties window 469

Page 470: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

For poolsThe following tables list the View Tier Properties information.

When selecting Entire Pool or Tiering Policy

DescriptionItem

Select the following resource to display the performance graph.Entire Pool or Tiering Policy

• Entire Pool: Displays the performance graph of the entire pool.

• Tiering Policy: Displays the performance graph of the tiering policy.

Select the Tiering Policy.All(0), and from Level1(1) toLevel31(31) The performance graph that corresponds to the selected tiering policy appears.

Tier Properties table

DescriptionItem

Displays the pool name and ID.Pool Name (ID)

Displays the tier names: Tier1, Tier2, Tier3, and Total. Each column displaysinformation about the tier.

Tier name

Displays the data drive type and RPM of tier.Drive Type/RPM

470 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 471: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

If multiple types exist in a tier, Mixed is displayed. For an external volume,Drive Type displays External Storage with the value of the external LDEV tierrank.

Displays the following buffer spaces.Buffer Space

• New page assignment: Buffer spaces for new page assignment.

• Tier relocation: Buffer spaces for tier relocation.

Displays the capacity for the pool and each tier.Capacity

• Total: displays the total capacity of each tier and a pool.As for the pool comprised of pool volumes assigned by the capacityvirtualization-enabled parity groups, the writable capacity may be smallerthan the displayed capacity.

• Used [Used%]: Displays the percentage of the used capacity for the pooland each tier. The field is updated asynchronously with the Recent TierUtilization table and when the View Tier Properties window is opened.The Used Capacity of each tier can differ from the sum of the usedcapacities of all tiers.

• Tiering Policy: tiering policy name: Displays the used capacity size andpercentage related to the tieringpolicy of the pool and each tier. This itemdisplays when you make a Tiering Policy selection.

This item appears when selected of Entire Pool. In the tier 1 of containing thepool-VOL supporting capacity virtualization, the capacity which is assured of

Physical Capacity

the writing of data appears. Hyphens are displayed in Tier 2 column, Tier 3column, and Total column.

• Total: Displays the total capacity of tier 1.

• Used [Used%]: Displays the used capacity and percentage of the tier 1.

Displays the actual monitored average I/Os and percentages of each tier andentire pool for the period from the creating of the pool to the current state. This

Current Average Number of I/O(perHour)

item appears when selecting of Entire Pool. In addition, the number of I/Os isinitialized in cases of following, and then I/Os are counted again:

• When monitoring information collection is completed.

• When the number of tiers in a pool changes.

• When a tier location of the pool VOL changes by adding a pool VOL.

• When multi tier pools are enabled after being invalid.

• When the fixed monitoring information is calculated again.For details about cases that the fixed monitoring information is calculatedagain, see “Tier relocation rules, restrictions, and guidelines” (page 116).

Recent Tier Utilization (monitoring period) table

DescriptionItem

If a error occurs, a message appears.Header area

Displays the tier names: Tier1, Tier2, Tier3, and Total. Each column displaysinformation about the tier.

Tier name

Displays the percentage of progress in performance utilization processing.Performance Utilization

Displays the average number of I/Os in a pool and each tier.Average Number of I/Os (per Hour)Actual: Displays the actual monitored average I/Os and percentages for eachtier and a pool on on an hourly basis.* This item appears when selecting theEntire Pool option.

View Tier Properties window 471

Page 472: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Target: Displays the target average I/Os and percentages for each tier and apool after the tier determination calculation.* This item appears when selectingthe Entire Pool option.Tiering Policy: tiering policy name: Displays the average number of I/Os forthe pool and each tier that are related to the tiering-policy. This item displayswhen you make a Tiering Policy selection.*

* This field is updated when performance monitoring information is collected, asynchronously with Used Capacity(Used %). If ? is displayed, take the actions displayed in the header area of the Recent Tier Utilization table. If anerror message and countermeasure are not shown in the header area of the Recent Tier Utilization table, refreshthe window. If ? continues to display, call the Hewlett Packard Enterprise technical support.

Performance Graph

DescriptionItem

Displays the performance graph of the entire pool or tiering policy.Performance graph

If Entire Pool and the period mode of the monitoring mode are specified, thisitem appears. When this check box is selected, the performance graph appears.

Pool

The vertical scale of the performance graph indicates the average number ofI/Os on an hourly basis. The horizontal scale of the performance graph indicatesthe capacity.If there is no monitor data, this item does not appear.

If Entire Pool and the continuous mode of the monitoring mode are specified,this item appears. When this check box is selected, the performance graph

Pool(Weighted average)

appears. The vertical scale indicates the average number of I/Os on an hourlybasis. The number of I/Os is a weighted, averaged with the monitoring datafrom the past cycle weighted against the monitoring data from the current cycle.The horizontal scale indicates the capacity.If there is no monitor data, this item does not appear.

If Tiering Policy and the period mode of the monitoring mode are specified,this item appears. When the check box is selected, the performance graph

Policy

appears. The vertical scale of the performance graph indicates the averagenumber of I/Os on an hourly basis. The horizontal scale of the performancegraph indicates the capacity.If there is no monitor data, this item does not appear.

If Tiering Policy and the continuous mode of the monitoring mode are specified,this item appears. When the check box is selected, the performance graph

Policy(Weighted average)

appears. The vertical scale of the performance graph indicates the averagenumber of I/Os on an hourly basis. The horizontal scale of the performancegraph indicates the capacity.If there is no monitor data, this item does not appear.

Displays the performance graph of tier1. The vertical scale indicates the averagenumber of I/Os on an hourly basis. The horizontal scale indicates the capacity.

Tier1

If there is no monitor data in tier1, this item does not appear.

Displays the performance graph of tier2. The vertical scale indicates the averagenumber of I/Os on an hourly basis. The horizontal scale indicates the capacity.

Tier2

If there is no monitor data in tier2, this item does not appear.

Displays the performance graph of tier3. The vertical scale indicates the averagenumber of I/Os on an hourly basis. The horizontal scale indicates the capacity.

Tier3

If there is no monitor data in tier3, this item does not appear.

Displays the range in tier1.Tier1 range

472 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 473: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

If there is no monitor data in tier1, this item does not appear.

Displays the range in tier2.Tier2 rangeIf there is no monitor data in tier2, this item does not appear.

The following describes how to read the performance graph when it contains pool information.The vertical scale of the graph indicates an average number of I/Os by each hour and thehorizontal scale indicates capacity (GB) of the area where the I/Os are performed.The two lines in the graph indicate tier 1 range and tier 2 range. They are calculated when thecollection of performance monitoring has been completed (monitoring period is completed). Theyshow the boundary of each tier.A maximum of 127 dots is shown in the graph. The following information appears over a dot inthe graph depending on where the cursor is placed.• Capacities, average I/Os, and total I/Os appear if the cursor is placed on the dot of the Tier1,

Tier2, Tier3, Pool, or the Pool(Weighted average).• The lower value of the average I/Os appears if the cursor is placed on the dot of the Tier1

Range or the Tier2 Range.The following table describes these items.

DescriptionItem

The capacity (GB) of the area from the dot of the maximum value on the verticalscale to a specified dot. The capacity of the dot on the vertical scale is 0.00 GB.

Capacities

All I/Os are sorted into 127 sections. The average I/O is the representative I/Onumber assigned to each section, based on the definition of the storage system.By the total number of I/Os, the number of dots may be 127 or less.

Average I/Os

The total number of I/Os in the section from the dot of the maximum value on thevertical scale to a specified dot. The total I/Os is calculated using the average

Total I/Os

I/Os and capacities in the specified section. If the specified dot is on the verticalscale, the total I/Os is zero.

When no I/Os are in the lower tier with multiple tiers, the tier range line is placed at 0 on thevertical scale.For example, if the dot is placed far from the lower limit of the tier range, the lower limit levels ofthe Tier 1 Range and Tier 2 Range are adjusted to improve the visibility of the performancegraph. In this case, the value that is obtained by RAID Manager might not correspond with thevalue of the dot displayed in a performance graph.

For V-VOLsThe following table provides the View Tier Properties table information when LDEV informationis present.

Tier Properties table when selecting a THP V-VOL

DescriptionItem

Displays the combination of the LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Displays the LDEV name.LDEV name

Displays the tiering policy name and ID.Tiering Policy

Displays the new page assigned tier.New Page Assignment Tier

View Tier Properties window 473

Page 474: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays whether tier relocation is set to Enabled or Disabled.Tier Relocation

Displays the relocation priority.Relocation Priority

Displays the tier names: Tier1, Tier2, Tier3, and Total. Each column displaysinformation about the tier.

Tier name

Displays the data drive type and RPM of tier.Drive Type/RPMIf multiple types exist in a tier, Mixed is displayed. For an external volume,Drive Type displays External Storage with the value of the external LDEV tierrank.

Displays the total capacity of each tier and total capacity of the pool.Pool Capacity

Displays the percentage of the used capacity for the pool and each tier. Thefield is updated asynchronously with the Recent Tier Utilization table and

Used Capacity (Used %)

when the View Tier Propertieswindow is opened. The Used Capacity of eachtier might differ from the sum of the used capacities of all tiers.

Displays the actual monitored average I/Os and percentages of each tier andentire pool for the period from the creating of the THP V-VOL to the current

Current Average Number of I/O(perHour)

state. In addition, the number of I/Os is initialized in cases of following, andthen I/Os are counted again:

• When monitoring information collection is completed.

• When the number of tiers in a pool changes.

• When a tier location of the pool VOL changes by adding a pool VOL.

• When multi tier pools are enabled after being invalid.

• When the fixed monitoring information is calculated again.For details about cases that the fixed monitoring information is calculatedagain, see “Tier relocation rules, restrictions, and guidelines” (page 116).

Recent Tier Utilization (monitoring period) table

DescriptionItem

If a error occurs, a message appears.Header area

Displays the tier names: Tier1, Tier2, Tier3, and Total. Each column displaysinformation about the tier.

Tier name

Average Number of I/O (per Hour) • Displays the actual monitored average I/Os and percentages of each tierand a THP V-VOL on an hourly basis.*

• Target: Displays the target average I/Os and percentages of each tier anda THP V-VOL after the tier determination calculation.

* This field is updated when performance monitoring information is collected, asynchronously with Used Capacity(Used %). If ? is displayed, take the actions displayed in the header area of the Recent Tier Utilization table. If anerror message and countermeasure are not shown in the header area of the Recent Tier Utilization table, refreshthe window. If ? continues to display, call the Hewlett Packard Enterprise technical support.

Performance Graph

DescriptionItem

Displays the performance graph of the entire pool or tiering policy.Performance graph

If the period mode of the monitoring mode is specified, this item appears. Whenthis check box is selected, the performance graph appears. The vertical scale

Volume

474 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 475: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

of the performance graph indicates the average number of I/Os on an hourlybasis. The horizontal scale of the performance graph indicates the capacity.If there is no monitor data, this item does not appear.

If the continuous mode of the monitoring mode is specified, this item appears.When this check box is selected, the performance graph appears. The vertical

Volume(Weighted average)

scale indicates the average number of I/Os on an hourly basis. The number ofI/Os is a weighted, averaged with the monitoring data from the past cycleweighted against the monitoring data from the current cycle. The horizontalscale indicates the capacity.If there is no monitor data, this item does not appear.

Displays the performance graph of tier1. The vertical scale indicates the averagenumber of I/Os on an hourly basis. The horizontal scale indicates the capacity.

Tier1

If there is no monitor data in tier1, this item does not appear.

Displays the performance graph of tier2. The vertical scale indicates the averagenumber of I/Os on an hourly basis. The horizontal scale indicates the capacity.

Tier2

If there is no monitor data in tier2, this item does not appear.

Displays the performance graph of tier3. The vertical scale indicates the averagenumber of I/Os on an hourly basis. The horizontal scale indicates the capacity.

Tier3

If there is no monitor data in tier3, this item does not appear.

Displays the range in tier1.Tier1 rangeIf there is no monitor data in tier1, this item does not appear.

Displays the range in tier2.Tier2 rangeIf there is no monitor data in tier2, this item does not appear.

The following describes how to read the performance graph when LDEV information is presented.The vertical scale of the graph indicates an average number of I/Os by each hour and thehorizontal scale indicates a capacity, in GB, of the area where the I/Os are performed.The two lines in the graph indicate tier 1 range and tier 2 range. These ranges are calculatedwhen the collection of performance monitoring data is complete (monitoring period is completed).They show the boundary of each tier.A maximum of 127 dots is shown in the graph. The following information appears over a dot inthe graph depending on where the cursor is placed.• Capacities, average I/Os, and total I/Os appear if the cursor is placed on the dot of the Tier1,

Tier2, Tier3, Volume or the Volume(Weighted average).• The lower value of the average I/Os appears if the cursor is placed on the dot of the Tier1

Range or the Tier2 Range.The following table describes these items.

DescriptionItem

The capacity (GB) of the area from the dot of the maximum value on the verticalscale to a specified dot. The capacity of the dot on the vertical scale is 0.00 GB.

Capacities

All I/Os are sorted into 127 sections. The average I/O is the representative I/Onumber assigned to each section, based on the definition of the storage system.By the total number of I/Os, the number of dots may be 127 or less.

Average I/Os

The total number of I/Os in the section from the dot of the maximum value on thevertical scale to a specified dot. The total I/Os is calculated using the average

Total I/Os

View Tier Properties window 475

Page 476: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

I/Os and capacities in the specified section. If the specified dot is on the verticalscale, the total I/Os is zero.

When no I/Os are in the lower tier with multiple tiers, the tier range line is placed at 0 on thevertical scale.

Monitor Pools window

Selected Pools table

DescriptionItem

Displays the pool name and pool ID.Pool Name (ID)

Displays the number of pool-VOLs in the selected pool.Number of Pool VOLs

Displays the information about the pool capacity.Capacity

• Total: Total capacity of pool.Using Option, you can select unit of capacity.

◦ One block equals 512 bytes and one page equals 42 megabytes in apool capacity of Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, or Fast Snap.

◦ One block equals 512 bytes and one page equals 38 megabytes in apool capacity of Thin Provisioning MF or Smart Tiers MF.

• Mapped: Page capacity of the pool in which user data and control informationis stored.

• Mapped (%): Percentages of the page capacity of the pool that containsuser data and control information.Mapped (%) displays the value which is truncated after the decimal pointof the actual value.

For the pool of Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, or Fast Snap, a hyphen (-) isdisplayed if the unit of capacity is changed into Cylinder.

Displays the period of monitoring time as follows:Recent Monitor Datastart-time-end-timeIf the monitoring data is being obtained, only the starting time is displayed.

476 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 477: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

If the latest monitoring data does not exist, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Stop Monitoring Pools window

Selected Pools table

DescriptionItem

Displays the pool name and pool ID.Pool Name (ID)

Displays the number of pool-VOLs in the selected pool.Number of Pool VOLs

Displays the information about the pool capacity.Capacity

• Total: Total capacity of pool.Using Option, you can select unit of capacity.

◦ One block equals 512 bytes and one page equals 42 megabytes in apool capacity of Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, or Fast Snap.

◦ One block equals 512 bytes and one page equals 38 megabytes in apool capacity of Thin Provisioning MF or Smart Tiers MF.

• Mapped: Page capacity of the pool in which user data and control informationis stored.

• Mapped (%): Percentages of the page capacity of the pool that containsuser data and control information.Mapped (%) displays the value which is truncated after the decimal pointof the actual value.

For the pool of Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, or Fast Snap, a hyphen (-) isdisplayed if the unit of capacity is changed into Cylinder.

Displays the period of monitoring time as follows:Recent Monitor Datastart-time-end-timeIf the monitoring data is being obtained, only the starting time is displayed.If the latest monitoring data does not exist, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Stop Monitoring Pools window 477

Page 478: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Start Tier Relocation window

Selected Pools table

DescriptionItem

Displays the pool name and pool ID.Pool Name (ID)

Displays the number of pool-VOLs in the selected pool.Number of Pool VOLs

Displays the information about the pool capacity.Capacity

• Total: Total capacity of pool.Using Option, you can select unit of capacity.

◦ One block equals 512 bytes and one page equals 42 megabytes in apool capacity of Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, or Fast Snap.

◦ One block equals 512 bytes and one page equals 38 megabytes in apool capacity of Thin Provisioning MF or Smart Tiers MF.

• Mapped: Page capacity of the pool in which user data and control informationis stored.

• Mapped (%): Percentages of the page capacity of the pool that containsuser data and control information.Mapped (%) displays the value which is truncated after the decimal pointof the actual value.

For the pool of Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, or Fast Snap, a hyphen (-) isdisplayed if the unit of capacity is changed into Cylinder.

Displays the period of monitoring time as follows:Recent Monitor Datastart-time-end-timeIf the monitoring data is being obtained, only the starting time is displayed.If the latest monitoring data does not exist, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays the tier relocation speed: 1(Slowest), 2(Slower), 3(Standard), 4(Faster),or 5(Fastest)

Relocation Speed

478 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 479: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Stop Tier Relocation window

Selected Pools table

DescriptionItem

Displays the pool name and pool ID.Pool Name (ID)

Displays the number of pool-VOLs in the selected pool.Number of Pool VOLs

Displays the information about the pool capacity.Capacity

• Total: Total capacity of pool.Using Option, you can select unit of capacity.

◦ One block equals 512 bytes and one page equals 42 megabytes in apool capacity of Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, or Fast Snap.

◦ One block equals 512 bytes and one page equals 38 megabytes in apool capacity of Thin Provisioning MF or Smart Tiers MF.

• Mapped: Page capacity of the pool in which user data and control informationis stored.

• Mapped (%): Percentages of the page capacity of the pool that containsuser data and control information.Mapped (%) displays the value which is truncated after the decimal pointof the actual value.

For the pool of Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, or Fast Snap, a hyphen (-) isdisplayed if the unit of capacity is changed into Cylinder.

Displays the period of monitoring time as follows:Recent Monitor Datastart-time-end-timeIf the monitoring data is being obtained, only the starting time is displayed.If the latest monitoring data does not exist, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Displays the progress percentage of the tier relocation.Relocation Progress(%)0 to 99: The relocation is performed at the indicated percentage progression.100: The relocation operation is not in performed, or the relocation is complete.For details about the tier relocation, see the tier relocation log file.

Displays the tier relocation speed: 1(Slowest), 2(Slower), 3(Standard), 4(Faster),or 5(Fastest)

Relocation Speed

Stop Tier Relocation window 479

Page 480: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

View Pool Management Status window

Pool Management Status table

DescriptionItem

Displays the pool name and pool ID.Pool Name (ID)

Displays the pool type.Pool TypeFor a Thin Provisioning pool, THP is displayed.For a Smart Tiers pool, Smart is displayed.For a Thin Provisioning MF pool, Mainframe THP is displayed.For a Smart Tiers MF pool, Mainframe Smart is displayed.For a pool being used for Real Time Smart Tier, Smart(Real Time Smart Tier)is displayed.For a pool being used for Real Time Smart Tier for Mainframe, MainframeSmart(Real Time Smart Tier) is displayed.For a pool of the data direct mapping attribute, THP (data direct mapping) isdisplayed.For a Fast Snap pool, FS is displayed.

Displays the number of V-VOLs associated with the pool, and the maximumnumber of V-VOLs that can be associated with the pool.

Number of V-VOLs

If you select a Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, Thin Provisioning MF, or a SmartTiers MF pool, this item appears.If the pool with the data direct mapping attribute is selected, the number of theV-VOLs is displayed, then a hyphen appears for the maximum number ofV-VOLs which can associate with the pool.

Displays the number of primary volumes of Fast Snap pairs that are associatedwith the pool.

Number of Primary VOLs

480 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 481: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

If you select a Fast Snap pool, this item appears.

Displays the number of pool-VOLs set for the pool, and the maximum numberof pool-VOLs that can be set for the pool.

Number of Pool VOLs

If Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF is enabled, Auto or Manual of performancemonitoring and tier relocation is displayed. If Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF isdisabled, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Tier Management

Displays the monitoring mode that is set for the pool. If the continuous modeis enabled, Continuous Mode is displayed. If the period mode is enabled, Period

Monitoring Mode

Mode is displayed. If Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF is disabled, a hyphen (-)is displayed.

Displays the status of pool monitoring.Monitoring StatusIf monitoring is being performed, In Progress is displayed. A hyphen (-) isdisplayed other than this case.

Displays the tier relocation speed: 1(Slowest), 2(Slower), 3(Standard), 4(Faster),or 5(Fastest). Actual displays the measured value of the tier relocation capacityper second.

Relocation Speed/Actual

Displays the status and progress ratio of the pool management task beingperformed to the pool, and average progress ratio of each V-VOL in the pool.

Pool Management Task(Status/Progress)

Waiting for Rebalance: The rebalance process is being waited.Rebalancing: The rebalance process is being performed.Waiting for Relocation: The tier relocation process is being waited.Relocating: The tier relocation process is being performed.Waiting for Shrink: The pool shrinking process is being waited.Shrinking: The pool shrinking process is being performed.Blank:The pool management task is not being performed to the pool.The following values that are displayed in the Virtual Volume table or in thePrimary Volume table might not correspond with the value displayed for thisitem. This is because the progress of the pool management task is calculatedafter the progress of each V-VOL displayed in the Virtual Volume table or thePrimary Volume table is calculated.

• Pool Management Task - Status

• Pool Management Task - Progress(%)

For details about the tier relocation, see the tier relocation log file.

Displays the status of the tier relocation processing.Relocation ResultIn Progress: The status of Pool Management Task is Waiting forRelocation or Relocating.Completed: The tier relocation operation is not in progress, or the tier relocationis complete.Uncompleted (n% relocated): The tier relocation is suspended at the indicatedpercentage progression.

View Pool Management Status window 481

Page 482: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Hyphen (-): The pool is not a Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF pool.

Capacity • Used/Total: Displays the used and total pool capacity. If the pool consistsof multiple pool-VOLs, the sum of its capacities is displayed in the Totalfield.As for the pool comprised of pool volumes assigned by the capacityvirtualization-enabled parity groups, the writable capacity may be smallerthan the displayed capacity.

• Free + Reserved: Displays the sum of the free capacity and reservedcapacity, and displays the formatted pool capacity. If the pool consists ofmultiple pool-VOLs, the sum of its capacities is displayed in the Total field.

Virtual Volume tableIf you select a Thin Provisioning (including of the pool of the data direct mapping attribute), SmartTiers, Thin Provisioning MF, or a Smart Tiers MF pool, this table displays.

DescriptionItem

Displays the LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Displays the LDEV name.LDEV Name

Pool Management Task • Status: Displays the pool management task being performed to the pool.

Waiting for Rebalance: The rebalance process is being waited.◦◦ Rebalancing: The rebalance process is being performed.

◦ Waiting for Relocation: The tier relocation process is being waited.

◦ Relocating: The tier relocation process is being performed.

◦ Waiting for Shrink: The pool shrinking process is being waited.

◦ Shrinking: The pool shrinking process is being performed.

◦ Blank: The pool management task is not being performed to the pool.

• Progress(%): Displays V-VOL progress percentage (%) of the poolmanagement task being performed. A hyphen (-) is displayed when the poolmanagement task is not performed.

V-VOL Management Task • Status: Displays the V-VOL management task being performed to V-VOL.

Reclaiming Zero Pages: The zero page reclaim processing that is beingperformed.

◦ Waiting for Zero Page Reclaiming: The zero page reclaim processing

◦ Blank: The V-VOL management task is not being performed to V-VOL.

• Progress(%): Displays the progress percentages (%) of the V-VOLmanagement task being performed. A hyphen (-) is displayed when theV-VOL management task is not performed.

Displays the emulation type.Emulation Type

482 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 483: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays information about the V-VOL used capacity.Capacity

• Total: Displays the V-VOL capacity.

• Reserved: Displays the reserved page capacity of the V-VOL.The displayed value of Reserved might be larger than the displayed valueof Total due to following reasons:

◦ Reserved displays the sum of the used V-VOL capacity and the reservedpage capacity that is rounded up on each page.

◦ If the emulation type is 3390-A, the mapped capacity of V-VOL includesthe capacity of control cylinders (7 Cyl is required per 1,113 Cyl).

◦ The mapped capacity of V-VOL for Thin Provisioning includes the capacityof control information (168 MB is required per 3,145,548 MB).

• Used: Displays the sum of the mapped capacity and the reserved pagecapacity.The displayed value of Used might be larger than the displayed value ofTotal due to the following reasons:

◦ Used displays the sum of the mapped capacity and the reserved pagecapacity that is rounded up on each page.

◦ If the emulation type is 3390-A, the mapped capacity of V-VOL includesthe capacity of control cylinders (7 Cyl is required per 1,113 Cyl).

◦ The mapped capacity of THP V-VOL includes the capacity of the controlinformation (uses a maximum of 168 MB per 3,145,548 MB).

◦ THP V-VOL of the data direct mapping attribute includes the controlinformation (168 MB is used per 3,145,548 MB) and the capacity for onepage.If used capacity is referenced during I/O or copy processing by softwaresuch as Business Copy or Continuous Access Journal, the used capacitydisplayed might be different from the actual capacity even if the fullallocation is enabled on the V-VOL. This is caused by a gap betweenthe times that information is gathered about the mapped capacity andthe reserved capacity.

• Used(%): For the entire capacity of V-VOL, this item displays percentagesof the sum of the mapped capacity and the reserved capacity.

Displays the status of the setting for full allocation in a pool that are associatedwith the V-VOL.

Full Allocation

• Enable: Pages are reserved.

• Disable: Pages are not reserved.

Displays the tiering policy name and ID.Tiering PolicyAll(0): Policy in which all tiers of the pool are used.Level1(1) - Level5(5):Policy selected from levels 1 to 5 is set to the V-VOL.Level6(6) - Level31(31): Policy defined by the user and set to the V-VOL.Hyphen (-): V-VOL is not the V-VOL of Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF V-VOL.

Displays the new page assigned tier.New Page Assignment TierHigh: High is set to V-VOL.Middle: Middle is set to V-VOL.Low: Low is set to V-VOL.Hyphen (-): V-VOL is not the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF V-VOL.

View Pool Management Status window 483

Page 484: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays whether tier relocation is set to enable or disable. If the Smart Tiersor Smart Tiers MF V-VOL is not used, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Tier Relocation

Displays the relocation priority.Relocation PriorityPrioritized: The priority is set to V-VOL.Blank: The priority is not set to V-VOL.Hyphen (-): V-VOL is not the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF V-VOL or the tierrelocation function is disabled.

Displays the attribute of the LDEV.AttributeTSE: TSE-VOL.Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

Information about the virtual storage machine.Virtual Storage Machine

• Model / Serial Number: Model name and serial number of the virtual storagemachine that has LDEV.

• LDEV ID: Virtual LDEV ID. If a Virtual LDEV ID is not assigned to LDEV,this column is blank.

• Device Name: Virtual device name, which is a combination of the virtualemulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, and the virtual CVS attribute.Values of the virtual emulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, and virtualCVS attribute appear only for items that have been set. This column is blankwhen the virtual emulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, and virtualCVS attribute are not set. If the virtual CVS attribute is set, CVS is attachedas the suffix to the device name.

• SSID: Virtual SSID. If Virtual SSID is not set for LDEV, this column is blank.

• Attribute: Virtual LDEV attribute. If the attribute is not set for LDEV, thiscolumn is blank.

Primary Volumes table

DescriptionItem

Displays the LDEV identifier which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Displays the LDEV name.LDEV Name

Displays the pool management task being performed to the pool.Pool Management Task -- StatusWaiting for Rebalance: The rebalance process is being waited.Rebalancing: The rebalance process is being performed.Waiting for Shrink: The pool shrinking process is being waited.Shrinking: The pool shrinking process is being performed.Blank:The pool management task is not being performed to the pool.

Displays a progress percentage (%) of a pool management task beingperformed on each primary volume. A hyphen (-) is displayed when the poolmanagement task is not performed.

Pool Management Task -- Progress(%)

Displays the used pool capacity.Used Pool Capacity

484 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 485: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays the pool usage ratio.Pool Usage(%)

Information about the virtual storage machine.Virtual Storage Machine

• Model / Serial Number: Model name and serial number of the virtual storagemachine that has LDEV.

• LDEV ID: Virtual LDEV ID. If a Virtual LDEV ID is not assigned to LDEV,this column is blank.

• Device Name: Virtual device name, which is a combination of the virtualemulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, and the virtual CVS attribute.Values of the virtual emulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, and virtualCVS attribute appear only for items that have been set. This column is blankwhen the virtual emulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, and virtualCVS attribute are not set. If the virtual CVS attribute is set, CVS is attachedas the suffix to the device name.

• SSID: Virtual SSID. If Virtual SSID is not set for LDEV, this column is blank.

Edit External LDEV Tier Rank wizardEdit External LDEV Tier Rank window

Selected Pool Volumes table

DescriptionItem

Displays the combination of the LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Displays the LDEV name.LDEV Name

Displays the parity group ID.Parity Group ID

Displays the emulation type.Emulation Type

The usable capacity in the pool-VOL that is offset on the basis of the pageappears. For the pool-VOL with system area, the displayed capacity does notinclude the capacity of the management area.

Usable Capacity

Displays the tier rank of the external volume.External LDEV Tier Rank

Changes the tier rank of the selected pool-VOL to High, Middle, or Low.Change

Edit External LDEV Tier Rank wizard 485

Page 486: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Edit External LDEV Tier Rank confirmation window

Selected Pool table

DescriptionItem

Displays the pool name and pool ID.Pool Name (ID)

Selected Pool Volumes table

DescriptionItem

Displays the combination of the LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Displays the LDEV name.LDEV Name

Displays the parity group ID.Parity Group ID

Displays the emulation type.Emulation Type

The usable capacity in the pool-VOL that is offset on the basis of the pageappears. For the pool-VOL with system area, the displayed capacity does notinclude the capacity of the management area.

Usable Capacity

Displays the tier rank of the external volume.External LDEV Tier Rank

486 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 487: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Edit Tiering Policies wizardEdit Tiering Policies window

Tiering Policies table

DescriptionItem

Displays the ID of the tiering policy.ID

Displays the name of the tiering policy.Tiering Policy

Displays the maximum percentage that is allocated to tier 1 in the total capacityto which tier relocation is performed. For a policy with an ID from 0 to 5, ahyphen (-) is displayed.

Tier1 Max(%)

Displays the minimum percentage that is allocated to tier 1 in the total capacityto which tier relocation is performed. For a policy whose ID is from 0 to 5, ahyphen (-) is displayed.

Tier1 Min(%)

Displays the maximum percentage that is allocated to tier 3 in the total capacityto which tier relocation is performed. For a policy with an ID from 0 to 5, ahyphen (-) is displayed.

Tier3 Max(%)

Displays the minimum percentage that is allocated to tier 3 in the total capacityto which tier relocation is performed. For a policy whose ID is from 0 to 5, ahyphen (-) is displayed.

Tier3 Min(%)

Displays the number of V-VOLs to which the tiering policy is set.Number of V-VOLs

Displays theChange Tiering Policywindow when you select the row and clickthis button.

Change

A policy with an ID is from 0 to 6 cannot be changed.

Edit Tiering Policies wizard 487

Page 488: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Edit Tiering Policies confirmation window

Tiering Policies table

DescriptionItem

Displays the ID of the tiering policy.ID

Displays the name of the tiering policy.Tiering Policy

Displays the maximum percentage that is allocated to tier 1 in the total capacityto which tier relocation is performed. For a policy with an ID from 0 to 5, ahyphen (-) is displayed.

Tier1 Max(%)

Displays the minimum percentage that is allocated to tier 1 in the total capacityto which tier relocation is performed. For a policy whose ID is from 0 to 5, ahyphen (-) is displayed.

Tier1 Min(%)

Displays the maximum percentage that is allocated to tier 3 in the total capacityto which tier relocation is performed. For a policy with an ID from 0 to 5, ahyphen (-) is displayed.

Tier3 Max(%)

Displays the minimum percentage that is allocated to tier 3 in the total capacityto which tier relocation is performed. For a policy whose ID is from 0 to 5, ahyphen (-) is displayed.

Tier3 Min(%)

Displays the number of V-VOLs to which the tiering policy is set.Number of V-VOLs

488 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 489: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Change Tiering Policy window

DescriptionItem

Displays the tiering policy name and policy ID.Tiering Policy

Select the maximum percentage that is allocated to tier 1 in the total capacityfor the tier relocation from 0 (%) to 100 (%). The setting value is needed tosatisfy either one of following conditions:

Tier1 Max(%)

Equal to Tier1 MinBigger than Tier1 Min

Select the minimum percentage that is allocated to tier 1 in the total capacityfor the tier relocation from 0 (%) to 100 (%). The setting value is needed tosatisfy either one of following conditions:

Tier1 Min(%)

Equal to Tier1 MaxSmaller than Tier1 Max

Select the maximum percentage that is allocated to tier 3 in the total capacityfor the tier relocation from 0 (%) to 100 (%). The setting value is needed tosatisfy either one of following conditions:

Tier3 Max(%)

Equal to Tier1 MinBigger than Tier1 Min

Select the minimum percentage that is allocated to tier 3 in the total capacityfor the tier relocation from 0 (%) to 100 (%). The setting value is needed tosatisfy either one of following conditions:

Tier3 Min(%)

Equal to Tier1 MaxSmaller than Tier1 Max

Note: The total of Tier1 Min and Tier3 Min must be 100(%) or less.

Change Tiering Policy window 489

Page 490: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Change Pool Configuration Pattern windowFor Thin Provisioning or Thin Provisioning MF pools

When you create a Thin Provisioning or Thin Provisioning MF pool, the following table displays.

Pool Configuration Patterns table

DescriptionItem

Displays the priority of the pool configuration.Priority

Displays whether the pool configuration is selected or not.Selected

Displays the total capacity of the pool.Total Capacity

Displays the data drive type and RPM of the pool.Drive Type/RPM

Displays the RAID level of the pool.RAID Level

If the pool configuration is changed, select a row in the Pool ConfigurationPatterns table. Then click this button. The selected pool configuration isreflected to the pool setting.

Select

490 Thin Provisioning, Smart Tiers, and Real Time Smart Tier GUI reference

Page 491: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

For Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF pools

When you create a Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF pool, the following table displays.

Pool Configuration Patterns table

DescriptionItem

Displays the priority of the pool configuration.Priority

Displays whether the pool configuration is selected or not.Selected

Displays the total capacity of the poolTotal Capacity

Displays the tier 1 information.Tier 1Drive Type/RPM: Displays the data drive type and RPM of pool-VOLs.RAID Level: Displays the RAID level of pool-VOLs.Rate (%): Displays the percentage of the tier 1 against the total capacity of thepool.

Displays the tier 2 information.Tier 2Drive Type/RPM: Displays the data drive type and RPM of pool-VOLs.RAID Level: Displays the RAID level of pool-VOLs.Rate (%): Displays the percentage of the tier 2 against the total capacity of thepool.

Displays the tier 3 information.Tier 3Drive Type/RPM: Displays the data drive type and RPM of pool-VOLs.RAID Level: Displays the RAID level of pool-VOLs.Rate (%): Displays the percentage of the tier 3 against the total capacity of thepool.

If the pool configuration is changed, select a row in the Pool ConfigurationPatterns table. Then click this button. The selected pool configuration isreflected to the pool setting.

Select

Change Pool Configuration Pattern window 491

Page 492: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

E Data Retention GUI referenceThis appendix describes the Data Retention windows, wizards, and dialog boxes used to assignaccess attributes to open-system volumes.

Data Retention windowUse the Data Retention window to assign an access attribute to open-system volumes.

Summary

DescriptionItem

Select the LDKC that contains the desired CU groups.LDKC

Select the CU group that contains the desired CUs from the following:CU Group

• 00-3F: CUs from 00 to 3F appear in the tree.

• 40-7F: CUs from 40 to 7F appear in the tree.

• 80-BF: CUs from 80 to BF appear in the tree.

• C0-FE: CUs from C0 to FE appear in the tree.

A list of CUs. Selecting a CU provides the selected CU information in the volume list onthe right of the tree.

Tree

This tree appears only the CUs that include volumes to which access attributes can beactually set.

Lists information about the CU selected in the tree. See the table below for details.Volume list

Enables or disables enhanced volume protection.Expiration Lock

• Disable > Enable: Indicates the expiration lock is disabled. You can change an accessattribute to read/write when the retention term is over.

• Enable > Disable: Indicates the expiration lock is enabled. You cannot change anaccess attribute to read/write even when the retention term is over.

492 Data Retention GUI reference

Page 493: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Applies settings to the storage system.Apply

Discards setting changes.Cancel

Volume listThe volume list provides information about access attributes that are assigned to volumes.

DescriptionItem

LDEV number.LDEV

•: Read/write

•: Read-only

•: Protect

The symbol beside the LDEV number indicates:

• #: an external volume

• A: LDEV of the ALU attribute.

• S: LDEV of the SLU attribute.

• V: a virtual volume

• X: a virtual volume used for Thin Provisioning

Access attribute assigned to this volume. These attributes can be assigned using theRAID Manager.

Attribute

• Read/Write: Both read and writer operations are permitted on the logical volume.

• Read-only: Read operations are permitted on the logical volume.

• Protect: Neither read nor write operations are permitted.

Volume emulation types.Emulation

Capacity of each volume in GB to two decimal places.Capacity

Indicates whether the volume can be specified as a secondary volume (S-VOL). You canalso use the RAID Manager to specify whether each volume can be used as an S-VOL.

S-VOL

Indicates the method that can be used to make LU path and command device settings.Reserved

• Hyphen (-): Both RAID Manager and Remote Web Console can be used to make LUpath and command device settings.

• RAID Manager: Only RAID Manager can be used to make LU path and commanddevice settings. Remote Web Console cannot be used to do so.

Period (in days) when you are prohibited from changing access attribute to read/write.The retention term can be extended but cannot be shortened. During the retention term,you can change read-only to protect, or vice versa.

Retention Term

• 500 days. Attempts to change access attribute to read/write are prohibited in the next500 days.

• Unlimited: The retention term is extended with no limits.

• 0 days: You can change access attribute to read/write.

Caution: In Data Retention, you can increase the value for Retention Term, but cannotdecrease the value.

Data Retention window 493

Page 494: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Number of LU paths.Path

Indicates the mode that the RAID Manager user assigns to the volume. You cannot useRemote Web Console to change modes. You must use the RAID Manager to changemodes.

Mode

• Zer: Zero Read Cap mode is assigned to the volume. If the Read Capacity command(which is a SCSI command) is issued to a volume in Zero Read Cap mode, it will bereported that the capacity of the volume is zero.

• Inv: Invisible mode is assigned to the volume. If the Inquiry command (which is a SCSIcommand) is issued to a volume in Invisible mode, it will be reported that the volumedoes not exist. Therefore, the hosts will be unable to recognize the volume.

• Zer/Inv. Both Zero Read Cap mode and Invisible mode are assigned to the volume.

• Hyphen (-): No mode is assigned by RAID Manager to the volume.

Target of the operation or the name of the operation. When no operation is performed,No Operation appears.

Operation

Also shown are the volume icons and the total number of volumes with each accessattribute.

Error Detail dialog boxIf an error occurs with Data Retention, the Error Detail dialog box appears. The Error Detaildialog box displays error locations and error messages. For troubleshooting information relatedto Data Retention, see “Troubleshooting Data Retention” (page 306).

DescriptionItems

Location where the error occurred. If an error relating to a volume occurred,the LDKC number, CU number, and LDEV number (volume number) areshown.

Location

Provides the full text of the error message. For details about the solution,see the XP7 Remote Web Console Messages.

Error Message

Closes the Error Detail window.Close

494 Data Retention GUI reference

Page 495: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

F LUN Manager GUI referenceThis appendix describes the LUN Manager windows, wizards, and dialog boxes used in managinglogical units. For information about common Remote Web Console operations such as usingnavigation buttons and creating tasks, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.

Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window

Summary

DescriptionItem

Total number of target ports.Target

Total number of RCU Target ports.RCU Target

Total number of Initiator ports.Initiator

Total number of External ports.External

Total number of ports.Total

Host Groups / iSCSI Targets tabThis tab provides information about the host groups and iSCSI targets that are assigned to thelogged-on user.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window 495

Page 496: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Clicking a port ID opens Port/Host Groups: Host Groups and Hosts tabs.

Types of ports:Type

• Fibre: Fibre Channel ports

• iSCSI: iSCSI ports.

Icons and names of the host group or iSCSI target alias.Host Group Name / iSCSI TargetAlias Clicking a host group name or iSCSI target opens Port/Host Groups/iSCSI

Targets: Hosts, LUNs, and Host Mode Options tabs.

Host group ID or iSCSI Target ID.Host Group ID / iSCSI Target ID1

iSCSI Target name.iSCSI Target Name

Host mode of the host group or iSCSI target.Host Mode

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts set to the relevant port.Number of Hosts

Number of logical units.Number of LUNs

Usage condition of ALUA.ALUA Used1

Yes: ALUA is used.No: ALUA is not used.

Asymmetric access states of the port. When using of iSCSI, a hyphen (-)appears.

Asymmetric Access States1

Active/Optimized: Access from the host preferentially is performed on the port.Active/Non-Optimized: When disabled of the port of Active/Optimized, theaccess from the host is performed on the port.

T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port. If the T10 PI modeis not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

T10 PI Mode1

Resource group name and identifier of the host groups.Resource Group Name (ID)

Model name and serial number of the virtual storage machine that has the port.Virtual Storage Machine1

Opens the Create Host Groups window.Create Host Groups

Opens the Create iSCSI Targets window.Create iSCSI Targets

Opens the Add LUN Paths window.Add LUN Paths

Opens the Add Hosts window.Add Hosts

Opens the Delete Host Groups window.Delete Host Groups2

Opens the Delete iSCSI Targets window.Delete iSCSI Targets2

Opens the Edit Host Groups window.Edit Host Groups2

Opens theEdit iSCSI Targets window.Edit iSCSI Targets2

Opens the Create Alternative LUN Paths window.Create Alternative LUN Paths2

Opens the Add CHAP Users window.Add CHAP Users2

Opens the Remove CHAP Users window.Remove CHAP Users2

Opens the Edit Asymmetric Access States window. For details, see XP7 HighAvailability User Guide.

Edit Asymmetric Access States

496 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 497: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Opens a window where you can export configuration information listed in thetable to a file that can be used for multiple purposes, such as backup orreporting.

Export2

Notes:1. Does not appear by default. To display this item, change the Column Settings of the table option.2. Available when you click More Actions.

Hosts tabThis tab provides information about the HBA WWNs that are registered to the host groups oriSCSI targets assigned to the logged-on user.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port IDClicking a port ID opens Port/Host Groups: Host Groups and Hosts tabs.

Types of ports:Type

• Fibre: Fibre Channel ports

• iSCSI: iSCSI ports

HBA WWNs/ iSCSI names and their icons.HBA WWN / iSCSI name

Name of hosts.Host Name

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

Number of iSCSI targets.Number of iSCSI Targets

Opens the Add to Host Groups window.Add to Host Groups

Opens the Edit Host window.Edit Host

Opens the Host Properties window.View Host Properties (iSCSI)

Opens the Remove Hosts window.Remove Hosts (Fibre)*

Opens the Remove Hosts window.Remove Hosts (iSCSI)*

Opens a window where you can export configuration information listed in thetable to a file that can be used for multiple purposes, such as backup orreporting.

Export*

*Appears when you click More Actions.

Ports tabThis tab provides information about the ports assigned to the logged-on user.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port. Clicking a port ID opens Port/Host Groups: Host Groupsand Hosts tabs.

Port ID

Types of ports:Type

• Fibre: Fibre Channel ports

• iSCSI: iSCSI ports

WWN or iSCSI initiator name of the port.WWN / iSCSI Name

Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window 497

Page 498: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Information about the setting for IPv4 as follows:IPv4

• IP Address: IP address for the port.

• Subnet Mask*: Subnet mask for the port.

• Default Gateway*: Default gateway for the port

Information about the setting for IPv6 as follows:IPv6

• Mode: IPv6 setting (Enabled or Disabled) for the port.

• Link Local Address: Link local address for the port.

• Global Address: Global address for the port.

• Subnet Prefix*: Subnet prefix for the port address.

• Assigned Default Gateway*: Assigned default gateway address for the port.

Data transfer speed for the selected Fibre Channel port in the unit of Gbps(Gigabit per second).

Speed

Valid speeds are 2, 4, 8, 10, or 16 Gbps. If Auto is set for the port speed, Auto(2, 4, 8, 10, or 16 Gbps) appears. The value enclosed in parentheses is definedby the storage system. A hyphen (-) appears in the parentheses when theconnection is not in the linkup status.

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Security

Type of the port.Type

Address of the port.Address (Loop ID)

Indicates whether a fabric switch is used.Fabric

Topology of the port.Connection Type

TCP port number.TCP Port Number*

MTU size on Ethernet.Ethernet MTU Size(Byte)

• MTU: Specified MTU size.

• Linked MTU: Present MTU size for the data transfer.

MAC addressMAC Address*

Keep alive timer setting.Keep Alive Timer(sec.)*

Selective ACK setting (Enabled or Disabled) for the port.Selective ACK*

Delayed ACK setting (Enabled or Disabled) for the port.Delayed ACK*

Maximum window size setting.Maximum Window Size (KB)*

Information about the iSNS server.iSNS Server*

• Mode: iSNS server setting (Enabled or Disabled) for the port.

• IP Address: IP address of the iSNS server.

• TCP Port Number: TCP port number of the iSNS server.

Information about VLAN.VLAN*

• Tagging Mode: Tagging mode setting (Enabled or Disabled) for the port.

• ID: VLAN identifier.

T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port. If the T10 PI modeis not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

T10 PI Mode1

Resource group names and IDS of the portsResource Group Name (ID)

498 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 499: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

The static MAC address assigned by the FCoE controller.ENode MAC address1

Unique identifier of the VLAN.VLAN ID1

Dynamic MAC address assigned by the FCoE switch.FPMA1

Management number of the FCoE switch.VP Index1

Status of the virtual ports.VP Status1

• Link Down

• Link Up (Logged In)

• Link Up (Logged Out)

Model name and serial number of the virtual storage machine that has the port.Virtual Storage Machine1

Opens the Edit Ports window.Edit Ports

Opens the Edit T10 PI Mode window.Edit T10 PI Mode

Opens a window where you can export configuration information listed in thetable to a file that can be used for multiple purposes, such as backup orreporting.

Export

Note:1. This item does not appear by default. To display this item, change the Column Settings of the table option.

* This item does not appear in the window by default. To display this item, change the Column Settings window.

Login WWNs / iSCSI Names tab

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port IDClicking a port ID opens Port/Host Groups: Host Groups and Hosts tabs.

Types of ports:Type

• Fibre: Fibre Channel ports.

• iSCSI: iSCSI ports.

HBA WWNs / iSCSI Names and their icons.HBA WWN / iSCSI Name

Name of the host.Host Name

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

Number of iSCSI targets.Number of iSCSI Targets

Opens the Add to Host Groups window.Add to Host Groups

Opens the Delete Login WWNs window.Delete Login WWNs

Opens the Delete Login iSCSI Names window.Delete Login iSCSI Names

Opens the View Login WWN Statuses window.View Login WWN Statuses *

Opens the View Login iSCSI Name Statuses window.View Login iSCSI Name Statuses

Opens a window where you can export configuration information listed in thetable to a file that can be used for multiple purposes, such as backup orreporting.

Export*

*Appears when you click More Actions.

Ports/Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window 499

Page 500: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

CHAP Users tab

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

User name.User Name

Number of iSCSI TargetsNumber of iSCSI Targets

iSCSI target alias.iSCSI Target Alias

iSCSI target name.iSCSI Target Name

Opens the Edit CHAP User window.Edit CHAP User

Opens the Remove CHAP Users window.Remove CHAP Users

Opens a window where you can export configuration information listed in thetable to a file that can be used for multiple purposes, such as backup orreporting.

Export

Port/Host Groups: Host Groups and Hosts tabs (Fibre Channel)

Summary

DescriptionItem

WWN of the port.WWN

Data transfer speed for the selected Fibre Channel port in the unit of Gbps(Gigabit per second). Valid speeds are 2, 4, 8, 10, or 16 Gbps. If Auto is set

Speed

for the port speed, Auto (2, 4, 8, 10, or 16 Gbps) appears. The value enclosedin parentheses is defined by the storage system. A hyphen (-) appears in theparentheses when the connection is not in the linkup status.

500 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 501: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Security

Attribute of the port indicating I/O flow.Attribute

• Initiator: Issues I/O commands to a target port when I/O is executed betweenstorage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, and so on.

• Target: Receives I/O commands from a host.

• RCU Target: Receives I/O commands from an initiator when I/O is executedbetween storage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, and soon.

• External: Issues I/O commands to a target port of an external storage systemwith External Storage.

Address of the selected port.Address (Loop ID)

Indicates whether a fabric switch is used.Fabric

Topology of the selected port.Connection Type

Total number of logical units set to the relevant port, and the maximum numberof logical units that can be registered to the port. When an initiator port orexternal port is selected, a hyphen (-) appears.

Number of LUNs

Total number of hosts set to the relevant port, and the maximum number ofhosts that can be registered to the port. When an initiator port or external portis selected, a hyphen (-) appears.

Number of Hosts

Total number of host groups set to the relevant port, and the maximum numberof host groups that can be registered to the port. When an initiator port orexternal port is selected, the maximum number is not available.

Number of Host Groups

Host Groups tabThis tab provides information about the host groups assigned to the logged-on user.

CAUTION: For the initiator port, only host group 0(zero) is displayed to enable you to set ahost mode option.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Icons and names of host groups.Host Group NameClicking a host group name opens Port/Host Groups: Hosts, LUNs, and HostMode Options tabs.

Host group IDHost Group ID1

Host mode of the host group.Host Mode

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts in the host group.Number of Hosts

Number of logical units in the host group.Number of LUNs

Usage condition of ALUA.ALUA UsedYes: ALUA is used.No: ALUA is not used.

Asymmetric access states of the port. When using of iSCSI, a hyphen (-)appears.

Asymmetric Access States

Active/Optimized: Access from the host preferentially is performed on the port.

Port/Host Groups: Host Groups and Hosts tabs (Fibre Channel) 501

Page 502: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Active/Non-Optimized: When disabled of the port of Active/Optimized, theaccess from the host is performed on the port.

Model name and serial number of the virtual storage machine that has the port.Virtual Storage Machine1

Opens the Create Host Groups window.Create Host Groups

Opens the Add LUN Paths window.Add LUN Paths

Opens the Add Hosts window.Add Hosts

Opens the Delete Host Groups window.Delete Host Groups2

Opens the Edit Host Groups window.Edit Host Groups2

Opens the Create Alternative LUN Paths window.Create Alternative LUN Paths2

Opens the Edit Asymmetric Access States window.Edit Asymmetric Access States

Opens a window where you can export configuration information listed in thetable to a file that can be used for multiple purposes, such as backup orreporting.

Export2

Notes:1. Does not appear by default. To display this item, change the Column Settings of the table option.2. Available when you click More Actions.

Hosts tabThis tab provides information about the HBA WWNs that are registered to the host groupsassigned to the logged-on user.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

HBA WWNs and their icons.HBA WWN

Name of the host.Host Name

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

Opens the Add to Host Groups window.Add to Host Groups

Opens the Edit Host window.Edit Host

Opens the Remove Hosts window.Remove Hosts

Opens a window where you can export configuration information listed in thetable to a file that can be used for multiple purposes, such as backup orreporting.

Export

502 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 503: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Port / Host Groups / iSCSI Targets: Hosts, LUNs, Host Mode Options,and CHAP Users tabs

Fibre Channel

Summary

DescriptionItem

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Host mode of the host group.Host Mode

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port. If the T10 PI modeis not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

T10 PI Mode

Model name and serial number of the virtual storage machine that has a hostgroup.

Virtual Storage Machine

Asymmetric access states of the port. When using of iSCSI, a hyphen (-)appears.

Asymmetric Access States

Active/Optimized: Access from the host preferentially is performed on the port.Active/Non-Optimized: When disabled of the port of Active/Optimized, theaccess from the host is performed on the port.

Opens the View Migration Plans window. For details, see the XP7 Auto LUNUser Guide.

View Migration Plans*

Port / Host Groups / iSCSI Targets: Hosts, LUNs, Host Mode Options, and CHAP Users tabs 503

Page 504: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Open the View Histories window. For details, see the XP7 Auto LUN UserGuide.

View Histories*

*Available when you select Auto LUN.

Hosts tab

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

HBA WWNs and their icons.HBA WWN

Name of the host.Host Name

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

Opens the Add to Host Groups window.Add to Host Groups

Opens the Add Hosts windowAdd Hosts

Opens the Edit Host window.Edit Host

Opens the Remove Hosts window.Remove Hosts1

Opens a window where you can export configuration information listed in thetable to a file that can be used for multiple purposes, such as backup orreporting.

Export1

Note:1. Available when you click More Actions.

LUNs tabThis tab provides information about the LU paths that correspond to the LDEV assigned to thelogged-in user.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Icons and identifiers of the logical unit. Clicking a LUN ID opens the LUNProperties window.

LUN ID

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV IDClicking an LDEV ID takes you to the LDEV Properties window.

Name of each LDEV.LDEV Name

Displays the pool name and pool ID. If the logical volume is not the volumeother than V-VOL, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Pool Name (ID)

Emulation types for each logical volume (or logical device).Emulation Type

504 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 505: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Capacity • Total: Displays the logical volume capacity.

• Reserved: Displays the reserved capacity of the V-VOL.The displayed value of Reserved might be larger than the displayed valueof Total due to following reasons:

◦ Reserved displays the reserved capacity that is rounded up on eachpage.

◦ If the emulation type is 3390-A, the mapped capacity of V-VOL includesthe capacity of control cylinders (7 Cyl is required per 1,113 Cyl).

◦ The mapped capacity of V-VOL for Thin Provisioning includes the capacityof control information (168 MB is required per 3,145,548 MB).If used capacity is referenced during I/O or copy processing by softwaresuch as Business Copy or Continuous Access Journal, the used capacitydisplayed might be different from the actual capacity even if the fullallocation is enabled on the V-VOL. This is caused by a gap betweenthe times that information is gathered about the mapped capacity andthe reserved capacity.

• Used: Displays the sum of the mapped capacity and the reserved capacity.The Total value displayed might be larger than the Used value displayedof due to following reasons:

◦ Used displays the sum of the mapped capacity and the reserved capacitythat is rounded up on each page.

◦ If the emulation type is 3390-A, the mapped capacity of V-VOL includesthe capacity of the control cylinders (7 Cyl is required per 1,113 Cyl).

◦ The mapped capacity of THP V-VOL includes the capacity of the controlinformation (Requires a maximum of 168 MB per 3,145,548 MB).If the logical volume is not the volume other than V-VOL, a hyphen (-) isdisplayed.

◦ THP V-VOL of the data direct mapping attribute includes the controlinformation (168 MB is required per 3,145,548 MB) and the capacity forone page.

• Used(%): For the entire capacity of V-VOL, this item displays percentagesof the sum of the mapped capacity and the reserved capacity. If the logicalvolume is not the volume other than V-VOL, a hyphen (-) is displayed.Used(%) is obtained by dividing the total of the user data and controlinformation by the user area capacity. The control information (required 168MB per 3,145,548 MB) is also included in THP V-VOL. If the ratio of thecontrol information of THP V-VOL is high relative to the user area, Used(%)may exceed 100 %.

Used Capacity • Tier1: Displays the used capacity of tier 1. If the logical volume is not thevolume other than V-VOL, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

• Tier2: Displays the used capacity of tier 2. If the logical volume is not thevolume other than V-VOL, or if tier 2 does not exist, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

• Tier3: Displays the used capacity of tier 3. If the logical volume is not thevolume other than V-VOL, or if tier 3 does not exist, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

The reserved capacity is not included in the used capacity for each tier of theV-VOL. Therefore, theUsed value in theCapacity column may not correspondwith the Used Capacity value.

Displays the type for each logical volume.Provisioning Type

• Basic: Internal volume.

Port / Host Groups / iSCSI Targets: Hosts, LUNs, Host Mode Options, and CHAP Users tabs 505

Page 506: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

External: External volume.•

• THP: V-VOL of Thin Provisioning.

• Snapshot: Fast Snap volume.

Cache logical partition number, displayed as ID:CLPR.CLPR

Displays the status of the full allocation setting in a pool that is associated withthe V-VOL.

Full Allocation

• Enable: Pages are reserved.

• Disable: Pages are not reserved.

Displays the tiering policy name and ID.Tiering Policy

• All(0): Policy specified when all tiers in the pool are used.

• Level1(1) to Level31(31): Policy selected from Level1 to Level31, set to theV-VOL.

• Hyphen (-): The logical volume is not the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MFV-VOL.

Displays the new page assignment tier of the tiering policy.New Page Assignment TierHyphen (-): The logical volume is not the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF V-VOL.

Displays whether tier relocation is set to Enable orDisable. If the logical volumeis not to the V-VOL of Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Tier Relocation

Displays the attribute of the LDEV.Attribute

• Command Device: Command device.

• Remote Command Device: Remote command device.

• Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.

• Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

Displays the access attribute of the LDEV.Access Attribute1

Displays the information about parity group encryption.Encryption1

• Enable: Encryption setting of a parity group in which the LDEV is placed isenabled. Or the virtual volume associated with the pool whose pool-VOLsare enabled of the encryption setting.

• Encryption setting of a parity group (or a pool) in which the LDEV is placedis disabled. Or the virtual volume associated with the pool whose pool-VOLsare disabled of the encryption setting.

• Mixed: Pool-VOLs with enabled encryption settings and pool-VOLs withdisabled encryption settings are intermixed in the pool in which the LDEVis placed.Caution: The data encryption is not ensured in the pool that has the Mixedencryption setting. To manage the data encryption securely, use the poolwith an encryption setting of Enabled or Disabled.

• Hyphen(-): External volume or migration volume. As for THP V-VOL of ThinProvisioning , the pool-VOL in the pool of which THP V-VOL belongs is anexternal volume, or the pool of which THP V-VOL belongs is being blocked.

Displays the total number of relevant paths and alternative paths.Number of Paths

Information about the ALUA mode.ALUA ModeEnabled: LDEV can be used in ALUA.Disabled: LDEV cannot be used in ALUA.

506 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 507: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Displays LDEV ID of pool-VOL in the pool of the data direct mapping attribute.If the link of LDEV ID is clicked, the LDEV Properties window appears.

Data Direct Mapped LDEV

A hyphen (-) appears if the data direct mapping attribute is disabled.

T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port. If the T10 PI modeis not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

T10 PI Mode1

Information about the virtual storage machine.Virtual Storage Machine1

• Model / Serial Number1: Model name and serial number of the virtual storagemachine that has the LDEV.

• LDEV ID1: Virtual LDEV ID. If a Virtual LDEV ID is not assigned to LDEV,this column is blank.

• Device Name1: Virtual device name, which is a combination of the virtualemulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, and the virtual CVS attribute.Values of the virtual emulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, and virtualCVS attribute appear only for items that have been set. This column is blankwhen the virtual emulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, and virtualCVS attribute are not set. If the virtual CVS attribute is set, CVS is attachedas the suffix to the device name.

• SSID1: Virtual SSID. If Virtual SSID is not set for LDEV, this column is blank.

• Attribute1: Virtual LDEV attribute. If the attribute is not set for the LDEV, thiscolumn is blank.

Opens the Add LUN Paths window.Add LUN Paths

Opens the Copy LUN Path window.Copy LUN Paths

Opens the Edit Command Devices window.Edit Command Devices

Displays the Host-Reserved LUNs window.View Host-Reserved LUNs2

Opens the Delete LUN Paths window.Delete LUN Paths2

Opens the Edit UUIDs window.Edit UUIDs2

Opens the Delete UUIDs window.Delete UUIDs

Opens the Create LDEVs window.Create LDEVs

Opens the Edit LDEVs window.Edit LDEVs

Opens the Format LDEVs window.Format LDEVs

Opens the Shred LDEVs window. For details, see XP7 Volume Shredder forOpen and Mainframe Systems User Guide.

Shred LDEVs

Opens the Block LDEVs window.Block LDEVs

Opens the Restore LDEVs window.Restore LDEVs

Opens the Assign MP Blade window.Assign MP Blade

Opens the Reclaim Zero Pages window.Reclaim Zero Pages

Opens the Stop Reclaiming Zero Pages window.Stop Reclaiming Zero Pages

Opens the Expand V-VOL window.Expand V-VOLs

Opens the View Tier Properties window.View Tier Properties

Opens the Migrate Volumes window. For details, see XP7 Auto LUN UserGuide.

Migrate Volumes

Port / Host Groups / iSCSI Targets: Hosts, LUNs, Host Mode Options, and CHAP Users tabs 507

Page 508: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Force Delete Pairs (Cnt Ac-S/CntAc-J/HA Pairs)

• Cnt Ac-S Pairs: Opens the Force Delete Pairs (Cnt Ac-S Pairs) window. Fordetails see the XP7 Continuous Access Synchronous User Guide or XP7Continuous Access Synchronous for Mainframe User Guide.

• Cnt Ac-J Pairs: Opens the Force Delete Pairs (Cnt Ac-J Pairs) window. Fordetails see the XP7 Continuous Access Journal User Guide or XP7Continuous Access Journal for Mainframe Systems User Guide.

• HA Pairs: Opens the Force Delete Pairs (HA Pairs) window. For details seethe XP7 High Availability User Guide.

Open the ALUs / SLUs window.View ALUs / SLUs 2

Opens the Unbind SLUs window.Unbind SLUs

Opens a window where you can export configuration information listed in thetable to a file that can be used for multiple purposes, such as backup orreporting.

Export2

Notes:1. Does not appear by default. To display this item, change the Column Settings of the table option.2. Available when you click More Actions.

Host Mode Options tab

DescriptionItem

Number of the host mode option.Mode No.

Description of the host mode option.Option Description

Setting (enable or disable) of the host mode option.Status

Opens the Edit Host Group window.Edit Host Groups

Opens a window where you can export configuration information listed in thetable to a file that can be used for multiple purposes, such as backup orreporting.

Export

508 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 509: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

iSCSI

Summary

DescriptionItem

iSCSI target alias.iSCSI Target Alias

iSCSI target name.iSCSI Target Name

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Model name and serial number of the virtual storage machine that has the port.Virtual Storage Machine

Host mode of the iSCSI target.Host Mode

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Information about the authentication.Authentication

• Method: Authentication method that is CHAP, None, or Comply with HostSetting

• Mutual CHAP: Mutual CHAP setting that is Enabled or Disabled.

• User name

Host tab (iSCSI)This tab provides information about the iSCSI Names that are registered to the iSCSI targetsassigned to the logged-on user.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

HBA iSCSI Names and their iconsHBA iSCSI Name

Port / Host Groups / iSCSI Targets: Hosts, LUNs, Host Mode Options, and CHAP Users tabs 509

Page 510: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Name of hosts.Host Name

iSCSI target alias.iSCSI Target Alias

iSCSI target name.iSCSI Target Name

Opens the Edit Host window.Edit Host

Model name and serial number of the virtual storage machine that has the port.Add Hosts

Opens the Add Hosts window.Host Mode

Opens the Remove Hosts window.Remove Hosts

Opens a window where you can export configuration information listed in thetable to a file that can be used for multiple purposes, such as backup orreporting.

Export

LUNs tab (iSCSI)This tab provides information about the LU paths that correspond to the LDEV assigned to thelogged-in user.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Icons and identifiers of the logical unit. Clicking a LUN ID opens the LUNProperties window.

LUN ID

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV IDClicking an LDEV ID takes you to the LDEV Properties window.

Name of each LDEV.LDEV Name

Displays the pool name and pool ID. If the logical volume is not the volumeother than V-VOL, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Pool Name (ID)

Emulation types for each logical volume (or logical device).Emulation Type

510 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 511: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Capacity • Total: Displays the logical volume capacity.

• Reserved: Displays the reserved capacity of the V-VOL.The displayed value of Reserved might be larger than the displayed valueof Total due to following reasons:

◦ Reserved displays the reserved capacity that is rounded up on eachpage.

◦ If the emulation type is 3390-A, the mapped capacity of V-VOL includesthe capacity of control cylinders (7 Cyl is required per 1,113 Cyl).

◦ The mapped capacity of V-VOL for Thin Provisioning includes the capacityof control information (168 MB is required per 3,145,548 MB).If used capacity is referenced during I/O or copy processing by softwaresuch as Business Copy or Continuous Access Journal, the used capacitydisplayed might be different from the actual capacity even if the fullallocation is enabled on the V-VOL. This is caused by a gap betweenthe times that information is gathered about the mapped capacity andthe reserved capacity.

• Used: Displays the sum of the mapped capacity and the reserved capacity.The Total value displayed might be larger than the Used value displayedof due to following reasons:

◦ Used displays the sum of the mapped capacity and the reserved capacitythat is rounded up on each page.

◦ If the emulation type is 3390-A, the mapped capacity of V-VOL includesthe capacity of the control cylinders (7 Cyl is required per 1,113 Cyl).

◦ The mapped capacity of THP V-VOL includes the capacity of the controlinformation (Requires a maximum of 168 MB per 3,145,548 MB).If the logical volume is not the volume other than V-VOL, a hyphen (-) isdisplayed.

◦ THP V-VOL of the data direct mapping attribute includes the controlinformation (168 MB is required per 3,145,548 MB) and the capacity forone page.

• Used(%): For the entire capacity of V-VOL, this item displays percentagesof the sum of the mapped capacity and the reserved capacity. If the logicalvolume is not the volume other than V-VOL, a hyphen (-) is displayed.Used(%) is obtained by dividing the total of the user data and controlinformation by the user area capacity. The control information (required 168MB per 3,145,548 MB) is also included in THP V-VOL. If the ratio of thecontrol information of THP V-VOL is high relative to the user area, Used(%)may exceed 100 %.

Used Capacity • Tier1: Displays the used capacity of tier 1. If the logical volume is not thevolume other than V-VOL, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

• Tier2: Displays the used capacity of tier 2. If the logical volume is not thevolume other than V-VOL, or if tier 2 does not exist, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

• Tier3: Displays the used capacity of tier 3. If the logical volume is not thevolume other than V-VOL, or if tier 3 does not exist, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

The reserved capacity is not included in the used capacity for each tier of theV-VOL. Therefore, theUsed value in theCapacity column may not correspondwith the Used Capacity value.

Displays the type for each logical volume.Provisioning Type

• Basic: Internal volume.

Port / Host Groups / iSCSI Targets: Hosts, LUNs, Host Mode Options, and CHAP Users tabs 511

Page 512: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

External: External volume.•

• THP: V-VOL of Thin Provisioning.

• Snapshot: Fast Snap volume.

Cache logical partition number, displayed as ID:CLPR.CLPR

Displays the status of the full allocation setting in a pool that is associated withthe V-VOL.

Full Allocation

• Enable: Pages are reserved.

• Disable: Pages are not reserved.

Displays the tiering policy name and ID.Tiering Policy

• All(0): Policy specified when all tiers in the pool are used.

• Level1(1) to Level31(31): Policy selected from Level1 to Level31, set to theV-VOL.

• Hyphen (-): The logical volume is not the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MFV-VOL.

Displays the new page assignment tier of the tiering policy.New Page Assignment TierHyphen (-): The logical volume is not the Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF V-VOL.

Displays whether tier relocation is set to Enable orDisable. If the logical volumeis not to the V-VOL of Smart Tiers or Smart Tiers MF, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Tier Relocation

Displays the attribute of the LDEV.Attribute

• Command Device: Command device.

• Remote Command Device: Remote command device.

• Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.

• Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

Displays the access attribute of the LDEV.Access Attribute1

Displays the information about parity group encryption.Encryption1

• Enable: Encryption setting of a parity group in which the LDEV is placed isenabled. Or the virtual volume associated with the pool whose pool-VOLsare enabled of the encryption setting.

• Encryption setting of a parity group (or a pool) in which the LDEV is placedis disabled. Or the virtual volume associated with the pool whose pool-VOLsare disabled of the encryption setting.

• Mixed: Pool-VOLs with enabled encryption settings and pool-VOLs withdisabled encryption settings are intermixed in the pool in which the LDEVis placed.Caution: The data encryption is not ensured in the pool that has the Mixedencryption setting. To manage the data encryption securely, use the poolwith an encryption setting of Enabled or Disabled.

• Hyphen(-): External volume or migration volume. As for THP V-VOL of ThinProvisioning , the pool-VOL in the pool of which THP V-VOL belongs is anexternal volume, or the pool of which THP V-VOL belongs is being blocked.

Displays the total number of relevant paths and alternative paths.Number of Paths

Displays LDEV ID of pool-VOL in the pool of the data direct mapping attribute.If the link of LDEV ID is clicked, the LDEV Properties window appears.

Data Direct Mapped LDEV

A hyphen (-) appears if the data direct mapping attribute is disabled.

512 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 513: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Information about the virtual storage machine.Virtual Storage Machine1

• Model / Serial Number1: Model name and serial number of the virtual storagemachine that has the LDEV.

• LDEV ID1: Virtual LDEV ID. If a Virtual LDEV ID is not assigned to LDEV,this column is blank.

• Device Name1: Virtual device name, which is a combination of the virtualemulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, and the virtual CVS attribute.Values of the virtual emulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, and virtualCVS attribute appear only for items that have been set. This column is blankwhen the virtual emulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, and virtualCVS attribute are not set. If the virtual CVS attribute is set, CVS is attachedas the suffix to the device name.

• SSID1: Virtual SSID. If Virtual SSID is not set for LDEV, this column is blank.

• Attribute1: Virtual LDEV attribute. If the attribute is not set for the LDEV, thiscolumn is blank.

Opens the Add LUN Paths window.Add LUN Paths

Opens the Copy LUN Path window.Copy LUN Paths

Opens the Edit Command Devices window.Edit Command Devices

Displays the Host-Reserved LUNs window.View Host-Reserved LUNs2

Opens the Delete LUN Paths window.Delete LUN Paths2

Opens the Edit UUIDs window.Edit UUIDs2

Opens a window where you can export configuration information listed in thetable to a file that can be used for multiple purposes, such as backup orreporting.

Export2

Opens the Delete UUIDs window.Delete UUIDs

Opens the Create LDEVs window.Create LDEVs

Opens the Edit LDEVs window.Edit LDEVs

Opens the Format LDEVs window.Format LDEVs

Opens the Shred LDEVs window. For details, see XP7 Volume Shredder forOpen and Mainframe Systems User Guide.

Shred LDEVs

Opens the Block LDEVs window.Block LDEVs

Opens the Restore LDEVs window.Restore LDEVs

Opens the Assign MP Blade window.Assign MP Blade

Opens the Reclaim Zero Pages window.Reclaim Zero Pages

Opens the Stop Reclaiming Zero Pages window.Stop Reclaiming Zero Pages

Opens the Expand V-VOL window.Expand V-VOLs

Opens the View Tier Properties window.View Tier Properties

Opens the Migrate Volumes window. For details, see XP7 Auto LUN UserGuide.

Migrate Volumes

Port / Host Groups / iSCSI Targets: Hosts, LUNs, Host Mode Options, and CHAP Users tabs 513

Page 514: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Force Delete Pairs (Cnt Ac-S/CntAc-J/HA Pairs)

• Cnt Ac-S Pairs: Opens the Force Delete Pairs (Cnt Ac-S Pairs) window. Fordetails see the XP7 Continuous Access Synchronous User Guide or XP7Continuous Access Synchronous for Mainframe User Guide.

• Cnt Ac-J Pairs: Opens the Force Delete Pairs (Cnt Ac-J Pairs) window. Fordetails see the XP7 Continuous Access Journal User Guide or XP7Continuous Access Journal for Mainframe Systems User Guide.

• HA Pairs: Opens the Force Delete Pairs (HA Pairs) window. For details seethe XP7 High Availability User Guide.

Open the ALUs / SLUs window.View ALUs / SLUs 2

Opens the Unbind SLUs window.Unbind SLUs

Notes:1. Does not appear by default. To display this item, change the Column Settings of the table option.2. Available when you click More Actions.

Host Mode Options tab (iSCSI)

DescriptionItem

Number of the host mode option.Mode No.

Description of the host mode option.Option Description

Setting (enable or disable) of the host mode option.Status

Opens the Edit iSCSI Targets window.Edit iSCSI Targets

Opens a window where you can export configuration information listed in thetable to a file that can be used for multiple purposes, such as backup orreporting.

Export

CHAP Users tab

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

User name. Clicking a user name opens the CHAP UserProperties window.

User Name

Number of iSCSI TargetsNumber of iSCSI Targets

Opens the Edit CHAP User window.Edit CHAP User

Opens the Remove CHAP Users window.Remove CHAP Users

Opens a window where you can export configurationinformation listed in the table to a file that can be used formultiple purposes, such as backup or reporting.

Export

514 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 515: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Ports/iSCSI Targets: iSCSI Targets, Hosts, and CHAP Users tabs (iSCSI)

Summary

DescriptionItem

Information about the setting for IPv4 as follows:IPv4

• IP Address: IP address for the port.

• Subnet Mask: Subnet mask for the port.

• Default Gateway: Default gateway for the port.

Information about the setting for IPv6 as follows:IPv6

• Mode: IPv6 setting (Enabled or Disabled) for the port.

• Link Local Address: Link local address for the port.

• Global Address: Global address for the port.

• Assigned Default Gateway: Assigned default gatewayaddress for the port.

Data transfer speed.Speed

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) for the port.Security

TCP port number.TCP Port Number

MTU size on Ethernet.Ethernet MTU Size

MAC address.MAC Address

Keep alive timer setting.Keep Alive Timer

Selective ACK setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Selective ACK

Ports/iSCSI Targets: iSCSI Targets, Hosts, and CHAP Users tabs (iSCSI) 515

Page 516: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Delayed ACK setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Delayed ACK

Maximum window size setting.Maximum Window Size

Information about the iSNS server.iSNS Server

• Mode: iSNS server setting (Enabled or Disabled) forthe port.

• IP Address: IP address of the iSNS server.

• TCP Port Number: TCP port number of the iSNSserver.

Information about VLAN.VLAN

• Tagging Mode: Tagging mode setting (Enabled orDisabled) for the port.

• ID: VLAN identifier.

Total number of logical units set to the relevant port, andthe maximum number of logical units that can beregistered to the port.

Number of LUNs

Total number of hosts set to the relevant port, and themaximum number of hosts that can be registered to theport.

Number of Hosts

Total number of iSCSI targets set to the relevant port, andthe maximum number of iSCSI targets that can beregistered to the port.

Number of iSCSI Targets

Total number of CHAP users set to the relevant port, andthe maximum number of CHAP users that can beregistered to the port.

Number of CHAP Users

Opens the View Port Properties window.View Port Properties

iSCSI Targets tabThis tab provides information about the host groups that are assigned to the logged-on user.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Icons and names of the iSCSI target alias.iSCSI Target AliasClicking an iSCSI target alias opensPorts/HostGroups/iSCSI Targets: Hosts, LUNs, and Host ModeOptions tabs.

iSCSI target ID.iSCSI Target ID1

iSCSI target name.iSCSI Target Name

Host mode of the iSCSI target.Host Mode

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts set to the relevant port.Number of Hosts

Number of logical units.Number of LUNs

516 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 517: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Information about the authentication.Authentication

• Method: Authentication method that is CHAP, None,or Comply with Host Setting

• Mutual CHAP: Mutual CHAP setting that is Enabledor Disabled

• User Name

• Number of Users

Resource group name and identifier of the iSCSI target.Resource Group Name (ID)

Model name and serial number of the virtual storagemachine that has the iSCSI target.

Virtual Storage Machine1

Opens the Create iSCSI Targets window.Create iSCSI Targets

Opens the Add LUN Paths window.Add LUN Paths

Opens the Add Hosts window.Add Hosts

Opens the Delete iSCSI Targets window.Delete iSCSI Targets2

Opens the Edit iSCSI Targets window.Edit iSCSI Targets2

Opens the Create Alternative LUN Paths window.Create Alternative LUN Paths2

Opens the Add CHAP Users window.Add CHAP Users2

Opens the Remove Target CHAP Users window.Remove Target CHAP Users2

Opens a window where you can export configurationinformation listed in the table to a file that can be used formultiple purposes, such as backup or reporting.

Export2

Notes:1 Does not appear by default. To display this item, change the Column Settings of the table option.2 Appears when you click More Actions.

Hosts tabThis tab provides information about the iSCSI Names that are registered to the iSCSI targetsassigned to the logged-on user.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

HBA iSCSI Names and their icons.HBA iSCSI Name

Name of hosts.Host Name

Opens the Edit Host window.Edit Host

Opens the Host Properties windowView Host Properties

Opens the Remove Hosts window.Remove Hosts

Opens a window where you can export configurationinformation listed in the table to a file that can be used formultiple purposes, such as backup or reporting.

Export

Ports/iSCSI Targets: iSCSI Targets, Hosts, and CHAP Users tabs (iSCSI) 517

Page 518: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

CHAP Users

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

User name. Clicking a user name opens the CHAP UserProperties window.

User Name

Number of iSCSI TargetsNumber of iSCSI Targets

Opens the Edit CHAP User window.Edit CHAP User

Opens the Remove CHAP Users window.Remove CHAP Users

Opens a window where you can export configurationinformation listed in the table to a file that can be used formultiple purposes, such as backup or reporting.

Export

Add LUN Paths wizardSelect LDEVs window

518 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 519: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Available LDEVs table

This table lists logical volumes for which LU paths can be established. Only the LDEVs availableto the logged-on user are available.

DescriptionItem

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Name of the LDEV.LDEV Name

Identifier of the parity group.Parity Group ID

Pool name and pool identifier.Pool Name (ID)If the LDEV is not used as a pool-VOL, a hyphen (-) appears.

Displays the RAID level. If multiple RAID levels exist in a pool, Mixedappears in this field.

RAID Level

Emulation type for each logical volume (or logical device).Emulation Type

Size of each logical volume.Capacity

Provisioning type for each logical volume.Provisioning Type

• Basic: Internal volume.

• External: External volume.

• THP: V-VOL of Thin Provisioning.

• Snapshot: Fast Snap volume.

Displays the attribute of the LDEV.Attribute

• Command Device: Command device.

• Remote Command Device: Remote command device.

• Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.

• Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

Add LUN Paths wizard 519

Page 520: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port. If the T10 PImode is not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

T10 PI Mode1

Number of paths set for the LDEV.Number of Paths

Information about the ALUA mode.ALUA ModeEnabled: LDEV can be used in ALUA.Disabled: LDEV cannot be used in ALUA.

Resource group name and identifier of the LDEV.Resource Group Name (ID)

Model name and serial number of the virtual storage machine that has theLDEV.

Virtual Storage Machine

Adds logical volumes selected from the Available LDEVs table to theSelected LDEVs table.

Add

Removes logical volumes from the Selected LDEVs table.Remove

Selected LDEVs table

DescriptionItem

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Name of the LDEV.LDEV Name

Identifier of the parity group.Parity Group ID

Pool name and pool identifier.Pool Name (ID)If the LDEV is not used as a pool-VOL, a hyphen (-) appears.

Emulation type for each logical volume (or logical device).Emulation Type

Size of each logical volume.Capacity

520 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 521: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Provisioning type for each logical volume.Provisioning Type

• Basic: Internal volume.

• External: External volume.

• THP: V-VOL of Thin Provisioning.

• Snapshot: Fast Snap volume.

Displays the attribute of the LDEV.Attribute

• Command Device: Command device.

• Remote Command Device: Remote command device.

• Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.

• Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port. If the T10 PImode is not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

T10 PI Mode1

Number of paths set for the LDEV.Number of Paths

Information about the ALUA mode.ALUA ModeEnabled: LDEV can be used in ALUA.Disabled: LDEV cannot be used in ALUA.

Resource group name and identifier of the LDEV.Resource Group Name (ID)

Model name and serial number of the virtual storage machine that has theLDEV.

Virtual Storage Machine

Select Host Groups/iSCSI Targets window

Fibre ChannelSelect host groups from the Available Host Groups list to add to LUN paths.

Add LUN Paths wizard 521

Page 522: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selection Object

DescriptionItem

Selection Object • Host Group: Select to add LUN paths to host groups.

• iSCSI target: Select to add LUN paths to iSCSI targets.

Available Host Groups table

This table lists host groups for which LU paths can be established. Only the host groups assignedto the logged-on user are available.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

The host mode of the host group.Host Mode

Attribute of the port indicating I/O flow.Port Attribute

• Initiator: Issues I/O commands to a target port when I/O is executedbetween storage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, andso on.

• Target: Receives I/O commands from a host.

• RCU Target: Receives I/O commands from an initiator when I/O isexecuted between storage systems with Continuous AccessSynchronous, and so on.

• External: Issues I/O commands to a target port of an external storagesystem with External Storage.

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts registered in the host group.Number of Hosts

522 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 523: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port. If the T10 PImode is not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

T10 PI Mode1

Asymmetric access states of the port. When using of iSCSI, a hyphen (-)appears.

Asymmetric Access States

Active/Optimized: Access from the host preferentially is performed on theport.Active/Non-Optimized: When disabled of the port of Active/Optimized, theaccess from the host is performed on the port.

Resource group name and identifier of the host group.Resource Group Name (ID)

Model name and serial number of the virtual storage machine that has theport.

Virtual Storage Machine

Details about the selected host group.Detail

Adds host groups selected from the Available Host Groups table to theSelected Host Groups table.

Add

Removes the selected host groups from theSelected Host Groups table.Remove

Selected Host Groups table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

The host mode of the host group.Host Mode

Add LUN Paths wizard 523

Page 524: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Attribute of the port indicating I/O flow.Port Attribute

• Initiator: Issues I/O commands to a target port when I/O is executedbetween storage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, andso on.

• Target: Receives I/O commands from a host.

• RCU Target: Receives I/O commands from an initiator when I/O isexecuted between storage systems with Continuous AccessSynchronous, and so on.

• External: Issues I/O commands to a target port of an external storagesystem with External Storage.

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts registered in the host group.Number of Hosts

T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port. If the T10 PImode is not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

T10 PI Mode1

Asymmetric access states of the port. When using of iSCSI, a hyphen (-)appears.

Asymmetric Access States

Active/Optimized: Access from the host preferentially is performed on theport.Active/Non-Optimized: When disabled of the port of Active/Optimized, theaccess from the host is performed on the port.

Resource group name and identifier of the host group.Resource Group Name (ID)

Model name and serial number of the virtual storage machine that has theport.

Virtual Storage Machine

Details about the selected host group.Detail

iSCSISelect host groups from the Available iSCSI Targets list to add to LUN paths.

524 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 525: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selection Object

DescriptionItem

Selection Object • Host Group: Select to add LUN paths to host groups.

• iSCSI target: Select to add LUN paths to iSCSI targets.

Available iSCSI Targets table

This table lists iSCSI targets for which LU paths can be established. Only the iSCSI targetsassigned to the logged-on user are available.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

iSCSI target alias.iSCSI Target Alias

iSCSI target ID.iSCSI Target ID

iSCSI target name.iSCSI Target Name

Host mode of the iSCSI target.Host Mode

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts set to the relevant port.Number of Hosts

Resource group name and identifier of the iSCSI target.Resource Group Name (ID)

Model name and serial number of the virtual storage machine that has theport.

Virtual Storage Machine

Details about the selected iSCSI target.Detail

Add LUN Paths wizard 525

Page 526: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Adds host groups selected from the Available iSCSI Targets table to theSelected iSCSI Targets table.

Add

Removes the selected host groups from the Selected iSCSI Targetstable.

Remove

Selected iSCSI Targets table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

iSCSI target alias.iSCSI Target Alias

iSCSI target ID.iSCSI Target ID

iSCSI target name.iSCSI Target Name

Host mode of the iSCSI target.Host Mode

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts set to the relevant port.Number of Hosts

Resource group name and identifier of the iSCSI target.Resource Group Name (ID)

Add LUN Paths windowThis window provides information about LUs that are already set. You can view information aboutthe LUN and change the LUN ID.

526 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 527: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Name of the LDEV.LDEV Name

Identifier of the parity group.Parity Group ID

Pool names and pool identifiers.Pool Name (ID)If the LDEV is not used as a pool-VOL, a hyphen (-) appears.

Emulation types for each logical volume (or logical device).Emulation Type

Size of each logical volume.Capacity

Provisioning type of the logical volume.Provisioning Type

• Basic: Internal volume.

• External: External volume.

• THP: V-VOL of Thin Provisioning.

• Snapshot: Fast Snap volume.

Displays the attribute of the LDEV.Attribute

• Command Device: Command device.

• Remote Command Device: Remote command device.

• Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.

• Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port. If the T10 PImode is not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

T10 PI Mode1

Number of assigned LUNs.LUN ID ((number-of-LUNs) Sets ofPaths)

Name of the port and the host group (or iSCSI target name) of assignedLUNs. This item appears according to the number of assigned LUNs.

port-ID/ host-group-name (oriSCSI target name)

Add LUN Paths wizard 527

Page 528: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

To change the LDEV name setting, select an LDEV and then click thisbutton.

Change LDEV Settings

To change the LUN setting, select the check box in the table column ofport-ID/host-group-name, select the target LDEV, and then click thisbutton.

Change LUN IDs

Add LUN Paths confirmation window

Fibre ChannelConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

DescriptionItem

Name of the port.Port ID

Identifier of LUN.LUN ID

Identifier of the LDEV.LDEV ID

Name of the LDEV.LDEV Name

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

Identifier of the parity group.Parity Group ID

Pool names and pool identifiers.Pool Name (ID)If the LDEV is not used as a pool-VOL, a hyphen (-) appears.

Emulation types for each logical volume (or logical device).Emulation Type

Size of each logical volume.Capacity

528 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 529: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Provisioning types for each logical volume.Provisioning Type

• Basic: Internal volume.

• External: External volume.

• THP: V-VOL of Thin Provisioning.

• Snapshot: Fast Snap volume.

Displays the attribute of the LDEV.Attribute

• Command Device: Command device.

• Remote Command Device: Remote command device.

• Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.

• Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

Information about the ALUA mode.ALUA ModeEnabled: LDEV can be used in ALUA.Disabled: LDEV cannot be used in ALUA.

Asymmetric access states of the port. When using of iSCSI, a hyphen (-)appears.

Asymmetric Access States

Active/Optimized: Access from the host preferentially is performed on theport.Active/Non-Optimized: When disabled of the port of Active/Optimized, theaccess from the host is performed on the port.

T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port. If the T10 PImode is not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

T10 PI Mode1

iSCSIConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

Add LUN Paths wizard 529

Page 530: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Name of the port.Port ID

Identifier of LUN.LUN ID

Identifier of the LDEV.LDEV ID

Name of the LDEV.LDEV Name

Name of the iSCSI target alias.iSCSI Target Alias

Name of the iSCSI target.iSCSI Target Name

Identifier of the parity group.Parity Group ID

Pool names and pool identifiers.Pool Name (ID)If the LDEV is not used as a pool-VOL, a hyphen (-) appears.

Emulation types for each logical volume (or logical device).Emulation Type

Size of each logical volume.Capacity

Provisioning types for each logical volume.Provisioning Type

• Basic: Internal volume.

• External: External volume.

• THP: V-VOL of Thin Provisioning.

• Snapshot: Fast Snap volume.

Displays the attribute of the LDEV.Attribute

• Command Device: Command device.

• Remote Command Device: Remote command device.

• Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.

• Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port. If the T10 PImode is not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

T10 PI Mode1

530 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 531: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Create Host Groups wizardCreate Host Groups window

DescriptionItem

Enter the name of the host group.Host Group NameAs a host group name, you can use single-byte ASCII characters(alphanumeric characters and symbols) up to 64 characters. You cannotuse the following symbols: \ / : , ; * ? " < > |You cannot use blanks at the beginning or end of the host group name.

Select the resource group in which the host group is created. If Any isselected, among all ports being allocated to the user, ports where the host

Resource Group Name (ID)

group can be add are available in the Available Ports table. If other thanAny is selected, among ports assigned to the selected resource group,ports where the host group can be add are available in the AvailablePorts table.

Select the host mode from the list.Host Mode

Adds the settings to the Selected Host Groups table.Add

Create Host Groups wizard 531

Page 532: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Available Hosts table

This table lists information about the registered hosts.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

WWN of the port.HBA WWN

Name of the host.Host Name

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

Indicates whether this is a new host.New Host

• Yes: The host is newly added and has never been connected via acable to any port in the storage system.

• No: The host has been connected via a cable to another port.

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Adds a new host. Or, select host bus adapters and then click this buttonto assign a nickname to the host bus adapter.

Add New Host

532 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 533: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Available Ports tableThis table lists the registered ports.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Attribute of the port indicating I/O flow.Attribute

• Initiator: Issues I/O commands to a target port when I/O is executedbetween storage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, andso on.

• Target: Receives I/O commands from a host.

• RCU Target: Receives I/O commands from an initiator when I/O isexecuted between storage systems with Continuous AccessSynchronous, and so on.

• External: Issues I/O commands to a target port of an external storagesystem with External Storage.

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Security

T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port. If the T10 PImode is not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

T10 PI Mode1

Click to view a list of host mode options.Options

Host Mode Options table

DescriptionItem

The ID number of the host mode option.Mode No.

The description of host mode option.Option Description

The setting status (Enabled or Disabled) of the host mode option.Status

Indicates that the host mode option is enabled.Enabled

Indicates that the host mode option is disabled.Disabled

Create Host Groups wizard 533

Page 534: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected Host Groups table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

The host mode of the host group.Host Mode

Attribute of the port indicating I/O flow.Port Attribute

• Initiator: Issues I/O commands to a target port when I/O is executedbetween storage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, andso on.

• Target: Receives I/O commands from a host.

• RCU Target: Receives I/O commands from an initiator when I/O isexecuted between storage systems with Continuous AccessSynchronous, and so on.

• External: Issues I/O commands to a target port of an external storagesystem with External Storage.

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts registered in the host group.Number of Hosts

T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port. If the T10 PImode is not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

T10 PI Mode1

Resource group name and identifier of the host group.Resource Group Name (ID)

Model name and serial number of the virtual storage machine that has thehost group.

Virtual Storage Machine

Details about the selected host group.Detail

Removes the selected host groups from theSelected Host Groups table.Remove

534 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 535: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Next Task OptionClick Next to go to the task setting window.

Create Host Groups confirmation window

NOTE: If multiple tasks that are connected in one wizard are executed, this window shows allconfigured items of tasks. To show information of configured items other than this topic, clickBack to display related setting windows, and then click Help.

Create Host Groups table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

The host mode of the host group.Host Mode

Attribute of the port indicating I/O flow.Port Attribute

• Initiator: Issues I/O commands to a target port when I/O is executedbetween storage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, andso on.

• Target: Receives I/O commands from a host.

• RCU Target: Receives I/O commands from an initiator when I/O isexecuted between storage systems with Continuous AccessSynchronous, and so on.

• External: Issues I/O commands to a target port of an external storagesystem with External Storage.

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts registered in the host group.Number of Hosts

T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port. If the T10 PImode is not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

T10 PI Mode1

Resource group name and identifier of the host group.Resource Group Name (ID)

Model name and serial number of the virtual storage machine that has thehost group.

Virtual Storage Machine

Details about the selected host group.Detail

Create Host Groups wizard 535

Page 536: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Edit Host Groups wizardEdit Host Groups window

Use this window to edit host group properties for selected host groups. Properties include hostgroup name, host mode, or host mode options.When you select multiple host groups to which different host modes are defined, if the host groupassigned to an initiator port is included, you cannot finish the Edit Host Groups operation.

DescriptionItem

Specify the name of the host group.Host Group nameHost group name can be up to 64 single-byte ASCII characters(alpha-numerals and symbols).You cannot use the following symbols: \ / : , ; * ? " < > |You cannot use blanks at the beginning or end of the host group name.If a host group assigned to an initiator port is included in the specified hostgroups, this item is unavailable.

Select the host mode from the list.Host ModeIf a host group assigned to an initiator port is included in the specified hostgroups, this item is unavailable.

536 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 537: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Host Mode Options tableTo set the host mode option, select a host mode option, and then click Enable. If you do notneed a host mode option, select an unnecessary host mode option, and then click Disable.

DescriptionItem

Number identifier of the host mode option.Mode No.

Description of the host mode option.Option Description

Indicates the current status setting (Enabled or Disabled) of the host modeoption on this host group.

Status

Enables the host mode option.Enable

Disables the host mode option.Disable

Edit Host Groups confirmation windowConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

Selected Host Groups table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

The host mode of the host group.Host Mode

Edit Host Groups wizard 537

Page 538: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Attribute of the port indicating I/O flow.Port Attribute

• Initiator: Issues I/O commands to a target port when I/O is executedbetween storage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, andso on.

• Target: Receives I/O commands from a host.

• RCU Target: Receives I/O commands from an initiator when I/O isexecuted between storage systems with Continuous AccessSynchronous, and so on.

• External: Issues I/O commands to a target port of an external storagesystem with External Storage.

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts registered in the host group.Number of Hosts

T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port. If the T10 PImode is not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

T10 PI Mode1

Details about the selected host group.Detail

Add to Host Groups wizard (when specific host is selected)Add to Host Groups window

Available Host Groups tableThis table lists host groups in which selected hosts can be registered. Only the host groupsassigned to the logged-on user are available.

538 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 539: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

The host mode of the host group.Host Mode

Attribute of the port indicating I/O flow.Port Attribute

• Initiator: Issues I/O commands to a target port when I/O is executedbetween storage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, andso on.

• Target: Receives I/O commands from a host.

• RCU Target: Receives I/O commands from an initiator when I/O isexecuted between storage systems with Continuous AccessSynchronous, and so on.

• External: Issues I/O commands to a target port of an external storagesystem with External Storage.

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts registered in the host group.Number of Hosts

T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port. If the T10 PImode is not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

T10 PI Mode1

Details about the selected host group.Detail

Adds host groups selected from the Available Host Groups table to theSelected Host Groups table.

Add

Removes the selected host groups from theSelected Host Groups table.Remove

Selected Host Groups tableThis table lists the selected host groups.

Add to Host Groups wizard (when specific host is selected) 539

Page 540: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

The host mode of the host group.Host Mode

Attribute of the port indicating I/O flow.Port Attribute

• Initiator: Issues I/O commands to a target port when I/O is executedbetween storage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, andso on.

• Target: Receives I/O commands from a host.

• RCU Target: Receives I/O commands from an initiator when I/O isexecuted between storage systems with Continuous AccessSynchronous, and so on.

• External: Issues I/O commands to a target port of an external storagesystem with External Storage.

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts registered in the host group.Number of Hosts

T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port. If the T10 PImode is not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

T10 PI Mode1

Details about the selected host group.Detail

Add to Host Groups confirmation windowConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

540 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 541: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected Hosts tableThis table lists the hosts selected to be added to a host group.

DescriptionItem

WWN of the port.HBA WWN

Name of the host.Host Name

Selected Host Groups tableA list of host groups to which hosts are registered.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

The host mode of the host group.Host Mode

Attribute of the port indicating I/O flow.Port Attribute

• Initiator: Issues I/O commands to a target port when I/O is executedbetween storage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, andso on.

• Target: Receives I/O commands from a host.

Add to Host Groups wizard (when specific host is selected) 541

Page 542: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

• RCU Target: Receives I/O commands from an initiator when I/O isexecuted between storage systems with Continuous AccessSynchronous, and so on.

• External: Issues I/O commands to a target port of an external storagesystem with External Storage.

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts registered in the host group.Number of Hosts

T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port. If the T10 PImode is not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

T10 PI Mode1

Add Hosts wizard (when specific hosts group is selected)Add Hosts window

Fibre Channel

542 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 543: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Available Hosts table (Fibre Channel)

This table lists the hosts that can be registered in the selected host group.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

WWN of the port.HBA WWN

Name of the host.Host Name

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

Indicates whether this is a newly added host.New Host

• Yes: The host is newly added and has never been connected via acable to any port in the storage system.

• No: The host has been connected via a cable to another port.

Adds a new host. Note that Port ID and Host Group Name will be blankafter a new host is added.

Add New Host

Adds hosts selected from theAvailable Hosts table to the Selected Hoststable.

Add

Removes hosts from the Selected Hosts table.Remove

Selected Hosts table (Fibre Channel)This table lists hosts selected from the Available Hosts table.

Add Hosts wizard (when specific hosts group is selected) 543

Page 544: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port. This field is blank for the host created by clicking AddNew host.

Port ID

WWN of the port.HBA WWN

Name of the host.Host Name

Name of the host group. Note that this field is blank for the host createdby clicking Add New host.

Host Group Name

Indicates whether this is a newly added host.New Host

• Yes: The host is newly added and has never been connected via acable to any port in the storage system.

• No: The host has been connected via a cable to another port.

544 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 545: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

iSCSI

Available Hosts table (iSCSI)

This table lists the hosts that can be registered in the selected iSCSI target.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

HBA iSCSI Name of the port.HBA iSCSI Name

Name of the host.Host Name

Add Hosts wizard (when specific hosts group is selected) 545

Page 546: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Number of iSCSI Targets.Number of iSCSI Targets

Indicates whether this is a newly added host.New Host

• Yes: The host is newly added and has never been connected via acable to any port in the storage system.

• No: The host has been connected via a cable to another port.

Adds a new host. Note that Port ID and Host Group Name will be blankafter a new host is added.

Add New Host

Adds hosts selected from theAvailable Hosts table to the Selected Hoststable.

Add

Removes hosts from the Selected Hosts table.Remove

Selected Hosts table (iSCSI)

This table lists hosts selected from the Available Hosts table.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

HBA iSCSI Name of the port.HBA WWN

Name of the host.Host Name

Number of iSCSI Targets.Number of iSCSI Targets

Indicates whether this is a newly added host.Add New Host

• Yes: The host is newly added and has never been connected via acable to any port in the storage system.

• No: The host has been connected via a cable to another port.

546 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 547: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Add Hosts confirmation window

Fibre ChannelConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

Selected Host Groups table (Fibre Channel)This table lists the selected hosts.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

The host mode of the host group.Host Mode

Attribute of the port indicating I/O flow.Port Attribute

• Initiator: Issues I/O commands to a target port when I/O is executedbetween storage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, andso on.

• Target: Receives I/O commands from a host.

• RCU Target: Receives I/O commands from an initiator when I/O isexecuted between storage systems with Continuous AccessSynchronous, and so on.

• External: Issues I/O commands to a target port of an external storagesystem with External Storage.

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Add Hosts wizard (when specific hosts group is selected) 547

Page 548: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Number of hosts registered in the host group.Number of Hosts

T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port. If the T10 PImode is not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

T10 PI Mode1

Selected Hosts table (Fibre Channel)This table contains a list of added host groups.

DescriptionItem

WWN of the port.HBA WWN

Name of the host.Host Name

iSCSIConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

Selected iSCSI Targets table (iSCSI)This table lists the selected iSCSI targets.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

iSCSI target alias.iSCSI Target Alias

iSCSI target name.iSCSI Target Name

The host mode of the iSCSI target.Host Mode

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

548 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 549: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Number of hosts registered in the host group.Number of Hosts

Information about the authentication.Authentication

• Method: Authentication method that is CHAP, None, or Comply withHost Setting

• Mutual CHAP: Mutual CHAP setting that is Enabled or Disabled

• User name

• Number of Users

Selected Hosts table (iSCSI)This table contains a list of added host groups.

DescriptionItem

HBA iSCSI name of the port.HBA iSCSI Name

Name of the host.Host Name

Delete LUN Paths wizardDelete LUN Paths window

Selected LUN Paths tableThis table provides information about the selected LUN paths.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Identifier of the selected LUN paths.LUN ID

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Delete LUN Paths wizard 549

Page 550: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Name of the LDEV.LDEV Name

Name of the host group or iSCSI target alias.Host Group Name / iSCSI Target Alias

iSCSI target name.iSCSI Target Name

Size of each logical volume.Capacity

Displays the attribute of the LDEV.Attribute

• Command Device: Command device.

• Remote Command Device: Remote command device.

• Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.

• Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port. If the T10 PImode is not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

T10 PI Mode1

Asymmetric access states of the port. When using of iSCSI, a hyphen (-)appears.

Asymmetric Access States

Active/Optimized: Access from the host preferentially is performed on theport.Active/Non-Optimized: When disabled of the port of Active/Optimized, theaccess from the host is performed on the port.

Removes LUN paths from the Selected LUN Paths table.Remove from Delete process

Removes LUN paths from the Selected LUN Paths table.Delete all defined LUN paths to aboveLDEVs When this check box is selected, the host groups of all the alternate paths

in the LDEV displayed in the Selected LUNs table must be assigned tothe Storage Administrator group permitted to manage them.

Next Task OptionClick Next to go to the task setting window.

Delete LUN Paths confirmation windowConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

550 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 551: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected LUN Paths table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Identifier of the selected LUN path.LUN ID

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Name of the LDEV.LDEV Name

Name of the host group iSCSI target alias .Host Group Name / iSCSI Target Alias

iSCSI target nameiSCSI Target Name

Size of each logical volume.Capacity

Displays the attribute of the LDEV.Attribute

• Command Device: Command device.

• Remote Command Device: Remote command device.

• Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.

• Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port. If the T10 PImode is not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

T10 PI Mode1

Asymmetric access states of the port. When using of iSCSI, a hyphen (-)appears.

Asymmetric Access States

Active/Optimized: Access from the host preferentially is performed on theport.Active/Non-Optimized: When disabled of the port of Active/Optimized, theaccess from the host is performed on the port.

NOTE: If multiple tasks that are connected in one wizard are executed, this window shows allconfigured items of tasks. To show information of configured items other than this topic, clickBack to display related setting windows, and then click Help.

Delete LUN Paths wizard 551

Page 552: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Edit Host wizardUse this wizard to edit host parameters.

CAUTION: In one host, if the setting operations are performed with two times or more to editmany setting items, wait until the primary task applies then perform the secondary operation. Ifthe secondary operation is performed while being applying of the primary task, the primary taskis canceled and the secondary task is applied to the storage system.

Edit Host window

Fibre Channel

For Fibre Channel Ports

DescriptionItem

Specify the WWN of the port in 16 digits of hexadecimal numbers.HBA WWN

Specify the host name.Host NameHost name can be up to 64 single-byte ASCII characters (alpha-numeralsand symbols).You cannot use the following symbols: \ / : , ; * ? " < > |You cannot use blanks at the beginning or end of the host name. A hostname is case-sensitive.

If this check box is selected, the changes made in this dialog box will alsoaffect other ports.

Apply same settings to the HBA WWNin all ports

552 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 553: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

iSCSI

For iSCSI Ports

DescriptionItem

Specify the WWN of the port in 16 digits of hexadecimal numbers.HBA iSCSI Name

• iqn or eui: Select the format of the iSCSI name.

• Text box: Specify the iSCSI name.For the iqn format, an iSCSI name takes up to 219 single-byte ASCIIcharacters (alpha-numerals and symbols). You cannot use the followingsymbols: \ / : , ; * ? " < > |For the eui format, an iSCSI name takes fixed to 16 alpha-numerals.

Specify the host name.Host NameHost name can be up to 32 single-byte ASCII characters (alpha-numeralsand symbols).You cannot use the following symbols: \ / : , ; * ? " < > |You cannot use blanks at the beginning or end of the host name. A hostname is case-sensitive.

If this check box is selected, the changes made in this dialog box will alsoaffect other ports.

Apply same settings to the HBA iSCSIname in all ports.

Edit Host confirmation window

Fibre ChannelConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

Edit Host wizard 553

Page 554: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected Hosts table (Fibre Channel)

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

WWN of the port.HBA WWN

Name of the host.Host Name

iSCSIConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

Selected Hosts table (iSCSI ports)

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

HBA iSCSI Name of the port.HBA iSCSI Name

554 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 555: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Name of the host.Host Name

Number of iSCSI targets.Number of iSCSI Targets

Details about the selected host.Detail

Edit Ports wizardUse this wizard to edit port parameters.

CAUTION: In one port, if the setting operations are performed with two times or more to editmany setting items, wait until the primary task applies then perform the secondary operation. Ifthe secondary operation is performed while being applying of the primary task, the primary taskis canceled and the secondary task is applied to the storage system.

Edit Ports window

Fibre Channel

For Fibre Channel ports

DescriptionItem

Select the attribute of the port indicating I/O flow.Port Attribute

• Initiator: Issues I/O commands to a target port when I/O is executedbetween storage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, andso on.

• Target: Receives I/O commands from a host.

• RCU Target: Receives I/O commands from an initiator when I/O isexecuted between storage systems with Continuous AccessSynchronous, and so on.

• External: Issues I/O commands to a target port of an external storagesystem with External Storage.

If this port attribute is changed from Target or RCU Target to Initiator orto External, the host group of this port belongs to meta_resource.Therefore, the host group of this port is not displayed in windows.

Select whether LUN security is Enabled or Disabled.Port Security

Edit Ports wizard 555

Page 556: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Select the data transfer speed, in Gbps, for the selected Fibre Channelport.

Port Speed

IfAuto is selected, the storage system automatically sets the data transferspeed to 2, 4, 8, 10, or 16 Gbps.Caution: If you are using 2-Gbps HBA and switch, set the transfer speedof the CHF (Fibre Channel adapter) port as 2 Gbps. If you are using 4-GbpsHBA and switch, set the transfer speed of the CHF port as 4 Gbps. If youare using 8-Gbps HBA and switch, set the transfer speed of the CHF portas 8 Gbps. If you are using 16-Gbps HBA and switch, set the transferspeed of the CHF port as 16-Gbps. If the Auto Negotiation setting isrequired, the linkup might become improper at server restart. Check achannel lamp, and if it is blinking, remove and re-insert the cable to performthe signal synchronization and linkup.When the transfer speed of the CHF port is set to Auto, the data mightnot be transferred at the maximum speed depending on the connecteddevice. Confirm the transfer speed appearing in Speed in the Ports listwhen you start up the storage system, HBA, or switch. When the transferspeed is not the maximum speed, select the maximum speed from the liston the right or remove and reinsert the cable.When the transfer speed of the CHF port is set to Auto, the data mightnot be transferred at the maximum speed depending on the connecteddevice. Confirm the transfer speed appearing in Speed in the Ports listwhen you start up the storage system, HBA, or switch. When the transferspeed is not the maximum speed, select the maximum speed from the liston the right or remove and reinsert the cable.Only 10 Gbps can be specified for the FCoE port.Auto cannot be specifiedfor the FCoE port.

Select the address of the selected port. Do not set the address to theFCoE port.

Address (Loop ID)

Select whether a fabric switch is set to ON or OFF. Only ON can bespecified for the FCoE port.

Fabric

Select the topology.Connection Type

• FC-AL: Fibre Channel arbitrated loop

• P-to-P (point-to-point). Only P-to-P can be specified for the FCoE port.

Caution: Some fabric switches require that you specify point-to-pointtopology. If you enable a fabric switch, check the documentation for thefabric switch to determine whether your switch requires point-to-pointtopology.

556 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 557: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

iSCSI

For iSCSI ports

DescriptionItem

Information about IPv4.IPv4 Settings

• IP Address: IP address of the port.

• Subnet Mask: Subnet mask of the port.

• Default Gateway: Default gateway of the port.

Information about IPv6.IPv6 Settings

• Mode: IPv6 setting (Enabled or Disabled) for the port.

• Link Local Address: Link local address for the port.

• Global Address: Global address for the port.

• Default Gateway: Default gateway address for the port.

Port attributePort Attribute

Specify this information if the LUN security is used or not used.Port Security

• Enable: The LUN security is enabled.

• Disable: The LUN security is disabled.

Port speed fixes to 10 Gbps.Port Speed

Select the address of the selected port. Do not set the address to theFCoE port.

TCP Port Number

Edit Ports wizard 557

Page 558: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Specify the TCP port number.

Specify this information if the selective ACK is used or not used.Selective ACK

• Enable: The selective ACK is enabled.

• Disable: The selective ACK is disabled.

Select the topology.Delayed ACK

• FC-AL: Fibre Channel arbitrated loop

• P-to-P (point-to-point). Only P-to-P can be specified for the FCoE port.

Caution: Some fabric switches require that you specify point-to-pointtopology. If you enable a fabric switch, check the documentation for thefabric switch to determine whether your switch requires point-to-pointtopology.

Select the maximum window size from 64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB, 512 KB,or 1024 KB.

Maximum Window Size

Select Ethernet MTU size from 1500 bytes, 4500 bytes, or 9000 bytes.Ethernet MTU Size

Specify the interval time to perform the keep alive timer option.Keep Alive Timer

Specify this information if the VLAN tagging mode is used or not used.VLAN Tagging Mode

• Enable: The VLAN tagging mode is enabled and specify the VLAN IDin the text box.

• Disable: The VLAN tagging mode is disabled.

Specify this information if the iSNS server is used or not used.iSNS Server

• • Enable: The iSNS server mode is enabled. And specify the IP Addressand TCP Port Number of the following.

• Disable: The iSNS server mode is disabled.

Specify the IP address for IPv4 or IPv6.IP Address

Specify the TCP port number.TCP Port Number

Edit Ports confirmation window

Fibre ChannelConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

558 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 559: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected Ports table (Fibre Channel)

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Attribute of the port indicating I/O flow.Attribute

• Initiator: Issues I/O commands to a target port when I/O is executedbetween storage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, andso on.

• Target: Receives I/O commands from a host.

• RCU Target: Receives I/O commands from an initiator when I/O isexecuted between storage systems with Continuous AccessSynchronous, and so on.

• External: Issues I/O commands to a target port of an external storagesystem with External Storage.

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Security

Data transfer speed for the selected Fibre Channel port in the unit of Gbps(Gigabit per second).

Speed

Address of the selected port.Address (Loop ID)

Status setting (ON or OFF) for a fabric switch.Fabric

Topology of the selected port.Connection Type

• FC-AL: Fibre Channel arbitrated loop

• P-to-P: Point-to-point

iSCSIConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

Edit Ports wizard 559

Page 560: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected Ports table for iSCSI ports

DescriptionItem

Information about IPv4.IPv4 Settings

• IP Address: IP address of the port.

• Subnet Mask: Subnet mask of the port.

• Default Gateway: Default gateway of the port.

Information about IPv6.IPv6 Settings

• Mode: IPv6 setting (Enabled or Disabled) for the port.

• Link Local Address: Link local address for the port.

• Global Address: Global address for the port.

• Default Gateway: Default gateway address for the port.

Specify this information if the LUN security is used or not used.Port Security

• Enable: The LUN security is enabled.

• Disable: The LUN security is disabled.

Select the data transfer speed for the selected port. 1 Gbps, 10 Gbps, orAuto can be selected.

Port Speed

Select the address of the selected port. Do not set the address to theFCoE port.

TCP Port Number

Specify the TCP port number.

560 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 561: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Specify this information if the selective ACK is used or not used.Selective ACK

• Enable: The selective ACK is enabled.

• Disable: The selective ACK is disabled.

Select the topology.Delayed ACK

• FC-AL: Fibre Channel arbitrated loop

• P-to-P (point-to-point). Only P-to-P can be specified for the FCoE port.

Caution: Some fabric switches require that you specify point-to-pointtopology. If you enable a fabric switch, check the documentation for thefabric switch to determine whether your switch requires point-to-pointtopology.

Select the maximum window size from 64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB, 512 KB,or 1024 KB.

Maximum Window Size

Select Ethernet MTU size from 1500 bytes, 4500 bytes, or 9000 bytes.Ethernet MTU Size

Specify the interval time to perform the keep alive timer option.Keep Alive Timer

VLAN • Tagging Mode: Appears with enabled or disabled for VLAN.

• ID: Identifier of VLAN.

iSNS Server • Mode: iSNS server setting (Enabled or Disabled).

• IP Address: IP address of the iSNS server.

• TCP Port Number: TCP port number of the iSNS server.

Create Alternative LUN Paths wizardCreate Alternative LUN Paths window

DescriptionItem

Select the resource group in which the host group is created. If Any isselected, among all ports being allocated to the user, ports where the host

Resource Group Name (ID)

group can be add are available in the Available Ports table. If other thanAny is selected, among ports assigned to the selected resource group,ports where the host group can be add are available in the AvailablePorts table.

Create Alternative LUN Paths wizard 561

Page 562: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Available Ports tableThis table lists the ports for which alternate paths can be created.

562 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 563: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Attribute of the port indicating I/O flow.Attribute

• Initiator: Issues I/O commands to a target port when I/O is executedbetween storage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, andso on.

• Target: Receives I/O commands from a host.

• RCU Target: Receives I/O commands from an initiator when I/O isexecuted between storage systems with Continuous AccessSynchronous, and so on.

• External: Issues I/O commands to a target port of an external storagesystem with External Storage.

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Security

Adds ports selected from the Available Ports table to the Selected Portstable.

Add

Removes ports from the Selected Ports table.Remove

Create Alternative LUN Paths wizard 563

Page 564: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected Ports table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Attribute of the port indicating I/O flow.Attribute

• Initiator: Issues I/O commands to a target port when I/O is executedbetween storage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, andso on.

• Target: Receives I/O commands from a host.

• RCU Target: Receives I/O commands from an initiator when I/O isexecuted between storage systems with Continuous AccessSynchronous, and so on.

• External: Issues I/O commands to a target port of an external storagesystem with External Storage.

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Security

Create Alternative LUN Paths confirmation window

Fibre ChannelConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

564 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 565: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected Host Groups table for Fibre Channel ports

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

The host mode of the host group.Host Mode

Attribute of the port indicating I/O flow.Port Attribute

• Initiator: Issues I/O commands to a target port when I/O is executedbetween storage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, andso on.

• Target: Receives I/O commands from a host.

• RCU Target: Receives I/O commands from an initiator when I/O isexecuted between storage systems with Continuous AccessSynchronous, and so on.

• External: Issues I/O commands to a target port of an external storagesystem with External Storage.

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts registered in the host group.Number of Hosts

T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port. If the T10 PImode is not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

T10 PI Mode1

Resource group name and identifier of the resource group containing thehost groups.

Resource Group Name (ID)

Asymmetric access states of the port. When using of iSCSI, a hyphen (-)appears.

Asymmetric Access States

Create Alternative LUN Paths wizard 565

Page 566: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Active/Optimized: Access from the host preferentially is performed on theport.Active/Non-Optimized: When disabled of the port of Active/Optimized, theaccess from the host is performed on the port.

Added LUNs table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the added logical unit.LUN ID

Identifier of the LDEV.LDEV ID

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV Name

Emulation type for each logical volume (or logical device).Emulation Type

Size of each logical volume.Capacity

Identifier of the parity group.Parity Group ID

Number of paths set for the LDEV.Number of Paths

Information about the ALUA mode.ALUA ModeEnabled: LDEV can be used in ALUA.Disabled: LDEV cannot be used in ALUA.

iSCSI

566 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 567: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected iSCSI Targets table for iSCSI ports

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Alias of the iSCSI target.iSCSI Target Alias

Name of the iSCSI target.iSCSI Target Name

The host mode of the iSCSI target.Host Mode

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts registered in the host group.Number of Hosts

Resource group name and identifier of the resource group containing thehost groups.

Resource Group Name (ID)

Added LUNs table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the added logical unit.LUN ID

Identifier of the LDEV.LDEV ID

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV Name

Emulation type for each logical volume (or logical device).Emulation Type

Size of each logical volume.Capacity

Identifier of the parity group.Parity Group ID

Number of paths set for the LDEV.Number of Paths

Create Alternative LUN Paths wizard 567

Page 568: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Copy LUN Paths wizardCopy LUN Paths window

Fibre Channel

Selection Object

DescriptionItem

Selection Object • Host Group: Select to copy LUN paths to host groups.

• iSCSI target: Select to copy LUN paths to iSCSI targets.

568 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 569: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Available Host Groups table

This table lists the host groups for which LU paths can be copied. Only the host group assignedto the logged-on user are available.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

The host mode of the host group.Host Mode

Attribute of the port indicating I/O flow.Port Attribute

• Initiator: Issues I/O commands to a target port when I/O is executedbetween storage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, andso on.

• Target: Receives I/O commands from a host.

• RCU Target: Receives I/O commands from an initiator when I/O isexecuted between storage systems with Continuous AccessSynchronous, and so on.

• External: Issues I/O commands to a target port of an external storagesystem with External Storage.

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts registered in the host group.Number of Hosts

Asymmetric access states of the port. When using of iSCSI, a hyphen (-)appears.

Asymmetric Access States

Active/Optimized: Access from the host preferentially is performed on theport.Active/Non-Optimized: When disabled of the port of Active/Optimized, theaccess from the host is performed on the port.

Details about the selected host group.Detail

Copy LUN Paths wizard 569

Page 570: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Adds host groups selected from the Available Host Groups table to theSelected Host Groups table.

Add

Removes the selected host groups from theSelected Host Groups table.Remove

Selected Host Groups table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

The host mode of the host group.Host Mode

Attribute of the port indicating I/O flow.Port Attribute

• Initiator: Issues I/O commands to a target port when I/O is executedbetween storage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, andso on.

• Target: Receives I/O commands from a host.

• RCU Target: Receives I/O commands from an initiator when I/O isexecuted between storage systems with Continuous AccessSynchronous, and so on.

• External: Issues I/O commands to a target port of an external storagesystem with External Storage.

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts registered in the host group.Number of Hosts

T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port. If the T10 PImode is not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

T10 PI Mode1

Asymmetric access states of the port. When using of iSCSI, a hyphen (-)appears.

Asymmetric Access States

570 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 571: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Active/Optimized: Access from the host preferentially is performed on theport.Active/Non-Optimized: When disabled of the port of Active/Optimized, theaccess from the host is performed on the port.

Details about the selected host group.Detail

iSCSI

Available Selected iSCSI Targets table

Copy LUN Paths wizard 571

Page 572: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

This table lists iSCSI targets for which LU paths can be copied. Only iSCSI targets assigned tothe logged-on user are available.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

iSCSI target alias.iSCSI Target Alias

iSCSI target name.iSCSI Target Name

Host mode of the iSCSI target.Host Mode

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts set to the relevant port.Number of Hosts

Details about the selected iSCSI target.Detail

Adds host groups selected from the Available iSCSI Targets table to theSelected iSCSI Targets table.

Add

Removes the selected host groups from the Selected iSCSI Targetstable.

Remove

Selected iSCSI Targets table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

iSCSI target alias.iSCSI Target Alias

iSCSI target name.iSCSI Target Name

Host mode of the iSCSI target.Host Mode

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

572 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 573: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Number of hosts set to the relevant port.Number of Hosts

Details about the selected iSCSI target.Detail

Copy LUN Paths confirmation window

Fibre ChannelConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

Selected Host Groups table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

The host mode of the host group.Host Mode

Attribute of the port indicating I/O flow.Port Attribute

• Initiator: Issues I/O commands to a target port when I/O is executedbetween storage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, andso on.

• Target: Receives I/O commands from a host.

• RCU Target: Receives I/O commands from an initiator when I/O isexecuted between storage systems with Continuous AccessSynchronous, and so on.

• External: Issues I/O commands to a target port of an external storagesystem with External Storage.

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts registered in the host group.Number of Hosts

Copy LUN Paths wizard 573

Page 574: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port. If the T10 PImode is not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

T10 PI Mode1

Asymmetric access states of the port. When using of iSCSI, a hyphen (-)appears.

Asymmetric Access States

Active/Optimized: Access from the host preferentially is performed on theport.Active/Non-Optimized: When disabled of the port of Active/Optimized, theaccess from the host is performed on the port.

Added LUNs table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the added logical unit.LUN ID

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Name of the LDEV.LDEV Name

Emulation type for each logical volume (or logical device).Emulation Type

Size of each logical volume.Capacity

Displays the IDs of parity groups.Parity Group ID

Displays the number of paths set to the relevant LDEV.Number of Paths

Information about the ALUA mode.ALUA ModeEnabled: LDEV can be used in ALUA.Disabled: LDEV cannot be used in ALUA.

iSCSIConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

574 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 575: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected iSCSI Targets (iSCSI)

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

iSCSI target alias.iSCSI Target Alias

iSCSI target name.iSCSI Target Name

Host mode of the iSCSI target.Host Mode

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts set to the relevant port.Number of Hosts

Asymmetric access states of the port. When using of iSCSI, a hyphen (-)appears.

Asymmetric Access States

Active/Optimized: Access from the host preferentially is performed on theport.Active/Non-Optimized: When disabled of the port of Active/Optimized, theaccess from the host is performed on the port.

Added LUNs table (iSCSI)

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the added logical unit.LUN ID

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Name of the LDEV.LDEV Name

Size of each logical volume.Capacity

Displays the IDs of parity groups.Parity Group ID

Displays the number of paths set to the relevant LDEV.Number of Paths

Information about the ALUA mode.ALUA ModeEnabled: LDEV can be used in ALUA.Disabled: LDEV cannot be used in ALUA.

Copy LUN Paths wizard 575

Page 576: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Remove Hosts wizardRemove Hosts window

Selected Hosts table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

WWN of the port.HBA WWN

Name of the host.Host Name

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

If this check box is selected, selected hosts are removed from all hostgroups containing the hosts in the storage system.

Remove selected hosts from all hostgroups containing the hosts in thestorage system

Remove Hosts confirmation windowConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

576 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 577: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected Hosts table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

WWN of the port.HBA WWN

Name of the host.Host Name

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

Remove Hosts wizard 577

Page 578: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Edit UUIDs wizardEdit UUIDs window

DescriptionItem

For an OPEN VMS server host: The total length of the Prefix and the InitialNumber cannot exceed 5 characters. If the Prefix is 5 characters, youcannot specify an Initial Number and vice versa.

Prefix

For a server host other than OPEN VMS: The total length of the Prefixand the Initial Number cannot exceed 64 characters. If the Prefix is 64characters, you cannot specify an Initial Number and vice versa.The following rules apply to UUID:

• These characters cannot be used: \ / : , ; * ? " < > |

• A space character cannot be used for the first and the last characters.

• UUIDs are case-sensitive. For example, Abc and abc are differentUUIDs.

For an OPEN VMS server host: The total length of the Prefix and the InitialNumber cannot exceed 5 characters. If the Prefix is 5 characters, youcannot specify an Initial Number and vice versa.

Initial Number

For a server host other than OPEN VMS: The total length of the Prefixand the Initial Number cannot exceed 64 characters. If the Prefix is 64characters, you cannot specify an Initial Number and vice versa.The following rules apply to the initial number.Example:

• 1: Up to 9 numbers are added (1, 2, 3 ... 9)

• 08: Up to 92 numbers are added (08, 09, 10 ... 99)(If the host mode is OpenVMS, the numbers are: 8, 9, 10 ... 99)

• 23: Up to 77 numbers are added (23, 24, 25 ... 99)

CAUTION: If UUID is blank, the UUID setting is released.

Edit UUIDs confirmation windowConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

578 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 579: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected LUNs table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Logical units whose UUID has been changed.LUN ID

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Name of the LDEV.LDEV Name

Identifies the set or changed UUID. A blank field indicates that the UUIDis released.

UUID

Emulation types for each logical volume (or logical device).Emulation Type

Size of each logical volume.Capacity

Edit UUIDs wizard 579

Page 580: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Add New Host windowFibre Channel

For Fibre Channel Ports

DescriptionItem

Specify the WWN of the port in 16 digits of hexadecimal numbers.HBA WWN

Specify the host name.Host NameAs a host name, you can use single-byte ASCII characters (alpha-numeralsand symbols) up to 64 characters. You cannot use the following symbols:\ / : , ; * ? " < > |You cannot use blanks at the beginning or end of the host name. A hostname is case-sensitive.

iSCSI

For iSCSI ports

DescriptionItem

Specify the WWN of the port in 16 digits of hexadecimal numbers.HBA iSCSI Name

• iqn or eui: Select the format of the iSCSI name.

• Text box: Specify the iSCSI name.For the iqn format, an iSCSI name takes up to 219 single-byte ASCIIcharacters (alpha-numerals and symbols). You cannot use the followingsymbols:\ / : , ; * ? " < > |

580 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 581: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

For the eui format, an iSCSI name takes fixed to 16 alpha-numerals.

Specify the host name.Host NameAs a host name, you can use single-byte ASCII characters (alpha-numeralsand symbols) up to 32 characters. You cannot use the following symbols:\ / : , ; * ? " < > |You cannot use blanks at the beginning or end of the host name. A hostname is case-sensitive.

Change LUN IDs window

Setting field

DescriptionItem

Specify the initial LUN ID. If multiple LUs are selected, LUN IDs are setconsecutively from the specified LUN ID.

Initial LUN ID

Change LUN IDs window 581

Page 582: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Delete Host Groups window

Selected Host Groups table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

The host mode of the host group.Host Mode

Attribute of the port indicating I/O flow.Port Attribute

• Initiator: Issues I/O commands to a target port when I/O is executedbetween storage systems with Continuous Access Synchronous, andso on.

• Target: Receives I/O commands from a host.

• RCU Target: Receives I/O commands from an initiator when I/O isexecuted between storage systems with Continuous AccessSynchronous, and so on.

• External: Issues I/O commands to a target port of an external storagesystem with External Storage.

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts registered in the host group.Number of Hosts

Details about the selected host group.Detail

582 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 583: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Delete Login WWNs window

Selected Login WWNs table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

WWN of the port.HBA WWN

Name of the host.Host Name

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

Delete UUIDs window

Delete Login WWNs window 583

Page 584: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected LDEVs table

DescriptionItem

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Name of the LDEV.LDEV Name

This field is blank because the UUID is to be deleted.UUID

Emulation types for each logical volume (or logical device).Emulation Type

Size of each logical volume.Capacity

Host Group Properties windowUse this window to view properties about a selected host group.

Host Group Properties table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

The host mode of the host group.Host Mode

The number of host mode options that are enabled.Host Mode Option

T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port. If the T10 PImode is not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

T10 PI Mode1

Resource group names and IDs of host groups. The ID is provided inparentheses.

Resource Group Name (ID)

584 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 585: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Hosts table

DescriptionItem

WWN of the port.HBA WWN

Name of the host.Host Name

LUN Properties window

LUN Properties tableThis table provides information about the selected LUN.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the selected logical unit.LUN ID

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Name of the LDEV.LDEV Name

Name of the host group or iSCSI target alias.Host Group Name / iSCSI Target Alias

Name of the iSCSI target.iSCSI Target Name

The host mode of the host group.Host Mode

The number of host mode options that are enabled.Host Mode Option

Identifier of the port on this volume.Port ID

Type of port:Type

• Fibre: Fibre Channel port.

• iSCSI: iSCSI port.

LUN Properties window 585

Page 586: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Emulation types for the logical volume (or logical device).Emulation Type

Size of the logical volume.Capacity

Provisioning type assigned to this logical volume.Provisioning Type

• Basic: Internal volume.

• External: External volume.

• THP: V-VOL of Thin Provisioning.

• Snapshot: Fast Snap volume.

Displays the attribute of the LDEV.LDEV Attribute

• Command Device: Command device.

• Remote Command Device: Remote command device.

• Data Direct Mapping: LDEV of the data direct mapping attribute.

• Hyphen (-): Volume in which the attribute is not defined.

If the logical volume is used as a command device, indicates the statusof the attributes on this LDEV.

Command Device Attributes

• Security: Indicates the status of command device security is (enableor disable).

• User Authentication: Indicates the status of user authentication (enableor disable).

• Device Group Definition: Indicates the status of device group definition(enable or disable).

Access attribute assigned to this LDEV.Access Attribute

• Read/Write: Both read and write operations are permitted on the logicalvolume.

• Read-only: Read operations are permitted on the logical volume.

• Protect: Neither read nor write operations are permitted.

Number of paths set for the LDEV.Number of Paths

User-definable LUN identifier. This field is blank if the UUID is not set.UUID

Cache logical partition numbers.CLPRFor detailed information about CLPRs, see the XP7 Cache Partition UserGuide.

Displays the information about parity group encryption.Encryption

• Enable: Encryption setting of a parity group in which the LDEV is placedis enabled. Or the virtual volume associated with the pool whosepool-VOLs are enabled of the encryption setting.

• Disable: Encryption setting of a parity group (or a pool) in which theLDEV is placed is disabled. Or the virtual volume associated with thepool whose pool-VOLs are disabled of the encryption setting.

• Mixed: Pool-VOLs with enabled encryption settings and pool-VOLswith disabled encryption settings are intermixed in the pool in whichthe LDEV is placed.Caution: The data encryption is not ensured in the pool that has theMixed encryption setting. To manage the data encryption securely, usethe pool with an encryption setting of Enabled or Disabled.

• Hyphen(-): External volume or migration volume. As for THP V-VOL ofThin Provisioning or , the pool-VOL in the pool of which THP V-VOLbelongs is an external volume, or the pool of which THP V-VOL belongsis being blocked.

586 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 587: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

T10 PI attribute setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port. If the T10 PImode is not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

T10 PI Mode1

Information about the ALUA mode.ALUA ModeEnabled: LDEV can be used in ALUA.Disabled: LDEV cannot be used in ALUA.

Asymmetric access states of the port. When using of iSCSI, a hyphen (-)appears.

Asymmetric Access States

Active/Optimized: Access from the host preferentially is performed on theport.Active/Non-Optimized: When disabled of the port of Active/Optimized, theaccess from the host is performed on the port.

Displays LDEV ID of pool-VOL in the pool of the data direct mappingattribute.

Data Direct Mapped LDEV

A hyphen (-) appears if the data direct mapping attribute is disabled.

Information about the virtual storage machine.Virtual Storage Machine

• Model / Serial Number: Model name and serial number of the virtualstorage machine that has the LDEV.

• LDEV ID: Virtual LDEV ID. If a Virtual LDEV ID is not assigned to theLDEV, this column is blank.

• Device Name: Virtual device name, which is a combination of the virtualemulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, and the virtual CVSattribute. Values of the virtual emulation type, virtual LUSE volumenumber, and virtual CVS attribute appear only for items that have beenset. This column is blank when the virtual emulation type, virtual LUSEvolume number, and virtual CVS attribute are not set. If the virtual CVSattribute is set, CVS is attached as the suffix to the device name.

• SSID: Virtual SSID. If Virtual SSID is not set for an LDEV, this columnis blank.

• Attribute: Virtual LDEV attribute. If the attribute is not set for LDEV, thiscolumn is blank.

LUNs tableThis table provides information about the LUN ID registered for the selected LDEV.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Type of port:Type

• Fibre: Fibre Channel port.

• iSCSI: iSCSI port.

Name of the host group or iSCSI target alias.Host Group Name / iSCSI Target Alias

Name of the iSCSI target.iSCSI Target Name

Name of the host group.Host Group Name

Identifier of the logical unit.LUN ID

Asymmetric access states of the port. When using of iSCSI, a hyphen (-)appears.

Asymmetric Access States

Active/Optimized: Access from the host preferentially is performed on theport.

LUN Properties window 587

Page 588: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Active/Non-Optimized: When disabled of the port of Active/Optimized, theaccess from the host is performed on the port.

Hosts tableLists the hosts that belong to the host group in which the selected LUN ID is registered.

DescriptionItem

Type of port:Type

• Fibre: Fibre Channel port.

• iSCSI: iSCSI port.

WWN of HBA or iSCSI name.HBA WWN / iSCSI Name

Name of the host.Host Name

Authentication windowAuthentication window (Fibre Channel folder selected)

To display the Authentication window, the Remote Web Console secondary windows must beusable in advance. If the user authentication settings are performed, you must set the modifymode in the secondary window. The modify mode is an exclusive access control for operationsof secondary windows. If you set the modify mode to ON, other users or programs cannot applysettings to a storage system. If you close the secondary window, the modify mode is released.For more information on Remote Web Console secondary windows and modify mode, see theXP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.On the menu bar, clickActions > Port/Host Group, Fibre >Authentication. TheAuthenticationsecondary window opens.

588 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 589: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Port treeThe Port tree provides information about user authentication on each port.Double-click the Fibre folder to show the Fibre Channel ports in the storage system.If you select the Fibre folder, information about ports and fabric switches appears in the tableon the right of the tree. The Fibre folder is available only if the storage system contains a FibreChannel adapter.

DescriptionItem

This icon indicates a Fibre Channel port.CLX-Y

Port information list

DescriptionItem

Fibre Channel port names.Port Name

The period of time between authentication sessions to the same port. If the previousauthentication session to a port failed, the next authentication session starts after thespecified period of time elapses. The unit is seconds.

Time out

If authentication fails for the number of times specified in Refusal Freq., connectionto the port fails. Refusal Intvl. shows the interval (in minutes) from when connectionto a port fails to when the next authentication session starts.

Refusal Intvl.

Number of times that authentication is allowed for connection to a port. If authenticationfails for the specified number of times, connection to the port fails.

Refusal Freq.

Fabric Switch information list

DescriptionItem

Fibre Channel port name.Port Name

User name of the fabric switch.User Name

Mode of authentication between ports and fabric switches.Mode

• bidirectional: The authentication mode is mutual.

• unidirectional: The authentication mode is not mutual.

Indicates whether to perform authentication for the fabric switch.Authentication

• Enable: The fabric switch is a target of user authentication.

• Disable: The fabric switch is not a target of user authentication.

Authentication window (Fibre Channel port selected)Remote Web Console secondary windows must be defined for use in advance. When you selectModify from this window to make user authentication settings, other users or programs areprevented from changing storage system settings. When you close the secondary window,Modifymode is released. For more information on Remote Web Console secondary windows andModifymode, see the XP7 Remote Web Console User Guide.On the menu bar, clickActions > Port/Host Group, Fibre >Authentication. TheAuthenticationsecondary window opens.

Authentication window 589

Page 590: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Port treeUse this tree to find information about user authentication on each port. When you select a portfrom this tree, the Authentication Information (Target) list on the right provides user informationof the hosts that are registered on the port. In addition, the Authentication Information (Host) listbelow the Authentication Information (Target) list provides the user information of the selectedport.Double-click the Fibre folder to view all Fibre Channel ports in the storage system. The Fibrefolder is available only if the storage system contains a Fibre Channel adapter. Double-click theFibre Channel ports to view host groups in that port. The host group name appears beside theicon.

DescriptionItem

Indicates a Fibre Channel port.CLX-Y

Indicates that the host group performs authentication of hosts.host group name

Indicates that the host group does not perform authentication of hosts.host group name

590 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 591: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Authentication information (target) listThe list on the right provides user information of the host groups that are allowed to connect tothe port or host group specified in the tree.

DescriptionItem

Names of the host group.Group Name

User name of the host group. When the user name is not defined for a host group, thiscolumn is blank.

User Name

Indicates whether to perform user authentication for the host.Authentication

• Enable: The host is a target of user authentication.

• Disable: The host is not a target of user authentication.

Authentication information (host) listBelow the User Information (Target) list appears a list that provides user information of the hostselected in the port or host group in the tree. In this list, you can register up to 64 user informationitems.

DescriptionItem

Name of the host group.Group Name

User name of the host. When the user name is not defined for a host, this column is blank.User Name

Indicates the protocol in use for user authentication. Always CHAP.Protocol

Add New User Information (Host) window

DescriptionItem

Select the group name where the user will be registered.Group Name

Specify the user name of the host. 16 hexadecimal characters can be used. The user nameis not case-sensitive.

User Name

Specify the secret to be used for host authentication.SecretUse 12 to 32 characters, including alphanumerics, spaces, and the following symbols: . - +@ _ = : / [ ] , ~

Specify the secret again for confirmation. An error occurs if you enter incorrect characters,and then click OK.

Re-enter Secret

Protocol to be used for user authentication. This protocol is always CHAP(Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol).

Protocol

Authentication window 591

Page 592: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Change User Information (Host) window

DescriptionItem

Group name where the user is registered.Group Name

Specify the user name of the host. 16 hexadecimal characters can be used. The user nameis not case-sensitive.

User Name

Specify the secret to be used for host authentication.SecretUse 12 to 32 characters, including alphanumerics, spaces, and the following symbols: . - +@ _ = : / [ ] , ~

Specify the secret again for confirmation. An error occurs if you enter incorrect characters,and then click OK.

Re-enter Secret

Protocol to be used for user authentication. This protocol is always CHAP(Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol).

Protocol

Clear Authentication information window

DescriptionItem

Item number.No

Group name to be deleted.Group Name

The name of the user to be deleted.User Name

592 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 593: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Specify Authentication Information window

When selecting a port

When selecting a host group

DescriptionItem

Port name where the authentication information is specified in the window that opens whenyou select a port.

Port Name

Group name where the authentication information is specified in the window that openswhen you select a host group.

Group Name

Specify the user name of the host. 16 hexadecimal characters can be used. The user nameis not case-sensitive.

User Name

Specify the secret to be used for host authentication.SecretUse 12 to 32 characters, including alphanumerics, spaces, and the following symbols: . - +@ _ = : / [ ] , ~

Specify the secret again for confirmation. An error occurs if you enter incorrect characters,and then click OK.

Re-enter Secret

Authentication window 593

Page 594: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Set Port Information

DescriptionItem

Specify the period of time from when authentication fails to when the next authenticationsession is ended. This period of time is between 15 to 60 seconds. The initial value is 45.

Time out

Specify the interval from when connection to a port fails to when the next authenticationsession starts, with up to 60 minutes. The initial value is 3.

Refusal Interval

Specify the number of times of authentication allowable for connection to a port with up to10 times. The initial value is 3.

Refusal Frequency

Default Setting(User Name/Secret) window

DescriptionItem

Fibre Channel port names.Port Name

Specify the user name of the Fibre Channel switch with 16 characters. You can usehexadecimal characters in a user name. The user name is not case-sensitive.

User Name

Specify the secret (that is, a password used in CHAP authentication) between 12 to 32characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, spaces, and the following symbols in asecret:

Secret

. - + @ _ = : / [ ] , ~

Specify the secret, again, for confirmation.Re-enter secret

Edit Command Devices wizardThe system administrator can enter RAID Manager commands from open-system hosts to performoperations such as Continuous Access Synchronous or Business Copy operations or both onlogical devices. For example, RAID Manager commands can be used to create and to split pairs.If you want to allow the system administrator to enter RAID Manager commands from open-systemhosts, you must specify at least one logical device as the command device. If desired, you mustalso apply command device security to other logical devices in the storage system.

594 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 595: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Use the Edit Command Devices window to edit command devices.

CAUTION: The following volumes cannot be specified as a command device:• Volume whose access attribute is other than read/write• Continuous Access Synchronous pair volume• High Availability pair volume• Business Copy pair volume• Continuous Access Journal pair volume• Virtual volume (V-VOL) for Fast Snap• Volume reserved by Data Retention• Journal volume• Pool volume which includes THP V-VOL with data direct mapping attribute.• Remote command device• LDEV of the ALU attribute.• Quorum disk for High Availability• LDEV of which the ALUA mode is enabled.• LDEV with the T10 PI attribute.

Procedure1. Open the Logical Devices window.

In XP7 Command View Advanced Edition:1. On theResources tab, click Storage Systems, and then expandAll Storage Systems

and the target storage system.2. Right-click Volumes, and then select System GUI.In Remote Web Console:1. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.2. Click Logical Devices.

2. Click Storage Systems, and then expand the Storage Systems tree.3. Click Logical Devices.4. Click More Actions > Edit Command Devices.

The Edit Command Devices window opens.

Edit Command Devices windowIf you want to enable command device security, user authentication, and device group definition,you must enable the command device in this window.If the command device is disabled, you cannot enable command device security, userauthentication, and device group definition.

Edit Command Devices wizard 595

Page 596: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Select Enable to enable command devices. Select Disable to releasecommand devices.

Command Device

Select Enable to apply command device security to a logical device in astorage system. Select Disable to release command device security.

Command Device Security

If you want to protect logical volumes from the use of RAID Managercommands, you must apply command device security to the logicalvolumes. If command device security is applied to a logical device, thelogical device will not be affected by RAID Manager commands issuedvia command devices from the hosts.1

Select Enable to apply user authentication to a command device. SelectDisable to release user authentication.1

User Authentication

Select Enable to apply device group definition to a command device.Select Disable to release device group definition.1

Device Group Definition

Note:1. For details about command device attribute settings, see the XP7 RAID Manager User Guide.

Edit Command Devices confirmation windowConfirm proposed settings, name the task, and then click Apply. The task will be added to theexecution queue.

596 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 597: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected LDEVs table

DescriptionItem

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Name of the LDEV.LDEV Name

Identifier of the parity group.Parity Group ID

Emulation types for each logical volume (or logical device).Emulation Type

Size of each logical volume.Capacity

Provisioning types for each logical volume.Provisioning Type

• Basic: Internal volume.

• External: External volume.

• THP: V-VOL of Thin Provisioning.

• Snapshot: Fast Snap volume.

Indicates whether the selected logical device is a command device.Command Device

• Enabled: The command devices are enabled.

• Disabled: The logical device is not a command device.

Indicates whether command device security is applied to the selectedcommand device.

Command Device Security

• Enabled: Command device security is applied to the command device.

• Disabled: Command device security is not applied to the commanddevice.

Indicates whether user authentication is applied to the selected commanddevice.

User Authentication

• Enabled: User authentication is applied to the command device.

• Disabled: User authentication is not applied to the command device.

Indicates whether the device group definition is applied to the selectedcommand device.

Device Group Definition

• Enabled: Device group definition is applied to the command device.

• Disabled: Device group definition is not applied to the command device.

Edit Command Devices wizard 597

Page 598: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Host-Reserved LUNs window

LUNs tableLUNs reserved by hosts are displayed.

DescriptionItem

Displays names of ports.Port ID

Displays IDs of the LUNs.LUN ID

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Displays names of LDEVs.LDEV Name

Displays the number of paths set for the relevant LDEV.Number of Paths

Displays the status of the host-reserved LUN.Host-Reserved Status

• Open Reserved: LUN is reserved by the Open Reserved command.

• Persistent Reserved: LUN is reserved by the Persistent Group Reservecommand.

• Mainframe Reserved: LUN is reserved by the mainframe system.

• ACA Active: LUN is in the ACA active status.

Information about the virtual storage machine.Virtual Storage Machine

• Model / Serial Number: Model name and serial number of the virtualstorage machine that has LDEV.

• LDEV ID: Virtual LDEV ID. If a Virtual LDEV ID is not assigned to LDEV,this column is blank.

• Device Name: Virtual device name, which is a combination of the virtualemulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, and the virtual CVS attribute.Values of the virtual emulation type, virtual LUSE volume number, andvirtual CVS attribute appear only for items that have been set. This columnis blank when the virtual emulation type, virtual LUSE volume number,

598 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 599: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

and virtual CVS attribute are not set. If the virtual CVS attribute is set,CVS is attached as the suffix to the device name.

• SSID: Virtual SSID. If Virtual SSID is not set for LDEV, this column isblank.

Displays the Release Host-Reserved LUNs window.Release Host-Reserved LUNs

Release Host-Reserved LUNs wizardRelease Host-Reserved LUNs window

LUNs to release the reservations by hosts are displayed.

Selected LUNs table

DescriptionItem

Displays names of ports.Port ID

Displays IDs of the LUNs.LUN ID

LDEV identifier, which is the combination of LDKC, CU, and LDEV.LDEV ID

Displays names of LDEVs.LDEV Name

Displays the number of paths set for the relevant LDEV.Number of Paths

Displays the status of the host-reserved LUN.Host-Reserved Status

• Open Reserved: LUN is reserved by the Open Reserved command.

• Persistent Reserved: LUN is reserved by the Persistent Group Reservecommand.

• Mainframe Reserved: LUN is reserved by the mainframe system.

• ACA Active: LUN is in the ACA active status.

Release Host-Reserved LUNs wizard 599

Page 600: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

View Login WWN Statuses window

Login WWNs table

DescriptionItem

Displays names of ports.Port ID

Displays the HBA WWNs and their icons.HBA WWN

Displays the names of hosts.Host Name

Displays the names of host groups.Host Group Name

Displays the host login status (Logged In or Logged Out).Status

600 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 601: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

View Login iSCSI Name Statuses window

Login iSCSI Names table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

HBA iSCSI name.HBA iSCSI Name

Host name.Host Name

iSCSI target alias.iSCSI Target Alias

iSCSI target name.iSCSI Target Name

Status of the login from the host. Logged In or LoggedOut appears.

Status

View Login iSCSI Name Statuses window 601

Page 602: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

CHAP User Properties window

CHAP User Properties table

DescriptionItem

User name.User Name

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Number of iSCSI targets.Number of iSCSI Targets

iSCSI Targets table

DescriptionItem

iSCSI target alias.iSCSI Target Alias

iSCSI target name.iSCSI Target Name

Information about the authentication.Authentication

• Method: Authentication method that is CHAP, None,or Comply with Host Setting

• Mutual CHAP: Mutual CHAP setting that is Enabledor Disabled

• User Name

• Number of Users

602 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 603: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Host Properties window

Host Properties table

DescriptionItem

HBA iSCSI Names and their icons.HBA iSCSI Name

Name of hosts.Host Name

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Number of iSCSI targets.Number of iSCSI Targets

iSCSI Targets table

DescriptionItem

iSCSI target alias.iSCSI Target Alias

iSCSI target name.iSCSI Target Name

Host mode of the host group.Host Mode

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts registered in the host group.Number of Hosts

Host Properties window 603

Page 604: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Create iSCSI Targets wizardCreate iSCSI Targets window

604 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 605: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Setting field

DescriptionItem

iSCSI Target Alias • Use Default Name: If this check box is selected, theiSCSI target alias is input by default.

• Text box: Specify the iSCSI target alias.If Use Default Name is selected, the default valueappears with the following format:Port-ID-GiSCSI-target-IDFor instance, 1A-G00 appears.If Use Default Name is not selected, the blank fieldappears. You can enter up to 32 ASCII characters andsymbols, with the exception of: \ / , ; * ? " < > |.

iSCSI Target Name • iqn or eui: Select the format which you want to use.

• Use Default Name: If this check box is selected, theiSCSI target name is input by default.

• Text box: Specify the iSCSI target name.If Use Default Name is selected, the default valueappears with the following format:For the iqn format:iqn.2015-04.com.hpe:storage.Model-name.t.Serial-number.Port-identifieriSCSI-target-identifierFor instance,iqn.2015-04.com.hpe:storage.xp7.t.62507.1a000appears.For the eui format:eui.(6-digits-of-OUI)(Fixed-value-given-to-each-storage)(Serial-number)(Port-name)(iSCSI-target-identifier)For instance,eui.02004567A425678D appears.If Use Default Name is not selected, the default valuefor the iqn format is as follows:For the iqn format:iqn.2015-04.com.hpe:storage.Model-name.t.Serial-number.Port-identifieriSCSI-target-identifierYou can enter up to 219 ASCII characters andsymbols, with the exception of: \ / , ; * ? " < > |.If Use Default Name is not selected, the default valuefor the eui format is blank. You can enter fixed to 16alphanumeric characters that are case-sensitive.

Select the resource group in which the iSCSI target iscreated. IfAny is selected, among all ports being allocated

Resource Group Name (ID)

to the user, ports where the host group can be add areavailable in the Available Ports table. If other than Anyis selected, among ports assigned to the selected resourcegroup, ports where the host group can be add areavailable in the Available Ports table.

Select the host mode from the list.Host Mode

Host Mode Options table

DescriptionItem

The ID number of the host mode option.Mode No.

The description of host mode option.Option Description

Create iSCSI Targets wizard 605

Page 606: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

The setting status (Enabled or Disabled) of the host modeoption.

Status

Indicates that the host mode option is enabled.Enabled

Indicates that the host mode option is disabled.Disabled

Available Hosts tableThis table lists information about the registered hosts.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

iSCSI name of the port.HBA iSCSI Name

Name of the host.Host Name

Number of the iSCSI targets.Number of iSCSI Target

Indicates whether the host is newly connected.New Host

• Yes: The host is newly added and has never beenconnected via a cable to any port in the storagesystem.

• No: The host has been connected via a cable toanother port.

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Adds a new host. Or, select host bus adapters then clickto assign a nickname to the host bus adapter.

Add New Host

Available Ports tableThis table lists the registered ports.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Security

Authentication MethodSelect the CHAP Authentication setting from Enable, Disable, or Use Host Setting.

CHAP Authentication Options

DescriptionItem

Select the mutual authentication mode to Enable orDisable. If Disable is selected, the unidirectionalauthentication mode is performed

Mutual CHAP

Specify the user name. If Disable is selected in theMutualCHAP, this item is optionally specified. If Mutual is

User Name

selected, this item must be specified. Specify the username between 1 to 223 characters.You can use case-sensitive alphanumeric characters,spaces, and the following symbols: . - + @ _ = : [ ] , ~

606 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 607: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Specify the secret which is used for host authentication.If Disable is selected in the Mutual CHAP, this item is

Secret

optionally specified. If Mutual is selected, this item mustbe specified. Specify the secret (that is, a password usedin CHAP authentication) between 12 to 32 characters.You can use alphanumeric characters, spaces, and thefollowing symbols in a secret: . - + @ _ = : [ ] ~

Specify the secret again for confirmation. If incorrect, anerror message appears when clicking Add.

Re-enter Secret

Available CHAP Users table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Name of the user.User Name

User sequence identifier.User Seq. No.

Number of the iSCSI targets.Number of iSCSI Target

Indicates whether the CHAP user is newly added or not.New CHAP UserYes: New CHAP user added by using of the Add NewCHAP User window.No: Existing CHAP user.

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Click this button to add the new CHAP user. If the newCHAP user is added, Port ID is blank.

Add New CHAP User

Add buttonAdds the settings to the Selected iSCSI Targets table.

Selected iSCSI Targets table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

iSCSI target alias.iSCSI Target Alias

iSCSI target name.iSCSI Target Name

The host mode of the iSCSI target.Host Mode

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts registered in the iSCSI target.Number of Hosts

Information about the authentication.Authentication

• Method: Authentication method that is CHAP, None,or Comply with Host Setting

• Mutual CHAP: Mutual CHAP setting that is Enabledor Disabled

• User Name

• Number of Users

Create iSCSI Targets wizard 607

Page 608: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Resource group name and identifier of the resource groupcontaining the iSCSI target.

Resource Group Name (ID)

Model name and serial number of the virtual storagemachine.

Virtual Storage Machine

Details about the selected iSCSI target.Detail

Removes the selected iSCSI targets from this table.Remove

Next Task OptionClick Next to go to the task setting window, which is indicated in Next Task Option.

Create iSCSI Targets Confirm window

NOTE: If multiple tasks that are connected in one wizard are executed, this window shows allconfigured items of tasks. To show information of configured items other than this topic, clickBack to display related setting windows, then click Help.

Selected iSCSI Targets table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

iSCSI target alias.iSCSI Target Alias

iSCSI target name.iSCSI Target Name

The host mode of the iSCSI target.Host Mode

Port attribute.Port Attribute

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts registered in the iSCSI target.Number of Hosts

608 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 609: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Information about the authentication.Authentication

• Method: Authentication method that is CHAP, None,or Comply with Host Setting

• Mutual CHAP: Mutual CHAP setting that is Enabledor Disabled

• User Name

• Secret: If the secret is specified, the character stringof six asterisks (*) appears.

• Number of Users

Resource group name and identifier of the resource groupcontaining the iSCSI target.

Resource Group Name (ID)

Model name and serial number of the virtual storagemachine.

Virtual Storage Machine

Details about the selected iSCSI target.Detail

Create iSCSI Targets wizard 609

Page 610: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Edit iSCSI Targets wizardEdit iSCSI Targets window

DescriptionItem

Specify the iSCSI target alias.iSCSI Target Alias

iSCSI Target Name • iqn or eui: Select the format which you want to use.

• Text box: Specify the iSCSI target name.For the iqn format:iqn.2015-04.com.hpe:storage.Model-name.t.Serial-number.Port-identifier iSCSI-target-identifierFor instance,iqn.2015-04.com.hpe:storage.xp7.t.62507.1a000appears.You can enter up to 219 ASCII characters andsymbols, with the exception of: \ / , ; * ? " < > |.For the eui format:eui.(6-digits-of-OUI)(Fixed-value-given-to-each-storage)(Serial-number)(Port-name)(iSCSI-target-identifier)For instance, eui.02004567A425678D appears.You can enter fixed to 16 alphanumeric characters thatare case-sensitive.

Select the host mode from the list.Host Mode

610 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 611: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Host Mode Options tableTo set the host mode option, select a host mode option, then click Enable. If you do not need ahost mode option, select an unnecessary host mode option, then click Disable.

DescriptionItem

Number identifier of the host mode option.Mode No.

Description of the host mode option.Option Description

Indicates the current status setting (Enabled or Disabled)of the host mode option on this host group.

Status

Enables the host mode option.Enable

Disables the host mode option.Disable

DescriptionItem

Select the authentication setting from CHAP, None orComply with Host Setting. If CHAP is selected, followingitems can be specified.

Authentication Method

Select Enable or Disable. If Enable is selected, the mutualauthentication mode is performed. If Disable is selected,the unidirectional authentication mode is performed.

Mutual CHAP

Specify the user name between 1 to 223 characters.User NameYou can use case-sensitive alphanumeric characters,spaces, and the following symbols: . - + @ _ = : [ ] , ~

Specify the secret (that is, a password used in CHAPauthentication) between 12 to 32 characters.

Secret

You can use alphanumeric characters, spaces, and thefollowing symbols in a secret: . - + @ _ = : [ ] ~

Specify the secret again for confirmation. If incorrect, anerror message appears when clicking Finish.

Re-enter Secret

Edit iSCSI Targets Confirm window

NOTE: If multiple tasks that are connected in one wizard are executed, this window shows allconfigured items of tasks. To show information of configured items other than this topic, clickBack to display related setting windows, then click Help.

Edit iSCSI Targets wizard 611

Page 612: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected iSCSI Targets table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

iSCSI target alias.iSCSI Target Alias

iSCSI target name.iSCSI Target Name

The host mode of the iSCSI target.Host Mode

Port attribute.Port Attribute

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts registered in the iSCSI target.Number of Hosts

Information about the authentication.Authentication

• Method: Authentication method that is CHAP, None,or Comply with Host Setting

• Mutual CHAP: Mutual CHAP setting that is Enabledor Disabled

• User Name

• Secret: If the secret is specified, the character stringof six asterisks (*) appears.

• Number of Users

Details about the selected iSCSI target.Detail

612 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 613: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Add CHAP Users wizard when selected iSCSI targetAdd CHAP Users window

Available CHAP Users tableThis window lists CHAP users that can be registered to the selected iSCSI target

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Name of the user.User Name

User sequence identifier.User Seq. No.

Number of the iSCSI targets.Number of iSCSI Target

Indicates whether the CHAP user is newly added or not.New CHAP UserYes: New CHAP user added by using theAddNewCHAPUser window.No: Existing CHAP user.

Click this button to add the new CHAP user. If the newCHAP user is added, Port ID is blank.

Add New CHAP User

Adds CHAP users selected from the Available LDEVstable to the Selected LDEVs table.

Add

Removes logical volumes from theSelected LDEVs table.Remove

Add CHAP Users wizard when selected iSCSI target 613

Page 614: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected CHAP Users tableThis table lists CHAP users that are selected from the Available CHAP Users table.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Name of the user.User Name

User sequence identifier.User Seq. No.

Number of the iSCSI targets.Number of iSCSI Target

Indicates whether the CHAP user is newly added or not.New CHAP UserYes: New CHAP user added by using theAddNewCHAPUser window.No: Existing CHAP user.

Add CHAP Users Confirm window

Add CHAP Users tableThis table lists added CHAP users.

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

Name of the user.User Name

Secret: If the secret is specified, the character string ofsix asterisks (*) appears.

Secret

iSCSI target alias.iSCSI Target Alias

iSCSI target name.iSCSI Target Name

The host mode of the iSCSI target.Host Mode

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

614 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 615: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

DescriptionItem

Number of hosts registered in the iSCSI target.Number of Hosts

Information about the authentication.Authentication

• Method: Authentication method that is CHAP, None,or Comply with Host Setting

• Mutual CHAP: Mutual CHAP setting that is Enabledor Disabled

Edit CHAP User wizardEdit CHAP User window

Edit CHAP User

DescriptionItem

Specify the user name between 1 to 223 characters.User NameYou can use case-sensitive alphanumeric characters,spaces, and the following symbols: . - + @ _ = : [ ] , ~

Specify the secret to be used for host authentication.SecretUse characters, including alphanumerics, spaces, andthe following symbols: . - + @ _ = : / [ ] ~

Specify the secret again for confirmation. If incorrect, anerror message appears when clicking Finish.

Re-enter Secret

Edit CHAP User wizard 615

Page 616: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Edit CHAP User confirm window

Selected CHAP User table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

User name.User Name

Secret: If the secret is specified, the character string ofsix asterisks (*) appears.

Secret

Number of iSCSI targets.Number of iSCSI Targets

Details about the selected the CHAP user.Detail

616 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 617: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

iSCSI Target Properties window

iSCSI Target Properties table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

iSCSI target alias and identifier.iSCSI Target Alias

iSCSI target name.iSCSI Target Name

The host mode of the iSCSI target.Host Mode

The number of host mode options that are enabled.Host Mode Option

Information about the authentication.Authentication

• Method: Authentication method that is CHAP, None,or Comply with Host Setting

• Mutual CHAP: Mutual CHAP setting that is Enabledor Disabled

• User Name

Resource group name and identifier of the resource groupcontaining the iSCSI target.

Resource Group Name (ID)

Hosts table

DescriptionItem

HBA iSCSI name.HBA iSCSI Name

Host name.Host Name

iSCSI Target Properties window 617

Page 618: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

CHAP Users table

DescriptionItem

Name of the user.User Name

User sequence identifier.User Seq. No.

Add New CHAP User window

Setting field

DescriptionItem

Specify the user name between 1 to 223 characters.User NameYou can use case-sensitive alphanumeric characters,spaces, and the following symbols: . - + @ _ = : [ ] , ~

Specify the secret to be used for host authentication.SecretUse characters, including alphanumerics, spaces, andthe following symbols: . - + @ _ = : / [ ] ~

Specify the secret again for confirmation. If incorrect, theerror message appears when clicking OK.

Re-enter Secret

618 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 619: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Delete iSCSI Targets window

Selected iSCSI Targets table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

iSCSI target alias name and identifier.iSCSI Target Alias

iSCSI target name.iSCSI Target Name

The host mode of the iSCSI target.Host Mode

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts registered in the iSCSI target.Number of Hosts

Details about the selected iSCSI target.Detail

Delete Login iSCSI Names window

Delete iSCSI Targets window 619

Page 620: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Selected Login iSCSI Names table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

HBA iSCSI Names and their icons.HBA iSCSI Name

Name of hosts.Host Name

Number of iSCSI TargetsNumber of iSCSI Targets

Remove CHAP Users window

Selected CHAP Users table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

User name.User Name

iSCSI target name.iSCSI Target Name

iSCSI target alias name and identifier.iSCSI Target Alias

Number of hosts registered in the iSCSI target.Authentication

Authentication setting information (CHAP, None, orComply with Host Setting).

Detail

620 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 621: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Remove Target CHAP Users window

Selected iSCSI Targets table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

iSCSI target alias name and identifier.iSCSI Target Alias

iSCSI target name.iSCSI Target Name

The host mode of the iSCSI target.Host Mode

Port attribute.Port Attribute

LUN security setting (Enabled or Disabled) on the port.Port Security

Number of hosts registered in the iSCSI target.Number of Hosts

Information about the authentication.Authentication

• Method: Authentication method that is CHAP, None,or Comply with Host Setting

• Mutual CHAP: Mutual CHAP setting that is Enabledor Disabled

• User Name

When clicking this button with selected a row, the iSCSITarget Properties window is displayed.

Detail

Remove Target CHAP Users window 621

Page 622: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Remove Hosts window

Selected Hosts table

DescriptionItem

Identifier of the port.Port ID

HBA iSCSI Names.HBA iSCSI Name

Name of the host.Host Name

iSCSI target alias name and identifier.iSCSI Target Alias

iSCSI target nameiSCSI Target Name

Test Communication Statuses window

622 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 623: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Item Selection

DescriptionItem

Port name of the local storage system.Local Port ID (From)

Specify an IP address of a device of which the pingcommand is executed.

IP Address (To)

• IPv4: Select this item if the device is adopted to IPv4.Specify the address in a text box.

• IPv6: Select this item if the device is adopted to IPv6.Specify the address in a text box.

Click to execute the ping command.Test

Number of times of command executions from 1 to 5.No.

Status of the result of the ping command execution.Status

Edit T10 PI Mode wizardEdit T10 PI Mode window

Selected Ports table

DescriptionItem

Port NamePort Name

The port's T10 PI Mode setting (Enabled or Disabled).T10 PI Mode

Information setting area

DescriptionItem

Select the T10 PI mode for the port.T10 PI Mode

• Enabled: T10 PI mode on the port is enabled.

• Disabled: T10 PI mode on the port is disabled.

Edit T10 PI Mode wizard 623

Page 624: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Edit T10 PI Mode confirmation window

Selected Ports table

DescriptionItem

Port NamePort Name

The port's T10 PI Mode setting (Enabled or Disabled).T10 PI Mode

624 LUN Manager GUI reference

Page 625: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

G Warranty and regulatory informationFor important safety, environmental, and regulatory information, see Safety and ComplianceInformation for Server, Storage, Power, Networking, and Rack Products, available atwww.hpe.com/support/Safety-Compliance-EnterpriseProducts.

Warranty informationHPE ProLiant and x86 Servers and Optionswww.hpe.com/support/ProLiantServers-Warranties

HPE Enterprise Serverswww.hpe.com/support/EnterpriseServers-Warranties

HPE Storage Productswww.hpe.com/support/Storage-Warranties

HPE Networking Productswww.hpe.com/support/Networking-Warranties

Regulatory informationBelarus Kazakhstan Russia marking

Manufacturer and Local Representative InformationManufacturer information:

• Hewlett Packard Enterprise Company, 3000 Hanover Street, Palo Alto, CA 94304 U.S.Local representative information Russian:• Russia:

• Belarus:

• Kazakhstan:

Warranty information 625

Page 626: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Local representative information Kazakh:• Russia:

• Belarus:

• Kazakhstan:

Manufacturing date:The manufacturing date is defined by the serial number.CCSYWWZZZZ (serial number format for this product)Valid date formats include:• YWW, where Y indicates the year counting from within each new decade, with 2000 as the

starting point; for example, 238: 2 for 2002 and 38 for the week of September 9. In addition,2010 is indicated by 0, 2011 by 1, 2012 by 2, 2013 by 3, and so forth.

• YYWW, where YY indicates the year, using a base year of 2000; for example, 0238: 02 for2002 and 38 for the week of September 9.

Turkey RoHS material content declaration

Ukraine RoHS material content declaration

626 Warranty and regulatory information

Page 627: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

GlossaryTerms:

ALUA See asymmetric logical unit access.array See disk arrayasymmetricaccess

A method of defining a preferred path for sending and receiving data when multiple alternatepaths are used between a server and storage systems, such as a cross-path configuration forHigh Availability. To use, ALUA must be enabled.

asymmetriclogical unitaccess (ALUA)

Asymmetric logical unit access functionality of SCSI. When multiple alternate paths are usedto connect storage systems, or a server and one or more storage systems, you can define apreferred path in a storage system, and issue I/O requests from the server to storage systems.If a failure occurs in a preferred path, an alternate path is used. See also asymmetric access.

audit log Files that store a history of the operations performed from Remote Web Console and thecommands that the storage system received from hosts, and data encryption operations.

bind mode In bind mode the Cache Residency extents are used to hold read and write data for specificextent(s) on volume(s). Data written to the Cache Residency bind area is not destaged to thedrives. For bind mode, all targeted read and write data is transferred at host data transfer speed.

cache logicalpartition (CLPR)

Consists of virtual cache memory that is set up to be allocated to different hosts in contentionfor cache memory.

capacity The amount of data storage space available on a physical storage device, usually measuredin bytes (MB, GB, TB, and so on).

CLPR See cache logical partition (CLPR).cluster Multiple-storage servers working together to respond to multiple read and write requests.Cnt Ac-J Continuous Access JournalCnt Ac-J MF Continuous Access Journal MFcommanddevice A dedicated logical volume used only by RAID Manager and Business Continuity Manager to

interface with the storage system. Can be shared by several hosts.controller The component in a storage system that manages all storage functions. It is analogous to a

computer and contains a processors, I/O devices, RAM, power supplies, cooling fans, and othersub-components as needed to support the operation of the storage system.

copy pair A pair of volumes in which one volume contains original data and the other volume containsthe copy of the original. Copy operations can be synchronous or asynchronous, and the volumesof the copy pair can be located in the same storage system (local copy) or in different storagesystems (remote copy).A copy pair can also be called a volume pair, or just pair. A pair created by Compatible FlashCopyis called a relationship.

custom volume(CV)

A custom-size volume whose size is defined by the user using Virtual LVI/Virtual LUN.

CV See custom volume.CVS custom volume sizedata drive A physical data storage device that can be either a hard disk drive (HDD) or a flash drive (also

called a solid-state device).DC data centerDCR Dynamic Cache Residencydevice A physical or logical unit with a specific function.device emulation Indicates the type of logical volume. Mainframe device emulation types provide logical volumes

of fixed size, called logical volume images (LVIs), which contain EBCDIC data in CKD format.Typical mainframe device emulation types include 3390-9 and 3390-M. Open-systems deviceemulation types provide logical volumes of variable size, called logical units (LUs), that containASCII data in FBA format. The typical open-systems device emulation type is OPEN-V.

627

Page 628: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

disk adapter(DKA)

The hardware component that controls the transfer of data between the drives and cache. ADKA feature consists of a pair of boards.

disk array Disk array, or just array, is a complete storage system, including the control and logic devices,storage devices (HDD, SSD), connecting cables, and racks

disk controller(DKC)

The hardware component that manages front-end and back-end storage operations. The termDKC can refer to the entire storage system or to the controller components.

DKA See disk adapter (DKA).DKC See disk controller (DKC).DKCMAIN disk controller main. Refers to the microcode for the Storage system.dump A collection of data that is saved to a file when an error or crash occurs. The data is used by

support personnel to determine the cause of the error or crash.Dump tool Downloads Remote Web Console configuration information onto recording media for backup

and troubleshooting purposes.emulation The operation of a storage system to emulate the characteristics of a different storage system.

For device emulation, the mainframe host recognizes the logical devices on the storage systemas 3390-x devices. For controller emulation, the mainframe host recognizes the control units(CUs) on the storage system as 2105 or 2107 controllers.The storage system operates the same as the storage system being emulated.

emulation group A set of device emulation types that can be intermixed within a RAID group and treated as agroup.

external volume A logical volume whose data resides on drives that are physically located outside the HewlettPackard Enterprise storage system.

FC Fibre Channel; FlashCopyFC-AL fibre-channel arbitrated loopflash drive A data drive that uses a solid-state memory device instead of a rotating hard disk.flash module A high speed data storage device that includes a custom flash controller and several flash

memory sub-modules on a single PCB.HBA host bus adapterHDD hard disk drivehost group A group of hosts of the same operating system platform.host mode Operational modes that provide enhanced compatibility with supported host platforms. Used

with fibre-channel ports on RAID storage systems.host modeoption

Additional options for fibre-channel ports on RAID storage systems. Provide enhancedfunctionality for host software and middleware.

internal volume A logical volume whose data resides on drives that are physically located within the storagesystem. See also external volume.

JNL journaljournal volume A volume that records and stores a log of all events that take place in another volume. In the

event of a system crash, the journal volume logs are used to restore lost data and maintaindata integrity.In Continuous Access Journal, differential data is held in journal volumes on until it is copiedto the S-VOL.

LDEV logical deviceLDKC See logical disk controller (LDKC).logical device(LDEV)

An individual logical data volume (on multiple drives in a RAID configuration) in the storagesystem. An LDEV may or may not contain any data and may or may not be defined to any hosts.Each LDEV has a unique identifier or "address" within the storage system composed of thelogical disk controller (LDKC) number, control unit (CU) number, and LDEV number. The LDEVIDs within a storage system do not change.An LDEV formatted for use by mainframe hosts is

628 Glossary

Page 629: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

called a logical volume image (LVI). An LDEV formatted for use by open-system hosts is calleda logical unit (LU).

logical diskcontroller (LDKC)

A group of 255 control unit (CU) images in the RAID storage system that is controlled by avirtual (logical) storage system within the single physical storage system. For example, theXP24000 Disk Array storage system supports two LDKCs, LDKC 00 and LDKC 01.

logical partition(LPAR)

A subset of a system's hardware resources that is virtualized as a separate system. For astorage system, logical partitioning can be applied to cache memory and/or storage capacity.

logical unit (LU) A logical volume that is configured for use by open-systems hosts (for example, OPEN-V).logical unit (LU)path

The path between an open-systems host and a logical unit.

logical volume(LV)

See volume.

logical volumeimage (LVI)

A logical volume that is configured for use by mainframe hosts (for example, 3390-9).

LU See logical unit (LU).LUN See logical unit numberLV logical volumeLVI See logical volume image.MF, M/F mainframeOPEN-V A logical unit (LU) of user-defined size that is formatted for use by open-systems hosts.OPEN-x A logical unit (LU) of fixed size (for example, OPEN-3 or OPEN-9) that is used primarily for

sharing data between mainframe and open-systems hosts using Data Exchange.P-VOL This term is used only in the earlier version of the Remote Web Console GUI (still in use) for

the primary volume. See primary volume.pair Two logical volumes in a replication relationship in which one volume contains original data to

be copied and the other volume contains the copy of the original data. The copy operations canbe synchronous or asynchronous, and the pair volumes can be located in the same storagesystem (in-system replication) or in different storage systems (remote replication).

parity group See RAID group.PDEV physical devicePG parity group. See RAID group.physical device See device.pool A set of volumes that are reserved for storing pool volumes (pool-VOL), and used by Fast Snap,

Thin Provisioning, Thin Provisioning MF, Smart Tiers, Smart Tiers MF, Real Time Smart Tier,or Real Time Smart Tier for Mainframe data.

pool volume(pool-VOL)

A logical volume that is reserved for storing snapshot data for Fast Snap operations or writedata for Thin Provisioning, Thin Provisioning MF, Smart Tiers, Smart Tiers MF, Real Time SmartTier, or Real Time Smart Tier for Mainframe.

port attribute Indicates the type of fibre-channel port: target, RCU target, or initiator.primary volume(P-VOL)

The volume in a copy pair that contains the original data to be replicated. The data on the P-VOLis duplicated synchronously or asynchronously on the secondary volume (S-VOL).The following Hewlett Packard Enterprise products use the term P-VOL: Fast Snap, Snapshot,Business Copy, Continuous Access Synchronous, Continuous Access Journal, ContinuousAccess Journal MF, and External Storage Access Manager.See also secondary volume.

quick format The quick format feature in Virtual LVI/Virtual LUN in which the formatting of the internal volumesis done in the background. This allows system configuration (such as defining a path or creatinga Continuous Access Synchronous pair) before the formatting is completed. To execute quickformatting, the volumes must be in blocked status.

629

Page 630: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

RAID group A set of RAID disks that have the same capacity and are treated as one group for data storageand recovery. A RAID group contains both user data and parity information. This allows userdata to be accessed in the event that one or more of the drives within the RAID group are notavailable. The RAID level of a RAID group determines the number of data drives and paritydrives and how the data is "striped" across the drives. For RAID1, user data is duplicated withinthe RAID group, so there is no parity data for RAID1 RAID groups.A RAID group can also be called an array group or a parity group.

RAID level The type of RAID implementation. RAID levels include RAID0, RAID1, RAID2, RAID3, RAID4,RAID5 and RAID6.

RAID Manager RAID ManagerRCU See remote control unit.RCU target port A fibre-channel port that is configured to receive remote I/Os from an initiator port on another

storage system.remote controlunit (RCU)

A storage system at a secondary or remote site that is configured to receive remote I/Os fromone or more storage systems at the primary or main site.

resync resynchronize.S-VOL See secondary volume or source volume. When used for "secondary volume", "S-VOL" is only

seen in the earlier version of the Remote Web Console GUI (still in use).secondaryvolume (S-VOL)

The volume in a copy pair that is the copy of the original data on the primary volume (P-VOL).The following Hewlett Packard Enterprise products use the term "secondary volume": FastSnap, Snapshot, Business Copy, Continuous Access Synchronous, Continuous Access Journal,Continuous Access Journal MF, and External Storage Access Manager.See also primary volume.

serviceinformationmessage (SIM)

Messages generated by a RAID storage system when it detects an error or service requirement.SIMs are reported to hosts and displayed on Remote Web Console.

serviceprocessor

The computer in an XP7 Storage system that hosts the Remote Web Console software and isused to configure and maintain the storage system.

severity level Applies to service information messages (SIMs) and Remote Web Console error codes.shredding See volume shredding.SIM See service information message.size Generally refers to the storage capacity of a memory module or cache. Not usually used for

storage of data on disk or flash drives.SM shared memorysnapshot A point-in-time virtual copy of a Fast Snap primary volume (P-VOL). The snapshot is maintained

when the P-VOL is updated by storing pre-updated data (snapshot data) in a data pool.SOM See system option mode.source volume(S-VOL)

Used only in the earlier version of the Remote Web Console GUI (still in use). This is the volumein a mainframe copy pair containing the original data that is duplicated on the target volume(T-VOL). The following Hewlett Packard Enterprise products use the term source volume:Business Copy MF, Dataset Replication for Mainframe, and Compatible FlashCopy.In the current version of the GUI, "target volume" and "T-VOL" are replaced with "primaryvolume".See also source volume.

space Generally refers to the data storage capacity of a disk drive or flash drive.SSD solid-state drive. Also called flash drive.SSID See storage subsystem identifier.storage tiers See tiered storage.SVP See service processor.

630 Glossary

Page 631: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

syslog The file on the SVP that includes both syslog and audit log information, such as the date andtime.

system optionmode (SOM)

Additional operational parameters for the RAID storage systems that enable the storage systemto be tailored to unique customer operating requirements. SOMs are set on the service processor.

T-VOL See target volume.T10 PI See T10 Protection Information (T10 PI).T10 ProtectionInformation (T10PI)

A code standard defined in SCSI. T10 PI adds 8-byte protection information at every 512 bytesto validate data. By combining T10 PI with Data Integrity Extension (DIX), which enables dataprotection covering application and operating system, data protection from application to diskdrives can be provided.

target port A fibre-channel port that is configured to receive and process host I/Os.target volume(T-VOL)

The volume in a mainframe copy pair that is the copy of the original data on the source volume(S-VOL). The term is used only in the earlier version of the Remote Web Console GUI (still inuse), for the following Hewlett Packard Enterprise products: Business Copy MF, DatasetReplication, and Compatible FlashCopy.See also source volume.

thin provisioning(THP)

An approach to managing storage. Instead of "reserving" a fixed amount of storage, it removescapacity from the available pool when data is actually written to disk. Also called dynamicprovisioning.

THP See thin provisioningtiered storage A layered structure of performance levels, or tiers, that matches data access requirements with

the appropriate performance tiers. The tiers are:Tier 1: Static content. Tier 1 is fully supported computing expected to be production quality.Tier 2: Application logic. Tier 2 platforms are not supported by the security officer and releaseengineering teams. Tier 2 systems are targeted for Tier 1 support, but are still under development.Tier 3: Database. Tier 3 platforms are architectures for which hardware is not or will not beavailable or that are considered legacy systems unlikely to see broad future use.Tier 4 systems are not supported.

total capacity The aggregate amount of storage space in a data storage system.V-VOL virtual volumeVDEV See virtual device.virtual device(VDEV)

A group of logical devices (LDEVs) in a RAID group. A VDEV typically consists of some fixedvolumes (FVs) and some free space. The number of fixed volumes is determined by the RAIDlevel and device emulation type.

virtual volume(V-VOL)

A logical volume in a storage system. A V-VOL has no physical storage space.Fast Snap uses V-VOLs as secondary volumes of copy pairs.In Thin Provisioning, Thin Provisioning MF, Smart Tiers, Smart Tiers MF, Real Time Smart Tier,and Real Time Smart Tier for Mainframe, V-VOLs are called THP V-VOLs.

volume (VOL orvol)

A logical device (LDEV), or a set of concatenated LDEVs in the case of LUSE, that has beendefined to one or more hosts as a single data storage unit. An open-systems volume is calleda logical unit (LU), and a mainframe volume is called a logical volume image (LVI).

volumeshredding

Deleting the user data on a volume by overwriting all data in the volume with dummy data.

Web Console The computer inside a RAID storage system that hosts the Remote Web Console software andis used by service personnel for configuration and maintenance of the storage system.

WWN worldwide nameXRC IBM® Extended Remote Copy

631

Page 632: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Index

Aaccess attributes

assigning to a volume, 226changing to read-only or protect, 226changing to read/write, 227configuring, 224expiration lock, 228overview, 224permitted operations, 225requirements, 224reserving volumes, 230restrictions, 225retention term, 228workflow, 225

accessingupdates, 310

Add, 613added, 46adding, 289Adding CHAP users, 294additional, 42alternate, 253alternate LU paths, 232ALUA, 91ALUs and SLUs window, 403attribute, 98, 217, 219, 221, 222Attribute command, 226, 227authentication

configuring on fibre channel ports, 273configuring on fibre channels, 268fabric switch, 266fibre channel, 261host settings, 263hosts and host groups, 263hosts, enabling fibre channel switch, 277mutual, 262mutual of ports, 268port settings, 263users, 262

Auto LUN, 64, 106

Bbasic provisioning

overview, 16workflow, 18

Belarus Kazakhstan Russia EAC marking, 625boundary values for RAID levels, 70buffer space, 163Business Copy, 105

Ccanceling, 46capacity, 26, 39, 42, 46

pool-VOLs, 98capacity of a slot, 71capacity virtualization, 26, 39, 46

Changing, 91Changing External LDEV Capacity, 207CHAP authentication, 261, 263, 264, 266, 268, 269, 272,

274, 275CHAP User, 615CHAP User Properties window, 602CHAP Users, 613checking, 39command device, 226communication, 622communication status, 290configuration, 278Confirming, 290contacting Hewlett Packard Enterprise, 310Continuous Access Journal, 105Continuous Access Synchronous, 103copying, 253, 254Copying selected, 255correspondence table for defining devices, 253create, 322, 604Create LDEV function, 74Creating, 217, 219, 221creating, 44, 291creating a pool, 39custom-sized provisioning

overview, 17

Ddata direct mapping, 98, 217, 219, 221, 222data retention strategies, 31Data Retention window, 492data transfer speed

Fibre Channel ports, 235data-size, 41data-transfer speed and connection type, 236defined, 253defining, 250, 253Deleting, 287deleting, 286devices

correspondence table, 253DKA encryption, 56document

related information, 310documentation

providing feedback on, 311website, 311

EEAC marking

Belarus Kazakhstan Russia, 625Edit, 615edit, 339, 610Editing, 36, 222Editing CHAP users, 294Editing port settings, 293enabled, 39

632 Index

Page 633: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

Error Detail dialog box, 306Estimating, 39, 98estimating, 39, 41, 42, 46EuroAsian Economic Commission (EAC), 625expiration lock

enabling/disabling, 228external volume, 217

Ffabric switch, 266fabric topology, 239FC-AL (Fibre Channel-Arbitrated Loop) topology, 239Fibre Channel, 232, 250fibre channel authentication

setting, 261Fibre Channel ports

addresses, 238configuring, 239data transfer speed, 235

fibre channel portsconfiguring, 235configuring authentication, 268, 273registering user information, 274setting port information, 273

fibre channel switchauthentication settings and connection results, 268clearing user information, 276enabling or disabling authentication, 277registering user information, 275setting authentication mode, 276

Fibre Channel topologyoverview, 239

finding WWNAIX, 246HP-UX, 246IRIX, 246Oracle Solaris, 246Sequent, 246Windows, 245

fixed-sized provisioningoverview, 16

FMC, 39, 42

Gguidelines, 39

HHigh Availability, 60, 104host, 289host authentication

disabling in a host group, 268enabling in a host group, 268

host bus adapterschanging HBA iSCSI name, 280changing WWNs, 279deleting from host group, 284

host group, 253, 254host group 0, 259

initializing, 284

host groups, 232adding, 288authentication, 263changing host mode, 281changing name, 281creating, 248deleting, 286deleting host bus adapters, 284

host mode optionslisted and defined, 242

host modeslisted and defined, 241

hosts, 283, 291authentication, 263changing host user information, 270configuring, 240configuring workflow, 241deleting host user information, 271managing, 279registering host group user information, 272registering host user information, 269registering in host group, 248

HPE XP7 Gen2 FMD Compression Estimator tool(xpfmc_estimator), 41

IiSCSI, 232, 278

changing, 280iSCSI target, 250, 254, 255, 286, 289, 291, 613iSCSI target properties, 617iSCSI Targets, 610

changing iSCSI target setting, 282changing name, 282

iSCSI targets, 283, 604

LLDEV, 44, 91LDEVs

blocking, 81, 82changing settings, 79confirming SSID, 78deleting (converting to free space), 84editing name, 84editing SSID, 79formatting, 85, 86, 88formatting in a parity group, 89removing from registering task, 80restoring if blocked, 82, 83

LDEVs of ALU attribution, 297LDEVs of ALUs or SLU attribution, 299leap year, 226logical units, 232logical volumes

managing, 232workflow for managing, 235

login iSCSI names, 287LU paths, 232, 250, 253, 254, 255

configuration workflow, 250configuring, 250

633

Page 634: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

configuring on Fibre Channel, 232deleting, 256managing, 256rules, restrictions, and guidelines, 234viewing settings, 258

LUNdefined, 232

LUN Manager Function, 232LUN security

enabling on ports, 260example of disabling, 259example of enabling, 259settings for authentication of hosts, 263settings for authentication of ports, 263

LUN security on ports, 259disabling, 261

Mmanagement, 36management area capacity

open-systems volume, 70managing

hosts, 279virtualized resources, 34

managing logical volumesrules, restrictions, and guidelines, 234

mapped capacity, 146meta_resource, 51mode setting, 91monitoring, 45monitoring and tier relocation settings, 161monitoring capacity, 186mutual authentication, 262

ports, 268, 272

NNetwork, 278Network configuration for iSCSI, 278nicknames

changing, 279, 280

Ooperating system and file system capacity, 99Overview for iSCSI, 278

Ppair operations

for virtual storage machine pairs, 35parity group, 44, 46parity groups

configuring volumes, 71performance

optimizing by setting data transfer speed for a FibreChannel port, 235

Performance Monitorautomatic starting considerations, 225

point-to-point topology, 239pool, 44, 45, 46, 219, 222pool capacity

decreasing, 204increasing, 199stop decreasing, 205

pool informationviewing, 194

pool namechanging, 200

pool subscription limitchanging, 190

pool thresholdchanging, 189

pool-VOLsrequirements, 95

pools, 26creating, 168deleting, 206managing, 194recovering, 201requirements, 94

portsmutual authentication, 268rules, restrictions, and guidelines, 234

provisioningcustom-sized, 17fixed-sized, 16

provisioning key terms, 15provisioning operations

for virtual storage machine resources, 35purchasing, 39

QQuick Format function, 86

RRAID levels

boundary values, 70Real Time Smart Tier, 30, 93, 150, 151, 154, 166, 173,

176, 365reclaiming pages in a V-VOL, 211registering in iSCSI target, 291regulatory information, 625

Turkey RoHS material content declaration, 626Ukraine RoHS material content declaration, 626

related documentation, 310remote support, 311Removing, 283Removing CHAP users, 295Removing target CHAP users, 296requirements, 32

shared memory, 32reserved capacity, 146reserving volumes with access attributes, 230Resource Group, 339resource groups, 322

adding resources to, 53assignments, 51creating, 53example not sharing a port, 50example sharing a port, 49

634 Index

Page 635: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

license requirements, 52meta_resource, 51overview, 48removing resources from, 54resource lock, 51rules, restrictions, and guidelines, 52strategies, 48system configuration, 48user groups, 51

resource lock, 51retention term

changing access attributes, 228

SS-VOL disable attribute, 229saving rate, 41secret

in CHAP authentication, 263selected, 254Setting T10 PI mode to the port, 290settings, 36shared memory

requirements, 32SIM reference codes

listed, 191SIMs

completing automatically, 193completing manually, 194overview, 191

slot capacity, 71software operations

for virtual storage machine resources, 36SSID

confirming, 78editing, 79requirements, 67

statuses, 622storage machines

managing virtualized resources, 34storing data, 26subscription limit of a pool

changing, 190support

Hewlett Packard Enterprise, 310Support Center, 309System Area, 98system requirements for provisioning, 31

Ttest, 622thin provisioning

configuring, 93example, 25overview, 93work flow, 25workflow, 108

thin provisioning requirements, 93THP V-VOL

data direct mappingattribute, 21

full allocation, 213THP V-VOL requirements, 97tier capacity

reserving, 137reserving example, 138

tier relocationrules, restrictions, and guidelines, 116

tier relocation settings, 161tiering

workflow, 152tiering policy, 135

changing execution modes example, 141notes on using, 139overview, 132relationship with graphs, 136relationship with tiers, 135reserving tier capacity, 137setting on a V-VOL, 135

tool, 41topology, 239

example of FC-AL and point-to-point, 240troubleshooting, 300troubleshooting provisioning while using RAID Manager,

307Turkey RoHS material content declaration, 626

UUkraine RoHS material content declaration, 626unbind SLUs window, 404unbinding LDEVs of SLUs attribution, 299updates

accessing, 310used capacity, 146

viewing, 196used capacity of pools, 196used pool capacity

viewing, 195user authentication, 262UUID

clearing settings, 257setting, 251

VV-VOL page reservation requirement, 99V-VOLs

changing name, 209creatingReal Time Smart Tier, 181deleting, 214increasing capacity, 208managing, 194releasing pages, 211requirements for increasing capacity, 97stop releasing pages, 212

VASA integrated storage systems, 297Viewing formatted pool capacity, 197, 215, 216, 217Viewing rebalancing progress, 198Virtual LUN

size calculations, 67specifications, 66

635

Page 636: XP7 Provisioning for Open Systems User Guide - Apache …h20628.€¦ ·  · 2017-10-13Custom-sized provisioning ... Thin Provisioning ... Guide) • Virtualstorage:HighAvailability

virtual storage machine pairspair operations for, 35

virtual storage machine resourcesprovisioning operations for, 35

virtual storage machinesabout, 34managing resources, 34pair operations, 35resource provisioning operations for, 35software operations for virtualized resources, 36

virtualization, 36virtualized resources

about, 34

Wwarranty information, 625

HPE Enterprise servers, 625HPE Networking products, 625HPE ProLiant and x86 Servers and Options, 625HPE Storage products, 625

websites, 311product manuals, 311

World Wide Name, 245WWN, 245

changing, 279deleting from WWN table, 285deleting old WWNs, 285finding on AIX, IRIX, or Sequent, 246finding on different operating systems, 245finding on Oracle Solaris, 246finding on Windows, 245

Zzero pages

reclaiming, 209Zero Read Cap mode, 494

636 Index